← Back to Home

My Musings While Retired

The Author

Reading Progress

0 of 0 chapters
0% complete

Bookmarks

Part I: The Origins

Geo Chronology of Our World

GEO-CHRONOLOGY OF OUR WORLD

INTRODUCTION

Geo-chronology is the geological timeline of the events that have shaped our planet and the occurrences which have taken place below and on its surface.

It is the time needed for Africa and South America to separate and drift apart thousands of kilometres at the rate of a few centimetres a year. It is also the time it takes for a fish to turn into a dinosaur and, much more. In other words, it is time expressed in eons rather than centuries.

This narrative is about this. It is also about the utterly incomprehensible forces at play to, for example, cause continents to separate and drift apart or for volcanoes to erupt.

TIMELINE

About 4,600 million years ago-(mya)-, Earth was born through ‘accretion’-(accumulation)- of cosmic dust and particles from the nebulae-(clouds) in the solar system. At this stage it is a huge fireball constantly bombarded by comets and meteors.

Proto-Earth cooled and solidified. Around 4,400 mya a chancy powerful impact from a celestial body, hurled a chunk of terrestrial material into orbit. It has since become Earth’s only satellite: the Moon. At about the same time, condensation of atmospheric water vapour-(hereinafter) initiated the formation 0f oceans. Finally, the emission of gases from active volcanoes helped create an atmosphere consisting of methane, ammonia, carbon dioxide and water vapour; but no life-sustaining oxygen.

According to Britannica, the onset of formation of oxygen could conceivably have resulted from the action of ultraviolet rays from the sun on water vapour, separating its two constituents: hydrogen and oxygen. More commonly acknowledged, is the photosynthetic activity of plants, by which carbon dioxide is absorbed and replaced with oxygen. As the Globe became greener photosynthesis became the prominent generator of oxygen. It took a couple of hundred million years for oxygen to reach life-sustaining levels.

All along the history of its timeline, Earth’s land masses grouped themselves into supercontinents, then split again into separate continents. ‘Pangea’ is the last such supercontinent. It started to break up into the present continents 200 mya.

Geologists, archaeologists, and other scientists have agreed the divide Earth’s timeline from 4,000 mya to present into aeons and eras. I have decided the, in between, happenings and occurrences easier to comprehend in tabular forms which follow.

Table-1 Geological Timeline From 4,000 mya till present

4,000 to 2,500 mya (Archean Eon) 2,500 to 542 mya (Proterozoic Eon) 542 mya to present. (Phanerozoic Eon)
-*Large areas of Earth covered with water. Formation of oceans ended. -*Onset of life in the form of single cell bacteria. (A cell is the building block of Life). -*Beginning of photosynthesis. Enrichment of the atmosphere with oxygen proceeds. -*Advent of multicell organisms. (all plants and animals are multicell organisms). -*The earliest jellyfish, worms and other soft bodied organisms. -*All land is a single continental mass surrounding the south pole. -*On four occasions, each of 10 million years duration, icing befell the Planet. Temp:-50 deg C. -*See table-2 below

Table-2 From 542 mya to present. (Phanerozoic Eon)

541 to 252 mya. (Paleozoic Era) 252 to 66 mya. (Mesozoic Era) 66 mya to present. (Cenozoic Era)
-*First fish. -*First land plants. -*First mass extinction. -*First forests. -* Amphibians-(frogs and related) evolve. -*Second mass extinction. -*Earliest reptiles. -*Third mass extinction. -*Atmospheric oxygen attains present day concentration. -*Dinosaurs evolve. -*Break up of the supercontinent Pangea and beginnings of present continents. -*Fourth mass extinction. -*Fifth mass extinction: non-avian (bird like) dinosaurs disappear. -*Mammals evolve. -*Homo and Ape genii diverge. -*Use of first tools by Homo species. -*Homo habilis evolves. -*Homo erectus evolves. -*Homo Neanderthal evolves. -*Homo sapiens evolves.

EARTH LAYERS

In the process of solidifying, tEarth’s constituent material arranged themselves such that the heavier ones agglomerated near the centre and the rest around it with the lightest rising toward its periphery. This ordering is shown against, and briefly describer under:

The centre of Earth is a ball of fire of 2,414 kms in diameter. Its temperature is estimated at 4 to 5000 deg C; not far from that on the surface of the Sun. It is made up of iron and nickel. Although its temperature is hotter than the melting points of the two metals, the pressure of its surrounding is immense enough to keep it in a solid state.

Similarly, the outer core is made up of iron and nickel also at around 4 to 5,000 deg C. But the metals are in the molten state, given the lesser pressure it is subjected to by the layers surrounding it. It is 2,200 kms thick. The churning movement inside this outer core gives rise to Earth’s all-important magnetic field.

The third layer is the mantle made up of more than one kind of rocks. It extends for nearly 3,000 kms from the top of the outer core to the bottom of the next layer. Temperature along its thickness, naturally, decreases upwards from 4,000 to 700 deg C.

Topmost is the crust made up of “silica-rich rocks” below land masses and oceans. The crust thickness averages 70 kms.

PLATE TECTONICS

The crust and the top layer of the mantle up to a depth of about 100 kms, is called the ‘lithosphere’. Rather than being a continuous surface, it is, instead “broken up into seven very large continental and ocean-sized plates”. They are not stationary. On the contrary, they are constantly moving relative to one another, at 5 to 10 cm per annum, ‘floating’ on the semi-solid part of the mantle (image). These plates are qualified of ‘tectonic’-(synonyms of this adjective include monumental and momentous). So, when the edges of two plates crash into-(subduct)-or rub against, each other -(image)-, the results can be devastating earthquakes, tsunamis, erupting volcanoes and even, at the limit, raising mountains.

These plates carry the continents and the oceans of the World which, in the words of Britannica, “drift passively with them”. Thus, over the eons since the advent of Earth their mobility has been the cause of “significant changes in Earth’s geography”. Clearly, plate tectonics is an integral part of the formation of the supercontinents, already mentioned, and their subsequent break-up.

We are informed by Britannica that the forces which impel the plates are “as yet not fully understood”. But,at least partly, it is the “constant heating and cooling cycle in the mantle” that does it, according to the ‘California Academy of Science’.

C’MON. SURELY ALL THIS IS NOTHING BUT A FAIRY TALE.

There can be no question that, as described hereinbefore, the subject matter of this narrative is way beyond imagination and comprehension. Yet competent and very serious geologists, archaeologists, evolution biologists and others, are unequivocal about the when(s) and the how(s) of events and happenings affecting our planet. In what follows, I scratch the surface of what these scientists rely on.

We begin with the fossils. As explained by Britannica a fossil is a “…remnant, impression, or trace of an animal or plant of a past geologic age that has been preserved in Earth’s crust”.

Then there is the magic of the genetic information-(DNA) still carried in the remains of every fossilized organism.

And, as to when events have occurred and how long they have endured, suffices, for our purpose, to know that scientists have developed a variety of techniques to help them. One of these depends on the chemical, radioactivity and other properties of rocks and minerals. Armed with these data they can determine the geological times, ages and durations.

Obviously, no one has ever travelled the depths of the Planet. Nor is anyone likely to do so, no matter how far in the future. I note, in this context, that 1.2 kms is the maximum depth, in a 70 kms thick crust, so far achieved with a man-made pit. This being so, how can scientists ascertain the constituents, temperatures etc. of Earth’s layers? They can do so, among others, by studying the shock and sound waves emitted during earthquakes and picked up by seismometers. Erupting volcanoes yield valuable information about the material deep inside the Planet. And more.

Early in the last century a German scientist, Alfred Wegener (1880-1930) was the first to theorise on the separation and drifting apart of land masses, from supercontinents like Pangea mentioned hereinbefore (image).

Briefly, his research revealed fossils of plants and animals suited for a given habitat, say Africa, in an environmentally different one, say South America.

He has also noted that, as stated by National Geographic, “The east coast of South America and the west coast of Africa seem to fit together like pieces of a jigsaw puzzle, and…their rock layers “fit” just as clearly…. [And the] Appalachian Mountains of the eastern United States, for instance, were geologically related to the Caledonian Mountains of Scotland”. Wegener’s theory of continental drift remained iffy till the discovery of the plate tectonics phenomenon, later in the century, after Wegener’s death.

Story of the World 1

THE STORY OF THE WORLD

PART-1: FROM EARTH’S INCEPTION TO HOMO SAPIENS

Chapter illustration

JUNE 2017

CHRONOLOGY

4,600,000,000 ya: The origin of the Earth. 3,800,000,000 ya: First life arises. 2,400,000,000 ya: Start of first ice age. 2,100,000,000 ya: End of first ice age. 850,000,000 ya: Start of second ice age. 635,000,000 ya: End of second ice age. 530,000,000 ya: The first fish. 475,000,000 ya: First land plants. 460,000,000 ya: Start of third ice age 440,000,000 ya: First mass extinction. 420,000,000 ya: End of third ice age. 385,000,000 ya: First forests. 370,000,000 ya: First amphibians emerge. 360,000,000 ya: Start of fourth ice age. 360,000,000 ya: Second mass extinction. 320,000,000 ya: The earliest reptiles. 300,000,000 ya: Third mass extinction. 260,000,000 ya: End of fourth ice age. 245,000,000 ya: Dinosaurs evolve. 200,000,000 ya: Beginning of formation of continents. 200,000,000 ya: Fourth mass extinction. 65,000,000 ya: Fifth mass extinction. 65,000,000 ya: Dinosaurs on their way to oblivion. 8,500,000 ya: Hominines (1) separate from apes linages. 7,000,000 ya: The oldest known Hominine, ‘Toumai’, evolves. 3,500,000 ya: Hominines adopt omnivorous diet. 3,300,000 ya: First tools. 3,200,000 ya: Hominine ‘Lucy’ evolves. 2,600,000 ya: Start of fifth ice age. 2,400,000 ya: Homo (2) habilis evolves. 2,000,000 ya: First Homo migration from Africa to Eurasia. 1,900,000 ya: Homo erectus evolves. 500,000 ya: Neanderthal man evolves in Europe and ME. 300,000 ya: Daily use of fire.

(1)Hominine: part ape part man. (2)Homo: manlike

INTRODUCTION

This project is an account of what took place in, on and around our habitat, Earth, from its inception to the appearance of our species: Homo sapiens or between 4,600,000 and 200 millennia ago respectively. Thus, for more than 99 percent of its existence the planet was, in a way, dedicated to preparing for our arrival. During that gigantic timespan, it first evolved physically i.e forming rock, soil, seas rivers, mountains and the rest; and then in due course, Mother Nature evolved one form of ‘Life’ after another beginning with microscopic organisms followed by plants and animals .

An interesting visual analogy in this context is given by Paul D. Taylor of the London’s ‘Natural History Museum’ in a 2009 book: ‘Extinction in the History of life’. He writes that if Earth’s total existence to date is a 24-hr clock then “we humans arose only a few tens of seconds before midnight”.

Chapter illustration

This project, too, is about how Nature initiated and transformed life forms throughout the millennia up to the emergence of Homo sapiens. But first, what is Life? For our purpose here, it is “the condition that distinguishes animals and plants from inorganic matter, including the capacity for growth, reproduction, functional activity, and continual change preceding death” . Indeed, it is organic in all its physical forms, meaning that the atoms and molecules of the chemical element, carbon are its essential building blocks.

Carbon is also the coal which drives factories and power plants. It is an essential component of crude oil and natural gas, the other sources of world energy. And, it is the graphite core in every pencil and the diamonds adorning jewelry (see Appendix)

As of today no one has been able to understand the secret of how carbon and other chemicals, none of which meeting any of the prerequisites for Life in the preceding definition, came together to create it? Unless of course, one is satisfied with the philosophical and spiritual proposals.

With no pretense at nibbling on these, this project is an account based on scientific givens, of how our world started and progressed up to our times 200,000 years ago.

EARTH: FIREBALL AND SNOWBALL

Earth began its existence 4.6 bya as a cloud of hydrogen and helium, the two components of the sun, more often than not bombarded with asteroids, meteors and other celestial objects. In short it had a hellish, hot and chaotic birth.

By 3.8 bya it had cooled and solidified enough to evolve an atmosphere composed of methane, ammonia, and huge amounts of carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapour. But no vital oxygen yet. It, however, was good enough for primitive life in the form of micro-organisms, i.e bacteria, microbes and the like to emerge.Ultimately, between 2.5 and 1.8 bya, this atmosphere became gradually enriched with oxygen thanks to the process of photosynthesis of an emerging and expanding plant environment.

Further, the cooling process led to the formation of huge bodies of water, later the oceans of the world, by virtue of the condensation of the massive water vapour clouds. On the other hand, the solidification phase caused the emergence of the super continent, Pangea, which from about 200 mya, broke into landmasses which, by virtue of the ‘Continental Drift’ phenomena, sailed away from one another to form the continents we know today. Incidentally, the continents are still in movement toward or away from one another as the case may be.

Chapter illustration

Soil, without which “we would certainly be dead” in the words of ‘BBC Nature’ is a mixture of mineral and organic matter. The mineral part came from the meteorites which smashed into young Earth as it was taking shape. Subsequently water, which formed as the planet cooled, weathered and eroded the celestial rocks into sand like mineral rich material. As for the organic component, it was contributed by the aquatic plant, lichen (see image),when 700 mya it started to colonize its immediate shoreline. With time, soil was further enriched from the “microbial decomposition of plant and animal substances”. Since the late 18th century, this vital substance is known as humus consisting of as much as 60 percent carbon and without which nothing grows.

Chapter illustration

Similarly to plants, animal forms of life also began in aquatic surroundings; the earliest fish evolving 530 mya. Thanks to Evolution, the first amphibians emerged about 375 mya and 320 mya came the time of the first reptiles which included the forebears of today’s turtles, lizards, snakes and crocodiles and believe it or not: birds.

Let us take a moment, here, to consider the huge implications in the transformation from life in water to that on land. First, creatures are weightless in rivers, lakes and seas, those on land, by contrast, are subjected to the full effect of Earth’s gravity. In consequence, they need to develop muscles and limbs to carry their weight and move them about in their new environment. Second, Fish and similar animals breathe through gills; but terrestrial animals, in order to do so, need a pulmonary system. Third, the urinary tracts of water dwelling creatures

are devoid of kidneys whereas they are crucial on land. Hence, they too, need to evolve. Obviously, it takes time for the new organs to evolve and function fully. Plenty of time in fact, like a few million years. So how did the concerned animal life forms manage the transition in the meantime? Well that is another story.

Dinosaurs, also classified as reptiles, started to show up 245 mya. From this original appearance to their extinction 65 mya, or for 180,000,000 years, they reigned supreme over almost all parts of Pangea (above). Dinosaurs were not a single species; rather more like a thousand lineages. They included the largest animals ever and small ones, the size of today’s chicken. There were those which crawled and others which walked on two hind legs or on all four and those which could fly bird like. Some were herbivorous, while others ate meat.

Chapter illustration

But once they had been wiped out a boom in new large animals occurred including the arrival of man’s direct forebear: the Great Apes 240 mya. Some 8.5 mya two lines emerged the first leading towards Homo sapiens (us) and the other toward today’s chimpanzees.

Climate wise, Earth has gone through four glaciation periods, or ice ages between 2.4 bya and 260 mya, during which ice sheets formed and spread widely over the globe and, naturally enough, sea and ocean levels dropped by as much as one hundred metres. A fifth ice age kicked off around 2.6 mya and technically speaking is still lingering on as evidenced by ice in the poles and in Greenland. Even so, however, Earth is considered to be presently in an interglacial phase.

To this day, scientist are not absolutely certain as to the causes of ice ages. They have, nonetheless, speculated that they resulted from the extensive photosynthesis of expanding land plants, lessening the amount of CO2 in the atmosphere thus, weakening the beneficial global warming. More. Gigantic quantities of ash spewed out by the eruptions of super volcanoes were carried around by air streams and thickly blanketed the planet, necessarily and substantially blocking the warmth giving sun radiations from reaching its surface. So much so that temperatures dropped drastically and surface water froze. A third cause advanced by scientists is the change in the orbit of earth around the sun.

Even worse were of mass extinctions of all forms of life, periodically occurring per chronology above. Each time a significant percentage of existing life disappeared, at times as much as 90 percent. The most famous, though not the most severe, was the one that did away with dinosaurs 65 mya.

The cataclysms causing these mass disappearances included impacts from large celestial bodies and, once again powerful volcano eruptions. In either case massive amounts of debris and dust or ash blocked sunlight and heat causing the dying off of plants and necessarily of creatures feeding on them.

Remarkably, however, in the wake of each extinction, enough forms of life remained to continue their mutational and evolutionary transformations. In the words of National Geographic magazine: “As new species evolve to fit ever changing ecological niches, older species fade away” . Stated differently: from 3.8 bya onwards, all forms of life which have ever existed on Earth came from the same and only grandparent, despite the five mass extinctions that did away with as much as 90 percent of all living matter. As per entry in the Encyclopedia Britannica: “The evidence is overwhelming that all life on Earth has evolved from common ancestors in an unbroken chain since its origin… All [living forms] have persisted since roughly 3.5 billion years ago… Life ultimately is a material process that arose from a nonliving material [carbon and water] system spontaneously”.

NOT QUITE US,YET.

‘Toumai’, whose skeleton was discovered in Chad in 2001, had lived 7 mya. He became de facto the oldest hominine (ape/man), displacing ‘Lucy’ excavated in Ethiopia in 1974 at 3 million years of age. Following examination of his remains, paleontologists established that, although Toumai still climbed trees ape like, if only to evade predators, he nevertheless spent time on the ground standing up and walking on two legs human like. He was followed, through the millennia, by a great number of hominines and Homo (man like)species.

Indeed, since the 1990s, according to Le Monde daily’s 2017 special edition magazine, more and more hominine and Homo species have been discovered. So much so, that scientists were led to conclude that the history of humans, like that of animals, is comparable to the many branches of a single tree with each one corresponding to a species.

Scientists have also concluded that the onset of animal form of life was in Africa. Some Homo genera, however, started moving out toward Eurasia 2mya when, let us recall, all continents still formed one landmass. Of them all, only ours, Homo sapiens, has survived and indeed flourished; all the rest have disappeared at one time or another. The last species to go was the Homo Neanderthal (image), 30,000 years ago. They lived in Europe, where remains were dug up at various locations, starting from the mid-19th century, most notably in the Neandertal region of Germany in 1856, hence the name.

Chapter illustration

With the addition of meat 3.5 mya to their hitherto herbivorous diets, and lacking the claws and fangs of carnivorous animals, hominines needed help to separate flesh from bones and cutting it into manageable pieces. Thus the first tools were invented, and in time added to and diversified in their usage. The discovery of fire followed by its adoption and adaptation for daily use 300,000 ya made meat eating easier and no doubt tastier, in addition to its other benefits: warmth and light.

Some 2.4 mya Homo habilis, or the handyman, evolved. He was identified so because of his tool making abilities. He was followed 1.9 mya by Homo erectus, the first to truly exhibit human gait.

What differentiate hominines (ape/man) from Homo genus (man like)? Briefly, according to New Scientist , the brain volumes were 400- 500 cm3 for the former against 600 to 1,000 cm3 for the latter ; and hominine faces protrude ape like whereas Homo’s are less so. As succinctly stated by Encyclopedia Britannica : “Homo, genus [is] characterized by a relatively large cranial capacity, limb structure adapted to a habitual erect posture and a bipedal gait, well-developed and fully opposable thumbs, hands capable of power and precision grips, and the ability to make standardized precision tools, using one tool to make another”.

Chapter illustration

REAL OR FICTION?

This whole saga is bewildering and incomprehensible. It, surely, belongs to the realm of science fiction rather than to reality.

That all events shaping our world physically, then initiating and transforming all forms of Life, depended solely on accidents and coincidences, from 4.6 bya onward, is truly flabbergasting.

That all plants, animals and humans share the same ancestor; that all, regardless of shape, size, colour etc, owe their existence to carbon and other chemical elements which happened to be present at the right time; that they all depend on food to survive and reproduction in their image to continue; and when they finally die, they decompose in the same manner and what remains enrich the soil in which they lie; is equally mind boggling.

Much, much more can be written on the wonders of it all, but let’s leave at that for the time being.

APPENDIX COAL, OIL, AND DIAMOND

It took 60,000,000 years between 359 and 299 mya for coal to morph from the decay and burial of vegetation, in conditions of high pressure and temperature, most notably in Europe, North America and Asia where the lush an dense forests existed.

Chapter illustration

ad jaw) and braincase (with a small brain, usually less than 500 cubic As for crude oil and natural gas, they result from basically the same process of decaying organic organisms. This time, though, they consist of plankton at the bottom of warm, shallow seas which existed between 541 and 66 mya, again in conditions of intense heat and pressure .

-- about 1/3 the size of a modern human brain), and long, strong arms with curved fingers adapted for climbing trees. They also had small canine teeth like all other early humans, and Diamond, to the contrary, crystallized from carbon atoms, at depths of 150 to 200 kms below ground, under tremendous pressure and the intense temperature, 2 to 3 billion years ago while earth was young and in the process of forming itself. In due course, extremely powerful and violent volcanic eruptions brought up to the surface diamond bearing rock which settled as mounds called Kimberlites, which became and continue to be, virtually, the exclusive sources of mined diamond in South Africa and elsewhere.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Story of the World 2

THE STORY OF THE WORLD

PART-2:

SIXTY FIVE THOUSAND YEARS IN THE LIFE OF OUR ANCESTORS

Chapter illustration

SEPTEMBER 2017

REFERENCES

-‘Guns, Germs and Steel’ the 1997 book by ecologist, geographer, biologist, anthropologist, author and Professor of geography at the University of California, Jared Diamond (DOB: 1937)

-‘Sapiens’, the 2014 book by historian and Professor of history at the Hebrew University, Yuval Noah Harari (DOB: 1976)

- ‘L’Histoire de l’Homme’,the very timely 2017 special edition of Le Monde daily. The contributors are acknowledged, where appropriate, in the body of the text.

-‘When did the Human Mind Evolve to what it is Today?’, smithsonian. com, dated June 25th , 2012.

-‘What Happened in the Origin of Human Consciousness?’ dated January 22nd, 2004 by the paleoanthropologist and curator emeritus, American Museum of Natural History, Ian Tattersall (DOB 1945).

-‘Origins of Consciousness’ published by the Division of Anthropology, American Museum of Natural History. Copyright 2004 Wiley-Liss, Inc.

-‘If Language is a Complex Biological Adaptation, then how did it Start?’, part of a senior seminar at Earlham College, December 04th , 2004.

-‘Timeline: Human Evolution’, New Scientist, September 04th, 2006.

And, as usual, I have often consulted the venerable Encyclopedia Britannica, and made use of Wikipedia.

LET’S GET STARTED

In part-1 of this project we have seen how Earth came into being 4,600,000,000 ya, and the forms of life which evolved on it up to and including several species of the Homo genera, each being a separate branch of the overall evolutionary tree. We have ended it short of the first appearance of our own species about 200 to 195,000 ya.

For the first 130,000 years or so of existence in Africa, our lifestyle was no different from that of other Homo species, relying on foraging for food, hunting with primitive tools and acting, similarly to other organisms, in accordance with the instincts implanted by the millions of years of genetic evolution.

This part-2 is an account of the last 65,000 years of the period historian call Prehistory. In other words, it spans the immensely fateful stretch from 70,000 to 5,000 ya. The former date coincides with the beginning of the ‘Cognitive Revolution’ which gave rise to the mind and caused the metamorphosis of Sapiens into Humans. It was followed 60,000 years later by the onset of the ‘Agricultural Revolution’ which ushered in the advent of Civilization. As for the latter date, it is that of the invention of writing, first in Sumer, Mesopotamia then a little later in Pharaonic Egypt, the first organized human civilizations/ societies ever.

In what follows, we first explore the cognitive ‘Great Leap’ which transformed our forebears from instinct driven sapiens to speaking, thinking, remembering and foreseeing humans. We follow them out of Africa and contemplate their interactions, as superior beings, with whoever and whichever crossed their path. And as they took up a sedentary lifestyle, henceforth in control of plants and animals, we look at their spiritual and socio-political dispositions. Lastly, we describe the invention of writing which completed the transformation which, strictly, began, a few million years ago with the earliest Homo genera.

GREAT LEAP FORWARD

Between 70 and 30,000 ya mental changes began to happen, evidently at a much faster pace than is usual for natural evolution, transforming instinct driven Homo sapiens into communicating humans able to learn, remember and contemplate the future. In short, they evolved a mind which makes them conscious of themselves and of their surroundings, thanks to a developed brain activated by billions of electric charges or neurons and, henceforth, in charge of its owner’s behaviour, emotions and the rest. This is the Cognitive Revolution which relegates Darwinian evolution to the back seat and allows the man-made version to accelerate forward.

More specifically, the new faculties translate into the exchange among individuals of large amounts of information not only about their physical surroundings but also about an imaginary world that does not exist in reality. Furthermore, they enable the remembrance of yesterdays and, more importantly, the expectation of the morrows and of the need to be prepared for them. Thus, from then on sapiens are able to plan their future actions and closely cooperate among themselves, if only, at the beginning, in organizing hunts and elaborating tactics in order to hunt and kill large animals against which, singly, they stood absolutely no chance of winning.

No one knows the secret of what caused that leap, or why and when exactly all this happened to sapiens exclusively, leaving out all other species. According to Ian Tattersall: across the millions of years of evolution : “...you've [started with] a fish brain,[then layered over it] a reptile brain, a primitive mammal brain, and primate and ape brains inside your head. We don't know exactly how each of these ingredients contributes to the functioning of the human brain, nor to what we subjectively experience as consciousness. But we're unique only because of all those layers supporting consciousness from beneath”.

In all this, language is vital. How did it come about? Nobody is certain. Indeed, it has been one of the great mysteries of science. But all scientists agree that language is an evolutionary process like walking. They are also unanimous that mental and physical changes were either the precursors or the consequences of language. To Mr Tattersall the evolution of language came as a result of “a lucky confluence with a lot of implications”. It needed a certain structure “of the upper vocal tract and upper airway in order to produce articulate language”, notably the lowering of the larynx and brain power capable of “symbolic thought”.

Whatever, by 30,000 ya, the human mind had evolved in parallel with genetic evolution. But whereas with the latter biological changes occur at the geological speed of multi millennia, the former, in contrast, creates, abandons and replaces ideas, ideologies, civilizations and cultures by leaps and bounds, measured by the decade and the century. Thus, from 10,000 ya till present, a blink of the eye on the geological scale, humanity has gone from the Agricultural Revolution, to the invention of writing, and the Scientific, Industrial and Information Revolutions. During that same span of time many civilizations and cultures have come and while some have endured others have vanished.

Until the arrival of cognizance, all organisms including sapiens lived, strictly, in the physical world. They recognized and were acquainted only with objects and occurrences in their environment. They reacted to them instinctively as programmed by Mother Nature. For example a deer, by instinct, ran away when it spotted a lion. In other words they had no imagination, perhaps a yesterday but certainly not a tomorrow. Reality to them was physical; it could be seen, heard and touched.

But the mind changed all that. Henceforth, next to these physical realities, imaginary and fictitious ones were invented to guide, control, discipline and exploit evolving societies. Further, the imagined realities were never sacrosanct: the truths and beliefs of today are not necessarily valid tomorrow. As stated by Professor Harari: “ever since the Cognitive Revolution, Sapiens have thus been living in a dual reality. On the one hand, the [physical one] of rivers, trees and lions; on the other hand, the imagined reality of gods, nations and corporations. As time went by, the imagined reality became ever more powerful, so that today the very survival of rivers, trees and lions depends on the grace of imagined entities such as the United States and Google”.

The author illustrates all this with two examples. The first is about the imagined belief in the celibacy of Catholic priests and Popes. Clearly, this practice is contrary to the dictates of Evolution. Even so it has been strictly adhered to, generation after generation, for two millennia, not “by passing of a celibacy gene from one pope to the next, but by passing on the stories of the New Testament and of the Catholic canon law” .

The second concerns the French Revolution of 1789. Prior to it, virtually all Frenchmen strongly believed in the fictions of the divine rights of Louis XVI, the privileges of the aristocrats, elites, and the Church; all because of some stories told to them by those with wealth and power. Frenchmen, nonetheless, changed their mind, overnight, in 1789 because of new stories being told. Suddenly, they became fervent believers in the new fictions of republicanism and human rights and went as far as to guillotine the king and his queen sniggering at the former’s, hitherto, close relationship with God. More. A few years later Napoleon came with the fiction of empire and his role as emperor. Once again, the French changed their mind, turning their backs to the truths of yesterday and enthusiastically embracing the new regime and accepting to die, in droves, fighting for it.

Incidentally, Napoleon relied heavily on the indoctrination of his compatriots with the help of propaganda, a main tool for the fabrication of myths including fairy tales about himself (image) and his regime. He is reported to have stated “I would not have lasted more than three months” had he not been able to control and shape information to his advantage. Since then, of course, propaganda has been the creator of mythical stories par excellence. It has variously contributed to racism, brutality, religious bigotry and what have you.

Chapter illustration

Now back to those early cognizant humans. Were they morally good or bad? Well, according to English philosopher Thomas Hobbes (1588- 1679), their life was “poore, nasty, brutish and short”. Not so, wrote French luminary Jean Jacques Rousseau ( 1712-1778): these were good people living in harmony with Nature. He eulogized them as being free of the mischiefs and moral weaknesses of later, civilized, humans. But, perhaps the right answer comes from Sophie A. de Beaune in her contribution to ‘L’Histoire de L’homme’. She premises that they were neither good nor bad given they had not yet been subjected to the later social/religious rules of morality and behaviour. In other words Evolution is not concerned with evolving rules of ethics etc.

Spiritually, nevertheless, they started off as animistic hunter-gatherers. As such, they took into account the interests of the other inhabitants of their region, including animals, plants and even inanimate objects such as rock and rivers. By no means they considered themselves more deserving than the others. There was no hierarchy. In other words they understood the needs of the animals they hunted as well as of those being themselves hunted by. They were careful not to offend a tree, say, lest it avenged itself etc. “The fact that man hunted sheep did not make sheep inferior to man’, just as the fact that tigers hunted man did not make man inferior to tigers” , in the words of Professor Harari.

LEAVING AFRICA

As we have seen in part-1, the first Homo species migrated out of Africa some 2 mya, driven by their instinctive curiosity to discover what is beyond their habitat and find new fauna and flora for their hunting-gathering way of life.

Much, much later came the turn of Homo sapiens. According to Professor Jean-Paul Demoule, writing in ‘L’Histoire de L’homme’, our species began leaving East Africa, almost from its first evolution some 200,000 ya, crossing the Bab el Mendeb Strait (image)into the Arabian Peninsula and from there spreading, over tens of millennia, into west and east Asia and Europe. More, in his estimation, migration must have also happened across the Strait of Gibraltar much narrower than now, during glacial periods, from North Africa to Europe.

Chapter illustration

In Asia and Europe, some 50 to 40,000 ya humans coexisted for a while with Homo-Neanderthals whose forebears emigrated there, from Africa, 400 to 500,000 ya. They differed from the newcomers in having wider and stronger torsos, shorter forearms and legs, a more ape-like protruding facial features and ,unexpectedly, larger brains. Never-theless, they were similar enough for a limited amount of interbreeding to take place between them. So much so, that scientists have deduced that up to two percent of the DNA of modern Asians and Europeans is of Neanderthal origin. Notwithstanding all these differences and similarities, Neanderthals were no match to the cognizant, more capable and sophisticated Sapiens with their more advanced tools and weapons either as food acquirers or as fighters.

Chapter illustration

Indeed, those new arrivals were adept at making not only stone tools but also from animal bones and antlers. They included fish hooks and needles with eyes. They were equally capable at confecting sophisticated weapons such as spear-throwers (image) and bows and arrows. Gone were the days of the all- purpose stone tool/arm. With these, sapiens became deadly hunters equally of competing Neanderthals and of large animals. We shall see later what happened to the latter. But as for the Neanderthals, not one survived anywhere on the planet, the onslaught of sapiens. The last one expired 30,000 ya.

Emblematic of the Neanderthal-killers is the Cro-Magnon man, so called because of the name of the location where his cave was discovered in southwestern France in 1868. He was comparable to modern man in size, face features and had a brain cavity of 1,600 cubic centimetres. But most remarkable of all were his artistic abilities. Cave after another, has its walls covered with hundreds of paintings of people and animals, the oldest going back earlier than 30,000 ya. The first to show them is the world famous Lescaux cave in southwestern France, found in 1940. In the words of Encyclopedia Britannica the“ human figures generally depict large-breasted, wide-hipped, and often obviously pregnant women, from which it is assumed that these figures had significance in fertility rites…Decorated tools and weapons show that they appreciated art for aesthetic purposes as well as for religious reasons”.

Chapter illustration

More. According to Ian Tattersall, Cro-Magnon had bone made flutes, indicating they must have enjoyed singing. And “they buried their dead in elaborately decorated clothing and with a plethora of grave goods”. He continues: “The list could go on and on, but it should already be evident that the Cro-Magnons were us, not only in their anatomy but in all their behavioral complexities as well… The same cannot be said for the Neanderthals, who could best be described as an improved version of their forebears”.

Cro- Magnon lifestyle, however, continued to be the tens of millennia old hunting gathering way. But thanks to their new cognitive abilities, they approached the tasks of acquiring food, both vegetal and animal intelligently, with discernment and planning enabling them, in due course, to grow their food and raise their animals as elaborated in the next section.

Of great significance is the crossing to Australia/New Guinea, some 40 to 30,000 ya, from the nearest point in South East Asia. How did they do it? Well apparently by island hopping in the first rudimentary water crafts ever. “Within a short time of that initial peopling, humans had expanded over the whole continent and adapted to its diverse habitats from the tropical rain forests and high mountains of New Guinea to the dry interior and wet southeastern corner of Australia”. In the process of spreading and inhabiting Australia and New Guinea, the newcomers caused the first man made mass extinction of mega fauna. At the time of their arrival, Australia had, for millions of years been, the habitat of two dozen large animals which included, to name a few: 200kg, 2m kangaroos, large ostriches, giant pythons, 1000 kg lizards, giant diprotodons (image) and 2.5 ton wombats. Within a few millennia, 23 of the original 24 animal species, of more than 50 kg, no longer existed. Only the ancestors of present day kangaroos survived.

Chapter illustration

Equally remarkable, if not more so, is our species’ migration to the Americas. Some 16,000 ya, it crossed from Siberia to Alaska on foot over the natural land bridge which existed then, in place of today’s Bering Strait. It was so because glaciation had caused significant lowering of sea level. Obviously, it could not have been an easy journey by any stretch of the imagination, but we were somewhat prepared. We had, clearly, adapted to the harsh and frigid weather of Siberia we reached 4,000 years earlier and had had enough time to perfect needles with which to sew warm clothing and footwear form the firs of the mammoths and the like. Moreover, we dwelt in reasonably warm shelters.

From Alaska, our ancestors spread east, west and all the way down to South America. Four millennia hence, or 12,000 ya, they inhabited ‘Terra del Fuego’, the southernmost point of Argentina. Then, with ice thawing, the Bering Strait filled up blocking the arrival of more humans until 500 ya, in the person of Christopher Columbus. In the meantime all those early migrants had evolved into the Cherokee, Sioux and Apache Indians of North America, the Aztecs, Mayas and Incas of Central and South America; all, ultimately, to be enslaved, contaminated with germs and killed by the more modern Europeans who followed Columbus.

In the Americas those Siberians found a vast land teeming with large fauna such as the mammoth (image left), valuable for its huge quantity of meat and fat, its extensive and rich fur and not least for its long ivory tusks. They also found horses, camels and the 8-ton, 6m high sloth (image right) and plenty of birds and reptiles. Once again, as had happened in Australia/New Guinea 20,000 years earlier, they all became extinct within a relatively short time. In the words of Profes- sor Harari: “The Americas were a great laboratory of evolutionary experimentation, a place where animals and plants unknown in Africa and Asia had evolved and thrived”. Within a couple of millennia North America had lost 34 of its original 47 fauna genera and South America 50 out of its starting 60.

Chapter illustration

Both Professors Diamond and Harari are not inclined to exonerate those early Australians and Americans. They find it odd that the fauna which had thrived for millions of years, adapting to the cycling of ice ages etc. should disappear soon, in geological times, after the appearance of our species. They reason that, unlike the large animals of Africa and Eurasia which had co-evolved with Homo genera and had had time to adapt to their presence and developed ways of avoiding them as/if necessary and, thus, flourished; their counterparts in Australia/New Guinea and the Americas had evolved for millions of years in complete isolation. So when their eyes first fell on the puny two legged strangers, they were not impressed and did not give them a second look, hence, unwittingly allowing themselves to be slaughtered. To make matters worse, these mega animals were slow and infrequent breeders: their females had few offspring from each pregnancy and suffered long and far in between conceptions. It was, therefore, enough to kill one beast every few months for mortality to exceed births in the long run. More, they also died from loss of habitat as dense forests were cleared and burnt by the immigrants.

And, earlier introduced, Professor Demoule is adamant that in the past less than 100,000 years, an infinitesimal duration on the geological and evolutionary timescale, our species has taken charge of the entire Globe. It has managed to eliminate all other Homo species, and a significant quantity of fauna and flora they came across. Only spared, manipulated and multiplied were the plants and animals useful to keep, as we shall see next. Professor Harari concurs: “At the time of the Cognitive Revolution, the planet was home to about 200 genera of large terrestrial animals weighing over 50 kilograms. At the time of the Agricultural Revolution [10,000 ya] only about a hundred remained. Homo sapiens drove to extinction about half of the planet’s big beasts long before humans invented the wheel, writing and iron tools”. Pointedly, unlike land animals, sea/ocean creatures have had for millions of years an undisturbed evolution, being away from the sight, and beyond the reach of humans. But for the last few centuries, no longer so.

DOMESTICATION OF PLANTS AND ANIMALS

According to Professor Diamond food production was not a discovery nor an invention, rather a process of evolution: “food production was often not even a conscious choice between food production and hunting-gathering .....Instead…it evolved as a by-product of decisions made without awareness of their consequences”.

Like all humans, hunter gatherers craved protein, fat, salt and yearned for tasty fruits, vegetables and meats. With time they realized that, to protect themselves from shortages of their favourite fare, they could grow it, raise it and breed it. Thus, they started, piecemeal fashion, to appropriate small lots to grow what they feared could become scarce. Likewise they created small enclosures in which they kept a few of their preferred edible animals. In other words food production started more or less as a stopgap measure to mitigate hunger.

And so, once a group of hunter-gatherers started planting, more likely than not, their neighbours followed suite. Further, as the number of food producers grew they displaced, or even killed, those hunter- gatherers in their localities. There were, however, holdouts living in isolation such as the inhabitants of North America who stuck to their nomadic way of life until the arrival of Europeans some 500 years ago and those in New Guinea who held firm to foraging well into the 20th century.

How did hunter gatherers come to realize that the wild flora and fauna they were consuming could be produced at will? Simplistically, over many millennia of living in, feeding off and observing Nature, generation after generation, they learnt that wild wheat seeds dropped on the way home germinate into stalks; that rotten fruits thrown out with their pips intact also germinate. More interestingly, the indigestible seeds and pips spit out or defecated by birds, other animals and indeed themselves germinate too. Likewise, hunter gatherers realized that some wild mammals are docile enough, of the right temperament and traits as to be suitable for keeping and breeding in captivity.

Historically the year 8,000 BCE, or 10,000 ya, is acknowledged to, be the one of the onset of the ‘Agricultural Revolution’. Stated differently, it is the date at which food production took off in earnest. It is also the beginning of human sedentariness or the settling of former roaming foragers into ‘organized’ communities near the parcels of land they tended and close to the animals they raised.

The earliest plants to be cultivated were obviously the ones most readily domesticable, such as the wild ancestors of wheat, barley, millet, rice, rice, maize, beans and potato. From the animal kingdom, selected were the ones most familiar and with the right traits and temperament and which were likely to give the best returns in term of food, clothing (pelts) etc. The beasts which were finally chosen universally, were the wild ancestors of the modern sheep, goat, cow, pig and horse. Selectively, in some specific regions, were domesticated the donkey, single and double humped camel, reindeer and water buffalo.

In consequence, humans had by 4,500 ya completed the domestication of several large wild, herbivore mammals( of 45kg an above) They were the ones which yielded meat, milk products, fertilizer, leather, fur, wool. Others were beasts of burden, providing transport, pulling ploughs and war chariots. It is noteworthy, that “by then [4500 ya], all the world’s 148 candidate big species must have been tested innumerable times, with the result that only a few passed the test and no other suitable ones remained” . It is, indeed, remarkable that since then and for the last 4.5 millennia no other mammal has been domesticated despite the huge advances made in the relevant fields of science. Instead, humans have since the beginning manipulated those mammals through interbreeding to enhance desirable characteristics and breed variety. Likewise, with time, the cultivated plants became different from their wild forebears on account of more meticulous selection and crossbreeding.

Why is it that some large mammals can be domesticated and others not? There are certain prerequisites which must, without exception, be met. Some of them: 1)Diet: The returns in term of animal products or service must more than compensate the value of the fodder consumed by the beasts. 2) Growth rate: This is rather self-evident: it is not viable to wait long for a calf to become useful etc. 3)Breeding in Captivity: Obviously, only the ones which can breed under circumstances of captivity are of any use. 4)Nasty disposition: Some animals never lose their natural aggression. They, thus, present a danger for their keeper. 5) Tendency to panic: These are the nervous type which panic when put in enclosures and in the process hurt themselves trying to escape.

Ironically, while intensive domestication was taking place, the animals remaining in the wild were being decimated intentionally or by accident. So much so that the Earth’s populations of domesticates exploded at the expense of the wild variety. From this perspective, there are presently 200,000 wild wolves against 400,000,000 domesticated dogs; 40,000 lions against 600,000,000 house cats; 900,000 African buffalo against 1,500,000,000 domesticated cows; and 50,000,000 penguins against 20,000,000,000 chickens.

There is general consensus that the domestication of plants and animals was initiated, independently, in five world centers at different times. All other regions of the world either copied these originators or, learnt domestication from immigrants, as was the case in North America and Australia. Chronologically the centers and their domes-ticates are: 1) Between 13 and 10,000 ya in Southwest Asia aka: Fertile Crescent (Iraq, Syria, Jordan, Lebanon, Palestine/Israel and Egypt): Wheat, barley, pea and olive. Sheep and goat. 2) About 9,500 ya in China: Rice and millet. Pig and silkworm. 3) Between 8.5 and 4,000 ya in Mesoamerica (Mexico and adjacent areas of Central America): Maize, beans, squash and sunflower. Turkey. 4) Between 10 and 4,500 ya in South America: Potato (regular and sweet),manioc, squash, peanut , palm and peach. Llama and guinea pig. 5) About 4,500 ya in the Eastern United States: Sunflower and goosefoot.

Agriculture resulted in the production of surplus food, for the first time ever, which could be stored for later consumption. Furthermore, sedentary life, as is normally the case, caused a dramatic jump in population. For while, formerly, hunter gatherers with their roaming lifestyle could not be hampered by many possessions: barely a minimum of children and a few weapons; henceforth humans could reproduce to their heart content and own a variety of artifacts, notably pottery items. But, whereas the additional mouths could be fed adequately enough at times of good harvests, the opposite was true and people starved when the rains failed.

But more fatefully, the Agricultural Revolution ushered in property ownership, led to the hierarchical society and, hence, inevitably to the manifestation of wealth and income discrepancies, among members of the same community. This division between rich and poor has been the universal story of humankind for the next one hundred centuries to the present. Simply, the Agricultural Revolution kicked off human civilizations with all that this term entails.

Spiritually, we have already seen that pre-Agricultural Revolution humans were animist: they considered themselves the equal of everything that lived or otherwise, such as rivers and rock. But, domestication changed all that. Henceforth, as farmers began to control and manipulate plant and animal as they wished: castrating ones, interbreeding others etc., they could no longer be expected to look upon their charges with animistic eyes. As stated by Professor Harari : “Hence the first religious effect of the Agricultural Revolution was to turn plants and animals from equal members of a spiritual round table into property [ and consequently, humans], could hardly degrade themselves by negotiating with their possessions”.

But even so, and no matter how hard they tried, farmers discovered they had absolutely no say, whatsoever, in matters such as ensuring propitious weather for good harvests, influencing the fertility of ewes or the number or sex of their eventual offspring. Or, for that matter, how many beasts they would lose to disease and epidemics. Clearly, they needed help. Enters the invention of the gods of fertility, rain etc.(see next) who were expected to mediate between humans and their domesticates. In return they were promised “everlasting devotion [and no doubt gifts of sacrificed humans and animals]… in exchange for mastery over plants and animals”.

The reverse of the coin of raising and breeding animals was the transmission, for the first time, from beast to man of germs which, from then onward, became the great killers of man throughout history. These were the viruses, microbes and other microscopic organisms causing smallpox, flu, tuberculosis, malaria, plague, measles, cholera, and whooping cough: the gifts of cattle, pigs, dogs and various birds. All these maladies are called crowd diseases because their pathogens thrive in densely populated communities living in close proximity with their animals, as was the case with the early farmers. And sadly, the first victims were their children whose mortality rate soared.

SPIRITUAL AND SOCIO-POLITICAL DISPOSITIONS OF PREHISTORIC HUMANS

We cannot do better than quote the words of Lawrence E.Y. Mbogoni: “Since [their cognitive transformation]human beings the world over have sought answers to the vexing questions of their origins, sickness, death and after death; the meaning of natural phenomena such as earthquakes, eclipses of the sun and moon, birth of twins etc. and how to protect themselves from such mysterious events”.

Thus “in order to seek the protection of supernatural powers” humans have, throughout prehistory, invented various beliefs here and there. They included shamanism, occultism, ancestor worship, the afterlife and polytheism in which a multitude of imagined gods and goddesses play fateful roles in the lives and deaths of those early believers.

The Sumerian mythological pantheon had several important goddesses, notably the one who created Heaven and Earth. Another is credited with the creation of the planets, yet another still rules over “Darkness, Gloom and Death”. And not unreasonably, there was a goddess for love. As for the male counterparts, they included the sun god “who lights the world with rays issuing from his shoulders. [He] was also the god of justice and carved out justice with the many-toothed saw he carried with him”, according to history-world.org. Another was the god of water and wisdom, he “emits streams from his shoulders; he is the god who gave rulers their intelligence and who provided craftsmen with their skills”. Unsurprisingly, food production was not neglected. As we have seen in the previous section, farmers direly needed supernatural help to complete their control over plant and animal. Thus, the Sumerians had Enlil and Enki who were said to have created sheep, cattle, plants and even the yoke to enable ploughing. However, notwithstanding all that power and reach, Sumerian mythology does not spare its gods and goddesses the fates of ordinary mortals; they “suffered the vicissitudes of fate and many legends tell of their often ineffective exploits” .

As for ancient Egyptians, theirs included gods and goddesses who ruled the sun and moon, controlled the vital seasonal flooding of the river Nile and vegetation. There were, also, those who took care of mummification, protected the dead and conducted them to the hall of judgment, where god Osiris, no doubt, under the watchful eyes of the god of truth and justice, evaluated their lives’ deeds and decided their status in the afterlife. There were also the goddesses of beauty, music, love and pleasure and Isis, one of the most prominent among them. According to Encyclopedia Britannica: “As mourner, she was a principal deity in rites connected with the dead; as magical healer, she cured the sick and brought the deceased to life; and as mother, she was a role model for all women”.

Like their Sumerian counterparts, all these divine beings were no different from humans in traits and emotions. They could be jealous, spiteful, rancorous, vengeful and more. But all this wickedness combined with supernatural powers caused exceptional levels of cruelty, vileness and lethality.

Consider, for instance, this story of Isis. In short, she was the wife of Osiris whose brother Seth out of jealousy killed him ,packed his corpse in a lead coated casket then sent it to the bottom of the Nile River. Isis could not let that happen. She searched and searched until she located the coffin and brought it back. But Seth got wind of his brother’s return albeit dead in a box. This time around, he hacked the cadaver into many pieces and had them scattered far and wide. Once again Isis went looking for the shreds. She turned herself into a bird, located all of her husband’s parts except his male organ. Nevertheless, she put him back together mummy fashion: a state of neither life or death. No matter. Isis, nonetheless became pregnant and in due course gave the neither here nor there, Osiris, a son.

Perhaps, most sinister of all, were the exploitation of the uncertainties and fears of commoners by rulers, priests and others in order to subjugate citizenry and enrich themselves. According to Encyclopedia Britannica, the pharaoh was believed by Egyptians to be “a divine ruler, [he] was the preserver of the god-given order…[he was also] the mediator between the gods and the world of men. After death the pharaoh became divine… and passed on his sacred powers and position to the new pharaoh, his son”.

Even in death a pharaoh was unpleasantly exigent. He took with him to his resting place court officials and servants, killed with poison beforehand, to serve and entertain him in the afterlife. Similarly, in Sumer.These practices are known as retainer sacrifice. Indeed, human sacrifice, mostly of the goriest and most gruesome kind, prevailed among humans in order to please and placate the cruel deities and not least, to enhance the power of rulers.

Finally, in the words of Professor Harari: “Polytheism…increasingly saw the world as a reflection of the relationship between gods and humans. [In fact all our deeds good and bad] determined the fate of the entire ecosystem….A terrible flood might wipe out billions of [animals, from ants to giraffes and elephants etc ], just because of [ the misdeeds of] a few stupid Sapiens…”.

As explained at length in my earlier 'From Tribe to Empire', the socio-politico-economical groupings were transformed, by the advent of the Agricultural Revolution, from clans of 50 to 100 strong egalitarian hunter gatherers, related to one another by blood or marriage but with hardly any contact with outsiders to, successively, chiefdoms, states and empires. Each step brought together more heterogeneous peoples into larger polities with denser populations, requiring from the ruler’s perspective, more complex and elaborate administrative structures to keep all these strangers under control, and entice/force them to cooperate and live peacefully with one another.

Typically, at the apex of the power pyramid stood a despotic king or emperor who, if not claiming to be a god himself, maintained that he was the representative of one on earth. Below him came his family group followed by the moneyed, land owning, elite. Additionally a new class of skilled artisans progressively emerged whose purpose was the crafting of luxury and otherwise items for royalties and upper classes, and weapons for evolving regular armies with plentiful combatants. Bottom-most, at the base of the pyramid, toiled impoverished, miserable and, at time, starving peasants, growing food and raising livestock to feed all those above them as well as their families. They constituted the vast majority in any state or empire.

In the Egypt of 6,500 ya, for example, “there is evidence of a considerable growth in wealth deriving from agricultural development and accompanied by a more hierarchical social system” according to Encyclopedia Britannica. The country was actively growing barley, cotton, and flax for weaving into linen. By then it had domesticated cattle, sheep, goats, pigs, ducks and geese, and selectively bred them for specific purposes such as one type of cattle for meat, another for milk and sheep with fatty tail for meat and milk. The pharaoh himself “owned a large portion of Egypt’s land and directed its use, was responsible for his people’s economic and spiritual welfare, and dispensed justice to his subjects. His will was supreme, and he governed by royal decree”. And there were also other rich landowners/farmers, one of whom, 4,300 ya is reported to have “owned 1,000 cattle, 760 asses, 2,200 goats, and 1,000 sheep”

Chapter illustration

And to make sure nothing goes astray: “A whole bureaucracy dealt with agriculture. The grand vizier, second only to the pharaoh, stood at its head, and the ministry of agriculture stood under him. There was a chief of the fields and a master of largesse, who looked after the livestock”.

LOGOGRAMS AND ALPHABETS

Unlike language, writing is an invention. There were four unquestionable centers where it emerged independently. The first, in Sumer, Mesopotamia where cuneiform script was first created a little before 5000 ya. The second was the hieroglyphic writing of ancient Egypt a few centuries later. Some scholars suspect that given their relative geographic proximity and the trading relationship between the two, the latter may have benefitted from the Sumerian idea. The third center was China 3,300 ya and the fourth and last, a world away, in Mexico where Indians of the Maya civilization created their own writing. All other humans who subsequently evolved writing copied or a least have been inspired/influenced by the pioneering four.

In both Sumerian cuneiform (image left) and Egyptian hieroglyphic (image right) scripts, each sign identifies a whole word. These are known as logograms. Alphabets, in contrast, typically consist of a manageable number of letters which can individually or in combination produce all the phonemes or sounds in any language.

Chapter illustration

These early forms of writing constituted, perhaps, an inevitable consequence of the formation of the first civilizations and complex societies. They arose, primarily for accounting purposes: quantity of food produced and distributed, number of cattle bought, sold or slaughtered etc. Thus, it was ‘telegraphic’ in nature and certainly not intended for everyday use by ordinary people. And it obviously took centuries of trials and hard work for the first scribes to come up with forms mentioned, because there was no model to be guided by.

This all changed with the invention of the alphabet some 3,700 ya, primarily, by the Phoenicians in the Semite regions of the Middle East. Inspired by the hieroglyphic writing, they came up with a fixed number of letters from which all subsequent writings emerged. Among these were Arabic, Ethiopian, Aramaic, Hebrew and Greek alphabets. Roman script made use of the latter, and both, subsequently, led to European writing. In the words of professor Diamond: “Alphabets apparently arose only once in human history: among speakers of Semitic languages, in the area from modern Syria to the Sinai during the second millennium B.C. All of the hundreds of historical and now existing alphabets were ultimately derived from that ancestral Semitic alphabet…”

Chapter illustration

WAS IT ALL WORTH IT?

Contrary to accepted wisdom that the Agricultural Revolution was a blessing for humans, transforming them from savages to civilized people, Professor Harari sees it as ‘History’s Biggest Fraud’. He describes it as a miscalculation based on ignorance of its long term consequences. Had those hunter-gatherers foreseen where it would, ultimately, lead them, they would have opted to keep their nomadic way of life. Even more. Had they, soon after adopting farming, had an inkling of what lay ahead they would have gladly reversed course and returned to their hunting-gathering days. Unfortunately, by the time peasants were in the thick of it, many generations had passed and no one remembered what it was like with their foraging ancestors.

To start with, hunter-gatherers enjoyed a varied diet, they “relied on dozens of species to survive and could therefore weather difficult years even without stocks of preserved food” . Farmers, on the other hand, subsisted on a limited variety of domesticated crops and often on a single one such as wheat, corn, rice, potatoes etc. Their hunter-gatherer forebears worked only enough to collect their daily needs then rested. Against that, farmers slaved from sunrise to sunset at back-breaking tasks: sowing, watering, spreading animal manure, and finally harvesting, while all the time keeping watch for pests such as rodents and locust, and indeed human raiders who could deprive them of all their hard word. Then having diligently taken care of everything, they still worried about the single most important factor which could make or break them: rain. If it failed they and their families starved to death. By contrast, their egalitarian roaming predecessors, when drought depleted one place, moved elsewhere to find their fare. Then when all is and done, peasants received little earthly rewards for their labour and anxiety being, let’s remember, at the bottom of the social scale.

As for Professor Diamond, the premise that the production of food made people happier and enabled some measures of comfort unknown to hunter-gatherers is a misconception. In justification, he points to present day (1997) peasant farmers of the Third World. They constitute the majority of global food producers and are not necessarily better off than the hunter-gatherers of yore. Very unexpectedly, he notes that: “Archaeologists have demonstrated that the first farmers in many areas were smaller and less well nourished, suffering from more serious diseases, and died on the average at a younger age than the hunter-gatherers they replaced”. And again: “If those farmers could have foreseen the consequences of adopting food production, they might not have opted to do so” .

LAST WORDS.

It is clear that Homo sapiens had no say, whatsoever, in Evolution’s gift to them: a brain that enabled speech and cognitive faculties. From then on, humans became thinking and anticipating creatures, aware and conscious of their environment and its bio-diversity. They also became acquainted with the extraterrestrial expanse and the objects floating in it, namely the stars, the sun and moon and the latter’s movement across the sky, hence, realizing the passage of time and, in consequence, the prospects of aging and dying. Moreover they could, now, remember their yesterdays and plan for their morrows. Admittedly, Nature did a marvelous job. In the end, Darwinian evolution aka ‘Survival of the Fittest’ chose to make our species the fittest of them all. Unfortunately, however, Evolution neglected to implant in us morals, ethics and the proper way to behave and coexist in harmony with one another and with all others sharing the Globe with us.

Whereas all this, no doubt, gave our forbears a feeling of superiority vis-à-vis all other living organisms it, simultaneously, left them bewildered, and in fear of all the things they could not understand, let alone control, such as the furies of Nature, the mysteries of the cosmos and above all the secrets of life and death. These emotions, made humans easy prey to those among them, with a rich imagination, to spin yarns about supernatural beings able to help them and assuage their anxieties. In the process, of course, the story tellers gave themselves the role of intermediaries between those beings and mortals, a platform from which they could keep in line the gullible and superstitious people of nascent societies to so as to promote their own interests.

Thus, while genetic evolution proceeded at its usual leisurely pace, humans, 10,000 ya embarked on their own social, political and economic evolution at a much, much faster pace.. Unfortunately, though, in their attempts to create cultures, civilizations and religions they did not, till present, come anywhere near the unmitigated successes of Evolution over the preceding millions of years.

I want to end with an exoneration, of my own, of those early humans who crossed over to Australia/New Guinea and Alaska/the Americas 40,000 and 16,000 ya respectively. By then our forebears had become cognizant enough to behave in accordance with the dictates of their minds rather than instincts. To begin with it no doubt required a great deal of curiosity, courage and a sense of adventure to undertake the arduous journeys. By all standards these are commendable traits in any human being. And once there, could they be really faulted for hunting the wild fauna they came across? After all, they were doing nothing more that responding to their genetic need for animal protein, fat and warm clothing in the cold climes. Even more, they could not have been aiming at the beasts’ extinction. How could they? After all, they depended on them for survival. Lastly, in the absence of surveys and statistics they had no way of knowing the ‘endangered species’ status of the animals they hunted.

These occurrences bring to mind an important question. Once all fauna had died out, where did humans get their animal protein from? Is it conceivable that cannibalism emerged in similar situations of dearth of protein? Worth looking into.

Anthropocene or Holocene

HOLOCENE OR ANTHROPOCENE? PLASTICS,PLASTICS EVERYWHERE The Author. OCTOBER,2016

Chapter illustration

‘The Great Pacific Garbage Patch’ “is a collection of [non- biodegradable] debris in the North Pacific Ocean, [much of which are plastic items, which while not decomposing] simply break into tinier and tinier pieces…About 80% of [that debris] comes from land-based activities in North America and Asia, [carried by prevailing currents]. The remaining 20% comes from boaters, offshore oil rigs, and large cargo ships … Oceanographers and ecologists recently discovered that about 70% of [it]actually sinks to the bottom of the ocean,[with the ocean floor, possibly] an underwater trash heap...Sea turtles often mistake plastic bags for jellies…Albatrosses mistake plastic resin pellets for fish eggs…[Others become] entangled in abandoned plastic fishing nets…[It has been estimated] that it would take 67 ships one year to clean up less than one percent of the North Pacific Ocean”.(National Geographic).

FOREWORD.

In every hospital room, nowadays, there is a box holding plastic surgical gloves, for use by medical personnel, from doctors to orderlies. Before undertaking any action on, or relating to, the patient, a pair is pulled on, and once it has served its purpose, is taken off and dropped in the plastic bag inside the equally plastic (1) waste bin. In these circumstances the useful life of the gloves does not exceed one or two minute, if that.

Then, there is the paraphernalia of plastic solution containers, plastic tubing with the precision made plastic regulating valves, of any intravenous administration assembly. Well, here again, once the patient ‘is better’ the whole is unhooked, from its stand, and unceremoniously sent to join the plastic gloves in the plastic bag inside the plastic waste bin.

Chapter illustration

Finally, sometime during the day an orderly collects the partially full plastic bag inside the plastic bin, replacing it with a fresh one.

Of course we all know there are commendable reasons for all this. Even so, one cannot but be shocked at the realization that all those plastic items remain usable for many more years. Worse, they will still be around, in their final resting places beyond the lifetimes of our grandchildren’s grandchildren, poisoning the landscape and choking marine creatures to death in the world ’s seas and oceans.

INTRODUCTION

The heading of this project consists of two rarely seen terms: Holocene and Anthropocene ending with a question mark. What do they mean?

Holocene is the geological epoch which began at the end of the last ice-age, 12,000 years ago. It is the epoch when humanity which, hitherto had lived like all other animal species, adopted agriculture and animal domestication. This was followed by urbanization, exploding populations, construction activities, industrialization and more.

The Anthropocene (from Anthropo: man) is a new geological epoch resulting from the impact of humanity on Earth’s atmosphere, oceans and dry lands. In addition to throwing up global warming gases, mankind is depleting Earth’s crust of minerals, coal and oil and returning to it its rubbish: concrete, glass, metal and plastic discards. Then there are the residues from the 1950s and 60s atomic bomb testing, the radio-active leftovers from nuclear power plants (image right) and other hazardous wastes (2). To the geologists (3) supporting this concept the changeover from the former to the latter took place sometime in the mid-20th century when the levels of exploitation of resources and pollution reached a tipping point or the point of no-return. Stated simply, the Anthropocene epoch is a man-created reality impacting our planet and likely to become more intense as we proceed with our technology and consumption.

Chapter illustration

As to the question mark terminating the heading, it is there because stratigraphers (4) do not subscribe the Anthropocene concept and consider it as “more about pop culture than hard science”.

The two different opinions are neither here nor there. Nobody can deny that the exchange described above (discards against minarals) is detrimental to mankind and is definitely changing the natural constituents of our planet which have been around for millions of years. Will Steffen, head of Australia’s Climate Change Institute agrees: “Either way,[he says], the new name [Anthropocene] sends a message [that] will be another strong reminder to the general public that we are now having undeniable impacts on the environment at the scale of the planet as a whole, so much so that a new geological epoch has begun”

This project is about the rubbish we, as humans, generate and how we deal with it. One kind is ‘legitimate’ garbage and consists primarily of the food we eat and of the biological wastes we produce. These can both be dealt with Nature’s way. The other kind is the ‘illegitimate’ trash we produce from items unknown to Nature. It is foreign to it and, hence, has not evolved ways to tackle it harmlessly. Plastic is their obvious representative.

ZERO SUM GARBAGE.

‘Dust to dust, ashes to ashes’. In scientific language it signifies biodegradation or the decay of all living matter, animal and vegetal (organic matter), at the end of its useful life, into its natural building blocks. Stated differently, it returns to the basic chemical elements freely available in Nature with no adverse effects on the environment All this thanks to micro-organisms, notably: bacteria (5)(6). Needless to say the human body is the biodegradable matter par excellence.

Chapter illustration

Hence, so long as humans lived in harmony with Nature: feeding on its animals, fruits and vegetable, emptying their bowels and bladders where they stood and procreating, they left behind nothing that could not be disposed of adequately and harmlessly.

Unfortunately, leaving waste to decay by itself in the open has its problems, not least the foul odours and the spread of disease, again, from bacteria carried by rodents and insects feeding on it. Thus, as humans and civilizations evolved, Nature was given a hand by burying the dead and scientifically dealing with garbage: placing it in sanitary landfills (image below)(7). Composting is another scientific and useful way to treat garbage. It involves allowing it to decompose under controlled conditions to yield, in the end, humus or compost valued by gardners and farmers for its soil enrichment properties.

Chapter illustration

Finally, the treatment of humans’ own biological wastes involves nothing more than speeding up the digestion of the solid and liquid components by what else? Bacteria. The end products are uncontaminated water, used primarily for irrigation (8) and sludge (mud). The latter can be further treated, giving up half of its volume, in the process of producing methane and carbon dioxide gases. Sadly, both global warming agents.

Chapter illustration

PLASTICS, PLASTICS EVERYWHERE AND NOT AN OUNCE TO ROT(9).

Chapter illustration

Plastics are made from chemical compounds named benzene, butadiene, ethylene, propylene, toluene and xylenes, etc, extracted, in petrochemical plants, from products themselves resulting from the distillation process of petroleum in refineries(10).

The first plastic consumer goods were made from‘Bakelite’ introduced in 1907, a little less than a century from the exploitation of the first oil well in 1859. Typically, these were telephone and radio sets, hair dryers, dress buttons, fake jewelry, billiard balls and many more (11).

Chapter illustration

From the above named compounds (benzene etc.) the chemical company DuPont produced ‘nylon’ in 1940, thus heralding the ‘Plastics World’ of today. Following nylon, came the polycarbonate, poly vinyl chloride (PVC), polystyrene, polyethylene, polypropylene, synthetic rubber and dozens more for the production of medical and pharmaceutical goods, automotive and aviation components, cell phones, lap and desk top computers, television sets, microwave ovens, and of course bags, bottles, furniture, clothing and footwear items and all kind of food containers and utensils and much more. Last but not least, plastics are found in diapers for babies and adults (12) and in tyres. So much so that an October 2014 report by ‘Journalist’s Resource’, a web site, based in Harvard University and dealing with academic topics revealed: “On average, 300 million tons of plastic are produced around the globe each year. Of this, 50% is for [used once] applications such as packaging. Plastics make up 85% of medical equipment. [Intravenous] bags and tubing alone constitute up to 25% of hospital waste”.

There is no question that plastics, being cheap and versatile have made life easier and more comfortable for virtually all classes of society across the Globe. What is more, they have contributed to hygienic and safe practices in the medical profession and others. And, hence, being so much in demand, have kept plants and factories humming and their employment high (13).

But, all those benzene, toluene, xylenes etc. produced by the petrochemical industry ,and their offspring thereto, are one hundred per cent man-created with no equivalent in Nature. It, therefore, has no means of dealing with the discarded gloves, bags, bottles, bins etc. (14). Simply put, there are no bacteria on Earth, despite their abundance and great variety that can digest plastics into oblivion. Consequently they remain in their resting places, an ugly sight and nasty presence, for hundreds and even thousands of years. Or as stated in a 2014, report: ‘Valuing Plastic’ of the United Nation Environmental Programme: “Plastic is one of the toughest waste streams to handle, and though the weight of plastic waste might not be as big as that of other materials, its durability and volume often account for a large proportion of a country’s waste issues”.

The processes, from extracting the compounds from petroleum, to preparing the feedstock (PVC etc.) then to manufacturing the finished items, consume non- renewable energy, throw up global warming carbon dioxide and otherwise pollute air, land and water. Worse. In the words of the UN report: “Plastic pellets from the manufacturing process may also enter the waste stream and the ocean in the form of microplastics, which are small particles of plastic with a maximum diameter no greater than 5 mm. Microplastics are easily ingested by sea life, and now even outweigh plankton in some areas of the high seas… Over two thirds of plastic litter ends up on the seabed with half of the remainder washed up on beaches and the other half floating on or under the surface…”.

Then there is the litter consisting of all the discarded items from hospitals, schools, and households etc. Of these the report says that “it is costly to recover and becomes a multigenerational problem due to its long degradation time. Although it is typically only considered an eyesore, its impact is felt throughout our communities [as litter] has an impact on land use, transport, animal and human health, safety, flooding, community spirit and clean-up costs”.

The UN report estimated that in 2014 eight million items of this litter and some of the microplastics from the factories, carried by currents, end up accumulating in ‘The Great Pacific Garbage Patch’ (see cover) or in similar clusters in the other seas and oceans.

Apart from blighting Earth’s lands and oceans with man’s plastic trash, there are currently three ways of dealing with it: in landfills, through incineration (burning) and by recycling.

In landfills, plastic products can live practically forever. It takes diapers 400 years to naturally degrade in soil. Plastic bottles and bags, more than 1,000 . As for a tyre, an unbelievable period in excess of 4,000 years is required. Among the rich developed countries the United States, according to the Environmental Protection Agency, disposed of 92 percent of its plastic waste in landfills in 2010.

Incineration on a large scale is used in Denmark, Sweden, Holland, Belgium, Germany and France with 54, 49, 39, 36 and 32% respectively of their discarded plastics going this way. The burning is carried out in specially made-for-that-purpose incinerators. Moreover, the heat of combustion is used for urban heating and/or electricity generation. But this burning process releases various toxic gases, carbon dioxide and fly ash (black dust). And unless the incinerators are equipped with filters and their operation is closely monitored and controlled, they constitute a nuisance to their environment and a health hazard to people in their vicinity. Understandably, incinerating plants are not cheap to build, run and maintain. But no matter the degree of technical sophistication, some critics still complain that “even the most technologically advanced incinerators release thousands of pollutants that contaminate our air, soil and water”. So when vacant spaces is available, as is, apparently,the case in the USA and not so in Europe, people choose to have their trash buried far from sight and far from mind.

Strictly speaking, recycling means returning a product to its originals building blocks, to remake an identical one. Sadly, however, this is far from being the case with plastics. Indeed, according to one writer, it is more ‘down-cycling’ rather than ‘re-cycling’. The reason? Simply, as we have seen, plastics are not made from the same compounds. There are the PVC the poly-this and the poly-that items which are discarded pell-mell with no segregation or sorting. Therefore when they are collected ‘as is’ and recycled they end up as inferior plastics not suitable to remake any of the original items. Incineration is a business, it must, hence, make sense commercially. Stated differently, there must be ready markets for the new material, otherwise, the whole exercise is futile. In the words of the venerable Encyclopedia Britannica: “In general, the most difficult problem associated with the recycling of any solid-waste material is finding applications and suitable markets. Recycling by itself will not solve the growing problem of solid-waste management and disposal. There will always be some unusable and completely valueless solid residue requiring final disposal”. Nevertheless, Europe is, again, fond of recycling, with Austria leading at 69% of its plastic trash, followed by Germany, Belgium, Holland, Sweden and Demark at 65, 60, 59, 48 and 47% respectively.

“PLASTIC NOW POLLUTES EVERY CORNER OF EARTH”

This is the heading for an article in the Guardian, dated 24th January, 2014. It reports on an international study undertaken by a team geologists led by Professor Jan Zalasiewicz, of Leicester University. What follows are some excerpts which reveal an entirely new aspect of plastic pollution:

“Humans have made enough plastic since the second world war to coat the Earth entirely in cling film… This ability to plaster the planet in plastic is alarming…for it confirms that human activities are now having a pernicious impact on our world.

‘The results came as a real surprise’ said…Professor Jan Zalasiewicz… ‘We were aware that humans have been making increasing amounts of different kinds of plastic…over the last 70 years, but we had no idea how far it had travelled round the planet. It turns out not just to have floated across the oceans, but has sunk to the deepest parts of the sea floor. This is not a sign that our planet is in a healthy condition either’.

The crucial point about the study’s findings is that the appearance of plastic should now be considered as a marker for a new epoch… called the Anthropocene [ending] the Holocene that began around 12,000 years ago.

…the humble plastic bag and plastic drink container play a far greater role in changing the planet than has been realised. [it is inside of fish and seabirds which think it is food, then their excrements sink onto the seabed].The planet is slowly being covered in plastic.

[The annual total production of plastics of 300 million tonnes] is close to the weight of the entire human population of the planet…The total amount of plastic produced since the second world war is around 5 billion tonnes and is very likely to reach 30 billion by the end of the century. The impact will be colossal”.

FINAL WORDS.

In an attempt to limit the damage, the United Nation’s report, earlier quoted, makes a set of recommendations aimed at the industrial users of plastics such as the medical tools, automotive parts, electronics goods etc. manufacturers as well as to the plastics makers themselves. Briefly: “Measure your plastic footprint…[so as to be able to]…identify product lines, types of plastic, sourcing and end-of-life locations, as well as relevant environmental impacts that deserve further attention. [Then]… design products… and packaging [so as to] minimise the likelihood that materials will be littered or escape into the environment…[and maximize their recyclable contents so they can return as feedstock to industry]… Label plastic clearly for tracking, public information and recovery purposes… Participate in community reuse, recovery and recycling programmes… [And all the while] evaluate carefully any alternatives such as bio-based plastics or biodegradable additives”.

‘Scientific American’, in July 2009, published an article headed ‘Plastic Not-So-Fantastic: How the Versatile Material Harms the Environment and Human Health’, based on the findings of a report “which aims to present the first comprehensive review of the impact of plastics on the environment and human health, and offer possible solutions” and contributed to by more than 60 scientists. The article comments that plastics should be looked upon “as re-usable material rather than as a disposable commodity that’s quickly discarded. [Meaning] using fewer materials in the manufacturing process and increasing recycling facility availability”. Moreover, the journal reports that, at that time, the production capacity for biodegradable plastics was only 2 out of every 1,000 tonnes of conventional plastics. More to the point, however, it states that these hoped for plastics “are unlikely to degrade quickly in natural habitats, and there is concern that degradable, oil-based polymers could merely disintegrate into small pieces that are not in themselves any more degradable than conventional plastic”.

From an October 2014 report in ‘Journalists Resources’, a web site, based in Harvard University, dealing with academic topics: “there needs to be a second revolution of plastics in which life-cycle considerations are integrated with production and consumption decisions to handle the voluminous present-day flow of plastics, most of which being destined for disposal after single use”.

Happily then, there is no shortage of advice and recommendations from qualified persons as to what is to be done to rid future generations and the Planet of the scourge of unsightly, live-for-ever plastic discards. So what is holding up the actions needed to implement the necessary measures? Simply that it is not yet in the interest of the business community to act responsibly in this respect. In today’s era of globalization, free unrestrained markets, fierce competition and aggressive goods and services propaganda, there are no financial rewards for Business in confronting the environmental and health problems; largely of its own making.

As for consumers, they cannot be depended upon to limit their consumption of plastics and make products last longer etc. when they are constantly bombarded by all sorts of enticements to make them ditch their six month old cell phones, still in excellent working condition, for the newer version with this or that application they never missed and were quite content without it. The sight of the hysterical throngs pushing and shoving outside an Apple or Samsung store on launching dates of new models speaks more than a million words. And this frenzy is evident in all classes of society regardless of levels of education and income.

NOTES

(1)The word ‘plastic’ is intentionally repeated.

(2)Hazardous wastes are those which, if not properly handled, are toxic, poisonous, carcinogenic etc. causing a multitude of ailments and possibly death. They include such innocent household items as batteries, refrigerants in air conditioning units and refrigerators, paints, insecticides, and even thermometers, to name very few. Clearly they are all present on a much larger scale in industrial rejects. Fertilizers used in agriculture are also harmful and deadly are the millions of buried landmines left behind by belligerents.

(3)Geology is “the science which deals with the physical structure and substance of the earth, their history, and the processes which act on them”.

(4)Stratigraphy is “the branch of geology concerned with the order and relative position of strata and their relationship to the geological timescale”.

(5)Bacteria (image right) are microscopic organisms without which life would be impossible. They are present absolutely everywhere, from the bottoms of oceans to the summits of mountains; they exist in arctic as well as in the hottest surroundings, they come in different sizes and shapes and fulfill a great many crucial roles in Earth’s eco-systems. We, quite rightly, blame bacteria for a long list of diseases. To compensate, however, certain bacteria produce antibiotics such as streptomycin- to combat the disease causing variety which, ironically, is currently suspected of developing immunity to antibiotics-, others are main suppliers of vitamins, and by living inside the digestive tract, help in the conversion of food into nutrients and waste. Finally, they are crucial in the safe disposal of the latter as well as in the decomposition of all dead matter. Indeed, in this respect they are Nature’s recyclers par excellence. A publication by the University of Berkeley sums it all up as follows: “Bacteria are of such immense importance because of their extreme flexibility, capacity for rapid growth and reproduction, and great age - the oldest fossils known, nearly 3.5 billion years old, are fossils of bacteria-like organisms”.

Chapter illustration

(6)Low temperatures slow down the action of bacteria. Hence refrigeration and freezing of food items. That is also the reason archeologists were able to find well preserved bodies of Inca sacrificial children in graves in the frigid climate of the Andes Mountains in Peru, hundreds of years after their burial. And finally, there is, also, the noteworthy ‘Svalbard Global Seed Vault’ in which hundreds of seed samples are preserved under arctic conditions.

(7)The labeling ‘waste’ in the middle of the image is misleading. In reality it consists of alternating compacted layers of garbage and soil. At the end of each day the garbage is machine compacted to about a quarter of its original volume then covered by a layer of soil.

(8) Interestingly, drinking water on the ‘International Space Station’ orbiting Earth since 1998 is recycled sweat, shower effluent and…(you guessed it)…urine. “It tastes like bottled water”, according to one of NASA’s water specialists.

(9)Adapted from ‘The Rime of the Ancient Mariner’ by the English poet Samuel Taylor Coleridge (1772-1834) depicting a ship and its crew marooned for days in the middle of the ocean without a whiff of wind to push them on their way. The verse in question: “Water, water, every where, And all the boards did shrink; Water, water, every where, Nor any drop to drink.”

(10)The distillation of crude oil is carried out in a fractionating column from which are withdrawn, at different levels, its constituent components. From top to bottom and lighter to heavier are the propane and butane gases (for cooking), petrol (for cars),kerosene (for jet aircraft), diesel oil (for generators) , fuel oil (for ships and heavy equipment), lubricating oils (for engines) and asphalt. The raw material for the production of plastics is processed, in petrochemical plants from the top gases.

Chapter illustration

(11) At present Bakelite is still used in electrical, automotive and aviation products. It was also part of the defunct (July, 2011) space shuttles.

(12) A diaper contains one top layer of polypropylene and a bottom one of polyethylene.

(13)From the 2014 UN report mentioned in the text: Plastic production has increased by 8.7% year on year from 1.7 million tonnes in 1950 to 288m tonnes in 2012. China is the world’s biggest producer, accounting for almost a quarter of output. Consumption is forecast to increase, with regions like Asia leading the growth. In 2012, the European plastic industry employed more than 1.4 m people.

(14) And, yet, petroleum or crude oil, the original source for all plastics is biodegradable for being composed of freely occurring in Nature, carbon and hydrogen molecules. Even so, an oil spill is nasty business. For example, let us consider the massive oil spill caused on April 10, 2010 by the drilling rig ‘Deepwater Horizon’ in the Gulf of Mexico off the southern shores of the USA (image right). It polluted 1800 kms of shorelines. As reported in Encyclopedia Britannica: “Economic prospects in the Gulf Coast states were dire, as the spill affected many of the industries upon which residents depended. More than a third of federal waters in the gulf were closed to fishing at the peak of the spill, due to fears of contamination…. Few travelers were willing to face the prospect of petroleum-sullied beaches, leaving those dependent on tourism struggling to supplement their incomes”.

Chapter illustration

An article dated May 25, 2010 in ‘Scientific American’ is introduced by the optimistic headline: “Bacteria and other microbes are the only thing that will ultimately clean up the ongoing oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico”. But the text which follows has many ifs and buts such as “the microbes break down hydrocarbons in "weeks to months to years, depending on the compounds and concentrations—not hours or days”. In the process of ingesting oil, “…these marine-dwelling bacteria…emit the greenhouse gas carbon dioxide (CO2) as a result”. However: “if the oil reaches shore, our recommendation [is] to leave the oil alone and let nature do it”.

This is much too long for those affected. Hence, the feverish activities to clean up the mess including the spraying of chemicals to give the bacteria more appetite to ingest the oil.

Wonder of Natural Selection

WONDER OF NATURAL SELECTION

The Author November 2021

WONDER OF NATURAL SELECTION

As is well known there are two stories to the emergence of life on this planet. The first, of which are aware since childhood, is creationism preached by Judaism, Christianity and Islam. The other is evolutionism championed by Charles Darwin (1809-1882) in the 19th century.

Thenceforth, Darwin’s work has been exhaustively researched, examined and, ultimately, accepted by biologists, anthropologists and geologists. They are convinced beyond doubt that they have cracked the ‘mysteries’ of life on Earth, acknowledging at the same time that the few remaining unproven occurrences/aspects will no doubt be one day explained by science.

This narrative is based on the first three chapters of ‘The Magic of Reality’ and ‘The Ancestor’s Tale’, subtitled ‘A Pilgrimage to the Dawn of Life’, published in 2012 and 2004 respectively. Both are authored by eminent British evolutionary biologist Richard Dawkins (D.O.B 1941).

What follows is divided into two parts. The first explains what evolution by natural selection is and how it happens. It then looks at genera-(plural of genus)-and species and finally scratches the surface of the proofs and evidence supporting the scholars’ certainty of the evolutionary process of life.

The second part describes a hypothetical journey, pilgrimage, by all extant-(still in existence)-complex organisms()-(hereafter: organisms)- across geologic times() back to the progenitor from whom all are issued. Of necessity it is a very abridged version of the contents of a large tome which, among others, covers in great details the gradual changes to individual organisms on their evolutionary path.

Finally, a clarification: In the text which follows all quotes in italic are the words of author Dawkins unless indicated otherwise.

Part-1 Survival of the fittest

Let us begin with author Dawkins’s assertion that there never was a first person or a first animal or plant. A primitive form of life arose about 4 billion years ago. From it all forms of life that have ever existed and that continue to exist, emerged in a very slow process of natural evolution scientifically known as ‘natural selection’ or ‘survival of the fittest’. That is to say, organisms have gradually arisen from simpler ones.

Animals and plants contain thousands of living and functioning components which, in turn, evolved from much simpler forms. Accordingly, there never ever was a first tree, a first crocodile or a first human being. Something that complicated could not have been tossed out of a bag containing its constituent parts which then, by chance, arranged themselves into a living being. This is likened to the probability of dealing four complete suits-(hearts, diamonds, clubs and spades)-to four players. Mathematicians have calculated that the possibility this happening is one in 53 ,644 ,737 ,765, 488 ,792 ,839, 237,440,000 deals.

In a nutshell, any coherent organism can only come about by “the slow magic of evolution”. The transformation from a simpler to a more complex organism was an extremely slow process. It was the outcome of “step by tiny step” changes, “so that what was there after each step was only a little bit different from what was already there before”.

Indeed, no plant or animal arrived in this world prepackaged ready to hit the ground running. No! At the beginning there was the merest form of life which evolved over thousands upon thousands of millennia into flowers, rhinos and of course humans. And “…ancestors that look like fish can change into descendants that look like monkeys” . And ultimately in the span of hundreds of millions of years “… ancestors that look like bacteria can change into descendants that look like humans”.

To illustrate the slow transformational progress of life through geological times, the author imagines a ‘thought experiment’-(not replicable physically)- in which you the reader proceed with a line-up of photographs beginning with one of yourself followed by that of your father, followed by that of your grandfather next to that of your great grandfather and so on till your 185 millionth great grandfather. Dawkins estimates this assemblage from the first to the last photograph to be more than sixty kilometres long. Now you begin moving along studying them. At any one stop along the line, you are looking at a person with comparable traits to the persons on either side-(within, of course, the normal differences in resemblances between father and son).

But by your 50 thousandth great grandfather some one mya()you are looking at the picture of a creature, rather ape-like, quite different from yourself and your immediate forebears and descendants. And so on. By your 185 millionth great grandfather you are staring at the picture of a fishlike creature.

Come to think of it, this is not so strange. Within a person’s own lifetime he/she hardly notices any physical differences in himself/herself on a year by year basis, let alone on a monthly or weekly basis, ad yet that person has during a lifespan of eight or nine decades changed from infant to a ripe old ager.

One form of limited evolution is selective breeding, practiced by humans for millennia. Let us say that one, for one reason or another, was interested in breeding rabbits with small ears, from the familiar long eared animal. The interested party would begin by selecting males and females with fractionally shorter ears. He would breed them taking care to keep them separated from the general rabbit population. Their offspring would have hardly noticeable smaller ears, but shorter nonetheless. The breeder’s family would keep on repeating the process so that after may be 10 or 15 generations there would have evolved a rabbit population with substantially shorter ears than the original forebears with whom the experiment was begun.

This illustrates selective breeding that farmers have practiced since probably the earliest days of animal husbandry 10,000 or so years ago. For example they manipulated cattle to come up with cows yielding more milk than what nature had endowed them with. Horse breeding is another human activity. In an earlier narrative we have seen that over 5 to 6,000 years ago the horse was transformed from an onager-(ass)- like creature to the big cavalry horse suitable for sustained gallop over long distances and to the sleek fast race horse. Another example is the breeding of dogs as covered hereinafter.

Selective breeding by humans is easy because its onset is an already established representative of certain species-(cattle, horses and dogs). It merely aims at modifying certain traits to suit human interests. This is a minuscule exercise compared to the tens of millennia long process of natural selection to transform a fishlike creature into, say, a long-tailed short hind-legged newt (image).

Some newts, in turn, under certain environmental and other pressures began to progressively change into tailless long hind-legged frogs (image). Those which succeeded were the fittest; they survived and prospered. But those which failed perished. In other words, natural selection dictated that newts with slightly shorter tails and longer hind legs should interbreed to produced offspring which over millions of generations had become frogs, flagrantly different animals. In fact they had, altogether produced an entirely new species (see about species hereinafter).

Similarly, natural selection favoured the fittest gazelles that could outrun predators. They survived and bred fast offspring which could run faster than cheetahs and leopards. Those gazelles that failed to adapt ended in the guts of the big cats. Stated succinctly “…those that survive do so because they are better equipped than others. So the survivors children inherit the genes that helped their parents to survive’.

Genera and species

In ‘On the Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection’, published in 1859, Charles Darwin explains that natural evolution is like a tree with a trunk, branches and sub-branches. The latter represent species while the branches from which they grow are the genera-(singular: genus). In reality, though, Darwin’s evolutionary tree is rather more involved but the foregoing simplification is sufficient for our purpose.

For example, lions, tigers, leopards and jaguars belong to four different species-(sub-branches)-of the Panthera genus-(branch). Moreover, every organism is scientifically identified by its genus followed by its species. Thus the lions and company are known respectively as Panthera leo, Panthera tigris, Panthera pardus and Panthera onca. Similarly Horses and donkeys belong to the caballus and asinus species of the Equus genus. ‘Canis lupus familiaris’ is the domestic dog while his cousins the wolf, the jackal and the coyote, are classified as Canis lupus, Canis aureus and Canis latrans. Canis of, course, being the genus populated by the preceding four species. But what about us, Homo sapiens? Again, we belong to the Homo genus along the other, extinct species, known as habilis, erectus neanderthal and a few more (see hereinafter).

There are many, many more genera and species. Actually “…2 million species have so far been given scientific names, and even these are just a small fraction of the number of species yet to be named”.

What causes same genus organisms to diverge into separate species? It happens when circumstances cause evolution on differing hereditary (DNA)lines, to such an extent the interbreeding is no longer possible. For example lions and tigers do not produce cubs together. And if it happens the offspring that ensue are infertile and cannot procreate. A case in point is the barren mule whose father and mother is respectively a donkey and a horse. The mule’s counterpart is the equally sterile hinny when the donkey/horse roles are reversed. The rule is then that organisms belong to the same species if they can interbreed and produce fecund progeny.

This same applies to sapiens and to other Homo species. Had they, for instance, co-existed with erectus (image) they would not have produced viable progeny together. On the other hand, sapiens shared territories with the neanderthal till their extinction 30 to 40,000 years ago. No evidence of interbreeding exists. Still some scholars maintain that the two were similar enough for a limited amount of mating to have taken place between them. So much so, that up to two percent of the DNA of modern Asians and Europeans is of neanderthal origin.

We now come to the tale of the dog. Today, there are more than 200 breeds of domestic dogs from the massive English mastiff (image right) which can reach 100 kg in weight to the tiny chihuahua of no more than 3kg (image left). But they all belong to the same species descended from an extinct wild wolf. Fertile mongrels can issue from the interbreeding of a mastiff with a chihuahua or indeed from that of a bulldog with a poodle and so on.

Survival is the aim of all organisms, animal and vegetal. It means nourishment and the production of descendants. Therefore, they seek to adapt to their environmental, geographic and existential circumstances. Indeed, only organisms which are able to adapt, live long and procreate. Those which, conversely, do not become extinct.

The one million dollars question. Why did organisms from a given genus split into different species in the first place? One crucial reason is geographic isolation. “It is mainly [geographic] separations… that were originally responsible for all new species that have ever arisen on this planet…”. Let me begin with the tale of the Iguanas of Guadeloupe.

In 1995, fifteen iguanas (image) were seen by fishermen arrive, on a floating tree, on the beach of the Caribbean island of Anguilla. Ostensibly, they had been adrift from the island of Guadeloupe 250 kms away, in the wake of a hurricane which had uprooted the tree on which they had perched. When they beached “…they crawled off… and began a new life, feeding and reproducing and passing on their DNA, on a brand new island home” and, no doubt, starting a new species of iguanas no longer able, in due geologic time, to mate with the like of their forebears. Stated differently, when two species drift apart their respective DNAs become incompatible.

The Galapagos is an archipelago in the eastern Pacific Ocean, 1,000 km west of the mainland of Ecuador (image). It has a total area of 8,100 sq kms. It consists of several volcanic islands that seem to have burst out of the deep about 6 million years ago, rather recent on the geological time scale. In due course life arose on them such that by the time Charles Darwin arrived in the 1830’s the islands were teeming with plants and animals. He found, among many more, large land and sea iguanas, huge tortoises nearly 100 kgs in weight (image) and many more reptiles and birds. Clearly, they were indigenous to the islands and yet had remarkable resemblances to species met in Central and South America. Accordingly and logically, Darwin concluded that their ancestors “must have started out as accidental colonists from Central and South America and then diverged from their ancestral stocks after arriving in the Galápagos”. I.e. in a similar fashion to the accidental arrival of the iguanas in Anguilla.

It is not known when the first iguanas rafted from the Americas to the Galapagos. In the process of adapting to their new ecosystems some of the iguanas learnt to swim and to feed on seaweeds. “Natural selection then favoured those individuals that became skilled swimmers [whose descendants] habitually dive to graze on underwater seaweeds”. In other words natural selection helped the fittest to adapt to their new ecosystems found on the Galapagos. So much so that the varieties of land and sea iguanas met by Darwin and his companions belonged to several species no longer able to interbreed. Similarly, the tortoises of the Galapagos consisted of more than one species for the same reason. So did a variety of reptiles and birds.

More. The proliferation of species was helped by that all the Galapagos islands consist of volcanoes individually surrounded by a ring of greenery, in the midst, otherwise, of wilderness. To the iguanas and all other organisms within that vegetation were ,thus, evolving and surviving in complete isolation from cousins of the same genus on the same or on other islands within the archipelago.

Not only remote islands and volcanoes -(and oases in the middle of deserts)- are isolated locations difficult if not impossible for organisms to cross but so are geographic obstructions such as impassable rivers on whose banks different species evolve independently as well as mountains and valleys. So much so that according to some scholars, the ‘Great Rift Valley’ in Africa()(image) caused the separation of the Pan genus-(that of the chimpanzees)-from the Homo genus, with each evolving separately on either side of the valley.

In order to explain the evolution through natural selection of genera and species, author Dawkins resorts to an easy to understand analogy; that of the diffusion of languages. For example, French, Italian, Spanish and Portuguese belong to the Romance family of languages-(relating to the Latin of ancient Rome). Similarly Arabic, Hebrew and Aramaic trace their origin to the Semitic family of languages. We may easily transpose Homo genus for Romance and sapiens, erectus and neanderthal for French, Italian or Spanish. In each case these national languages, like species have drifted apart at a time of difficult inter-communication. And in the process of evolving separately, compatibility between them has been lost.

A very legitimate question is how can evolutionary biologists, the likes of Richard Dawkins and other scientists, be so certain about occurrences and events which took place hundreds of millions of years ago.

Well, to begin with are fossils defined by Britannica as “…remnant, impression, or trace of an animal or plant of a past geologic age that has been preserved in Earth’s crust”. The images here show the two main types of fossils. The first, right, is an imprint, the other, left, is a faithful replica of the creature which dropped dead at the place it was discovered. And then there is DNA, the genetic (hereditary) information carried in the cells of every organism.

But how can scholars tell of the relative ages of individual long gone organisms? For this they have developed a variety of techniques, one of which depends on the chemical and other properties of rocks to estimate the geological ages of the periods in question.

Obviously, the types of findings, procedures and techniques are much more complex but the foregoing is sufficient for our purpose.

Part-2 Pilgrimage.

Pilgrimage is the term used by author Dawkins. In the context of ‘The Ancestor’s Tale’ it describes a hypothetical journey by all extant organisms towards the source of life from which they are all issued. Somewhat like mundane pilgrims from diverse corners of the world congregating to a place of worship or otherwise, at a certain time of the year. But unlike them, our pilgrims, instead of crossing distances in kilometres, travel through geologic eras, measured in hundreds of millions of years, to ultimately all assemble at the location of their common progenitor some 4 billion years ago.

Returning for a moment to the evolutionary tree of life mentioned in the previous part, our travelers simultaneously proceed along their sub-branches, meet others at the junctions with branches and ultimately all come together at the trunk for the final push to their destination. The pilgrimage, thus, is a series of convergences of extant species toward the “largest convergence of all [taking any] modern creature- animal, plant, fungus or bacterium-back to the universal progenitor of all surviving organisms, probably resembling some kind of bacterium”. Every convergence ends at a junction or a node. In the present context every nodal point represents a common ancestor or ‘concestor’ for the organisms, from several tree ramifications, meeting there.

In the text hereinafter the pronouns ‘us’ and ‘we’ as well as the phrases ‘join us’ or ‘joining us’ recur. This is because I am reporting on the pilgrimage from the perspective of Homo sapiens. But this is quite arbitrary, because we could just as well have done so from the perspective of any other species. In that case Homo sapiens would be joining them instead.

At the appointed time, we start the backwards journey. As we reach the 6 mya mark we come together, somewhere in Africa, with today’s chimpanzees and bonobos of the Pan genus at concestor 1 (image). In all likelihood that progenitor looked not only very different from us but also from today’s chimps and bonobos. Scholars presume that concestor 1 had two offspring who became respectively the great-great-great-great etc. grandfather of the Homo and Pan genera.

With cousins chimp and bonobo we proceed backward to join up successively with the gorilla, orangutan and gibbon at concestors 2,3 and, 4 respectively. By then 18 million years have been traveled. Together, we belong the Hominoidea family(image) of tailless Great Apes.

With the rest of the Great Apes we continue our trek backwards through geologic eras separating consecutive concestors by several million of years. At each of the concestral nodes up number 15, we are joined by , and moving along with the rest of the placental mammals. That is to say all hoofed animals, carnivores, rodents, marsupials -(such as kangaroos)- and many, many more along, of course, with the Great Apes. At concestor 15, 180 mya we meet one final mammal: platypus or duckbill (image). But unlike the rest he does not carry his pre-birth young in a placenta. Instead, they emerge from eggs.

“Concestor 16, our approximately 170-million-greats-grandparent [and 320mya away] would have looked superficially like some sort of lizard”. Clearly, the immediate descendants of concestor 16 are the progenitors of the all foregoing mammals and the sauropsids we are now coming to meet. Counting as sauropsids are all extant egg laying reptiles and birds. Among the reptiles are lizards, snakes, turtles and, crocodiles. It is noteworthy the long extinct dinosaurs belonged to that line. According to author Dawkins, even without the dinosaurs sauropsids by far outnumber mammals. He estimates that there are 20,000 of the former against 5,500 of the latter.

As the backward pilgrimage continues, cousins amphibians-( frogs, newts and salamanders)- equally happy on land as in water are met at concestor 17, 340 mya. With them tagging along we proceed to concestor 18, our “185-million-greats- parent” of 415 mya. There we are joined by the lungfish (image right). From then on, our common “ancestry will remain entirely marine for the rest of our backwards journey”. So much so that the next concestor of 460mya is number 21. We share him with sharks, and rays (image left).

With all those species, so far assembled, we progress on our backward pilgrimage. On the way as we pass concestors 22 to 30 we become a larger and larger crowd as we are joined by a great variety of crustaceans, mollusks (images right) and worms etc. Eventually we reach concestor 31 some 650 mya, the progenitor of all in the kingdom of Animalia, including ourselves, naturally. Surprise, surprise that ‘n’ hundred millionth great grandparent consist of sponges (image left). Sponges are considered to belong to the animal realm for, despite their stationary stance, they “…make their living by passing a ceaseless current of water right through the body, from which they filter food particles”. Further, Sponges have been seen to ‘sneeze’ meaning “contracting their whole body…..to clear detritus from within”.

We are now nearing the 1 billion-years-ago mark . The time has come to meet our cousins of the plant world. The first encounter takes place at concestor 35, we share with fungi (image). Again, fungi are “more closely related to animals than they are to plants”. Apart from a few that sprout above ground the majority of fungi are inconspicuous. There are today 4 million species of fungi of which only 99 thousand have been identified including many varieties of mushrooms.

Our last but one concestor is number 38. He is the one we share with the organisms ultimately leading to world vegetation (image). All these trees, and green plants are labelled by author Dawkins “light harvesters” because, they nourish themselves from the inexhaustible sun energy through photosynthesis; instead of living off other organisms or their “decaying remains” as all the pilgrims so far. More, they contribute a significant part of the biomass “…put together by energy from the sun, by photosynthesis carried out in plants on land and algae in the sea…”. So much so that “Life could get along without animals and without fungi. But abolish the light harvesters, and life would rapidly cease”. Noteworthy are phytoplankton, the source of nutrition for many marine creatures. Phytoplankton (image) are light harvesters, floating near the water surface.

At last, we are on the last leg of the journey. Let’s not deceive ourselves, however, because our final destination is still it is still about 2 billion years farther; as long as covered already. At the end of that 4-billion-year journey is concestor 40, a eubacterium (image) described as “the singularity [i.e. something special or peculiar] known as the origin of life….better the origin of heredity”.

In conclusion, I would first like to clear one misconception. An organism arising from a simpler one, as stated hereinbefore, in no way implies that the latter is an incomplete version of the former struggling to survive. The fact of the matter is that at no stage in the evolutionary process is an organism anything but the fittest to survive and earn its living. That is to say that at no time was an organism in transition to a more complete one.

Let’s consider the several Homo species. Erectus with whom we shared an ape-like concestor, was never an incomplete or half-way sapiens. In reality erectus was one of the more successful Homo species. He lived, procreated and functioned well for over one and a half million years, about eight time as long as sapiens to date. Similarly, neanderthal who survived from 400,000 to 40,000 years ago; again longer than humans to date, was never an unachieved sapiens; he was the fittest for his times and environment.

We have already met newts of which there are, presently, several species. Those among them that changed into frogs thousands of millennia ago were never newts waiting to become frogs. At every stage of that transformation they had to be the fittest; else they would have perished. Finally, our 185 millionth fish like concestor 18 was a creature who survived, procreated and otherwise did well not anticipating that some of his descendants would evolve to anything else.

With this out of the way, what can one say except WOW! What a ride.

According to author Dawkins and his community of scientists life originated only once three to four billion years ago, and moved in the direction described hereinbefore . Otherwise had there been another source with a parallel line of evolution; evidence of it would by now have been discovered. “We can be very sure that there really is a single concestor of all surviving lifeforms on this planet…we are in no doubt at all that all living creatures are our cousins, and cousins of each other… The evidence is that all that have ever been examined share…the same genetic code…”

No Species Lasts Forever

NO SPECIES LASTS FOREVER

All extinct. From left to right : erectus, mammoth, megalodon shark and saint Helena olive tree.

The Author July 2025

REFERENCES

CNN: **What is a mass extinction, and why do scientists think etc. **The ‘Great Dying’ wiped out 90% of life etc. Encyclopedia Britannica: **Extinction. **Human-induced extinctions. **Megafaunal extinctions **Titanosaurs: 8 of the World's Biggest Dinosaurs. **What are the different types of extinction? Wikipedia. **Extinction. **Holocene extinction **Late Pleistocene extinctions.

And a few other references.

‘NO SPECIES LASTS FOREVER’

The title of this narrative ‘No Species lasts forever’ implies that extinction is part of the natural orderly evolution of life. Extinction is defined by Britannica as “the dying out or extermination of a species”.

Traditionally, scientists recognise two types of organism extinctions. They are the ‘background’ and the ‘mass’ extinctions.

A ‘background extinction’ is a natural one resulting from the normal progression of evolution. The dying out process is usually long-drawn lasting many millennia. ‘Background extinctions’ constitute the majority of such occurrences.

As for ‘mass extinctions’, they are caused by sudden cataclysmic events. They occasion the disappearance of many plant and animal species in relatively short time periods measured in decades and centuries. Throughout the history of our Globe, there have been five such catastrophic events. Still, fortunately each time, enough organisms escaped and continued the evolutionary progress. Obviously so, otherwise we would not be here at present.

Having said this, scientists have estimated that throughout the 4 billion years existence of our planet more than 90 percent of species that have ever evolved have died out for one reason or another. Currently there are nearly 9 million species of animals and plants, not counting microorganisms, of which there are many, many more species.

At present we are in the midst of what scientists identify as the sixth mass extension. According to them, it is more consequential than the five that have preceded it. Unlike them, however, this one is the result of the interference of modern Homo-sapiens with Earth’s environment as to make the continuation of life for other species impossible.

This narrative is about them.

Background extinctions

Background-(or natural)-extinction happens when a species is no longer able to adapt to changes in its environment to such an extent that the number of new-borns progressively start to fall behind those of deaths. Eventually that particular species disappears.

Typically, the lifespan of a species varies between 1 to 10 million years, depending on biological and environmental circumstances. As example, suffices, to consider our long gone cousins, Homo habilis and Homo erectus who lived for nearly 800,000 and 1.8 million years respectively, before vanishing.

There are many factors at play when it comes to background extinctions. Among them: **Changes in ambient conditions. **Arrival on the scene of a new species of predators, which with time decimate local flora and fauna. ** Escalating competition for finite resources, disadvantages the ‘weaker species. ** The loss of one species may have a domino effect on others. In its simplest form the demise of species may lead to the starvation and death on another which preyed on it.

Mass extinctions

The fifth and last mass extinction happened 66 mya-(million years ago). The preceding 400 million years had witnessed four such fatal blows to life on Earth. All of them resulted in the dying-out of significant numbers of species both an land and in the oceans.

They were, variously, caused by extreme heating or cooling of the environment of the Globe, rising and dropping sea levels, acidification of bodies of water, deficiencies in the amounts of oxygen in marine environments, vital for the survival of aquatic organisms. Still, as stated earlier, in the aftermath of each of these calamitous events ,a few organisms managed to survive, procreate and continue with their evolutionary journey. Follows the story of two of them.

About 252 mya the most consequential of all 5 mass extinctions struck life on Earth. It was so pervasive and mighty that scientists have dubbed it the ‘Great Dying’ . It was triggered by volcanic eruptions which spewed large quantities greenhouse gases into the atmosphere, resulting in exceptional heating of the Globe.

In addition to the ensuing extreme ambient temperatures, oceans acidified, lost their ability to absorb carbon dioxide from the atmosphere and to retain Life-supporting concentrations of dissolved oxygen. But worse of all, according to a very recent study, was the dying of tropical forests, thus losing their capacity to absorb large quantities carbon dioxide. Instead, the gas remained in the atmosphere. So much so that “The planet became lethally hot and remained so for 5 million years”, according to that study as reported by CNN.

That catastrophe cost the life of no less than 90 to 95% of plants and animal species both on land and in the water. Still, despite it all, the small fraction of Life which survived, evolved in the millions of years which followed into “different creatures….displaying many new ways of existence with features such as feathers, hair and speedy locomotion” in the words in the article reported by CNN.

There is at present general agreement among scientists that what caused the mass extinction of 66 mya was the gigantic impact of a huge body-( possibly 10 km in diameter)- travelling at great speed from outer space. It buried itself in the ground in today’s Yucatan Peninsula, Mexico. Again according to CNN: “The strike triggered a period of global cooling, with dust, soot and sulfur thrown up during the impact blocking the sun and likely shutting down photosynthesis, a key process for life”.

It obliterated 80% of animal species and a great many plants. Most notably, a large part of dinosaurs were wiped out. But not all of them. Survived the ancestors of birds, crocodiles, lizards, snakes and turtles.

Among the dinosaurs that vanished were the huge ‘titanosaurs’-(from titan meaning gigantic). They were herbivorous, walked on four legs, had long necks and tails. They were longer, taller and many tonnes heavier than any of today’s elephants, hippos or rhinos. The image is that of one of them called ‘Patagotitan mayorum’. From the fossils found, scientists have estimated that in life it measured more than 37 m long and weighed, possibly as much as 70 tonnes.

The demise of the massive dinosaurs had a silver lining. It enabled mammals-(and eventually humans) to evolve and develop.

Extinction of the megafauna

Between the last mass extinction and the onset of the sixth, hereinafter, there was the episode of killing of the megafauna-(very large animals)-, at the places where Homo-sapiens migrated to after leaving Africa, its birthplace.

They arrived in Australia/New Guinea 30,000 years ago, at that time, the habitat of two dozen large animals. To name a few, hey included, 200kg, 2m kangaroos, large ostriches, giant pythons, 1000 kg lizards, giant diprotodons and 2.5 ton wombats. A few millennia later 23 of the original 24 animal genera (each genus counting one or several species)-, no longer existed. Only the ancestor of present day kangaroos survived.

Similarly, Homo sapiens reached the northern shores of the American continent some 13,000 years ago. As they travelled south they discovered a vast land teeming with large fauna such as mammoths, horses, camels and 7,000 kg, 6m high sloths and plenty of birds and reptiles. Again, within a few millennia North America had lost 34 of its original 47 animal genera and South America 50 out of its starting 60.

For a time, scientists attributed these extinctions primarily to climate change while not denying a part played by Homo sapiens. But a recent study, according to Wikipedia, has put the blame for that massacre, squarely, on the overkills practiced by humans.

Sixth extinction

Let me begin this part by defining the term natural world-(or biosphere). According to Google’s ‘AI Overview’ it “refers to everything existing or occurring in nature, as opposed to things created or caused by humans. It encompasses all living organisms… natural phenomena. Essentially, it's the planet Earth and all its components that exist independently of human intervention”. In other words, it is a Life-sustaining, biodiverse-(dissimilar/divergent)-,system in which each constituent part-(plant, animal, climate etc.)- plays the role it evolved for, without outside interference.

Yet, outside interference is, precisely, what our species has been aggressively practicing for the last few millennia. It is doing so at the risk of destabilizing a system that has endured for three billion years.

At present, the activities of humans have reached such a level of disruption to the constituents of the Global biosphere, that scientists are convinced they are witnessing the progress of a sixth mass extinction, on a much bigger scale than the five we have looked at hereinbefore.

Not coincidentally, the sixth extinction events emerged in the wake of the establishment of agricultural production and the domestication of useful docile animals. Progressively it grew in scope as villages, then cities , then empires were built; and as populations grew.

But, in the last 200 years, human manipulation of Earth’s biosphere soared in response to industrialisation, technological progress, production of tools of war, transportation and consumption by an exploding population from 1 billion globally in 1850 to nearly 8 billion in 2020. All, aggressively and mercilessly driven by the untouchability of capitalist and growth dogmas. This is clearly unsustainable. It, simply means bleeding the biosphere to death. No wonder then, that, according to Britannica, present “human beings (Homo sapiens) are the greatest threat to biodiversity and are the major drivers of biodiversity loss”.

The sixth extinction is leaving no plant or animal untouched. All vertebrates are at the risk of disappearing , so are birds, reptiles, amphibians, fish, and other marine creatures to name a few. How so? Well because of:

Destruction of terrestrial and marine habitats-(natural ecosystem in which a species lives and reproduces). Such as deforestation-(image right) and changing the character of virgin lands etc. to make room for farmlands, pastures, urbanisation, roads, and mining-(image left).

According to Britannica, already “less than one-sixth of the land area of Europe has remained unmodified by human activity and more than half of all wildlife habitat has been eliminated in more than four-fifths of countries in the paleo-tropics”-(red area in image).

An example of the harm caused by the destruction of habitat, is the mining and associated processes to obtain coltan, a mineral that goes in the manufacture electronic devices, in Africa. The ore extraction takes place in the hitherto habitat of a species of gorillas, which have been killed or displaced. An as the local population have been, equally, displaced to unfamiliar places, they have resorted to killing the remaining gorillas for their meat.

Altering Earth environment through man-made climate change and pollution. Global warming increases the temperature and acidify of oceans and reduces the oxygen contents of their waters. All extremely bad news for those creatures living there. Worse perhaps, it kills coral reefs ‘the rain forests of the sea’ which are home to a multitudes of fishes, mollusks, turtles and what have you. The demise of reefs means their death of these animals which, as it happens, are vial for the livelihood of many coastal and islands dwelling people.

As for pollution, suffices to point to the tragic suffocation of turtles with plastic items, dumped in the oceans, and mistaken by the animals for food.

Overfishing. The image shows the result of indiscriminate fishing-(trawling)- on a large scale. Doing so is not sustainable because it overtakes the capacity of fishes and others to reproduce themselves. According to National Geographic , should this practice not be moderated, it “threatens the world's oceans and…could end in catastrophe”.

Killing pollinators. These are the insects which carry fertilizing pollen from one plant to the other. Their numbers are declining thanks to the massive use of insecticides and others. In this context, Wikipedia reports that no less than “75% of [humans] food crops” depend on pollinators.

Harvesting. This has nothing to do with the gathering of agricultural produce. Instead, it means the capture of animals for sale as pets or otherwise. Britannica writes “about 20 million tropical fish and 12 million corals are harvested annually for the aquarium trade, depleting natural populations in some parts of the world”. Harvesting, also, means poaching or the killing of animals for their body parts such as shark fins, crocodile skins and the horns of rhinos and the tusks of elephants.

Let me conclude with this. In his 2017 book ‘Homo Deus’, historian Yuval Noah Harari, writes that Earth “is populated mainly by humans and their domesticated animals”. Consider. By the end of the first decade of the 21st century, there were globally 400 and 600 million domesticated dogs and cats against 200,000 wolves and 40,ooo lions respectively. In addition, against the 1.5 billion cows and 20 billion chickens in the world farms there are only 900,000 wild buffalos and 50 million penguins in the wild respectively.

Destroying biodiversity and causing the extinction of other species is bad for Homo-sapiens too. Ultimately, we may end up with a no longer Life-friendly planet. An unhabitable one.

Building Blocks of Everything

THE BUILDING BLOCKS OF EVERYTHING

Everything. Absolutely everything that exists anywhere-(the cosmos)-is made up of atoms and molecules. Everything one can touch, see, smell etc. The sun, moon, planets, our bodies, the air we breathe, water we drink, food we eat, clothes, shoes and ornaments we wear, the houses we live in, all the modes of transport we use and many more. In short, every solid, liquid and gas is made of atoms and molecules.

Atoms came about as part of the gigantic event scientists call the Big Bang which gave rise to the Universe some 13.7 billion years ago(). This, I have covered in my narrative ‘The Universe and our place in it’. They are so tiny they cannot be seen by the most powerful microscope. More. They are not made of matter. Rather they consist of electric charges. This being so, how, then, do we know of and about them? Indeed, how can we be certain they are the building blocks of all matter?

We do thanks to physicists who set up ‘scientific models’ on the basis of learned assumptions, calculations and then test them. If necessary, they modify and tweak their models and assumptions until the results finally match the realities they observe and sense in nature. As explained by biologist Richard Dawkins: “They predict what you’ll find if you do a particular experiment and make certain measurements”.

Thus, following decades of research and experimentation, since the 19th century, we know that an atom is “a tiny, miniaturized solar system”. As we have already seen in my referenced to narrative, planets such as Earth, Venus, Mars and the rest circle the sun along near-circular trajectories called orbits. Similarly, an atom consists of a mass in the center called a nucleus housing protons and neutrons with electrons orbiting it (image). Electrons are about 1,000 times smaller than protons and neutrons. And whereas the planets keep their respective distances from the sun thanks to gravitational forces. In this case, electrons are kept in their orbits, vis-à-vis the nucleus by electromagnetic forces.

How far away is an electron from the center of the atom? If, say, the nucleus of an atom is the size of a tennis ball, the atom would be a sphere nearly 450 metres in diameter “or about the size of one of the largest sports stadiums in the world”. And that is not all. That sphere would be nothing but vast empty spaces.

In the whole cosmos there are no more than 94 natural elements each of which corresponds to one, and only one, atom with a given number of protons in its nucleus. For example, an atom with a nucleus containing 82 protons is that of the element: Lead. It cannot be anything but lead. And no other atom anywhere can have 82 protons and not be lead. To illustrate this, I reproduce this fact graphically below, for six selected common elements.

Scientists are absolutely sure that all matter anywhere is made of these elements. That is to say, Earth itself, anything in and on it as well as all planets in the vast space around it are made of these elements. How can they be so cocky?

This is so because there are exactly 94 ‘sizes’ of atoms, starting with that with one proton in its nucleus for Hydrogen and ending with 94 protons for Plutonium. In between there is one definite element for each successive number of protons. Therefore, there are no ‘vacancies’ for any as yet undiscovered natural elements-(The number 94 cannot be exceeded, but I will not go into why it is so, here). So much so, physicists are convinced that should we, one day, receive a visit from extraterrestrials, and if they and their equipment are made of cosmic matter, that in turn would inevitably be made of some of these elements.

Suppose one takes a lump of lead and cuts it in two, then again, each half in two and continues bisecting. No matter how tiny the resulting piece gets it will always be lead. But let’s suppose, hypothetically, one reaches the level of the atom with, let’s remember, 82 protons. Cutting that atom in two will result in two atoms of 41 protons each. They can no longer be called lead. Instead, they now correspond to the element called Niobium(). As summarized by author Dawkins “An atom of lead is the smallest object that still deserves to be called lead”.

Let us now consider two very familiar substances: drinking water and table salt. Neither is a natural element. In other words, there are no atoms among the 94 stated called water or salt. That is because their basic building block is the molecule formed by more than one atom coming together. Thus, a molecule of water and one of salt are the results of the merger, so to speak, of two atoms of Hydrogen and one atom of Oxygen, on the one hand, and one atom of Sodium and one of Chlorine, on the other, as illustrated below.

It is not necessary for the molecule of a substance to be formed from atoms of different elements. Indeed, the molecules forming a precious and expensive diamond are nothing but the coming together of Carbon atoms in a certain configuration (image)().

Water, salt and diamond are only three of the hundreds of substances in the cosmos, including the constituents of plant, animal and human life on Earth, resulting from “the combination and recombination of the ninety or so naturally occurring elements [or atoms]”.

I want to end with a legitimate question. How come rock and diamond, for example, are so hard and difficult to break when their constituting atoms, as we have seen, are ‘spheres’ of vast empty spaces separating nuclei and electrons. The answer as given by author Richard Dawkins is: “We have to realize that what we feel and see as solid matter is more than just nuclei and electrons…[there are] ‘forces’ and ‘bonds’ and ‘fields’…which act…to keep [the nuclei and electrons in their respective places]…And it is those forces and fields that make things feel solid”. I must admit I do not quite get this. But I am more than happy to take his word for it.

The Universe and Our Place in It

THE UNIVERSE AND OUR PLACE IN IT

Chapter illustration

The Author

INTRODUCTION

THIS PROJECT IS about the Universe and what is inside it, including ourselves on our planet. To start with, I have searched, unsuccessfully, for appropriate adjectives to qualify the scale of things with respect to it, its stars, planets and the immensities of its empty spaces. Qualifiers such as huge, enormous and even astronomical do not, in my view, adequately convey the gigantism of distances ,sizes, time spans and temperatures associated with the Universe. I have written these, instead, with figures followed by as many zeros as necessary and practicable, in hope, the quantities they represent will be more meaningful to readers. As we proceed, we will come across terms and phrases which, I feel, is best to clarify them at the outset.

A star is described in Encyclopedia Britannica, as “any massive self-luminous celestial body of gas that shines by radiation derived from its internal energy sources”. The Sun is our nearest star.

Space dust. Unlike common household dust, it consists, instead, of microscopic particles of carbon and/or silicates(rock forming minerals).

What is gravity? It is, as defined in Encyclopedia Britannica:“… the universal force of attraction acting between all matter. Through its long reach and universal action”. The more ‘massive’ a body , the stronger its gravity. Much more. Gravity is intimately linked to weight in kilograms or pounds or whatever. In fact without it, weight for inanimate object such as rocks or living entities as plants, animals and humans, has no meaning. But they all have mass. It is the amount of matter in them, such as muscle, bones and fat in flesh and blood creatures. When mass is acted upon by gravity it becomes weight. Thus, for example, a person weighing 100 kgs on Earth weighs 38 kgs on Mars for it is less massive, or 250 kgs on Jupiter because it is more so. And if she/ he could stand on the Sun, she/ he would weigh a whopping 2,800 kgs, because the Sun is immeasurably more massive than Earth, Mars and Jupiter combined and much, much more,as will become clear later.

Then we have the light year(LY). It is the distance travelled by a light beam in 365 days,. It corresponds to nine trillion and four hundred sixty billion and eight hundred million (9,460,800,000,000)() kms. Truly incomprehensible, let alone actual spatial distances in the thousands, millions and billions of LY appearing in the text which follows.

Black Holes? What are these? Well, believe it or not, a Black Hole is“…a place in space where gravity [is so strong] that even light cannot get out”; meaning it swallows all matter and even light itself into oblivion.

THE UNIVERSE

Chapter illustration

Universe, then, now and in between

THE UNIVERSE, SHORT for ‘Observable Universe is a sphere of “all matter that can be observed  from Earth at the present time”. This matter is the sum total of absolutely everything. Most remarkably it is home to tens of billions of trillions (10s) x (1,000,000,000s) x (1,000,000,000,000s) of stars and of plenty of others such as hundreds of billions (100s) x (1,000,000,000) of planets and unimaginably vast ‘empty’ spaces filled with dust and gases. But, apart from matter, the Universe is also the originator of all forms of life, all the laws of physics, chemistry, biology and of other sciences governing all that goes on inside it.

Until the 20th century it was assumed that the Universe with all its constituents has always existed it its present form. That it is immutable and will remain so till infinitum. But thanks to the work of the like of Albert Einstein (1874-1955), Max Planck (1858-1947), Edwin Hubble (1889-1953) and the incredible, physically impaired and wheel chair bound Stephen Hawking (1942-2018),who died in March, the Universe has definitely had a beginning and in all likelihood, will, in due course, have an end.

Once upon a time 13,700,000,000 years ago, a tiny particle, scientists call ‘singularity’ of infinite density, energy and temperature in the order of one 1,000,000,000 deg C burst into what became the Universe. In other words, all masses and energy in the present day cosmos were concentrated in that ‘singularity’. This event is known as the Big Bang. Equally flabbergasting is that the filling up of the astronomically vast nothingness took less than 1/1000,000,000,000 of a second. What is more, the Big Bang also inaugurated the beginning of time.

Beginning of time? How so? Well let me explain it the way I did to myself. To us humans, time means change; it means night following day and seasons inexorably, succeeding, one another. But perhaps, above all, it means the passage of generations with all its implications. Obviously, it then follows that prior to the Big Bang, none of these existed: there was absolutely nothing. Clearly, time had no meaning.

After the Big Bang all matter released proceeded, progressively during eons, to cool and organize itself into stars, planets etc. Astoundingly the Universe continues, at present, its expansion. In other words the distances between galaxies (intergalactic spaces) are constantly becoming wider. Currently, astronomers and physicists estimate the diameter of the Universe at a gargantuan 91 LY. They can do so thanks to up to date land based and Earth circling observatories such as the Hubble Telescope shown here. But the Universe cannot go on expanding indefinitely. In the same way it was born more than a dozen billion years ago it will die swallowed by ‘Black Holes’ in some 20,000,000,000 years down the line.

Chapter illustration

Let us conclude with Stephen Hawking’s words: “The General Theory of Relativity [Einstein in 1915] and the discovery of the expansion of the universe [ Edwin Hubble in 1929) shattered the old picture of an ever existing and everlasting universe. Instead, general relativity predicted that the universe, and time itself, would begin in the big bang. It also predicted that time would come to an end in black holes….much more work will be needed….. Despite having had some great successes, not everything is solved…. We are getting close to answering the age old questions. Why are we here? Where did we come from?”

GALAXIES AND OUR OWN MILKY WAY.

Chapter illustration

STARS AND PLANETS in the Universe do not remain singly each on its merry way. Instead, gradually, after the Big Bang, they proceeded to cluster and form galaxies of different sizes and shapes depending on individual circumstances. They are held together by mutually acting gravitational forces. Consider the following:

There are 100,000,000,000 galaxies in the Observable Universe.

A galaxy may contain hundreds of billions, (100s) x (1,000,000,000s) of stars and planets ranging in size from a few hundreds to hundreds of thousand LY across, with millions of LY of spaces in between, filled with dust and gases. Our own galaxy, the Milky Way (above left) is about 150,000 LY in diameter, whereas the nearest neighbour, the Andromeda galaxy (above left), is 220,000 LY across and 2,500,000 LY away from us.

At the centres of several galaxies are immense Black Holes.

Galaxies are constantly changing, through mergers with other bigger or smaller galaxies (above middle) often resulting in the formation of new stars. For instance, the Milky Way and Andromeda galaxies are racing toward each other at nearly 500,000 km/hr. They are expected to meet, in something like 4,000,000,000 years, without it necessarily being a cataclysmic event.

So much so that astronomers recently estimated that at the beginning there were ten times more galaxies than at present. Throughout the eons since the Big Bang, they have become bigger and fewer. According to their report,there is presently strong “evidence that a significant galaxy evolution has taken place throughout the universe's history, which dramatically reduced the number of galaxies through mergers between them - thus reducing their total number.”

As we have seen, our own Milky Way galaxy is 150,000 LY across; it is some 1,000 LY in thickness. Inside that gigantism are 100 to 400,000,000,000 stars including the Sun, 100,000,000,000 planets and a black hole in the center whose gravity is powerful enough to swallow up 4,000,000 Suns. Furthermore, astronomers estimate that at least 17,000,000,000 of the stars are the size of the Sun and that each has at least one planet attached to it. Stated differently, there are a great deal more solar systems variously bigger or smaller than ours in the Milky Way; and as with other galaxies, the ‘emptiness’ between stars and planets is ‘filled’ with gases, dust etc. Finally all systems, ours included, gyrate, in unison, about the centre of the Milky Way at an average speed of 800,000 km/hr. And to wrap it all up, the entire galaxy with its billions of stars, suns and the rest, in turn, “is moving at a [speed] of approximately [2,150,000 km/hr] with respect to extragalactic frames of reference”().

A legitimate question is how do astronomers and physicists know so much about the shape of the Milky Way given that they are inside it? According to the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA): “…we live in the suburbs of our galaxy…. We can only take pictures of the Milky Way from inside the galaxy, which means we don't have an image of the Milky Way as a whole… Why do we think it is a barred spiral galaxy, then? There are several clues….” etc. And if NASA says so…I am happy enough.

WHAT COULD BE seen with the naked eye of the Milky Way was speculated about since Antiquity. But the realization that it consists of an assemblage of a huge number of stars had to await Galileo Galilei (1564-1642) and his invention of the telescope in 1610. Astonishingly, however, until the early 1920s, astronomers believed that the Milky Way constituted the entirety of the Universe. This changed with Edwin Hubble in the later part of the decade who realized that the Milky Way was only one of billions of similar galaxies.

SOLAR SYSTEM

OUR OWN SOLAR system (shown below) is located at the edge of the Milky Way galaxy at 25,000 LY from its centre. It started at the time of the Big Bang as an ‘interstellar cloud’ of hydrogen and helium gases and small solid particles. It took its present shape 4,600,000,000 years ago through coalescence. It consists of the Sun and eight Planets from the nearest to the Sun, Mercury to the farthest Neptune. Until 1992 Pluto was thought of as the ninth planet, but since then astronomers have downgraded it to the status of dwarf planet. In addition there are numerous moons and countless asteroids; the latter in the Asteroid Belt between Mars and Jupiter. Finally at the edge of the solar system is the Kuiper Belt.

Chapter illustration

Mercury, Venus Mars and Earth are called terrestrial planets because they are made of rock and minerals. On the other hand, colossal Jupiter and Saturn are nothing but hydrogen and helium gases. As to the farthest pair, Uranus and Neptune, according to NASA, they are “made of a thick soup of water, ammonia, and methane over an Earth-sized solid center. Its atmosphere is made of hydrogen, helium, and methane”.

The whole solar system is held together by the gravitational pull of the Sun which accounts for more than 99% of the mass of the entire group. The four giants Jupiter, Mars, Uranus and Neptune share 99% of the remaining 1% of the total mass. Thus, in the final analysis, Earth and the other three terrestrial planets represent less than 0.02 % of the total mass of the solar system.

All planets rotate about their respective axes; they, therefore, exhibit alternations of night and day. Next, each from Mercury to the Kuiper Belt revolve around (orbit) the Sun (see 1 in Appendix) at individual speeds and periods shown in the table below. But that is not all: the entire system, including the sun, orbit the centre of the Milky Way at a speed of 800,000 km/hr. Our galaxy is so vast that at this speed it takes the solar system 250,000,000 years to complete one revolution. In other words, it was where it is now some 3,000,000 years before the emergence of the dinosaurs. According to one source: were the whole solar system the size of a coin (about 2.5 cm ), the Milky Way galaxy would correspond to the size of China.

Chapter illustration

The Sun, like millions of other stars in the Universe, is a ball of fire 1,400,000 kms in diameter. In reality it is an immeasurably large hydrogen bomb. It is made of hydrogen gas, which through a process called fusion consumes itself and changes into inert helium, generating in the process tremendous amounts of heat and incandescence; its core and surface temperatures are at 15,000,000 and 5,500 deg C respectively.

This is for now, because the Sun had a beginning and will have an end. It came about some 4,600,000,000 years ago; it is presently in its middle age and expanding. In 2,000,000,000 years its light and heat will be so intense that Earth would become as hot as Venus today; obviously too hot to sustain life as we know it. In 5,000,000,000 years it will have become, what astronomers call a red giant. Eventually having consumed all its reserves of hydrogen and helium, “the sun will mostly disappear in a cloud of dust and debris leaving a tiny core…which will cool and fade”, as explained by Professor Dawkins.

Of the four terrestrial planets only Venus, Earth and Mars have atmospheres hence exhibiting weather phenomena. Venus’s is hot, thick and overwhelmingly composed of heat trapping carbon dioxide. According to NASA this atmosphere “traps the….energy from the sun that does reach the surface along with the heat the planet itself releases. This greenhouse effect has made the surface and lower atmosphere of Venus one of the hottest places in the solar system”. As for Mars, its atmosphere is also composed practically entirely of carbon dioxide. But unlike Venus, it is more than twice farther from the Sun and its atmosphere is much thinner. Again, according to NASA, Mars may have started with a thick atmosphere but has since been losing it to space. To the contrary, our own planet’s friendly atmosphere contributes to make Earth a one in a billion oddity and marvel as we shall see next .

The Asteroid Belt is a vast expanse between Mars and Jupiter at a mean distance of 405,000,000 kms from the Sun. It is home to millions of rocky asteroids, ranging in size from the largest known of 950 kms in diameter to microscopic particles. Among them, about a million are of 1 km or more across; and in excess of 200 are over 100 kms in diameter . Yet, the Belt is a relatively empty space. So much so that to date none of the 12 to 20 man-made probes passing through it on their way to Jupiter and beyond have come anywhere near, let alone collided with, an asteroid of noticeable size. Even so, once in a long, long while, one of the larger asteroids smashes into Earth with devastating consequences. The last time this happened it caused the extinction of the dinosaurs and other species, 65,000,000 years ago.

Chapter illustration

At the farthest edge of the solar system, beyond the orbit of Neptune, 4,500,000,000 kms from the Sun is another expanse known as the Kuiper Belt. Similarly to the Asteroid Belt, but considerably more massive, it contains fragments and debris, remnants from the time of formation of the system. But unlike that other Belt, it does not contain rocky objects rather icy ones : comets, of which, according to NASA, there are a trillion (1,000,000,000,000) of them in the shape of frozen water, carbon dioxide, ammonia etc.

Finally, in the words of one source: “If the Sun–Neptune distance is scaled to 100 metres, then the Sun would be about 3 cm in diameter (roughly two-thirds the diameter of a golf ball), the giant planets would be all smaller than about 3 mm, and Earth's diameter along with that of the other terrestrial planets would be smaller than a flea (0.3 mm) at this scale”. Interpolating, it means to the same scale that Earth and Saturn are at is at 8.1 and 32 metres from the Sun respectively.

EVER SINCE HUMANS became conscious of their surroundings, some 30,000 to 70,000 years ago (see The Story of the World, part-2), they were, understandably, anxious to know more about the awesomeness of the Sun which rose in the mornings, provided light and warmth during the day and disappeared at night along with the changing seasons dictating planting and harvesting. Next in importance was the Moon with its mysterious movements and changes from a crescent to a full disc etc. It is, thus, not surprising that some cultures looked upon both celestial bodies as divinities while others credited their exotic gods with their creation. Some example:

To the Boshongo people of Central Africa, the god Bumba became nauseated one day. He relieved himself by vomiting the sun. During subsequent spasms he ejected the moon and stars.

Egyptian mythology tells us that the Universe was created from prehistoric dark waters in which the god Atum resided. Wanting a better place to live in and relieve his loneliness he mated with his own shadow and subsequently spat out a son and vomited a daughter. In due course they became the god and goddess of air and moisture respectively and so on.

As for the Greeks there was, to start with, nothing but chaos ruled over by god Chaos, until the appearance of goddess Gaea the great mother of all creation, including the universe etc.

On another level, Greek philosopher Plato (427-347 BCE) and his pupil Aristotle (384-322 BCE) maintained that Earth was stationary in the centre of the Universe and that all other heavenly bodies revolved around it. But later, astronomer and mathematician Aristarchus of Samos, (310-230 BCE), understood that the Earth spins around itself and revolves around the Sun. For this he was declared impious by philosopher Cleanthes the Stoic (331-232) “for putting into motion the hearth of the universe.” So did the Catholic Church vis-à-vis Galileo. He was charged with heresy in 1633, forced to recant and sentenced to house arrest, for daring to maintain that Earth revolved around the Sun.

BLUE PLANET

EARTH IS THE largest of the four inner terrestrial planets. It is also the only one to harbour plant, animal and human life, the way we are familiar with. Why so and how?

Chapter illustration

Earth and its moon seen from the space

Let us start with the why. There are two possibilities. Either Earth was created whole in one go as creationists strongly believe. Or it came about by a highly improbable set of circumstances as evolutionists such as Professor Richard Dawkins, just as firmly, maintain. Starting with a very conservative estimate of the number of planets in the Universe he surmises: “Now, suppose the origin of life, the spontaneous arising of something equivalent to DNA…Suppose it was so improbable as to occur only one in a billion planets…even with such absurdly long odds, life will still have arisen on a billion planets…”. Further: “The origin of life had to happen only once”, in the shape of atoms, molecules, cells and the first organisms: bacteria and microbes. From then on, there were no longer any mysteries or improbabilities: Natural Evolution proceeded as covered by Charles Darwin in his 1859 book: ‘ On the Origin of Species”.

As for the why, it so happens that Earth has been endowed with the following pertinent and important attributes without which life cannot exist and thrive:

It orbits the Sun entirely inside the ‘Goldilocks Zone’; a thin band around our big star with mild enough temperatures, allowing water to exist in liquid form and, consequently, for life to originate and sustain itself. Indeed, Earth ambient temperatures vary, globally, between a minimum and maximum of (-)88 and 58 deg C respectively. As for presence of water, the planet has a rich and unique hydrosphere. It consists of all oceans, seas, lakes, rivers and underground sources. Oceans and seas account for 71% of Earth total area(). Because of them Earth from space appears blue.

The “vacuum cleaner” effect of the powerful gravitational pull of Jupiter intercepts various bodies shooting in the heavens before they reach Earth and cause immense damage.

Earth is rich in ninety naturally occurring elements such as Aluminium, Carbon, Copper, Gold, Iron, Lead, Mercury, Phosphorus, Silicon, Sulfur, Uranium, etc. to name a few familiar ones. Chemical reactions, meaning “the combination and recombination of the ninety or so naturally occurring elements” cause the initiation of all that constitutes plant, animal and human life on Earth. And just as important are the immutable laws of physics, biology and the rest.

Our home is blanketed by a 100 kms thick atmosphere. It is composed of 78% inert nitrogen, 21% life giving oxygen with the remaining 1% consisting of a mixture of other gases including carbon dioxide. Not only it is necessary for respiration but it also protects the Globe from harmful sun rays and from erring celestial bodies (see 2 in Appendix).

To be sure, when life first appeared some 3,800,000,000 years ago in the form of anaerobic( )bacteria and microbes, Earth’s atmosphere was nothing but a mixture of methane, ammonia, huge amounts of carbon dioxide and water vapour; hardly suitable for aerobic() life to evolve. But with the first plants absorbing carbon dioxide from and releasing oxygen to their surroundings a process called photosynthesis, the atmosphere gradually became richer in oxygen. And as already mentioned, from then on, Natural Evolution took charge in the following hundreds of thousands of millennia till present to evolve the thousands of plant, animal, and human species, some of which subsequently disappeared others still thriving; most notably ourselves (see The Story of the World, Part-2).

CONCLUSION

AS IMPLIED IN the Introduction, all that has preceded is so improbable so beyond comprehension. Yet it is strongly advocated by the brightest minds applying the rigours of science and mathematics and supported by evidence supplied by advanced technologies of observation and measurement.

Even so, astronomers and physicists are the first to admit that there is still much to learn. To begin with they do not, as of yet, know if the Observable Universe is the totality of all there is, or extends wide and far. Neither, are they certain how many Universes there are, if any, in addition to ours. Finally, is the Universe after billions of years of expansion, going to reverse itself and contract back to its starting point: the singularity. If so will it begin a new cycle: Big bang-formation of a universe-expansion then re-contraction. If so, how many such cycles have preceded the current one and how many will follow, remembering all the time that each cycle has a time span of two to three dozen billion years.

Finally, is this all the work of a Divine power or is it nothing but a mystery in the process of unfolding till the day in the near or far future it will, at last unravel? Perhaps both. According to Professor Hawking: “This was the view of Pope John Paul  . At a conference on cosmology in the Vatican, the Pope told the delegates that it was OK to study the universe after it began, but they should not inquire into the beginning itself, because that was the moment of creation, and the work of God”.

Whatever, the fact remains that as humans we are so utterly isolated in the gigantism of space, on our insignificant ball, it is quite nightmarish to contemplate that should anything horrible befall us no help or assistance can be expected from any quarter.

APPENDIX

1-Why orbits are essential

Chapter illustration

Orbiting planets in the solar system

ASIDE FROM THE matter it is made of, the Universe and its contents is practically nothing but gravity and orbital motion. We have already covered gravity, the ubiquitous force of attraction shared by all objects large and small in space, stronger in more massive bodies than in less so. As for orbital motion, it enables the latter to keep their distance from the former. Thus the Moon’s circulation of Earth saves it from being pulled in and crushed. Similarly Earth and its sister planets revolve around the immensely heftier Sun, also saving themselves from being drawn in by its hugely stronger gravity and vapourized by its hellish heat long before they reach it.

The universal laws of motion, discovered by the polymath Isaac Newton (1643-1727), dictate than when a ‘smaller’ object is travelling in circle around a ‘larger’ one it generates an outwards pushing force counteracting the inward pull of gravity of the latter. In physics this push is called centrifugal force and its magnitude depends on the orbital speed and distance from the object being circled. It, therefore, follows that for each planet/star there is only one combination of speed around and distance from the celestial body being orbited, in order for it to keep its relative position in space. Thus, in the case of the Solar System, the Moon orbits Earth at 3,700 kms/hr from a distance of 400,000 kms. In turn Earth orbits the Sun 150,000,000 kms away and 108,000 km/hr. Likewise Saturn, from 1,433,000,000 kms circles the big star at 36,000 km/hr.

Taking their cue from the motion of heavenly bodies, humans have been sending their own objects, known as artificial satellites, into outer space since the late 1950s(). Those meant to stay in orbit around Earth, were and, continue to be, placed in ‘Low Earth Orbit’ between 200 and 2,000 kms above ground level, and made to orbit the Globe, at speeds of between 27,920- 23,088 km/hr respectively. They stay up there virtually indefinitely(). Thus the Hubble telescope mentioned earlier, launched in 1990, is performing its intended tasks travelling at 27,300 kms/hr while circling Earth, once every 95 minutes, from an altitude of 540 kms. Similarly, the International Space Station (image), the largest man-made object in space, and assembled piece by piece in orbit between 1998 and 2011, goes round Earth once every 90 minutes from a height of 400 kms at a speed of 28,000 kms/hr.

Chapter illustration

Unlike the ones in ‘Low Earth Orbit, communication satellites, the like of Arabsat, Eutelsat, Nilesat etc. are positioned in ‘High Earth Orbit’ of about 35,000 kms, where their orbiting speed, judiciously, matches that

of Earth rotation on its axis from west to east. Therefore, for all intents and purposes, a satellite is always above the same spot down below: it is called a geostationary satellite.

As for the Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites, of which there are presently some two dozen or more fly in between. Each one circles the Globe twice a day from a height of 20,000 kms or so.

Finally when an orbiting object is made to acquire a speed higher that its orbital speed, it simply leaves the vicinity of its parent planet and travel outwards. This is exactly the story of the Appollo spacecraft in the 1960s and 70s. After launch from ground, they remained in ‘ Low Earth Orbit’ circling at 28000kms before being speeded up by a rocket boost and sent on their way to the moon.

A simple and edifying orbiting analogy is the hammer throw, an event in every Olympics or athletic competition (image). The sportsman is analogous to the body being orbited and the hammer is the orbiting object. As the athlete twirls the hammer, the latter, clearly, tends to fly away by virtue of the centrifugal force pushing it outwardly. Just as clearly it is restrained and kept in ‘orbit’ around the sportsman by the force in the cable, analogous to gravitational pull. As soon as the thrower lets go of the cable, the hammer flies away, in turn analogously to the boost to given to an Apollo spacecraft.

Chapter illustration

2-Layers of the Atmosphere

Chapter illustration

Atmospheric layers. On the right: orange is the troposphere, white the stratosphere and blue is the mesosphere. The silhouetted space shuttle is actually flying above them, in the thermosphere as shown diagrammatically on the left.

WE HAVE ALREADY stated that Earth is blanketed by a relatively thick atmosphere, in the absence of which life would not exist. Here we dig a

little deeper and realize that our atmosphere is composed of four layers shown in the images above. They are the troposphere, stratosphere, mesosphere and thermosphere.

The TROPOSPHERE is our immediate layer; it reaches from 8 to 15 kms up. It is the densest layer containing practically all atmospheric oxygen. It is the origin of all weather .Temperature in the troposphere decreases with altitude partly because the solid surface of Earth catches most of solar radiations and naturally heats up the adjoining strata first.

Next is the STRATOSPHERE which extends up to 50 kms above the surface. It contains the ozone layer which protects us from damaging solar ultra violet radiations. In contrast to the troposphere, temperature in this layer increases with altitude. Incidentally, commercial air traffic tends to take place at its lower limit because lighter air causes less resistance on the moving aircraft and, naturally, results in fuel economy.

Higher still is the MESOSPHERE extending up to 85 kms. Here, again, temperature decreases with height down to -100 deg C at its top. It is considered the coldest layer of the atmosphere. It is in this layer that celestial objects ‘falling’ fast are burnt on account of the heat generated by friction with residual air molecules there.

Lastly, the THERMOSPHERE extending up to 600 kms up. It is the layer in which, as we have seen, man-made satellites orbit.

REFERENCES

-*The Magic of Reality by Richard Dawkins. Pages: 128 to 133, 162, 164 to 168. -*The God Delusion by Richard Dawkins. Pages 162 to 169.

Lecture. -*The Origin of the Universe by Stephen Hawking.

-*Encyclopedia Britannica. Black Hole. Solar System. Universe.

-*Express(Daily Express Publication). What is the Milky Way Galaxy? Scientists Reveal Shock Evidence Milky Way Expanding.

-*National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA). Hubble Reveals Observable Universe Contains 10 Times More Galaxies Than Previously Thought. The Milky Way Galaxy. What is a Black Hole. Planetary Fact Sheet.

-*National Geographic. Galaxy: Information and Facts. Origin of the Universe.

-*Space Facts. Milky Way Galaxy facts.

-*Universe Today. 10 Interesting Facts About the Milky Way.

-*Wikipedia. Earth. Milky Way. Solar System. Universe.

From Tribe to Empire

FROM TRIBE TO EMPIRE

Chapter illustration

King Louis XIV of France (1638-1715)by the will of God. ‘Le Roi-Soleil’.

BY

The Author

INTRODUCTION

Darwinian evolution failed to anticipate the advent of human Civilization dawning some 12,000 years ago. Despite the millions of years of shaping Homo sapiens it omitted to prepare them for the socio-politico-economic chaos which arose once our species graduated from life in small groups of less than ten dozen kin related members to the hundreds of thousands, then millions of strangers required to cooperate and live together peacefully under one flag.

Henceforth solutions became urgent to a multitude of problems relating to order, social classes, hierarchy, authority and more. Put differently: are all humans born equal or are some destined to be masters and others slaves? Who is qualified to govern and by what right? And reciprocally, how should subjects respond to that governance? Is it acceptable that some be more equal than others in terms of privilege, influence and wealth? Etc.

In the narrative, below we look at what some theorized and at others did in this context. The narrative which follows is broken down into: -*From egalitarianism to kleptocracy, with subheads: The beginning, Chiefdoms, States and empires. -*What the wise said and the unwise did, with subheads: Hammurabi, Confucius, The Buddha, Kautilya. The Athenians, The luminaries of Europe, Declaration of Independence and the Constitution, Karl Marx et al, and Theocracy. -*Conclusion.

FROM EGALITARIANISM TO KLEPTOCRACY.

This is the heading of a chapter in ‘Guns, Germs and Steel’, the 1997 book by American scientist and author Jared Diamond (DOB: 1937). By egalitarianism he means the absence of class and wealth differences within a community as well the lack of hierarchy. As for kleptocracy, it is “a society whose leaders [and elites]make themselves rich and powerful by stealing from the rest of the people” according to the Cambridge Dictionary. As simple as that.

At the beginning Mother Nature organized humans in bands consisting of 5 to 80 persons each all related by blood or marriage. They had no single place of residence, no private ownership of anything, no class distinction, no hierarchy and no recognized leadership, let alone a hereditary one. Every able bodied individual gathered and hunted food in which they all shared. In this socio-economic sense they were egalitarian. The band was “the political economic and social organization that we inherited from our millions of years of evolutionary history”.

Once humans settled to grow food and raise animals, some 12,000 years ago in the Fertile Crescent, they conglomerated in tribal communities. Each tribe numbered a few hundred members. Although they were no longer close kin, nonetheless they belonged to ancestor related clans. Lands that originally belonged to clans remained theirs and did not become the tribe’s. Tribesmen were still egalitarian in the same socio-economic context of the band. They resided in identical huts and dressed similarly. A tribe, however, was headed by a big-man consensually chosen for his personal attributes. But his was an honorary function as decisions where taken communally. He enjoyed no privileges and was not remunerated in any way. Indeed, he worked at planting as everyone else in the tribe regardless. His hut and clothes were undifferentiated from those of other tribesmen. And his function was not hereditary; once he died another big-man was chosen.

A primitive tribal society of a few hundred was manageable enough without need to a government and a bureaucracy. Additionally, the small size enabled everyone to know or be related to everyone else. So much so, that when, disputes arose, the contentious parties always had common acquaintances and relatives who mediated the disagreements away* amicably.

Chiefdoms emerged next around 5500 BCE, also in the Fertile Crescent. They resulted from the coming together of several tribal villages under one ‘banner’. Chiefdoms could vary in size from a few thousand to a few tens of thousands people. Being too large for the informal politics of tribal societies, it became necessary for an all empowered chief to take charge. His power included control of all lands, food production and distribution as well as ordering the execution of public works and edifices for the benefit or all or for his own glory and legacy. And precisely because a chiefdom was a collection of heterogeneous former tribal peoples who “had to learn, for the first time in history, how to encounter strangers regularly without attempting to kill them”, chiefs were empowered with the exclusive use of force, to ensure law and order. Again, in contrast to the disposable tribal big–man, a chief, in due course, passed his mantle to an heir in his lineage. Enter hereditary monarchy.

Because, now, the realm was relatively large, the chief appointed representatives, usually lower ranking chiefs, to convey his decisions to all and ensure their implementation. These were the first bureaucrats in history. With chiefdoms, a new class appeared, that of craftsmen. They worked in the production of canoes, tools, and luxury goods for the chiefs, members of their lineages and to those who could afford them. The commoners grew the food needed by chiefs, bureaucrats and craftsmen as well and to feed themselves. They might also be conscripted by chiefs for work on construction projects. Finally, as chiefs and their extended families needed menial servants, and to fill vacancies in various public jobs, they began to make use of slaves obtained on raids on other chiefdoms.

Unlike in earlier societies, chiefs were highly distinguishable. They dressed in expensive clothing and embellished themselves with colourful feathers and other artifacts made by craftsmen. For example well to do Hawaiian chiefs “had feather cloaks, some of them consisting of tens of thousands of feathers and requiring many humans generations for their manufacture”. In additions they availed themselves of ceremony such that a commoner presenting himself to his chief had to go through various rituals to show his/her respect.

Clearly, the preceding applied to the bigger, more prosperous chiefdoms. In small impoverished ones, except for hereditary succession, a chief’s status was not much different from that of a tribal big-man.

States and empires.

What was started with chiefdoms was continued, added to and expanded in the nation states which followed. With populations, now in the millions, the few bureaucrats, helping a chief run his territory, mushroomed into multi layered, multi functions administrations employing an ever increasing number of civil servants. Chiefdoms became fully fledged hereditary monarchies and specialization into craftsmen, growers etc. diversified. Moreover, as the number of activities multiplied so did the slave population and inevitably, the societal and economic hierarchy accentuated. At the top was the king followed by an elite of moneyed individuals and families trampling a majority of servile and obedient commoners.

The first nation state ever, took shape nearly 6,000 years ago in Mesopotamia. Today, there are 193 states represented in the United Nations. As stated by professor Diamond: at one end “they [the states] do good by providing expensive services impossible to contract for on an individual basis [meaning not in the realm of special interest individual]”.At the other “they function unabashedly as kleptocracies transferring net wealth from commoners to upper classes”. Both extremes are interlinked, with some states such as Sweden nearer the first and others such as Nigeria very much at the other. Interestingly he qualifies both Mobutu Sese Seko (1930-1997) of Zaire and George Washington (1732-1799), first president of the independent United States as kleptocrats each from a different perspective. While the first embezzled his poor country to the tune of billions of dollars, the second, on the contrary, spent tax money on programs beneficial to American citizens, but nevertheless, “was born into wealth, which is much more unequally distributed in the United States”.

Why do commoners accept to do the bidding of the wealthy, influential and powerful elements in their societies. There are four reasons: 1- indoctrination with ideologies and religions which sanctify the status quo. Thus, from time immemorial chiefs, kings and emperors have claimed descent from gods or God; therefore, disobeying or rebelling against them angered divinities or the Almighty who then sent down catastrophes and disasters. Ideologies such as communism, liberal democracy and even nationalism have kept commoners in check while cheating them out of promised rewards. 2- Making publics happy with projects and undertakings they are in favour of, along with propaganda eulogizing leaders and their achievements. 3- Keeping in check public violence and crime. 4- Threatening dissidents with the harshest punishments while promising the submissive with rewards including eternal bliss in the afterlife.

However, for most of the last 2,500 years humans have lived more often than not under the umbrella of empires . According to Yuval Noah Harari’s 2011 book ‘Sapiens’, for a polity to be identified as an empire it must possess two characteristics. The first is a significant number of ethnicities and cultures within its borders and second, these borders must be flexible and expandable. Population size and physical dimensions* are irrelevant. The first ever, was the Akkadian Empire in Mesopotamia from c. 2250 BCE. The last was the Soviet Union which disintegrated in 1991. Not quite if one agrees with those who think that today’s United States is one.

There is no disagreement between scholars that the majority of empires resulted from conquests by ambitious kings and rulers very often under the guise of lofty ideals. But as to why bands coalesced into tribes then into chiefdoms and lastly into states, is the subject of many theories having no place in this project. Let us, therefore, be satisfied, for the time being with the old and approximate, in this instance, adage: “united we stand, divided we fall”.

WHAT THE WISE SAID AND THE UNWISE DID

King Hammurabi (1792-1750 BC), ruler of the empire of Babylonia (in present day Iraq) with its capital Babylon, has gone down in history for the ‘Hammurabi Code’, one of the world’s first legal systems. As reported by professor Harari the Code starts with Hammurabi’s claim that the gods Anul, Enlil and Marduk have appointed him “to make justice prevail in the land, to abolish the wicked and the evil, to prevent the strong from oppressing the weak”.

The Code consisted of 282 laws regulating everyday life of the empire’s population. It divided Babylonian society into three classes: superior class, commoners and slaves and made women inferior to men. The laws then allocated punishments and fines, for a large number deeds and misdeeds, differing in severity depending to which class and gender the perpetrator and victim belonged. Examples: a-“If a superior man should blind the eye of another superior man, they shall blind his eye”. But if the victim is a commoner the penalty is 60 shekels of silver. And if the blinded is the slave of another superior man, the latter shall be happy with half his value in silver. b-“If a superior man strikes a woman of superior class and…causes her to miscarry, he shall weigh and deliver ten shekels of silver”. If the woman is a commoner, the fine drops to five shekels and further to two, if the woman is the slave of another superior man.

In those days it must have seemed to Hammurabi that it was quite normal that people are not equal*.The Code ends with: “I am Hammurabi, noble king. I have not been careless or negligent towards

humankind granted to my care by the god Enlil and with whose shepherding the god Marduk charged me”.

The Hammurabi Code was enshrined in Mesopotamia and remained in force elsewhere long after its author had passed away and his empire collapsed.

Confucius lived from 551 to 479 BCE. His father was an army officer who died when he was three. In his days, China consisted of an amalgam of small kingdoms all competing and warring among themselves. Their kings ruled by virtue of the ‘Mandate of Heaven’. Unlike the ‘divine right’ of kings in Europe, the Mandate was not granted by some gods or God, since the Chinese had no deities. It came, instead, from some supernatural entity.

The philosopher’s teachings, collected by his disciples in the ‘Analects’ were his way at remedying to the chaotic situation politically, socially and morally which prevailed in China at the time. He did not encumber himself with metaphysical matters such as the origin of life, god(s), heaven and hell and the afterlife. Instead, he concentrated on matters of everyday living by preaching to rulers, aristocrats and commoners alike. As stated in Ancient History Encyclopedia: “The attention of Confucius was attracted towards very practical considerations of this world rather than seeking consolation in otherworldly notions”. Thus the tenets in his pronouncements are of five general categories: (a) “Kindness in the father and obedient devotion in the son. (b)Gentility in the eldest brother and humility and respect in the younger. (c)Righteous behavior in the husband and obedience in the wife. (d)Humane consideration in elders and deference in juniors. (e)Benevolence in rulers and loyalty of ministers and subjects”.

As regards kings and emperors, he did not object to their right to rule by virtue of the ‘Mandate of Heaven’ nor was he against hereditary succession provided successors are properly educated and continue with learning. They must also be temperamentally fit for their duties such as being frugal, showing humility, be respectful, benevolent and committed. Simply being of royal blood did not, in his view, qualify one to anything.

The livelihood and the well-being of common people were crucial to Confucius and to later Confucians such as Mencius (372-289 BCE)* who introduced ideas about conduct of rulers towards farmers, land ownership and crops. They aimed at ensuring abundance of food during the good years and the avoidance of starvation and famines in the bad ones. In consequence peasant rebellions, floods, droughts, famines and epidemics were construed as evidence of Heaven’s loss of confidence in the king/emperor, making his deposition and replacement legitimate.

An educated, enlightened and virtuous sovereign was entitled to the trust and loyalty of his subjects from whom he could, in return, expect support and cooperation in times of crises including armed conflicts. To Confucius: “If you yourself [the ruler] are correct, even without the issuing of orders, things will get done…”.A monarch failing in his duties will be rebelled against and deposed, notwithstanding the ‘Mandate of Heaven’. Confucius continues “…if you yourself are incorrect, although orders are issued, they will not be obeyed” and : “when a ruler treats his subjects like grass and dirt, then the subjects should treat him as a bandit and an enemy”.

To Confucius, education is crucial for good government. Up to his time the civil servants, without whom no polity can be run, were selected from the ranks of the privileged few regardless of their merit and competence. But, Confucius created a system of meritocracy by establishing special schools for the training of candidates, from all classes of society who at the end of their studies sat written exams, following which the best performers were, naturally, selected to serve in the bureaucracy.

Commoners, too, needed to be taught, because only with education could “social moralities” which guide “mass conducts” be established to control evildoings. Logically enough, Confucius considered the punishing and execution of criminals who had not been, beforehand, educated, unacceptable.

And engaging in warfare is more rewarding to rulers if their combatants are educated. He said in this respect: “When a good man, [the ruler] has taught the common people for seven years, they should be ready to be employed in war…To lead the people to war without having taught them is to throw them away”.

In 221 BCE, the warring kingdoms were forcefully joined to create Imperial China lasting till 1912 .All the succeeding emperors of this 2,000 year long period continued to be empowered by the Mandate of Heaven. Confucianism was integrated in Chinese politics by the Han dynasty which reigned from 206 BCE to 220 CE. Then in the 12th century CE the Analects were made the curriculum on the basis of which future bureaucrats were examined. Confucius civil servant examinations remained until abolished in 1905.

In practice, however the relationship between emperor and subjects was more that of master and servant rather than familial. Indeed, in the second century BCE political leaders and jurists instituted what became known as the “Classical Chinese philosophy that emphasizes the need for order above all other human concerns” . As to the relationship between emperor and civil servants it was tense on account of mutual distrust.

Despite all, Confucius legacy endures to the present time. As stated in ‘Ancient History Encyclopedia’: “During most of Chinese history, Confucianism was seen as the preserver of traditional Chinese values, the guardian of Chinese civilization as such. After struggling [at certain times], it emerged as the final and permanent victor…and would dominate Chinese thought ever after”.

Siddhartha Gautama later the Buddha or the ‘Enlightened One’ was born a prince to a royal family in Nepal either in 563 or 480 BCE. So distressed was he by the human misery and destitution he witnessed outside the palace that he, at the age of 29 became a wandering ascetic in search of the secrets of life through meditation. He left behind wife, wealth and privilege. He spent his remaining years travelling and preaching in eastern India where he died either in 483 or 400 BCE, at the age of 80.

“I teach suffering, its origin, cessation and path. That's all I teach”. Simplified, following are the Four Noble Truths of Buddhism: -*First Truth: Suffering (birth, aging, sickness, death, encountering unpleasantness, not gaining what one desires). -*Second Truth: Origins of suffering (greed and desire, ignorance and delusion, hatred and destructive urges). -*Third Truth: Cessation of suffering. -*Fourth truth: The path to the cessation of suffering(wisdom, ethical conduct, meditation).

Interpreting the teachings of the Buddha*, I have benefited from the writings of three knowledgeable Buddhists: K. Sri Dhammananda Maha Thera, Ajahn Brahm and the Dalai Lama* .

According to scholar Dhammananda the Buddha preached human equality regardless of social classes, long before anyone spoke of it in the Western World. Naturally enough, He was against the caste system then practiced in India. Moreover, the Buddha entertained that crimes such as theft, violence, cruelty and the rest arose from poverty and destitution. It was thus pointless to try to use force to punish the culprits. Instead, kings and governments should evolve economic systems favourable to the poor in order to eradicate delinquency. As regard political systems the Buddha was in favour of consultations and democratic institutions*.

As for Brahm “the Law of Karma [roughly: the consequences of man’s actions] means that we have the power to create happiness or suffering, that we are responsible for our future”. In consequence, legitimate rulers are only those who are either elected to govern or chosen for their acknowledged, wisdom and superior knowledge. Such leaders must govern with authority by example and through kindness. They must never expect material rewards, always putting the interests of the governed before their own, and without fearing their detractors.

Lastly, the Dalai Lama concurs with them. His Buddhist convictions lead him to write in 1993 that the purpose of life is happiness. Accordingly every human being’s dignity must be safeguarded, along with his freedom, both politically and from fear and want, regardless of social standings and levels of wealth. Wisdom (presumably, education) is liberating while ignorance condemns to suffering and subjugation.

It is, therefore not surprising that after looking at various ways of governance he decides that “No system of government is perfect, but democracy is closest to our essential human nature [He hence, yearns for the day when] when we could devise a [democracy]suitable both to our traditions and to the demands of the modern world. A democracy that has nonviolence and peace at its roots”

At the time the Buddha began to voice his convictions in parts of India, Hinduism was at least one millennium old. Indeed, the Buddha himself was of Hindu birth and upbringing. Accordingly there are many similarities and differences between them. But of the latter none is more important than the Hindu caste system which pre-destined people from birth to a class of society depending on parentage. The highest caste was that of the Brahmins or priests, in the fourth and lowest were the Shudras or workers whose duty was to serve the upper castes. And then, there were the lowest of the low: the Chandalas or untouchables. They were employed in the most menial and degrading of tasks. They lived on the fringes of towns and villages inhabited by the other castes, did not drink from their wells, and could not walk in the same streets. Even their shadow was impure and seeing one was bad omen*.

Understandably many untouchables were attracted to the humani-tarian tenets of Buddhism “...one of the most magnificent and radical reactions in favor of the universal human rights of the individual against the oppressing tyranny of the pretended privileges of divine origin, of birth, and of class”, in the words of German historian Albrecht Weber (1825- 1901). And, as stated by Jayaram V, writer on Indian religions “The teachings of the Buddha created hope and aspiration for those who had otherwise no hope of salvation and freedom of choice in a society that was dominated by caste system, predominance of ritual form of worship and the exclusive status of the privileged classes which [Hinduism] upheld as inviolable and indisputable”. Equally logically, many untouchables converted to Islam, attracted by its equality among humans tenet, when it arrived to India with the Afghan Mughals in early 16th century CE.

A little over a century after the demise of Buddha, in the Indian Mauryan empire, a philosopher and statesman by the name of Kautilya (350-275 BCE) wrote the Arthashastra . It was a voluminous and comprehensive document counseling the emperor on the ways and means of running his domain, on the premise that “the happiness of the subjects is the happiness of the king; their welfare is his. His own pleasure is not his good but the pleasure of his subjects is his good” as stated in Ancient History Encyclopedia.

Within its 150 chapters, 180 topics, the Arthashastra gives advice on

the emperor’s daily time table*, spying on ministers, organizing secret agents, assassinations and worst of all on how, if and when to kill members of his own family.

To Aristotle (384-322 BCE), the Greek philosopher and scientist: “A state is an association of similar persons whose aim is the best life possible. What is best is happiness, and to be happy is an active exercise of virtue and a complete employment of it”.

The building blocks of a state, according to the philosopher, are its households consisting of the nuclear families and their slaves. As regards slavery, he concluded after dwelling on it, that some people are born to be future politicians, philosophers etc. while others are born for physical work and for the convenience of the former.

Aristotle makes a comparison between the different types of governments : kingship (the rule of one), that of the few (the aristocrats) and that of the many( by the citizenry or democracy). Of the three the last is preferable because the first can turn into tyranny, the second into oligarchy. Moreover “the many are more incorruptible than the few [and of the one]”. But he nevertheless warns against a polity divided between haves and have-nots, leading to a corrupt government by oligarchs. Two thousand three hundred years later his warning has yet to be heeded.

In the days of Aristotle, ‘demokratia’* was the norm in politics in his home city of Athens and its region of Attica in the 5th and 4th centuries BCE. By virtue of this system all male citizens above the age of 18 voted, participated in government and in decisions concerning religious, economic and more matters. In the words of Swiss historian K.A Raaflaub (DOB: 1941), it was “a unique and truly revolutionary system that realized its basic principle to an unprecedented and quite extreme extent: no polis [city] had ever dared to give all its citizens equal political rights, regardless of their descent, wealth, social standing, education, personal qualities, and any other factors that usually determined status in a community.

Excluded from participation were women, foreigners and slaves. The latter numbered perhaps 100,000 in a total population estimated by historyworld.net at 300,000 in the whole of Attica, of which only about 50,000 engaged in politics, philosophy, the arts and other lofty activities, while the slaves undertook all daily tasks.

Obviously the system worked in Athens because of the small number of people involved. It was interrupted in 322 BCE by the conquering Macedonians* and replaced by oligarchies or government by the rich: kleptocracy par excellence.

When summoned to take a vote, the citizens of Attica assembled on a hilltop in Athens ( Pnyx)large enough for as many as 6,000 souls. There, they debated issues such as military matters, the signing treaties, raising funds, new legislations, food supplies and more. Any citizen could demand to speak. Finally the vote was exercised by a show of hands. That was direct democracy as against representative democracy* which came into being 2,000 years later.

Democratic Athens also practiced ostracism or banishment of those with failings of one sort or another. At mass meetings held specifically for the purpose, citizens were asked to write the names, on pieces of pottery, of those, in their opinion deserving to be banished. The persons whose names recurred most often were sent away for ten years. Their families and property, however, remained unaffected. According to historyworld. net, “Intended as a way of ridding the city of a powerful but unpopular figure, [ostracism could] all too easily be used for political vendetta. There is no charge to answer, and no redress”

Since Athens was practically constantly at war, its ruler was elected, for a one year term, from the ten generals charged with the conduct of these. Each candidate, came from one of the ten tribes which constituted Athenian society. A popular and successful ruler could be re-elected repeatedly as happened with Pericles (495-429 BCE)*.

As for the civil service, its officials were ordinary citizens selected by drawing lots yearly. Their duties ranged from verifying weights and measures to discouraging cheating in the marketplace, to going abroad on diplomatic missions.

Let us wrap up all this by quoting Pericles’ speech of 431 BCE to Athenians: “Athens' constitution is called a democracy because it respects the interests not of a minority but of the whole people. When it is a question of settling private disputes, everyone is equal before the law; when it is a question of putting one person before another in positions of public responsibility, what counts is not membership of a particular class, but the actual ability which the man possesses. No one, so long as he has it in him to be of service to the state, is kept in political obscurity because of poverty”.

All this notwithstanding, philosophers such as Thucydides (460-395 BCE) and Aristophanes (444-385 BCE), criticized the Athenian system on the premise that the rich and powerful influence the ‘demos’ (people). That the latter are swayed by rhetoric and the speeches of demagogues. And finally that their decisions are affected by their emotions rather than informed judgment. How true this remains 2,500 years on.

The luminaries of Europe.

To the English philosopher Thomas Hobbes (1588-1679) salvation of a society is through the rule of a single monarch consented to by all members of that society. In his opinion the life of early, pre-civilization humans was “solitary, poore, nasty, brutish and short”. He wrote that in the absence of a government, there are no laws; every man is free to follow his strict self-interests; even killing others for anything he lusts for. Whereas with a government (read absolute power), everyone is held to account for his actions and, if necessary, incarcerated and even killed.

It is interesting that Hobbes’s preaching of public consensus in the selection of rulers is a negation of the ‘divine right’ claimed by kings in those days to gain legitimacy. That right consisted of the notion that a monarch was chosen by God to rule His realm, irrespective of the desires and wishes of his subjects, aristocrats as well as commoners. It then followed that an attempt at deposing a monarch was an act against the will of God. Instead, Hobbes argued that a king’s power is temporal* and as such can only be derived from the people.

Hobbes was one of the precursors of the Enlightenment period in Europe generally situated between 1685 and 1815 or two millennia after the Athenian democratic experience. It was also identified as the Age of Reason, during which philosophers rejected all that did not result from the human mind in the form of reason, rational thought and logic. In other words, anything that did not make sense. Among the luminaries of that period were Locke(1632-1704), Montesquieu (1689- 1755), Voltaire (1694-1774)*, Rousseau (1712-1788) among many more.

They variously thought and wrote about the evils of despotism, authoritarianism, the preference for republicanism, human rights and democracy. As stated in ‘New World Encyclopedia’, the Enlightenment helped create the intellectual framework not only for the American Revolutionary War and liberalism, democracy and capitalism but also the French Revolution, racism, nationalism, secularism, fascism, and communism”. Even religion was not spared; Christianity was reduced to its bare basics. “Taken to its logical extreme, the Enlightenment resulted in atheism” according to the same source.

At least in France, the ideals of the Age of Reason were tarnished by the excesses of the Revolution*. Not least was the ‘Reign of the Terror’ from September 1793 to July 1794 during which thousands of citizens across the country were arrested, died in prisons or executed by the guillotine, causing the fall of First Republic and rise of the empire of Napoleon 1st.

Those in charge in the Middle Ages in Europe up to the 16th century were the feudal lords. Land owning nobles, adept in the arts of warring, along, even with bishops and abbots of aristocratic background ruled over peasantry in their respective regions. The Pope in Rome, being the representative of God on earth, was their arbiter.

From the 16th century and for the next 200 to 300 years, the new stronger states such as France and Spain were governed by absolute monarch claiming a divine right to do so for them and their descendants. Absolute rule meant that kings exercised supreme authority in all matters regarding his or her realm with no regard to legislative and judicial authorities. Just the same, most monarchs had to contend with an exigent nobility. The most emblematic monarch in this respect was the ‘sun-king’ Louis XIV (1643-1715) of France. There were many more, of course, including Peter the Great (1672-1725) of Russia, Frederick the great (1712-1786) of Prussia and even Franz Joseph (1830-1916) of Austria-Hungary, initiator of the Great war of 1914-1918.

Absolute monarchy in England, on the model of continental Europe was of short duration. It ended with the decapitation of King Charles 1st in 1648. He had been at odds with parliament*, then an elected body by and of the wealthiest class of society*. By the early 1700s constitutional monarchy had been established, limiting, henceforth the executive powers of the sovereign.

Forward to the first half of the 20th century. European autocrats used the state controlled media of radio, print and motion pictures to project themselves as larger-than-life demi-gods, wise, hardworking and infallible. This personality cult ensured absence of open criticism and legitimized their regimes. This was true of Francisco Franco ‘El Caudillo’ (1892-1975) in Spain, Benito Mussolini ‘Il Duce’ (1883-1945) in Italy and Adolf Hitler ‘Der Fuhrer’ (1889-1945) in Germany.

Declaration of Independence and the Constitution.

July 4th 1776 was the date of the Declaration of Independence of the 13 colonies of the British crown in North America. It starts with “We hold these truths to be self- evident, that all men are created equal*, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable Rights, that among these are Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness”. Sadly though, the equality among men and the right to liberty did not apply to the African slaves laboring under harsh conditions in the cotton plantations of the southern colonies. The reason for this contradiction is that although the ‘Founding Fathers’, some of whom were slave owners themselves, viewed slavery as an embarrassment and a social evil, they nonetheless valued the rights of private property ( and a slave is such a property) even more. According to Professor David Brion Davis of Yale University: “As the American slave system became increasingly profitable, the moral doubts of the Revolutionary generation gave way in the South to strong religious, economic, and racial arguments that defended slavery as a ‘positive good’.”

The America Constitution of 1787, sought to regulate the governing of the new nation in ways so as to safeguard the rights of its citizens and protect them from abuse of power by those in government. With this in mind, the authors created three institutions: the executive, legislative and judiciary in order to check and balance one another and, hence ensure that no one erred. In short, the Constitution, on paper at least, was the most democratic and fairest system of government ever created by man.

Unfortunately in practice the system fell short and continues to fall short of its ideals. Ever since the establishment of large industrial capabilities in the late 1800s, fortunes began to be made by a few, notably the ‘robber barons’. Today, with slogans like ‘market knows best’, American democracy needs intensive care. In his 2013 book: ‘The Future’, former vice president Al Gore bemoans the abysmal conditions of American democracy and capitalism on account of the nefarious influence of special interest groups. In his words, they “have both [democracy and capitalism] been hacked. The results are palpably obvious in the suffocating control of policies decisions by elites, the ever increasing inequalities of income and growing concentration of wealth, and the paralysis of any effort at reform”. Most baffling of all, is the lawfulness of contributions by big-business to the campaigns of legislators and presidents.

Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels.

In his 2015 book: ‘50 Politics Classics’, author Tom Butler-Bowdon informs his readers that neither Karl Marx ( 1818-1883) nor his collaborator Friedrich Engels (1820-1891) belonged to the class of factory workers, in that early industrialization period in Europe, whose cause they spent their adult lives championing,. To the contrary, Marx’s Dutch maternal relative founded the Philips electronics company. Indeed one of his mother’s brothers, an industrialist and banker bailed him and his family out, more than once, when he found himself in dire straits. As for Engels, his family owned a cotton mill and other business interests.

Appalled by the poverty, squalor, diseases and early deaths of the factory workers, Marx and Engels reflected on the long European history of class separation into the haves and have-nots starting with the feudal times of kings and nobility on one side and wretched peasantry on the other. With the Industrial Revolution this changed into a bourgeoisie owning all the means of industrial production, exploiting and benefitting from the labour of the working class whose working and living conditions were just as miserable as those of the peasants of yore. According to the two thinkers each worker was nothing but “appendage of the machine” to be exploited and dispensed with at will. As for governments and ruling classes of the nation states of Europe they were “but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie”.

The solution? A revolution leading to the expropriation of the bourgeoisie and the establishment of a dictatorship of the proletariat: public ownership of all property and assets, including mines, railways, the factories and their means of production along with all state institutions such as the courts and the police. In short, the establishment of a classless society in which: “from each [individual] according to his ability, to each according to his needs.” By proletariat Marx meant strictly the wage earners employed in industrial production. In contrast he had only contempt for agricultural labour (peasants). He did not think they were capable of rising to the challenges of change.

But Marx did not elaborate on the politics of putting his ideas into practice. He merely favoured “that the institutions of a future communist society should be designed and decided democratically by the people living in it” as stated in the Encyclopedia Britannica.

There is absolutely no doubt, whatsoever, that in the Russia of the early twentieth century a drastic socio-political change was long overdue. For century upon century the tens of millions peasants or serfs, suffered under the yoke of autocratic tsars and a tyrannical aristocracy. For example, Professor Harari states in his 2015 book Homo Deus, that “In 1914…3 million Russian noblemen , officials and business people lorded it over 180 million peasants and workers”.

Enter Vladimir Ilyich Ulyanov, or Lenin (1870-1924), a Russian revolutionary with a new ideology later known as Marxism-Leninism or simply Leninism. As this implies it was part Karl Marx and the rest based of his conception of Russia and its people. Rather than proceeding along the democratic route toward realizing his dictatorship of the proletariat, he favoured attaining it, instead, by means of a violent revolution lasting, he estimated, no longer than six months. The Russian proletariat he counted on consisted mostly of the tens of millions of peasants whom, as we have seen did not count for much in Marx’s calculations. Lenin, eventually succeeded albeit at the cost of a long civil war fought from 1918 to 1922. This latter date saw the creation of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics under lenin’s guardianship.

What followed were seven decades of “a monopoly of power in the hands of a single political party; a command system of administration; a profoundly anti-democratic regime; a closed society; total control; an omnipotent leader who was never elected by the people”. This, from ‘Autopsy of an Empire, a 1998 book by Russian historian and former head of the Soviet military psychological warfare department, Dmitri Volkogonov (1928- 1995). Also in the book: “All seven leaders [from Lenin to Gorbachev]* put morality very low on their list of priorities…[They] were extremely remote from the workers, the peasants and the intelligentsia…[And] apart from the last of them[their] intellectual, educational and cultural level was low”.

The rights and needs of the Soviet citizens practically did not count except as explained below. What mattered was catching up and beating the West technologically and the wellbeing of the communist party*. Worse, starting with Lenin the party and leadership lived in fear of ‘class enemies’ and of political and ideological opponents. This paranoia led to the purging of millions of citizens and old party comrades; the worst of them on Stalin watch. “They took those who were too independent, too influential, along with those who were well to do, too intelligent, too noteworthy…Thus the population was shaken up, forced into silence, and left without any possible leaders of resistance”. So writes Nobel prize author Alexandr Solzhenitsyn in his novel ‘The Gulag Archipelago’, based on his experience and that of others in Stalin’s labour camps.

Though the 70 years of Leninism transformed the Soviet Union from a backward, feudal Empire into a superpower and enabled it to beat its rival the USA into space in the late 1950s; and despite the free education and healthcare it provided all its citizens it, nonetheless, imploded in the end. In reality, what Lenin and his successors did was to replace the old tyranny of the tsars and the aristocrats, with that of the communist party and its elites.

By 1912 The Chinese Empire was finally put to rest. It was replaced by the Republic of China. From the mid-1920s, and uneasy relationship existed between the two political forces in the country: the Nationalists and the Communists, in due course, respectively headed by Chiang Kai Shek (1887- 1975) and Mao Zedong(1893-1976). At last, in October 1949, Mao and his guerilla fighters routed the Nationalists. Chiang fled to the Island of Formosa( Taiwan) and Mao announced the creation of the People’s Republic of China under his chairmanship.

Mao wanted to adapt Marxism “to Chinese conditions [and]to the mentality and cultural traditions of the Chinese people, according to Encyclopedia Britannica. More, he rejected what he called “foreign dogmatism” consisting of following the USSR’s model and yielding to its leaders directives. Like in Russia thirty years earlier, his proletariat was formed by hundreds of millions of peasants. Maoism became the name of his brand of Communism. But, like the Soviets, Mao’s had no qualms about going aggressively against those accused of being class enemies, traitors, capitalists and agents of the United States.

Dreaming of achieving industrial parity with the West within a relatively short time, Mao launched in 1958 the ‘Great Leap Forward’. Its most important constituent being the aggregation of several agrarian communities into communes in which went growers with their privately owned lots, animals and farm implements. Henceforth strangers were to live and work communally and share all their possessions. Basically, Mao’s idea for all this being the achievement a more efficient agriculture yielding surplus produce for export against industrial machinery.

The ‘Great Leap Forward’ failed miserably. By 1961, 30, some say 45, million people had starved to death. Many reasons for this catastrophe have been propose by those who dwelt on it. Among them the utopian naivety of Moa Zedong, his interference in something neither he nor his party comrades knew anything about, the unwarranted tonnages of produce requisitioned by government agents and last, but not least, the uncooperative state of mind of the peasants themselves coerced into a situation not to their liking.

Worse, if that is possible, was Mao’s ‘Great Proletarian Cultural Revolution’, he initiated by calling in 1966 upon Chinese youth “to take current party leaders to task for their embrace of bourgeois values and lack of revolutionary spirit [and to] purge the impure elements of society and revive the revolutionary spirit that had led to victory in the civil war two decades earlier and the formation of the People’s Republic of China”.

Accordingly, millions of ‘Red Guards’ went on a decade long rampage targeting anyone identified as revisionist or anti-revolutionary. All classes of society were affected. Those ‘found guilty’, variously had their properties seized, were denied medical treatment, harassed, beaten, imprisoned, tortured, raped and/or killed. Some preferred to commit suicide. Among those targeted were school teachers and university professors. In the words of ‘Spiegel Online International’: “the ten-year campaign destroyed entire families, irreplaceable cultural treasures and centuries-old traditions”. By the time this phenomenon ended, 1.5 million Chinese had lost their lives.

Lastly, Lenin, Stalin and Mao basked, in their times in an aggressive personality cult. Of the three only Stalin was somewhat posthumously brought down from his pedestal. In a secret speech in 1956, his successor Nikita Khrushched denounced his political excesses and decried the personality he encouraged and in which falsehoods he personally contributed.

The term ‘theocracy’ has Greek roots. It comes from ‘theos’ or god and ‘kratein’ or rule. Thus theocracy is simply the rule by God or the gods.

There has been, throughout history, no shortage of individuals and groups who ruled over people either by claiming to be deities themselves or of holding a commission from God or the gods to govern in His or their stead. By doing so, naturally, they sought to establish their legitimacy and enhance their control over an uneducated and superstitious populace, inventing rules and regulations to suit their personal interests.

The pharaohs of ancient Egypt, were considered to be deities. Indeed, Ramses II, the great (c. 1303 to 1213 BCE) was nothing less than a living god. Even Roman emperors were adored as deities. It started with the first emperor, Augustus ( 63 BCE- 16 CE) and ended when Constantine I (280-337 CE) adopted Christianity. And then there were the civilizations of Central and South America, such as the Aztecs, Incas, Mayas and more. They were theocracies if only on account of the frequent, horrific and gory human sacrifice ceremonies arranged by rulers and priests to appease their gods, notably the sun. These were witnessed and chronicled by the Spanish colonizers who encountered and subjugated them in the early 16th century .

With the arrivals of the monotheistic faiths (Judaism, Christianity and Islam) with ‘Holy Books’, the new theocrats said that the words of God expressed in them were henceforth the dos and don’ts of daily life and practices. More importantly, they claimed forcefully that they were the only ones knowledgeable enough to interpret the words and intentions of God. Put simply: You’d better abide by our version of the sacred texts or else.

According to Jewish historian Flavius Josephus (37-100 CE) , Moses “ordained our[ the Hebrews] government to be what…may be termed a theocracy by ascribing the authority and power to God, and by persuading all the people to have a regard to him [Moses] as the author of all good things”. Having beforehand met God face to face and received from him the Ten Commandments, Moses was thus a prophet and a temporal leader at the same time and his was the first theocracy in the monotheistic world.

In Christendom, a great theocracy was the Byzantine Empire whose constitution “was based on the conviction that it was the earthly copy of the Kingdom of Heaven…Just as God ruled in Heaven, so the Emperor, made in His image, should rule on earth and carry out his commandments…” , in the words of historian Steven Runciman (1903-2000). Byzantine emperors felt that humanity should embrace their own true Orthodox Christianity. Founded in 324 CE Byzantine theocracy lasted over a thousand years until the fall of Constantinople to the Ottomans in 1453. Another Christian theocracy was the Republic of Saint Peter (or the Papal States) in parts of the Italian Peninsula. It was headed by the incumbent Pope. It,too, lasted over 1000 years, from 754 to 1870 when its territory was taken over by the new Kingdom of Italy*.

With the European Reformation in the early 16th century some fervent advocates and adherents attempted to establish Protestant Theocracies. John Calvin (1509-1564) ruled in Geneva from 1555 to 1564 on the basis of “total obedience to God, whose moral order is declared in the scriptures”. So did Huldrych Zwingli (1484–1531), three decades earlier from 1525 to 1531 in Zurich . As for the Puritans ( English Protestants ) who emigrated to the New World during the 1630s, they established in the future states of Massachusetts and Connecticut governments which “acknowledged Christ as a sole ruler over the people”.

Some describe Islam as ‘religion and state’ (دين و دولة) in other words, a theocracy. In the case of prophet Muhammad (570-632) and the four khalifs (successors of the Prophet), this was absolutely true, given they were all spiritual and temporal leaders of the Umma (Muslim Community) acting in accordance with the message of God revealed to the Prophet. Chronologically, his successors the Abu Bakr, Umar, Uthman and Aly . Each had been chosen for the role of khalifa for his Islamic credentials and devotion to Prophet Muhammad. They were the ‘Rightly Guided Khalifs’.

Following the assassination of Aly in 661, power passed to the governor of Syria, Mu’awia bin Abu Sufian,. He belonged to the Bani Umayyah branch of the Prophet’s Qoraish clan. In Damascus he had become acquainted with Christian Byzantine practices and with the non-Muslim part of the population some of whom he kept in his new administration. According to the 2005 History of the Middle East, author Radhey Shyam Chaurasia writes that Mu’awia’s “policy was not to rejuvenate the ideal Islamic theocracy of Medina, but to create a strong centralized Arab kingdom..”. Accordingly, he made Damascus his capital in lieu of Madina, heartland of Islam, and by adopting hereditary succession, established the dynasty of the Umayyads ruling till 750. The Umayyad empire eventually included North Africa and Spain, was nonetheless an theocracy governed by the laws of sharia.

Chaurasia continues that although most of the Umayyads “always posed themselves as the true champions of Islam”, they nevertheless “relegated religion to a secondary place and in their private lives enjoyed the comforts and benefits of their empire”. This apparent un-Islamic behaviour was exploited by their opponents, the descendants of Al- Abbas(died c. 653), an uncle of the Prophet, and in 750 defeated the last Umayyad khalifa, established the Abbasid dynasty with Abu al Abbas as Saffah as its first khalifa.

The capital of the Arab Islamic world shifted once again to Baghdad in 762. And Whereas the Umayyads had adopted/adapted many of the Byzantine practices, The Abbasids, did the same with the administrative system of the Persian Empire next door. Furthermore they were much more rigorously Islamic in their governance than the Umayyads and ruled strictly in accordance with the shari’a, creating in the process a theocratic state along the line of the Persian model. To them:“the caliph is there to guarantee the carrying out of Islamic obligations, to represent and embody in his person the duties of the Islamic community”. All this did not prevent the succeeding khalifs to enjoy the material pleasure of life as epitomized by the splendors of the lifestyle of the world famous Harun al Rasheed (766-809). This last Arab Muslim theocratic dynasty died at the hand of the Mongols who sacked Baghdad in 1285.

The beginnings of the Ottoman Empire go back to 1299. A milestone in its history is the capture of Constantinople, the capital of the Byzantine empire, in 1453. It died in 1918. The Empire was a theocracy in that Islam formed the basis of all its religious, judicial, administrative and educational institutions*. Moreover, its rulers, the sultans, called themselves khalifs of the entire Muslim world*. Nonetheless this, once again, did not mean that the sultans were ascetics sitting piously on the throne of one greatest empires in history. To the contrary they immersed themselves in worldly pleasures, including the company of the occupants of their fabulous harems, without seeing anything amiss between their two lives.

CONCLUSION.

“Power tends to corrupt and absolute power corrupts absolutely”. These words were written by Baron Acton(1834-1902) , an English historian, politician and author. How true.

Indeed there are ample examples of people who sought power in the name of an ideology, religion, doctrine or slogan and failed to live by them. Thanks to unethical and self-interested sycophants, such leaders gradually and inevitably become fervent believers in their superior intelligence, knowledge and abilities. In the process they become less and less tolerant of criticism. In short, they turn into tyrants, and why not, thieves, not different from the ones they kicked out. Simultaneously, all those close to them, gain influence, power and enrich themselves at the expense of those whose lot the leaders had promised to improve in the first place.

But of course, there are also the more mundane globalization, and ‘market know best’ doctrines along with unregulated and unsupervised businesses practices, all under the liberal democracy ideology. They are leading to the greatest enrichment of a minority vis a vis the impoverishment of the rest. If this is not kleptocracy then what is?

From Egalitarianism to Kleptocracy

“FROM EGALITARIANISM TO KLEPTOCRACY” *

SOCIETIES IN WHICH SOME ARE MORE EQUAL THAN OTHERS

Illustration inspired from the 1945 book of George Orwell ‘Animal Farm’.

The Author JULY 2021

*Title of chapter 14 in Jared Diamond 1997 book ‘Guns Germs & Steel’.

REFERENCES

*Guns, Germs and Steel, by Jared Diamond. Chapter 14: From egalitarianism to kleptocracy.

*Sapiens, by Yuval Noah Harari. Chapter 6: Building pyramids, chapter8: There is no justice in history and chapter 11: Imperial visions.

*Ancient Civilizations World: The ancient Phoenician civilization.

*BBC: Roman religion gallery.

*Encyclopedia Britannica: 1) Byzantine empire, 2) Justinian, 3) Phoenicia,4) Government, 5) City-states, 6) Sumer, 7) Roman republic, 8) Government in history, 9) China, 10) Umayyad dynasty, 11) Babylon, 12) Ancient Iran, 13) Roman empire, 14) Ancient Rome, 15) History of Venice, 16) Doge.

*Encyclopedia.com: 1) Latin empire of Constantinople, 2) The Byzantine empire, 3) The emergence of the city-state, 4) Han dynasty, 5) [Italian] city-states.

*Epic World History: Italian city-states.

*Griffith University: Early popular government in Phoenician and

Greek city-states

*History: 1) Ancient Rome,2) Qin dynasty, 3) Babylonia, 4) Persian empire.

*Historyworld.net, history of: 1) Athens, 2) Byzantine empire, 3) Mesopotamia, 4) Rome, 5) Greece,6) Italy, 7) Venice, 8) Mesopotamia, 9) Iran, 10) Sparta 11) Venice.

*Khan Academy: 1) Byzantine culture and society,2) The Greek polis, 3) The rise of Persia.

*Livescience: Carthage: ancient Phoenician city-state,

*National Geographic:1) Christian schism of 1054, 2) Greek city-states.

*New World Encyclopedia: Carthage.

*San José State University: Sumer.

*Thoughtco: 1) The collapse of the Han dynasty, 2) The history of Venice.

*TimeMaps:1) The Byzantine empire, 2) The Roman empire: government and society.

*Totally History: Han dynasty social structure.

*Wikipedia: 1) Athens, 2) Constantine the Great, 3) Ancient Carthage, 4) Polis, 5) Han dynasty,6) Society and culture of the Han dynasty, 7) Italian city-states, 8) Achaemenid empire, 9) Ancient Carthage, 10) Roman empire.

*World History Encyclopedia:1) Byzantine empire, 2) Society in the Byzantine empire, 3) Carthaginian society, 4) Sumer, 5) Achievements of the Han dynasty, 6) Phoenicia

INTRODUCTION

What is this narrative about?

Some three hundred years ago, the eminent French philosopher Jean Jacques Rousseau (1712-1778) “traced the origins of injustice to the first man who fenced off land and declared it his own”. Further, he wrote that “[p]roperty allows for the domination and exploitation of the poor by the rich”. In other words, that by ushering in ‘Civilization’, the ‘Agricultural Revolution’ of 10,000 years ago, resulted in the stratification of human society into rich and poor members and the exploitation of a majority by a minority through invented ‘givens’, as will become clear hereinafter.

But first, a short recapitulation. In ‘From Tribe to Empire’, until the advent of that momentous ‘Revolution’, human hunters and foragers, lived in bands described by Diamond as the “political economic and social organization[s] that we inherited from our millions of years of evolutionary history”. Bands consisted of a few dozen kin related members. They were equal in every respect.

Crucially, farming and the abandonment of nomadism in favour of sedentary living enabled, for the first time, the production of surplus food, and dramatic demographic increases. Bands merged into tribes each grouping, a few hundred ancestor related people. Thereafter, tribes in turn merged into chieftains of a few thousands people from hitherto unrelated groups. According to Harari “[p]eople went to the trouble of constructing…collectives because they confronted challenges that could not be solved by any single tribe”.

Indeed, one example was the coming together of the tribes sharing the banks of great rivers such as the Tigris, Euphrates, Nile or Ganges, to mitigate the effects of droughts and floods. Another instance was the joining of forces by native North American tribes in the face of the onslaught of white settlers. There are many more. Still, author Diamond is certain that mergers “never occur by a process of unthreatened little societies deciding to merge...Leaders...are jealous of their independence and prerogatives”.

Tribes, similarly to bands were socio-economically egalitarian with no hierarchy and wealth differences between their members. With chieftains, though, this changed. It became necessary for a single head, with enough authority, to take charge in order to manage the polity. Chiefs recruited people, to help them with governing. With time, chiefships became hereditary and societies stratified. Thenceforth the peasantry which constituted more than 90% of a polity, provided food for rulers, elites and clergy who practiced politics and wars and indulged in building palaces and places of worship etc. Other non- agrarians who benefitted from ‘free’ food were administrators, civil servants, artisans and soldiers, when professional armies became established.

In a nutshell chiefdoms, the first of which arose 7,500 years ago in Mesopotamia, constituted the onset of kleptocracy defined by the Cambridge Dictionary as a “http://dictionary.cambridge.org/dictionary/english/societysociety whose leaders make themselves rich and powerful by stealing from the rest of the people”. Ultimately, chiefdoms turned into states and the latter into empires. The creation of those involved, usually, a great deal of violence, bloodshed, and genocides.

A question that begs to be answered is why did a majority accept the dictates of a privileged minority. There are apparently several reasons. But I shall limit myself to the one which seems to me to trump them all. It is indoctrination and brain-washing with socio-religious myths which sanctify the role of the ruler and legitimize the kleptocratic practices of elites. Disobeying or rebelling against this status-quo, the commoners were made to believe, angers the gods (or God) with disastrous consequences. Here the role of the clergy is crucial in inventing the rituals, prayers and sacrifices in support of it all. I have three examples from Antiquity. They are by no means the only ones. Indeed, human history is replete with otherworldly myths for the same end.

King Hammurabi ruled Babylon from 1792 to 1750 BCE. His eponymous Code is a collection of 282 laws meant to regulate and control the daily lives of his subjects whom he divided int three classes: the aristocrats, commoners and slaves. Among the laws are the ones which assign punishments and fines, for a large number of misdeeds, differing in severity depending to which class the perpetrator and victim belonged. He did so in his claimed capacity of “noble king”, who has “not been careless or negligent towards humankind granted to my care by the god Enlil and with whose shepherding the god Marduk charged me...” etc.

About 1500 BCE , a relatively small group, the Aryans, invaded India from the north-east. In order to control the indigenous population they introduced the caste system. They assigned to themselves the upper echelons of Hindu society. Successively lower followed three castes depending on occupation. Crossing the lines separating castes,

through marriage or achievements was not allowed. In other words once born in a specific caste one remained in it no matter what().

According to the ‘Old Testament’, the first holy book of the Abrahamic religions, the children of Israel were ordered to erase Jericho and its people from the face of the Earth and claim its land theirs. What ensued is the first genocide in history. According to Richard Dawkins, in his book ‘The God Delusion’, the leader of the attackers, Joshua was not satisfied until “ they utterly destroyed all that was in the city, both man and woman, young and old, and ox, and sheep, and ass, with the edge of the sword”.

Follow two parts describing some of the city-states and empires, respectively, which have left their mark on human history. Apart from a short geopolitical introduction for each, my concern is with those who ruled and the ones ruled over. This narrative timeframe ends with the fall of Constantinople in 1453 CE. By then, all the polities selected no longer existed.

CITY-STATES

City-states were the first ‘modern’ forms of organized societies. Further, as clarified by Britannica “[e]ach city-state was…an economic, cultural, and religious organization”. They governed themselves, prospered and defended themselves against hostile outsiders by enlisting their adult males as soldiers or by hiring mercenaries.

The Middle East and the shores of the Mediterranean Sea proved propitious for the emergence of city-states, beginning with those of Mesopotamia, followed by the Phoenicians and later the ones of Ancient Greece. There, also, was early Rome and the Italian city-states in Medieval Europe. Mesopotamia()

As shown on the adjoining map Sumer, the oldest known organized society in human history, was located in what is today southern Iraq, i.e. between the Tigris and the Euphrates rivers on the northern shore of Persian Gulf. Sumer’s beginnings date back to 5,300 years ago.

But Sumerians were not the first inhabitants of the region. They were preceded by the Ubaidians who arrived there about a millennia earlier. By then, some 4,000 years after the onset of agriculture, they were adept at draining marshes and more.

The first societies arose in Sumer in order to ensure adequate and equitable allocation of irrigation waters, from the two great waterways, between the multitude of growers along their banks. Central authorities were, thus, created to organize the digging of canals, building of dams etc. In the process a calendar was invented to anticipate seasonal floods and so was the Cuneiform system of writing about 5,000 years ago().

Gradually, Sumer evolved from a number of small villages ruled by chiefs to at least 12 city-states, each one headed by a monarch. Four of these were Kish, Lagash, Ur and Uruk (map above). Every city-state was built around a temple (seen in the background in the image). Called ‘ziggurat’, it was at the centre of all religious and economic activities.

Sumerian kings ruled alongside a clergy in charge of a complicated religion with an “elaborate system of worship” and a pantheon of many gods “who, it was hoped, would protect the city from attack, from natural disaster, and from any questioning of…the ruler group”, in the words of Britannica. But when calamities occurred, in spite of the earnest interventions of priests, they were blamed on disagreements between the gods themselves. The peoples of Sumer, thus indoctrinated, never thought the monarchy or the clergy at fault. Additionally, the precariousness and hardships of daily living “justified the role of the priesthood”, as stated in a publication by San José State University, in the eyes of the commoners.

Who were the commoners? They consisted of the bureaucrats, scribes, who could read and write the Cuneiform script, tax collectors, craftsmen, soldiers and peasants.

By 1900 BCE Sumer, as a distinct identity was no longer. But its legacy endured. In ‘History Begins at Sumer’ Assyriologist Samuel Noah Kramer enumerates 39 physical and cultural inventions and innovations left by Sumerians to those who came after them, locally and beyond. They include the wheel and the Cuneiform system of writing. They also left the ‘Epic of Gilgamesh’ and the “Noah and the Flood stories”, adapted later by the Abrahamic religions.

The realm of the Phoenicians

Historians believe that the Phoenicians made their presence felt as far back as 3000 BCE in what is today Syria, Lebanon and northern Palestine. They were first and foremost traders and the inventors of the alphabet(), no doubt at the service of their business. In due course, they established independent city-states and colonies around the Mediterranean Sea up to and including the western end of North Africa and Iberia in southern Europe, where they set up commercial facilities.

Pre- eminent among the early independent city-states were Sidon, Tyre and Byblos. They were fully established by 2750 BCE. They died with the arrival of the Macedonian Alexander the Great in the 300’s BCE. From them starting in about the 1550’s BCE, they progressively built up their commercial maritime domination including in 840 BCE Carthage in what is today Tunisia to which we shall come back later.

Each city-state built temples, prayed to and sacrificed at the altars of its own gods. Still, there were ‘national’ gods and goddesses such as Baal and Astarte.

Phoenician city-states in the east began their existence as monarchies issued from privileged aristocracy. Kings and queens were temporal, spiritual and ritual leaders. But from the 600’s BCE, as trade-generated prosperity spread, wealthy business people began to take part in the running of the states. Thus, were created ‘Councils of Elders’ with power to constrain that of the monarchs. So much so, that for the last 300 years prior to the arrival of Alexander, the rule of kings waned while that of assemblies flourished. To conclude, a 2010 study by Griffith University in Australia states that the Phoenicians during the last few centuries of their presence “had something more than an autocracy or even oligarchy and that it earns categorization as a proto-democracy, at least, if not full recognition as a democracy”.

Carthage was first established, in what is today Tunisia as a colony of Tyre in 814 BCE. In about 650 BCE, it became independent of its mother city and proceeded to build itself a large commercial empire in the western Mediterranean, which at its apogee covered the areas shown in blue on the map. Carthage city itself according to sources was home to “nearly half a million inhabitants” and sheltered docking facilities “for 220 ships”.

This large population counted among its members “teachers, doctors, architects, cooks, shopkeepers, scribes, cobblers, fishermen,  chariot-makers, artisans, labourers, mercenaries and slaves”. In other words all elements necessary for a viable society. Carthage was also a cosmopolitan city, being home to travelers and residents from the far corners of the Mediterranean.

Only adult males born locally could become citizens with the privileges and duties that came with citizenship. Unlike city-sates in other regions male Carthaginians were not required to take part in military activities. This mostly fell on mercenaries commanded by appointed generals(). Neither women nor slaves qualified for citizenship.

Expectedly, the prominence and prosperity of Carthage drew the attention of the nascent Roman Republic (see later). What is historically known as the Punic (Phoenician) Wars ensued. In the space of more than a century between 264 and 146 BCE, three long wars were fought between the two sides, ending with the sacking and destruction of Carthage and the slaughter of its population.

On the spiritual and supernatural levels Carthaginians essentially believed and prayed for the same gods as their Phoenician forebears. In time, however, they adopted divinities from the pantheons of the Greeks and Romans nearby. Those in charge of religious affairs came from the aristocratic classes. Against remunerations, priests officiated at temples and at rituals; their fees depending on the nature of the services rendered. One of the rituals, the Carthaginians are alleged to have performed, was the loathsome sacrificing of children at the altars of their gods().

According to ‘LiveScience’, from about 500 BCE , Carthage was governed by two concurrent kings, a senate, a citizen assembly and ‘pentarchies’ or “five-persons commissions”. There was also “an enigmatic body called the ‘court of 104’ that occasionally crucified defeated Carthaginian generals”. All controlled by the well to do, influential families.

Allowed, too, were elected citizen assemblies and even trade unions representing the interests of craftsmen, artisans etc. Greek historian Polybius (264–146 BCE) wrote that the Carthaginian’s was “a system of checks and balances, as well as public accountability”. All this was lost in the wake of the eradication of the city by the Romans. Carthage’s form of democracy would thus have endured nearly 300 to 350 years.

Greek city-states.

I begin the story of the Greek city-states with the Mycenaean civilization (1600-1100 BCE) which controlled southern Greece. The Myceneans ruled over communities or villages each headed by a ‘godking’ who claimed legitimacy from of the gods. By 1100 BCE that overarching civilization was no more, but the domains of the godkings endured and established themselves as self-governing polities : the onset of the Greek city-states.

Eventually there were more than 1,000 such city states. Their peoples all spoke the same language and those of them who could read and write, used the Greek alphabet from the 8th century BCE. Religion was another unifier for although each city had its local deities there, nevertheless, was a ‘national’ pantheon whose residing gods were venerated by all. Equally remarkable was that all city-states big and small, with large and modest populations were surrounded by walls for protection, had at their core an acropolis or citadel usually elevated above the rest of the city and housing temples, altars and government offices (image). City-states controlled the countryside in their vicinity. Yet, despite it all, they valued their independence and autonomy. So much so that they warred, made rival alliances and broke them as and when interests and circumstances dictated.

Typically, within the confines of a city-state dwelt citizens with full rights. They consisted of the adult males descending from families whose members already enjoyed full citizenships. Among their rights were taking part in the deliberations and voting in assemblies called ‘Ekklesia’. From them came members of the clergy officiating in the temples and at the altars of the gods. To the contrary, women, children and slaves did not qualify for citizenship rights.

Governance of city states varied. But, generally, there were three types. First was rule by a tyrant , meaning in those days someone from a martial background with wealth. Second was rule by an oligarchic group of men with influence and money. Finally, a democracy in which adult male citizens voted for the ruler.

Athens and Sparta are the two most renown of the Greek city-states. At the outset, let us consider their most glaring differences at the apogee of their respective power and influence. While Athens was a democracy, Sparta, on the other hand, functioned as a martial oligarchy; its ruling classes enamoured with feats of arms.

Athens(), in the region of Attica, first shows up on the radar of history in the 7th century (between 700 and 600 BCE). For a century or so it is ruled by its aristocratic class and by tyrants, as defined earlier, resulting in inequality and injustices between those at the top and the lower classes. In due course, according to Britannica, Athenian citizens felt that if they were good enough to be relied upon to defend their city in times of danger they, in return, should have a say on who governed them.

Fortunately, in 594 BCE a tyrant Solon comes to power determined to right the social wrongs of Athenian society. Among others he activates the hitherto moribund local Ekklesia (citizens’ assembly) and widens its membership. Athens golden age began under the leadership of the popular Pericles who governed from 461 t0 429 BCE and lasted for over a century.

In the opinion of Britannica, “[s]eldom since has civilized humanity surpassed democratic Athens..”. It is, probably, not coincidental that it was also the era of the brilliant minds of philosophers Socrates (470-399 BCE), Plato (427-347 BCE) and Aristotle (384-322BCE).

Yet Athenian democracy was flawed at least because voting was limited to adult male citizens. At a time when the city’s population counted 300,000, they did not exceed 50,ooo. There were twice as many slaves().

Athenian democracy was interrupted in 322 BCE when Athens was overrun by the Macedonians. Governing was taken over by oligarchs.

Sparta() is believed to have begun its existence in the 9th century (between 900 and 800 BCE) “when neighbouring villages coalesced to form the original city-state of Sparta” according to Historyworld.net .From the early days its citizens were outnumbered 10 to 1 by slaves. Quite naturally, the latter rebelled against their masters when opportunities arose. In the wake of such an event and with the aim to put an end, once and for all, to slave insubordination, one Lycurgus came up with the concept of a martial society consisting of highly trained and disciplined members. Believed to have existed between 800 and 730 BCE, Lycugrus has since been credited with the Spartan way of “equality, military fitness, and austerity” as explained by Wikipedia.

Thenceforth the city-state is ruled by “a rigid oligarchic constitution” according to Britannica. There were two concurrent hereditary kings, 5 magistrates, a senate of 30 members and citizens’ councils.

Curiously, scholars are not in agreement as to the reality of Lycurgus’. Did he really exist or is he a figure of fiction? Regardless, the reforms attributed to him are real enough and lasted till the end of Sparta in the 2nd century. Suffices to say, in their context, boys were removed from home at the age of seven and trained and educated to become efficient fighting machines.

The mention of ancient Rome in conversation, inevitably brings to mind the great empire it once ruled and the legacy which shaped many polities particularly in Europe. Very rarely, if at all, is brought to mind the preceding half a millennium of the Roman Republic, in place from 509 to 27 BCE, itself succeeding a monarchical period going back to 753 BCE, ruling over the first villages established in the region. Those Roman kings ruled jointly with an “an advisory council” or senate.

In 509 BCE, the then senate toppled the last king and replaced him with two elected consuls, who governed concurrently. The Roman republic was born. According to ‘History’ the name comes from “res publica” or “property of the people”. But despite the name “the system [was] perfectly designed for a small number of aristocratic families to hold on to power”.

The early republican senate numbered 300 seated-for-life senators. When one died or left office for any reason his co-members appointed a replacement. They were all ‘patricians’ or from the privileged classes of society. The commoners, on the other hand, called ‘plebeians’ were for all practical purposes ignored. Fortunately for the latter, however, they were relied upon to provide the forces needed by the ruling classes to defend and expand the Roman territory. In 494 BCE, the plebeians organized what could be termed a disobedience campaign. In the words of Historyworld.net: “They withdraw from all civic activities”.

With time, the senators had no choice but to give in to demands of those who were needed at the battlefronts. From 367 BCE one of the yearly appointed consuls came from among the plebeians. Inevitably some plebeian families achieved wealth and influence more akin to patrician aristocracy. Thenceforth, the social struggle centered on land ownership i.e the propertied classes versus the landless urban poor.

The Roman republic wasted no time embarking on wars of defence but mostly expansion. Having first acquired the whole Italian Peninsula, it spread wide and far including the conquest of the Carthaginian domains in the Punic Wars ending in 146 BCE as we have already seen. The extent of the republic’s domains by the time it was dissolved, is shown alongside. One of those who shone in the last decades of the republican era was Julius Caesar (100-44 BCE) first as a general and later as Rome’s autocratic ruler. Indeed he was so successful in his role as ‘dictator’ that upon his death he was officially deified. He was given the status of a god.

One consequence of the geopolitical expansion was a forced influx into the Italian homeland, of people from the conquered regions; having been captured by the republican armies. They were intended for a life of slaves. Among them, in particular, were highly educated and skilled Greeks.

The acquisitions and conquests led to unrest and disturbances, social as well as political, within Rome itself. They ultimately, in 27 BCE, ushered in the demise of the republic and onset of the imperial era of which we shall speak hereinafter.

Italian city-states

With the end of the western part of the Roman Empire a few decades before 500 CE and the consolidation of Roman Catholicism in Europe, two competing powers came about almost simultaneously. On the one hand there emerged the ‘Holy Roman Empire a “political body in central Europe composed of several states” whose first emperor was the renown Charlemagne (ruled from 800 to 814 CE). It was broken up in 1806. On the other in 754 CE arose the ‘Papal States’, in the Italian peninsula, “officially the State of the Church…under the direct sovereign rule of the pope”. It endured till 1870.

At the time, too, there was another power, on the eastern side of the Adriatic Sea and controlling the eastern Mediterranean: Byzantium (map). It lasted till the fall of its capital, Constantinople, in 1453.

Between the three, and from about 1000 CE, come into being a number of self-ruling city-states in the Italian boot among them Amalfi, Florence, Genoa, Milan, Pisa, Salerno, Venice and more (map). With time each absorbed its surrounding countryside to become a larger polity. The raison d'être of these city-states was unhindered trading and commercial activities in Italy, Europe and further afield. In the process they created the tools for doing so effectively in the form of financial and insurance organs . Italian entrepreneurs became wealthy and the cities grew. Reportedly in the 1200’s Florence, Milan and Venice had more than 100,000 inhabitants each.

Unlike the absolute monarchies and autocracies in the rest of Europe, tendency in the Italian city-states was to empower, according to Epic World History, “the educated lawyers, successful merchants, and non-noble landowners with the financial and social wherewithal to bring them to the forefront of the political stage”. Still these attempts at democracy did not quite succeed, the business aristocracy could not stand on the sidelines.

And as was the case with Carthage, Italian cities, from the 1200’s, stopped drafting their own citizens to fight their wars. Instead, they relied more and more on mercenaries recruited in neighbouring regions with impressive results.

The origins of Venice date back to 568 CE when German tribesmen invade northern Italy driving before them the local inhabitants who eventually, find a safe haven on dry land in a lagoon(), hitherto frequented by itinerant fishermen. Those refugees are credited of being the founders of Venice (image).

Over the years Venetians, taking advantage of their favourable position between Europe and the Mediterranean, evolve and hone their skills as merchants and middlemen. Adept at diplomacy, they deal equally well with both Byzantines and Muslims in their environment. And they build the ships, both merchant and naval, to further their commercial aims. Thus prepared and equipped, they collect the Silk Road’ s goods() on the eastern shores of the Mediterranean and deliver them to the European hinterland. They also profit from the traffic of pilgrims and Crusaders to the Holy Lands and more. By the end of the 1200’s, Venice had become, in the words of UNESCO, “the centre of a maritime empire of unequalled power.....[and] one of the most prosperous cities in Europe”.

Venetians were ruthless in the pursuit of their interests as illustrated by the episode of their involvement with the Crusaders and their role in the sacking of Constantinople in 1204, documented in my narrative ‘Of Caravans and Caravels’.

Beginning in 726 CE-(and for the ensuing 1,000 years)- the ruler of Venice was a ‘doge’ or ‘duke’. He was a member of the aristocracy and appointed for life by its members. For the first 400 years or so, he enjoyed extensive power with succeeding ones attempting to make their office hereditary without success. Eventually, in the 1100’s, Venice’s aristocrats rallied to create rules and regulations aimed at diluting and limiting the doge’s duties and responsibilities, hence power.

By the first decade of thee 1300’s, the doge is no more than “a powerless figurehead”. He is not authorized to take part in any business, nor are his relatives allowed to participate in any governmental function. Effective rule is thenceforth in the hands of an immutable group of wealthy merchant families. As History World puts it “Oligarchy is thus enshrined, in a system which survives until the French Revolution [1789]”.

Venice began to lose its preponderance in the Mediterranean and in the Middle East with the fall of Constantinople to the Ottomans in 1453. Simultaneously the Portuguese were charting new sea lanes to India round Africa and the Spaniards were heading west on their way to discover the riches of the Americas. All tending to deprive Venice of its bread and butter business.

EMPIRES

Empires have been the oldest, commonest and-( for some, at least)- most enduring socio-political entities in human history according to Professors Burbank and Cooper’s 2010 ‘ Empires in World History’. As for author Harari, for a polity to be identified as an empire it must possess two characteristics. The first is a significant number of ethnicities and cultures within its borders and second, these borders must be flexible and expandable. Surprisingly, the ‘single ethnicity’ nation states of which there are currently nearly 200 are a more recent introductions.

The first two empires treated below, the Achaemenid and that of the Han, are described by Encyclopedia Britannica as among the ‘8 of the Largest Empires in History’.

Another is the Islamic empire of the Umayyads. Though it lasted less than 90 years (661–750 CE), it spread from India to Spain and across North Africa. Overall, it spanned more than 10,000,000 km2 and ruled nearly 30% of the world population. And another, within the timeframe of this narrative, is that of the Mongols, written about it in ‘Raiders from the Steppe’.

The last two, The Roman and Byzantine empires are my own choice.

First Persian empire

The first Persian or, the Achaemenid empire, was founded by Cyrus II (the Great) around 550 BCE. It is one of the earliest and largest in history. Cyrus was succeeded by several emperors, notably Darius I (the Great), who reigned from 522 to486 BCE.

At its apogee around 480 BCE, the empire stretched from the Indus River in India to the Balkans (map). It lasted for just over 200 years, brief by the lifespan of some later empires, succumbing to the onslaught of Alexander the Great of Macedonia in 330 BCE.

How did the Achaemenians control such a vast territory. They did it by dividing the realm into as may be 20 or more ‘satrapies’, each under the control of a ‘satrap’ or governor whom they selected from the local personalities. His responsibilities included assessing the taxes to be collected and assigning shares among classes of the population. Out of the total thus collected he deducted his and his subordinates’ fees and expenses and proceeded to dispatch the balance to the imperial government in the center.

Under such circumstances, clearly, the doors of the satrap’s office was wide open for large scale corruption and abuse. Indeed, according to Britannica, it was often the case that satraps “became hereditary subkings… surrounded and assisted” by courtiers and sycophants. All despite the scrutiny, every now and then, of officers assigned by the central government to verify the proper functioning of the satrapies.

Culturally, the empire was an amalgam of the ethnicities in its constituent parts. Emperors, generally and Cyrus and Darius particularly displayed a tolerant attitude towards the languages, creeds, customs and traditions of their diverse subjects even though the official state religion was Zoroastrianism() and the language of the government was Aramaic, written using the Phoenician alphabet ().

Naturally, emperors, stood at the apex of the social order. They claimed the right to rule and build empires from Ahura Mazda, Zoroastrianism main deity. They gave themselves the title of ‘Shahanshah’ or King of Kings; the implication being, they were the masters of the highest ranking individual, no matter, anywhere in the empire. Remarkably, this grandiose and pompous title endured for almost 2,500 years. It was swept away by the Iranian Revolution of 1978.

Surrounding, and close to the Shahanshah was the usual assortment of courtiers and sycophants. In this case they included, in the words of Britannica “the powerful hereditary landholders, the upper echelons of the army, the harem, religious functionaries, and the bureaucracy”.

Second Chinese empire

The earliest Chinese civilization on record goes back 5,500 to 6,000 years ago. For a long time thereafter China evolved into warring little kingdoms. In 221 BCE, one of those forcefully brought them all together. Thus, was born Imperial China which was to prevail till abolition in 1912. That first empire, though, lasted less than two decades before being, in turn, toppled by the people who became the Han Dynasty or the second Chinese empire.

The Hans ruled for nearly four centuries; from 202BCE to 202CE. At its height the extent of the empire is shown on the map. For reference, the brown line delineates the area of present day China. By the time of its fall the Han empire’s population numbered according to some estimates about 60 million people.

In the words of ‘World History Encyclopedia’ the period of the Han Dynasty is “often regarded by scholars ……as the golden era of Chinese culture…”. The Han era saw the inventions of paper and porcelain. The dynasty brought about the genesis of the historically momentous trade routes known as the Silk Road(). On a different level, but equally if not more important, was the adoption of meritocracy in the ranks of civil servants. Thenceforth, a bureaucracy staffed by educated professionals would administer the affairs of the empire. This development was made in acknowledgement of, and acquiescence, to the teachings and preaching of Confucius (551-479 BCE) ().

Appointing a competent bureaucracy meant, in the words of Britannica “recruiting able and honest men to staff the civil service of an empire”. This involved, in addition to careful selection of candidates for the openings “considerable training before they attained sufficient competence”. Crucially, this selection process opened the door to ordinary citizens of modest means; it showed them the way through education rather than wealth and influence to respectable, remunerative employment for a better future for them and their families. All in all, there were 12 administrative echelons ranging from clerk to government minister. Meritorious promotion all the way up to the highest level was, theoretically, a possibility for all classes of society.

With all this said, however, matters did not go as planned. In the later part of the dynasty’s rule appointments swung in favour of rich, influential families who, among other things, could afford better education for their sons. They were, thus, able to control the functions of the government and in the process acquire more clout than senior bureaucrats. At about the same time Chinese chroniclers reported a widening gap between rich and poor. So much so that, reportedly, during the last decades of the dynasty wealthy families resorted to the employment of armed security personnel for their and their property’s safety.

An emperor, though, was a despot; all depended on his will. He appointed all senior civil servants forming the central government and in the provinces. All edicts and decrees were issued in his name. He was also the spiritual guide on whose “ethics, and morals” depended the wellbeing of the empire. His proper conduct helped mitigate the severity of “earthquakes, floods, droughts, epidemics, and swarms of locusts”.

Answerable to the emperor, the government was composed of one chancellor and nine ministers: the top civil servants in the empire. They were granted certain privileges; and though they supposedly lived and functioned under the Law, their punishment in case of wrongdoing were at the discretion of the monarch.

So as to control the vast imperial domain, a number of regional administrative units called commanderies were set up. Each was headed by a civilian governor and a military commander appointed from the center. They collected taxes, organized public works, raised armies, quelled disturbances and handed out judicial decisions, all, at the behest of the emperor. Within each commandery, however, the local nobility was granted a share of the taxes collected and other perks given their social status, though they shouldered no administrative or other responsibilities.

With a view towards “increasing the power of the ruler and the state”, as stated by Britannica, Han emperors were guided by a long standing Chinese philosophy known as the ‘Legalist Tradition’. It advocated governing harshly in the belief that “human nature was innately immoral and had to be checked”, according to Wikipedia. It meant severe punishments for transgressions, misdeeds and crimes. The latter ranged from cases of lese majesty, to acts of immorality and murders. Correspondingly, penalties varied from flogging to exile and from castration to death. Theoretically, all Chinese were subject to the laws but some, expectedly, were more so than others.

In contrast to the brutality of the ‘Tradition’, imperial regimes rewarded their deserving subjects with titles, privileges and pays. For that purpose, there was a scale of 20 social rankings with corresponding stipends. The humblest rank was that of ‘Gentleman’ which commanded a monthly salary of 50 bushels of millet-(a cereal)-. At the top was the rank of a ‘Full Marquis’ worth 1000 of the same. Again, all classes of society were, in principle, eligible regardless of birth. Still, according a Chinese official of that era, reported by Wikipedia, “anyone who presented a substantial amount of agricultural grain to the government” could aspire to a rank commensurate with his contribution.

Chinese society under the Hans, as in all others was hierarchical; its echelons depending on prestige and standing in the community. Naturally at the top dwelt the emperor. Of special importance was the empress dowager, the widow of the preceding emperor, or the mother of the current one. Her influence was not negligeable. A dowager’s advice was sought by the emperor and decisions obeyed. Below them was the inner court of spouse (s) and family, counsellors, concubines and eunuchs who at times would accede to positions not warranted by their primary role.

In second place stood the nine senior bureaucrats mentioned and esteemed scholars. Followed lesser government employees as well as the people of the professions such as physicians and teachers. The latter did well pecuniarily from the fees paid to them by their pupils. Their communal prestige was further enhanced by their contribution to settling disputes.

Because they were depended upon for food production farmers followed. Even so, they did not own the lands they tilled , the cottages they inhabited, the work animals and tools they used. Instead, they all belonged to rich often absentee landlords to whom they paid rent of up to half their produce. Farmers, for a time, were conscripted in the military and in government work gangs. Subsequently, during the second half of the Han era, they were allowed to pay the authorities in lieu of serving in either.

Artisans were valued next for their craftsmanship and the handicraft they produced for the more prosperous members in society. Curiously, they ranked ahead of merchants who were so low in esteem as to have to wear special clothing signaling their identity. And yet, despite it all, some merchant rivalled in wealth the highest ranking bureaucrats and most prestigious noblemen.

Expectedly, slaves occupied the lowest rung of the social scale. There were not many slaves in Han China. But those who endured that status either laboured under private owners or served the government. Among the latter were the family members of criminals sentenced to the death penalty.

The Empire of Rome.

A long introduction to the empire of Rome should not be necessary. Suffices to say that it was one of the greatest in human history and left behind a huge legacy in a variety of fields in the western world and elsewhere(). Its beginnings came in the wake of the collapse of the Roman Republic as explained hereinbefore. The western part, whose capital was Rome no longer existed by the middle of the first millennium CE. But is eastern half centered on Constantinople endured for almost another 1,000 years as we shall see hereinafter.

Expanding on the gains made under the republic, the empire of Rome reached its maximum physical extent in 117 CE, as shown on the map. Notably it turned the Mediterranean into a Roman sea. They knew it as  “mare nostrum-(our sea)”.

Under the aegis of Rome, survived a mixture of cultures and ethnicities. According to historian Yuval Noah Harari they included “Numantians, Arverni, Helvetians, Samnites, Lusitanians, Umbrians, Etruscans and hundreds of other forgotten peoples whom the Romans conquered centuries earlier...”. What is remarkable was the shared Roman identity between them. So much so that none of these ethnicities re-emerged after the disintegration of the empire.

The first emperor was given the title of Augustus "the venerated". He was born Octavian in 63 BCE and died in 14 CE. He was the adopted son of the dictator of the republican era Julius Caesar, earlier introduced.

In line with the deification of his adoptive father, Augustus initiated, and his successors continued, ‘emperor worship’ as part of an ‘imperial cult’ by virtue of which, an emperor and the members of his family were ranked alongside the gods. In consequence, Italian Romans venerated an emperor post-death consistently with their tradition of ancestor worship. Curiously though, Romans in the regions did so in his lifetime.

We have already come across the role of senators and senate during Rome’s republican days. Under the empire, however, the will of the emperor eclipsed the role of senators. From the time of Augustus onward, the survival and wellbeing of a senator and his family depended on imperial patronage and good will. Still, to gain a senatorial seat a candidate had to have a minimum of property. But once selected, he could hope to pass his seat to his son provided, in the meantime, he has not given cause to being relieved of his duties for an infringement of accepted norms of conduct such as marrying a freed slave woman. During the heyday of the empire, by about 200 CE, senators numbered 600, half of whom hailed from the conquered regions.

The senatorial class occupied the top echelons of Roman society. They shared it with the ‘Equestrians’, originally military people who had distinguished themselves in the campaigns of Rome. Equestrians owned property too and often exceeded senators in wealth and influence.

Together they belonged to the ‘honestiore’ or the honourable class. And while it implied certain responsibilities such as being relied upon for financing public works and others of common interest in their communities, honestiores were more than rewarded by the privileges they were entitled to. Among these was leniency in the courts of law where, in the words of Wikipedia “[s]entencing depended on…..the relative "worth" of the defendant” .

An ‘honestiore’, for example, could not be flogged for certain offenses. Instead he escaped with the payment of a fine. Flogging was reserved to members of the ‘humiliore’, or the lowly classes of Roman society. As for executions prescribed by the law for serious crimes, the former’s death would be quick and as painless as possible, while the latter’s would involve torture in an arena full of spectators culminating in a long and painful death ( image).

Indeed, the rest of the population belonged to the ‘humiliore’ social category. It numbered the farmers, peasants, artisans and craftsmen as well as others in trade and commerce etc. Some were prosperous, others abysmally poor.

Throughout the life of the empire, slavery() was an important part of society. It spanned a whole range of occupations. There were slave physicians and teachers at one end, farm and industrial (mining) workers at the other and household servants and helper in the middle, so to speak. Most extremely, physically endowed slaves were made to participate in deadly combat, as gladiators, for the entertainment of the public.

Regardless of what they did, slaves were a miserable lot. They had no protection under the law. Instead they were property whose owners could be as, mentally or/and physically, cruel and abusive as they wished. In example, unlike with free Roman citizens, the rape of a slave was not recognized as a punishable offence, but as abuse of property, in reparation of which an owner could claim compensation.

But, slaves owned by compassionate citizens could look forward to being manumitted . In such cases they were classified as freedmen or freedwomen. Thenceforth, they enjoyed the rights of born-free citizens and subjected to the same duties.

We have already seen that republican conquests caused an influx of slaves. This trend continued under the empire. Thousands of captives were brought back from campaigns in Europe and around the Mediterranean. Another way was to dispatch humans, especially from Asia Minor, in lieu of tax payments.

Education was part of Roman society. It began at home with parents’ by their example, showed children the rights and wrongs in matters of conduct and behaviour. Thereafter, fathers taught their sons the ins and outs of their trades. As for formal learning , only parents of means could afford the costs of schooling and tuition. Followed higher education for some().

An emperor was ‘Pontifex maximus’ or the highest religious authority of the realm. Roman beliefs accommodated a sizeable pantheon of gods and goddesses. Jupiter was the king of them all. The rest included Apollo, Mars, Neptune and Venus. Foreign ones were added as the religious traditions of conquered lands around the Mediterranean were absorbed rather than combatted.

Practicing religion was a matter of give and take between men and gods. Against the proper rituals, prayers, sacrificial offerings, the people of the empire expected, in return, favourable happenings not least being successes of their army legions.

How was such an extensive empire made to hold together. First, the emperor and his government in Rome, cultivated the elites in far off places, showed respect for local cultures and granted certain privileges to those who cooperated. Nevertheless, when opportunities to ‘divide and rule’ arose, the central authority exploited them to its advantage.

Already under Julius Caesar in the last decades of the Roman republic, conquering soldiers were allowed to settle in foreign lands. This practice continued under the empire at such a pace that according to Britannica “in the space of a single generation, more than 120 new centres were organized across the empire”. They were called ‘coloniae’. Clearly the Roman colonists brought with them the imperial cult, emperor worship and the religion and culture of Rome.

Roman Empire of the East

The realm known as the Byzantine empire was nothing more than the eastern part of the Roman empire which folded as already explained in 476 CE. A little earlier emperor Constantine I the Great (reigned 306- 337) decided to build himself a ‘New Rome’ east. By then he had adopted Christianity and was, hence, the first Christian Roman emperor. He chose the site of an ancient Greek town of Byzantium and founded his eponymously named Constantinople. Remarkably, the Roman empire of the east endured for over 1,000 years, longer than preceding, contemporary and following empires. In 1453, with the capitulation of Constantinople to the Ottoman Mehmed II the empire was no more.

Geopolitically, the empire’s domains and clout flowed and ebbed during its lifetime. At its apogee in the late 500’s CE, it stretched from the Middle East to North Africa and Italy south-westerly and north-westerly respectively (map right). Yet, by the 1450’s, just before the fall of Constantinople, it had shriveled to the two tiny territories shown in purple on the map left.

In between it suffered defeat in the 630’s and 40’s, in Syria, Palestine and Egypt, at the hands of the warriors of the new religion, Islam. These lands were lost to it for good. Four centuries later it relinquished a significant part of Asia Minor to the Seljuk Turks following its loss to them in 1071. The Seljuks were presaging the coming of the Ottomans. In the same 11th century the Byzantine gave up Italy to the Catholic popes. And following the sack of Constantinople in 1204, by the Crusaders, as earlier mentioned, they and the Venetians, , carved out parts of the Empire which they ruled as Latin domains until 1261 when the Orthodox empire is restored albeit a “mere shadow of its former self” as described by TimeMaps.

Revealingly, ‘Byzantium’ is an appellation adopted by historians in the 16th century, more than 100 years after the empire’s demise. This being so neither the multitude of emperors who have succeeded one another on its throne nor the Greco-Roman population thought of themselves as anything other than belonging to a “Roman Empire, founded [in] the Christian era by God’s grace to unify his people in preparation for the coming of his Son”, in the word of Britannica. And according TimeMaps “Constantinople, was from the start a major center of Christianity”. A further noteworthy development was becoming the center of Eastern Orthodoxy in the wake of the Christian ‘East–West Schism’ of 1045 CE.

Church affairs and secular governance were inseparable in Byzantium. Throughout the land, in addition to their ecclesiastical duties, bishops and patriarchs “collected taxes, dispensed justice, provided charity, organized commerce, negotiated with barbarians, and even mustered the soldiers”, according to Britannica. This duality was enshrined in the ‘Code of Justinian’() after its promoter emperor Justinian I who reigned from 527 to 565 CE. Its provisions remained valid for the ensuing 900 years.

Thenceforth, and for the duration of the empire, each of Justinian’s successors proclaimed to have been appointed by God. He controlled the Church as its senior-most patriarch. Simultaneously he ruled the land as ‘basileus’ (emperor). In this latter role, he was the supreme authority on all administrative, financial, military and social affairs of the realm. Still, despite or perhaps because of this dominance, the basileus was expected to conduct himself, justly and ethically according to accepted norms. He was, further expected to be a winner of wars.

From his sumptuous palace in Constantinople the patriarch/ basileus was closely advised by this in-house court of usual courtiers and, improbably, by a personal retinue of eunuchs who were entrusted with important tasks. In the words British historian Judith Herrin (DOB: 1942): “The court exercised a hegemonic power which integrated all sectors of society and reinforced imperial authority…”

The basileus was assisted in his functions by senior bureaucrats of his choice. They were responsible for all branches of the government. One in particular was the ‘Prefect of the East’ to whom all regional governors reported and were responsible to. He also sought the advice of senators selected among those who had done well on the battlefield.

Similarly to earlier Roman society, the Byzantine’s was divided, according to ‘World History Encyclopedia’ into the “privileged” and the “humble” categories.

In the first, were those with landowning family names and those who had fared well in the military as well as the senior government officials and the senators. Still, most significantly was the patronage granted them by the emperor. It translated into privileges and advantages not least of them leniency as regard punishable crimes short of murder or treason. All this notwithstanding, however, all those aristocrats remained at the mercy of the basileus who could withdraw his support should he suspect a beneficiary was becoming too wealthy and influential for his own good.

Classified as ‘humble’ was the rest of the population, itself categorized according to usefulness to empire and society. First were those of the professions such as “lawyers, accountants, scribes, minor officials and diplomats”. Beneath them figured people in commerce, banking etc. Astonishingly, though, and regardless of the wealth some of them mustered, they were generally held in low esteem. This was due to their depiction by the Church as “being tormented in hell for their dishonesty and sharp practices”. Further down were artisans and well-off farmers who worked their own lands.

Way down of the social scale survived, a significant number of Byzantine population consisting of the farm workers, who rented their labour to rich land owners.

Given the gap in wealth and influence separating the two social categories, it was not often that a humble could bridge it to join the privileged. Still it could be done through education. In the words of historian Herrin: “because leading positions in all spheres were open to talent, education was seen as a means of social mobility, a key to the rewards of high office and social prominence”. Consequently those with means say, rich merchants endeavoured to make their sons literate in Greek, the official language of the empire, and become knowledgeable in “the seven classical arts of antiquity” (), and subsequently take advanced courses in philosophy and theology.

As for slaves of whom there were a great many, they were variously purchased in specialized markets or imprisoned war captives. ‘World History Encyclopedia’ points to the incongruousness of toleration of slavery in a devoutly Christian society, despite the Church’s teaching “that all humans were equal before God whatever their social status”. No doubt, worldly benefits trumped otherworldly considerations.

Finally, a few words about the eunuchs (castrated males) in Byzantium. They have been a feature of the empire throughout its existence. They were to be found at the two extremes of Byzantine society. On the one hand they were the trusted assistants of the basileus in his palace; others occupied senior positions in the government, the military and the Church. Indeed some generals were castrates as well as more than one bishop. On the other hand they were to be found among the slaves in the household of the rich. Some of the captured enemy soldiers were castrated in preparation for life in servitude.

The idea behind this state of affairs is that since eunuchs could not sire offspring they would carry the tasks entrusted to them more diligently and selflessly with no ulterior ambitions for their posterity. They could also be trusted around the women of the household. So much so that, reportedly, some families castrated their sons in the hope of opening up future rewarding possibilities.

I hope I have succeeded in driving home the intended theme of this narrative. Namely that from the first day humanity became ‘civilized’ thanks to sedentarism itself necessitated by the invention of farming, a minority have sought and succeeded in making a majority serve its interests. This I have called kleptocracy.

Kleptocracy has been with us since; it only differs in its intensity from one place to the next according to professor Diamond. “The difference…..is merely one of degree: a matter of how large a percentage [of the national product] is retained by the elite”. From this perspective he makes the point that both Congolese president Mobutu Sese Seko (1930-19970) and George Washington (1732-1799), the hero of the American war of independence and 1st president of the USA, are kleptocrats . The first because he helped himself to much of his nation’s wealth, the second, though he did not do the same, “[n]evertheless he was born into wealth, which is much more unequally distributed in the United States…”

Violence Among Tribal Communities

VIOLENCE AMONG TRIBAL COMMUNITIES

Scottish clan fighting

The Author October 2021

INTRODUCTION

About 100,000 years ago, man’s forbears, Homo-sapiens, began to move out of Africa, their continent of origin(). By 15,000 years ago they had reached and populated practically every corner of the Globe. During these thousands of years they lived in what scholars have called ‘the state of nature’. It meant roaming bands of kin-related hunter gatherers in search of wild plants and animals to survive on.

Some 10,000 years ago, with the onset of the Agricultural Revolution which ushered in Civilization, some hunter gatherers proceeded to grow plants and domesticate animals and to settle down in order to do so. Logically enough, this happened first in regions in which the wild flora and fauna lent themselves to domestication. It should hardly be necessary to emphasise that the transition was a slow process taking many millennia to spread across the Globe.

Still, not all hunting gathering communities settled down to grow food and raise/breed animals. Those in localities where the soil was of marginal quality but could still support grazing, became herders permanently on the move with their animals from one pastureland to the next. These were the pastoralists.

And others who happened to inhabit inauspicious regions altogether remained hunter gatherers well into modern times, with some supplementing their collections with rudimentary plant cultivation.

One consequence of the agrarian transformation was the emergence of tribes some of which, in due course agglomerated into largish chiefdoms which eventually led to the formation of states and empires, as I have written in ‘From Egalitarianism to Kleptocracy’.

In this context it is important to remember that, well into modern times, such tribal societies have coexisted with the more developed, centrally controlled socio-political entities. Thus, for example, while the Roman empire was at its apogee in the first centuries of the Common Era, hordes of unruly tribal Celtic() and Germanic hordes occupied parts of Europe. Similarly, when the central Asiatic tribal Mongols swept south and west, they were terrorizing the Chinese and the Abbasid empires respectively. As for Africa tribal societies remained dominant well into the European colonial times, well into the 20th century.

This narrative is exclusively based on two of the three parts forming the 2006 book by Israeli scholar Azar Gat ‘War in Human Civilization’. It does not venture into state and empire instigated warfare. It limits itself to the violence and killings between tribal societies. Finally, the quotes which appear in the text hereinafter are excerpted from the book unless otherwise indicated.

FIGHTING IN THE STATE OF NATURE

Conflict or no conflict.

Did humans fight among themselves in the ‘state of nature’? If so, then violence is part of the genetic baggage of Homo sapiens inherited from the Homo genus across hundreds of millennia. Alternatively, did they, to the contrary, live in harmony with one another and with nature? These are the two sides of a debate, lasting into the 20th century, championed by two European philosophers: Thomas Hobbes (1588-1679) and Jean Jacques Rousseau (1712-1778).

For Hobbes, “the ‘human state of nature’ was one of endemic ‘warre’, murderous feuds for gain, safety, and reputation, a war of every man against every man which made life ‘poore’, nasty, brutish and short”. For Rousseau, on the other hand, the ‘human state of nature’ meant idyllic life in harmony with nature in an environment of plenty. Intraspecific-(within the same species)-violence and aggression being a civilizational acculturation in the wake of the Agricultural Revolution and its consequences.

Since then, though, several scholars busied themselves investigating the matter and looking for answers. Among others they observed and studied the habits and behaviour of chimpanzees, man’s nearest animal cousins whose lineage parted company with Homo genus’s some eight million years ago. In the 1960’s an extensive study found that chimpanzee groups are highly territorial, fighting off co-specifics-(same species)-who intruded on their turf. Further, males killed other males for their females as well as destroyed the latter’s offspring fathered by competitors.

As regards Homo sapiens, researchers analyzed cave arts and other relics. In one circumstance they came across “[o]ne of most gruesome instances” of intra-human violence in a cave in Germany dating back to Europe’s Mesolithic period-(from 15000 to 5000 BCE)-. There, “skulls were found…comprising the disembodied heads of thirty-four men, women and children, most with multiple holes knocked through their skulls by stone axes”.

Still, nothing is more convincing than observing the habits and practices of extant ‘stone age’ humans’. At the times they were contacted they had spent millennia in complete isolation unaware of the existence of others across seas, oceans and continents. Such encounters between European explorers, and settlers on the one hand and the natives of Australia, Tasmania, New Guinea (image) and the Indians of the Pacific coast of North America on the other, took place from the 17th to the middle of the 20th centuries. The investigative works that ensued are called ‘laboratories’. They have yielded valuable information on way of life of hunter gatherers groups.

Let’s begin win the Aborigines of Australia whose first contact with Europeans occurred in 1788. They numbered, at the time, about 300,000 souls belonging to 400-700 groups in an immense expanse of nearly 8 million sq km. Their only weapon was the boomerang (image). They had no knowledge of the bow and arrow invented elsewhere some 20,000 years ago.

As for the natives of Tasmania the island to Australia’s south, they were the “backwater of backwaters” in the words of author Gat. Unlike their neighbours north they had no knowledge of the boomerang. They numbered around 4,000 when the island was settled by Europeans in the early 1800’s.

A world away from Australasia survived the hunter gatherers of the north-west (Pacific) coast of North America, a stretch of 4,000 kms from present day western states of the USA, across Canada to Alaska. At the time they began to occasion scholarship interest, late in the 19th century, they consisted of “scores of linguistically different peoples and hundreds of tribes [of] mostly Indians but also Eskimos in coastal Alaska”.

Back in Australasia and the large island of New Guinea. The original inhabitants had, at first contact with outsiders in the middle of the twentieth century, existed in complete isolation for thousands of years. But unlike the aforementioned, they combined rudimentary agriculture with hunting and gathering. They lived in groups ranging from few hundreds to a few thousands, speaking 700 different languages.

Remarkably, what emerges from the foregoing, whether the discoveries in caves or the findings of the ‘laboratories’ is that intraspecific-(within the same species)- human violence was common in the ‘state of nature’ irrespective of geographic area. All “lived under constant fear of violent conflict….Death in fighting was among the principal causes of their mortality”.

Why did they kill one another?

According the Charles Darwin (1809 –1882), the father of the theory of evolution, all organisms, including man must proliferate in order to survive. Simply put, they must feed and procreate. Hereinbefore we have seen the migration that took place out of Africa to the rest of the world. All the time Homo sapiens were searching for nutritious food such as fruit, seeds but most of all meat “the most concentrated nutritional value in nature and… the object of the most intense competition”. And obviously they wanted potable water. Some migrants were lucky to come across abundant flora and fauna, others, in contrast, ended up in arid regions such as the wildernesses of Australia and various world deserts.

It is not intuitive for most people to think of hunter gatherers as people who suffered from food shortages. Yet “…in pre-modern societies…[t]he specter of hunger and starvation always over their heads…”. So much so that, at times of shortages they resorted to infanticide to reduce the number of mouths to feed. More, “Resource competition is a prime cause of aggression, violence and deadly violence in nature”. By resources are meant food water and at times safe shelters.

Reproduction or competition for access to female partners with good reproduction potentials was equal in importance to with resources as motive for intraspecific fighting. In practice, a woman leaving her husband for another man or breaking marital promises could result in feuds within a kin-related group or violence between neighbour groups. During fights women were stolen, raped or taken as wives. And those who could not be treated thus, killed.

There were other motivations for intraspecific warfare among hunter gatherers, albeit coming in second place to the two main ones hereinbefore. Among them is revenge and retaliation, the need for security and those arising from spiritual considerations like slighting one’s gods or malicious acts of sorcery.

Revenge is self-explanatory. It stems from the need to avenge deaths and or injuries lest the receiving party is considered weak and taken advantage of. The problem is that retaliation and re-retaliation often become a non- ending cycle of violence unless one of the antagonists is wiped out to the last man as to leave no one to continue the cycle of violence. As explained by one scholar in the context of Alaskan Eskimos “The objective of warfare… was to annihilate the members of the enemy group, men, women and children…”. Even so, some survived the attack. Upon them rested the incumbency to “perpetuate…hostilities since survivors were …obliged to seek revenge”.

Self-preservation dictated that pre-emptive strikes be undertaken against feared groups to ensure no future unpleasant surprises. As put by another scholar about the tendency of North American Indians “…to look upon outsiders with suspicion…an atmosphere charged with intertribal distrust even an imagined slight by an outsider could lead to retaliation against other members of his tribe…”. In New Guinea, tribes were constantly on the alert for sudden attacks by other tribal groups. So much so that they lived in fenced off and protected villages with lookouts atop towers at strategic positions (image). As for Tasmanians, according to author Gat, they engaged in “lethal raiding and counter-raiding…among their groups…..mutual apprehension was the rule”.

In the case of some Australian tribes “Warfare is one of the most important social activities”. They fought to avenge a killed kin member, or an act of sorcery, or sacrilege by outsiders. Further, they were in the habit of traveling relatively long distances questing for stones and others they could exchange for other goods. In the process they transited other groups’ territories and were met with violence. According to Australian historian and anthropologist Richard Kimber (D.O.B 1939) “ These expeditions took place on a regular basis….fighting appears to have been a common hazard faced by travelling parties”.

How did they go about it?

To begin with, face to face pitch battles were rare and usually inconclusive, merely signaling grudges and disagreements between antagonists. As observed in New Guinea (image) battles were pre-planned, could last for weeks, even months, stopped when both sides needed rest or during the rainy season. Hardly any hand-to-hand combat took place. Instead, combatants stayed a safe distant away from one another, shouted a great deal of invective and exchanged throws of spears and arrows at a distance while protected behind makeshift shields. Needless to say that very few lost their lives.

Rather than frontal, close contact battles, hunter gatherers preferred raids and ambushes. These minimized the cost in human life to the attackers while devastating the unexpecting victims as the assaults took place under cover of darkness. If enough raiders were taking part the whole attacked community could be wiped out with men, women-(unless abducted)-and children massacred.

For example, describing the war-making approach of the Indians of the American northwest, Scottish historian Adam Ferguson (1723-1816) writes that “[t]heir ordinary method…is by ambuscade [during which] they strive…to commit the greatest slaughter, or to make the greatest number of prisoners, with the least hazard to themselves”. More, since surprise attacks took place at dawn, according to American anthropologist Franz Boas (1858-1942), they were “rarely met with resistance…When the men were killed, their heads were cut off with…war axes. They burned the village. Women who pleased the warriors, and children, were taken as slaves”.

The preceding notwithstanding, there were occasions of vicious frontal clashes with heavy casualties on both sides. Australian anthropologist Mervyn Meggitt (1924-2003) tells of one such fight between two Aboriginal groups over water wells, at the beginning of the 20th century, in and arid region of the Australian expanse. The clash ended when the attackers succeeded in dislodging the original owners of the wells and incorporated their territory into theirs. In the words of Meggitt “By desert standards the engagement was spectacular….”.

Let us end this part by emphasizing that there is nothing specifically New Guinean, American or Australian about the events described. Each instance of violence described was essentially common to all ‘state of nature’ Homo sapiens. Clearly, evolutionary forces acting for millions of years caused the Homo genus and subsequently Homo sapiens to fight among themselves for their survival. In the process they became “…the most ruthless species that has ever marched the earth()”. In other words, contrary the Rousseauite presumption, conflict among ‘state of nature’ humans existed long before the coming of Civilization.

AGRICULTURE AND TRIBAL FIGHTING

Tribes and chiefdoms

In the preceding narrative ‘From Egalitarianism to Kleptocracy’, I have explained that tribal societies developed in the wake of the coming of farming 10,000 years ago. I said that, in the first instance they constituted essentially egalitarian kin-related tribes presided over by a headman with no particular distinction. In due course some tribes merged into largish chiefdoms headed by ‘big men’ endowed with advantages, authority and privileges. To be sure, chiefdoms displayed the first signs of social stratification and hierarchy leading the way to the coming of states and empires.

Striking are the similarities in societal and hierarchical arrangements between all tribal societies across space at time. Indeed, the societies that European navigators, explorers, settlers and colonialists came across from the 17th to the 19th centuries on the Atlantic seaboard of North America-(not to confuse with those of the Pacific coast spoken of hereinbefore)-, in Polynesia-(islands in the central and southern Pacific)-and Africa unmistakably matched what they already knew of the tribal societies in Mycenaean Greece (1600-1100 BCE), pre-republican Rome (earlier than 700 BCE) and medieval Europe (up to 1000 CE).

For example, a chiefdom’s ‘big man’ surrounded himself with a retinue of young men ready to pick a fight at his behest. The corollary being that they shared in the booties acquired during raids on their neighbours. Such a retinue constituted, so to speak, an elite fighting force and lived close to its chief such as eating at his table etc. As the power and prestige of a chief rose so did the number of candidates, not only from his own realm, but also from weaker ones willing to be part of his retinue. In rich chiefdoms these retinues could be sizeable. According to author Gat they numbered 200 average.

When Julius Caesar (100-44 BC) invaded Gaul (France) and Britain in the mid-1st century BCE he encountered 100 and 30 chiefdoms of Celtic origin respectively. But by the 5th century CE they had all come under the central authority of the king Clovis I, in France and various Anglo- Saxon kingdoms in England.

Another tribal society which left its marks in the pages of European history is that of the Scandinavian Norsemen. Commonly known as the Vikings they, as we shall see, sailed across the northern waters to wreak havoc in western Europe during the 9th and 10th centuries CE.

But much longer lasting, and well documented, were the chiefdoms-(known as clans)- in the Highlands-(mountainous part)- of Scotland. They prevailed till defeated by British government troops in 1746. These clans bore the still familiar names of their chiefs such as Campbell, MacGregor, Macleod and Macdonald, etc. Clan chiefs kept retinues of armed young men and cultivated their allegiance. And routinely, took “… ‘two or three wives during their lifetime…siring many children’, with marriages partly calculated to cement alliances”.

Still the longest surviving European tribal societies were the chiefdoms of Montenegro in the Balkans, extant till the 19th century.

Across the Atlantic Ocean on the eastern seaboard-(not to confuse with the western Indians mentioned earlier)- and in the Great Plains, were impressive Indian chiefdoms such as the Iroquois confederation of five tribes as well as others. These large groupings were still extant when the new nation of the United States came into being. From 1758 it began forcing them into reservations.

Similarly, Africa was fertile in tribal groups and chiefdoms till the mid twentieth century. They were of varying sizes; some more hierarchical and less egalitarian than others. For example, “…[t]he Dinka of southern Sudan numbered some 900,000, divided into 25 main tribal groups of widely diverging sizes…” Obviously, a great many more lived in the huge continent. Some chiefs were wealthy with large herds of cattle and many wives. Others were much more modest and 0n equal status with their people.

A world away on the Polynesian islands such as Hawaii, Tahiti, Tonga and more, tribal societies survived well into the 1800’s. They varied from egalitarian societies to highly stratified on the verge of statehood. In these, chiefs carried hallowed status being the custodians of inherited religious traditions rites and rituals. Further their elevated position enabled them to appropriate a significant part of their societies’ produced wealth.

Going back to the nomadic pastoralists written about in the Introduction, they survived for thousands of years in Africa, Europe, and Asia some extant till quite recently such as the Bedouins of north east Syria. But none of them have left their mark on history more than those originating in the central Asian steppe, a vast grassland suitable for livestock herding and, crucially, for horse riding adopted by the nomadic tribesmen between 4 to 5,000 years ago. The story of that steppe, its peoples and their horses is told in my earlier ‘Raiders from the Steppe’. It is not an exaggeration to state that the “economic-demographic-military effects of horseback riding were overwhelming”. More ominously “Life on horseback made the horse nomads unequalled in equestrian skills” as will become apparent hereinafter.to

Livestock and women.

Intertribal fighting remained of the raiding type. There were many reasons for the aggressive actions ranging from looting and the taking of booty to acquisition of resources, to territorial expansion to avenging previous offences and to fulfilling the oversize egos of young prestige-seeking fighters. In particular, livestock-(cattle, sheep, pigs and in due course horses and camels)-was the most sought after prize since ownership of it spelled wealth and power. Everywhere, from Europe to Africa and Asia, livestock constituted the currency for the purchase of wives, luxury and ornamental items such as clothing and subsequently copper and eventually silver and gold. In other words, “[b]ooty from raiding became a major avenue for ‘primary’ resource accumulation and social differentiation. A successful war leader now attracted followers…on a…permanent footing”. He thus needed to keep on increasing his resources and wealth through virtually permanent raiding for livestock, “precious metals, slaves” etc., to be able to pay and feed his men while enriching himself in the process,

In the preceding part, we have seen that competition for women formed one the motives for fighting among hunter gatherers. Did the arrival of settled life and the onset of Civilization put an end to this? Apparently not so. Raping and looting were looked upon as the right and rewards of victorious fighters(). So much so that “[i]ndeed, the prospect of sexual adventure…..was one attraction…which motivated men to join in”. Further “Young and beautiful captured women were a valued prize, in the choice of which…the leaders enjoyed a right of priority”.

With time tribal warfare acquired a larger dimension. Improved, richer farming and the expansion in populations brought about long range raiding by larger tribal groups. In other words, the more prosperous a geographical region, the more it was worthwhile to risk life and treasure to both attack and defend.

All these motivations are encapsulated in the saying of Chinggis Khan, the great Mongol chieftain: .“The greatest joy a man can know is to conquer his enemies and drive them before him. To ride their horses and take away their possessions. To see the faces of those who were dear to them bedewed with tears and to clasp their wives and daughters in his arms”.

Violence and unsavoury practices.

Raids and counter-raids among Amerindians of the eastern seaboard and in the Great Plains were frequent. Palisaded villages were attacked at dawn. Such surprise assaults maximized the sought-after benefits and minimized the risks of casualties among the attackers. They culminated in the cutting off of dead enemy fighters’ heads. They were carried off as trophies attesting to a warrior valour. Head hunting, too, was chronicled by ancient Greeks and Romans in their neck of the woods. And visitors to 19th century Montenegro where horrified at the sight of enemy heads adorning the porches of houses. Equally, the practice still endured among the natives of Amazonia in the 20th century.

In the case of the Highland clans and Polynesian chiefdoms “[f]euding with and raiding on [neighbours]… were incessant, with cattle stolen and corn stores set on fire”. These were engaged in primarily by chiefs’ retinues. But in times of crisis call ups from the chiefs went out. This was nothing short of “mandatory military call-ups of tribal men by their chiefs”. In other words the embryo of the future defence forces of states.

The bane of the pastoralists

All above notwithstanding, nomadic pastoralists constituted a permanent existential threat to farming communities in their neighbourhood. For raids by the former on the settlements of the latter were inevitably one-sided affairs always in favour of the aggressors. And yet, at certain times, in certain regions exchange of goods-(animal meat, dairy products and skins from herders against agricultural produce and man-made trinkets from the farmers)- fostered peaceful workable relationship between the two. Still, on the whole, there was no love lost between the two parties. Each held the values and properties of the other in disdain.

Pastoralists had the upper hand thanks to their mobility. Additionally, they had nothing to lose. With their property-(herds)- and families always on the move they could, with impunity, drive their livestock to graze on cultivated land, loot, damage crop at will while farmers stood helpless in front of their lots and animal pens trying in vain to protect them.

This was bad enough with pastoralists on foot. But when they adopted horse riding, as seen earlier, they became a formidable foe indeed. Despite being always outnumbered by their sedentary neighbours they compensated for it by their mobility and agility. Reportedly, they could attack, loot, inflict damage then move on to another target that could be 70 kms away and repeat the attack while their foes could do little to hold them back. Among other feats the horsemen “… were able to shoot [their arrows] with devastating speed and accuracy, in full gallop and even backwards, during flight”.

The most adventurous and fearless pastoralists were the central Asians. For example, leaving their home in the steppe, Attila and his Huns swept west in the 5th century CE. Preceded by a reputation of “atrociousness towards their sedentary neighbours”, they drove ahead of them panicking Germanic tribal communities reportedly numbering some 20,000 fighters and tens of thousands of men, women, children together with their livestock and other belongings. Attila’s achievements are recounted in ‘Raiders from the steppe’. In other words, the steppe herders “…by…adoption of the riding horse…were turned into a momentous force that bore decisively on the history of …sedentary societies, which greatly outnumbered them”.

Raiders from the sea.

Another form of raiding was piracy, already well established in the Mediterranean some 3,000 years ago. In this context big men’s responsibilities meant organizing flotillas of sea craft to carry them and their retinues towards the shores to be pillaged.

Recorded history recounts the forays of the ‘Sea Peoples’ around 1200 BCE against ancient Egypt and the Hittites(). It is not certain from where they came. Nevertheless, among others “they devastated Cyprus and the Levant coast, where many of the large cities…were sacked and destroyed, plunging the region, as in Greece, into a centuries-long Dark Age”. And more.

Some 2,000 years later we meet the marauding Vikings in western Europe. They did not attack in great numbers. Just one big man commanding a flotilla “consisting of as few as several to a few dozen ships and a few hundred warriors”. But their attacks were devastating.

From the northern beaches and shores of western Europe and the eastern coasts of the British Isles they stealthily moved under the cover of darkness to surprise the unexpecting and much weaker urban centers of the nascent states. Once there, “they looted, raped, burnt, killed and extorted”, causing the local populations to flee towards fortified places. As for the state authorities they were, more often than not, much too weak and unprepared to effectively oppose the aggressors. Instead, they bribed the invaders with places to settle, viz. in Normandy France, the earliest Scandinavian settlements. In an earlier narrative ‘Of caravans and caravels’ I have quoted a prayer in France in the 9th century which went: “Save us, O Lord from the savage Norsemen who destroy our country...they take away... our young, virgin boys. We beg you to save us from this evil”.

A FEW WORDS OF MY OWN

Professor Gat’s book should leave no doubt that humans, from the dawn of their of existence have been violent towards one another with all what this implies in consequences. Still, they were not alone. All other mammals including all ape and big cat lineages have and continue to exhibit aggressive behaviour towards members of their own species. In other words, belligerency is part and parcel of the genetic evolution of species over millions of years.

As we have already seen Thomas Hobbes guessed right. He further saw that it is only through state control that humans were rescued from themselves. That is to say, rules, regulations, penalties and the means of enforcement to stop their citizens from killing one another.

So, Rousseau was wrong. Violence not an invention of Civilization. Still, he was right about it worsening the socio-economic and political circumstances to enhance it. Thenceforth the rewards to be gained through aggression were bigger for one and heavier in costs for the other. To this must be added the advances in the tools of killing and destruction.

In the aftermath of the horrors of the two Great Wars of the twentieth century, accompanied and followed by horrendous genocides, and the prospect of a nuclear Armageddon, the world seems to be realizing that ‘enough is enough’. Otherwise what are we to make of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, UNICEF, Oxfam, Human Rights Watch, Amnesty International and many, many more.

Is humanity going to be eventually able to rid itself of this odious part of its genetic make-up?

Part II: Our Animal Cousins

Our Cousins in the Oceans

OUR COUSINS IN THE OCEANS

REFERENCES

BBC Wildlife Magazine. Squid vs octopus: what's the difference between these multiple limbed sea creatures?

British Geological Survey. Corals.

Encyclopedia Britannica. Barnacle. Cephalopod. Crustacean. Decapods. Octopus. Pinniped. Sea lion. Seal. Shark. Sponge. Squid. Walrus. Whale.

Encyclopedia.com Decapods.

National Geographic. Coral.

National Marine Sanctuary Foundation. What's the Difference? Octopus vs. Squid.

National Ocean Service. What are corals? Are corals animals or plants? What are barnacles? What is a sponge?

Smithsonian Ocean. Octopuses and squid. Pinnipedia. Sharks

The Marine Mammal. Center. Seals, Sea Lions and Walruses.

Wikipedia. Barnacle. Cephalopod. Cetacea. Coral reef. Decapods. Octopus. Pinniped. Shark. Squid

Woodhole Oceanic. -Barnacles.

INTRODUCTION

On a recent trip to Dubai, my daughter took us to visit ‘Sea World’ in Abu Dhabi. What struck me, in there, was the great diversity of marine creatures under the same roof or, more accurately, in the same giant aquarium. So, I decided to investigate some of them in their natural habitat. Hence this narrative.

As of 2023, marine biologists had catalogued over a quarter million animal species-(see hereinafter)- in the oceans, seas, lakes and rivers in the world ranging in size from the microscopic plankton-(see hereinafter)- to the behemothic blue whale. But they are convinced that there are, some 2,000,000 kinds of aquatic animals waiting to be discovered.

Still there is no risk of overcrowding and traffic jams. Seventy one percent of the total area of the Globe is water. 97.5% of it consists of oceans and seas, of 3,700 m depth on average, and constituting a huge reservoir of atmospheric gases, most notably, oxygen without which no life can exist.

Clearly, this narrative cannot be more than a tiny scratch of the surface of aquatic life. Be this as it may, I have selected a small sample of extant species with different living strategies. I begin with marine mammals who need to spend time on land. They are followed by other mammals which must rise to the surface to breathe. Thirdly, there are those who attend to their daily routine constantly submerged. Finally, we have those which lack the means of locomotion. This being so, they attach themselves, soon after birth, to a surface and stay there for the rest of their lives, not shifting by one millimetre.

Like all their cousins in other biospheres-(Dictionary: “The regions of the surface and atmosphere of the Earth where living organisms exist”)-, including humans; aquatic organisms need to breathe and take nourishment in order to survive and, having survived, must procreate to preserve their lineage .

In the parts which follow, there is often reference to the terms species, plankton and krill. I feel that, at the outset, some clarification is needed.

The species of a given animal are, very approximately, like long separated brothers and cousins. All descend from one ancestor who lived a few hundred million years ago. For example, lions, tigers, leopards and jaguars are species descended from an extinct ancestor we shall call ‘Panthera’. During the long evolutionary times his descendants strayed into various biospheres and, in order to survive, adapted to the new biospheric constraints they met. With time they evolved into the lions, tigers etc. Still, despite their differences they kept the common characteristics which include “a large, muscular body with a large skull, long tail and broad paws”. And the ‘family’ name. So much so, that in the language of science they are known as: Panthera leo, Panthera tigris, Panthera pardus and Panthera onca, respectively.

Encyclopedia Britannica defines plankton-(image right)- as “marine and freshwater organisms that, because they are nonmotile or too small or weak to swim against the current, exist in a drifting state”. On the other hand, krill-(image right)-are small-(8 to 60 mm )-shrimplike animals found in all seas and oceans. Both  plankton and krill are the main sources of food and nutrition for practically all aquatic organisms.

PINNIPEDS ( SEALS,SEA LIONS AND WALRUSES)

Pinniped is the scientific name given to a group of marine mammals with rear and front flippers-(image above). Included in this classification, and covered in this part are seals, sea-lions and walruses.

Marine biologists believe that pinnipeds descend from a land animal they call ‘Puijila’. He lived 24 million years ago-(image right). He swam using his webbed feet to propel himself. Eventually, his descendants evolved flippers for locomotion in water. Presently, pinnipeds’ living land cousins are skunks, red pandas, raccoons, weasels, otters, badgers etc.(image left).

The transformation from a ‘Puijila’ like animal to present day pinnipeds has meant the evolution of “sleek, torpedo-shaped bodies…[and]…powerful flippers to propel and steer”, as stated by ‘Smithsonian Ocean’. In short, they became uncontestably well suited for a life under the waves, where they spend a great deal of their time. Yet, they have kept their ancestral land-breathing organs which are c0nvenient when they come ashore for longish periods as we shall see. On land, pinnipeds “bring all four flippers underneath their bodies and walk on them”, according to ‘The Marine Mammal Center’.

Where do we find them? Seals are, mostly, dwellers of the polar regions though some prefer milder climates. Sea lions, on the whole, prefer the Pacific Ocean waters. As for walruses they inhabit the cold northern waters of the Atlantic, Pacific and Arctic Oceans.

Being warm blooded creatures, pinnipeds have evolved a thick layer of blubber-(fat) under their skin. It also constitutes a nutritional reserve.

Before diving, pinnipeds exhale all air. In other words, for the duration of submergence their lungs flatten completely. But as they resurface, they inhale deeply. As to what depth they plunge and for what duration will be explained hereinafter.

Evolution has equipped pinnipeds with a ‘moustache’ called vibrissae that enable them to locate their prey, in the gloom of the depths, by sensing disturbances in the water when a fish or another creature is moving. More. These whiskers are, navigational instruments.

Pinnipeds are exclusively meat eaters. With pointed teeth, that can only hold but not chew, they swallow their prey whole. As listed by Britannica their menu is varied including “ krill…. fish,…  crabs, lobsters, shrimp, …. squid and octopus, and mollusks (shellfish)”. Some species, also, prey on penguins and other seabirds. If, however, the prey is too large to swallow whole ,it is first torn to pieces. Indeed, we are told, by Wikipedia, that one avid penguin-eater species “is known to violently shake its prey to death”.

What is remarkable is that eating not only nourishes pinnipeds’ and satiate their hunger but it enables them to replenish their needs for fresh water, otherwise difficult to obtain in the oceans . Indeed, in the words of Smithsonian Ocean “Pinnipeds that live in the sea must rely on freshwater to survive… Most freshwater comes from a pinniped’s meal…Once the food is ingested, pinnipeds retain the water for as long as possible”.

And yet, despite their cleverness to secure their own nutritional needs, pinnipeds are themselves tasty food for the likes of bears, hyenas, killer whales, sharks and even to some of their own family. All pinnipeds are at risk of being preyed upon especially the young ones.

Amazingly, seals seek to evade predators by going under water, where they can sleep undisturbed. Equally amazing is the fact that they awake in time, before choking, to go up for a breath of fresh air.

Arrives the breeding season and “more than a million may congregate on an island”, according to Britannica. Males come first, females follow later. Generally, pinnipeds are polygamous. They set up harems and defend them vigourously against other males. In contrast, some species are not. An individual remains with the same mate for the duration of the season. Gestation lasts between 8 to 15 months. Each female bears one pup only; twins are a rarity. Some of the little ones enter the water soon after birth while others delay this activity for a few weeks after birth.

Pups suckle fat-rich milk. They are weaned in a matter of weeks. What is remarkable, however, is that during that lactation period, pinniped mothers “fast and nurse their pups”, according to Wikipedia. The nutritional value of the blubber, mentioned earlier, helps mothers to outlast the hardship.

Perhaps, another reason for mammas keeping close to their young ones is their instinctive awareness that they may be harmed, even killed, by male pinnipeds. Still, it is also true, according to the same source that when external danger appears “all the adults may protect the young”.

There are two families of seals each with a number of species.

First, the ‘true seal’ or ‘earless seal’ family. Its nineteen species have just two holes on each side on the head, and their skin is bare. The smallest species weighs 50 to 130 kgs with a length less than 1.5 m. The largest, on the other hand, is the southern ‘elephant-seal’ male-(image). It weighs 3,700 kgs. and is 6.5 metres long. Because of his bulk and the shape of his large snout he has been given the elephantine title. Female elephant seals are smaller than males by about half.

The feats and achievements of elephant seals are equally impressive. First, while other species do not go deeper the a few hundred metres and for a period not exceeding half an hour, the giant has been recorded at nearly 2,400 metres and about 2 hours respectively. Second, according to Wikipedia the elephant seal “is one of the farthest mammalian migraters”. It states that it can cross 18 to 21,000 kms of ocean to reach the breeding assembly place. And third, once there, he sets up a harem of up to a hundred females, and will defend it against any intruding male.

The second seal family is that of the ‘fur seal’ and the closely related sea lion. (image).Between them they number 15 species all with proper ears covered with flaps and a coat of fur. Sea lions sometimes exhibit a mane resembling that of a lion, hence the name. The largest of this family is the sea lion species inhabiting the icy far north. According to Britannica, it is 3.3metres long and weighs 1,000 kg. By contrast, females come at 2.5 metres and 300 kg. respectively. Additionally he is another polygamous creature. At breeding time his harem may consist of as many as 20 females.

The fourth member of the pinniped group is the walrus-(image). He is a large animal and the only surviving species of his family. He can reach a length of 3.7 meters and weighs as much as 1,700 kgs, noticeably bulkier than female walruses. His trade mark is his tusks which can attain 1 metre in length and weigh 5.4 kgs. He,too, is a polygamous breeder. The heavier he is and the longer his tusks, the larger is his harem.

CETACEANS (WHALES, DOLPHINS AND PORPOISES)

Cetacean is the scientific name of a biological group of marine animals that includes whales, dolphins and porpoises of which there are 98 species-(image above). Some of these are huge. Indeed, the blue whale, the largest animal ever, is 30m long and weighs as much as 200 tonnes.

Whales can be found in all the oceans of the Globe including the frigid waters of the Arctic and Antarctic regions. To the contrary dolphins do not normally venture into the latter. Instead, their habitat is all other salt water bodies and ,in some rivers too.

So! What do these animals have in common. Most importantly, they all descend from the same ancestor-(image). No! There is no mistake. He was a quadruped-(four legged)- land animal with fondness for rivers where he caught fish. He lived around 50 million years ago.

What else? Cetaceans are mammals, carnivores and vertebrates. They all have a layer of blubber-(fat)- under the skin to preserve body temperature. On the larger species, that layer can reach 50cms in thickness and yield as much as 50 tonnes of oil-(when melted).

The transition to marine life began 49 million years ago and by 45 million years ago cetaceans were fully acquainted with life beneath the waves. And by 5 million years later they were fully aquatic never venturing on land again. Nevertheless, they, presently have, a close relative in the semi aquatic hippopotamus-(image).

Obviously, the switch from land to marine environment involved considerable changes and adaptations, not least of them the substitution of efficient swimming to walking and running. For this to happen dorsal muscles strengthened. And hind and front legs became, respectively, the tail fluke and the flippers-(image).

More. The progenitor had a full denture complete with canines, molars and incisors. Cetaceans, on the other hand, evolved either conical shaped teeth or baleens-(image)- depending on species. The latter are made from the same material as that for animal horns and hooves. Still, neither denture enables cetaceans to chew, instead, they swallow their fare whole. For this reason cetaceans have evolved large mouths; the largest belonging to a baleen whale species. It is 5m long and 3 m wide.

When feeding, a baleen whale scoops water into its open mouth. It, then, closes it just enough for its baleens to act as a strainer, allowing water out but trapping the small fishes, krill, plankton, mollusks and small squids which are all swallowed without further ado. A toothed whale or a dolphin, on the other hand, clamps its prey of shrimps, fish, giant squids and tuna, between its teeth then swallows it whole.

When prey is too large to go down in one gulp it is, first, cut up to pieces by, for example, shaking it so vigourously as to cause its body to disintegrate.

Despite their transformation to fully aquatic life, cetaceans kept their ancestral lungs for breathing and, in case of female members, their placentas for carrying and nourishing their fetuses during gestation. They also preserved their mammal glands to feed the baby calves.

To breathe, whales, dolphins and porpoises rise up from the depths, break the surface and exhale in an “explosive blow” that can reach great heights. They then fill their lungs with ‘clean air’ before diving. As for the frequency of this event, it varies from 20 seconds for dolphins to as much as 10 minutes for the large blue whale, keeping in mind that most cetaceans stay within 100 m from the surface. There are exceptions however. A sperm whale can dive to about 1000 metres and hold its breath for up to one hour.

A female cetacean bears one calf every two years. Gestation lasts between 9 to 16 months depending on the species. She gives birth a to a fully developed calf, about one third the size of an adult. At birth, the mother takes the newborn up to the surface for its first breath. Subsequently, and for a period of 6 to 12 months, the calf suckles fat-rich milk from its mother’s mammary glands located below and at the back of the abdomen. In the rare cases of birth of twins, only one survives as the mother cannot produce enough milk for both.

Cetaceans emit sounds which carry far. They use them to communicate and for echolocation. What is echolocation? It is the ability to determine direction, distance, size etc. of an object or prey from the echo-(reflected sound) sent back from the target to the emitting animal. Echolocation enables toothed whales, and presumably dolphins, to chase and catch their dinner in the darkness and gloom of the deep. What is, indeed, remarkable is that a cetacean can tell the difference between the sound emitted by itself and that of others.

Whales generally enjoy a long life. Some can reach the ripe old age of 200 years. But when they, eventually, die, their carcasses sink to the bottom where they become habitats for hundreds of marine organisms.

In addition to their intelligence, cetaceans show ‘epimeletic’ behaviour towards one another. As explained by ‘Science direct. com’, the term “refers to the behavior of an adult that [often with the help others] consistently stays near a distressed, injured, or dead individual (often a calf), keeping it afloat, carrying it, protecting it from apparent danger and engaging in rescue attempts”.

CEPHALOPODS (OCTOPUSES AND SQUID)

Octopus and squid

Octopuses and squid are, along with a couple of others, scientifically known as ‘cephalopods’, from the Greek meaning ‘head foot’ “a reference to the way the cephalopod’s head connects to its many arms”, according to ‘Smithsonian Ocean’. They are soft-bodied, invertebrate-(no skeleton) mollusks, dwelling exclusively in the salty waters of the various seas and oceans. Octopuses prefer uneven oceans bottoms amid crevices, rocks and coral reefs. Squids, in contrast, prefer the open oceans. Presently, there are 300 species of each.

There is no doubt that their most startling feature are the appended arms and tentacles, which they trail behind when they swim. Octopuses have eight arms only-(octo is Latin for eight, hence the name). Squid have the same numbers of arms, but in addition they have two tentacles, quite visible in the image above. Also visible are the many rows of ‘suckers’ that each limb carries.

Sizes of the two cephalopods vary considerably. The average squid is around 60 cms long. The smallest, however, is a pygmy squid male about 2.5 cm only. At the other end is the giant squid-(image), stretching 13 m with its extended appendages. According to Britannica the giant squid is the “largest living invertebrates”.

As to octopuses, their dimensions also vary widely but not to the same extent. On average they measure about 30 cms in length. But here, again, there are the tiny ones not exceeding 5cms and the large one of up to 9 metres with arms extended.

Still, thanks to their soft and malleable bodies they can squeeze in tiny spaces. Indeed, in the words of Wikipedia “even the larger species can pass through a gap little more than 2.5 cm in diameter”. They do so either to trap prey or to hide from predators.

Octopuses and squid “dominated the seas for roughly 360 million years…[until about 66 million years ago, when]…marine mammals started to take over”, in the words of ‘Smithsonian Ocean’

How did it all begin?

That same source tells us that the evolutionary family tree of the cephalopods is so entangled, “that even…specialists often debate how they are related”. But they agree, nonetheless, that they were issued from a shelled mollusk, like the one shown, some 530 million years ago. As they evolved cephalopods jettisoned their protective shell. Octopuses and squid were without it when their respective evolutionary paths parted company roundabout 270 million years ago.

With, thenceforth, an exposed soft body , cephalopods ,no doubt, felt vulnerable. With time they became masters in concealment. This helped them in two ways. First, they would be inconspicuous to their prey and, secondly, they would be invisible to those which preyed on them. How did they go about it?

First, they perfected the art of camouflage. I.e. the ability to change colour so as to blend with surroundings. This was possible because the skin of cephalopods has colour cells embedded in it. When circumstances warrant it, colour cells are “individually innervated from the brain”, in the words of Britannica. It adds that one octopus species can change its appearance in one tenth of a second “quickly blending in with rocky and coral surroundings”.

Second, cephalopods emit what is known as ink to disorient pursuers. It is a liquid composed of a number of chemicals. It is dark in colour -(black and blue black for octopuses and squid respectively). Not only does it act as smoke screen but, incredibly , it can be made to assume the outline of the cephalopod emitting it. Thus, baiting chasers, while escaping unnoticed.

Anatomically, cephalopods consist of the parts shown and described below.

The mantle covers all organs-(respiratory, circulatory, digestive and reproductive). Behind the mantle are the eyes, mouth with a beak, a funnel-(or siphon)- and the arms and tentacles.

Like fishes, cephalopods breathe under water through gills. Blood circulation is handled by three hearts working synchronously. A cephalopod blood is bluish in colour because of its chemical composition.

The eyesight of cephalopods is as good as that of healthy humans. They are the reliable spotters of other marine creatures whether pry or predator. The beak, fronting the mouth, is made of hard material and works like scissors. As for the funnel, it fills two functions, namely as part of the respiratory system and in the locomotion of the animals.

Over evolutionary times cephalopods have developed the techniques of trailing their prey surreptitiously, to lay a trap for it and to entice it to come within reach of arms and tentacles. Once held firmly by the suckers, the prey is brought towards the beak which cuts it up to manageable pieces then sent into the mouth where it is mixed with a venomous saliva that separates flesh from shells and bones ,before being swallowed.

In addition to swimming, cephalopods can walk on the sea floor using their arms. They, also, dispose of a unique way of locomotion. It is a form of propulsion similar to that of jet or rocket engines. Muscles in the mantle forces water at high speed through the funnel, in order to propel the animal forward fast for a quick escape.

Still, despite cephalopods’ cunning, speed, and elaborate escape artistry-(change of colour and dark ink)-, they fall prey to sperm whales, moray eels-(image)- which “enjoy eating octopuses arm by arm”. Or to dolphins which “will toss and thrash an octopus against the water’s surface in an effort to stun them prior to eating”.

Mating to bring forth offspring is a once in a lifetime activity for males and females alike. Once the exercise is completed the male quickly ages and dies. Still, female octopuses await spawning in a safe place, of her choosing, unreachable by predators, and stay with and look after the eggs, until they hatch. After the little ones are out ,mamma octopuses join their partners in death.

Astonishing, indeed, is this excerpt in the publication of ‘Smithsonian Ocean’ “She’ll forgo eating and instead spend her time fanning the eggs with water to keep them clean and protect them from predators”. Even more astounding is “While most octopus mothers spend less than a few months watching over their brood, one deep-sea octopus  holds the record for the longest time spent watching over her eggs—over four and a half years!”.

On the other hand, female squid are not too bothered for the wellbeing of their brood. After ensuring her eggs are laid safely and cannot be troubled by predators, mother squid departs and dies. Since squid’s habitat is the deep ocean, the body sinks to the bottom where it is eaten by “ deep-sea scavengers”

The intelligence of cephalopods is, perhaps common knowledge. They are equipped with complex brains that enable them to learn and remember. So much so, that ‘Smithsonian Ocean’ writes about zoologists and biologists who believe that cephalopods were the first intelligent beings on the planet. They are certainly the most intelligent of all invertebrates.

Various scientists have experimented with, and observed their behaviour. Among the feats reported are the instances when captive cephalopods leave their own aquaria, move on the floor of the laboratory to devour crabs in other aquaria then return to their own. This, of course, implies that the cephalopods were able to retain their breaths during their two-way journeys across the floor of the laboratory.

Another feat reported, in 2009, the endeavours of one octopus species to dig out from the sea bottom , off the coast of Indonesia “coconut half shells…and carrying them for use as portable shelters”.

SELACHII (SHARKS)

Great white and hammerhead sharks

The ancestor of sharks lived some 400 million years ago. By 200 million years ago they had evolved, mor or less, into the 500 different species in existence currently. Their habitats are the oceans and seas of the world. Very few of them inhabit fresh water.

They can be found at varying depths up to a maximum of 3,000 m. Some travel up to 70 or 80 km in a day to places where food is plentiful.Average lifespan, for most species in in the 20 to 30 years. Still whale sharks can live to the good old age of 100.

A whole lot of variations exist between species. One such difference is glaringly obvious in the image above. This, notwithstanding, the species constitute a coherent group, scientifically called ‘Selachii’, embodying the common anatomical features unique to them.

We begin with these.

Fist, sharks are vertebrates. But theirs is a skeleton made of cartilage not bones. Cartilage is lighter than bone and more flexible. It, thus, makes for swift swimming and easy maneuverability in the water . Cartilage is found in humans. It is, for example, the matter between the two leg bones meeting at the knee and allowing the latter to flex easily.

Like fishes, sharks breathe under water through gills. But theirs are different from others. They consist of a number of slits on each side of the head as shown in the image. As they swim, they take water into their mouths, pass them through their gills which absorb the oxygen and reject the CO2.

In this context, There are species which must not stop swimming , even in their sleep. Otherwise, if they do they suffocate because only movement allows water to enter and exit their gills, i.e. breathe. Others have remedied the problem by evolving a pumping action to keep their gills irrigated when they are at a standstill.

The bodies of sharks are covered by vee-shaped scales-(image)- called denticles-(made from tooth material)- disposed in such a way that they present a smooth surface in the direction of movement; but if rubbed the wrong way , are as rough as sandpaper.

All sharks are carnivorous.

These common features, aside, shark species differ in physical dimensions and appearance, in habitats and in feeding and reproduction strategies and a few others.

Sizewise, they range from the little lantern-shark which fits in the palm of a hand-(image) to the 12metre long whale-shark.

Sharks have evolved rows of teeth that they keep replacing. In other words old ones fall allowing newer ones to take their place. According to Wikipedia “some sharks lose 30,000 or more teeth in their lifetime”. Still, teeth shapes and functions depend on the food eaten.

Some large species such as whale-sharks gobble planktons like baleen whales, hence the name. Their teeth are insignificant since they don’t bite nor chew. They fill their mouth cavities with water, push it through their gills which act as strainers throwing out the liquid while trapping the planktons which are,then, swallowed. Other species feed on crustaceans and mollusks and shellfish. Their teeth are molar like for crunching shells and grinding.

And, there are the eaters of large fishes, octopuses, seals, sea lion and more. Theirs are the “pointed teeth for grabbing fish out of the water [or] razor -sharp teeth for biting off chunks of prey”, as stated by Smithsonian Ocean’-(image). These are the fearsome objects of popular and screen lore.

Finally, there are also instances of cannibalism among species. In particular, in the words of Britannica “All sharks keep clear of hammerheads [image top], whose maneuverability  enhanced by the rudder effect of the head gives them a swimming advantage over other sharks”.

Once sharks have mated and the eggs fertilized, females gestate their young ones in three different ways depending on the species. In the first the eggs hatch within the body of the mother and the fetuses are delivered fully formed. Second, there are the species that lay their eggs-(like birds)- in the water and await their hatching. Lastly, there are no eggs to hatch. The females of these species have their embryos inside a placenta and deliver its little ones like humans do . In all three cases the females carefully select the place of delivery away from the eyes of adult male sharks.

Sharks are equipped with eyes as good as those of healthy humans. They are large on species that hunt fast swimming prey in daylight. Still, such crucial eyes deserve to be protected. Some species do it with transparent lids that close while hunting or when the owner is being aggressed. Others are able to turn their eyes in their sockets, when necessary to protect the pupils and front parts.

In contrast, at depths that sunlight does not reach, shark species have a developed sense of smell. They can detect minute quantities of organic material, such as blood in the water. According to Wikipedia “They are more attracted to the chemicals found in the intestines of many species”. More. In the words of ‘Smithsonian Ocean’ “A shark’s two nostrils can also detect smells separately to determine from which direction they originated”.

Although, on appearance, sharks ears are insignificant openings on each side od the head., they nevertheless connect to a sensitive inner ear which can detect the sound of a fish swimming “many miles away”. So says Wikipedia.

More. ‘Smithsonian Ocean’ writes about sharks having “a lateral line running along the middle of its body from head to tail” which senses the passage of a pray up to 250 metres away. Not only it knows it is there but can also tell its location, all in complete darkness.

I want to end with the most amazing piece of information. Again, according to ‘Smithsonian Ocean’, sharks taste their food before devouring it. This could be why many humans bitten by the animal survive. Because “the shark takes a bite, gets a bad taste in its mouth, and decides it doesn’t want to eat, releasing the person”.

CRUSTACEANS DECAPODS CRABS, LOBSTERS AND SHRIMPS

Crab,lobster anf shrimp

‘Crustacean’ is the biological identification of a large group of mainly aquatic invertebrates belonging to 45,000 species. By definition crustaceans have an exoskeleton-(external “supporting structure”), and bodies of “distinct sections” attached together-(segmented).

‘Decapod’ is a sub-group of crustacean consisting of 8,000 species of crabs, lobsters , shrimps , prawns and crayfish. More than 90% of them are aquatic-(in salty and freshwater). Like fishes, they breathe under water through gills. As for the small number of land-bound decapods they , naturally, breathe through lung-like organs. The widest variety of marine species inhabit the Indo-Pacific region shown as dark blue in the image. The fresh water variety can be found in Southeast Asia and North America.

The term ‘decapod’ comes from the Latin ‘deca’ meaning ten. It refers to their four pairs of legs and two pincers. The latter are used to catch and hold prey and as an instrument of defence against predators. In addition, they are equipped with antennae with which they smell and touch .

Decapods vary greatly in size. One species of shrimp is only 12 mm in length. At the other end of the scale is the ‘American lobster’ weighing 20 kilograms. Or the “giant Japanese spider crab, which has legs that can span up to 3.7 metres” according to Britannica-(image).

Decapods are not fussy about what they eat. They are omnivorous-(flesh and plant ). They will seek dead animals, prey on small fish and molluscs and feed on worms, plankton seaweeds and algae.

There is no direct mating between males and females decapods. The eggs spawned by females, once fertilised externally, are attached to mother’s abdomen till hatching.

The first appearance of decapods, in the form of a prawn, goes back to 455 million years ago and proceeded to diverge into lobsters etc. and the thousands of species thereof. It is appropriate, here, to quote Encyclopedia.com: “The many variations of the basic decapod body plan reflect the great success of this group and their adaptation to a wide range of habitat types and ecological roles”.

SESSILE ANIMALS CORAL REEFS, BARNCLES AND SPONGES

Oceans are the habitat of 6,000 species of coral reefs-(image above), mostly at less than 500m depth and, some of which, thousands of kilometres long. The adjoining image shows the extent of reefs around the Globe. The most impressive of them all is the ‘Great Barrier Reef’ off the coast of Australia. It stretches over 2300 kms, covering an area of about 350,000 sq kms. Evidence is that coral reefs appeared 450 million years ago.

Some call them the rainforests of the sea. According to Wikipedia, reefs constitute the habitat of not less than a quarter of marine species “including fish, mollusks, worms, crustaceans, sponges, starfish, sea urchins” etc. For example, the coral reef off Hawaii shelters about 7,000 species of flora and fauna.

Corals are animals called polyps. They are qualified of ‘sessile’ because they lack any means of locomotion, remaining immobile for the duration of their lives. From the surrounding water polyps extract calcium carbonate-(constituent of marble) to build themselves a shell. Reefs are created when millions of shells attach themselves to each other-(image) and to the sea beds to form what is called colonies. In other words, coral reefs are colonies of calcium carbonate polyp shells.

A polyp, ranges in size from 1 to 10 mm. Inside the shell is a cylindrically shaped soft bodied animal with a mouth, stomach, digestive system and tentacles (image). It feeds on tiny aquatic organisms taken through the mouth. Digested residue is discharged again through the mouth. The tentacles serve to catch prey, and to sting and discharge a toxic secretion into unwelcome visitors.

A symbiotic relation-(beneficial to both parties)- exists between polyps and a kind of algae-( aquatic plant) within the coral reef body. Like all plants the algae takes advantage of the sunlight reaching it to produce oxygen through photosynthesis. Polyps make use of the oxygen to survive and go about their business of building reefs. Simultaneously the algae has benefitted from the protection afforded to it by the reef.

Most polyps are simultaneously male and female. They, create gametes-(reproduction cells)-of both genders. Still, there are, also ,a few polyps which are exclusively male or female. Given this, how do polyps procreate?

Apparently, as if motivated by environmental clues. All coral reefs release, a huge number of male and female reproduction cells into the water. Fertilization proceeds and infant polyps result. As explained by ‘National Ocean Service’ “[reefs] may be separated by wide distances, so this release must be both precisely and broadly timed…” . The little newcomers begin their life by floating upwards toward sunlight. Not long afterwards they resubmerge and proceed with reef building .

I would like to conclude with this passage from ‘National Ocean Service’“… polyp conglomerates grow, die, and endlessly repeat the cycle over time, slowly laying the limestone foundation for coral reefs…Because of this cycle…many coral colonies can live for a very long time”.

The image above is of hundreds of barnacles joined together. Like coral reefs polyps, barnacles are ‘sessile’ marine animals. An article in a publication of the ‘Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution’ describes a barnacle as “[an organism] spending most of [its] life standing on [its] head and eating with[its] feet!” Presently, there are over 1400 species of barnacles. Paleontologists (who study fossils) believe that they evolved more than 325 million years ago.

The feet with which barnacles eat are hair like feelers, called ‘cirri’-(image). Adult barnacles surround themselves by a calcium shell with a movable lid through which the feelers are extend to collect planktons, for nourishment, and to extract vital oxygen from the water

Barnacles are commonly found in ‘intertidal zones’ on coasts and beaches, so that they are submerged at high tide and exposed when the tide goes out. In the latter case they retract their feelers, and close the opening to conserve their inner moisture and for protection. But as soon as high tide returns, the shell is opened, and the feelers extended.

They, also secrete a strong glue-(that scientists are trying to understand and emulate )- with which they attach themselves to others of their kind, as well as, to rocks, the underside of ship hulls and to others marine animals. The adjoining image shows barnacles glued to the shell of a turtle and on the back of a whale near its blow holes.

As with the coral reef polyps, adult barnacles are both male and female. And despite their immobility they are able to cross fertilize. After a gestation period “Newborn barnacles emerge from their parent's shells…feed on plankton voraciously…settle to the bottom, and begin feeling around for a new home, beginning the cycle all over again”, so writes the ‘Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution’.

Surprise ! Your household sponge-(image)- started life in the seas as a sessile animal as shown above.

Sponges have been around for over 600 million years . Presently there are about 5,000 species, attached to solid surfaces, from the intertidal zone to more than 8,500 metres deep. They are considered to be primitive organisms for they lack the usual organs needed to stay alive.

Instead, as explained by biologist Richard Dawkins-(D.O.B 1941)-,sponges “…make their living by passing a ceaseless current of water right through the body, from which they filter food particles [and oxygen for breathing]”. Further, Sponges have been seen to ‘sneeze’ meaning “contracting their whole body…..to clear detritus from within”.

Like barnacles, the majority of sponges are of both genders. Fertilization occurs in the water following the release of male and female gametes. The larvae which ensue move in the water for a few hours to several days until they locate suitable places to attach themselves, and commence life as sponges.

Our Avian Cousins

OUR AVIAN COUSINS

REFERENCES

AZ Animals: *Peacock. Pelican. Toucan.

BBC Wild Life: *Flamingo: guide.

Encyclopedia Britannica: *Birds. Origins of Birds. Golden eagle. Flamingo. Ostrich. Owl. Peacock. Pelican. Emperor penguin. Toucan.

Encyclopedia Westarctica: *Emperor penguin.

Live Science: *Ostrich facts.

National Geographic: *Eagle. Owls. Emperor penguin. Toco toucan

New World Encyclopedia: *Flamingo.

Penguin World: *Emperor penguin.

Science Direct: *The Origin and Diversification of Birds.

Sea World: *All about flamingos.

ThoughtCo: *Pelican Facts.

Wikipedia. *Birds. Golden eagle. Common ostrich. Owl. Peafowl. Indian peafowl. Pelican. Toucan. Toco toucan.

OUR AVIAN COUSINS

This narrative is a short account of the origin, versatility and everyday lives of feathered cousins. They are, indeed, our cousins because sometime in the long past we shared the same progenitors. I am, of course, talking of birds-(scientifically known as ‘aves’, hence the adjective ‘avian’)- whose most conspicuous physical traits are, feathers, beaks, wings, scaly feet, and sharp vision.

Descending from a common feathery ancestor, some 200 mya-(million years ago)-, as explained hereinafter, birds, under the constraints of various biospheres, slowly diversified into families and species and spread around the Globe. At present there are nearly 11,ooo species existing here and there on all continents. They range from the tiny hummingbird to the towering ostrich. Out of this total, 60 species account for flightless birds. Among them the ostrich, kiwi and ubiquitous turkey.

Sadly, during the passage of centuries and millennia more than 1000 species of birds have disappeared for various reasons, including homo-sapiens encroachment on their habitat and natural causes. The most frequently mentioned is the flightless dodo-(image)of the Mauritius Island.

Allow me, here a little diversion to explain, what I mean by species. The species of a given animal are, very approximately, like long separated brothers and cousins. All descend from one ancestor who lived sometime in the past. For example, lions and tigers are two species descended from ‘Panthera’, an extinct ancestor. Yet despite their differences they share the “ large, muscular body with a large skull, long tail and broad paws”, inherited from ‘Panthera’.

Apart from size, members of different avian species come with a large variety of wings, beaks and feet, depending on what is beneficial in specific biospheres. Below, are shown a few variations of these.

Wings are meant to carry birds in the air at altitudes and speeds, depending on the species. Each bird has a specific ‘wingspan’ meaning the distance in metres from wingtip to wingtip when in flight. The longest is that of the albatross-(a seabird) at 3.5m.-(image). As for how fast wings enable flight, a homing pigeon was clocked at more than 150 km/hr. And according to Britannica, the “fastest bird, however, is the peregrine falcon, whose speed in a dive has been measured in excess of 320 km/hr”. The foregoing, obviously, does not apply to flightless birds which nevertheless have kept a semblance of wings.

Equally, beaks evolved to suit the feeding requirements of their owners. For instance, carnivorous birds-(raptors)- ended up with hooked beaks to better cut their prey to pieces, whereas fish eating birds have longish pointed beaks and so on. And, finally, raptors’ feet are equipped with talons to tightly hold prey while devouring it. Water birds, on the other hand, have webbed feet to propel them when swimming.

In a nutshell, all three appendages complement one another. Carried aloft by powerful wings, a raptor spots its prey on the ground, dives for it, immobilizes it with its talons while its beak is doing its work. In other words it cannot survive in the absence of one of the three.

Clearly flightless birds have other survival strategies which will be discussed later in this narrative.

Breeding times are important for all birds. To begin with males and females of several species undertake long journeys to breeding locations where they congregate. Males, then, proceed with various courtship rituals vis-à-vis the female(s) they want as their partners. In the parts that follow, I shall describe those used by eight avian specimens.

Females lay eggs, mostly in nests prepared beforehand. Follows a period of incubation during which one or both parents take part and, subsequently, in feeding the hatched chicks. With their duties completed birds return to the regions the originally came from.

Birds emit sounds, to attract breeding partners, and to warn of danger. Chicks emit sounds directed at their parents when they want to be fed etc.

Apart from the journeys to the breeding grounds and back, several birds migrate with the change of seasons to make the most of availability of food. What is remarkable is that they are able to find their way back to where they migrated from in the first place. Equally remarkable are the distances some of these birds cover during their migratory journeys.

According to ‘Science Direct’ “The origin of birds is now one of the best understood major transitions in the history of life….”.The present consensus among ornithologists-(zoologists who study birds)- is that all aves that have ever existed have descended from dinosaurs.

What are dinosaurs in the first place? The name itself comes from the Greek terms ‘deinos’ meaning, approximately, fearsome and ‘sauros’ for lizard. Further, Britannica enlightens us by describing dinosaurs as a “group of reptiles, often very large, that first appeared roughly 245 million years ago… and  thrived worldwide for nearly 180 million years”. Indeed, birds are feathered dinosaurs which survived the calamity of the mass extinction 66 million years ago. As for being reptiles “their closest living relatives are the crocodilians.

More precisely, their ancestor is the ‘therapod’ dinosaur which walked on its hind legs-(image). Ornithologists think that around 200 mya this dinosaur started to acquire feathers, and evolve wings in place of the two small forelimbs.

Forward to 155 mya and the appearance of Archaeopteryx-(image)-,complete with feathers, beak and wings. It was capable of supporting power-flight-(by flapping wings). Here, zoologists have yet to decide“whether flight evolved through gliding by an arboreal ancestral bird or through aerial launching by a running terrestrial ancestor”, in the words of Britannica.

Be that as it may, in the wake of an evolutionary journey of 150 million years, birds acquired all the traits and characteristics we associate with them. Moreover, the great majority of them became “powerful flight engine”. I use the term ‘majority’ because during that long evolutionary journey, in certain biospheres, some species saw advantages of swapping flying to other capabilities.

I proceed, now with eight specimens from different species. They are, alphabetically, the eagle, flamingo, ostrich, owl, peafowl-(peacock)- pelican, penguin and toucan.

The golden eagle-(image)- is one of 68 species of ‘true eagles’. It is to be found in the northern hemisphere-(north of the equator). There are six extant sub-species of golden eagle, varying, from one another, in dimensions and plumage. They are all dark brown with lighter coloured feathers at the back of the neck hence the ‘golden’ part of the full name.

Perhaps the most impressive is the Asian or Himalayan golden eagle female weighing about 6.5 kgs. As for the lighter male, it weighs around 4 kgs. Their wing span in flight is over 2m-(image).Other sub-species are the European, Iberian, North American, Japanese and Siberian golden eagles.

Golden eagles are raptors; i.e carnivorous birds. They feed on other animals such as rabbits, squirrels, snakes , fish and carrion-(decomposing remains of dead animals). They also go after other birds such as geese and even feed on other raptors such as owls and falcons.

Having spotted its prey , from high above, it dives on it quickly, grabs it with its powerful talons before cutting it up with its equally formidable hooked beak-(image).

At the beginning of the breeding season, the male golden eagle is busy convincing the female of his choice to join him in happy matrimony . According to the ‘Livermore Park District’ “Males pick up sticks or rocks and drop them high in the sky. Before the debris hits the ground, the eagles swoop and catch them mid-air. Females perform a similar ritual using clods of dirt”.

Golden eagles are monogamous. A pair may stay together for life. They build several big nests -(called eyries)- on top of cliffs or other high places, to which they return seasonally. More, golden eagles males consider the area of the nests, which may be as extended as 200 sq.kms, as theirs to protect from intruders.

In due course, the female lays up to four eggs which are , then, incubated by both parents for a period of about 40 days. Typically the young chicks are under the care of their parents for about three months before they leave and fare for themselves.

Flamingo, from the Spanish or Portuguese for flame coloured, refers to the bird shown. It is one of six extant species of flying and wading-(walking through shallow water) birds. They come in varying shades of pink and red. Their habitats are located in South America, Europe, North Africa, the Middle East and Asia, in the vicinity of fresh water bodies.

The striking colours of flamingos are not genetic. They come from a chemical called ‘carotene’. It is contained in the algae, crustaceans and mollusks they consume. Their digestive system metabolizes food intakes in such a way as to make ‘carotene’ colour feathers, skin, tissues and blood. As noted by the New World Encyclopedia “A well-fed, healthy flamingo is more vibrantly colored…a white or pale flamingo, however, is usually unhealthy or malnourished”. As for BBC Wild Life, it chimes in with “The pinkest birds have the highest status in the colony”

Members of all species carry large wings, long flexible necks and down-turned beaks. They also walk on two spindly legs ending with flippered feet. When standing in water they do so on one leg and raise the other as shown in the picture above. Ornithologists speculate that they do so, possibly, to minimize loss of body heat. Depending on species, flamingos weigh between 2.5 and 3.5 kgs and stand 80 to 160 cms tall. Their wingspans vary from a minimum of 95 to a maximum of 165 cms.

The image to the right illustrates the way flamingos eat. With beaks immersed in water, they let in nutrient-rich mud stirred up by their webbed feet. In turn, the beaks-(image left)-, which have evolved as filters, allow undesirables to escape while trapping the nutrients. It does so, in the words of New World Encyclopedia thanks to the “hairy structures called lamellae, which line the mandibles [jaws] , and the large rough-surfaced tongue”.

Flamingos are social animals. They wade together in their hundreds or fly in large flocks. In particular, they come together at breeding time. According to BBC Wild Life, “a high ranking individual….by changing its feather colour to a deeper pink [initiates] the breeding rituals”.

But first, male flamingos must choose and be accepted by female flamingos. A courtship drama ensues. As explained by the ‘American Museum of Natural History’, “They…open their wings in a salute, and even bow down with their necks stretched forward and wings lifted in the back. During this ritual, flamingos get so worked up, they march together as if in a line dance, first to the right, then to the left”.

Male and female flamingos more often than not form monogamous unions. They proceed to build their nest which according to Britannica is “a truncated cone of muddy clay”-(image). In due course one or two eggs are laid. Both parents take turns during the 30-day incubation period. Eventually, grey feathered chicks hatch. They acquire their pink colour as they grow.

From day one, and for about 60 days , the young ones are fed carotene-rich ‘milk’ secreted by the digestive systems of their parents. By the end of that period the chicks’ filtering beaks have evolved enough for them to feed themselves. Still,

while the young ones are gaining their pinkish colour the parents, by contrast, have paled as a result of the carotene loss in the production of the eggs and during feeding and caring for their babies.

I do not want to end this part without quoting a passage from Britannica about the elegant flight of flamingos-(image):“In flight, flamingos present a striking and beautiful sight, with legs and neck stretched out straight, looking like white and rosy crosses with black arms”.

There are only two extant species of flightless wild ostriches. They are the largest birds alive today-(image). So much so that Wikipedia identifies them as the “the largest living dinosaur”. A fully developed black coloured male weighs in excess 150 kgs and stands 3 m tall thanks to its long legs and neck. Brownish females are somewhat smaller.

Wild ostriches’ domain is the African continent. Accordingly, they can tolerate a wide range of temperatures. In much of their habitat, temperatures vary by as much as 40 °C between night and day. During extreme rainless periods ostriches tend to form nomadic groups of five to 100 birds.

Unfortunately, they share the African space with wild predators such as lions, leopards and raptors. They are preyed upon from the day they hatch to the day they die. Reportedly, one species of vultures bomb ostrich eggs with pebbles in the hope of breaking them open to devour partly developed chicks.

The eyes of an ostrich are brown and large, in a small head with a wide and short beak-(image). They provide the bird with an acute, long distance vision. Measuring 5 cms in diameter, they are wider than those of any other land animal.

Then, there are the ostrich long, spindly and muscular legs, at the end of which are large paws, each ending with two toes with nails. They are bigger than those of any living bird. Having, in the distant past, lost the ability to fly, ostriches have acquired speed on land instead. Their legs are capable of carrying them away from predators at 73 kms/hr., for as long as it takes to discourage pursuers. It seems, according to Wikipedia, that ostriches on the run can achieve “short bursts up to about 97 km/h the fastest land speed of any bipedal animal and the second fastest of all land animals after the cheetah”. What is more each stride is 3 to 5 m long.

In addition to being fast runners, ostriches, are vicious kickers. When they and/or their broods are cornered by predators, they fight with their legs. No attacker, not even a lion, can survive a well aimed ostrich kick. As explained by Wikipedia “ostriches deliver slashing kicks with their powerful feet, armed with long claws, with which they can disembowel or kill… with a single blow”.

Though it cannot fly, an ostrich’s wingspan measures 2m. Apparently, wings are used to help with turning during a run, and as air brakes.

What do ostriches feed on? Mostly vegetal items. But, on occasion, have no problem consuming reptiles, lizards, rodents and the like. They also ingest sand and small pebbles to help their digestive system deal with the food intake. Ostriches can go without drinking for long periods of time because their digestive system extracts water from the food ingested. That is not to say, however, that when the opportunity arises they refrain from drinking. On the contrary a source of fresh water is always welcomed.

When the breeding season arrives, male and female ostriches congregate with the former becoming overly excited as each tries to seduce up to 5 females in its attempt to form a polygamous union. It will “Perform…. Displays….gyrating and wildly waving his head”. In turn, a female ostrich will indicate its acquiescence “by spreading her wings and holding them close to the ground”, as stated by Britannica.

Similarly to human harems, one of the females is more equal than others. She is the first to lay eggs in the nest, excavated, beforehand, by the male-(image). Moreover, prior to starting incubation she may discard a few eggs she considers weak, leaving only about a dozen or so in the nest. Reportedly, each mother can identify her own eggs.

Ostrich eggs are bigger than those of any other extant bird. Each is twenty times that produced by farm chicken. Incubation lasts for about 40 days. All mother ostriches take turn sitting on the eggs. So does the father. He does so at night so as to take advantage of his black plumage to conceal himself and the nest from the eyes of possible predators. The females, on the other hand, do the same in daylight. Their brownish plumage serving, too, as camouflage.

Baby ostriches are as big as an adult chicken. At 6 months of age they have attained half adult size. Still, in the meantime, they are reared by both parents with the father showing them the way to eat.

We have seen, hereinbefore that ostriches run away from trouble and if cornered defend themselves by delivering lethal kicks. These are actions of last resort. Ostriches and their broods first attempt to make themselves inconspicuous when they sense danger. They will lie flat on the ground with their heads touching the sand. This position, some speculate, may have given rise to the universally accepted myth that ostriches bury their heads in the sand if faced with danger. This is, simply, not the case.

If left alone by predators, ostriches, in the wild may live for 75 years.

Despite there being in excess of 200 species of owls, they are all nocturnal raptors, sharing the same anatomy, traits, habits and behaviour. They stand straight up, have flat faces, two large front facing eyes, small crooked beaks , large sharp talons and feathers suitable for noiseless flying . They range in size from as little as 13.5 cms and weighing 31 grams to 71 cms and 4.2 kgs . In this context female owls are commonly larger than males. Owls are equally at home in all the Globe’s environments except in frigid Antarctica. They have a variety of colours making them inconspicuous in their respective biosphere.

Being carnivorous, owls feed on the flesh of other animals, specifically rats, mice, hamsters, rabbits and the like and other birds. Having no teeth, they swallow them whole. Non- digestible feathers, hair, bones, teeth etc. are regurgitated in the shape pellets-(image).

Owls are superbly equipped for locating, catching and consuming their prey. Let us begin with the well developed senses of vision and hearing. The big frontally placed eyes give owls long distance vision in the dark. Similarly, owl ears can detect the faintest noise a prey makes. Further, because they are asymmetrically located on the bird’s head they enable it to pinpoint the whereabouts of the source emitting it.

Having established, exactly, the location of its prey, an owl then swoops down on it, noiselessly, from its perch. The flight is silent because of the wing feathers. The poor prey, unaware of the fate awaiting it, does not take any evasive action. By the time the owl’s powerful talons-(image), grip it, its fate is sealed. Having immobilized its prey, the bird’s sharp and hooked, beak-(image), working scissor-like, proceeds cuts up the prey into swallowable pieces.

During courtships, a male owl will undertake exhibition flights for the benefit of the female of his choice. He may persuade her to see the nest he has prepared and even offer her food.

Depending on species and on what is naturally available, owls’ nests are variously located in/on “trees or cliffs…in woodpecker holes… cavities in buildings… rock cavities in canyons, crevices in sandstone, or holes…etc.” according to Britannica. They may even occupy other birds abandoned nests.

Breeding is timed so that, by the time owlets are old enough to hunt by themselves, prey is abundant. Until then, however, 4 to 12 eggs, depending on the species, have been laid, incubated and cared for by both parents. During that stage the female stays at home, while the male flies out in search of prey that he passes to his mate, which, cuts it to pieces before feeding it to the little ones. Still, at times of scarcity, the father satisfies himself first before hunting on behalf of his waiting family, even at the cost of losing owlets to hunger.

Peafowl is the name of three extant species of peacocks-(males)- and peahens-(females). They are the Indian, Javanese and Congolese peafowls. Their habitats are open forests, and cultivated areas.

The bird shown is the blue peacock-(because of the colour of its neck). It belongs to the Indian species. It is unmistakably recognizable by its colours, its long tail of scintillating feathers, and by the crest on its head-(image). Its overall length from beak to tip of tail varies between 2.4 to 2.8 metres. It weighs 4 to 5 kgs.

The blue peacock is also famous for its ability to transform its tail into a handheld shaped fan, of amazingly colourful design-( image). It does so to seduce a female bird of his species or to impress enemies by making them believe he is bigger than actual.

As for the peahen, it is tailless and her body is a little smaller than that of the peacock. As shown in the image, apart from the crest on its head, it has nothing of the flamboyance of the male.

Wild peafowls spend the early mornings looking for food. During the day they stay hidden in vegetation from the hot sun and from predators. When darkness arrives they fly up to trees where they roost for the night.

What do peafowls eat? According to Wikipedia “[They]… are not picky and will eat almost anything they can fit in their beak and digest”. Indeed, they will down fruits, grain, small reptiles, rodents and insects.

Peacocks are polygamous. They may mate with two to five peahens per reproduction season. Still, during courtship they will parade the splendour of their colourful expanded tails in front of peahens “and make loud calls to the females”.

In due time the peahens prepare nests in ground depressions and conceal them, with vegetation, from the eyes of predators. A half dozen eggs are laid. With no assistance or contribution from the peacock, the mothers spend about 4 weeks incubating the eggs by sitting on them, the way farm hens do. The peachicks that hatch, are covered with feathers, leave the nest shortly after emerging and can fly a week later. However they do not stray from their mother, which, if necessary, carries them on her back and flies to the safety of trees.

Peacocks have a strident calls. It is a double-edged sword. While the bird’s intention is to warn against the presence of a predator, it also have the unintended result of revealing its presence to the attacker.

Peafowls are candidates for predation. They are sought after by the large mammal carnivores. The adult bird, may run to safety or take to the air for the safety of a tree. But the small ones are not so lucky.

In the wild, the lifespan of a blue peacock is about 15 years unless, of course, it is caught and eaten by a predator.

Pelican-(image) is the name of eight extant species of large aquatic and flying birds that inhabit in all continents except Antarctica. They can be mostly found near salty coastal waters but are also home in the vicinity of rivers and lakes. The birds of 4 of the species have white or whitish plumage while that of the other 4 is brown or grey.

Pelicans are recognizable by their long necks, short webbed feet and uniquely evolved long beaks. Indeed, as shown in the image, the lower half of a pelican’s bill consists of a flexible pouch, known as ‘gular’’. Further, it is longer than that of any other extant bird. In particular, that of the Australian pelican may reach half a metre in length.

Depending on species pelicans come in different sizes and wingspans. The largest specimen weighs 15 kgs, is 1.83m. tall and has a wingspan of 3 m. Not only are this category of pelicans “among the largest of living birds” in the opinion of Britannica but are also “among the heaviest of flying birds”, in that of Wikipedia. As for the smallest pelican, it weighs 2.75 kgs., is 1.06 m. tall and has a wingspan of no more than 1.83 m. Typically, female pelicans are somewhat smaller than males. If unmolested, pelicans in the wild can reach the age of 30 years.

Fish is the pelicans’ main fare. It can be supplemented with crabs, turtles, and crustaceans, all of which are swallowed whole. But how do they go about catching their prey? Armed with the beak described earlier, pelicans scoop water into the pouches, trap the prey, swallow it and drain the liquid. Some pelicans dip their beaks under the surface as they swim propelled by their webbed feet-(image). Others dive from the air on their prey. Still others may swim below the surface to achieve their aim.

In addition to being good swimmers pelicans are also adept flyers and gliders-(image). By flapping their wide wings they are able to soar, but once aloft they take advantage of natural air currents to effortlessly glide long and far.

Comes the breeding season. Male and female pelicans congregate, in their hundreds, to one place where fish is plentiful. “Breeding begins with courtship. The female leads potential mates…As the males follow her…they threaten each other while swinging their open bills…trying to attract the female's attention”, in the words of the ‘Australian Museum’.

Male pelicans are monogamous for the duration of the season. Further, they all “…become brightly colored around their bills, pouches, and facial skin…. Most also develop a knob on the upper part of their bills”, according to ‘AZ Animals’. All these changes disappear once breeding is over.

Nests are built jointly by the couple. Large, white pelicans have theirs at ground level, while the smaller brown species build them on trees. In due course, from one to six eggs are laid. Both parents share the duty of incubation , consisting of placing the webbed foot over the egg(s). This goes on for 30 to 36 days, at the end of which the little one(s) hatch. They grow on the regurgitated fish, and whatever else has been ingested by the parents.

I want to end this part with the curious ritual of pelican chicks, reported by Wikipedia. After feeding, a chick may go through a series of antics to the point of exhaustion and a temporary loss of consciousness. Ornithologists are not certain what causes this behaviour but think that maybe “it is to draw attention to itself and away from any siblings who are waiting to be fed”.

Penguins are flightless birds that have given up flying some 60 mya. What used to be their wings have evolved into paddles to propel them, along with their webbed feet, underwater. There are , altogether, 18 species of penguins located here and there in the Southern Hemisphere. This part is about the emperor penguin-(image)- which at 1 to 1.3 m tall and a weight of between 25 to 45 kg is the largest of them all. As of 2009 the population of emperor penguins numbered close to 600,000 birds. distributed among 50 or so colonies.

The habitat of all emperor penguins is Antarctica, the most frigid and inhospitable place on the Globe. Ambient temperatures there during the winter months-(March to October)- can dip to -50 deg C, with occasionally wind speeds of 144 km/hr. Accordingly, emperor penguins have evolved body insulation in the form of thick feathers and a layer of fat under them. Moreover, emperor penguins huddle close together for mutual body heat exchange. As described by National Geographic “Individuals take turns moving to the group's protected and relatively toasty interior. Once a penguin has warmed a bit it will move to the perimeter of the group so that others can enjoy protection from the icy elements”. It goes without saying that the young ones are kept within that group.

Emperor penguins feed exclusively on krill, fish, squid etc. Since their survival depends on creatures of the ocean, they have evolved into adept and efficient divers and swimmers-(image). Their streamlined bodies, flippers and webbed feet allow them to reach a depth of 500 meters. Once there emperor penguins endure for as long as 20 minutes, before rising to the surface for a breath of fresh air. Alas, however, despite their clever underwater maneuvers, they fall prey to certain species of whales and seals.

As the breeding season approaches male and female emperor penguins “trek 50–120 km over the ice to breeding colonies which may include thousands of individuals” in the words of Encyclopedia Westarctica. Some of the males search for and locate their partners of the previous season. Those, to the contrary, with no past attachment start “swinging their heads side to side, raising their flippers and heads, and/or doing a fancy walk” to attract the attention of females, as explained by ‘Beaty Biodiversity Museum’.

No nest is built. A single egg is laid, in the first months of the Arctic winter. What follows is rather unusual among birds. The mother embarks on a long journey to the sea to feed while the father begins a two- month incubation period in the icy weather. He stands still with the egg on his webbed feet and covered by part of his lower abdomen known as ‘brood patch’. The hatched chick is similarly protected, lest it dies from the cold-(image). With no access to food, during this long period of minding the emperor penguin male would have ‘consumed’ some of his fat and lost about 12 kgs. By then, understandably, he would be eagerly awaiting the return of his partner.

The female is expected to return to her brood, at the latest, shortly after the chick hatches. What is remarkable is that “she finds her mate among the hundreds of fathers by his vocal call”, so says ‘Encyclopedia Westarctica’. She comes back with a stomach full enough for her and her baby. Thenceforth, the chick is transferred to her feet and covered with her brood patch. It is fed regurgitated nutrients from its mother’s digestive system. As for the male, he is free to leave for his feeding grounds. He is absent from the family for about 24 days. Subsequently, the chick is old enough to care for himself in the frigid climate.

But if, however, the female is delayed, the male is able to feed the chick, for a short time, milk he secretes in his oesophagus. Beyond that, he leaves the little one to its fate, meaning death from cold and hunger, and departs for his feeding grounds by the ocean.

An emperor penguin lives for 20 years or so in the wild.

Toucans are, if not the most, certainly among the few most spectacular birds on Earth. They constitute 40 species of colourful birds with outsize beaks. The image is of the largest and most common toucan: toco toucan. These birds inhabit the trees in the forests of Central and South America. In the wild they live up to 20 years

Depending on species and gender the size of toucans vary between 29 to 63cm. in length. They weigh any where between 500 gms. to nearly one kg. Still, they are heavy for their small wings. Accordingly, they are clumsy fliers, barely managing to hop from one branch to the next. Their feet are blue, short and sturdy with nail strong enough to enable a good grasp of branches they perch on -(image).

Out of the total length of the bird the beak itself can vary from 16 to 21cms. Stated differently, a toucan’s beak is between a third to a half its total length. There is no definitive answer as to why toucans evolved such an impressive appendage. Still, speculations include attracting mates, or to intimidate birds whose nests they plunder-(see hereinafter) and lesser predators.

Despite its appearance the beak structure is hollow and light. Keratin-(the material of human nails)- is a main component. Moreover, its edges have teeth-like pointed protrusions. Inside it is a narrow greyish tongue, apparently to enhance the sense of taste.

Toucans privilege fruits as their main source of nutrition. Still, they are not averse to eating insects, snakes, frogs and even other birds’ eggs and chicks which they snatch from their nests. The long beak enables them to reach, otherwise, inaccessible fruits and other birds’ nests while they are perching on tree branches. The knife edges of the beaks hold their fare tightly before it swallowed by with a backward tossing the head .

When the breeding season arrives, a male and a female toucan start their association by “tossing a piece of fruit to each other”, according to ‘AZ Animals’. Toucans don’t build nests, they use other birds’, or any suitable holes in tree branches. The female lays two to four eggs which the pair take turns to incubate for up to 18 days. Interestingly, the chicks hatch without the long beak of their parents. They, however, acquire it within a few weeks.

Toucan lives may be cut short by predators. Among them are some large cats and raptor birds, and the likes of boas-(large snakes). Still it is speculated their rich colours may make them difficult to spot within the foliage of the trees.

Our Cousins the Reptiles

OUR COUSINS THE REPTILES

The Author JUNE 2025

REFERENCES

Animal diversity web: **Saltwater crocodile.

Australian museum: **Estuarine Crocodile.

AZ Animals: **Reptiles: Different Types etc. Monitor Lizard vs Komodo Dragon.

Encyclopedia Britannica: **Green anaconda. King cobra. Komodo dragon. Estuarine crocodile. Leatherback sea turtle.

National Geographic: **Reptile Pictures & Facts. Green anaconda. King cobra.

National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administratio-(NOAA): **Leatherback Turtle

New World Encyclopedia: **Reptile.

Smithsonian magazine: **Caring for Komodo Dragons.

Smithsonian national zoo: **Komodo dragon.

Wikipedia. **Green anaconda. King cobra. Komodo dragon. Saltwater crocodile. Leatherback sea turtle.

OUR COUSINS THE REPTILES OVERVIEW

By reptiles we mean dinosaurs, lizards, snakes, crocodiles and turtles. At present there are more than 10,000 species in every corner of the world except in the Antarctic.

The earliest unmistakable reptilian fossils date back to something like 320 mya-(million years ago). There is no doubt they have all descended from a common progenitor. Still, in the ensuing millions of years, thenceforth, reptiles have evolved and diversified to become today’s living reptiles and the dinosaurs which died out 66 mya. Specifically, the recognizable fossils of crocodiles and turtles date back to about 200 mya, those of lizards to 160 mya and lastly, snakes’ to 100 mya.

However, despite all the differences in appearance and behaviour, reptiles share certain traits and aspects confirming their common ancestry.

**Are air beathing vertebrates.

**Are covered in scales made of keratin, the same as in human nails. The leatherback sea turtle is the exception-(see later).

**Are cold blooded because of their weak metabolism-( conversion of food into energy and temperature). They need to bask in the sun for warmth. Again, the leatherback sea turtle is different.

**Have a slow working digestive system meaning that their needs for big meals are far in between. According to AZ Animals: “In its most extreme form… reptiles can survive months on a single meal”.

**Offspring hatch from eggs laid in nests. Curiously, ambient temperatures, during incubation times, determine whether hatchlings are male or female. In contrast, some lizards and snakes do not lay eggs. Instead they give birth to live little ones.

What follow are brief descriptions of five reptile specimens. They are the green anaconda, king cobra, Komodo dragon, seawater crocodile and the leatherback sea turtle.

The green anaconda-(hereinafter: anaconda) is a semi aquatic, non-venomous, constrictor snake whose habitats are near rivers, such as the Amazon, and other bodies of water in the rainforests of South America. It is the most massive snake in the world. An adult female, weighs in excess of 250 kg and can reach 9 m in length. The diameter of its near cylindrical body is 30 cms . Females are larger than males.

Among the physical particularities of an anaconda is its greenish colour-(hence the name)-making the animal inconspicuous amid the vegetation of rain forests. Equally important is the positioning of nostrils and eyes high on the head enabling the snake to stay hidden below the surface of the water while able to breathe and watch for prey. Finally, anacondas possess an olfactory sense organ which plays a role in courting behaviour.

Indeed, when the time for breeding arrives, a female anaconda leaves behind her a chemical substance that a dozen or so males olfactorily detect and swim for its source. In the event they gather around the female, in the water, and take part in what is termed a ‘breeding ball’. By this is meant the vigorous jostling and fighting among them to gain her favours. The ‘ ball’ may go on for days on end. Ultimately, one of the bigger males succeeds in gaining her acceptance. The weakest male is eaten by the female in preparation for the long months of gestation, during which she does not eat. As commented by Wikipedia, the “nearby male simply provides the opportunistic female a ready source of nutrition”. Mind boggling.

Once the female is fertilized she carries within her-(as humans do)- the embryos and fetuses for a period of six to seven months before delivering, in the water, 20 to 40 little ones, each, up to half a meter long. As soon as they exit, they are able to swim and feed themselves. Post-natal parental care is not needed. It is time ,too, for the mother to feed having lost more than half her weight from fasting for almost half a year.

Anacondas are voracious eaters. Ironically, though, once a good meal has been taken, they are not hungry for “weeks or months” according to Britannica. And the reason? Their digestive system is very slow in handling the food intake.

What do they eat? One of their favourite prey is the large South America rodent named capybaras-( image). It weighs between 35 and 66 kgs. This apart, they also feed on “wild pigs, deer, birds, turtles, caimans, and even jaguars”.

Being constrictor snakes, anacondas coil themselves round their prey-(image), and keep on squeezing till it stops breathing. It is, then swallowed whole. The snake’s jaws have the ability to open wide to take in prey “larger than the size of its head” as stated by Wikipedia. More, according to the same reference “green anacondas have been found to feed on large prey, usually 14% to 50% of their own mass”.

Anacondas are so aggressive, they do not shun cannibalism. As we have seen hereinbefore a large female takes advantage of the ‘breeding ball’ to prey on a smaller male. Indeed, it appears that this practice is more common among females than it is for males.

More . There are circumstances when female anacondas do not need the participation of males to conceive and give birth to baby anacondas. They do it through what is called ‘parthenogenesis’.

Because of their size, anacondas do not have predators to fear and can hope to reach the good old age of 10 years.

King cobras-(hereinafter: cobras)- are the largest venomous snakes in the world. They inhabit the forests of India and those of Southeast Asia. A cobra can reach a length of 5.6 m. But more commonly, 3.6 m is the upper limit.

Cobras feed mainly on other snakes, poisonous or otherwise . They also prey on lizards, rodents and domesticated animals they find when they prowl the teeming villages of Southeast Asia. Occasionally, they do not spare their own kind.

Unlike anacondas, cobras are not constrictor snakes. Instead, they kill by striking their victims from a distance and envenomating them to death. They then, swallow them whole, thanks to their accommodating jaws that allow large prey to pass. But like anacondas king cobras have a sluggish digestive system which takes weeks to deal with a large meal. In between, the snake does not look for another prey.

According to National Geographic, the venom of cobras is not the most potent among snakes. But it is discharged in large quantities. So much so that an elephant struck in the toe or tusk, dies within three hours of the attack. That reference states: “Their venom affects the respiratory centers in the brain, causing respiratory arrest and cardiac failure”.

A male and female cobras will remain faithful to each other for a whole breeding season. The female builds a nest, “using a loop of her body as an arm, she pulls dead leaves, soil, and ground litter into a compact mound” as explained by Britannica. In that nest she lays 20 to 50 eggs. For two months she keeps guard on them fighting any intruder. As for her male partner, according to some wildlife specialists, it keeps a wary eye on her and on his brood from a distance. When they hatch the little cobras are nearly half a metre long and are as venomous as their parents.

Cobras are not aggressive by nature. They will not attack unless it is a prey they desire. But if its brood is threatened or is cornered by an antagonist, it will lift its front to a great height, spread its ‘neck flaps’ , shows its fangs , hisses angrily, and if needs be, deliver one of its fatal strikes across the gap between itself and its enemy.

In the wild, a cobra can expect to live for 20 years, unless, of course it is eaten by another snake of its kind.

Believe it or not, this monster is a carnivorous lizard called komodo dragon-(hereinafter: komodo). It is the largest of all lizard species. Its natural habitat is the Indonesian island of Komodo and a few neighbouring ones. Although it lives in the forested areas of these islands, it moves from beaches to hilltops. In the wild, it can attain the age of 30 years

A komodo may reach 3 m in length. Its tail is half that length. Its total weight may be as much as 150 kgs. Females tend to be smaller than males and like all reptiles, it is covered in scales- (image).

The jaws of a komodo are flexible enough to take in huge chunks of meat-(image). Its mouth is equipped with 60, 2.5cm long curved and serrated -(similarly to a saw blade)-teeth. Every 40 days the reptile has a new set of dentures. Under each tooth are 5 replacements awaiting their turn to emerge. They are pointed and sharp not intended for chewing, but for shredding, in preparation for swallowing whole.

The saliva of the reptile is usually blood-coloured, because, as explained by Wikipedia , “its teeth are almost completely covered by gingival tissue [gum constituent] that is naturally lacerated during feeding”. That saliva contains a whole variety of bacteria, some of which poisonous. This bacteria is the result of the decay of the bits of flesh that remain between the teeth. As this was not enough, inside the mouth is a gland that secretes venom. As concluded by ‘Smithsonian national zoo’ “In addition to the harmful bacteria, the venom prevents the blood from clotting, which causes massive blood loss and induces shock”.

A komodo forked tongue is yellowish. It is continually flicked in and out. The reason is that it is the main sensory organ this animal possesses. Indeed, its busy tongue smells and tastes the air. The information it gathers is passed on to an organ in the palate, which in turn tells the reptile all it needs to know. As explained by ‘Smithsonian national zoo’ “This system, along with an undulatory walk, in which the head swings from side to side, helps the dragon sense the existence and direction of food. At times, these reptiles can, smell [ food] up to 4 kilometers away”.

A good meal can weigh 80 percent of the animal weight. Its stomach is expandable enough to accommodate that much food.

Komodos can run surprisingly fast for their weight. But before doing so, it lightens itself by disgorging all it has eaten. At an early and lighter age their claws enable them to climb trees proficiently as we shall see thereinafter. As adults however, their weight prohibits them from doing so; although their claws are still sharp enough to use in combat.

This reptile is a loner. It roams the island and hunt by itself. Nonetheless, others of its kind congregate with it at meal times and during the breeding season, as we shall see hereinafter.

You name it. Anything that moves on legs or flies, komodos will eat. Almost. They will hunt deer, pigs and other ungulates-(animals with hooves). They will cannibalise their own, specially small adults and new-borns as well as carrion-(remains of dead animals)- and may even dig up tombs to eat human corpses.

Komodos do not leave anything edible behind. Even intestines. They first shake them vigorously to empty them of their content before swallowing them. As is the case with other reptiles their digestion is slow. It takes weeks for a good meal to be dealt with. All that time komodos will not search for prey. When the exercise is completed, the reptiles regurgitate non-digestible items such as hair, teeth, horns etc. and start looking for a meal again. Indeed, Wikipedia tells us that for an adult komodo one good meal a month is sufficient.

Once a source of food has been located or a kill made other komodos join the feast. But apparently, this is done to an established order. A large male eats first, followed by the lesser ones. And should, God forbids, two of equal stature meet at the banquet, a vicious fight ensues until one leaves or is killed and eaten. One curious practice is reported by Wikipedia, according to which “males may vomit or defecate when preparing for the fight”.

Eating, means for a komodo, swallowing whole smallish prey. But for a larger prey like a water buffalo, its is sliced off into large swallowable chunks of flesh. Either way, according to Wikipedia, “swallowing is still a long process. A Komodo dragon may attempt to speed up the process by ramming the carcass against a tree to force it down its throat”

It is rare that a komodo brings down its prey in combat. All it needs is to bite it once and then let the bacteria and venom do their work. A bitten prey takes a couple of days to succumb. By then it may be far from the scene of the attack. No matter, the komodo, thanks to his sense of smell, will sooner or later locate it either dead or in the process of doing so.

With the onset of the breeding season male komodos will viciously fight for the favours of females. The two contenders stand erect using their tails for support and wrestle with their front limbs. The combat ends when one of the two hits the ground and remains down.

Komodos tend to be monogamous. In due time, females lay about 20 eggs each. In anticipation of this event, they prepare their nests either by digging holes in the ground or by occupying suitably spacious ones prepared by a large chicken-like bird called megapode-(image). In either case nests are camouflaged to keep the eggs safe from the eyes of other komodos.

At the conclusion of the 7 to 8 month incubation period, during which the mother stays with the eggs and protects them, the hatchlings emerge. They are 40 cm long and weigh about 100 g each. Thenceforth, they are left to fare for themselves with no parental care. During the first 5 years they survive feeding on insects, small reptiles, birds and their eggs.

Hatchlings from the day they come into the world, are instinctively wary of predators including adult members of their species. For this reason they spend the first few years on trees where they are safe. They may also roll in excrement to make themselves unappealing and repulsive to adult komodos.

There are instances when females find themselves isolated from males. Still they give birth to small komodos through what scientists call parthenogenesis. The ensuing hatchlings are no different in size, behaviour and habits to the ones described earlier.

This is the story of the saltwater crocodile-(hereinafter: crocodile)- “known for its aggressive nature, as shown by numerous attacks on people and livestock each year”, as described by Britannica. A fully mature adult male may reach a length of 7m and weigh as much as 1,200kg. This being so, it is the largest and weightiest of extant reptiles. But not all males are that gigantic. More likely they vary between 2.5 and 3.5 m and 150 to 300 kg in length and weight respectively. Females are significantly smaller. They do not exceed two third the size of males.

Crocodiles are commonly found from the coasts of eastern India all the way to those of South East Asia and south to Northern Australia-(brown in image). Their habitats, are coastal seawater, river mouths and lands with brackish water-(saltish fresh water)-and mangrove forest-(image). They can swim and drift with ocean currents wide and far and return ‘home’ thanks to their uncanny navigational aptitude .

Crocodiles are covered with scales like all reptiles. They have evolved massive heads with large jaws equipped with 64 to 68 teeth-(image). The muscles activating these mandibles are such as to give this reptile the most powerful bite of any living animal. Both its eyes and nostrils are conveniently placed on top of the head enabling the crocodile to approach its prey unnoticed. Its small limbs are webbed for propulsion in the water, and are equipped with sharp claws.

Because of their size, strength and aggressivity crocodiles prey on whomever they encounter whether on land or in the water. These include insects, crustaceans, reptiles, water buffaloes, kangaroos, orangutans, other crocodiles and humans. Nor do they shrink from eating carrion.

But they are not insatiable eaters. According to Wikipedia “they are able to survive on relatively little food for a prolonged period”. Whenever there are leftovers they cache them and return to then later. They cannot be certain, however, that in the meantime, their hidden treasure will nor have been scavenged and eaten by the like of komodo dragons.

A crocodile more often than not catches its prey when the latter approaches the water edge to drink or otherwise. Swimming silently and stealthily with only its eyes and nostrils above surface, it suddenly leaps out, grabs its victim with its vice- like jaws, before dragging it into the depths to drown it, if not already dead.

If the prey is small the reptile swallows it whole with no further ado. But if, on the other hand, the prey is large, it is either shaken violently or ‘death rolled’-(vigorously gyrated as one with the crocodile’s body). In both cases the prey is shredded into manageable chunks.

At breeding times, males go through acts of ‘showmanship’ to attract female partners. Still the competition between male crocodiles, at times, degenerates into vicious fighting which may result in injuries and even death. Furthermore, according to ‘Australian Museum’, females, too, “become intolerant of other females and will jostle for dominance”.

A prospective daddy crocodile delineates a zone and protects it from intruders while its partner locates a sunny nesting place not far from a water edge. It then lays up to 70 eggs, and cover them with decaying vegetation for warmth and concealment from preying eyes.

At the end of an incubation period of 90 days, mamma crocodile begins to hear the chirpings of the little ones trying to hatch. She proceeds to help them extricate themselves. Thereafter she carries them in her jaws to the water for their first swim. There, she monitors their progress for several weeks , until they are able to fend for themselves.

When they hatch, baby crocodiles are only about 28cm long and weigh 71 gm. They feed on small versions of their parents’ fare. They are precociously aggressive with one another. The sad story though, is that a small minority of them make it to adulthood, being, in the meantime, preyed upon by other animals and even their own kind. But those which survive can look forward to a long life of 70 years or even more.

This reptile is the leatherback sea turtle. With a length of 2.5 m. and weight of 900 kg, an adult is the largest of any aquatic or land turtles-(tortoises). It is also one of the largest reptiles presently in existence.

Leatherbacks dwell in the three temperate and tropical oceans of the world, namely: the Atlantic, Indian and Pacific Oceans. At breeding time they approach coastlines to enable females to lay their eggs on beaches.

Contrary to all reptiles, the leatherback body is not covered with scales. Nor is it protected by a hard bony shell, as all other sea and land turtles are. Instead, it is covered by a thick black skin resembling leather. Hence its name.

Long front flippers-(which can reach 2.7 m)-, oar shaped rear ones and sleek, streamlined body, all make the leatherback eminently suitable for swimming across oceans. Indeed, they are the longest distance travelers of any living vertebrate. 16,000 kms, between rich sources of food and breeding beaches, is common. More. Leatherbacks are capable of diving to the great depth of 1, 200 m. and stay there for nearly 1.5 hours before surfacing for a breath of fresh air-(image).

A leatherback feeds primarily on jellyfish and other soft- bodied creatures of the sea. Its mouth is beak shaped-(image). At its rear are “backward-pointing spines that help retain gelatinous prey”, as explained by NOAA-(National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration).

Male turtles never leave the ocean. Females, too, spend the greatest part of their existence at sea. Still they venture on beaches at each of their fertility cycles which occurs once every two to four years. But during one such cycle, she visits the beach several times, at 10 to 12 days intervals, to build nests and lay batches of about 100 eggs each time.

Having been courted-(“the male uses head movements, nuzzling, biting, or flipper movements to determine her receptiveness”, according to Wikipedia)- and fertilized by possibly more than one male, the female leatherback proceeds to build the nests, consisting of pits in the sand which are subsequently covered for protection. The eggs are then left alone for about two months after which hatchlings emerge and procced towards the sea-(image).

But their awkward and slow progress on the beach make them easy prey for the likes of large lizards, dogs, seabirds etc. And, once in the water they are caught by large fish, squid, octopuses, sharks and so on. The net consequence, is that less than a tenth of the little things complete their first year.

Even adult leatherbacks, despite their size, are occasionally, not left alone by killer whales, white sharks and the like. But if they manage to survive unmolested, they can expect to reach the good old age of 50 years.

Part III: Cradles of Civilization

Mesopotamia

EARLIEST ORGANIZED SOCIETIES

MESOPOTAMIA

The Author NOVEMBER, 2018

Chapter illustration

REFERENCES

Ancient Civilizations History Web Site -Life and Society in Mesopotamia.

Ancient History Encyclopedia. - Mesopotamia. - Mesopotamian Religion. -Daily Life in Ancient Mesopotamia.

Ancient History Lists. -Epic of Gilgamesh: Summary in ten interesting points.

Encyclopedia Britannica. -Mesopotamian religion.

Hanover College History Department. -Hammurabi Code of Laws.

History on the Net. -The Epic of Gilgamesh. -Mesopotamian religion.

New World Encyclopedia. -Mesopotamian Religion.

TimeMaps. -Civilization. Ancient Mesopotamia.

MESOPOTAMIA

Between 13,000 and 10,000 years ago the inhabitants of the region between the Euphrates and Tigris rivers, today’s Iraq and parts of Syria and Turkey, saw that the wild goats, sheep and others they hunted for food, were of a temperament such that they could be raised and bred in captivity at their convenience. Similarly, the naturally growing wheat, barley, dates etc. could be cultivated along the two rivers and their many tributaries; provided, however, they were constantly watered in the dry and hot climate of the region. That describes the dawn of the Agricultural Revolution and it was taking place

Chapter illustration

They also saw that to succeed as cultivators and breeders, they needed to forsake the millennia long life of wandering hunter gatherers in quest of food, for a settled existence near fields and animal pens. But what they did not foresee was the loss of their hitherto small egalitarian, kin-related communities for a co-existence in villages with non-blood, non-family related strangers at the mercy of the first land owners: those who had usurped arable land and claimed it theirs. Indeed, in his ‘Discourse on the Origins of Inequality’, the prominent French philosopher Jean Jacques Rousseau (1712-1778) ‘traced the origins of injustice to the first man who fenced off land and declared it his own’… The invention of property…represents the beginning of moral inequality. Property allows for the domination and exploitation of the poor by the rich”. In due course as hierarchization accentuated, towns and cities developed with populations of kings, aristocrats and elites, priests as well as administrative clerks , artisans and craftsmen, soldiers and slaves. As for the agricultural workers, or peasants, they remained in their villages to provide enough food for all those city dwellers, for themselves and for their respective families.

Fast-forward to 6,000 years ago and the emergence of Sumer in southern Mesopotamia, the first ever organized human society. Ultimately, Sumer consisted of 12 city states. A new polity, Akkad arrived on the scene, north of Sumer about 4,300 years ago; it built the first ever empire. Finally it was the turn of Babylon to dominate starting some 3,850 years ago. Regardless, very little differences existed culturally between them. Further, religion formed their common denominator. It “ineluctably conditioned all aspects of ancient Mesopotamian civilization. It yielded the forms in which that civilization’s social, economic, legal, political, and military institutions were, and are, to be understood”.

Agriculture, animal husbandry and irrigation infrastructures were by no means the only firsts of Mesopotamians. They, no doubt, out of necessity invented the plough, wheel, chariot and many more().They also made beer from the barley they cultivated. But most of all they invented writing some 5,500 years ago in the shape of pictograms to change one thousand years later to the more manageable Cuneiform script. Originally, it came about because of the need to keep records of farm and commercial transactions. It was followed by an obsession to record every facet of Mesopotamian life that kept scribes busy engraving with their styluses on wet clay tablets and steles. “They left behind them thousands and thousands of documents on clay tablets, the majority of them as yet unstudied” . Mesopotamians, too, originated the “60-minute hour, the 24-hour day, and the 360-degree circle…the seven-day week”.

Chapter illustration

In short “…the Mesopotamians… were the giants upon whose shoulders later ages have stood. And given that they were the first people to have writing, and the first to record their deeds …it is no exaggeration to say [they are] the ones who got it going!”. No wonder historians call Mesopotamia the ‘Cradle of Civilization’.

Once upon a time there was nothing but chaos; its forces were defeated by the more than one thousand gods in the Mesopotamian pantheon. Once victorious they created humans to be their helpers and servants. In other words, the lifetimes of the latter had no intrinsic meaning or value. Human existence “was thus never an end, always just a means”.

There are many differing versions of how creation happened. In one, God Enlil separated heaven from earth to make room for plants to grow and humans to emerge from the soil. Another account has it that God Enki caused the death of a rebel god and made birth goddess Nintur to mix the flesh and blood of the latter with clay. Following gestation of the mixture by 14 womb goddesses they ,in due course gave birth to the first humans.

As helpers, humans assisted the gods in preventing the return of the forces of chaos. They did so through “daily rituals, attention to the deities, proper funeral practices, and simple civic duty”. During festivals they sacrificed animals, undertook acts of purification and prayed. On the other hand, as servants, humans diligently toiled to exhaustion to provide the gods their daily needs in food, clothing, housekeeping and much more. For, despite their hallowed status the gods exhibited the same qualities and frailties of humans. Among others they ate and drank, loved and hated, married and had children, and could be cruel and violent to one another.

The novelty of ‘civilized’ existence with its uncertainties and insecurities led Mesopotamians, from king to lowest commoner “to a highly developed sense of religion”. It translated into an intense devotion and veneration to their gods without whose goodwill and help they could not survive and support the precariousness of existence. In short, without gods “a man eats not”. It being so, it logically follows that in their daily lives Mesopotamians believed themselves to be weak and helpless, constantly in need of the help and benevolence of a god or goddess. In consequence, they tried hard to please him/her by every devotional mean available. As stated by historian Jean Bottero (1914-2007), quoted by ‘Ancient History Encyclopedia’: “Not only were these gods the originators of the universe and mankind, but they remained their supreme masters and guided their existence and evolution from day to day.

Frustratingly, however, this vital communion with the masters could not take concrete physical shape. Mesopotamians no doubt wished they could meet and talk with them, hear their instructions and learn directly what pleased them and what made them angry. But short of direct communication faithfuls reverted, instead, to divination in the hope of second guessing the gods’ directives and desires. One form of divination “seem[s] to have been sleeping in the temple in the hope that the god would send an enlightening dream”. Specialized diviners could also read godly intentions from the way a certain bird flew or by studying the liver of a sacrificed animal given that in those days this organ was believed to be the seat of life and soul. They also scrutinized the movements of celestial bodies.

Additionally, a requisite demanded of the peoples of Mesopotamia was to make sure to give anyone who died a proper and dignified burial. Else, the deceased soul could still do harm to the living from its place in the underworld. For this reason relatives frequently made offerings of food and drinks to the spirits of the departed. And if, despite all care and good intentions in this respect one suffered from illness or other unpleasantness he/she consulted a diviner to see if he/she had somehow fallen short of their duties to the dead. As for that underworld in which all dead gathered and from where no one escaped, it was a dark place of dreariness and misery. To think of it, it seems a shame, really, that despite a lifetime of virtue and faithful service to the gods, Mesopotamians could not be made to contemplate an afterlife of joy and bliss in some paradise somewhere.

Unsurprisingly, like the Greeks much later, Mesopotamian religion was fully equipped with a mythology rich in legends and myths about gods and kings. Actually, it could not have been otherwise, since the aim of a myth is to explain the mysteries of existence in “the science of a pre-scientific age” according to scholars Maria Leach (1892-1977) and Jerome fried. As for psychiatrist Carl Jung (1875-1961): a myth is important to human “psyche” to enable him to make sense of “a world which often presents itself as chaotic and meaningless”.

The Sumerian ‘Epic of Gilgamesh’ is the first such legend; it predates the famous ‘Iliad’ of Homer by 1,500 years (see 1 in Appendix). But most interestingly is that Mesopotamian legends have found their way to Judeo-Christian and Islamic themes. Among them are Noah and the Floods, the Garden of Eden and the Fall of Man( ). The historical context of this is in order here. In 586 BCE, the king of Babylon Nebuchadnezzar (630-561 BCE) ransacked Jerusalem and took its Jewish citizens to Babylon where they remained in captivity for half a dozen decades.

I want to end with the noteworthy absence of any reference to human sacrifice to the gods; a practice so prevalent in other polytheistic religions. In other words, despite all the quirks of the Mesopotamian gods they, at least were not bloodthirsty.

Abodes of the gods

Every city of Mesopotamia had a patron god for whom it erected a centrally located temple. It was built “to ensure the god’s presence” symbolized by a gold clad statue. Traditionally the edifice was pyramidal in shape, contained three rooms, a kitchen and was topped by a ‘ziggurat’, the god’s bedchamber. Needless to say it was lavishly built and richly decorated. Surrounding the temple, and belonging to it, were large areas of farmland, on which the master’s food was grown and farm animals raised. Expectedly the temple was the destination of pilgrims arriving with gifts, offerings and prayers in the hope of persuading the patron god to grant their wishes and desires.

Chapter illustration

The first bureaucracy ever was born in Mesopotamian temples. It was headed by the equivalent of a bishop who controlled the activities of priests and priestesses as well as “[s]cribes and accountants [who kept records] of what was being brought into and sent out of the temple store houses”. He too, was in charge of all people who worked the land as well as skilled artisans and ordinary labourers etc. Incidentally, with its capacity to generate large quantities of farm products and to employ a significant number of people in various trades, a temple complex was a substantial contributor to a city’s economy.

Priests and priestesses, as is usual, officiated at worship and devotional activities. Much more importantly was attending to the needs of the patron god.. To do so effectively they were trained as “cooks, bakers, waiters, and bathers, or as… singers of praise and musicians to make the god’s meals festive, or as elegists [poets who recite mournful verses] to soothe him in times of stress and grief”. Curiously, they daily bathed the statue, dressed it in expensive clothing before carrying it to the ‘ziggurat’. About priestesses; they often came from royal and aristocratic houses, and considered themselves the god’s wives. It is also a question not yet settled “Whether… there were also priestesses devoted to sacred prostitution… what is clear is that prostitutes [in the public arena] were under the special protection of the goddess Inanna (Ishtar)”.

For the first one and a half millennia, Mesopotamian cities were governed by their priests. Claiming to be the emissaries of the gods and the link between them and lay people, they ruled “according to religious precepts and received divine messages through signs and omens”.

Kings, slaves and those in between.

Kings displaced priests as rulers some 5,600 years ago. They and their courtiers stood at the top of the social ladder.

Monarchs were believed to be the gods’ representatives. They intermediated between them and earthly matters. From time to time a king would petition the city’s god on behalf of his subjects, at an audience in the temple . His secular duties included keeping law and order, safeguarding property and overseeing the viability, at all times, of irrigation canals on which his and his people’s survival depended. He, too was expected to protect his subjects from attacks by outsiders and, ironically, to expand his realm by conquest. It was considered that propitious events, such as achieving a good harvest, repulsion of attackers and victorious conquests were indications of approval of the king’s performance by the city’s patron god.

But I ask myself, what if to the contrary, disasters struck or fatal epidemics raged among the population? Would these calamities be taken as signs of the god’s dissatisfaction or indeed anger with the king’s performance requiring his deposition or even death? Hardly. I have no doubt that in similar instances priests would concoct stories directing blame somewhere else or even at some community wide sins committed against the patron god.

One of the more successful kings in Mesopotamia was Hammurabi of

Babylon. He reigned for 42 years (1792-1750 BCE) during which he sought to improve the lives of those he ruled, and was victorious in warfare. He is most notably remembered, however, for his landmark ‘Code of Hammurabi’, consisting of 282 laws regulating every conceivable aspect of everyday life of his subjects. It was “the most complete and perfect extant collection of Babylonian laws…”. The introduction to the Code is worth quoting for its emphasis on the pretended relationship between king and god; namely that Gods Anul, Enlil and Marduk have appointed Hammurabi “to make justice prevail in the land, to abolish the wicked and the evil, to prevent the strong from oppressing the weak” (see 2 in Appendix).

After the kings came priests and priestesses, on the social ladder. Though downgraded from their former status as rulers, they continued, nonetheless, to exercise a great deal of influence. We have already attended to their roles in society.

One rung below stood the upper classes consisting of merchants and those running private businesses. If not quite on the same level, then certainly not far below were the highly respected and valued scribes along with literate tutors who were engaged by the affluent few to educate their sons. Those at this level led a comparatively comfortable existence with slaves at their service. They could afford to eat well, drink beer and wine, dress well, educate their sons and buy toys to their children( ).

Moreover, they lived in houses built with sun-dried clay bricks. At least from 3 to 4,000 years ago, they had built in toilets and clay pipe drainage discharging either to a cesspool or directly in the river. Dramatically, however, these houses were prone to collapse obviously causing injury and loss of life. So much so that historian Karen Rhea Nemet-Nejat, quoted by Ancient History Encyclopedia, writes that the Code of Hammurabi contains sections in this respect including: “If a builder constructs a house for a man, but does not make his work sound, and the house that he constructs collapses and causes the death of the householder, that builder shall be killed. If it should cause the death of a son of the householder, they shall kill a son of that builder”.

Chapter illustration

Further down the social ladder were the lower classes making up the great majority of the population. They included “farmers, artists, musicians, construction workers, canal builders, bakers, basket makers, butchers, fishermen, cup bearers, brick makers, brewers, tavern owners, prostitutes, metallurgists, carpenters, perfume makers, potters, jewelry makers, goldsmiths, cart and, later, chariot drivers, soldiers, sailors, and merchants who worked for another man’s company”. Unlike the hard dwellings of the rich, theirs were constructed from reeds growing in the marshes and wetlands between the two great rivers. The stalks were bundled and inserted in the ground. They did not educate their sons not only because they did not have the means to do so, but because they needed more their bread earning work.

Chapter illustration

On the bottom rung of the social ladder stood slaves consisting mostly of men and women captured during wars. But citizens could be enslaved as punishment for certain offences or parents could sell their children in times of need. Or persons could sell their entire families, in settlement of debts, for a maximum period of three years, following which they were returned to freedom. More commonly than not, slaves were treated harshly to the extent of being branded with hot irons. Hammurabi reserves 30 laws in his Code for them. Here are a few:

“If any one takes a male or female slave [not belonging to him] , outside the city gates, he shall be put death.

If anyone receives into his house a runaway male or female slave and does not return it, he shall be put to death.

If anyone fails to meet a claim for debt, and sell himself, his wife, his son, and daughter for money or give them away to forced labor: they shall work for three years in the house of the man who bought them, or the proprietor, and in the fourth year they shall be set free”.

If a slave says to the master, "you are not my master," the master shall cut off the slave's ear.

We end this part with the status of women in Mesopotamian society. They were practically equal to men in many respects. Although they could not be educated alongside their brothers because they were not considered to be mentally up to it, they nevertheless could “file for divorce, own their own businesses, and make contracts in trade. The early brewers of beer and wine, as well as the healers in the community, were initially women. These trades were later taken over by men, it seems, when it became apparent they were lucrative occupations” . How did women fare in the Code of Hammurabi:

If a free man's wife wishes to divorce him, the man may divorce her and give her no settlement. If the man does not wish to divorce her, he may marry another woman and keep his first wife in his house as a slave.

If a woman wishes to divorce her husband and refuses him sexual rights, an inquiry shall be held. If she has not committed adultery but her husband has, she may take her dowry and return to her father's house.

If she has committed adultery, then she shall be executed by being thrown into the water.

If rebels meet in a bar and the woman who owns the bar does not capture them and take them to the palace, that woman shall be executed.

If a priestess who does not live in the temple owns and operates a bar or even enters a bar for drink, that priestess shall be executed by burning.

1) Epic of Gilgamesh.

Gilgamesh was the king of the Sumerian city of Uruk. Half god half human, he was young, handsome, strong, tyrannical, arrogant and unruly. Worse, he raped every woman he fancied. So much so, that his subjects complained to the gods.

In response, they sent a creature by the name of Enkidu to Uruk to defeat Gilgamesh in combat. Enkidu was half beast half man who had hitherto lived in the wild among animals but who, nevertheless had been taught to eat man fashion and other by a priest who had befriended him.

Soon, the two are engaged in combat, but contrary to expectation, Gilgamesh wins. Following the contest, they become close friends and when Enkidu dies, struck by an illness sent by the gods, Gilgamesh is greatly distressed, particularly, at the realization that death will find him sooner or later; something he had not considered thus far. In consequence he abandons his kingdom and start a journey to the end of the world in search of immortality.

Chapter illustration

During his quest he becomes aware of certain realities he was unaware of and eventually meets Utnapishtim, an eternal man “who survived the Great Flood, a precursor to the Biblical Noah”. From him Gilgamesh learns that death is inevitable, returns to Uruk a changed man and rules wisely and compassionately for 126 years.

What is the moral of this epic? According to one source: “The Epic of Gilgamesh” conveys ….[t]hemes of friendship, the role of the king, enmity, immortality, death, male-female relationships, city versus rural life, civilization versus the wild and relationships of humans and gods resound throughout the poem. Gilgamesh’s many challenges throughout the poem serve to mature the hero and make him a good king to his people”

2) Code of Hammurabi

Some more excerpts:

If a son strikes his father, his hand shall be cut off.

If a free person puts out the eye of another free person, that person's eye shall be put out.

If a free person accuses another free person of murder but cannot prove the charge in court, the one who made the accusation shall be executed.

If a free person commits perjury during a murder-trial and the perjury is discovered, that person shall be executed.

If a judge delivers a written verdict and later changes it, that judge shall pay twelve times the amount of the damages awarded in the verdict. Then the judge shall be publicly expelled from office.

If a free person signs a contract to rent a field for cultivation but fails to raise a crop in the field, that person must pay the landlord an amount equivalent to the harvests of the adjoining fields.

If a fire breaks out in a free person's house and another free person who went to extinguish the fire saw, wanted, and looted any of the property in the house, the looter shall be executed by being thrown into that fire.

If a free person robs another free person and is caught, that thief shall be executed.

If the thief is not caught, the city of the free person who has been robbed shall pay for the loss.

Chapter illustration

The Code written on a clay tablet and on a basalt stele

Something crucial, in this respect, needs further examination. The 282 laws were engraved as shown in the image. Were enough tablets and steles engraved (no mean feat) and so located as to be available to the majority of the population? Even more baffling; at a time and place where a tiny fraction of that population was literate, how were the laws disseminated and explained? By word of mouth for example? Finally could Hammurabi himself read Cuneiform writing or did he just dictate the laws to his scribes and trusted they would be faithful in reproduction.

Indus Valley

EARLIEST ORGANIZED SOCIETIES

INDUS VALLEY

Chapter illustration

The Author

REFERENCES

Ancient History Encyclopedia. -Indus Valley Civilization. -Religious Developments in Ancient India.

Encyclopedia Britannica. -Indus Civilization. -India (pages: 12, 13 ,and 14).

Khan Academy. -Indus River Valley Civilizations.

New World Encyclopedia. -Indus Valley Civilization.

TimeMaps. -The Indus Valley Civilization of Ancient India.

Wikipedia. -Indus Valley Civilisation.

THE INDUS VALLEY CIVILIZATION

Chapter illustration

The Indus Valley region in brown with India on the right and Pakistan on the left

Beginning, end and in between.

No one suspected, least of all those excavating for a new railway line in the second half of 1800s, that anything of value was buried underfoot. But by the early 1920s, however, archaeologists had established that a “...prodigious civilization lived in the region about 5000 years ago and tied round the river Indus and its tributaries and thus identified as the Indus valley civilization” in the word Dr Rakhal Das Banerjee (1885-1930). Most significantly, as more and more was exposed, archaeologists realized they were looking at an urban civilization with over 1,000 cities and settlements. Located between India and Pakistan, along the 3,000+ kms Indus river, it occupied an area of over 1,000,000 sq.kms. “At its peak, the Indus Valley Civilization may have had a population of over five million people”. Until then the two earliest cultures were that of Mesopotamia (see essay of that name) and of the Nile Valley. But with this belated discovery they became a trio.

As recently as 1974, French archaeologist Jean Francois Jarrige (1940-2014) hit upon Mehrgarh (image) in the province of Baluchistan in today’s Pakistan. Excavations continued until 1986 and again between 1997 and 2000, resulting in the collection of tens of thousands of artifacts and the finding of one of the earliest places of settling of erstwhile hunters gatherers, in that part of Asia, to farm and raise animals. It was dated to 8,500 years ago or some two or three millennia after the onset or the Agricultural Revolution in Mesopotamia (see essay of this name).

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

The time span of predominance of this civilization is from 5300 to 3900 years ago. It paralleled the flourishing city states of Sumer in Mesopotamia (see essay: Mesopotamia). Interestingly, artifacts of Indus Valley origin were found in parts of the Persian Gulf indicating trade between the two civilizations. This, inevitably, led some to suspect the latecomers of copying those who preceded them. Not correct in the opinion of historian V. Gordon Childe (1892-1957) , who, presumably identified enough originality and exclusiveness in the discoveries to categorically state, according to Encyclopedia Britannica that “India confronts Egypt and Babylonia by the 3rd millennium with a thoroughly individual and independent civilization of her own, technically the peer of the rest. And plainly it is deeply rooted in Indian soil. The Indus civilization represents a very perfect adjustment of human life to a specific environment. And it has endured; it is already specifically Indian and forms the basis of modern Indian culture”.

Furthermore, archaeologists found similarities in the irrigation canals, cultivated crops, animals domesticated, farming methods etc between the two regions, thus contributing to the controversy. But here again, no doubt because of the commonality of wheat, barley, sheep and goats, Jean Francois Jarrige is adamant that “farming had an independent origin at Mehrgarh”. He is supported by archaeologist Jim G. Shaffer (DOB: 1944), quoted in Wikipedia, that Mehrgarh “demonstrates that food production was an indigenous South Asian phenomenon”

For the following 2,500 years (i.e.by 6,000 years ago) the agrarian settlements/villages spread wide and far along the great river. More importantly, by 4,600 years ago cities began to concretize. So much so, that by the onset of the decline of that civilization some seven centuries later, very many urban centers existed. These were “cities containing thousands of people who were not primarily engaged in agriculture. Subsequently, a unified culture emerged throughout the area, bringing into conformity settlements that were separated by as much as 1,000 km and muting regional differences. Harappa and Mahenjo-daro are two such urban centers.

Simultaneously with the emergence of urban life, those inhabiting the countryside were required to generate enough farm produce and animal products to feed the thousands of non-agrarian city dwellers as well as themselves and their families. They did so with crops of wheat, barley, sesame, dates etc. Their pens housed sheep, goats, pigs, camels and buffalos. They were helped by irrigation canals, the seasonal and beneficial overflowing of the Indus, the plough and the buffalo drawn carts, claimed a first in that region and not unlike what is seen today in rural Pakistan. Incidentally, cats, dogs and even elephants were domesticated.

Archeological excavations yielded thousands of artifacts. Not chronologically, was the evidence of water crafts, some of which were seaworthy enough to reach the Persian Gulf, as well as their docking facilities built “after a careful study of tides, waves, and currents”. Then there were the agricultural implements and constructions named above. Finally the Indus Valley is credited with improved methods of working with the known metal of the day: bronze.

Discovered, too, were terra cotta figurines of animals and others , most likely toys for children (image left), and bronze statuettes of dancing girls (image right). The latter made archeologist Sir John Marshall (1876-1958) state : “… Modeling such as this was unknown in the ancient world up to the Hellenistic age of Greece… some 3,000 years [later]… these statuettes…[make] …us wonder whether…Greek artistry could possibly have been anticipated by the sculptors of a far-off age on the banks of the Indus”.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

But most remarkably was the finding of a writing system of some 200 to 250 characters. But unlike the Cuneiform and Hiero-glyphic scripts of Mesopo-tamia and the Nile Valley respectively, this one remains un-deciphered to this day to the great detriment of scholars eager to learn more. Equally noteworthy are the seals (image) made of steatite (type of soft stone) depicting human forms and animals both real and imaginary.

Chapter illustration

Last but certainly not least is the evidence of the uniformity and standardization of construction bricks and of weights and measures across the whole geographic spread of that civilization.

By around 3,500 years ago the Indus Valley was overtaken by hordes of raiders coming from the northwest , historically known as ‘Aryans’. Consensus however, is that by then the Indus civilization had already weakened and declined. Reasons for this include recurring malevolent flooding or conversely, drying up of some tributaries and even disease including leprosy and tuberculosis, and more.

Harappa and Mohenjo-daro.

The city of Harappa arrived first, its twin Mohenjo-daro (image) came later. They are separated by nearly 700 kms, are square in layout with 1.6 km sides. Their populations have been estimated by one scholar at 35,000 each. According to another , the figures are 23,500 for the former and 41,250 in case of the latter. Finally, they constitute the model followed by all other cities throughout the vast domain of that civilization.

Chapter illustration

Each one is crisscrossed by streets at right angles, grid like, equipped with lighting. Their houses, though of different sizes were egalitarian in other respects. They were all built with ‘fire baked bricks’ had paved floors and mud and reeds roofs. Inside was a kitchen and a room “that appears to have been set aside for bathing [and from which] wastewater was directed to covered drains, which lined the major streets. [That system of urban sewage disposal was ] “more efficient than those in some areas of modern India and Pakistan today”. There were even places earmarked to receive household solid waste. Residents drew water from ‘municipal’ and private wells (see image).

Chapter illustration

Unusually, there is an evident absence of palaces for kings, mansions for the rich and temples for the gods. There are nonetheless public buildings consisting of citadels the purpose of which has not yet been definitively established, granaries for the storage and distribution of grain and ,in the case of Mohenjo-daro , a large public bath (image).

Chapter illustration

Society and religion

Archaeologists and historians, in the absence of a decipherable script are only able to make educated guesses at the sociopolitical and religious facets of the Indus Valley, on the basis of the ruins and thousands of artifacts they uncovered over the decades and throughout the expanse it occupied.

From the uniformity of houses, as we have seen, scholars have deduced that perhaps all citizens were equal in status. If so, this is quite remarkable and, historically unique. Others, to the contrary, regard the differences in house sizes as indication of social stratification. As far as Historydiscussion.net is concerned there were four social classes being from top to bottom: the educated (physicians, priests and astrologers), warriors, traders and craftsmen and manual labourers. All these ultimately, found their way into Indian culture (see essay: Religions of Asia). It is quite noteworthy, in this hierarchy, the absence of royalty and aristocracy at the very top and of slavery at the very bottom, both customarily found in practically all early pre-modern civilizations.

Further, archaeological searches have not found indications of warfare, conflict, offensive or defensive weaponry and prisons etc. Were the people there and then really peace loving? Whatever, there is consensus that city dwellers consisted primarily of traders and artisans.

How were they governed? The uniform planning and construction of cities with their wells and sewage disposal schemes, the standardization of weight and measures and the use of the same script and seals, all point to the existence of a central authority, of rules and regulations and some form of administration to control it all. That central power could have been exercised by an emperor ruling over the entire domain. Alternatively there could have been two states with Harappa and Mohenjo-daro as their respective capitals, each ruled by its king with an unusually high degree of coordination between them to ensure the identicalness we have described. Or something else entirely. Unless Indus script is deciphered, one day, the reality of why and how of governance will never be known.

We have already seen that archaeologists found no indication of temples. Even so some buildings such as the great baths of Mohenjo-daro are thought to have served as centers of worship. Archaeologists also point to the many terracotta figurines and seals “that depict scenes with evident mythological or religious content… Among the most interesting of the seals…[is] the swastika a symbol still widely used by Hindus, Jains, and Buddhists [and by the Nazis of Germany a few thousand years later]”. From these and others searchers surmised the existence of a fertility goddess, similar to the later Shiva in Hinduism (see essay: Religions of Asia).

Stranger still, according to one source, is the seal depicting a fight between “a half-human, half-buffalo monster attacking a tiger”, reminiscent of the Sumerian ‘Epic of Gilgamesh’ (see essay:Mesopotamia). If so it is yet another sign of trade with Mesopotamia already mentioned.

And, once again, as was the case with Mesopotamians, I have found no reference to human sacrifice. If so this is another deviation from the ugly practices of virtually all early religions.

The Story of the Nile

EARLIEST ORGANIZED SOCIETIES

THE STORY OF THE NILE

Chapter illustration

The Author

MARCH 2019

REFERENCES

Ancient History Encyclopedia. -Ancient Egypt. -Egyptian hieroglyphs. -Mummification in ancient Egypt.

BBC History. -Ancient Egypt and the Modern World, by Dr. Joyce Tyldesley. -Ancient Egyptian Magic, by Dr. Geraldine Punch. -From Warrior Women to Female Pharaohs, by Dr. Joann Fletcher. -Health Hazards and Curses in Ancient Egypt, by Egyptologist Joyce M. Filer. -The Private Lives of the Pyramid-builders, by Dr. Joyce Tyldesley. -The Story of the Nile, by Egyptologist John Baines.

Encyclopedia Britannica. -Ancient Egypt. -Nile River. -Palermo Stone. -Papyrus writing material

History. -Egyptian pyramids

Historyworld.net. -Egypt. -Egyptian religion.

Khan Academy. -Ancient Egypt civilization.

Live Science -The Nile: Longest River in the World.

Smithsonian. -Egyptian mummies.

Wikipedia. -Ancient Egypt. -Egyptian pyramids. -Egyptian hieroglyphs. -Papyrus.

THE STORY OF THE NILE

Five thousand years ago a number of independent communities along the valley of the Nile River joined forces as a single polity stretching from the Mediterranean Sea all the way to Aswan 800 to 900 kms upriver. That constituted the genesis of the great Egyptian civilization. It endured uninterrupted, essentially unchanged for 3,000 years (from 3100 to 34 BCE) governed by kings and later pharaohs issued from 30 succeeding dynasties. “For almost 30 centuries Egypt remained the foremost nation in the Mediterranean world” .

In this narration we begin with a brief review of the millennia preceding unification or the pre-dynastic era. It is followed by the dynastic era in the wake of unification. Our scope, however, does not extend beyond the times of Ramses II (19th dynasty). He ruled for 66 years, from 1279 to 1213 BCE. He lived to the, then, unheard of age of 96 more than twice the age expectancy of ordinary Egyptians. He is “considered the ideal pharaoh… a mighty warrior, an extravagant builder… [He ruled at a time of] prosperity and calm..[and had] a flair for publicity revealed in the vast number of monuments and inscriptions commemorating his achievements… Even today, epic tales of Ramses endure”. Furthermore, by then the hallmarks of ancient Egypt: hieroglyphic script, papyrus paper, pyramids, mummification and more had attained maturity.

As the reader proceeds, she/he will, no doubt be astonished at the volume of information available, in detail to scholars, covering every aspect of that civilization. How did they come to know so much about ancient Egypt? They did thanks to the wealth of well preserved written

Chapter illustration

records , paintings and artifacts discovered, in an abundance of tombs, pyramids and temples in addition to well preserved mummies of kings and commoners. Another important source of information was the ‘Palermo Stone’ (above) after the Sicilian town where it has been preserved since 1877. The stone consists of a basalt slab inscribed in hieroglyphic with noteworthy annual events along with the names of Egyptian kings for the 600 years period between 2925 to 2325 BCE. Scholars believe the stone was originally located in an Egyptian temple.

Nile: “ Father of African Rivers”

Chapter illustration

At 6,650 kms, “the father of African rivers” is the longest in the world. It evolved into its present geography some 25,000 to 30,000 years ago. It consists of two main tributaries arising in the depths of Africa. The White Nile originates at Lake Victoria in Uganda, the largest on the continent. The Blue Nile starts its life at Lake Tana in Ethiopia. The two merge near Khartoum in the Sudan. From there the mighty Nile travels northward across the Egyptian desert to end its journey in a huge delta between Alexandria and Port Said on the shores of the Mediterranean Sea. It is said that a float riding the waters needs three months to cover the distance between Lake Victoria and the Mediterranean.

We have all learnt at school that “Egypt is the gift of the Nile” uttered by the renown Hellenistic historian Herodotus (484-425 BCE). For early Egyptians the Nile was variously the “Father of Life” and the “Mother of All Men”. More, the river is sacred for being associated with many gods and goddesses of the Egyptian pantheon. All this simply because, without the Nile, there would have been no Egypt.

Annually, in August and September, following the monsoon rains deep in Africa and the melting snow of on its mountains, the Nile rose and flooded its banks and inundated the Delta region on the Mediterranean to a great depth. So much so that Herodotus describes the event as “[o]nly the towns remain above water, looking rather like the islands of the Aegean.” When the water receded in October it left behind, on each side of the river bed, a thick layer of black nutrient-rich topsoil. In the delta, the receding river created an oasis of nearly 15,000 sq kms (). The fertile topsoil and the availability of year round man-made irrigation allowed, despite Egypt’s hot and dry climate, intensive and extensive farming.

As for the crops grown, they included plentiful quantities of wheat, barley, for bread and beer. Also grown were vegetables and fruits the likes of “leeks, garlic, melons, squashes, pulses, lettuce, and other crops, in addition to grapes that were made into wine”. Last but not least they cultivated flax from which they made ropes and linen for clothing and papyrus which “roots could be eaten, while the stems were used for making anything from boats and mats to the characteristic Egyptian writing material”.

Hand in hand, as is usually the case, animal husbandry proceeded with agriculture. For food Egyptians bred, raised and fattened goats, sheep, pigs , ducks and pigeons. Further, they fished the plentiful aquatic fauna another gift of the Nile. As animals of burden and draught, Egyptians relied on donkeys, camels and water buffaloes. They even kept dogs, cats and monkeys as pets. This made Herodotus proclaim that “Egyptians were the only people to keep their animals with them in their houses”.

Throughout Egypt’s history, up the completion of the Aswan High Dam in 1970(), the life giving flooding of the Nile had more or less been predictable, reliable and most eagerly awaited. Occasionally though, there were seasons when it did not rise high enough, hence depriving the land of the black fertile soil. At times like these Egyptians suffered greatly from shortages of food to the point of starvation. Alternatively, in some seasons, the river over-flooded causing devastation to property, crops and animals.

In the final analysis, therefore, Herodotus was quite accurate in qualifying Egypt as the gift of the Nile, of such value, as to make one Egyptologist to state: “Many accounts of ancient Egypt begin by stressing the influence of the environment, and particularly the great River Nile, on the everyday life of its people…..”, as will become apparent below.

Pre-dynastic era

Pre-dynastic Egypt is the prehistoric era starting tens of thousands of years ago with the migration of hunting gathering tribes from elsewhere in Africa to Egypt’s western desert. In those days it was friendlier that the hot parched place it is today. So much so that evidence points to the advent of farming there some 10,000 years ago.

As climatic conditions worsened, they drove thes groups eastward towards the narrow valley of the Nile where, around 8,000 years ago, they started organizing themselves as settled farmers. With time they prospered thanks to the gifts of the river, mentioned above. By 6,400 years ago they were making cloth through improved weaving techniques, followed 400 years later by the hand held plough.

Another gift of the Nile was its easy navigability making it an important means of transportation and trade. As such it was an important “unifying force in such a long, thin country” . Ultimately, propitious circumstances were at hand for a unification of all groupings along the river into a long and narrow state. Its originator, has yet to be ascertained, but most likely, it was a king Menes some 5,000 years ago(3100 BCE).Egyptologists are in agreement that this date constitutes the beginning of dynastic era of ancient Egypt civilization. It lasted three millennia through 30 succeeding dynasties producing more than 300 monarchs. An “example of social continuity rivaled in human history only by China”. It is also noteworthy that by the coming of king Menes the hieroglyphic script and the papyrus made paper had already been invented(see 1 and 2 in Appendix).

Beliefs and myths.

Post-death body preservation or mummification was central to the beliefs of ancient Egyptians. In his 2010 book ‘Ancient Egyptian Tombs’ Dr Steven Snape writes “…the exceptionally high levels of preservation [of a corpse in the] dry desiccating sand of the desert” was tantamount to natural mummification since it “acted as a natural absorbent of the potentially destructive decompositional fluids”. He concluded that this, in all probability accidental discovery, “had far-reaching consequences”.

From pharaohs all the way down, they were convinced that every human is made of body and soul. In the wake of death, the immortal soul escapes and drifts aimlessly, so to speak in search of a body to inhabit. Accordingly, the aim of every Egyptian was that after death her/his body and soul should come together again to begin a new life, not much different from the one left behind in a place called ‘The Field of Reeds’.

To this end they went to great lengths to prepare for a pleasant and comfortable afterlife. Each planned and organized her/his own body mummification, tomb and the objects and valuables to be moved there. To quote one writer: “[t]here was much to be placed in the tomb that a person would need in the Afterlife… Through a magical process… models, pictures, and lists [of food, kitchen items and utensils] would become the real thing when needed in the Afterlife”.

In short, ‘The Field of Reeds’ for Egyptians was not the equivalent to the Heavens or Paradise in other civilizations which believed in an existence after death. Instead “[t]hey could think of no life better than the present, and they wanted to be sure it would continue after death”.

Really? Surely not. There must have been a large, if not a majority, of poor Egyptians, whose life was nothing but a constant struggle for survival. It, therefore, makes sense that they were not eager for an encore. To the contrary, they undoubtedly, hoped that they would have a better deal in ‘The Field of Reeds’.

In due course Egyptian embalmers had mastered three techniques of mummification varying in complexity, sophistication and, naturally, price. The best and costliest was for pharaohs, aristocrats and the very rich (see 3 in Appendix). The next for the ‘middle class’ and the third for lower income families.

Even so, it seems evident that for those same poor Egyptians, no price was approachable enough to enable at least a semblance of body preservation. They must, consequently, have had no choice but to revert to the pre-dynastic way of burying their loved ones in the dry, hot sands of the Egyptian desert hoping natural mummification to take its course and enable the departed to make it to a reasonably acceptable afterlife.

One source relates that when death occurs in a family, the body is taken to the embalmers who, at the outset, needed to know from relatives what level of mummification they had in mind. Should they select, for example, the lowest when they could very well have afforded the higher, the dead person would not cross to the new world. Worse, she/he would know she/he had been cheated out of the service she/ he deserved. In consequence the expired “would return to make [her/his] relatives' lives miserable until the wrong was righted”. How so? And by what further procedure? The source does not say.

Before the mummy is finally placed in its tomb/chamber and the entrance sealed, a priest proceeded with the re-activation of the five senses to enable the mummy to enjoy the next world fully as if among family and friends. He did so by touching parts of the corpse with special tools. In particular by placing one such instrument on the mouth, “the dead person could now speak and eat”. The departed “was now ready for his journey to the Afterlife”.

Although Anubis (image) was the god associated with the dead, embalmers and funerals, he does not seem to have intervened in the preparations for the next world (see also god Osiris in a later section). He did not, for example, weigh who deserved a pleasant afterlife and who, to the contrary, had to spend time in a next world of suffering. In other words no rewards for a life spent virtuously or punishment for one replete with evil doing. In conclusion, therefore, provided one had the means to spend and plan for a gratifying afterlife, she/he should get there irrespective of whether she/he is an honest person or a crook. I must point out, however that down the line readers will come across god Thoth and, the rather incidental, reference to the ‘Hall of Judgement’ without further elucidations.

Chapter illustration

What about worship? In the next section we dwell on the great efforts and expenses to build large temples. But they were not intended to regularly receive congregations of commoners for prayers and other devotional activities. Egyptians who wanted to worship could do so privately at home. Instead these magnificent temples were the residences of the gods. They were staffed by priests at their service. Additionally temples owned land and employed thousands of people on farming activities. They were, thus, important links in the overall economy of the state.

Egyptians, like all early civilizations and indeed, some current people, believed in and trusted the powers of magic and sorcery.

Apart from combatting disease, as described in a later section, they needed assurances about the intentions of the gods. Where they satisfied with a certain devotional act or sacrifice performed? On the other hand, if they suspected some gods to be angry they sought advice on ways to appease them. Equally, they needed protection from those who wanted to harm them such as demons and ghosts.

Further, with respect to preparations for the afterlife, they wanted to be sure that once mummified and in their tombs with their valuables, no thieves would gain access to their resting place. They were, in consequence, assured that amulets would be placed inside the wrappings and spells written on the walls of their burial chambers to keep intruders away by, for example, unleashing vicious animals to scare them off.

And who, finally, were the service providers? Mainly “[Lector] [p]riests… seen as guardians of a secret knowledge given by the gods to humanity to 'ward off the blows of fate’…”

First, a clarification. The rulers of unified Egypt had the title of king. It is only 1,500 years later during the 18th dynasty, that it was changed to pharaoh. For our purpose we make use, throughout this narration, of the more familiar :pharaoh, irrespective of historical period.

A hieroglyphic text gives the job description of a pharaoh as: “[he] is on earth for ever and ever, judging mankind and propitiating the gods, and setting order… in place of disorder. He gives offerings to the gods and mortuary offerings to… the blessed dead”. In consequence pharaohs were considered more gods than men, and although not quite full deities, they were, nevertheless, in a far superior position than mere humans. They controlled all that produced wealth in the realm: land , agriculture, animals ,trade etc. In addition, they were chief priests and chief judges.

For the day to day running of the country, the pharaoh appointed a ‘vizier’ who headed an administration staffed by civil servants, scribes and senior clergymen. The first were responsible for lands, crops and the maintenance and construction of irrigation systems and other works. They were also charged with collecting taxes and recruiting manpower for employment on infrastructure construction and, more importantly, on putting up the great monuments erected for the glory of gods and pharaohs, particularly pyramids and temple complexes. The scribes (image) were, quite obviously, needed to record all and everything. Thirdly, priests were nothing more than propagandists for the monarch to ensure the “cooperation and unity of the Egyptian people in the context of an elaborate system of religious beliefs”. To complete the picture, the vizier and his subordinates were responsible for the prevalence of justice and peace among the king’s subjects.

Chapter illustration

Pharaohs, like all Egyptians of means, spared no expense in preparing their post-death residence. But theirs was the wealth and resources of the state. A pharaoh, hence, could divert large amounts of public treasure to build a fitting place for his mummy . From the onset of the dynastic era that place was the pyramid.

Pyramids began as two superimposed platforms known as ‘mastabas’. In 2620 BCE they evolved into the stepped pyramids built by stacking six successively smaller ‘mastabas’. Finally ,they changed to the classical form; their four sloping sides intended to represent the rays of the sun, a prime god. This design culminated with the three great pyramids of Giza built between 2550 and 2470 BCE by pharaohs Khufu, Khafre(), and Menkure. Pyramids were the central edifices of entire complexes, comprising temples and the tombs of courtiers and elites.

Chapter illustration

Mortuary chambers within pyramids were the enclosures entrusted with the mummies, the canopic jars containing the viscera of the departed (see 3 in Appendix) and all the necessities needed in the afterlife already described. Inscriptions were made on the walls referred to by archaeologists as pharaonic literature. They consisted of religious messages and depictions of events during the reign of the particular pharaoh buried there. The oldest example identified as the “Pyramid Texts”, dating from about 2500 BCE has been a source of valuable information.

To this day, scholars cannot decide how these enormous monuments were erected (see 4 in Appendix). Indeed, what techniques were used to quarry, transport and lift the heavy stones into place with exquisite precision. As stated by one source, the “construction of the great pyramids…. has yet to be fully explained and would be a major challenge to this day” . On the other hand, scholars have no doubt that those who planned and designed them had mathematical “skill that stimulated … Pythagoras [the great Greek mathematician who lived between 570 and 500 BCE] to perfect [his] work”.

With time, however, it was realized that far from being safe from tomb thieves, the royal resting places were ,to the contrary, being ransacked. Thus, from about 1550 BCE the construction of pyramids receded. Instead pharaoh were buried in secret tombs dug in solid cliffs exemplified by the tombs in the Valley of the Kings and the Valley of the Queens.

Pharaohs initiated the construction of temple complexes for the glory of a god or more. By implication, he, too, shared in that glory since the edifice commemorated his good deeds during his ‘present’ passage on earth. All these magnificent temples contributed to the renown of ancient Egypt. One of them, in particular, Abu Simbel built during the reign of none other than Ramses II the great. is classified as World Heritage by UNESCO().

What is remarkable is that no pyramid or temple could have been built without the involvement of government officials representing the pharaoh. All constructions paid for from the coffers of the state/pharaoh were naturally classified as public works. As such their construction was closely monitored and supervised by the named officials. Indeed, “Pyramid building would have been impossible without strong government backed up by an efficient civil service”. Curiously, however, nothing remains of royal palaces and mansions of the rich.

And who were the people who actually did the work? Conventional wisdom has it that they were slaves forced to submit to the back breaking labour. Far from it. “The increasingly centralised organisation of the third millennium [ from 3000 to 2000 BCE], created a disciplined labour force, which was used to build vast royal monuments and elite tombs” Indeed, all those involved were Egyptian citizens recruited from practically all households. They came with different skills and from different classes of society. They were accommodated in purpose built villages near the construction sites and paid with loaves of bread and beer rations .

Let us take the case of the largest of the great pyramids of Giza. It was built by an estimated 25,000 workers divided between 5,000 “permanent employees” and some 20,ooo temporary workers who stayed for a few months only. All in all they included those who quarried stone, masons, toolmakers and food suppliers. The permanent employees were accommodated, with their families, in a purpose built village near the site of the works. As for the transient workers, they lived in camps nearby.

Domestic matters apart, pharaohs also paid attention to the world around them, beyond the borders of Egypt. So much so that by 1425 BCE, they ruled parts of the Middle East including Syria and Palestine to the north-east and a strip up the Nile short of present day Khartoum in the Sudan to the south. Cleverly, they brought back from their conquests young indigenous princes to educate and indoctrinate in Egyptian ways. In due course, “they return home to rule their vassal states in a frame of mind more inclined to cooperation than rebellion”.

Chapter illustration

Not only princes of conquered lands arrived in the Valley of the Nile. Indeed, in a span of 300 years, from 1938 to 1630 BCE, immigrants from Palestine were allowed to settle the Delta region and were employed in the mines and in construction. Taking advantage of a temporary weakening Egyptian rule, they took control of their region, started their own dynasty. They lasted just over a century, from 1930 to 1523 BCE, after which they were attacked, defeated and thrown out of Egypt altogether. They were known as the Hyksos meaning “ruler of foreign lands”.

In one way, however, their coming was a blessing. The Hyksos introduced to the Valley of the Nile new technologies in metal working as well as new weapons, crops and the horse and chariot. The consequences of these were “to bring Egypt, which had been technologically backward, onto the level of southwestern Asia [the Middle East]”.

Despite their hallowed status, pharaohs were not beyond lusting after the pleasures of life. Among others they had several wives from different classes of society as well as concubines aplenty, some from overseas. One Egyptologist recounts that pharaoh Amenhotep III (reign: 1386- 1349 BCE) was so overjoyed by the arrival of one foreign princess and her 317 female servants that he wrote to one of his vassals: “I am sending you my official to fetch beautiful women, to which I the king will say good. So send very beautiful women - but none with shrill voices”.

More pervertedly, consanguineous marriages between half-sisters and brothers were not uncommon. It was practiced to enhance the status of the male offspring of a low class mother. In other words, the son of such a mother by marrying his half- sister born to an aristocratic or royal mother became eligible to the throne when their common father died. For example, Thutmose I (reign: 1506–1493 ) of modest maternal heritage married his half-sister whose mother was a royalty. In turn, his son Thutmose II (reign: 1493 -1479 ) equally of a lower status mother succeeded his father after wedding his half-sister Hatshepsut, the daughter of a queen. From this perspective pharaoh Ramses II, with whom we started, was claimed to be also great because of “the size of his harem and family (at least 100 children)… [and for being the] husband of the beautiful Nefertiti”

But, despite all the machismo from time to time a woman mounted the throne. They were as capable, forceful and aggressive as their male counterparts. Altogether, there were ten of them. The most remembered are Hatshepsut (1473-1458 BCE), Nefertiti (1353-1336 BCE) and of course Cleopatra(51-30 BCE) on whose watch the lights of the impressive civilization went out.

By one estimate the population of Egypt numbered 1 to 1.5 million in the third millennium (3000 to 2000) BCE. One thousand year later it had risen to nearly 3 million with an overwhelming majority of peasants working the land.

At the top of the social ladder was the pharaoh , his courtiers and members of the aristocracy. Below them were the scribes who could read and write the hieroglyphic script. They were only a few since 99 percent of the population was illiterate. Their skills were badly needed at a time when writing was becoming a vital instrument of governance. For example, scribes attended law courts to report on all cases appearing before judges whether trivial or serious, and to record charges, witness statements and verdicts reached, all for future reference.

Also up there on the higher rungs were priests. They were the representatives of the pharaoh vis-a-vis the gods in their respective temples. As such they interceded with them for the protection of the general public from the incidence of ‘chaos’, such as for example, the sun not rising in the morning. Another important duty was to ease the passage of the dead into the next world. Further, priests washed, perfumed, and dressed the statues of the god(s) or whatever other symbol was available.

On a lower rung stood traders. They brought into the Valley of the Nile timber, olives, oil, ebony, ivory and monkeys, from Byblos, Crete, Greece, Anatolia, Punt (possibly part of nowadays Somalia) and even as far away as Afghanistan. Out, in exchange, they shipped grain, linen, papyrus and very high quality building stone.

Of equal status were government officials as well as persons of learning and specialization such as physicians, engineers, artists and craftsmen.

Below them subsisted the peasants of rural Egypt. They were the ones who ploughed, sowed, harvested, bred and raised animals. But, despite it all they did not own the land they worked or were free to dispose of its produce and animals. All belonged to temples and aristocratic families. And, to add insult to injury, farmers were required to pay taxes and to be available for recruitment as quarriers, stone cutters, masons etc.

Way down, on the very bottom rung of the social ladder were slaves. They were the captured soldiers and citizens of defeated polities. They could also be persons given to the pharaohs in lieu of presents and as tributes or taxes by the vanquished. Or they were men and women bought from merchants in slave markets. Egyptian citizens, if they chose to, sold themselves into a life of servitude. They did so either to escape poverty and the harsh conditions of peasant life or in repayment of debts which could not be honoured otherwise.

Slaves’ duties varied. The luckiest ones were those who served in the palaces of the royal family, in the mansions of the nobility or in temples under priests. Some who showed skills and abilities became indispensable to their masters and, expectedly, rose in rank. In contrast, the least fortunate were those who worked the gold and copper mines where a great many of them died from exhaustion or dehydration in the desert heat.

Notwithstanding the machismo and sexism of the royals, men and women of all social classes were equal under the law. Quite a surprising attitude at the time. It was at odds with both Greek and Roman cultures a couple of millennia later. As stated by one female Egyptologist: “For some three thousand years the women who lived on the banks of the Nile enjoyed a form of equality which has rarely been equaled….[They] had a greater range of personal choices and opportunities for achievement”. So much so that foreigners who visited Egypt at the time were scandalized at the realization that women could be out trading while “men sat and home and did the weaving”. As to the cause of this enlightened attitude, she explains that it resulted from the way “Egyptians viewed their universe as a complete duality of male and female”.

What did Egyptian women engage in? Apart from mounting the throne like Nefertiti, for example, the most sought after occupation was priesthood, serving both gods and goddesses. Women could also choose to be dancers and singers, no doubt remunerated, for the entertainment of royals , elites and gods alike. Women of means, however, could indulge in being “bathed, depilated and doused in sweet heavy perfumes [and] sitting patiently before their hairdressers”.

Consistently with that equality, and in contrast to the royals, Egyptians eschewed polygamy and consanguineous unions. Within a typical family of any class of society, the title “Lady of the House” belonged to mothers and wives who gave birth to offspring and ran homes. They, along with sisters and daughters were respected and listened to by their menfolk.

Hygiene was a premium in that society generally. Bathing in the Nile and soaping with a product “made from animal fat and chalk” and scenting oneself were customary practices. Egyptians dressed in simple white linen clothing . Men were in the habit of shaving all body hair and youngsters went naked until about 12 at which age boys were circumcised().

Despite all the generosities of the Nile, a parasitic worm lurked in its water. As peasants waded in, as they inevitably had to, it entered their bodies through feet, legs, blood vessels and organs resulting in gravely deteriorating health and even death. They had contracted bilharzia. But, of course, in the Egypt of those days there were scores of other maladies afflicting and causing great miseries to its people.

Physicians did their best to cure and relieve the suffering of their countrymen. Some produced texts for the guidance of others. One such text “describes 48 cases of injury to the face, head, neck and upper spine. In each case a prognosis is given and, if this is favourable, suitable treatment is recommended”. Another ‘The Kahun Gynecological Papyrus’ dating from 1800 BCE, deal with women health, pregnancy and contraception. A third text written, be someone called Imhotep ( 2667-2600 BCE) identifies more than 200 illnesses and recommends appropriate treatment. Presciently and well ahead of his time, he cautioned his readers that disease could very well have natural, not supernatural, causes.

In contrast, the so-called ‘ magical-medical texts’ seek to mix ‘science’ with religious superstitions. Among others, doctors could prescribe concoctions so vile as to make the evil spirit causing the illness exit the body of the patient. One example is one composed of “[d]ung from various animals, fat from cats, fly droppings and even cooked mice”. Midwives, too, were in the habit of organizing sessions of “[s]tamping, shouting, and making a loud noise with rattles, drums and tambourines” to drive out demons interfering with childbirth. In short, according to one Egyptologist “Magic was not so much an alternative to medical treatment as a complementary therapy. Surviving medical-magical papyri contain spells for the use of doctors”.

Overall, from the days of the first settlers to the day of Cleopatra’s demise, the Egyptian pantheon was inhabited by more than 2,000 gods and goddesses. Some were benevolent and charitable, others were cruel, vengeful and aggressive. And whereas the former were trusted and loved, the latter, instead,were feared and had to be appeased one way or the other . This notwithstanding , gods and goddesses could be elevated or reduced in status in line with the whims of the sitting pharaoh. The most extreme divine reordering was undertaken by Akhenaten() (reign: 1353-1336 BCE) who privileged the god Aten to the exclusion of all others. This occurrence is considered by scholars as the first case of monotheism in history. But it ended with his death: Egyptians reverted to their old and well established polytheism.

The first god on the scene, during the early pre-dynastic period, was Atum who after ending the great chaos which had prevailed, “spoke creation into existence” .

In time he was eclipsed by the sun god Re (or Ra). To ancient Egyptians the sun occupied a very important place in their lives. We have already seen that one of the vital tasks of priests was to ensure that the giant star rose every morning. They believed that Re sailed “his boat under the world each night. Every time, during the journey, he has to defeat an evil spirit… before he [ the sun] can reappear”.

Egyptians also worshipped the god Amun who was not only the patron of all pharaohs but more impressively the king of all gods. Sometime during the the second millennium (between 2000 and 1000 BCE), he became one with the sun-god Re. From this mergence was born the powerful god Amun-Re (or Amon Ra).

Then there were the four family members, Osiris, Isis, Horus and the nasty Seth. Respectively the were husband, sister/wife, son and brother of the first. Osiris was “chief judge of the Underworld but also god of resurrection, the Inundation and vegetation” . He replaced god Anubis (mentioned earlier) associated with death, embalmers and funerals. Isis “was one of the great goddesses, the most popular member of the Egyptian pantheon, revered for her magical powers and for her devotion to her husband, Osiris, and to their son, Horus”. In turn, Horus the “sky-god [and] the divine protector and patron of the king”. As for Seth he was “god of the desert and promulgator of thunderstorms and violence…. [he was simultaneously] feared for his capacity to do harm, [and] admired his strength and ferocity”.

Egyptian mythology has it that Seth killed his brother Osiris out of jealousy, hacked him into pieces and scattered them far and wide. Isis, the faithful and loving wife searched and searched until she located most of the parts. Among the missing ones were his reproductive organs. She patched him up, brought him back to life and, and despite it all bore him a son: Horus. In due course once Horus was old enough he took revenge on his uncle Seth.

Others included Hathor “goddess of motherhood and fertility, the suckler of the king, and the patron-goddess of unmarried women” and Thoth “a moon god ….inventor of writing and …scribe to the gods, his chief activities being to record the verdict on the dead who were tried in the Hall of Judgement…”

A consensus exists between archaeologists and historians that ancient Egyptians’ civilization was one of the most remarkable in human history because of their achievements summarized as:

Their accommodation to the routine and capriciousness of the River Nile leading to the creation of a first class agricultural(image) and farming society in an otherwise hostile desert environment, which, nevertheless, proved ideal at preserving their heritage for posterity.

Chapter illustration

Their interpretation of life and death leading to a unique concept of the afterlife. It entailed an imperative to prepare laboriously for it.

Building some of the most prestigious monuments ever with great organizational and technical skills.

The longevity without interruption of their system of governance.

As phrased by American historian Will Durant (1885-1981): “The effect or remembrance of what Egypt accomplished at the very dawn of history has influence in every nation and every age. ‘It is even possible’, as Faure has said, ‘that Egypt, through the solidarity, the unity, and the disciplined variety of its artistic products, through the enormous duration and the sustained power of its effort, offers the spectacle of the greatest civilization that has yet appeared on the earth’.We shall do well to equal it”.

APPENDIX

1-Hieroglyphic script

The hieroglyphic system of writing includes logograms or “pictorial symbol[s] intended to represent ..whole word[s]” and letters. As such there were in all some 1,000 characters subsequently reduced to about 750.

Chapter illustration

Interestingly, the name hieroglyph comes from two Greek words meaning holy and writing because when the Greeks came across it they thought it was some kind of sacred writing.

It survived into Roman times, some 400 years into the Christian Era.

2-Papyrus as a writing medium.

Chapter illustration

Papyrus plant, strips, writing sheet and book scroll

Papyrus is a plant with a fibrous stem which grows naturally on the banks of the Nile and other rivers of the world. Egyptians cultivated it too. As we have seen it is suitable for a range of products. It is, however, mostly associated with the paper made from it and used extensively by Egyptians. It was, equally, employed as such by the Greeks and Romans who wrote books in the form of scrolls.

To make paper the stem is opened and cut into thin strips. These are laid next to one another in one direction to be overlaid, perpendicularly, with another . Next the layers are moistened, pressed together and let to dry in the sun while the natural fluids in the original plant bond strips and layers together. The end result, if due care was taken throughout, is a white sheet with no blemishes or spots.

3-Mummification fit for a pharaoh. It took 70 days for mummification to be completed. It was carried out by a team of priests who were equally competent at religious ritual for the occasion and as ‘coroners’.

The procedure entailed the extraction of the brain bit by bit through the nostrils with specially made instruments with hooks. Next, an incision was made in the side of the abdomen with a flint knife for the removal of all organs except the heart which, Egyptians believed, was the “center of a person's being and intelligence”. As for the stomach. intestines, lungs and liver they were treated with preservatives and placed in four canopic jars (image), one for each organ, which were, in due course, placed next to their mummified owner in the tomb. Why these in particular and none of the rest? Again because it was believed they were essential in the Afterlife. The remaining organs were presumably of no value and accordingly discarded.

Next the empty corpse is dehydrated by natron, “a type of salt which has great drying properties”. Once all moisture has been removed, the process of wrapping, from head to toe begins. By the time it is done “hundreds of yards of linen” have been consumed.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

The base of Kufu’s pyramid, the largest, covered more than 50,000 sq m; it rose 150m. It made use of 2,300,000 blocks of stone, each weighing 2,300 kgs approximately, and each to be quarried, transported and accurately shaped and set in its proper place.

Pre-Columbian Americas

PRE-COLUMBIAN AMERICAS AND THE MAYA, AZTEC AND INCA

Chapter illustration

The Author MAY 2019

REFERENCES

ANCIENT HISTORY ENCYCLOPEDIA (or: Ahe) -Aztec civilization. -Inca civilization. -Inca mummies -Maya civilization. ENCYCLOPEDIA BRITANNICA (or: Britannica) -Aztec people. -Inca people. -Mississippi culture. -Pre-Columbian civilizations. HISTORY (or: History) -Aztecs. -Maya. HISTORYWORLD.NET (or: Historyworld) -History of America. -History of the Aztecs. -History of the incas. -History of the Maya. LIVESCIENCE (or: Livescience ) -The Inca empire. -The Maya: History, culture and religion. NEW WORLD ENCYCLOPEDIA (or: Nwe) - Aztec civilization. -Inca civilization. - Pre-Columbian Civilization. THE SMITHSONIAN (or: Smithsonian) -The Fascinating Afterlife of Peru’s Mummies TIMEMAPS (or: Timemaps) -Aztec civilization. -Pre-Columbian Civilizations of America. WIKIPEDIA (or: Wikipedia) -Aztecs. -Aztecs slavery. -Maya civilization. -Pre-Columbian era. WILLIAM CHRISTIE MACLEOD (or: Macleod) -Economic aspects of indigenous American slavery.

Note: In the text which follows I speak of human sacrifice, slavery and the obliteration of the Inca empire at the hand of a few conquistadores. I have more fully covered these topics in earlier narrations. They are: Cruel Deities, Masters and Slaves in 3 parts and Pizzaro meets Atahuellpa at Cajamarca.

PRE-COLUMBIAN AMERICAS

THE SCENE

Pre-Columbian, strictly speaking, means before arrival of Christopher Columbus in the Caribbean in 1492. Here, in reality, it means before the landing of Europeans beginning some decades later, first in Central and South America then in what became Canada and the USA.

This narration is, thus, concerned with the indigenous cultures which have thrived in Central and South America before their disastrous encounters with the Spanish Conquistadors in the early 1500’s and, for those up north, before the equally calamitous landing English pilgrims board the Mayflower in 1620.

Sixteen thousand years ago, the first Homo-sapiens migrated from Siberia to Alaska. In ‘The Story of the World-2’ , I have covered, at length this episode in human history. Briefly, it took place during the last ice age when sea levels were much lower than now and a land bridge connected the two regions, enabling those hunter-gatherers to cross over on foot. That ice age ended 10,0000 years ago, the seas rose and the land bridge turned into the Bering strait. In consequence early Americans became isolated and remained so for millennia awaiting Columbus.

Not that this separation mattered to them. From Alaska they spread westward and southward, except for a few who remained: the forebears of today’s Eskimos. By 12,000 years ago, hunter-gatherers were roaming the southernmost point of Argentina: Terra del Fuego.

As they walked south from Alaska, they discovered, to their delight no doubt, a land replete with fauna and flora. As stated by history professor Yuval Harari in his 2014 book ‘Sapiens’:

The Americas were…..a place where animals and plants unknown in Africa and Asia had evolved and thrived.

The flora survived the onslaught of humans. But not for the large animals the like of horses, mammoths, camels and more. In other words, they found meat, fat and bone, skin and fur in abundance and they indulged themselves recklessly. So much so that, within a couple of millennia, 34 of North America’s 47 animal species and 50 out of South America’s 60, had been exterminated.

Ultimately, the continent from top to bottom was populated by scores of groupings and communities such the ‘Red Indian’ tribes, of cow-boys movies fame, and those known as the Mississippians in North America. Mesoamerica, in the middle, was home for the likes of the Olmec, Maya and Aztec nations. Finally, in South America and notably in the Andean mountains and the narrow coastal plain separating them from the Pacific Ocean, a multitude of cultures flourished, the most famous of which was that of the Inca.

Those who settled in the vast expanse of North America came together as widely dispersed tribes and communities of diverse ethnicities and cultural practices. By the time they came into contact with the English, Dutch and other north Europeans in early 17th century , they had become a few hundred partly nomadic partly settled tribes known as the Apache, Cherokee, Iroquois, Pawnee, Sioux etc.

One of them, however, developed a wholly sedentary urban culture in the basin of the Mississippi River. Appropriately called the Mississippians they were located in the currents states of Alabama, Georgia, Arkansas, Missouri, Kentucky, Illinois, Indiana, and Ohio. They came into being around the year 1000 CE and had vanished by the 1600’s. They persisted on maize, beans, squash (image below) and others. They built cities the greatest of which was Cahokia reputed to have had a population of 20,000. Their hallmark, however were the ceremonial, and mortuary earthen mounds, the largest of which measured 300 m x 200 m and 30 m in height.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

As shown on the map, Mesoamerica is the name given to a region encompassing current central Mexico, Belize, Guatemala, El-Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua and Costa Rica. in today’s Central America.

Chapter illustration

About 5000 BCE (7,000 years ago) hunter-gatherers there began to grow their food beginning with maize followed with beans and corn. Roughly the period from 1800 BCE (3,800 years ago) saw the emergence of settled, culturally related societies growing squashes (image), chili pepper and cotton making cloth and pottery. Subsequently, over 3,000 years , till the 1600’s a dozen or so such civilizations came and went.

Chapter illustration

The best known were the Olmec, Teotihuacan, Maya, and Aztec. During their heyday, they are credited not only with intensive agriculture but also with building impressive monuments and great cities. Sources put their achievements on par with those of Mesopotamia and ancient Egypt. The encounters with the Spaniards from the late 1500’s onwards proved fatal those of them thriving at the time. In particular the Aztec.

The first acknowledged Mesoamerican civilization is that of the Olmec between 1500 and 350 BCE. It existed in part of today’s Mexico. They are famous for the large sculpted stone heads of which 17 have been located. They ranged in height from 1.5 to 3.4 metres, with the largest weighing up to 20 tonnes. They are thought to represent their successive rulers. Olmec heritage is evident in the cultures of both the Maya and Aztec.

Chapter illustration

Then there is the civilization of the city of Teotihuacan, 50 kms from present day Mexico, of which National Geographic writes:

Chapter illustration

It was the largest city anywhere in the Western Hemi- sphere before the 1400s….[It had] a massive central road (the Street of the Dead)…thousands of residential compounds and scores of pyramid-temples ... compa- rable to the largest pyramids of Egypt… and supported a population of a hundred thousand…Inside the temple [were] found buried animals and bodies, with heads that had been lobbed off, all thought to be offerings to gods or sanctification for successive layers of the pyra- mid as it was built”.

I want to end with the interesting yet hard to believe phenomenon discovered by archaeologists: Mesoamerican kings and elites were significantly taller that commoners, leading Britannica to conclude:

It is likely that this gulf was unspannable, for through- out Mesoamerica the rulers and nobility were believed to have been created separately from commoners.

South America is a vast land combining rain forests, plains, mountains, and rivers. By some estimates it was home in the 16th century to between 30 and 50 million inhabitants segregated into a great many cultural groups. Our focus, however is on its western part, namely the Andean mountains and the narrow coastal strip separating them from the Pacific Ocean. Over millennia up to arrival of the Europeans, in the 1530’s CE, a multitude of polities developed there at sea level as well as in the highlands.

Occupation of the coastal plain/desert by hunter-gatherers goes back to the time of migration south from Alaska. They, quite naturally, turned first to the ocean for sustenance catching fish and making use of whatever else it offered them. But by 6000 BCE, having taken note of the seasonal nutrient-laden runoffs from the nearby mountain, they turned their attention to irrigated agriculture. They built storage facilities and systems of dykes and canals. They are said to have pioneered agrarian life in South America.

The Andes are a long chain of mountains and plateaus , 8,900 kms long from north to south. The range’s highest summit reaches 6,959 metres; second only to Mount Everest in the Himalayas.

Even so, despite the tough environment, indigenous populations not only survived there, but thrived too. The majority existed around fresh water Lake Titicaca, the most productive region of the Andes. Situated at an altitude of 3,810 metres, between present day Peru and Bolivia, it covers an area of 8,300 sq kms with an average water depth of 140 to 180 m. The onset of agriculture occurred there around 2500 BCE. Cultivated were tubers of which the potato is one variety.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Another reason why indigenous people chose to persist at high altitude was because the rich pastures enabled them to domesticate the llama and its cousin the alpaca (both related to the camel). They could equally thrive at sea level as in the highlands. A typical adult llama is 1.7 to 1.8 m high and weighs between 130 and 200kgs. They were raised and bred variously for their meat, wool and as beasts of durden.

Chapter illustration

Quoting Britannica:

Nowhere else in the world—not even in Tibet or Nepal has cultivation been so successful at such a high altitude …[and] Contrasts of 30 to 40 °C within a single 24- hour period are not uncommon, and nearly 300 nights of frost per year

For an explanation it refers us to German geographer Carl Troll (1899-1975) who perceived that the fertile regions around the lake:

were located just a few degrees [of latitude] south of the Equator, where daytime temperatures are truly tropical”.

In the final analysis, Andeans lived well at these altitudes because they became thoroughly cognizant of their surroundings. Most vitally they realized, very early on, that the diurnal temperature extremes, far from being a handicap were, to the contrary a godsend. Britannica explains:

Any animal or vegetable tissue exposed to this daily contrast can be processed into nutritive products that keep for decades.

Accordingly Andeans evolved a multitude of well- fed and successful societies culminating in the empire of the Inca.

I do not want to leave these majestic mountains without a word about a practice of great importance to its peoples: mummification of corpses. Quite unexpectedly we learn that they preceded those other masters of the art, the Egyptians by as much as 2,000 years. The same way the preservation propertied of the African desert had led Egyptians to mummify their dead so did the preservation characteristics of the dry and frigid climate lead the Andeans to do the same. But, whereas the former did so in preparation for a pleasant afterlife, the Andeans, instead, practiced it to extend post-death the influence and wisdom of kings and ancestors. More when we come to the Inca.

MAYA

Historical background

The part of Mesoamerica subsequently inhabited by the Maya and where their civilization flourished (green on map) was settled by agrarians predecessors as far back as 2000 BCE. They cultivated maize, beans and squashes. The Maya civilization proper emerged about 500 years later. It mysteriously ended around 950 CE . That is not to say however that all people of Maya descent vanished. To the contrary, they are represented today in many societies of current Central and the rest of the Americas and elsewhere in the world.

Chapter illustration

Maya culture attained its zenith during what is known as the Classical Period from about 250 to 900 CE or some 650 years. Of this period Professor Michael Coe (DOB: 1929) wrote that it:

reached intellectual and artistic heights which no other in the New World, and few in Europe, could match at the time.

It was hallmarked by great cities with large populations and vibrant socio economic activities. But the Maya, unlike with other indigenous American civilizations, never became a united political entity. To the contrary the cities, more often than not, fought fiercely among themselves. And as part of the loot, the victor captured the loser’s treasure and citizens including elites as candidates for human sacrifice and other abuses.

Maya developed the only genuine writing system in pre-Columbia

Americas . It consisted of some 800 characters between images representing whole words or objects and syllabic symbols (letters).

Equally they invented a numbering system represented by dots and bars. A dot was given the value one while a bar counted as five. And a shell depicted a zero. In this manner, Maya could count up to 19 without difficulty as shown here. For large numbers however they adopted the vigesimal system based on powers of 20: 1, 20, 400, 8,000 etc. (compare with decimal system of 1,10,100,1,000, respectively). In this way the Maya could account for very large numbers indeed, as shown in the example below.

Chapter illustration
X 8000 - - - DD=16,000
X 400 - D= 400 DD&BB=4,800 DD&BB=4,800
X 20 D=20 D= 20 D&BBB=320 DDD&B=160
X 1 DDD&BB=13 DDDD&B=9 B=5 D&B=6
Total 33 429 5,125 20,966

In this tabulation, a ‘D’ ( dot) represents 1, 20, 400, 8000 depending on in which row it is. Similarly ‘B’ (bar)corresponds to 5, 100, 2000 and 16000 in 1st , 2nd, 3rd and 4th row respectively.

Maya used their writing and mathematical skills to inscribe on pottery items, stone slabs etc. Writing enabled them to prepare calendars and record astronomical occurrences. In the words of late Professor Robert Sharer (1940-2012):

By keeping records of the rainy and dry seasons, the Maya could determine the best times to plant and har- vest their crops…[and by] recording the movements of the sky deities (sun, moon, planets, and stars), they developed accurate calendars that could be used for pro-phecy [and] This knowledge was used to determine when these deities would be in favorable positions for…inaugurating kings, starting trading expeditions, or conducting wars [etc].

Chapter illustration

Similarly, they recorded the names of Maya kings and their achievements in battles and otherwise. All these and more were written in codices or folding books made of tree bark . The writing was performed by professional scribes.

In conclusion, the ability to keep records of all and everything, placed the Maya on a higher civilizational level than any preceding, contemporary and succeeding indigenous culture of the Americas.

The Classical Period (250-950 CE) saw as many as 40 Maya cities large and small. Among them Tiklal with an area of 130 sq kms and a population estimated at 100,000 inhabitants; “an astonishing number for a place in the middle of the jungle” as described by Historyworld. Another city was Caracol occupying nearly 200 sq kms with an even larger population.

Taking their cue from the Teotihuacan (see earlier), Maya cities were carefully planned with their centers reserved for the sacred and powerful. There could be found palaces, elite residences, administrative complexes and ceremonial centers. As for commoners, they lived in the outlying areas. There were also marketplaces. Archeologists have tentatively determined that marketplaces with parallel stalls existed during prime Maya time. Indeed, when the Spanish arrived a few hundred years later they chronicled the existence of long established vibrant markets in:

cities in the highlands… [in] permanent plazas, with officials on hand to settle disputes, enforce rules, and collect taxes [Wikipedia].

Last, but not least, were the pyramid- temples and ball courts. If the Maya had a flag it would most probably have borne a pyramid-temple to symbolize their civilization. Pyramids could reach a height of nearly 50 metres (see image). These edifices were multi- functional. Ahe explains:

Chapter illustration

Pyramids were used not only as temples and focal points for Maya religious practices where offerings were made to the gods but also as gigantic tombs for deceased rulers…

As for archaeologist Dr Lisa Lucerno, temples could ,occasionally, be the scenes of human sacrifice events.

The ball courts and the sport played there meant much more than what the name that. According to Ahe , it “reflected the way the Maya viewed existence”.

The game was played by two teams of a few players each and consisted of sending a ball through a hoop fixed on the wall. Britannica elaborates:

Chapter illustration

[The ball was of] solid rubber, of substantial size, and traveled with considerable speed around the court. [It] could not be hit or touched with the open hands or with the feet; most times the player tried to strike it with the hip.

As for the grand finale, members of the losing side were sacrificed as part of the after-game celebrations.

Maya worshipped a plethora of deities among them the all powerful Itzamnaaj who, according to professor Sharer ruled over opposites such as “life and death, day and night, sky and earth”. Others were the Sun god and the ones who controlled rain, lightning etc. Equally important was ancestor worship.

They believed that there had been several successive worlds created and destroyed preceding theirs. All materialized and ended in complete darkness until the male Sun and female moon were created. She is believed to have cheated on him; he, in punishment took out one of her eyes; thus her less intense light.

Earth was carried on the back of a huge crocodile floating in the ocean. Underneath it were the nine levels of the tenebrous underworld ‘Xibalba’ (place of fear). It was ruled by nine gods of death. Above it, on the other hand, were thirteen layers of heaven, ‘Tamoachan’ under the stewardships of thirteen gods. Further, there was a tree, called ‘tree of life’ of life with its roots in the underworld and its top in the thirteenth layer of heaven.

‘Xibalba’ did not mean the place of eternal damnation for the souls of evil doers. Rather, like the ‘tree of life’, a soul began its post-death journey there then strived to progress upwards toward ‘Tamoachan’ against attempts to hold it back by the evil death gods. Similarly there is no indication, whatsoever, that ‘Tamoachan’ was a place of everlasting bliss and contentment. Indeed, what happens once a soul is up there is anyone’s guess.

Dark caves were taken to be accesses to the underworld. Thus, in the words of Professor Sharer they:

were especially sacred and dangerous places where special rituals for the ancestors [were] conducted.

A few humans were exempted from transiting through ‘Xibalba’ on their way to ‘Tamoachan’: women who died in childbirth, those who committed suicide and the victims of human sacrifice. Their souls went directly to the upper levels.

Commoners buried their dead under- floor in their residences. Senior priests and elites’ resting places were elaborate underground vaults. As for kings, their bodies rested deep inside pyramids, to be ancestor worshipped by other royals. Further, a dead monarch was believed to: “having become one with the god from whom he claimed descent”.

Shedding blood was a prerequisite for the Maya gods to whom the red fluid was nourishment. Accordingly, human sacrifice was a necessity , though not as frequently as with the Aztecs we shall cover next. Candidates were mostly war captives and especially the high ranking among them such as their kings and aristocrats. And ball game players as we have already seen. Professor Sharer, once more :

Among the Maya, human sacrifice was not an every- day event but was essential to sanctify certain rituals, such as the inauguration of a new ruler, the designa- tion of a new heir to the throne, or the dedication of an important new temple or ball court.

And since the soul of those sacrificed went directly up to ‘Tamoachan’, as earlier stated, the Maya saw nothing wrong in the practice.

How did the Maya go about it? A victim could variously be decapitated, disemboweled while alive, or have his beating heart extracted, having possibly been beaten, tortured and even scalped beforehand. The procedure was carried out by two categories of priests. Britannica explains that the opening up of the victim’s chest was carried out by specialized clerics or ‘nacoms’. They were assisted by ‘chacs whose duty was to hold the victim still during the operation. Further, self- inflicted blood shedding was also practiced. It could take the form, among others of driving: “a thorn- studded cord through the tongue”, with the resulting blood collected for offering to the gods.

Maya were governed by a king appointed by the gods. To drive this tale home to citizens at large, religious events were organized and rituals enacted for all to see. Thus empowered, kings exercised control over all administrative, judicial and military matters as well as all resources. More, the king’s divine authority allowed him to recruit aristocrats as well as commoners for the execution of various infrastructure and building projects.

Below royals on the social ladder were aristocrats elites. Senior priests were chosen from their ranks. It is not evident how many of them could read and write. But scribes, equally from among them, were obviously literate. Not only they were entrusted with all records but were probably required to teach others in their milieu the art and intricacies of writing.

Then came the illiterate commoners who constituted the great majority of Maya population of cities and countryside alike. They numbered prosperous merchants, traders, skilled craftsmen and artisans, low ranking priests, peasants and slaves; in short anyone not of aristocratic birth. They were were the ones who paid taxes and fought in intercity wars.

Maya had no pack animals. Traders walked to their destinations accompanied by porters with back packs. Their: “travelling ….into dangerous foreign territory was likened to a passage through the underworld….” narrates Wikipedia. By contrast when their travels took them along coasts and/or rivers they used canoes. The one discovered by in early 16th century was one dug out of large tree trunk long and wide enough for 25 oarsmen.

AZTEC

Historical background

The flag of Mexico carries in its white centre the image of an eagle with a snake in its beak; a tribute to the earlier people who occupied the land: The Aztec. Why it is so will become clear shortly.

Chapter illustration

Of all the peoples of Mesoamerica, the Aztec civilization is the most comprehensively documented, not only for its rich physical heritage but also because of the chronicling and reporting by the Spanish military and Christian clergy who came in contact with it , at its apogee and preponderance in Mesoamerica.

In the 1100’ s CE the Aztec were one of many groups of hunter gatherers in that region. Subsequently, their nomadic way of life led them to the Valley of Mexico located at 2,200 metres altitude in central present day Mexico state. More specifically they eventually made their home on the islands in Lake Texcoco, where they proceeded to build their future great city of Tenochtitlan (now part of Mexico City). Aztec legend has it that when they first arrived at the lake they saw an eagle standing on a cactus tree devouring a snake. They believed that the bird had been sent there by divine guidance to tell them where to settle. Hence the image on the flag.

Chapter illustration

They had come to a place already occupied by several unfriendly polities. At the beginning, the Aztecs did not impress much. But theirs, nonetheless, was a martial and militaristic culture in which warfare was privileged. So much so that by 1519 they ruled, from their capital of Tenochtitlan, an empire in current central and southern Mexico of some 5 to 6,000,000 souls. Having, in the course of conquest, absorbed 400 to 500 smaller states, it now covered an area of about 207,000 sq kms.

Chapter illustration

How was the realm held together? The Aztec appointed trusted officials of their own ethnicity in position of power in the conquered territories while keeping the threat of violence ever present. Simultaneously they encouraged intermarriages and relied on propaganda in the form of edifices and other symbols attesting to the greatness and potency of the Aztec way. Further, their achievements were partly attributable in the opinion of Britannica to:

remarkable system of agriculture, which featured inten- sive cultivation of all available land, as well as elaborate systems of irrigation and reclamation of swampland.

In consequence, they were able to grow a whole variety of fruits and vegetables in adequate enough quantities to sustain a prosperous state with a large population.

So, what did the Aztec live on? To begin with they had maize, beans, potatoes tomatoes avocadoes and amaranth for its seeds, cultivated locally. Lake Texcoco yielded fish and other aquatic animals. They consumed domesticated wild turkey and hairless dogs raised for their meat ( in addition to pets). This diet was supplemented with hunted rabbits and caught insects and worms. Additionally, the rich also enjoyed the produce imported by traders as we shall see later.

The agrarian prowess of the Aztec enabled the sustenance of urban centres inhabited by non-food-producing populations in particular those of the capital city of Tenochtitlan. Started as a settlement, as we have seen, by 1519 when Hernan Cortes and his conquistadores landed, it had become a great metropolis inhabited by 400,000 people. It contained the palace of the ruler of which Cortes said had 300 rooms for the king, his family, officials, “libraries, storehouses, workshops for royal craftsmen, great halls for justice and other councils, and offices for an army of accountants”. Within it, too, were a zoo and an aviary. Not far from the royal complex, resided those of noble birth, senior civil servants and prosperous merchants.

Aside from the palace, Tenochtitlan was home to the prestigious Templo Mayor or Main temple and many lesser ones. Within the city were also four dozen public and administrative buildings. Commoners residences, those of modest traders, craftsmen and soldiers, were located in outlaying zones.

Templo Mayor was centrally located in the city. It consisted of a complex of large stepped pyramids topped with two shrines dedicated to gods Huitzilopochtli and Tlaloc. Also up there was the spot where human sacrifices took place. Within the complex, too, were accommodations and schools for priests. Timemaps informs us that within the temple complex was a ball game court not unlike the ones the Maya had. But the finale of a competition differed in that the lucky player who, with his hip, sent the ball through the wall mounted hoop was feted rather than sacrificed..

Chapter illustration

In its suburb there existed a large market estimated by the Spaniards to accommodate 60,000 sellers and buyers. They also chronicled the busy watercraft traffic on the lake, supplying goods and commodities. More. They also witnessed the presence and actions of watchful officials supervising the commercial activities and ensuring that:

only authorized merchants were permitted to sell their goods, and punishing those who cheated their customers or sold substandard or counterfeit goods.

In the absence coinage purchases in the market were paid for with cacao beans. Wikipedia tells us for example that a small rabbit’s price was 30 beans and a turkey egg :3 beans. But a fixed roll of cotton cloth varied in price from 65 to 300 cacao beans depending on quality.

And again from the Spaniards, Tenochtitlan had gardens, was served by fresh water aqueducts. More, its garbage and excrement were regularly collected by municipal workers and disposed of as fertilizer. In particular conquistador Bernal Díaz del Castillo (1492-1584):

was amazed to find latrines in private houses and a public latrine[in] main streets. [Adding that] Most of the population liked to bathe twice a day[and that king] Moctezumawas [was] reported to take four baths a day”.

As for missionary Bernardino de Sahagún ( c. 1499 –1590): “ the city had beggars, thieves and prostitutes”.

Quote: “Perhaps the most highly elaborated aspect of Aztec culture was the religious system”.

Similarly to the Maya, the Aztec believed that theirs was the fifth consecutive sun. That it had been preceded by four succeeding ones each ending in extinction. They believed themselves to be “the People of the Sun” .Significantly, they attributed their martial prowess and empire building aptitudes to Huitzilopochtli the sun and war god, by whom they had been chosen. In consequence, they considered it the duty of every one to serve and safeguard the sun god and the cosmos .

Aztec religious beliefs were an amalgam of the creeds of those who preceded them in Mesoamerica, notably the Maya. We have already seen that they shared with them the concept of failed creations prior the theirs. They also believed like them that Earth was sandwiched between 13 layers of heaven and 9 of the underworld.

Warriors who died in combat, merchants killed on their trading journeys and women who expired in childbirth went up directly to heaven. More. As stated by Britannica:

The old paradise of the rain god Tlaloc….opened its gardens to those who died by drowning, lightning, or as a result of leprosy, dropsy, gout, or lung diseases. He was supposed to have caused their death and to have sent their souls to paradise.

And what was supposed to happen to all these people once there? It is not explained. But according to Timemaps, warriors returned after four years as hummingbirds.

As for the millions not in the categories listed, they descended to join the god of death in the underworld. “There they traveled for four years until they arrived at the ninth hell, where they disappeared altogether”. In other words, there was no prior judgment by a superior authority. It did not matter whether he/she had died fighting for the gods and the preservation of the universe, as summoned to do, or otherwise.

Human sacrifice was a central part of Aztec beliefs. In the words of Nwe, the:

Aztecs sacrificed human beings on a massive scale in bloody religious rituals, enslaved subject peoples, and, by Spanish accounts, practiced cannibalism.

From Historyworld: “Festivals and sacrifice are almost continuous in the Aztec ceremonial year”. At each event a great number of victims are involved. For example, the source relates, that on the occasion of re-dedication of Templo Mayor in Tenochtitlán in 1487, in the wake of its expansion, the: “line of victims stretches far out of the city and the slaughter lasts four days”.

The problem was that first and foremost, sun god Huitzilopochtli needed nourishment in order complete its daily routine, else, if denied it, he would vanish from the sky and never reappear. Sadly, though, his predilection was for fresh human hearts and blood. Its faithful followers had, therefore, no options but to assuage his craving. They, accordingly, sent their warriors into their neighbours’ land to acquire captives to sacrifice at Huitzilopochtli’s altar.

How did the killing usually proceeded? The sacrificial victim was laid on his back atop a temple/pyramid, held in place by priests while another opened his chest broke whichever ribs stood in the way and severed the heart. For sure, the butchering priest did not use a sharp surgical scalpel. Instead, all he had was a blade of dubious sharpness made from obsidian, a volcanic rock. The cut up body, less the vital organ, was then sent tumbling down the pyramid’s long stairs, leaving behind, unquestionably, a messy goo.

Chapter illustration

The slaughter of humans was also performed to appease and satisfy the other gods in the Aztec pantheon, most notably the god of rain Tlaloc whose shrine, as we have seen, sat atop the summit Templo Mayor pyramids next to Huitzilopochtli’s.

Incredibly, more likely than not, the obscene spectacles of immolation, were public events attended by ordinary citizens. There was a purpose. Citizens were meant to be shocked and awed into submission to the authority and to the role of priests as the intermediaries between them and the gods and implicitly to the authority of the all- powerful king.

It remains undecided, however, whether or not Aztecs cannibalized the corpses of sacrificial victims. According to Wikipedia:

It is known that some rituals included acts of cannibal- ism, with the captor and his family consuming part of the flesh of their sacrificed captives, but it is not known how widespread this practice was.

Some scholars have theorized that they did it to satisfy a craving for protein. Not so, according to others. They argue that staples like maize, beans and amaranth seeds , in addition to dog meat, insects and worms contain enough nutrients, including proteins, to meet the dietary needs of Aztec. This being so, the only logical reason for eating human flesh, if indeed some of them did, must be that they found it more appetizing than dog meat, insects and worms.

Priests too shed blood for their gods. But their practices did not involve being butchered bus were quite painful nevertheless. According to Britannica they:

performed constant self-sacrifice in the form of blood- letting as penitence [such as] passing barbed cords through the tongue and ears.

At the summit of Aztec society sat royals and nobles. Recent scholarship has estimated they accounted for no more than 5 percent of the population.

Below them stood the commoners grouping all the rest. Of these, priests, civil servants, merchants, craftsmen and soldiers formed a hefty 80 percent of the total. Bottommost on the commoners scale were the food producers who worked the land, making up the remaining 20 percent of the population; a small enough figure attesting to the highly productive Aztec agriculture.

Priests ranked highly in status and influence. In addition to their religious functions they also took part in the administration of the empire alongside civil servants and government officials.

For a culture bent on aggression and fixated on the constant need for human fodder for its gods, soldering was both a patriotic and a religious duty. Upon reaching puberty a male Aztec joined the army and stopped cutting his hair till securing his first captive. With 4 or 5 under his belt, he was promoted to the elite Eagles and Jaguars units. Finally, achieving 17 or more captures, he was elevated to the ranks of nobility and could marry within it.

Also esteemed were merchants who organized expeditions to lands within Mesoamerica in search of items not locally available. The routes followed were risky and arduous, particularly since, like the Maya, they lacked animals of burden. Hence all was carried on human backs and in canoes when geography permitted. A round trip could last a whole year or more.

Traders returned home loaded with cotton, tropical fruits, tobacco, rubber, cacao and honey. Expectedly, these commodities commanded high prices in the market place to compensate for the ordeal of the expedition and ensure handsome profits. Most valuable of all, however, were the exotic goods: precious feathers and skins as well as metal, jade, and turquoise much sought by royalty and the wealthy; for their possession added to their prestige, influence and power.

Respected and valued, too, were craftsmen exceptionally skilled and talented at working with stones, gold and feathers.

Slavery existed in Aztec society, but was of a more compassionate nature than the chattel slavery practiced, for example, in North America from the 17th century onward. So much so, that some scholars question the appropriateness of the term slavery in this case. Consider the following:

If a slave can show he is mistreated by his/her master; he/she would be set free.

He/she was equally freed if he/she had children with his/her owner.

A widow could marry, or keep as her own, the slave who widowed her.

A slave in flight could not be stopped except by a close relative of the owner. Else, the interfering person would be enslaved himself.

He could not be sold without his consent.

And the weirdest:

a slave could escape the vigilance of his or her master, run outside the walls of the market and step on a piece of human excrement… He would become a free man.

On the other hand, an incorrigible slave, one who was lazy for example, was made to wear a wooden collar. The contraption was a marker of his incorrigibility and hindered his movements through narrow streets in case of attempts at escape. A buyer of a collared slave was informed of the number of times he had been sold as incorrigible. After four times as such the slave became candidate for human sacrifice.

Chapter illustration

Fortunate war prisoners could be kept as slaves by their captors rather than being placed in a cage awaiting their turn on the sacrificial block. Traitors were killed at the altar, but their descendants were enslaved for four generations. The poor could sell themselves and their whole families into slavery to stave off hunger and starvation.

Improbably, according to an essay written by scholar Macleod:

gamblers could take a loan, giving their persons as security. Prostitutes could sell themselves for a sum with which to buy finery. [To allow them enough time to spend the amounts received, he/she] did not have to begin their servitude until one year after the date of their receipt of the money paid to them” .

In order to visually differentiate between these social classes ,Aztec had established norms for dressing explained by Timemaps as follows:

The king wore tunics…adorned with the brightly col- oured feathers.. He was bedecked with gold, silver and jade jewelry….The nobility wore brightly col- oured cloaks, as well as jewelry such as … ornaments pierced through the nose and lip….Merchants wore white cotton cloaks…farmers, artisans and labourers were not allowed to wear decorated or coloured clothes… On their feet, the higher ranks of Aztec society [all clas- ses except the lowest who remained bare foot] wore leather or woven sandals.

INCA

Historica background

Chapter illustration

The Inca empire, by 1532 CE in and around the Andes covered parts of present Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia, Chile, and Argentina, or more than 4,000 kms from north to south. A conservative estimate reported by Britannica, puts its population at that time at 12,000,000, from scores of ethnicities, speaking 20 different languages.

When Spain’s conquistadores arrived in the region in the early 1500’s, they discovered cities, palaces, temples, irrigation systems etc. It is, in large part, thanks to their reporting on the culture, practices and edifices if those indigenous people that a great deal about them is known. Ultimately, the Iberians put a violent end to that empire. Currently, the descendants of the Inca constitute nearly half the population of Peru. Theirs is a religion mixing Roman Catholicism with some inherited practices’

It all began around the 1100’s CE when Manco Capac, founder of the Inca dynasty, led his people to the fertile region of Cuzco in the Andes. They pushed away those already there and established a settlement of the same name :Cuzco; the future capital of the Inca empire.

They stayed put till accession of the 9th Sapa Inca(king) Pachacuti Yupanqui (ruled: 1438-1471), who began the Inca expansion in the direction of Lake Titicaca, described earlier. Further, he is said by Britannica, to have been convinced that he had a:

divine mission to bring this true religion to other peo- ples, so that the Inca armies conquered in the name of the creator god… Conquered groups did not have to give up their own religious beliefs; they merely had to wor- ship the Inca god and provide him and his servants with food, land, and labour.

His son, Tupac Yupanqui (ruled 1471-1493) completed Inca conquests. In the words of Ahe Pachacuti, Tupac and their warriors had gone about their business:

Undaunted by the often harsh Andean environment, the Incas conquered people and exploited landscapes in such diverse settings as plains, mountains, deserts, and tropical jungle.

In turn, Historyworld, places the father-son achievements on equal footing with those of Philip and Alexander(the Great) of Macedonia some 1,800 years earlier. As for their tactics of a: “few brutal military victories ….to terrify other petty rulers into cooperation”, they preceded the same practiced by Genghis Khan three centuries later.

But it was not always brute force. Pachacuti and his son also used persuasion, when appropriate, with those they wanted to incorporate in the empire. They sent them valuable gifts and extolled the advantages and benefits of submitting to the Inca.

Unlike the Maya, they had no system of writing. Instead, they communicated by means of knotted lengths of rope, the ‘quipu’. Depending on the number of knots, the intervals between them and colour of the rope, they could, apparently, send word an number messages. To this day no one has succeeded in deciphering the ‘quipu’.

Chapter illustration

How did the vastly outnumbered Incas, no more than 40,000 souls, manage to govern and control the different ethnic groups in the empire? First they brought back to their capital Cuzco the sons of the conquered leaders to teach them the ways of the Inca , before returning them home to rule in their name. Second they set up a civil service system to which were be appointed young commoners from puberty from all corners of the realm. Subject to passing a test of intelligence and aptitude, boys and girls became civil servants and eligible to join Inca nobility and even marry within it. Third, whole Inca families were relocated to annexed regions to begin Inca colonies, not unlike Roman practice, one thousand years earlier, as pointed out by Historyworld.

There was, possibly a fourth reason as to why a few Inca could control the heterogeneous empire. As stated by Smithsonian, it arose from the similarities between Andean cultures vis-à-vis ancestor worship and mummification. So much so, that the Inca brought back to Cuzco the mummies of the conquered most revered ancestors and worshipped them alongside theirs. In return, however, they demanded to be recognized as “the ancestors of all humanity” given their claim of descent from the sun. Furthermore they required of them to:

offer their own sons and daughters to the empire, to be pampered, taught and then sacrificed and planted on sacred mountaintops, where they themselves were naturally preserved.

The Inca built a whole network of roads, estimated at 25,000 kms across the empire complete, in the words of Britannica and others, with: “Many short rock tunnels and vine-supported suspension bridges”.

Admittedly, they were no more than tracks, wide enough for human carriers with ‘quipu’ conveyed messages and loaded llamas. Crucially, however they were kept open throughout the year in the frigid climate of the Andes. Spaced along the roads were relays where couriers and llamas passed on their messages and loads to fresh teams. Traffic was restricted to government business. Unlike the Maya and Aztec there was no trading, to speak of, in Inca society.

As growers, the Inca cultivated some 70 species of plants and many varieties thereof. They included sweet potatoes, maize, chili peppers, cotton, tomatoes, peanuts, an edible root called oca, and a grain known as quinoa. Must not leave out coca leaves which when chewed reduced the sensation of hunger and deadened the feeling of pain. Eating it also invigorated the long distance messengers. Animal domestication was limited to guinea pigs, ducks ,dogs, llamas and their cousins the alpacas.

I want to return, here, to the early discovery of indigenous peoples of the preservation characteristics of the Andean climate, covered earlier. According to the source above, Inca took advantage of this phenomena by building thousands of warehouses():“in ways and places so as to use the tiny differences of exposure to the sun, winds, and humidity”. Some were, naturally, located along the roads already mentioned for the benefit of: “both human and camelid porters, for the army on the move, and priests traveling to the many shrines”.

These structure were put up by masons working with large and heavy stone blocks very accurately placed and matched as to stand solid as a whole piece of masonry without mortar. The capital Cuzco and more particularly the Lost City of Machu Picchu in the jungle bear witness to their skill. Livescience quoting Professor Peter V.N Henderson, writes:

Chapter illustration

craftsmen fitted building stone together perfectly without using any mortar, such that an object as thin as a razor blade could not be inserted between the stones.

Not only were the Incas masters at stone working , they were also skilled weavers of cloth (see image) mainly from cotton and llama wool. Britannica tells of the creation of a textile factory on the shore of Lake Titicaca employing no less than a thousand full time weavers. Even more, impressively:

Chapter illustration

The storehouses, full of thousands of textiles, were one of the wonders frequently mentioned by the early Spaniards.

Cuzco and Machu Picchu

Located at 3,400 m altitude , Cuzco, the capital of the Inca empire was home, at its apogee, to 150,000 inhabitants. It housed palaces, plazas, parklands and fountains. But above all were the magnificent temples, most notably the one of Inti, the sun god and that for Mama Kilya his wife and the moon goddess. And whereas the temple of the former was clad in sheets of gold weighing 1.4 tonnes in total, hers was similarly clad but with silver sheets instead. Today, Cuzco is a Peruvian city of almost 500,000 inhabitants.

Chapter illustration

Then there is Machu Picchu the Lost City of the Inca. At 2,430 m up in the Andes, it remained unknown to the outside world till 1911. Since then, however, archaeologists have established that it was built by Sapa Inca Pachacuti in the 1400’s as his personal estate. It was a century later well into the Spanish colonization. Similarly to Cuzco, it featured irrigation canals, streets and temples. In 1983 it was classified a UNESCO World Heritage Site.

Chapter illustration

Once more, we meet the creation myth we have come across with the Maya and Aztecs. This time god Viracocha created earth, humans and animals, destroyed them all and recreated the same again. Inca’s predominant and prominent god was Inti the Sun. He was followed by the Moon Kilya. A third was the Rain god Apu Illapu.

Inca, too, practiced human sacrifice on special occasions such as the enthronement of a new Sapa Inca, suffered a defeat, in cases of famines etc. At times like these as many as 200 children could be sacrificed. The ‘good news’, however, is that beforehand they were feasted “so that they would not enter the presence of the gods hungry and crying”, in the words of Britannica. Further, Livescience reports on research work carried out in 1999, on the mummies of three sacrificed children. It concluded that for a whole year prior to the fateful day, they were sustained on: “a special diet rich in maize and dried llama meat and were drugged with coca leaves and alcohol”.

Humans apart, pure white llamas were, similarly, put to death for the sun god in particular. The first day of every lunar month saw the sacrifice of 100 of these animals. And daily, maize was thrown onto a fire while priests talked to the sun god thus: “Eat this, Lord Sun… so that you will know that we are your children”.

Unsurprisingly Incas were superstitious. Priests undertook to communicate with the supernatural on behalf of the ordinary folk. They did so in order to diagnose illnesses, anticipate the outcome of battles and decide what sacrifice is propitious. But beforehand they drank a psychedelic concoction so as to be better prepared for the give and take with the gods. How did they go about it? They watched and scrutinized the:

meandering of spiders …the arrangement that coca leaves took in a shallow dish… [and/or] the lungs of a sacrificed white llama.

Like all Andeans, Incas mummified their dead() from the Sapa Inca to the sacrificed humans. The Sapa Inca’s mummified body was regularly taken out of his resting place to be clothed , offered food and consulted on important matters. Dressed in fine apparel he was ceremoniously paraded. One witness’s account goes as follows:

[The royal mummies] were so perfect that they lacked neither hair, eyebrows nor eyelashes. They were in clothes such as they had worn when alive. They were seated …with their arms crossed over heir chests,...I remember touching a finger of the hand of Huayna- Capac. It was hard and rigid, like that of a wooden statue. The bodies weighed so little that any Indian could carry them from house to house in his arms or on his shoulders. They carried them wrapped in white sheets through the streets and squares, the Indians falling to their knees and making reverences with groans and tears.

Chapter illustration

Commoners, following mummification, were buried in a sitting position as the girl in the image, probably sacrificed, found well preserved 500 years thence at over 6,000 m altitude.

Naturally the Sapa Inca ruled from the top of the social ladder. He was a pampered and feared despot. He was assisted by a class of noblemen and aristocrats who ran the administration of the empire.

Early in their lives commoner women from every corner of the empire, known as mamakuna, were recruited to serve the state. The prettiest were taken into the harem of the Sapa Inca or given in political and strategic marriages or wed to soldiers who hadfared well inwar. The majority, however went either into the service of temples as priestesses, or were employed at weaving cloth and making beer from maize.

Peasants were given plots of land large enough to produce their and their families’ needs. In return they worked the lands of the elite and on road construction. They could not climb the social ladder but hoped, instead, to see the day when one or more of their children passed the civil servant test and entered the empire’s administration.

We conclude with the words of Associate Professor Gordon F. McEwan quoted by Livescience:

Each citizen of the empire was issued the necessities of life out of the state storehouses, including food, tools, raw materials, and clothing, and needed to purchase nothing.

And with this statement in Nwe:

Although workers were considered the lowest social class, they were entitled to a modicum of what today we call due process, and all classes were equally subject to the rule of law… Work was obligatory and…beggars did not exist.

CLOSING THOUGHTS

Let’s repeat. It is acknowledged that the civilizations of the Maya, Aztec and Inca are on a par with those of Mesopotamia, Egypt and others in the great Eurasian land mass, albeit later on the time scale of human history.

What is extraordinary, however, is that the Americans developed in complete isolation totally ignorant of any world other than theirs. Even more extraordinary is that the Mesoamericans were never in contact with the Andeans and vice-versa.

And yet the civilizational trajectories followed by both are strikingly similar to those at the other end of the world. Like them they graduated from hunter-gatherers to settled communities growing their food and domesticating whichever domesticable wild animals they found in their ecosystem. They built cities like theirs and grand edifices , temples and pyramids and weaved good quality cloth. They adopted similar political, social and religious systems. Like them they were ruled by god appointed kings, had a powerful priesthood, and elites who exploited peasants and slaves. Finally, they worshipped gods just as capricious, demanding and cruel as theirs.

Quite extraordinary, don’t you think?

Pre Islamic Peoples of Arabia

PRE-ISLAMIC PEOPLES OF ARABIA.

PRE-ISLAMIC PEOPLES OF ARABIA.

Short introduction

As its title states, this narrative describes the many aspects of life of the peoples dwelling in the Arabian Peninsula in the centuries preceding the dawning of Islam in the early seventh century CE. This pre-Islamic period is commonly known as ‘Al-Jahilyya’- (الجاهلية).

Archaeologists have determined that humans first settled the Peninsula some 120,000 years. Fast forward to about 2000 BCE, a sedentary agricultural society arose in the Yemen, in its southern part .

I have based my information for this narrative on the following sources: *Arabian religion. Encyclopaedia Britannica. *History of Islam. historyofislam.org *Pre- Islamic Arabia. Lumen Learning. *Pre-Islamic Arabia-Michael Lecker. *Religion in pre-Islamic Arabia. Wikipedia.

Clearly, all five above have taken their own information from the works of scholars who, themselves, have searched primary sources of which, I shall now identify a few.

We begin with the verses in the Holy Qur’an relevant to pre-Islamic worships.

Secondly, there is the early Arab tradition of oral poetry. What has endured of it, is a record of sorts of the habits, beliefs etc. of the poets and their contemporaries,

Thirdly, archaeologists have located thousands of pre-Islamic rock engravings here and there, on the Peninsula, chronicling various events which took place on the Land..

Fourthly, early Muslim authors have written about Al-Jahiliyya. Noteworthy, in this context, is ‘the Book of Idols’-( كتاب الأصنام) by Arab historian Hisham ibn- al-Kalbi (737–819), considered to be the “most substantial treatment of the religious practices of pre-Islamic Arabia”. Another is the Yemini historian al-Hasan al-Hamdani (893-947) who wrote about “South Arabian religious beliefs”.

Lastly, non-Arabs such as contemporaneous Byzantine and Persian chroniclers wrote about their neighbours. Earlier, during Antiquity, pre-Islamic Arabia was mentioned in the works of historians Herodotus and Diodorus Siculus, from Greece and Jewish/Roman Josephus Flavius who, respectively, lived in the 5th and 1st centuries BCE and in the first century CE. And, also in the writings of Alexandrian Claudius Ptolemy in the 2nd century CE.

Pre-Islamic Arabian society.

As is widely known, pre-Islamic society was tribal. Some tribes were nomadic, its members roaming the desert with their herds of sheep, goats and camels, in search of pastures. In return, the animals supplied their owners and their families with their sustenance and livlihood. They lived in precarious easy-to- dismantle and rebuild shelters grouped in kin-related clans within a second degree kin-related tribes.

It was a harsh difficult life. We have a description of these bedouins in the writing of a Byzantine historian who met them in the 4th century CE. He said of them “[un] desirable as friends and enemies…are warriors of equal rank, half nude…ranging widely with the help of swift horses and slender camels in time of peace or of disorder…Their life is always on the move… laid waste [destroyed] whatever they have caught sight of…”

Other tribes were oasis and town dwellers cultivating lands and engaged in trading. The best known were Mecca and Yathrib-(later Medina)-, both located in the Hejaz region in the west of the Peninsula next to the Red Sea.

Belonging to a tribe meant, for an individual, an acknowledged identity, security and protection. Each tribe had a titular chief or ‘shaykh’. He was a respected and trusted senior member of the community. Otherwise, he was equal to all other tribesmen with no privileges. As described by historyofislam.org, he “was only primus inter pares… expected to give support and to set an example but not to compel”.

Life in the difficult environment of the Arabian Peninsula dictated that all, whether sedentary or nomads, had an agreed upon code of conduct. According to Pakistani Islamic philosopher, Fazlur Rahman Malik (1919-1988): “This code encompassed… hospitality, honouring one's promises and pacts, and vengeance…”. Must add here, the code also valued courage and the protection and defence of the weak and orphan.

A tribal family was patriarchal. The authority of its senior male member extended over all others. In particular, he controlled the status and future of female elements. Baby girls were sometimes killed at birth “if they were considered a liability”.

A serious offence committed within a tribe resulted in the ostracism of the offender. “It meant [that shedding of his] blood was licit”. As for adultery, those involved were stoned. And a thief’s hand was chopped off. Apparently, stoning and cutting off hands came down from the ancient civilizations in Mesopotamia.

Appreciation of poetry was a unifying trait among all in the Peninsula. Recitation of verses took place within tribes and at festivals such as the one in ‘Ukaz.

Intertribal conflict was endemic. Raids and counter raids were almost perpetual. According to historyofislam.org it was a matter of reciprocity: “a slain for our slain, a prisoner for each of us captured …for captive women, captive women etc…blood for blood” .

Mecca was an important trade centre with large camel caravans transporting goods to and from Syria and Iraq. One of Mecca’s most consequential tribe was Quraysh. Not only did it prosper through trade, it also, by the 5th century, made itself the custodian of Ka’ba and controlled the seasonal pilgrimage to it, as we shall see hereinafter. More, Quraysh was involved in farming. Since Meccan soil was not really suitable they, instead, established large agricultural estates in places like Ta’if. They sold the produce in Mecca.

Yathrib-(later Medina)-,for its part was a centre of agricultural activity because of its arable land .It also contributed to thriving trading for being a place of transit along the routes of caravans.

Imported religions

Judaism was the first monotheistic religion to arrive in the Arabian Peninsula. They came with the Romans who conquered the eastern shores of the Mediterranean Sea in the early second century CE. In due course, Jews in Arabia spoke both the local language and Hebrew.

By the sixth century, Judaism had succeeded in spreading to the Hejaz among the nomadic as well as the sedentary populations, some of whom converted to the new monotheistic faith. Several tribes adopted the new religion in order to be allowed to live in the towns dominated by Jews. All in all, by the time of Islam’s arrival, there were twenty converted tribes.

Judaism became well established within the communities of the town of Yathrib-(later Medina). Its proselytization activity was such that some women accepted to make their children Jews if the conversion improved their chances of survival.

An important development for Judaism was its adoption in the 4th century by the Himyarite kings-(ruled from 110 BCE to 525 CE)- of what is currently the Yemen. It follows that their citizens too converted, it only in appearance.

The introduction of Christianity, and the conversion of many tribes in the Arabian Peninsula was the work of traders and missionaries from the Byzantine Empire through its ally the Arab, Christian Ghassanid dynasty. There was also another source of Christianity, from the kingdom pf Axum across the Red Sea in what is currently Ethiopia-( See also my earlier narrative ‘Africa-the land and its peoples’).

Zoroastrianism was the foremost religion of the Sassanian Empire-(Persia)- to the east of the Peninsula. As was the case with the Ghassanids and the Byzantines, the Persians could rely on the Lakhmids, another Arab tribal dynasty. Some locals in the north-eastern Arabia did convert to Zoroastrianism, but the religion was mostly practiced by Persian expatriates.

Indigenous Religion.

Up to the revelation of Islam, in the early 7th century, the great majority of the populations of the Arabian Peninsula, whether nomadic or settled, were polytheistic pagans. And yet they believed they descended from Ismail son of Ibrahim-(Abraham for the Jews). It is noteworthy that they circumcised their sons at the age of 13 “because Isma’il…was circumcised at that age”, wrote historian Flavius identified in the Introduction. Nearer our time, German scholar and orientalist , Julius Wellhausen (1844-1918) confirms that“circumcision was common among pre-Islamic Arabs”.

‘Al-Jahilyya’ Arabs believed in a multitude of gods and goddesses represented by idols -(physical representations of adeities)- which could simply be no more than “raw unpolished stones” in the words of historyofislam.org . Whatever, there were tribal statues and shrines called ‘haram’.

And there was the Ka’ba in Mecca, the greatest ‘haram’ of them all. Considered holy by all tribes, it housed 360 idols. The most revered god was ‘Hubal’. He was represented by a large human-like statue made from ‘red agate’ stone. As we have already seen , the tribe of Quraysh, was in control of Ka’ba.

Unexpectedly, perhaps, Allah was the name of an omnipotent deity. According to Wellhausen “Allah was known from Jewish and Christian sources and was known to pagan Arabs as the supreme god…”. Suffices to recall that the Prophet’s “father's name was ʿAbd-Allāh”.

It is remarkable that the prominence of this Meccan ‘‘haram’ dates back to the first century BCE-(six century before Islam)-as evidence by the writings of Diodorus Siculus, identified in the Introduction, about a “ temple… which is very holy and exceedingly revered by all Arabians.”

Next to their gods, pagan Arabs strongly believed in Fate (قدر ). So much so that the orientalist and professor Alan Jones (1933-2021) considered that they believed that all the rituals performed at the divine shrines do not affect Fate. For this, they relied on divinations to gain knowledge of what the future may have in store for them. For this, they had recourse to on soothsayers-(عرّاف).

It is in this context that Arabs went to god Hubal to be enlightened about momentous decisions with the help of the“…divination Arrows” placed next to his statue. When tribesmen needed to ascertain the lineage and legitimacy of a newborn, or if a boy is to be circumcised, or whether a journey is to be taken or how a disagreement is to be settled. Or, in the rare occasion, whom of one’s sons to sacrifice etc…they would get into Hubal presence “with a hundred dirhams and a sacrificial animal and would cast the arrows of Hubal and [depending on how they landed] … know what their conduct should be”. It is astounding that no less than the destiny and life and death of an individual depended on a throw of the dice.

Arabs also believed in the power of Jinns defined by Britannica as “a spirit inhabiting the earth but unseen by humans, capable of assuming various forms and exercising extraordinary powers”.

Obviously, the difference in the way of living between the nomadic bedouins and the sedentary residents of, say, Mecca, imposed differences in the daily practices and rites of worship. For instance, when a roaming herder interrupted his journey, he picked up four stones ,selected the best looking one and worshipped it for the duration of his stay. But a Meccan family had its in-house shrine and idols. Touching them was the last thing a family member did before going out and his first action upon returning.

Pre-Islamic Arabs went on a yearly pilgrimage to the ‘haram’ in Mecca. It took place during a predetermined period of four months called ‘holy truce’ during which all tribes desisted from fighting among themselves. In addition to the religious aspects of the pilgrimage, Arabs took time to participate in poetry competitions, trade and generally get to meet others.

Noteworthy are the similarities between of rites practiced by pre-Muslims during that yearly pilgrimage and the rituals of present day Hajj. They include the ‘tawaf’ around the Ka’ba, stoning of ‘Iblis’, drinking of the water from Zamzam Well and the sacrificing of domestic animals.

Incidentally, unlike in other civilizations, human sacrifice was not common among Arabian pagans. This said, it did take place occasionally. Those immolated were “generally prisoners of war, who represented the god's part of the victory in booty”, according to Wikipedia.

Part IV: Faiths and Mythologies

Cruel Deities

CRUEL DEITIES OCTOBER, 2015

REVISED AND ABRIDGED NOVEMBER, 2016

Chapter illustration

Aztec sacrificial altar

Final proof reading: 12.11.2016.

LET us begin with the succinct words of Assistant professor of African history, E.Y. Mbogoni: “Since time immemorial, human beings the world over have sought answers to the vexing questions of their origins, sickness, death and after death; the meaning of natural phenomena such as earthquakes, eclipses of the sun and moon, birth of twins etc. and how to protect themselves from such mysterious events. They invented God and gods and the occult sciences (witch craft, divination and soothsaying) in order to seek the protection of supernatural powers while individuals used them to gain power to dominate others and to accumulate wealth. Human sacrifice was one way in which they sought to expiate the gods for what they believed were punishments for their transgressions”.

In what follows, we shall come across retainer sacrifice, meaning group entombment with a departed king to keep him company in the afterlife. Alternatively or, possibly simultaneously, people were disposed of on the ‘joyous’ accession of the new monarch. Humans were slaughtered and their remains dispersed over fields in the hope of good harvests. Finally, humans were gruesomely butchered simply to please the pleasing the gods and even for mere entertainment. And more.

Death Does Not Do Us Part

IN both ancient Egypt and Mesopotamia they practiced retainer sacrifice. When kings and other important people died, they took with them into their graves various companions to serve and entertain them in the after life. The Egyptians poisoned selected court officials and servants before burying them with their master. In addition to these , the Mesopotamians also sent along musician and social elites. Discovered skulls seen to indicate that the latter were first bludgeoned to death first.

RETAINER sacrifice was also the practice on the the African continent. Additionally, however, ritual killings took place in memory of long gone kings and ancestors. In the Asante Kingdom of Ghana, for example, the kings and religious leaders offered human sacrifices in memory of dead ancestors to seek their protection against enemies. Further, prior to a war people volunteered to be sacrificed to increase the odds of victory. Indeed, in other African polities, there were even advertisements in local papers indicating the wide belief of common people in human sacrifice practices.

A ceremony, the ‘Grand Custom’, in the kingdom of Dahomey (today

Benin), routinely took place every time a monarch passed away. It involved the slaughter of thousands in his honour. Its horrors are described in an article printed on 27th August 1860, in the NY Times, itself quoting the African Herald as follows: “His Majesty BADAHUNG, King of Dahomey, is about to make the 'Grand Custom' in honor of the late King GEZO. Determined to surpass all former monarchs in the magnitude of the ceremonies to be performed on this occasion, BADAHUNG has made the most extensive preparations for the celebration of the Grand Custom. A great pit has been dug, which is to contain human blood enough to float a canoe. Two thousand persons will be sacrificed on this occasion. The expedition to Abeakouta is postponed, but the King has sent his army to make some excursions at the expense of some weaker tribes, and has succeeded in capturing many unfortunate creatures. The young people among these prisoners will be sold into slavery, and: the old persons will be killed at the Grand Custom”.

IN the Europe of the first millennium CE, both Gauls(French) and Britons practiced retainer sacrifice, similarly to the ancient Egyptians. Slaves and other dependents of the high ranking deceased accompanied his body onto the pyre or in the tomb.

The Vikings , for their part, buried women with their dead soldiers in the belief that they would become their wives in Valhalla(Hall of the Fallen), and when a chief died one of his female slaves volunteered to go with him. One account of such an event in 921CE says: “The dead man's slave girls were asked who wished to die with him; one volunteered to be burned in his ship with him... When she went to her death the men began to strike with the sticks on the shields so that her cries could not be heard and the other slave-girls would not be frightened and seek to escape death with their masters... a dagger was plunged between her ribs repeatedly, and the men strangled her with the cord until she was dead... The flames grew and engulfed the pyre and the ship”.

BUT the most remarkable of all is the case of the first emperor of unified China in 221 BCE. He had a mausoleum built for his afterlife in which went along with him, in due course, the usual retainers and an army of life size terra cotta officers and soldiers(8,000), horses (520) and chariots (150). Even more remarkable is that no two soldiers have the same facial features. They are furthermore, lined up military fashion and in accordance to ranks.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Sadistic Gods ,Kings and People.

CARTHAGE, in today’s Tunis, was originally set up as a Phoenician colony/trading station and from the 8th century BCE had become a dominant power on the Mediterranean Sea.

For many centuries, until our own, stories by contemporary Greeks and Romans of Carthaginians sacrificing their children at the altars of the gods, remained a controversy between historians and other scholars. Some even thought these accounts were nothing more than slanderous publicity to discredit the Carthaginians.

But an article in the Guardian of 21st January 2014, reports on a study by Josephine Quinn, a lecturer in ancient history, and an international team of peers who had carried out intensive investigations of the burial sites of Carthage and found evidence that the Romans and Greeks were telling the truth. The scholars were thus implying that the statement made contemporaneously by the Roman historian Diodorus that: “There was in their city a bronze image of Cronus, extending its hands, palms up and sloping towards the ground, so that each of the children when placed thereon rolled down and fell into a sort of gaping pit filled with fire”, was accurate. In Ms Quinn and her team’s words: “[from] all the evidence – archaeological, epigraphic and literary – it is overwhelming and, we believe, conclusive: they did kill their children….The inscriptions are unequivocal: time and again we find the explanation that the gods heard my voice and blessed me”.

Chapter illustration

IN Roman times when momentous circumstances arose, Rome’s gods demanded ritual killings of people. On three occasions, in 228,216 and 113 BCE, extraordinary incomprehensible events led priests after consultation of the holy scriptures, to order the burying alive of two couples one Greek the other Gaul. This being considered auspicious to restoration of normality

More. Vestal Virgins (image), priestesses in the temple of the goddess Vesta, were buried alive for breaking their vows of chastity. As such, they had become impure and contaminated the religious services they had officiated at, thus arousing the wrath of the gods.

Chapter illustration

Last, there was the calamity of the presence of an androgynous child (with both male and female characteristics), dealt with by his/her removal from Roman territories and indeed from the world. He/she was enclosed in a coffer and submerged in the sea.

Must not leave out the infamous gladiator combats. They took place, over nearly 700 years (264 BCE-404 CE) in large open arenas, such as the Coliseum in Rome City. Not unlike present day football games, they were attended by enthusiastic Caesars, aristocrats and commoners. According to professor Kathleen Coleman quoted by the BBC in 2011: “The ancient Romans are often seen as bringing civilisation to the western world, but they regarded the slaying of gladiators as a normal form of entertainment…[ this entertainment] epitomises the depths to which the Roman Empire was capable of sinking…Hardly any contemporary voices questioned the morality of staging gladiatorial combat . She further says: “the ‘contagion of the throng’ may aptly describe the thrill that the Roman spectators experienced in the Colosseum, [it] does not explain why their communal reaction was pleasure instead of revulsion or horror”.

The Coliseum and other arenas were also venues for the contests between condemned men and beasts. Roman poet Marcus Valerius Martialis, in 80 CE described the agony of a man on a cross being simultaneously mauled by a bear: “though the parts dripped gore, and in all his body was nowhere a body's shape”.

In the words of an author reviewed in the NY Times: “No people before or since have so reveled in displays of mortal combat as did the Romans during the last two centuries B.C. and the first three centuries thereafter, nor derived such pleasure from spectacles in which slaves and convicts were exposed to wild beasts and killed in front of cheering spectators”.

ADDITIONALLY to retainer sacrifice, archaeological investigations have revealed that early Europeans killed people for other reasons too, as evidenced by the well preserved human remains in peat bogs (wet spongy ground of decomposing vegetation) in Germany, Denmark, Holland and Britain. A great many of those show signs of physical defects such as deformed spines or shorter limbs. All appear to have died as a result of having had their throats slit, or of a heavy blow on the back of heads or by strangulation/hanging (the noose still around necks).

None other than Julius Caesar and other Romans, who invaded Gaul (France), Germany and Britain from 58 BCE onward, have chronicled that the Germans disposed of all their misfits and outcasts, such as cowards and those of disrepute, in peat bogs. That “they also used to strike a human being, devoted to death, in the back with a sword, and then divine from his death struggle”. As for the Gauls, the Romans also report that they “kill a man by a knife-stab in the region above the midriff, and after his fall they foretell the future by the convulsions of his limbs and the pouring of his blood”. Finally, one of their most mentioned methods was to place the victims inside huge wicker human-like figures and then burn the lot (image). The victims of choice were usually criminals but in cases of urgency, if no criminals were available, those in charge had no qualms turning to innocent people.

Chapter illustration

The authors of a 1998 publication by the ‘Council of British Archaeology’ explained that human sacrifices occurred “at critical times, for example, to avert famine, epidemic, the death of a leader or defeat in battle, to propitiate the supernatural forces for a plentiful harvest, victory, the negotiation of an alliance or to give especial thanks”.

Blessed Harvests.

‘THE Golden Bough’ is the title of book in which Scottish anthropologist, Sir James George Frazer (1854-1941) relates the following with respect to Africa: a-“A West African queen used to sacrifice a man and woman in the month of March. They were killed with spades and hoes, and their bodies buried in the middle of a field which had just been tilled”. b-“At Lagos in Guinea it was the custom annually to impale a young girl alive soon after the spring equinox in order to secure good crops. Along with her were sacrificed sheep and goats, which, with yams, heads of maize, and plantains, were hung on stakes on each side of her”. c-“A similar sacrifice used to be annually offered at Benin, in Guinea. The Marimos, a Bechuana tribe, sacrifice a human being for the crops. The victim chosen is generally a short, stout man. He is seized by violence or intoxicated and taken to the fields, where he is killed amongst the wheat to serve as “seed”. After his blood has coagulated in the sun, it is burned along with the frontal bone, the flesh attached to it, and the brain; the ashes are then scattered over the ground to fertilise it. The rest of the body is eaten”.

SCHOLARS have dated the beginnings of human sacrifice, in India, to 500 BCE. It lasted well into late 19th century. Although people in India were ritually killed in the context of winning wars and for the dedications of important edifices, it appears that most frequently human sacrifice was practiced as a prayer for bountiful crops. The same Sir James George Frazer, introduced above, describes some practices there as follows: a-Some primitive tribes chopped off the heads, hands and feet of strangers they encountered, placed them on poles which then were planted in their fields in the hope of a great harvest. Or they may skin a boy alive then cut him up in pieces for distribution to villagers who placed them in corn bins to avert bad luck and ensure good crops. It is noteworthy that the perpetrators bore no malice whatsoever toward their victims. b-Others, in search of candidates to offer their goddess to entice her to yield good crops, sent their man-hunters on the rampage during the months of April and May. When a victim was located he had his throat cut and his ring finger and nose carried off to the deity’s abode.

Let us now turn to the notorious and, mutually antagonistic, Khond tribes of eastern India’s state of Orissa. Numbering a few hundred thousand in the middle 1800s, these agrarian communities shocked the British colonial authorities with the cruelty of their human sacrifice practices.

In order to fertilize their fields, they bought their victims called ‘meriah’, preferably from non- Khond villages, to be killed at the end of a three- day long raucous festive ceremony to which the other Khond communities sent representatives. For reasons beyond the scope of this narrative, it was important that a ‘good’ price be paid for the meriah (who could be male or female and of any age) or else the sacrifice would not be accepted.

According to one who witnessed the happenings in one such ceremony: “On this day the sponsoring Kond village’s head brought the meriah, intoxicated with alcohol or opium, to a spot previously appointed for the sacrifice. …. the priest gave the word, and the crowd throws itself upon the sacrifice and strips the flesh from the bones, leaving untouched the head and intestines”. The pieces were then distributed among the villagers for placing in their fields. Further, the representatives of the other Khond communities were also given one piece each to take back to their villages as evidence that the sacrifice had taken place and, in turn , for the fertilization of their fields.

WE shall be looking at ritual killings in the Americas later. For now, however, let us consider the practice of the Pawnee Indians of the Great Plains of North America. Their belief was that in order to obtain a good harvest a maiden from an enemy village had to be sacrificed before sowing. This annual ceremony was witnessed in 1837 by a trader who reported that: “The girl was fourteen or fifteen years old and had been kept for six months and well treated….On the twenty-second of April she was taken out to be sacrificed.…. her body having been painted half red and half black, she was attached to a sort of gibbet and roasted for some time over a slow fire, then shot to death with arrows. The chief sacrificer next tore out her heart and devoured it. While her flesh was still warm it was cut in small pieces from the bones, put in little baskets, and taken to a neighbouring corn-field. There the head chief took a piece of the flesh from a basket and squeezed a drop of blood upon the newly-deposited grains of corn. His example was followed by the rest, till all the seed had been sprinkled with the blood; it was then covered up with earth….the body of the victim was reduced to a kind of paste, which was rubbed or sprinkled not only on the maize but also on the potatoes, the beans, and other seeds to fertilise them. By this sacrifice they hoped to obtain plentiful crops”.

BY other Indians, I mean the indigenous inhabitants of North America, popularly known as ‘Red Indians’ , the Mayas in today Mexico, Guatemala and Belize, the Aztecs in Mexico and the Incas in the Andes Mountains along the Pacific coast of South America, notably Peru. By the onset of Europeans immigration early in the 16th century, the Maya civilization had already declined on its own. But the other three were flourishing polities, with the Aztec and Inca’s, called empires. Within a relatively short time, however, the new arrivals had reduced the North American Indians to an inconsequent entity and relegated them to reservations. For their parts, the Aztec and Inca civilizations did not survive their contact with the Spanish. Within a century they had both practically decimated.

EVIDENCE from archaeological excavations and settlers accounts point to the existence of human sacrifice in today’s Canada and the United States, albeit nowhere near the scale of the Aztec sacrifices. Even so, archaeologists have found that those natives in the southern parts, i.e nearer Mexico, the Aztec realm, were more active with the practice.

The recent discovery of Cahokia, ‘Ancient America’s Great City’ on the Mississippi’, has revealed a practice described thus: “Cahokians performed human sacrifice, as part of some kind of theatrical, community-wide ceremony on a startlingly large scale. …Simultaneous burials of as many as 53 young women (quite possibly selected for their beauty) have been uncovered beneath Cahokia’s mounds, and in some cases victims were evidently clubbed to death on the edge of a burial pit, and then fell into it. A few of them weren’t dead yet when they went into the pit — skeletons have been found with their phalanges, or finger bones, digging into the layer of sand beneath them”.

Chapter illustration

Also in Cahokia, were discovered many burial mounds. In one, in particular, archaeologists found the skeletons of 52 humans beneath the royal tomb showing no signs of violence; it was, hence, presumed that they were strangled. However,off to the side were the skeletons of many young men clearly violently killed.

Chapter illustration

In contrast, further north, most Indian tribes eschewed torture or killing of elderly people, women and children from the enemy camp, and in fact of anyone who was not a worthy opponent in battle. Instead their captives were enslaved. But unlike the slavery practiced by the Whites, theirs was temporary in that, if not the slave himself at least his offspring, in time, joined the tribal society as free men and women.

ARCHAEOLOGY and the decipherment of the hieroglyphic Maya writings have revealed that they worshipped the sun, moon, rain and corn. They believed that their deities needed to be nourished with human blood. Hence torture and human sacrifice became integral parts of their culture. Indeed, even their priests, who were responsible for organizing the cycles of ceremonies and rituals, and their kings practiced self torture and bloodletting in honor of the gods. The Maya further believed that neglecting to shed blood would bring the wrath of the deities in the form of infertility, cosmic disasters and other calamities.

It is also probable, according to some historians, that human sacrifice was practiced to keep social order and society’s stratification; or preceding the sitting of a new king on the ground that it elevated his status toward that of the gods and thus put him above ordinary mortals; or by elites, privately, in the context of the building or expansion of their houses, in solicitation of the blessings of the gods.

As Maya cities constantly warred between themselves, the most prized sacrificial candidates were the kings and aristocrats of the defeated sides. Following capture, they were then customarily tortured, mutilated and sacrificed.

How did the Maya go about it? It appears they had many choices some of which quite exotic. Consider these: a-According to one source a victim could be decapitated, disarticulated and/or de-fleshed. b-Still another claims that the candidate could be tied to a stake, have blood drawn from his genitals for smearing onto the image of a deity, and finished off as a target for archers aiming at his heart, clearly marked with paint on the chest. c-The victim could have his heart extracted (see Aztec later) or be disemboweled. d-Or be tied up ball-like and kicked about Mesoamerican ball game fashion or thrown down a sinkhole or be entombed with a master.

In conclusion, according to Hope Kron of the University of Western Ontario, herself quoting others: “Overall, it can be said that human sacrifice among the Maya was performed for reasons of societal need or misfortune, as part of a life event ritual among the elites, as part of a war victory ritual, or for political reasons” .

FOR the Aztecs, possibly the most vicious adherents to ritual killing ever, this deed was almost a daily requirement. Worshipping the sun, they believed it constantly needed nourishment in the form of human blood in order to complete its daily journey across the heavens. Hence they continually raided other tribes in quest for human sacrifice victims.

They took their victims to temples atop pyramids (opening image), where they cut out their still beating hearts and let the blood run down the steps. As described by an eyewitness: “The victim was led to the altar at the top of the pyramid, stretched across a stone by three priests who held his limbs, while a fourth ripped out the living heart, holding it up so that the spraying blood might spatter about--it was a definite honor to be sprayed with the blood, one that the priests reserved for themselves and visiting dignitaries”. The body minus the heart was then flung down the steps, “perhaps as a rough and ready form of tenderizing the meat. The trunk and limbs would be severed, and the tenderest parts, the thighs and the hands reserved for ritual feasting. Moctezuma [the emperor] was said to be partial to the thighs of young men, served with a nice tomato and chili pepper sauce”. This anthropophagic appetite has been explained by some as arising from the crave of the Aztec for animal protein of which they had none, since they raised no livestock.

Chapter illustration

More. On some occasions thousands were sacrificed; so much so that “the pyramids glistened black with blood--a sign of great power and energy for that is how the sun god drank…and great mounds of skulls grew up”. Cutting out beating hearts was not their only sacrificial practice. Indeed, when temples were erected hundreds of soldiers were killed and buried in the foundations.So much so, it has been reported that: “For the re-consecration of the Great Pyramid of Tenochtitlan [their capital] in 1487, the Aztecs reported that they killed about 80,400 prisoners over the course of four days”.

SIMILARLY to their contemporaries, the Incas also venerated and worshipped the sun and others.

Based on the findings of archaeologists and the accounts of Spanish chroniclers , the sacrifice ceremony known as ‘Capacocha’ had many causes: religious, political and economic .To begin with, the ‘Great Inca’ (emperor) ordered ‘Capacocha’ sacrifices to enhance his status among his own people and neighbours alike; or as his reward for helping a local lord as reported by one Spanish account “….the sacrifice of a local lord’s daughter in exchange for the Inca’s assistance with a canal construction project…”. There were, of course other causes, such as: a-To avert catastrophes such as earthquakes, drought and volcanic eruptions and in times of stress such as rebellions. b-On the death of a Great Inca and the coronation of the next; as well as to celebrate the birth of an imperial infant. c-To commemorate victories or other similar events.

When they were not sacrificing llamas (camel-like but smaller) at the Capacocha ceremony the Inca were doing so with healthy boys and girls between 5 and 15 years of age. The selection of the children had both political and social facets. Regions and localities of the empire were assigned quotas to be delivered ahead of the Ceremony. At times, regions voluntarily sent sacrificial candidates to curry favours with the Great Inca. Or the chidren were selected, finally, on the basis of the statuses of their fathers. The preference for children was the result of the Inca belief that their purity was more pleasing to the gods. And if in addition they were of elite descent, then so much the better.

The cruel end of the children was quite violent. Prior to the date of a ‘Capacocha’ ceremony, the well fed, well dressed children were taken to meet the Great Inca to be feasted by him. They were then marched up the Andes Mountains, a long and arduous journey, taking them to the summits where they arrived exhausted. Once there, the boys and girls were drugged before being, variously, buried alive, strangled, asphyxiated or hit on the back of the head. Archaeologists examining their well-preserved remains (because of the frigid climate of the Andes Mountains), have found traces of vomit and fecal matter on their clothing, proving, if proof was needed, that the children were terrified, despite the drugging.

And You Thought It Was All In The Past.

A report dated September 2012 in the ‘Human Rights Brief’ of the ‘Center

for Human Rights and Humanitarian Law’ speaks of the rampant human sacrifice practices, in the 21st century, in several African countries. The would be victims are vulnerable people including children, women and those with defects and disabilities. They are captured, killed and mutilated all in the belief that human parts have medicinal values as well as possessing supernatural powers to bring success and prosperity.

An article in ‘The New Observer’ of 30th May, 2013 tells of the killings of African albinos in Tanzania. Because of their peculiarity they are sought after, by witch doctors, for their body parts such as eyes, internal organs and skin claimed to have curative powers. The paper adds: “It is believed that if a body part is cut while the victim is still alive, the increased pain makes the ‘muti’ all the more powerful”.

Unsurprisingly, this practice is not limited to Tanzania alone, but involves several other countries including South Africa where it “was first recorded by the early European settlers during the seventeenth century when small European groups were attacked and their sexual organs cut off by black attackers… In South Africa, Albino-generated ‘medicine’ is viewed as a cure to all manner of problems, which vary from impotency to becoming invisible to the police.

Another article in the ‘Mail Online’ on 15th June 2015, is headlined “Snatched on their way to school then castrated or decapitated” tells of: a- [A] “Horrifying rise in child human sacrifice in Uganda at the hands of witch doctors. b-Witch doctors [convincing] the rich that 'sacrifices' will increase their wealth. c-Businessmen [paying] them 'thousands of pounds' to mutilate young children. d-[The children] left to die after their genitals are removed, their heads sliced open”.

NO one doubts that today’s India is a secular, democratic country aspiring to become an economic world power. Unfortunately however, there still are tribal regions where people continue to believe in superstitious absurdities of yore. Among them, sadly, is the ritual killing of humans as reported hereinafter.

The’ Washington Post’ on 29th November, 2003 told of a farm worker and his wife who, desperate for a son despite many attempts, sought the advice of their tantric. (The latter being a practitioner of the ancient spiritual art of Tantrism defined as “a movement within Hinduism combining magical and mystical elements and with sacred writings of its own”. Depravedly, tantriks advertise for their ‘business’ in local newspapers and on television broadcasts).

Acting on his instructions, the couple kidnapped the 6-year old son of their neighbour and, with the tantrik officiating, proceeded to mutilate and kill the child on the bank of an irrigation canal. This fertility ritual was completed only after the mother- to-be had washed in the victim’s blood. The paper, quoting ‘The Hindustan Times’, reported that this was the 26th human sacrifice in that region of Uttar Pradesh in the previous six months.

AND on 2nd January, 2012 CBS News reported on the arrest of two men in Chhattisgarh for cutting out the liver of a 7-year old girl to offer her to their gods in the hope of a good harvest. This account ends with the statement: “… A deep belief in traditional healers, or witch doctors, is common in mostly tribal Chhattisgarh”.

IN Muslim Bangladesh a brick making worker was beheaded by his co-workers on the orders of the business owners who, wishing for redder bricks, consulted a fortune teller who recommended a human sacrifice to help obtain the brick colour desired (Mail Online, 22nd March, 2010).

“WE were asking for calm in the sea and on the earth” is what Mapuchi Indians in Chile told police after their arrest. They had beaten to death a 6-year old boy, cut out his heart and offered it to the Pacific Ocean in order to placate the gods who were causing earthquakes and other natural disasters . Revealingly the judge, upon releasing the perpetrators after a short stay in prison of two years, commented that they had “acted without free will, driven by an irresistible natural force of ancestral tradition” (from TIME, 4th July 1960).

FINALLY, CNN on 27th July 2015 reports that in Nepal, following consultation with priests a 10-year old boy was “taken to a temple on the outskirts of the village, where they performed a religious ritual. He was then taken to a field nearby, where three people held him down as another slit his throat. When police found him, the boy's head was almost severed from his body”.

HAVING read all this, our first reaction is to, probably, agree with Josephine Quinn’s conclusion in her Carthaginian human sacrifice study: “We like to think that we're quite close to the ancient world, that they were really just like us – the truth is, I'm afraid, that they really weren't”.

Yet, then, we realize that those bygone civilization must have been so overwhelmed, intimidated, and awed by the power and consequences of natural phenomena around them, not to mention their constant preoccupation with the mysteries of the afterlife that they, understandably, felt they had to do their utmost to appease these supernatural forces controlling their lives. At what is more ‘utmost’ than human life. In the words of E. Y. Mbogony, introduced hereinbefore: “If you believe what they[the Aztec] did, that the sun needed a daily ration of human blood, then humans had to be sacrificed to the sun. It was a tough job, in other words, but somebody had to do it……The victims, some say, were well cared for and honored before their deaths and they were not individuals in our modern western sense--they were honored themselves to be chosen, to do their bit, as it were, to keep the sun going for the rest of humanity”.

Does our species in the 20th and 21st centuries differ in this respect? Not so, according to some scholars. For example, Professor Roberta M. Harding contends that “… judicially sanctioned executions [death sentences] demonstrate how capital punishment contains a subtext that renders the administration of the death penalty another means of effectuating the sacrifice of humans….the passage of time has not resulted in the cessation of the archaic practice of human immolation”. And Professor Hans Von Hentig, early in the 20th century stated his conviction this way: “…capital punishment's stronghold in our life is its mystic necessity, an inheritance of long past centuries, whose traces have not yet been completely removed from our brain”.

Others see parallels, in the contemporary approval of violence and the

enjoyment of it, with the Romans of long ago. They maintain that many millions of world citizens watch with relish bullfights, cockfights and the bouts of extreme fighting between contestants. More. Worldwide television broadcasts entertain billions of households with shows of killings, tortures and violent deaths. And still more, are children games with the same themes of death, cruelty etc. This being so, is it then unreasonable to expect that some of us would, like the Romans, “thrill to watch human combatants fight to the death”?

SINCE the days of the Incas and those of pre-medieval Europe many centuries have passed up to and including the present one. During that lapse of time, the monotheistic religions with their message of love and compassion between men have flourished. There, also, occurred the revolutions in knowledge, both scientific and humanistic and of course the periods of the Renaissance, Enlightenment and Human Rights movements. All these in one way or the other stressing the sanctity of human life.

Notwithstanding all this, during that exact same period there was no end to man killing man whether in wars of religion , political wars, genocides, ethnic cleansings and other atrocities up to the present day suicide killing that take the lives of innocent people along with that of the misguided perpetrators and much, much more.

Near the end of the Pacific conflict of 1942-1945, the Imperial Japanese High Command realized that it could not defeat the American navy with conventional methods. What did they do? They brainwashed young men into accepting the ultimate sacrifice, to save the honour of the God-Emperor and through him that of Japan. With hardly any flight training, they were put aboard fighter planes crammed with explosives and told to crash-dive on the decks of enemy ships. They obeyed and died.(They were named Kamikaze after the ‘divine wind that destroyed the Mongol fleet off the shores of Japan, saving it from invasion). Not long after that, the Japanese town of Hiroshima was obliterated by an atomic bomb, killing, maiming and irradiating hundreds of thousands. The same was repeated in Nagasaki, a few days later with the same aftermath.

COME to think of it, with everything considered, perhaps we are not that much different from the Aztecs.

Nothing but Fairy Tales

NOTHING BUT FAIRY TALES

MYTHOLOGY IN HUMAN CULTURES

The Author APRIL, 2022

REFERENCES

Ancient Origins: Celtic Myths on Creation.

-Encyclopedia Britannica: Myth- Definition, History, Examples, & Facts. -Ditto: Mesopotamian Mythology. -Ditto: Japanese Mythology. -Ditto: Native American Literature. -Ditto: Celtic Religion. -Ditto: Minotaur. -Encyclopedia.com: Mesoamerican Religions. -Ditto: Celtic mythology.

-History Collection: African Myths. -Ditto: Celtic Myths.

-Historyworld.net: Creation Stories

-Medium: Human Hybrids from Ancient Greece. -Owlcation: Stories from Greek Mythology.

-Railsback.org: Creation Stories from around the World

-Royal Society of Chemistry: Stories from Egyptian Mythology.

SCILT: Celtic Creation Myth. -ThoughtCo: Half Human, Half Beast. -Travel Tellers: Stories from Greek Mythology. -Wikipedia: Myth. -Ditto: Stories from Egyptian Mythology. -Ditto: Hybrid Beasts in Folklore. -Ditto: Lamassu.

-World History Encyclopedia: Mythology. -Ditto: Stories from Egyptian Mythology.

INTRODUCTION

In his 2015 book, ‘Homo Deus’, historian Yuval Noah Harari tells of three kinds of realities. First there is objective reality that Homo-sapiens as well as other living creatures perceive through their five senses. They include all things and matters they see, hear, smell, touch and taste anywhere around, above and below them (the cosmos). They exist independently of Homo sapiens beliefs and feelings.

Second is subjective reality consisting of what each individual senses within her/him such as pain, love, desires etc. Here, again one can safely presume that this kind of reality is shared with all living fauna.

There is, however, a third reality, exclusive to Homo-sapiens which the author labels ‘intersubjective reality’. It is the reality imagined by people about events, beings, existences etc. that have no connection with the two other realities. With time and repetition, the stories told gain wide acceptance and credence, as if they were objective realities like seasons, earthquakes and storms.

And whereas objective and subjective realities are primordial-(having always existed)-intersubjective realities, in contrast, date back only to 70,000 years or so ago. To the time when Homo-sapiens began to acquire cognizance or the capacity to remember the past and to imagine inexistent creatures, events and occurrences. They probably started with dreams and tales being told around campfires.

Money is perhaps one of the better examples of intersubjective reality. It has no intrinsic value in itself. Its importance depends entirely on its perceived worth by a majority of people. In other words, “[it] has no objective value. You cannot eat, drink or wear a dollar bill. Yet as long as billions of people believe in its value, you can use it to buy food, beverages and clothing”. But the day that trust is lost, the dollar bill will be as good as trash. In contrast, no one, no matter how capable and powerful she/he is can change an objective reality by one iota. No one, for example can eliminate gravity or stop Earth from orbiting the sun or day to follow night etc.

In conclusion, again in the words of the author “That’s how history unfolds. People weave a web of meaning, believe in it with all their heart, but sooner or later the web unravels and when we look back, we cannot understand how anybody could have taken it seriously”.

MYTHOLOGY, GENERALLY

According to scholars, a myth is “a story, presented as having actually occurred in a previous age, explaining the cosmological and supernatural traditions of a people, their gods, heroes, cultural traits, religious beliefs, etc…… myths tell of the creation of man, of animals… why or how certain natural phenomena came to be [etc.]”.

No human civilization or culture is free of its invented mythology (). The term mythology covers several synonyms. Among them: stories, tales, legends, fictions, epics and myths evidently.

From the earliest days of hunting and gathering, a typical Homo- sapiens has had many questions to which he needed answers so as to have some normalcy and order in his life. He observed, in wonderment, the miracles of birth, the stages of life and death. He marveled at the rhythmic cycles of daylight, night and seasons and resignedly bore the angers and rages of nature. He was bewildered. He desperately needed to make sense of it all.

He began to assign to celestial bodies and natural phenomena superhuman powers with benevolent and malevolent feelings and emotions. Some assumed human forms such as the goddess Isis. Others were part human part animal such as God Sobek (man-crocodile). There were, also, mythical hybrid monsters such as mermaids (woman-fish), griffins (lion-eagle) and sphinxes (woman-lion-bird). All along, tales and stories were weaved explaining all that needed to be explained. Mythology was born.

The fictions narrated were about creation of man and the Universe, about life, death and the afterlife, about natural events. These tales became the authentic, undeniable and unquestionable bases of enduring religions of royalty and commoners alike, “no matter how much the narrated events [were] at variance with natural law or ordinary experience”, according to Britannica. And so, having identified the deciders of his destiny and all that interacted with it, Homo-sapiens could, henceforth, do no more than shrug his shoulders, cross his fingers and proceed with his existence.

Revealingly, in the words of World History Encyclopedia: “What one calls ‘mythology’ in the present day…was the religion of the ancient past. The stories which make up the corpus of ancient mythology served the same purpose for the people of the time as the stories from accepted scripture do for people today…”.

Indeed, contemporaneous and succeeding religions borrowed from one another throughout historical times. In particular, the scriptures of the Hebrews contain several of the older polytheistic stories. Most flagrantly, perhaps, is the episode of the cataclysmic floods sent to punish humans for displeasing their gods.

More. In the opinion of Richard G.A. Buxton, writing in Encyclopedia Britannica, even the founders of modern religions such as Confucius, the Buddha, Moses, Jesus and Muhammad, who no one doubts had a physical existence had “information about them… couched in legendary terms that have many mythological features”.

In the sections that follow we give examples of stories from all continents variously describing the origin of the cosmos, life, afterlife and the rights of the privileged few over others etc… as well as the stories of selected hybrid-(made from parts from different beings)- monsters. We end with comments on myths in our time.

But before closing this section, I want to allocate a few lines on social apartheid imposed by the mythologies of some cultures. They do so by naming social classes within communities in which individuals have well defined roles to play. Such classes have rigid boundaries which cannot, under any circumstances being crossed. Meaning in particular, coming in contact with those in other classes. As worded by Britannica “one may not with impunity…. cross sexual or class lines, or have relations with a being not of one’s class”. To cross these sacred lines is to “open the world to the threat of chaos”. One flagrant example of this is the caste system demanded by Hinduism. This, I have adequately covered in my ‘Religions of Asia narrative’.

AFRICA

At the outset there was a universe and a god: Atum. As he was getting bored, he mated with his own shadow, spat out Shu and vomited Tefnut the god and goddess of air and moisture respectively.

In due time he sent them out to proceed with the creation of the world. Since they were taking their time about it, Atum became concerned, removed his eye and dispatched it to look for them. Eventually, the two offspring returned with their father’s eye. This reunion moved Atum so much that he wept and from the tear drops his eye shed the first two humans, one of each gender, arose.

Still, the couple had no place stay. In consequence, Shu and Tefnut mated. Their progeny included deities Geb and Nut representing Earth and sky. They also gave birth to Osiris, Isis, Seth, Nephthys and Horus, the five gods with a place of honour in the large Egyptian pantheon.

The harsh realities of existence in Egypt’s ecosystem led to the concept of ‘ma’at’ explained by author Margaret Bunson as “the model for human behavior, in conformity with the will of the gods…. Strict adherence to ma'at allowed the Egyptians to feel secure with the world and with the divine plan for all creation.

Ensuring compliance with ma’at by all, was the responsibility of the pharaoh who was believed to descended from a number of deities. As such, he deputized for the absentee gods in the everyday life of Egyptians. Indeed, a hieroglyphic text gives the job description of a pharaoh as: “[he] is on earth for ever and ever, judging mankind and propitiating the gods, and setting order… in place of disorder. He gives offerings to the gods and mortuary offerings to… the blessed dead”.

From pharaohs down, Egyptians were convinced that life on Earth was “only a small segment of an eternal journey presided over and orchestrated by…the many deities which comprised the Egyptian pantheon”. Thus, after death, every Egyptian hoped to find herself/himself in a place called the ‘Field of Reeds’.

Still, the deceased had first to transit through the ‘Hall of Truth’ to be judged. There, his heart was weighed and depending on whether it was lighter or heavier than a standard feather it was either allowed to proceed to the ‘Field of Reeds’ for an eternal life of bliss or alternatively condemned to be devoured by the goddess Ammut, a hybrid monster part lion, part hippopotamus and part crocodile (image).

Be that as it may, pharaohs, aristocrats and those who could afford the expense planned and organized her/his own mummification and burial. Indeed, Egyptian embalmers had mastered techniques of mummification varying in complexity, sophistication and price. Whatever, before the mummy is left alone in its tomb/chamber and the entrance sealed, a priest proceeded with the re-activation of the five senses. Specifically, he touched the dead person’s mouth, he/she “could now speak and eat”. All in preparation for a pleasant new life in the ‘Field of Reeds’. Incidentally, the deceased would have chosen, beforehand, their temporary resting places and the valuables they wished to take along with them.

Part of Egyptian mythology is concerned with hybrid creatures as introduced in the earlier section. We have already met the ‘devourer of the dead’ Ammut. Others included god of death Anubis (image) whose human body is topped with the head of a jackal.

The Yoruba() of West Africa believed creation was the doing of the omnipotent, ‘source of all’ God Olodumare. He entrusted his subordinate, a lesser god named Obatala, with the creation of the world and its inhabitants. To do so he instructed him “to create a very long, golden chain, and gather a snail shell filled with sand, a white hen……. and palm nut”.

Using the chain, Obatala descended from the sky, and once he reached the water below, he emptied the sand in the shell of the snail (image). Thereafter, he set the white hen on the pile and had her scatter sand with her feet, forming land masses in the process. Next, he planted the palm nut. In no time it grew into a palm tree which, in turn and in as short a time, multiplied into a whole forest. Lastly, he made humans.

For the Zulu people() of South Africa, the supreme creator had in primordial times, decided that humans would be immortal. He, accordingly, sent them a chameleon with the good news. Unfortunately, the messenger dilly-dallied on the way and arrived very late to his destination. In the meantime, sadly, the creator had changed his mind and decided than for humans, death would follow living. This time he entrusted the changed message to a lizard that promptly passed it on to those to whom it was intended. Belatedly, when the chameleon did arrive, his message “was not believed, and human beings were mortal from then on”.

THE AMERICAS

For the Jicarilla Apache Indians, to begin with there was nothing except “darkness, water, and Cyclone, the wind”. And the supernatural beings called Hactcins. From this nothingness they created earth, the sky and the underworld choosing to live in the latter.

The most important of them all the Black Hactcin began by creating animals, birds and eventually the first male human. He made the latter from material gathered by the birds. “The turquoise…became veins, the red ochre became blood, the coral became skin, the white rock became bones, the ….opal became fingernails and teeth, the jet became the pupil, the abalone became the white of the eyes, and the white clay became the marrow of the bones…and Black Hactcin used a dark cloud to make the hair.

To this primordial man the Black Hactcin gave the gift of language and taught him to walk. Finally while sleeping he “put [lice] on the man's head” with the result that when he woke up, there was a woman next to him().

From then on, humans multiplied but for many generations they remained in the underworld. Eventually the Hactcins created the sun and the moon. Unfortunately, from where they were, they could not benefit much from the two celestial bodies.

So much so, this time the White Hactcin decided to build a mountain to enable those in the darkness of the underworld to reach the lights of the heavenly bodies. He then instructed humans to start climbing out from the gloom toward the sky. They were followed by all animals.

Sadly though, one elderly couple failed in the undertaking and had no choice but to remain under. Still, they made all others promise to return to the underworld one day; causing them to became mortals. Till that mountain climb they were meant to live forever.

Similarly, as far as the Hopi Indians were concerned, there was nothing at the outset except a vast shapeless, timeless expanse and Taiowa, the ‘Infinite Creator’. In due course he brought into existence Sotuknang and charged him with the creation of “many universes in proper order…… one for Taiowa, the creator, one for himself and seven universes for the life to come”. For the creation of life, Sotuknang made Spider Woman, and entrusted her with the task.

Spider Woman (image) proceeded to create all animals, plants and birds and finally made four men and four women by mixing earth with her saliva. Thereafter, she had her master Sotuknang teach them to speak four different languages.

Subsequently, as humans multiplied, she moved among them dividing them into groups and assigning ‘homelands’ to them “and teaching them how to live and worship the gods”. With her work, thus, completed, she disappeared, never to be seen again.

One final fiction is the one about the origin of maize, a staple food, told by the Abenaki Amerindians. It all began with a fair-haired young woman who befriended a man. She initiated him in the making of fire, told him to burn a field and to drag her over the scorched earth. In the process, her golden hair left maize seeds for planting etc.

Clearly, there are as many creation stories as there were Indians tribes and communities such as the Iroquois Federation-(of whom I have written in ‘Original Owners of North America’)-, Sioux, Comanche, Navajo and more.

Yet, despite this great variety certain mythic protagonists, such as tricksters are common to almost all tribal fictions. Tricksters are animals native of North America ‘anthropomorphized’-(given human traits)- and assigned superhuman powers. Among the most common are Coyote (image), “typically portrayed…as a maker of fateful decisions, as the being who secured for humans such necessities as fire and daylight, and as the originator of human arts”. Other tricksters included Wolf, Raven, Mink, Blue jay and Rabbit.

The roles played by tricksters vary from the beneficial to the egregious. According to Britannica they can alternately act as “omniscient [all- knowing] creator and an innocent fool, a malicious destroyer and a childlike prankster…[and also be]…scapegoat onto which are projected the fears, failures, and unattained ideals”.

An example, is the debate between Coyote and Wolf about whether human should be allowed to die. In the opinion of Wolf, people should be able to return to life after death. But to Coyote, the absence of demise would result in overcrowding. We know who won the argument.

Another is about “how a…chief had stolen all the light, leaving the earth in darkness”. Raven decides to help through convoluted actions and magic tricks. He manages to impregnate the daughter of the guilty chief and provides him with a grandson who is none other than Raven in disguise. In due course, he persuades his grandfather to let him have the sun as a toy. As Raven again, he returns it to its proper place in the sky.

Mesoamerica is the geographic region between North and South America encompassing central Mexico, Belize, Guatemala, El-Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua and Costa Rica. Many civilizations flourished there before arrival of Europeans in the 16th century. Notably the Maya in today’s southern Mexico, Guatemala and Belize, and the Aztec in central Mexico.

The Maya, Aztec and other Mesoamerican civilizations share common mythological themes about universes (or suns) that, repeatedly, came about and disappeared until one was achieved in which humans could adequately “serve, worship, and feed the gods”.

For the Maya, the gods first created animals which turned out to be raucously noisy and unrespectful of their creators. Next, they tried their hand at turning out humans. The first specimens, made of mud, were washed away by water. The following generation, created from wood was not respectful enough of the gods. They had them eliminated by their domestic animals and personal belongings. They also flooded them with torrential rains. And the few still alive, despite of all these calamities, were turned into monkeys.

Finally, they created humans who turned out to be too intelligent, and with far reaching eyesight, for the gods’ liking. They worried they may compete with them instead of serving them. Consequently, they degraded their sight so they could see no further than their noses, so to speak, and took away their sagacity.

The Maya’s Earth was carried on the back of a huge crocodile floating in the ocean. Underneath it were nine levels of a tenebrous underworld, Xibalba (place of fear). It was ruled by nine gods of death. Above it, on the other hand, were thirteen layers of heavenly Tamoanchan under the stewardship of thirteen gods. Further, there was a tree, called ‘tree of life’ of life with its roots in the underworld and its top in heaven.

Post death, a soul began its climb along that tree striving to reach the upper layers against the attempts to hold it back by the evil gods of death. A few humans were exempted from undertaking this arduous transit. For example, the souls of women who died in childbirth, those who committed suicide and the victims of human sacrifice went directly up.

Like the Maya, the Aztec believed that theirs was the fourth consecutive sun or universe. That it had been preceded by three succeeding ones each ending in extinction. The first vanished under floods, the second was the victim of an earthquake and the third pulverized by a giant. Eventually, human civilization was rebuilt by the ‘Feathered Serpent’ deity by the name of, Quetzalcóatl (image).

Similarly, the Aztec also believed that layered above and below them were thirteen heavens and nine underworlds. Warriors who died in combat, merchants killed on their trading journeys and women who expired in childbirth went directly up. More. As stated by Britannica: “The old paradise of the rain god Tlaloc…opened its gardens to those who died by drowning, lightning, or as a result of leprosy, dropsy, gout, or lung diseases”. God Tlaloc considered himself responsible for their plights.

For completion’s sake, the gods of both civilizations were avid consumers of human blood. This was particularly true of the Aztec. They credited the sun god for their successes in empire building. In consequence, they considered it the duty of everyone to serve and safeguard him. Accordingly, they immolated people at the altar of their sun-god almost interruptedly with horrendous goriness. This aspect is covered in one of my earlier narratives titled ‘Cruel Deities’.

ASIA

Once upon a time there was nothing but chaos. The creation tale begins with two supernatural creatures, the female Abzu and male Tiamat. From their union issues generations of shady supernatural characters till god Marduk makes it his business to end the confusion. The ‘Enuma Elish’ is the mythical narrative of his accomplishments in this regard. Starting as one of the gods of Babylon, he attains the rank of king of all gods, after successfully completing his task.

“Armed with a hurricane and riding a tempest drawn by four fiery steeds”, Marduk defeats an slays the preservers of chaos. Cutting the body of his main antagonist in two he makes heaven from one half and Earth from the other. He then sets about building homes in heaven for his godly associates. On land he brings about the Tigris and Euphrates rivers, fields, pastures, plants, farm produce and animals. Finally, as servants for the gods high above and “to worship [them] at their regular festivals” he creates mankind. To it he also assigns the tasks of running, maintaining and looking after his earthly creations.

Monarchs, in Mesopotamia, were believed to be the gods’ representatives. From time to time a king would petition the gods on behalf of his subjects, at an audience in the temple. It was considered that propitious events, such as achieving a good harvest, repulsion of attackers and victorious conquests were indications of approval of the king’s performance by the realm’s patron god.

One of the more successful kings in Mesopotamia was Hammurabi of Babylon. His landmark achievement was the ‘Code of Hammurabi’, consisting of 282 laws regulating every conceivable aspect of everyday life of his subjects. To give the laws more punch, Hammurabi emphasized the relationship between him and the gods. He claimed that God Marduk and others have appointed him, Hammurabi “to make justice prevail in the land, to abolish the wicked and the evil, to prevent the strong from oppressing the weak” .

The Sumerian ‘Epic of Gilgamesh’ is the first ever legend in history; it predates the famous ‘Iliad’ of Homer by 1,500 years. Scholars think it aimed at bringing home the inevitability of death.

Gilgamesh was the king of the Sumerian city of Uruk. Half god half human, he was young, handsome, strong, tyrannical, arrogant and unruly. Worse, he raped every woman he fancied. So much so, that his subjects complained to the gods.

In response, they sent a creature by the name of Enkidu to Uruk to defeat Gilgamesh in combat. Enkidu was a half beast half man hybrid. Soon, the two are engaged in combat. But contrary to expectations, Gilgamesh wins. Following the contest, they become close friends and when Enkidu dies, struck by an illness sent by the gods, Gilgamesh is greatly distressed, particularly, at the realization that death will find him sooner or later; something he had not considered thus far. In consequence he abandons his kingdom and starts a journey to the end of the world in search of immortality.

During his quest he meets Utnapishtim an eternal man, who relates to Gilgamesh the occurrence of disastrous floods centuries earlier. They were wrought by the gods to punish humankind for making “…so much noise that they [the gods] couldn’t sleep”. Utnapishtim himself was spared. He was forewarned of the cataclysmic event by the water god. He was instructed to build a large boat spacious enough to accommodate “…the seed of all living creatures”.

Utnapishtim obeyed and escaped, along with all with him, the devastating floods that wiped out all that existed on Earth. Eventually, after seven days the deluges stopped and Utnapishtim berthed his boat. He looked outside an observed a rainbow, meant as a pledge from the gods that no more floods would be sent against humankind.

Greatly wizened by the old man, and convinced by the inevitability of death, Gilgamesh returns to Uruk a changed man and rules wisely and compassionately for 126 years.

Mesopotamian mythology is famous for the creature named lamassu (image), with a human head on the body of a bull with bird wings attached. It was looked upon as a protective spirit. Depictions of the lamassu on clay tablets as well as different size sculptures of it were kept in homes for protection against evil, and stood at the entrances of houses, palaces and at the gate of cities to guard them.

Differently from the creation stories of elsewhere, which concern themselves with the making of the Universe, world and humankind, that of Japan is specifically aimed at the formation of that country, and pointedly at the advent and sanctity of the imperial and aristocratic families. Necessarily, it is a more recent account dating back only to the 700’s CE, merely some 1300 years ago, unlike the much older myths of Mesopotamia, early Egypt and ancient Greece.

To begin with “heaven and earth separated out of chaos”. It was followed by the coming along of seven succeeding sets of deities. Part of the last one, were the brother and sister Izanagi and Izanami. Upon being directed by the senior godly members the pair stood on a rainbow bridge and stirred the oceanic mud below with their ‘jeweled spear’ (image) . As the latter was retrieved, the drips from it formed the island of Onogoro.

Subsequently, Izanagi and Izanami decided to descend there and begin procreating. From their action were issued the remaining islands of the Japanese archipelago. They also brought forth the Moon and the Storm gods and the Sun goddess. The great-grandson of the latter became the first the Emperor of Japan.

He was Jimmu who, according to legend, lived 126 years from 711 to 585 BCE. Scholars have never found evidence of his existence, neither have they found anything to prove that any, but one, of his 8 or 9 divine descendants ever lived. Be that as it may, the onset of Jimmu’s emperorship initiated the “[t]ransition from Age of the Gods to Human Age”. In other words, this myth “establishes the origins, and the power, of the Japanese imperial family as divine”

Chinese mythology credits a certain hairy, horny and tusky ‘Pan Gu’ with the creation of Earth and sky. It begins with Pan Gu and the whole universe. enclosed in an egg(). For 18,000 years Pan Gu grows within it till one day he splits it into two halves and for another 18,000 years he pushes them apart, continuously growing bigger himself in the process. Eventually Earth and sky are a safe and stable distance apart, with no longer any risk of crashing back into each other.

The sustained effort over many millennia kills Pan Gu. But, fortunately, his body parts are not wasted. Indeed, according to Historyworld.net, “His limbs become the mountains, his blood the rivers, his breath the wind and his voice the thunder. His two eyes are the sun and the moon”. And according to Railsback .org “His hair became the grass, and his veins became the roads and paths. His teeth and bones became the minerals and rocks, and his flesh became the soil of the fields”.

Centuries later, a young goddess, Nü Wa, found herself alone in this world left behind by Pan Gu. She decided to create beings similar to herself. From clay she fashioned humans of both sexes. But she soon became tired of the exercise and rather than mould each one individually, she dragged a stick in the mud and flicked it in the air. The droplets of clay that fell turned into thousands of men and women. What is rather striking, however, is that this myth helped justify the social differentiation between the privileged members of Chinese society, moulded one by one, and the mass produced, so to speak, commoners.

The first mythical Chinese emperor was Fuxi. He allegedly existed between 2900 and 2800 BCE. According to Britannica he was born a deity “with a serpent’s body”. He is reported to have showed humans how to make fire, cook, fish, make nets, and raise domestic animals. He also initiated them in the arts of music and writing . Reportedly, he, also introduced marriage.

During the lifetime of a person, he/she is watched over by an ‘Earth God’ who keeps records of all that person’s good and bad deeds. Upon death these records are sent, along with the deceased’s soul, to a realm in the underworld called ‘Diyu’ where ten magistrates preside; each is competent in one aspect of the soul’s journey through earthly life.

They, thus, proceed to evaluate the records and depending on their findings, souls are subjected to various punishments. In the worst cases, according to Wikipedia “sinners are subjected to gruesome tortures until their ‘deaths’, after which they are restored to their original state for the torture to be repeated”.

Still the minority of souls who have had an exemplary earthly passage, are allowed to exit ‘Diyu’ promptly via one of two bridges depending on their preferences. They are the ‘Golden Bridge’ and the ‘Silver Bridge’ leading to two realms of eternal bliss, both highly rewarding.

AUSTRALASIA

Tasmania is an island to the south of Australia. According to its early people, there were two gods up in the stars, Moinee and Dromerdeener. They fought bitterly and Moinee was defeated. He fell and landed on Tasmania.

Still, as his legacy before dying, he decided to create man. But in his hurry, he gave him a bulky kangaroo tail which prevented him from sitting down. Humans, understandably, suffered a great deal from this predicament and complained so much that god Dromerdeener took pity on them. He subsequently cut their tails off enabling them, henceforth, to sit down, rest and “live happily ever after”.

This is a tale entertained by one group of Aborigines- (indigenous people of Australia)- about the origin of day and night. They attributed the sunrise at dawn and sunset at dusk from east and west respectively to the action of a large goanna lizard.

Upset at a discourtesy towards him by the sun, the lizard threw his boomerang at it knocking it out of the sky in the westward direction. The sun never reappeared. This caused a great deal of distress to the goanna. Since, as is well known, a boomerang always returns to its sender, the lizard repeatedly hurled its weapon westwardly in the hope it would hook the sun and bring it back. But to no avail.

Finally, on a hunch, he decided to send his boomerang skyward in the eastward direction. This time it brought the sun back with it. Since then to the tellers of this story, the sun rises from the east at the start of the day and sets eastward at its end.

EARLY EUROPE

Once again at the outset, there was nothing but chaos. Still, into this emerged Gaea, the goddess personifying Earth in Greek mythology. With assistance of no one she bore Uranus, the sky god, with whom she mated. From this union issued mountains, seas and the rest. In short, the world came to be.

Subsequently, Gaea and Uranus successively produced the Titans-(giants with great strength)-, Cyclops-(with a single eye in the forehead)-, and an assortment multiheaded, multiarmed monsters. But all those did not get on well with one another. Sordid events between them followed including anthropophagy and incestuous marriages.

Fortuitously, from all this mess, Zeus, the supreme deity of ancient Greece, arose. He took it upon himself to bring order in place of mayhem. Accordingly, he defeated all the Titans and others and set himself up in Mount Olympus to rule the world thus becalmed. Sharing the place with him was Poseidon-(god of the sea)- and his other siblings.

Still, unbeknownst to Zeus, Titan Prometheus had created humans from clay. More. He had acquainted them with fire to enable them to cook, warm themselves and make tools. Unfortunately, Zeus who was on hostile terms with Prometheus, was not impressed by his actions.

As punishment, Zeus had Prometheus chained to rocks in the Caucasus mountains and had an eagle eat up his liver daily (image). Because the Titan was immortal, he continually grew another liver in place of one devoured. Eventually after thirty years of this drama Prometheus was freed by Heracles, Zeus’s own son.

As for the poor mortals, in retaliation for Prometheus benevolence toward them, Zeus had Poseidon bring down upon them torrential rains flooding them all. Still, two humans in a boat were allowed to survive. They proceed with populating Earth.

According to Greek mythology every human’s destiny and lifespan from birth to demise are determined by three thread-spinning goddesses collectively known as the Moirae (image). Their decisions are final and can in no way be influenced by any human or deity. The first sister spins the thread “at the creation of life itself……upon the birth of a person”. The second sibling’s thread “is the one that allocates the fate of people during life. As for the last one, she “is the cutter of the thread of life and with her shears she determines how someone will die”.

The recurrence of seasons is told in a Greek mythological drama whose actors are Zeus, Demeter, the goddess of harvests and crops and her daughter Persephone the apple of her eye. Also in the story is Hades the god of the underworld, the realm of the dead.

One day Hades came up from his tenebrious domain, kidnapped Persephone and took her under. Her frantic mother looked for her everywhere and, in the process, became disconsolate and neglected her responsibilities. The land became barren and cold. Crops no longer grew.

Unexpected help came from the sun which from its place high up in the sky had witnessed the abduction. Feeling sorry for Demeter he told her where her beloved daughter was. Armed with this information, the goddess went to Zeus with the warning that unless and until her daughter is returned to her, she will never let anything grow in the fields.

In consequence, Zeus sent instructions to Hades to release Persephone immediately. But prior to doing so the god of the underworld had the young woman eat six seeds of a certain pomegranate which he knew made Persephone incapable of leaning his domain for good.

This caveat, understandably, greatly distressed Demeter. Zeus, once again interfered by proposing a compromise by virtue of which Persephone would spend six months a year, one for every seed she ate, with Hades in the kingdom of the dead and the remaining six with her mother in the kingdom of the living.

And so, while Persephone was in the underworld with Hades, Demeter would be grieving along with the land and nothing would grow. By contrast, during the six months Persephone was among them, it would be spring and summertime with all the resulting goodness.

Of the several hybrid monsters featured in Greek mythology, is Minotaur (image) a human with a bull’s head. It was, originally, issued from the union of the wife of Minos, the king of the island of Crete, and a sacrificial ‘snow-white bull’ sent to the king by the god Poseidon.

Minotaur was kept by Minos in a crypt on the island. He used it to devour his enemies, notably young Athenians sent to him periodically in retribution for the murder of his son in Athens. In due course, Minotaur was killed by Theseus an Athenian braveheart.

Germanic peoples()

In the earliest of times there was only “the cold dark misty world” known to the Norse (Vikings) people as Niflheim. From the interaction of ice and fire a giant whose name was Ymir was born. He had the ability to procreate single handedly. Among his descendants were the one-eyed Odin, the greatest of the Norse gods, and his brothers.

A time came when Odin and his sibling killed the elderly Ymir. In the words of Railsback .org “[from] Ymir's immense body…they made the earth. Ymir's blood became the sea, his bones became the rocks and crags, and his hair became the trees. [They then] took Ymir's skull and with it made the sky. In it they fixed sparks…..the stars…. They threw Ymir's brains into the sky and made the clouds.

Odin and his siblings, built themselves a place to dwell in the heavens and linked it to Earth with a bridge made of the rainbow. Finally, from two logs found on a beach they made the first man and woman. They “gave them breath and life…. consciousness and movement…faces, speech, hearing, and sight. From this man and woman came all humans thereafter”.

Celtic peoples()

To the Celts, in primordial times, there was nothing except sea and land. Creation began with a goddess named Eiocha who arose from the sea in the form of a white mare -(female horse).

In time she gave birth to another deity, Cernunnos and together they bred more gods and goddesses. Desirous to be obeyed and worshipped they, in turn, created man and beast from the bark of oak trees that happened to grow on the land.

The Celts believed in an everlasting, forever happy life after death. For the early Irish, a paradise awaited them underground or on an island somewhere at sea. It was variously called ‘Land of the Living’, ‘Delightful Plain’ and ‘Land of the Young’. There, youth and good health lasted for ever. An added attraction was the presence of very agreeable female companionship.

The Gaul’s imagination did not extend beyond the grave in which they placed along the cadaver food, weapons and valuables.

MODERN TIMES

The phrase ‘intersubjective reality’ was explained in the Introduction. In the preceding sections I have covered a few of the intersubjective myths in diverse cultures around the world at different times. All of them, in hindsight, are ludicrous and utterly incomprehensible to our modern minds. Yet, and for centuries if not millennia, they were taken for granted by, and shaped the social norms, of entire civilizations.

In this final part of the narrative, I skim over very few of the intersubjective fictions and myths that have formed humanity’s modern societies and to which we cling as tenaciously as our ancestors did to theirs. More. I have no doubt that a time will come when future generations will shake their heads incredulously at our misplaced convictions, not unlike our wonderments about those of our distant and not so distant ancestors.

But first, which times are these? They are the ones which started with the advent of the Scientific Revolution and the Age of Enlightenment in 17th century Europe. Famous names of those periods are exemplified by the likes of Galileo Galilei (1564-1642), Isaac Newton (1643-1727), Jean-Jacques Rousseau (1712–1778), Adam Smith (1723-1790) and many more. Two centuries later there was the industrialization of Europe. All three caused revolutionary socio-economic changes in the landscapes of human societies.

Among the myths of modern times, for example, is the assertion in the American ‘Declaration of Independence’, that all men are born equal. Another is the vaunted ‘Universal Declaration of Human Rights’ promulgated by the United Nations in 1948. Any rational person contemplating the cosmos of which we are part can find not a shred of evidence supporting any of these presumptions. In other words, by any stretch of the imagination, they do not rank along the immutable laws of physics, chemistry and biology which control and regulate our presence on Earth. In short, they are simply figments of the human imagination and as such run the risk of becoming obsolete and irrelevant, like other assertions in earlier times.

An example is the Communist ideology, a myth dreamed up by the German philosopher Karl Marx (1818-1883). It turned into a religion followed by millions or perhaps billions till a recent time when it lost a great deal of its relevance and significance.

Nowadays, the majority of humanity, if not all of it is living by the intersubjective ideology of capitalism, conceived by Adam Smith and like others. Its tenets include, but are not limited to, accumulation of capital, pursuit of profits, consumption and resource exploitation. And yet, once again, capitalism is not a law of nature but the product of human minds. It is certainly not immutable. For our purpose here we will boil the whole doctrine down to growth.

To its proponents, there are at least two sound reasons for growth. More goods and services lead to increased consumption and, in consequence, contribute to the enhancement of the standard of living. And, in the face of an increasing global demography, growth is essential just to keep up with the progressing number of humans. In both cases growth leads to a paradise down her on Earth. Why wait for a dubious one in the afterlife?

So much so, that growth has become a universal religion adhered to by people from all nationalities, cultures and otherworldly religions. All, Hindus, Buddhists, Christians and Muslims worship at the altar of economic growth. So do their rulers and politicians whether democrats, autocrats or theocrats.

Unfortunately, the relentless pursuit of growth does not permit anything to hinder its progress. For one social justice and equality are dropped by the wayside. More. Growth advocates make mistakes and in consequence cause untold hardships and miseries, i.e earthly hell, to millions of unsuspecting believers. This was the case with the global depression in the early part of the 20th century and the subprime crisis towards its end.

Whatever. But is growth sustainable in the long run? Ironically, this intersubjective reality is on a collision course with the objective reality of finite global resources, pollution and climate change. For how much longer can the former come up on top remains to be seen. In anticipation of this clash and to mitigate its consequences, some are advocating the exploitation of nearby planets. This, too, remains to be seen in the not very near future.

Still, let us end on a positive note. No one can deny that the tenets of capitalism have enabled huge advancements in many realms of human endeavour. To name but a few, the medical, communication and transportation fields. It has, also, to a large extent succeeded in combating famines, epidemics. And contributed to lessening of conflicts and encouraged cooperation.

Minority Religions in the Middle East

MINORITY RELIGIONS OF THE MIDDLE EAST

The Author

Chapter illustration

INTRODUCTION

MY ATTENTION WAS drawn to the theme of this essay by the 2014 book ‘Heirs to Forgotten Kingdoms’ by former British diplomat Gerard Russell. The book tells the stories of Mandaeans, Yazidis, Zoroastrians, Druze, Samaritans, Copts and Kalasha; all originating in the Middle East. Of these I have selected to cover the first four in addition to Alawites who figure prominently in the current history of the region.

All of these faiths have and continue to co-exist , some with very much reduced numbers, with predominant Islam. Historically they have been alternately persecuted and tolerated from the days of the Abbasid dynasty (beginning in the 8th century), through to the Ottoman period and, indeed, to the present.

In the 13th century,for example, extreme fundamentalist cleric Ibn Taymiyyah (1263-1328)( ) got busy “issuing every execration and encouragement to violence that he could against sects such as Druze and Alawites”. By the beginning of Ottoman rule early in the 14th century, they had both left their place of origin and took refuge in remote inaccessible regions where they could be left alone, away from prying eyes, to mind their own affairs.

At least as long as they were powerful and victorious, Ottoman rulers could and did prove tolerant to all their non-Muslim subjects. They opened the gates of the Empire to Jews expelled from Spain in the 16th century and treated their Greek, Armenian and other non-Muslim citizens with consideration. Perhaps they had no other choice: it would have been bad politics to otherwise.

Whatever, it is remarkable that despite it all, the faiths covered here “…have refused every inducement to abandon their religious beliefs and customs, and have endured insult and violence in order to stand by them”.

Let’s get started.

REFERENCES

-*’A Little History of Religion’, by Richard Holloway. Pages 71 and 72. -*BBC- Religion. -*Encyclopedia Britannica. -* ‘Heirs to Forgotten Kingdoms’, by Gerard Russell. Chapter: 3.

Mandaeans. -*Chicago tribune: ‘This is one of the oldest religions, and it is going to die’. -* ‘Heirs to Forgotten Kingdoms’, by Gerard Russell. Chapter: 1. -*Wikipedia.

Yazidis. -*Encyclopedia Britannica. -* ‘Heirs to Forgotten Kingdoms’, by Gerard Russell. Chapter: 2. -*Wikipedia. -*YezidiTruth.org.

Alawites. -*Encyclopedia Britannica. -* ‘Heirs to Forgotten kingdoms’, by Gerard Russell. Pages 51, 52 and 53. -*International Review, ‘The minor sect ruling Syria: Who are the Alawites?’ -*Martin Kramer(), ‘Syria’s Alawites and Shi’ism’. -*Wikipedia.

Druze. -* Encyclopedia Britannica. -* ‘Heirs to Forgotten Kingdoms’, by Gerard Russell. Chapter: 4. -* New World Encyclopedia. -*Wikipedia.

Conclusion. -* ‘A Little History of Religion’, by Richard Holloway. Pages 33 and 34.

ZOROASTRIANS

Chapter illustration

FOR OVER A THOUSAND years, Zoroastrianism, the dominant religion of Persia “was one of the most powerful religions in the world” . It is the oldest monotheistic() faith, more or less contemporaneous with Judaism but preceding both Christianity and Islam. It lost its importance with the defeat of the last Persian dynasty, the Sassanid at the hands of Muslims in 650 CE. Zoroastrian scriptures are called the ‘Avesta’.

The one god worshipped by Zoroastrians is Ahura Mazda. He is the creator of everything that is good in this world. Sadly though, he is opposed by Angra Mainyu who is the creator of everything evil on this Earth. Whenever and whatever Ahura Mazda made, Angra Mainyu reacted by creating opposites. Thus, when the first brought light, the other made darkness and night. He opposed sickness to good health, nasty animals such as vermin snakes and cats to the useful and docile horses, oxen and dogs. Against fertility came deserts and most revealing perhaps, against an afterlife of eternal happiness promised by Ahura Mazda, Angra Mainyu had only eternal torment to offer.

More, among the good things created by Ahura Mazda are Nature and all its constituents such as rivers, land and atmosphere. They are pure and, in consequence, must be loved and respected and not be polluted. In the words of BBC-Religion “This has caused some to call Zoroastrianism the first ecological religion”. Fire, too, is another natural phenomenon worthy of special consideration. This has led some outsiders to call Zoroastrians fire worshippers. They, definitely, are not.

It is important to comprehend, however, that the two creators are not equal and opposite. BBC-Religion states that Ahura Mazda is “Omniscient (knows everything),Omnipotent (all powerful), Omnipresent (is everywhere), Impossible for humans to conceive, Unchanging, Creator of life [and] Source of all goodness and happiness”. He will, at the opportune time, banish Angra Mainyu from Earth forever.

And yet, Zoroastrians are free to choose the path prescribed by either god. If they decided to follow Ahura Mazda they have to take part in the struggle between good and evil. Defeating Angra Mainyu does not entail bearing arms and going into physical combat. Instead, it means doing virtuous, commendable things such as telling the truth always. Revealingly, in the Avesta “the forces of darkness are called the lie”. Greek historian Herodotus (between 500 and 400 BCE) said the Persians (Zoroastrians) were “brought up to ride horses, shoot straight, and tell the truth”. As for author Russell : “Although Zoroastrians looked forward to the ultimate victory of good over evil, they had to help make it happen [by leading virtuous lives and performing good deeds]”. All Zoroastrians are equal viv-a-vis God; they differ only by their relative degree of moral integrity, meaning a life of “Good Thoughts, Good Words, Good Deeds” .Unlike in other religions, believers are neither the children nor the servants of God. Rather, they are his helpers regardless of age, gender, financial and social positions.

All this was the work of Zoroaster or Zarathustra some 3,500 years ago. He taught that “the world was formed by a ceaseless struggle between good and evil”; that whoever lived virtuously, according to the morals, set by Ahura Mazda, his soul would dwell eternally in the ‘House of Song’ , also called, ‘Abode of Light’. To the contrary, an amoral life according to the words of Angra Mainuy , the god of bad happenings, would only lead the follower’s soul to suffer in darkness. All this made 19th century German philosopher Friedrich Nietzsche (1844- 1900) to credit Zarathustra with the “invention of morality”. A morality which led to the concepts of Heaven, Hell as well as the rebel angel: the Devil or Satan, essential tenets in Judaism, Christianity and Islam (see 1 in Appendix).

Purity is vital in the life of any Zoroastrian. Author Russell relates that it is attained through a ritual requiring the believer to go nine nights without sleep, having a priest sprinkle bull urine over his/her body, and making him/her swallow a few drop of the liquid. Finally, he/she is required to declare that of her/his free will she/he was joining “the sisterhood and brotherhood of those who do good”.

Zoroastrians have affection towards dogs. Families put out food for them before they sit down for theirs. They believe they are the guardians of Heaven’s entrance, able to detect evil spirits from a distance. Maltreating a dog is prohibited so is, naturally, killing one. A dog’s life is worth that of ten thousand cats( )which “were regarded in the same way as ants and flies and other things that are seen as creatures endowed with an evil spirit”.

When Muslims conquered the great empire that was then Persia in 651, ruled at the time by the Sassanid dynasty (since 224 CE), the overwhelming majority of Persians were Zoroastrian or ‘Majoos’ in Arabic. At least at the beginning, the new Muslim rulers treated Zoroastrians as ‘people of the book’ equally with Jews and Christians and Mandaeans as we shall see. This notwithstanding, however, their number began to decline from that date on through persecution, conversion and emigration.

BBC-Religion had this to say on the matter: “The Islamic invaders treated the Zoroastrians as dhimmis (People of the Book)…[But]…There were also many other laws and social humiliations implemented to make life difficult for the Zoroastrians in the hope that they would convert to Islam”. For its part, Encyclopedia Britannica’s entry says: “Islam, in principle, tolerated the ancient religion, but conversions by persuasion or force were massive in many provinces. Zoroastrianism fomented rebellion and brought persecutions upon itself”.

Some scholars surmise that conversion to Islam was relatively easy given the similarities between the two creeds such as praying several times a day and the concepts of afterlife rewards and punishment in heaven and hell respectively. But also, Islam gave the lower classes, those not belonging to the priestly and warrior classes, the opportunity to escape the institutionalized social inequality, notwithstanding the presumed doctrinal equality between all Zoroastrians above mentioned. Islam also allowed Iranians to keep some of their Zoroastrian practices such as celebrating Nowruz().It continues to be celebrated by both the Muslim majority and the 10,000 or so Zoroastrians remaining in Iran. All to the despair of the Imams ruling the country.

The descendants of those who left Persia, fleeing the Muslims, are thriving today in parts of India, where they number some 70,000 souls. They were and continue to be known as Parsees in reference to their place of origin.

Parsees, to this day, keep the old Zoroastrian practice of disposing of the dead. Because corpses are impure, having been created by the god of evil, Angra Mainyu, they neither bury them nor do they burn them so as not to pollute soil and fire respectively. Instead, they expose them naked in the open for carrion birds, such as vultures, to dispose of them. Author Holloway describes these ‘Towers of Silence’ in India (image). Each has three concentric circles painted on its roof; the inner and middle ones are for male and female cadavers respectively; as for the outermost one it is for dead children. Consistently with their concern for purity and pollution Parsees, by inviting these birds to deflesh the cadavers of their loved ones, are nourishing and helping them in their task of cleaning up the world. It does not take them long to leave denuded skeletons under the hot sun to bleach and dislocate. Bones are then collected in a chamber in the center of the tower where they eventually “return to dust and filter through the soil to be washed into the sea. So the body a human loses at death becomes the gift of continuing life to the animals who feed on it. Everything is returned to nature. Nothing is wasted”. Not only humans, but also beloved dead dogs are similarly offered to the winged creatures to feed on.

Chapter illustration

MANDAEANS

Chapter illustration

Above is the ‘drabsha’, the religious symbol of the Madaeans. The cross shaped element does not relate to

Christianity; rather it represents the human body. As for the cloth, it represents the garment given by God to Adam.

THE MARSHES OF southern Iraq are a large maize of water and islets() between the two great rivers: the Tigris and the Euphrates. According to author Russell, they were suitable for minority faiths to live in peace cut off from the outside world. Further they have been described, in the 1950s by the British explorer and travel writer Wilfred Thesiger (1910-2003) as a “world complete in itself”. The marshes were home to Babylonians (see 2 in Appendix) from around 1900 BCE. Mandaeanism and Mandaeans arose there in the second century CE.

Chapter illustration

Mandaeanism is a syncretic religion; syncretism being the “amalgamation or attempted amalgamation of different religions, cultures, or schools of thought”, as defined by the Oxford Living Dictionaries. Scholars date the appearance of Mandaeanism to the times of John the Baptist ( 1st century BCE-30 CE), the Jewish preacher who baptized Jesus in the Jordan River. He is revered by Mandaeans and because of whom they have adopted baptism as a central ritual in their faith. But they themselves boast that theirs is the oldest religion in the world. They claim their descent from Adam and trace their history to the days of Babylon, and to Jews from whose Bible they have accepted prophets Seth and Noah. In contrast, they detest Prophet Abraham on account of his circumcision which they unequivocally reject. Further, they have their own holy book the name of which translates to ‘Great Treasure’.

Arab scholars of their time called them “the last Babylonians”. Even

so ‘Great Treasure’ saved the Mandaeans from mistreatment by Muslims after they established themselves in Mesopotamia in the 7th century. They were considered ‘People of the Book’ on equal footing with Christians and Jews. Moreover, like all three, they are monotheistic, believing in a sinle god and in an eternal afterlife in the ‘Light-World’.

Baptism, however, is Mandaeans’ single most important ritual. At the age of seventeen the person to be baptized, dressed in white from head to toe, crouches in the flowing water of the Tigris River. The performing priest then immerses her/him three times, signs her/his forehead with water three times and makes her/him swallow water three times. Finally she/he is given a name in religion for life and beyond. Author Russell quotes a senior Mandaean cleric as saying : “We practice baptism not just once in a lifetime, like Christians, but before all big occasions” , such as before a wedding when both bride and groom are immersed in the river.

Chapter illustration

According to British cultural anthropologist E.S. Drower (1879-1972) the theology and tenets of Mandaeanism ar “reserved for those considered able to understand and preserve… Great secrecy is enjoined upon initiates”. The latter, obviously, include priests and ‘ganzibras’ or bishops.

To become a priest is quite an arduous process. The aspiring candidate needs to spend seven days in a reed hut without food and sleep. His entire community supports him in his ordeal be gathering outside the hut 24/7 banging on drums and otherwise making noise to keep him awake.

As for the higher clerical position of ‘ganzibra’, it cannot be granted by a human. It has to be requested from ‘Abatur’ in the afterlife. Thus an aspiring ‘ganzibra’ seeks a man about to die, places in the pocket of his traditional death apparel a bottle of holy oil and recites to him “I have brought it to you… and you bear it to Abatur”. Apparently, following the death of the courier, and the arrival of his soul to the afterlife, the applicant receives confirmation from Abatur of his appoitment.

Mandaeans are strong believers in “[p]lanets and stars [which] influence fate and human beings, and are also places of detention after death”; and in spells. According to anthropologist Drower and author Russell, they have inherited these from their Babylonian predecessors (see 2 in Appendix). At birth , a priest studies the stars and formulates a horoscope for the newborn. The name in religion, mentioned above, is selected after the baptizing priest has consulted the stars. And when a Mandaean couple is married, they may not copulate until the propitious time, once again,dictated by the stars. As for spells, for example, crops are protected from damage by hailstorms by placing a tortoise on its back in the middle of the concerned field.

At the time of the the Anglo- American invasion in 2003, Mandaeans numbered perhaps 100,000 in Iraq. But since they have dispersed wide and far.

YAZIDIS

Chapter illustration

YAZIDISM IS THE monotheistic, esoteric religion of people inhabiting Sinjab district of northwestern Iraq, neighbouring Iraqi Kurdestan whose language called ‘Kurmanji’ they speak. They can also be found in parts of Syria, Armenia, Georgia and northeastern Iran. Overall they number between a few hundreds thousands to one million adherents

Yazidis consider themselves unique in that, according to their mythology they, somehow, descend from Adam alone, unlike all other humans who came down from both Adam and Eve. Consequently they tend to keep complete separation from all the rest of humanity. More. As if this self-imposed isolation is not enough, their own society is strictly segregated into a three caste system. Not only are marriages outside the faith forbidden but equally prohibited are unions across castes. See also about the handshake under 3 in the Appendix.

Yazidis acknowledge Abraham and Muhammad as the first and last prophet respectively. But their one god is not the one of the Jews, Christians and Muslim. Instead, they believe the world was created by one supreme “unknowable God” who then handed it over to seven divine angels. Chief among them is ‘Melek Tawoos’ (Peacock Angel) who is the one they worship as “the true ruler of this world”. Yazidis also believe that ‘Melek Tawoos’, was originally ‘Iblis’ or Satan who rebelled against the Almighty but had been reinstated after he demonstrated his repentance by “extinguish[ing] the fires of hell with his tears”. Having, thus, redeemed himself he could hitherto be worshipped in his role as the Peacock Angel. So much so that it became taboo for any Yazidi to refer to him by his defunct name Iblis, at the cost of his life and that of his executioner(s) for hearing him say it.

Furthermore Yazidis also venerate the sun and fire considered both as their ‘go between’ vis-à-vis the deities. Author Russell quotes a 19th century visitor as saying : “[They] never spit into a fire, and will frequently pass their hands through the flames and make as though they would kiss and wash their faces with them”.

It all started with Adi bin Musafir, descended from the Umayyads who ruled the Islamic world from Damascus between 661 and 750. Born around 1075, in Baalbek Lebanon, he is believed by Yazidis to have been the “earthly manifestation of Melek Taoos”. Author Russell mentions a poem attributed to Adi describing himself thus: “My wisdom know [s] the truth of things…I have not known evil to be with me…All creation is under my control…and every created thing is subservient to me. I am he that guide[s] mankind to worship my majesty…and I am he that pervade [s] the highest heavens”. As for the name Yazidi, some scholars think It comes from the Umayyad caliph Yazid bin Mu’awiyyah (645-683).

Lalish is a mountain village some 120 kms northeast of Sinjar. It is the Yazidis holy place. As to why it is so, what better than let ‘YezidiTruth.org’ explain: “The sacred history of Lalish begins with the arrival of the Yezidis’ patron deity Tawsi Melek, the Peacock Angel, who first arrived on Earth when the planet was still barren and constantly besieged by earthquakes and volcanoes, Tawsi Melek was sent to Earth to remedy the situation and make the planet one of the most beautiful in the universe. Landing as a peacock at Lalish, Tawsi Melek succeeded in stopping the Earth’s quaking and then he covered the planet with his “rainbow” peacock colors… Legends state that Sheikh Adi transferred Mecca’s landmarks to Lalish, thus making it the most sacred power spot on Earth”. It is where the shrine-tomb of Sheikh Adi is located as well as tombs “dedicated to six of the Great Angels”. In short, Yazidis believe Lalish is the center of the world where creation started.

Unlike the Mandaeans but similarly to Christians Yazidis are baptized once in their life. It takes place in Lalish where a sheikh immerses the candidate in a sacred stream called Zamzam. Another yearly ritual carried out there is “the great bull sacrifice”. This is what happens: a young bull is chased around the sanctuary by men with sticks toward the shrine where a sheikh is waiting. Once the bull has reached destination it is immobilized while the sheikh whispers a few words in its ear before slitting its throat.

Yazidis pray three times a day at dawn, sunset and noon. During the first two they face the sun but , for the noon prayer they turn toward Lalish. According to author Russell they do so in private with no outsider allowed to witness this rite in which they recite “There is no god but God [the unknowable one, represented by Melek Taoos] and the sun is the light of God”. Moreover, they believe in reincarnation. As explained by Encyclopedia Britannica: “The breaking of divine laws is expiated by way of metempsychosis, or transmigration of souls, which allows for the progressive purification of the spirit”. Finally, Yazidizm identifies many taboos; among them eating lettuce and wearing blue garments.

Similarly to the other minority religions, Yazidism is a secret religion whose teachings and tenets are known only to acknowledged sheikhs. A Yazidi commoner aspiring to become a sheikh must make the commitment to dress entirely and always in white, and to fast twice a year for forty days each time giving up all food during daylight hours and staying indoors. Through these he develops the ability to foresee the future. In the final stage, those who had taken this path before him would teach him the unwritten scriptures of Yazidism.

Associating Melek Tawoos with Iblis was unfortunate, indeed, in the Islamic milieu in which Yazidis lived. It exposed them to their identification as Satan Worshippers inevitably, leading to persecutions throughout their history culminating in the atrocities perpetrated agaist them by the Islamic State in Iraq and Syria beginning in 2014.

ALAWITES

Chapter illustration

I WOULD LIKE to proceed now with the politically influential and sizeable minority religion: the Alawites. Presently they constitute 11% of the population of Syria or about two million adherents residing mainly in its coastal mountains. They are also present in Turkey and northern Lebanon.

Up to the 9th century the Alawites were mainstream Shi’a Twelvers so named because of the twelve “Divinely guided leaders from the lineage of Prophet Muhammad”, according to the ‘Centre for Islamic Shi’a Studies’. The first was Imam Ali and the last is the still awaited Imam Muhammad Al-Mahdi(). During the days of the 11th Imam, Hasan al Askari (846-874), in Basra , Muhammad Ibn Nusayr thought up and preached the tenets of Alawism ().

Subsequently, a disciple of Ibn Nusayr the Iraqi Al-Husayn bin Hamdan Al-Khasibi ( died: 969) proceeded with the organization of the new faith in Aleppo during the rule of the Hamdanid dynasty (905-1004). In the wake of the fall of that dynasty and in the face of mounting antagonism toward the new religion, Al-Khasibi’s grandson and disciple, al- Tabarani moved the community to Latakia, Syria in 1032, where his erudition succeeded in converting the population of the Syrian Coastal Mountains.

Although Alawites consider themselves Shi’a Muslim, their theology and practices differ considerably from the latter. In the words of one source, it is a “syncretic sect of the Twelver branch of Shia Islam”. To start with, while they believe in the same God, theirs is a triad of divinities (not unlike the Christians’ Holy Trinity) composed, in order of importance of Ali, Muhammad and Salman the Persian().This is all encapsulated in the Alawaite saying: “I turn to the Gate [Salman the Persian]; I bow before the Name [Muhammad]; I adore the Meaning [Ali]”.

Not quite, according to a senior Alawite sheikh interviewed in Tripoli by author Gerard Russell, in the course of researching his book. Ali is “just…a lawgiver and successor to the Prophet” and more. Suspecting that the cleric was less than candid, Russell conversed with other Alawites in town. From them he learnt they had a pantheon of men who were the “human equivalent of God’s celestial servants”. The greatest of them all is naturally Ali who in their eyes is “a glimpse or image of God and the closest thing to God on earth that the limited human mind could conceivably grasp”. Next is, expectedly Prophet Muhammad followed, surprisingly, by Plato (428-348 BCE) the great Greek thinker and the conqueror Alexander the Great of Macedonia (356-323 BCE).

Author Russell also learnt that their “most secret ritual involves the drinking of consecrated wine and shows very clear Christian influences”; that there were dietary restrictions including not eating camel or rabbit meat. Of the edible kind, men ate that of male animals and vice versa for female eaters. As concerns reincarnation, they can be reborn as plants and animals , surmising from this the reason for some trees have “sacred significance”.

The Qura’n and Nahj al-Balagha attributed to Imam Ali are the books referred to by the Alawites. As for the the five Pillars of Islam they are, according to Encyclopedia Britannica “….interpret[ed]… as symbols and [Alawites] thus do not practice the Islāmic duties”. Revealingly, International Review affirms that the version of the ‘shahada’ (the first pillar) is: “I testify that there is no other God but Ali the transcendent the esoteric [intended to be understood only by a few knowledgeable people] and there is no veil but Muhammad the righteous the faithful, and there is no path to him but Salman the powerful”. It, further claims that Alawites start their daily prayers at noon rather than at dawn and as for Hajj “several Alawite scholars have heavily criticized the process of the hajj as worship of a stone”.

Alawites have a special reverence for the planets. Of special importance are the sun and moon. Russell writes that when in 1969 Neil Armstrong stood on the latter “it provoked a theological crisis among Alawite scholars”. They were confused: how could “a physical manifestation of a spirit that stood in the heavenly hierarchy as an intermediate between God and man…” turn out to be nothing by a piece of rock?

Given all this, it is not surprising that Alawites have at various times, in their history been oppressed and persecuted by the political and religious authorities of the two mainstream denominations: Sunni and Shi’a Islam. They suffered under the Abbasids, Mamluks and Ottomans; and were the target of religious ‘fatwas’ qualifying them as ‘kuffar’ (sinners), ‘mushrikun’ (polytheists) and ‘ghulat’ (exceed required). This being so, no wonder Alawites took refuge in remote places, and restricted understanding of the tenets of the creed to ‘shuyukh al-deen’(those knowledgeable in religious religion) exclusively. As for the laity they were told only the exoteric (intended for the understanding by the general public) features of the faith.

MUWAHHIDUN-DRUZE

Chapter illustration

LET ME START with the words of Shaikh al-Akl (uppermost in clerical hierarchy), interviewed by author Russell: “We teach the need for good deeds…. We respect others. Our religion is Islam. Our sect are the Muahhidun, the Unifiers. Our title is Druze”.

It all began in North Africa at the beginning of the rule of the Fatimids early in the tenth century. Of Shi’a Ismaili denomination, this dynasty which lasted over two and a half centuries, (909 to 1171), sought unsuccessfully to displace the overall Sunni Muslim Abbasid Califate in Baghdad. Eventually, it settled for an empire which comprised Egypt , Lebanon ,Syria, Palestine and the western part of the Arabian Peninsula.

The Fatimids believed in the value Greek philosophy, seeking to enrich Islam with some of its ideas and theories . So much so that “they amassed a huge library of Greek philosophy”(). It is in this environment that a group of “thinkers devised the philosophy of Tawheed-the Druze faith’. According to author Russell, the origins of the name ‘Druze’ is something of a mystery, explaining further that it may have come from the “surname of Nashtaqin al-Darazi, an early adherent who was later excommunicated”.

This faith became public in 1017 during the reign of al- Hakim bi-Amr Allah (985-1021), who was supportive of the new religion. Both, however were condemned by the Fatimid clergy who qualified them of heretics, to the point that al-Hakim suddenly disappeared in 1021, more likely that not, assassinated.

He was replaced by Az-Zaher (1005-1036) whose era was antagonistic to the Druze and resulted in their persecution and even massacres. Understandably the community, over time, vacated Cairo and took refuge, instead, in the mountains of Syria and Lebanon and turned secretive about the tenets of its religion. And whereas it the early days it practiced proselytism (conversion ) on non- Druze, it ceased doing so in 1043. From then on Druze no longer sought or accepted converts from outside the faith.

Nonetheless, despite it all, the Druze took an active role in the defence of the Lebanese shores against the Crusades, alongside the Ayubbid and later the Mamluk forces. Moreover, during Ottoman rule Druze were allowed a great deal of autonomy, despite their rebellious attitude toward central authority, being protected, as it were, by the rugged, mountainous nature of their territory.

Druze society is divided into two groups: the ‘juhhal’ or those uninitiated in the tenets of the religion and the ‘uqqal’ or religious people holding all the secrets of the faith. As should be expected the majority of Druze people belong to the first category, spanning all classes of society: from the most prosperous, educated adherents to the least so. They are all equally ‘juhhal’. For them there are no dietary restrictions and no religious rites to perform. They nevertheless need to be aware, however, that marriage outside the religion is reprehensible().

But the ‘uqqal’ and those above them the ‘ ajaweed’ to the contrary, they are “as it were,bearing on their shoulders the whole weight of their religion… [They] abide by a philosophy of self-denial….They live austere lives, praying and meditating regularly, fasting during Ramadan, avoiding pork and alcohol… while the average Druze has almost no religious obligations”, in the words of author Russell.

A key belief of the Druze, is in ‘taqammus’ or reincarnation. But unlike other religions in which the soul of a dead person can be reincarnated in the bodies of animals and plants, a Druze can only be reincarnated as a Druze of the same gender as in earlier life. Russell explains that the souls of present day Druze existed hundreds of years before. They may have dwelt in the bodies of Prophet Muhammad’s companions and before that in those of the disciples of Greek philosophers, notably Pythagoras’s (see 4 in Appendix).

‘Taqammus’ is the reason behind the ban on marrying outside the faith: “Since they have eternal life through their rebirth within the community, then having children by [a non-Druze] outsider affects those children not only in this life but in their future ones, too” , as stated by Russell.

By the end of the first decade of the 21st century, Druze numbered about 1,000,000 souls; half of them in Syria, some 250,000 in Lebanon and the rest in Israel, Jordan and the diaspora.

CONCLUSION

WHY ALL THIS proliferation of religions, in the Middle East and, indeed, elsewhere in the World. It is because the prophets and founders of would be new faiths were left wanting by the established creeds of their day including the Abrahamic ones() and the great faiths/philosophies of Asia(). As far as those supernaturally inspired emissaries were concerned, they needed more satisfying answers to the great puzzles regarding creation of the Universe, why humans are on Earth and more vitally where are they ending up after they die and their flesh and bone decay.

Author Holloway, relates the story told by adherents to Jainism, an ancient religion from India. Six blind men were asked to describe an elephant by touching parts of it. Then depending on the part felt : leg, trunk, tail ear etc. each one described the whole animal as a pillar, pipe, rope and hand fan. The moral of this obviously is that humans see parts of reality and assume it is the whole of it.

The allegory of the six blind men and the elephant exemplifies the ever present human quest for the truth, translating into the countless religions throughout history. A harmless endeavor until one decides its version is the whole truth and tries to impose it on others. Christianity did it with the Crusades and the Inquisition. So did Islam with Wahhabism , Talibanism and ISIS.

APPENDIX

1-Heaven, Hell and Satan.

Early Jewish scriptures restricted evil to the serpent in the Garden of Eden. No heaven or hell, reward or punishment: after death, all, ended in a place called ‘Sheol’. Wikipedia describes it as “a place of darkness to which all the dead go, both the righteous and the unrighteous, regardless of the moral choices made in life, a place of stillness and darkness cut off from life and from God”..

But following the conquest of Babylon, where Jews had taken refuge, by the Persians in 539 BCE, the scriptures mention Satan. His description closely resembles that of Angra Mainyu the Zoroastrian creator of evil. More, Heaven and Hell make their appearance: “Many of those who sleep in the dusty ground will awake, some to everlasting life, and others to shame and everlasting abhorrence”. Christianity adopted them from Judaism and Islam from both.

Even to philosopher Plato ( 428-348 BCE) said that “…souls went to reward or punishment after their death, depending on what they had done in their lives” following encounters between Greeks and Persians.

2-Babylon and the planets.

Mesopotamia, the Cradle of Civilization, is where Babylon rose to prominence between the Tigris and Euphrates rivers, around 1850 BCE. Its most famously remembered for its hanging gardens, one of the seven wonders of the world and for its king Hammurabi (1811-1750 BCE), the initiator of the first set of laws in human history known as the ‘Hammurabi Code’. The laws, numbering 282, were meant to codify the conduct and behaviour of citizens and slaves in every day’s dealings. They were carved onto stone pillars.

As early as 1500 BCE, watching the sky, Babylonians invented the 12 signs of the Zodiac. They also identified the planets which could be seen with the naked eye namely Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, and obviously the sun and the moon. These were the seven Planet Gods. They established the week of seven days, after them, and identified one as “evil day, when activity should be avoided-which may have been the origin of the Sabbath day adopted by Judaism” .

Interestingly the numbers seven and twelve came to have special significance later such as “seventh heaven…twelve apostles, twelve knights of the Round Table, twelve Greek gods on Mount Olympus”.

3-The handshake.

The universal ritual for friendship, the handshake originated with those who preceded the Yazidis on the scene by a few centuries. They were the Mithraists, followers of the god Mithras. They described themselves as “those united by the handshake”. When Roman legionaries arrived in the region during the first century CE, they were mystified and impressed by that religion . So much so, took back to Rome some of their practices including the handshake which subsequently spread across the Empire and the world. The Yazidis are related to, and have many similarities with the Mithraists including the practice of the handshake.

4-The Druze and Pythagoras.

As we have seen Druze religion originated in an environment rich in Greek thought which,apparently, found its way into the new faith; specifically the concepts of secrecy and reincarnation of the famous philosopher and mathematician Pythagoras (570-495 BCE).

Pythagoras believed in secrecy. He kept his learning to himself, and passed it only to trusted disciples in the brotherhood he founded. Anyone daring to divulge any of the Master’s teachings was mercilessly punished. According to author Russell, Pythagoras attitude is summarized by: “Come near ,you few philosophers, the Pythagorean way of life embraces you! But you, ordinary mass of every day people, are far from it”.

He famously believed in reincarnation. To him and his disciples the soul is immortal and had to stay pure, whereas the body containing it is a temporary packaging of not much value hence the need for austere living.

The mathematician in Pythagoras believed that geometrical figures, namely triangles and numbers were the building blocks of the universe. The Pythagoreans’ symbol was the pentagram (image) consisting of ten triangles “ten being a number that to them signified perfection, and the triangle being an emblem of Pythagoras famous theorem ()”. Russell tells of finding the theme of the pentagram in the iron fence of an old Druze mosque in Beirut, Lebanon.

Chapter illustration

Religions of Asia

RELIGIONS OF ASIA

Chapter illustration

Left to right: Hinduism, Buddhism, Jainism and Sikhism.

Chapter illustration

Confucianism and Taoism

Chapter illustration

The Author OCTOBER 2018

LET’S GET STARTED.

THIS ESSAY IS about the religions and philosophies that originated in south and east Asia. They are followed by a third of humanity. As will become clear, India has been the most prolific in this respect. It is the birth place of four of the seven faiths covered here: Hinduism, Buddhism, Jainism and Sikhism. Of the remaining three, two, Confucianism and Taoism took shape in China and Japan is the home of Shinto.

With the exception of Sikhism, all precede the two largest religions of today: Christianity and Islam. Apart from Confucianism, not concerned with the supernatural, each of the others sees the ‘truths’ and realities of human’s presence on earth differently from the former and even from one another.

REFERENCES

A Little History of Religion,

Book by Richard Holloway. Former bishop of Edinburgh, Scotland. Published in 2016. Source for: Hinduism, Buddhism, Jainism, Sikhism, Confucianism, Taoism and Shinto.

Ancient History Encyclopedia.

Source for : Confucianism and Taoism.

Asia Society. Source for: Confucianism.

BBC-Religions Source for: Hinduism, Buddhism, Jainism, Sikhism, Taoism and Shinto.

CNN. Source for: Hinduism.

Encyclopedia Britannica.

Source for: Sikhism, Confucianism and Shinto.

Kauai’s Hindu Monastery.

Source for: Hinduism.

Source for: Sikhism.

Source for :Buddhism and Confucianism.

KARMA, SAMSARA AND MOKSHA

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Brahma, Vishnu and Shiva

HINDUISM IS THE third largest religion worldwide after Christianity and Islam. Its adherents number 1.15 billion or 16% of global population. It predominates in India and Nepal where it constitutes 80 and 81 percent of their populations respectively. For author Holloway “…It came from the unnamed dreamers in India’s deep past”. To other scholars Hinduism is variously “a way of life…a family of religions…”

To Hindus such as the institute ‘Kauai Hindu Monastery’, in the Himalayas : “Hinduism, the world's oldest religion, has no beginning--it precedes recorded history. It has no human founder. It is a mystical religion, leading the devotee to personally experience the Truth within, finally reaching the pinnacle of consciousness where man and God are one”.

Historically an ancient and sophisticated Indian civilization, with its own culture and religion, has long existed; but very little of it is known. What is established, however, is that by about 1500 BCE the northwest of India was invaded by horse riding herdsmen from the Central Asian Steppe() in search of better living conditions and pastures. They called themselves Aryans or Noble Ones(). They brought with them their religion and scriptures. These along with sprinklings of local beliefs, gave birth to Hinduism.

Even though Hinduism has no human originator or prophet it nevertheless attributes itself to Brahman, an overarching omnipotent and omnipresent ‘Universal Soul’, “a transcendent power beyond the universe….[and] the power which upholds and supports everything….” in the words of BBC-Religions. Brahman manifests himself physically and spiritually to humans through a plethora of visible gods, each representing a side or more of his omnipotence etc. They are visible in the sense that they are depicted in images, carvings and other symbols abundantly displayed in temples and shrines. Worshipping them is an act of coming closer to Brahman, the ultimate aim of Hinduism. Of those ‘deputy’ gods a trio takes precedence over the rest: Brahma (not to confuse with Brahman), Vishnu and Shiva.

Brahma (top left), represented with four heads, four arms and a beard, was the creator of the world and all that populates it. Vishnu (top center) is the protector and preserver who ensures the continuation of all that Brahma created. He is depicted with blue skin and four arms. The third god, Shiva (top right), to the contrary, is a destroyer. He wrecks the world with the aim of re-making it with less flaws and imperfections. Shiva is represented with three eyes, wearing a cobra necklace and carrying a trident.

What are the tenets of Hinduism? There are many but the important ones are ‘karma’, ‘samsara’ and ‘moksha’. Upon death the soul of the departed reincarnates in a new body- ‘samsara’. The kind of body which the soul has migrated to depends on its deeds-‘karma’- during the previous lifetime. The cycle of birth-living-rebirth is repeated again and again, with the attributes of each successive one depending on the karma of the life just ended. Eventually after perhaps as many as 8 million such cycles, according to Holloway, the soul reaches the much desired state of ‘moksha’ when the cycles of rebirths cease and the soul is in full harmony with Brahman, the ‘Universal Soul’; its reward for achieving a state of utter unselfish, complete detachment from worldly affairs and temptations.

Holloway compares the repeating cycles to a spinning wheel on which a soul rides going round and round from one rebirth to the nest and next one after that ad infinitum. The wheel stops when that soul has arrived as just outlined. Succinctly summarized by ‘Kauai Hindu Monastery’: “Hindus believe that the soul reincarnates, evolving through many births until all karmas have been resolved, and moksha, liberation from the cycle of rebirth, is attained”.

For most Hindus worship is a private family affair. They erect a shrine at home for one or more of the gods they elect to worship in preference to others. Placed prominently in the shrine is (are) the image (s) of the god(s) concerned. Three times a day the family assembles at the shrine to recite ‘mantras’ and give offerings. Hindus, if they choose to, may perform the same devotional acts communally in temples. Worship also takes the form of meditations and pilgrimages to holy places. Most prominent among them is Benares on the Ganges River(). Whatever, the aim behind all devotional practices and rites is to stop the wheel of rebirths soonest possible. Some Hindus takes this desire to the extreme. They adopt monastic existence meaning a celibate life of meditation with no material possessions and completely detached from worldly considerations and free from its enticements.

Brahma, the creator produced the first man and the first woman from whom humans evolved (see 1 in Appendix). He saw fit, however, that the society of men should be rigidly stratified into four classes or castes with no possibility of migration from one into another except through rebirth should previous karma allow it. The four castes of Indian society are the:

‘Brahmins’, (once again not to confuse with Brahman and Brahma). They are the men of religion: Priests and teachers. They, naturally, include the very respected and revered ‘gurus’, who according to ’Kauai Hindu Monastery’ are “enlightened master[s]… essential to know the Transcendent Absolute… [to teach] personal discipline, good conduct, purification, pilgrimage, self-inquiry, meditation and surrender in God”

‘Kshatriyas’. Are rulers, elites and warriors

‘Vaishyas’. Encompassing middle classes such as traders and farmers.

‘Shudras’. Are domestic and farm labour usually at the service of the higher castes. According to BBC-Religions, this caste also includes musicians and clerks.

Below them all and outside the caste system altogether are the ‘Untouchables’; the lowest of the low. They were employed in the activities considered dirty, impure and polluting. They handled and cremated the dead, came into contact with human emissions (feces, urine, sweat and spittle) and disposed of the carcasses of cattle and other animals, among others. They were the ones “whose very shadow polluted what it fell across”, writes Holloway.

Further he, unsurprisingly , suspects racism is at the basis of the caste system. To begin with early Indian society was layered according to skin colour. The arrival of the Aryans, of lighter complexion, who looked upon indigenous populations as racially inferior, only exacerbated the divisions.

Let us repeat. Once born into a particular caste one stayed in it during the ensuing lifetime no matter what. As stated by Holloway with respect to lower castes and especially to the Untouchables: “…belief in karma and samsara took some of the despair out of it. Wandering through the lives karma determined for them, people could always hope that by living well they might improve their position next time round”.

Notwithstanding all, Hindus believe “that all life is sacred, to be loved and revered, and therefore practice ahimsa [or] non-injury, in thought, word and deed…”. Thus logically enough they also believe in non-violence()

And strikingly, as one would have expected otherwise, Hindus believe that “no religion teaches the only way to salvation above all others, but that all genuine paths are facets of God's Light, deserving tolerance and understanding”, in the words of ’Kauai Hindu Monastery’.

FOUR NOBLE TRUTHS

Chapter illustration

"I TEACH SUFFERING, its origin, cessation and path. That's all I teach". Thus spoke the Buddha 2,500 years ago. He was not a prophet, even less a god. He never claimed to be either. Instead, he was a sensitive and compassionate man enduring nearly a lifetime of hardship and privations in order to find the way for a soul to achieve ‘nirvana’ and salvation, after the fewest rebirths possible. But, first, he needed to find the means of ending the inevitable and inescapable suffering in every soul’s lifetime, an indication that the soul is not yet ready for nirvana “…a state of profound spiritual joy, without negative emotions and fears…” according to BBC-Religions.

He was born Siddhartha Gautama, in north-east India in 581 BCE, some 1500 years after the arrival of the Aryans and establishment of the Hindu religion. Buddhists have it that he was the son of royalty and necessarily belonged to the Kshatriya caste reserved for kings, aristocrats and warriors as we have seen in the previous section. Until the age of 29, he lived a sheltered and pampered life in his father’s palace, married at the age of 16 and fathered a child thereafter.

Once outside the palace for the first time, the young prince came face to face, consecutively, with life’s harsh realities. First, he encountered a sick man lying in the street, then an old man walking, bent over with the help of sticks. Third he met a funerary procession followed by the weeping wife and children of the deceased. As put by BBC-Religions “…he learned that sickness, age, and death were the inevitable fate of human beings - a fate no-one could avoid”. But Siddharta had a fourth encounter with a monk in tatters begging for food in the marketplace, smiling all the time and evidently happy. Clearly, he had chosen to forsake all worldly attachments, opting instead for an austere, existence. In Buddhist tradition these encounters are known as the ‘Four Sights’.

Greatly disturbed by the sights Gautama took it upon himself to search for the truth and meaning of the human condition. Accordingly, he left home and family to begin his quest for Enlightenment. This episode is known as the ‘Great Renunciation’.

For six years he wandered and meditated. First, he sought the advice of wise men, then moved on and spent time with ascetic monks heeding their counsel of severe austerity: “The more intensely you deny your body…the clearer your mind will become” in the words of Holloway. All to no avail: he still could not attain the blissful state he was after despite all the privations that nearly killed him. So he went off on his own and sat beneath a Bodhi (relating to figs) tree meditating and vowing not to budge until he achieved Enlightenment. This he did on the seventh day. He had reached such an elevated state in which “ignorance was destroyed, knowledge had arisen; darkness was destroyed, lightness had arisen” he is believed to have said. What is more “Rebirth is no more; I have lived the highest life; my task is done, and now for me there is no more of what I have been”. In other words, his wheel of rebirth had happily stopped. At this stage he became the Buddha or the ’Enlightened One”. The Bodhi tree under which he meditated is known to Buddhists as the ‘Tree of Awakening)’.

He came out of this experience with the ‘Four Noble truths’ of the human condition. The first and second diagnose the ills, while the third and fourth offer the cure. They are:

Inescapable suffering is the lot of humans. It begins at birth and continues with sickness, aging, dying and the unpleasantness encountered in one’s lifetime. It is also the consequence of greed, ignorance, delusions, hatreds, destructive urges. And from desires which cannot be fulfilled; and even if they are, the contentment they bring do not last long; soon new cravings arise. These are the first two ‘Noble Truths’.

With the third and fourth, the Buddha offers the good news that suffering can be eliminated provided one’s lifetime is spent with the: “right belief, right resolve, right speech, right behaviour, right occupation, right effort, right contemplation, right concentration”, in the words of Holloway . Each one of these is attained via ‘dos’ and ‘don’ts’ like, for example right speech means telling the truth, not slandering anyone and shunning gossip etc.

Next, how does one go through life, burdened with the first and second Truths , while abiding by the last two? Well “There are two extremes to avoid…life of pleasure and its lusts…The other is life of self-torture”. The ‘Middle Path’, between the two, is the one that will lead to nirvana. In this respect, the life of Buddhist monks is the “quickest way to stop the wheel of rebirth” and achieve nirvana. Otherwise, one must lead as ethical a life as possible in the hope that after rebirth one exists as a monk or nun (see 2 in Appendix).

Following the Buddha’s death his disciples spread the faith wide and far across Asia. Today they number nearly 500,000,000 souls. Cambodia, Thailand and Myanmar are overwhelmingly Buddhist with 97, 93 and 80 per cent respectively of their populations belonging to the faith. At 185,000,000 Chinese Buddhists are the largest of all though, they constitute only 16 percent of that country’s gigantic population.

Similarly to Hindus, Buddhists assign a place in their homes for worship facing a statue or image of the Buddha. Alternately they may attend communal service in a temple listening to monks chanting.

WHITE-CLAD AND SKY-CLAD MONKS

Chapter illustration

JAINISM IS A minority religion of and in India. It numbers no more than 4.5 million adherents in a country of more than one billion inhabitants. It is yet another reaction to the depressing unending cycles of rebirth. The name, Jainism “comes from the Sanskrit verb meaning to conquer”. Its founder was Vardamana (599-527 BCE), aka Mahavira or “great hero”. Reportedly, he was the last of 24 predecessors, called ‘jinas’, who had , “achieved such mastery over their desires that they gained enlightenment [or ,nirvana’]” .

He was born in the same region of India as the Buddha. He too was a prince at birth who rejected the life of privilege to seek Enlightenment. Also, similarly to the Buddha he decided that human desires and cravings were the causes of lifetimes of suffering. Like Buddhism, Jainism seeks to teach the quickest and shortest path to ‘nirvana’ with the fewest cycles of rebirths as possible. But, whereas the Buddha chose the middle path between runaway hedonism and extreme self-denial Mahavira, to the contrary, decided that the path to follow was the one of utmost austerity and asceticism. So how do Jains go about it?

Let’s begin with the sacredness of all forms and shapes of life. Of equal worth and value to humans (regardless of gender and social class, including the untouchables), are animals (whether they walked, swam or flew, all the way to tiniest insect) and plants of all kinds. They all have souls and should be treated with respect and compassion and saved from harm. Thus Jains are not supposed to hunt, fish, or, indeed pluck fruits or vegetables. Further, not even vermin like scorpions, cockroaches are to be harmed nor, as stated by Holloway, “are they to swat the mosquito that bites them on the cheek or the bee that stings them on the neck”. They are to be picked up gently and removed out of harm’s way to themselves and to their hosts.

Fasting is a commendable act in Jainism. It is , however, left to the individual as to when, how and for how long to fast. This act cleanses the body and mind; it is also an emulation of Mahavira, the founder, who reportedly fasted non-stop for more than six months. Strikingly, the ultimate expression of a Jain’s faith is ‘santhara’ or willful starvation to death. Indeed, BBC-Religions describes the contentment and happiness in the family and community of one whose grandmother has embarked on ‘santhara’(). “I'm very happy, in fact everyone in the family is very happy” he is reported to have commented, adding: “She has brought name and fame to our family…. When my grandmother passes away, we will celebrate by singing religious songs”. Further, it is common for the local media to report the event and praise the dead for his/her act which has rid his/her of all sins hence “liberating the soul from the cycle of birth, death and rebirth”.

‘Ahimsa’ or non-violence is a central tenet of Jainism. BBC-Religions explains that it means “to be without harm; to be utterly harmless, not only to oneself and others, but to all forms of life, from the largest mammals to the smallest bacteria”. Doing harm is not limited to its physical manifestations but it can also be caused by the spoken word and thought processes. Equally abhorrent in this respect are to “abuse, oppress, enslave, insult, torment, torture or kill any creature of living being” as well as “greed, pride and jealousy”.

There are further tough requirements in Jainism. Among them are chastity and worldly possession. In the case of the first, it is justified on the premise that sexual drive is so powerful that it distracts people from following the required path to salvation. Similarly, the desire for wealth and for the accumulation of worldly things are never satiated, the more one has the more he desires. They, too, divert ultimate liberation of the soul.

Jainism’s most faithful adherents are its monks and nuns. They are the ascetics who live ‘by the book’. Monks and nuns can only survive on fruits which have fallen from trees, of their own volition so to speak. Each one carries a broom made of soft feathers so as to gently sweep from their path insects, worm etc. to save them from being inadvertently crushed underfoot. “Some even wear masks over their mouths to avoid harming insects by inhaling them”. They live chastely, have no desires and no worldly possessions except the bare minimum to survive. What is more, they fast to atone for any sins they may have committed. All this, however, does not imply they live reclusively in some monastery. To the contrary, they reside within communities to teach their members the ways of Jainism. In other words: to be role models.

Clearly, lay Jains are given more leeway. Nevertheless they must not stray too far from the righteous way, in the hope that in the next life they reincarnate as monks, the last stage on the way to ‘nirvana’. Thus at the outset they are vegetarian. They take utmost care not to step on or drive over any creature. Married couples, understandably, are allowed to have children. Chastity to them merely means faithfulness to one’s wedded partner and “ [avoid] sexual thoughts… not look at pornography or sexually stimulating material, so that they can retain a clear mind, unclouded by desire”. Consistently with this, no sex is allowed before marriage. As for ownership of worldly goods, it must be limited to the bare minimum commensurate with decent living within their communities and , indeed, within overwhelmingly non-Jain society.

From the preceding treatise, one would, correctly, expect that Jains’ temples are simple enough places of worship. Indeed, the majority are. Nonetheless, there are a few large ones of lavish construction and richly decorated with images and statues; quite at odds with the tenets of austerity and asceticism just described. BBC- Religions relates the experience of one European visitor thus :“In the compact, exquisitely carved, marble temple… a most devotional atmosphere prevailed...the faithful were coming… for morning prayers… having specially bathed and dressed in clean white clothes, some with the masks [ to avoid inhaling insects]”.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Jainism, nowadays consists of two sects: the Digambaras whose monks are ‘sky-clad’ or naked and the Svetambaras whose monks and nuns are ‘white clad’ or dressed in white. The former, favour bareness on account of to their belief that it is compatible with austerity and in emulation of Mahavira who lived undressed. It, logically, follows they do not accept nuns since they cannot go naked for obvious reasons. Thus, the Digambaras consider women second class citizens whose souls can achieve liberation from the wheel only after they are reborn as men. The Svetambaras, on the contrary preach equality between genders.

Despite all the privations and harsh living the believers have to go through to achieve a happy ending, they recognize they do not have the whole truth: only one part of it. Indeed, they concede that other faiths hold different parts of the truth. In this respect they relate the parable of the six blind men and the elephant, reported by Holloway. Six blind men were asked to describe an elephant by touching parts of it. Then depending on the part felt : leg, trunk, tail ear etc. each one described the whole animal as a pillar, pipe, rope and hand fan. But no one can visualize the truth of the whole animal.

GURU GRANTH SAHIB

Chapter illustration

THE ENLIGHTENED MASTER, or Guru Nanak was born in 1469 to a family of merchants’ hence, in the third tier down the Hindu caste system. He hailed from the Punjab in northwestern India and was the founder of Sikhism. Presently with 20 to 25 million adherents, it is the fourth largest religion in India after Hinduism, Islam and Christianity .

Guru Nanak was the third Indian Hindu, after the Buddha and Mahavira to seek the curtailment of the number of cycles of rebirth before attaining salvation. In his days, coincidentally, India was becoming acquainted with Islam introduced, initially, by warlords from Afghanistan, who eventually founded the Muslim Mughal Empire that ruled India from 1556 to 1857. Already versed in Hinduism, Guru Nanak decided to learn about Islam, before making up his mind about the right path to follow. In this respect, he is reported by Holloway to have gone all the way to Mecca.

In the end the guru was satisfied with neither. Eventually, declaring to have had “a mystical encounter with God”, he decided on a third alternative partly Hindu, partly Muslim and partly his own contribution. From Islam he adopted monotheism or the one god in preference to Hindu polytheism. From Hinduism he accepted ‘karma’ or the law of the deed and ‘samsara’ the multi-rebirths of the soul until salvation while utterly rejecting the layering of society into a caste system. He sarcastically referred to the privileged priests occupying its topmost echelon as: “God’s sales representatives”; in other words un-genuine peddlers of religion.

Specifically, Guru Nanak claimed that God said to him “I [God] release you from the cycle of birth, death and rebirth; he that sets eyes on you [on Nanak] with faith shall be saved…I grant you salvation”. God then described his mission as to “go back to the evil world and teach men and women to pray, to give in charity and live cleanly. Do good to the world and redeem it in the age of sin”. Before he died, in 1539 , Guru Nanak nominated his successor, who in turn selected the guru after him and so forth until the tenth Guru Gobind Singh (1666-1708) . All of them are revered by Sikhs everywhere “because they delivered the divine word of the one, timeless God”, in the words of Sikhnet.

Gobind Singh was the last guru; he did not choose a successor. Instead, he told the Sikh community that after his demise there will no longer be a human successor to intermediate between them and God. In lieu of they will have, to guide them forever, Guru ‘Granth Sahib’, consisting of the “writings of the earlier Gurus…collated along with those of Hindu and Muslim spiritual figures whose teachings strongly resonated with Sikh beliefs”, according to Sikhnet. Significantly, his enduring achievement was his decision that all Sikhs would share the one and only surname of ‘Singh’, meaning lion, for males and ‘Kaur’, meaning princess for females. All from a pointed belief in the equality of all before God and as rejection of the practice in India and, no doubt elsewhere, of associating a surname with a social or a caste tier.

In the meantime, from the founder to the last guru, Sikhism evolved as political, social and religious realities of his day dictated. For example the sixth guru(1595-1644) created an army to defend the minority Sikh community against persecution and violence by the ruling Muslim dynasty in particular. The last guru, Gobind Singh initiated the construction of fortified places and established military training for the same purpose.

And so, by the early 18th century the Sikh community of the Punjab had achieved their physical , spiritual and societal manifestations that remain unchanged to this day. Spiritually, Sikhism “…is centred round [the] need to understand and experience God, and eventually become one with God”. To this end, however, Guru Nanak and his successors did not find it necessary to follow the Middle Path of the Buddha nor the extreme austerity of Jainism. To the contrary the way to becoming one with God may be realized by leading a ‘normal’ life in harmony within one’s multi-faith society while all the time abiding and respecting the teachings of the ‘Guru Granth Sahib’, the holy book. Specifically, the Sikh way, means:

Having God always present in one’s mind and heart.

Communicating directly with God: in Sikhism there are no priests, monks or clergy whatsoever.

Working hard and making a living for yourself and you family with honesty and dedication.

Treating all humans as equal before God.

Helping the needy generously and being of service to others.

Equally the Sikh way means staying away from tobacco and alcohol to the extent of avoiding work in, or association with institutions dealing with either. It also means avoiding temptations of whichever kind, not being taken by unnecessary worldly things and finally avoiding anger and unwarranted pride. As stated by BBC-Religions : “If a person can overcome these vices they are on the road to liberation [of the soul from rebirths]”.

Sikh faithfuls are required to rise three hours before dawn, bathe then spend time concentrating his or her mind on God and praying. More mundanely, a Sikh is bound to abide by what is called the 5 K’s consisting of:

Chapter illustration

‘Kesh’: uncut hair. Cutting one’s hair is rejection of God’s gift.Also holy men have historically been depicted with long hair and beard. Sikhs keep it all under their distinctive turban.

‘Khanga’: wooden comb. Under the turban to keep the hair tidy. It also symbolizes cleanliness.

‘Kara: steel bracelet. Since it has no starting or ending; it signifies that God is infinite. Can also be interpreted as a link in a chain binding the whole Sikh community together.

‘Kaccha’: Underwear for soldiers. It designed so as not to hinder horse riding in combat.

‘Kirpan”: sword. Kept under clothing. Symbolizes fight against injustice and other wrongs.

Sikhs pray either privately or communally, with the latter more meritorious. It takes place in a temple called ‘Gurdwara’. In group worship, either a man or a woman may lead the congregation in prayers. Neither belongs to a clergy. Instead, they are ordinary community members with adequate enough religious knowledge. Incidentally, Sikh women are equal to men in every respect. As stated by Sikhnet: “The Sikh faith is committed to the equality of women… as it defines God as gender neutral… There is no activity in a gurdwara or within the community that is permitted to a man but not to a woman. There is no religious function from which women are barred at any time of their lives”.

A gurdwara, is not simply a place of worship. It is also a community center, a venue for ceremonies, a school to teach children the tenets of their religion and most notably a place to eat for whoever needs a meal, free of charge. This is so because Guru Nanak “got people to eat together” according to Holloway. By people he meant absolutely all irrespective of gender, colour, religion, caste and social position. For this reason every ‘gurdwara’ has a kitchen which is as sacred as the rest. The simple meals cooked there() are meant to be consumed in groups. According to Holloway, this is in sharp contrast, at least at that time, with prevailing religions which dictated who it was permissible to eat with and those considered unclean whose food could not be touched. To Guru Nanak, this taboo, and others were wrong because “they built walls of separation between people in the name of God who loved them all”. And to symbolize that all are welcome every gurdwala has four entrance doors located at the points of the compass like welcoming arms.

Finally, like we have seen with the tale of the six blind men and the elephant, Sikhs do not rank theirs as the only true path to God. On the contrary, they accept that there are different paths equally valid followed by others. Consequently they do not proselytize or seek converts. On the other hand, outsiders wishing to convert to Sikhism are welcomed.

GOLDEN RULE

Chapter illustration

WE LEAVE INDIA and move to China the land of the ‘Master Philosopher’, Confucius. He was born in 551 BCE as Kong Qiu. He worked in the civil service in one of the warring states which constituted China then. He was a perspicacious and compassionate person who witnessed the wrongs, injustices and chaos of the socio-political scene in the mutually antagonistic autonomous Chinese states of his times. All this made Confucius take it upon himself to attempt the remedial of the ills of his land.

Unlike Hinduism and Buddhism and the rest, Confucianism is not a religion in that it does not concern itself with gods, creation, reincarnation and the afterlife. Instead, it is a philosophy embodying ethics , morals etc. in the context of human relations, education and governance. It has no places of worship and no prayers to be recited or chanted. In the words of Asia Society, Confucian churches are the “family, school, and state” and its clergy are “parents, teachers, and [government] officials”. In a nutshell it is concerned with “Life [being] lived well for its own sake, and not just as a prelude to what may happen to us after life….” according to Holloway. Asked, once why he did not concern himself with the metaphysics of human existence as was happening next door in India, Confucius is reported to have replied “We do not yet know how to serve man, how can we know about serving the spirits?.. We don't know yet about life, how can we know about death?”

Confucius spent his life preaching. To begin with he did not accept the prevailing wisdom of his time that those born to nobility were morally superior to others. He proclaimed, to the contrary, that all humans are born equal and that only upbringing and character decided one’s place in and usefulness to his society. He told rulers and aristocrats of the virtues of just and enlightened governance, stressing that the first duty of those in power is to care for the welfare and wellbeing of commoners rather than for their own self- interests. Those at the top should be exemplary in conduct so as to be looked up upon by citizenry as role models. He emphasized the importance of appointing moral and educated government officers to serve the people; subject, beforehand to successfully passing civil service examinations. Anyone, never mind his social position should be entitled to apply. Civil service should no longer continue to be the de facto right of the sons of aristocrats, irrespectively of character and education. Clearly he was proclaiming the principle of meritocracy in the service of Chinese people.

He was one of the earliest to give meaning to the ‘Golden Rule’: of treating/doing to others as you would like them to treat/ do to you(). This attitude is defined as ‘Ren’. To Holloway it “is the noblest behaviour a human being is capable of. It is to put others before oneself”. As for Encyclopedia Britannica, ‘Ren’ “characterizes the [comportment] and behaviour that a [typical] human being exhibits in order to promote a flourishing human community”. And, finally from the mouth of Confucius himself as“…wishing to be established himself, seeks also to establish others; wishing to be enlarged himself, he seeks also to enlarge others”.’ When it comes to settling disputes and solving disagreements which inevitably arise between members of a society, Confucius preaches courtesy, patience and putting oneself in the shoes of the other. Key to ‘Ren’ is compassion; without it a social cohesion falls apart.

Confucius proclaimed that family cohesion is sacrosanct. No one is an island. From the day one is born he belongs to a grouping from which he expects rearing and towards which he has obligations to further its interests even at the cost of scarifying one’s own wishes and needs. In consequence, he preached obedience, love , respect and care by junior to senior members. Otherwise known as filial piety, it does not, however mean complete and blind submissiveness by the younger to the older but more in line of “recognition of and reverence for the source of life”. To the ‘Master Philosopher’, the family is the stepping stone to a just and ethical governance, with the ruler, the father of all. Asked once about the responsibility of the latter Confucius said that he owed to his subjects “sufficient food [and] sufficient armament”. Moreover he must be perceived by his subjects as caring, ethical and fair. The ruler, in return, should expect “sufficient confidence of the people” together with their obedience and respect and consequently their willingness to fight and die under his banner. In the final analysis, Confucius ranks confidence in the ruler above all else since “…There have been deaths [from starvation] from time immemorial, but no state can exist without the confidence of the people”.

Unconcern about what follows death does not, however mean indifference to dead ancestors and loved ones. Ancestors are revered and a death in the family is the occasion of great sadness and long periods of mourning. According to Holloway, it can mean for the children of the deceased “…more than two years, during which they would not work, have sex, eat any but the simplest food, wear nice clothes or generally enjoy themselves”.

Following Confucius demise in 479 BCE, his contemporary disciples and those who came after them assembled the Master’s thoughts and preaching in what is known as the ‘Analects’, the sacred scripture of Confucianism. Although these ideas won respect among all , it was not till 100 BCE that Confucian philosophy and teachings were adopted as the official state ‘religion’ . By then, China had become a large unified empire. State Confucianism was reflected in the separation of power between the emperor, the government and the judiciary. Thousands of educational institutions were opened across China with the Analects as their curriculum. And state supervised examinations were set up for the selection of civil servants from all classes of society. Ordinary Chinese family worked hard to make their sons eligible since the position brought with it prestige, recognition and a good income. These examinations remained in practice until 1905.

As for its status as official state creed, Confucianism remained so until the demise of the Republic of China in 1912. The People’s Republic of China which followed in 1949 banned all religions including Confucianism for fear of competition with communism the new state creed. This, notwithstanding, Confucian ethics , morals and way of life remain very much alive in the homes of China’s multitudes. More, in the whole of East Asia those of other religious affiliations, such as Buddhists, Muslims or Christians “seldom…cease to be Confucian” in spirit as entered in Encyclopedia Britannica. Some even credit the rise of the Asian Tigers (Hong Kong, Taiwan, Singapore and South Korea) toward the end of the last century to the Confucian work ethics.

I want to close with a remarkable statement by Voltaire (1694-1778), one of the great luminaries of the era of ‘Enlightenment’ of 18th century Europe: “Confucius has no interest in falsehood; he did not pretend to be prophet; he claimed no inspiration; he taught no new religion; he used no delusions; flattered not the emperor under whom he lived”. In other words the thoughts of the Master Philosopher travelled far and wide and influenced the thinking of those coming centuries after him.

WAY OF THE TAO

Chapter illustration

WAY OF THE TAO is the philosophical basis of a minority religion of and in China. Its roots predate Confucianism; they go back deep into the philosophies of ancient China. And whereas BBC-Religions affirms it has no founder and no starting date, Holloway, to the contrary credits a philosopher Laozi (600-524 BCE) for establishing its final shape. Both sources, however, agree that the Way of the Tao cannot be explained with words. One knows he has it once he has it; like learning to walk, speak or ride a bicycle.

Apparently, Laozi (Chinese: Lao Tse) became disgusted with the corrupted socio-political situation in his country, while marveling at the coherence and complementariness of nature and the Universe, likened by Holloway to an orchestra of dozens of instruments and players working harmoniously together. “Balance, timing and harmony: these are the marks of the Tao”. Humans however are at odds with all three. It is not because they are intrinsically bad, but their “self- conscious minds” make them behave badly. They need to be guided and properly educated so as to fit in the Tao way.

Socially and politically, Laozi considered that balance and harmony are lost when people are lorded over by others. He targets in particular, those who see theirs as the only way, in politics, religion etc. and try to force it on others. Not surprisingly, he is against all wars: they destroy balance and harmony. In nature plants and animals follow their inclinations without being told to or shown how. Why can’t humans be the same. In other words, as pointed out by Holloway, Laozi was preaching what is, nowadays, known as anarchism (). In practice, however, he was not preaching complete abolition of government but rather, favoured one that was in harmony and balance with its people.

Taoism has many gods and goddesses, the senior ones are called ‘Celestial Worthies’. They are helped in their work by a plethora of junior deities. But they are not the all-powerful all-knowing gods of other religions; they are not credited with any act of creation or control over the universe. They arrived on the scene simultaneously with the coming of the universe in which they reside. In reality they play second fiddle to the Tao which itself is not a god to be worshipped.

So much so that humans themselves can become gods through immortality. The latter does not mean living forever, in the same body. Rather, it signifies moving to the neighbourhood of the ‘Celestial Worthies’. To achieve immortality one’s body and soul (Tao makes no distinction between them) must be purified and brought closer and closer to the universe. According to BBC-Religions body/soul purification entails “intensive meditation and trance training as well as more radical forms of diet and other longevity practices” .

For the majority of believers who cannot realistically aim for immortality, the Way of the Tao, nevertheless, requires them to lead a life such as to achieve “complete harmony with the universe”. That harmony results from caring for and helping others. Conversely they must avoid acts and behaviour that society finds abhorrent and condemns. Further, Tao also recommends abstention from eating meat , beans and grain and from drinking alcohol. But short of achieving immortality as explained, there does not seem to be a Buddhist like nirvana awaiting to receive one after death.

As well as deities, there are temples and monasteries with priests and priestesses. They are empowered to carry out duties relating to “worship, healing, exorcism, intercession, purification, divination and

so on…. A simple, ascetic lifestyle is the norm in… monasteries….The time schedule is very rigid: a typical day begins at 3:00 A.M. and ends at 9:00 P.M. It consists of several periods of seated meditation, worship, meals, and work…” according to authors Livia Kohn and Michael Lafargue ().

KAMI OF THE LAND OF THE RISING SUN

Chapter illustration

SHINTO HAS BEEN the intrinsic creed of Japanese from times immemorial. In other words, it has existed, as far as historians can tell, since the day of Japan’s earliest inhabitants. Shinto has remained an exclusively national creed. At no time has there been a desire to spread it beyond the confines of Japan.

Perhaps, this is not surprising considering that while, in the rest of the world, as far back as prehistory, kingdoms and empires came and went, religions appeared and disappeared and active international trade was taking place, the people of Nippon(), isolated as they were in the Pacific Ocean, believed their ‘Land of the Rising Sun’ was the whole world; that nothing else existed. This remained so till they were visited by their Chinese neighbours in 600 CE.

Japanese legend has it that at the beginning there was only the sea. One day God Izanagi and Goddess Izanami stirred the mud at the bottom with long poles and out emerged the 6,852 islands composing Japan. The pair had three children : the Sun Goddess, the Moon God and the Storm God. The grandson of the Sun Goddess became the Emperor of Japan. In ‘Shinto’ they are called ‘kami’ or sacred spirits present in everything human, animal and vegetal. In other word, Shinto is animism()

Kami have nothing in common with the gods we usually meet. For a start “Kami are not divine like the transcendent deities found in many religions. Kami are not omnipotent. Kami are not perfect - they sometimes make mistakes and behave badly. Kami don't exist in a supernatural universe…[Instead] they live in the same world as human beings and the world of nature”, in the words of BBC-Religions. Further, kami are responsive to how humans react to them: “if they are treated properly they will intervene in our lives to bring benefits like health, business success, and good exam results”.

This being so, then, logically enough, Shinto has no god(s) to worship , love and fear. It has no commandments and sacred writings or book to follow. It is not concerned with the afterlife and promises no rewards in heaven or eternal suffering in hell after death. Curiously, it does not stand in the way of its adherents from following other religions most notably Buddhism and Confucianism introduced by the Chinese as already mentioned(). The former, in particular has gained grounds so that as of today the majority of the nearly 130,000,000 Japanese follow Shinto, Buddhism or both.

From the 6th century the descent of the Emperor from one of the higher kami and his continuing relationship with them, was recognized. Even so, this sacred status “didn't make him a god himself, but rather imposed on him the obligation of carrying out certain rituals and devotions in order to ensure that the kami looked after Japan properly and ensured its prosperity” according to BBC Religions. Nevertheless, in the eyes of the Japanese, this hallowed imperial status meant that the Emperor was to be obeyed and even worshipped despite that he was not an all-powerful and all-knowing divinity. In 1868, the status of the Emperor was elevated to become divine and Shinto became a state religion at one with Japanese nationalism. A great deal changed with the defeat of Japan in 1945 and the dictates of the American occupation authorities.

Shinto shrines are essential places of worship. According to Holloway there are more than 100,000 shrines spread over the country. Some of them are very modest indeed while others are richer or more ornate. Shrines are generally built in pleasant surroundings such as in forests, near streams etc. They can even be a rock or any other natural object (see images above). Whatever their degree of opulence, shrines are where kami live; they are places of peace of mind as well as of communication with the kami, making offerings and requesting help for success, happiness etc. and to give thanks for good results and outcomes already achieved. Worship is equally valid in privately at home where a place is set aside for this purpose. What is more, a Shinto-Buddhist family will typically have two such places one for each faith.

Purity is another essential aspect of Shinto. Humans are born pure but during their lifetimes they become physically and spiritually polluted. They either commit sins, are affected by events, caused by evil spirits, or by “anything connected with death or the dead” . No wonder then, that funerals are low key among Shinto believers and cemeteries are located away from shrines. Those, however, of dual Shinto- Buddhist affiliation resort to Buddhist practices in these circumstances.

In the end, Shinto is all about ethics and way of life. Every aspect of Japanese social and political life and acts are guided by it. According to BBC-Religions: “Shinto is involved in every aspect of Japanese culture: It touches ethics, politics, family life and social structures, artistic life (particularly drama and poetry) and sporting life (Sumo wrestling), as well as spiritual life”.

ONE LAST WORD

WHAT STRUCK ME about the religions we have looked at are two themes that keep recurring. The first is the consideration paid to Nature and to other-than-human dwellers: animals and plants. Secondly, is acceptance that theirs is not the only way to salvation. That there may well be other paths, equally valid, which may lead there. Unless I am mistaken Christianity and Islam do not concern themselves with Nature, and most certainly consider any other creed a heresy pure and simple for which people have been killed.

APPENDIX

1-Naughtiness of Brahma

BBC-RELIGIONS RELATES one legend according to which Brahma created a woman to help him with his work. On arrival she happened to be so beautiful that she unwittingly caused him to be distracted away from his important work. She tried to avoid him but, in order to keep her all the time in his lascivious gaze, Brahma sprouted four extra heads totaling five altogether, one in each direction and one on top of them. Even when she turned herself into an animal he reciprocated by changing himself into its male version. Eventually Shiva got fed up with Brahma’s lecherous behaviour, cut off his fifth head and placed a curse on him so as to be no longer worshipped.

AS BUDDHISM SPREAD across Asia it changed depending partly on new geography and local philosophy it came in contact with; while, all the time, keeping the fundamental teachings of the Buddha intact.

A case in point is Tibet. Nicknamed the ‘Roof of the World, it is located at an average altitude of 4,900 m in the Himalaya Mountains and includes Mount Everest at 8,848 maltitude. Long isolated, it is not too much of an exaggeration to to sayt it is a huge Buddhist temple. Among its peculiarities are its Dalai Lamas or “teacher[s] spiritually as deep as the ocean”: Tibet’s spiritual and political leaders.

As stated by ‘Biography’ Dalai Lamas are…enlightened beings who have postponed their own afterlife and chosen to take rebirth to benefit humanity. " In other words they have, voluntarily, forsaken nirvana in favour of reincarnation back on earth to guide people toward salvation. In the wake of a Dalai lama’s demise a search, which may take months or longer, begins for his reincarnation and successor. Once located and tested the candidate is placed in a monastery to learn about his forthcoming duties before being enshrined.

Consider the case of the current Dalai Lama, a well-liked and respected person by all and a Nobel Peace Prize winner. He was born Lhamo Thondup in 1935 to a peasant family, one of 16 children. When the 13th Dalaiu Lama died, a search was organized for his reincarnation. Six months thence the lookouts located Lhamo, aged 2, and decided he was the one for some signs the saw in him. At age six his education began and nine years later, at 15, he became the 14th Dalai Lama.

Chapter illustration

3-Hirohito, emperor of Japan, loss of status

IN THE AFTERMATH of the two atomic bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki in the summer of 1945 and the ensuing surrender of Japan to the Americans, Emperor Hirohito (1901-1989) made this declaration to the Japanese people: “The ties between Us[USA] and Our people have always stood on mutual trust and affection. They do not depend upon mere legends and myths. They are not predicated on the false conception that the Emperor is divine, and that the Japanese people are superior to other races and fated to rule the world”. Notwithstanding this statement made under duress, the emperor to this day is a revered, respected and influential figure in Japanese spirituality.

Chapter illustration

European Paganism

EUROPEAN PAGANISM

The Author September, 2025

REFERENCES

-AI Overview-(Google). **Germanic paganism-afterlife. **Pre-Christian Germanic peoples. **Germanic paganism timeline. **Paganism in ancient Greece. **Slavic Paganism. **Slavic ancestor worship. **Celts. -Ancient History Encyclopedia. **Roman religion. -Encyclopedia, com. **Afterlife: Germanic concepts. **Slavic religion. -Encyclopedia Britannica. **Germanic religion and mythology. **Greek religion. **Roman religion. **Slavic religion. **Practices, and institutions in Celtic religion. -History Timelines. **Celtic peoples timeline. -The Collector. **Ancient Germanic culture. **Slavic Mythology. -The Metropolitan Museum. **Greek gods and religious practices. -World History Encyclopedia. **Ancient Greek religion. **Ancient Celtic society. **Ancient Celtic religion. -Wikipedia. **Germanic paganism. **Ancient Greek religion. **Religion in Ancient Rome. **Slavic paganism. **Ancient Celtic religion

EUROPEAN PAGANISM

This narrative is about pre-Christinity gods, goddesses, beliefs rituals and practices of Celtic, Germanic, and Slavic tribal societies of Europe and of the Greek city states and the Roman hegemon. Historians identify them as pagans.

Celtic peoples originated in eastern Europe roundabout 1300 BCE. They migrated westwards and by 800 BCE, had settled in what is today Ireland, Scotland, Wales, Belgium and France-( where they are known as Gaul). From the mid 50’s BCE, they were invaded by the Romans.

Celts were tribal peoples who mostly practiced agriculture and raised domestic farm animals . Still among them too, were craftsmen and traders. Their society was hierarchical, with the king on top and the common people at the bottom. In between, in order of importance, were the land owning aristocrats, the druids- (clergy)-, warriors and artisans.

One important characteristic of Celtic society was the obligation of the rich and powerful to look after the interests of the common people. They provided for them, sheltered and protected them in hard times. In return, the common people gave service to their benefactors as well as their loyalty. This reciprocation ensured the harmony of tribal life.

Before migrating to western Europe, Celtic clans and tribes spoke the same language and shared a common religion. But their dispersion, inevitably led to diversification in accents and dialects as well as habits and customs. In the matter of beliefs, however, they kept enough in common to enable speaking of a Celtic religion.

As, all early humans, Celts were polytheistic. They worshipped about 400 gods and goddesses between local and pan-Celtic ones. The major ones being Belanus-(god of the sun, healing, and pastoralism)-, Cernunnos-(‘lord of wild things’)-, Epona-(goddess of horses and asses)-, and Toutatis-(god of the tribe and people).

To the Celts, the gods and goddesses controlled and monitored every aspect and details of their daily lives including, according to World History Encyclopedia “warfare, sovereignty, tribal identity… healing…protection of mothers, children, fishermen, and hunting”. The deities were also entrusted with the wellbeing of trees, forests, rivers and lakes and certain animals.

Celts had a special reverence for rivers, lakes etc. as they believed water was the “conduit to the Otherworld [afterlife]”, according New World Encyclopadia. Other inanimate objects of Nature they venerated were groves of oak trees. And they had a special consideration for horses and other animals. So much so that some scholars believe that Celts were animist-( i.e they believed that everything in Nature had a soul and spirit).

A gruesome tradition among Celts was the harvesting the heads of friends and foes. They kept them as trophies and proudly exhibited them. Some scholars surmise that “the Celts venerated the head as a symbol of divinity and the powers of the otherworld, and regarded it as the most important bodily member, the very seat of the soul”, as reported by Wikipedia.

To appease, thank, ask for favours and avert natural disasters, the Celts made offerings to their deities. They offered food, pottery, weapons with which they won battles and even dear jewellery items. They could variously be buried or thrown in rivers at sacred places.

More, they sacrificed animals from their livestock at the altars of the gods. The victims could either be burnt, buried alive or left in the open to decompose, Or, they could be shared with the gods. In other words, after feasting upon the killed animal, leaving the leftovers to the gods.

Chapter illustration

Although, not very often, Celts practiced human sacrifice, when dire circumstances warranted it. Candidates were enemy captives or undesirable elements of tribal society. The, gruesome techniques varied. The gaul, for example packed the victims inside a huge wicker human-like figures-(image)- before burning the whole.

Celts believed in a life after death, similar to, but devoid of the pains and miseries of, their current ones. This being so, they had no fear of dying given that souls migratd to a better world. For example, Ancient Irish believed that after death they would be met by beautiful maidens with whom they would sail in a glass boat, on a one way joutney to a place of everlasting happiness.

It being so, it is to be expected that the dead were buried with much of their erstwhile wordly goods for use in the afterlife. The image shows the tomb of the rich and powerful within which the body of the dead went with” personal possessions, weapons, armour, tools, eating utensils… board games, extra clothing, foodstuffs….precious objects” according to World History Encyclopedia.

Druids-(those “knowing the oak tree”) were perhaps the best recognized members of any Celtic community.They were greatly respected for their perceived wisdom and eruditions. As such they were looked upon as the interpreters of the wills of the gods. They were the priests, keepers of history and traditions and readers of the future. It took as many as 20 years of learning to become a druid. Given their status,they were exempt from fighting and they purposely looked different from others in their communities by wearing white robes-(image).

They officiated at ceremonies of presenting offerings and sacrifice to the gods. More. They were believed to be able to foretell the future from the way the blood of sacrified victims gushed out and from studying the disembowelled viscera.

Druids’ usual abodes were the forests were they congregated, an concocted medical potions with mistletoe from a sacred oak tree.

Germanic paganism

Germanic paganism began its migration to Europe from about 900 BCE. Ultimately it occupied the areas shown blue on the map. Namely the present day countries of Germany, Austria, the Netherlands, England, and Scandinavia-(Sweden,Norway, and Denmark). In the words of the ‘Collector’ “…from the icy north where the fjords of Norway….to the deep, dark forests of Central Europe…”

It goes without saying that the commonality of language, customs, habits and religion they shared at the beginning, changed with time as they dispersed and occupied different European niches. Yet the fundamentals in matters of religion, rites and worship endured.

They worshipped a number gods, giving them offerings and sacrificing at their altars both animals and humans. These gods, according to Wikipedia did not differ from humans both physically and socio- politically: they were born, lived and died. Nonetheless, they remained supernatural creatures with superhuman senses-( seeing and hearing etc.)-,strength, power and capabilities to influence events.

Germanic gods had to deal with other supernatural creatures such as elves-(… creature…typically represented as a small… elusive figure in human form with pointed ears, magical powers etc.), dwarves-(… a mythical  race of short, stocky humanlike creatures)-, an giants. The latter were powerful creatures, associated with strong natural events such as storms. Importantly, they were arch-enemies of the gods and not well disposed towards humans.

Of the large pantheon of Germanic gods, the most consequential were Odin, Thor, Frigg and more: -* One eyed Odin was of the father of all and the god of war . Warriors killed in battle joined him in his abode of ‘Valhalla’. He, also valued wisdom and sacrificed his eye to gain it.He rode an eight legged horse across the skies. In one of the Germanic legends, Odin is the creator of both, the world and the first humans. First, having slayed one primordial-(having always existed)-giant, Odin and his two brothers built the world from his body parts. According to AI Overview “[his] flesh became the earth, his blood the sea, his bones the mountains, and his hair the trees. They also used his skull to create the sky, and his brains to make the clouds”. Subsequently, Odin with two other godly helpers made the first man and woman from two dead logs on the seashore. According to Britannica, “They endowed them with breath, reason, hair, an fair  countenance…”

-*Thor was the son of Odin. Of ample size and great strength, he fought and defeated the giants and other wicked creatures. He was the god of thunder and other weather phenomena. While the scourge of evil creatures, he was well disposed towards common people, and protected them.

-*Frigg was the wife of Odin. Goddess of marriage, motherhood and the family. Friday,the sixth day of the week is named after her.

Theirs was a tribal society based on clans and kinship. The chief economic activity was farming. At the top was the king. He was selected by a a group of people who could trace their ancestry to the founders of the tribe. A council of these people met regularly to deliberate on matters of importance for the tribe, to resolve disputes between tribesmen and to decide on the innocence or guilt of a tribal member accused of deviating from the code of conduct acceptable to the tribe. If convicted, he/she was normally banished unless he/she had committed treason or an act of cowardice, in which case he/she would be hanged or drowned.

Germanic tribes believed in life after death. But, given their diversity it manifested itself in different forms. For example, in one version, warriors who died in combat were assembled in the battlefield by maidens at the service of ‘ Odin’. They were taken to ‘Valhalla’, his abode in heavens. There, they were pampered but also were required to train and be ready for Odin’s fight with a particularly evil giant.

The souls of common people who have led a virtuous life travelled to various places which “featured a copious supply of ale”. Those, however who, in life, had sinned against the gods and society found themselves in a place “in which the serpent Níðhǫggr tormented the bodies of the dead”, in the words of Emcyclopedia.com.

The dead were either buried in mounds-(image) or cremated, or sent away in a flaming boat. In all three cases they took along with them,in the grave, on the pire or in the boat, their worldly possessions for use in the afterlife.

Some tribes believed “that a quick-burning [cremation] fire, driven by a stiff wind, indicated the favor of the gods and that the dead…would enter paradise without delay”. Others “believed that the height of the smoke…indicated how much honor the dead person would receive in the realm of the dead”, in the words of Encyclopedia.com. Ashes were collected for inhumation.

And others still, harboured the superstition that those who have led a life of hostility and social alienation exited their graves as revenants-(returnees from among the dead). They wreaked havoc among the livestock and property of their former neighbours. The only way to stop their mischief was to exhume-(remove from the grave)-, and either decapitate or incinerate them.

All this changed gradually as Christianity expanded throughout the Germanic world from the 4th to the 12th century CE, with the people of Scandinavia the last ones to convert.

Isolated groups of Slavic speaking peoples first appeared here and there in eastern, central and south-eastern Europe, roundabout 800 BCE. Still by 200 BCE, Slavik tribes occupied significant regions of what we call today Russia, Ukraine, Belorussia, Poland, Czechia, Slovakia, Bosnia, Serbs, Croatia, Slovenia, Macedonia, and Bulgaria. Thus, in the words of ‘ The Collector’ they constituted the “largest European ethnolinguistic group”. Slavs slowly and gradually converted to Christianity between the 8th and the 13th centuries CE.

They believed the world was created only once along with the laws, norms and customs by which humans lived and functioned. As such, they were all immutable and perpetual. They were scrupulously adhered to by those who came before. So it should be at present and with the generations to follow. Differently stated, what was true before is true at present and will remain so in future. Tese beliefs, as stated by Britannica, made “Ancient Slavic civilization… one of the most conservative  known on earth”,

As was the case with other pre-Chistian folks in Europe, Slavic peoples had their own pantheon of supernatural gods and goddesses. Theirs, however, resided in the ‘Tree of Life’ embodied by the oak. They believed that benevolent and well-meaning ones ruled from the uppermost branches. To the contrary the evil and bad-intentiond deities resided in the ‘Underworld’-(world of the dead)- located in the roots, below ground. To the ‘Tree of Life’, according to ‘The Collector’ , Slavs “confessed their sins, prayed, and gave sacrifices”.

For example, two of their main gods were Perun and his nemesis Veles. The first was depicted as an eagle on the upper branches of the ‘Tree of Life’. On its roots resided the snake- shaped Veles. Perun was the god of thunder, but more importantly, he was entrusted with the well-being and protection of humans and their property from the diabolical doings of Veles. Which, if not restrainesd, “… could have hidden in their house disguised as a serpent and caused havoc….”, as stated by ‘The Collector.

They also worshipped in temples where their deities were given ‘anthropomorphic’-(humanlike)-shapes often with more heads, arms etc than is normal. Slavics practiced human sacrifice “including eviscerations, decapitations, and trepanning [making a hole in the skull] , had a propitiatory role in securing abundance and victory…”, according to Britannica.

In addition, Slavic peoples worshipped some celestial bodies, venerated their ancestoes and had a mythology of spirits which interfered with their daily lives.

The moon was the source of health and prosperity and even the origin of humanity with some groups. During an eclipse, Slavs were alarmed, armed themselves and wailed at the monsters nibbling the moon.

Slavic peoples venerated their ancestors. This attachment to the people of the past was “strong enough to epitomize and overwhelm all or practically all of their religious views”, so says Britannica.

As for the malevolent spirits in their mythology, consider the following:

-* The souls of the dead who had led unfulfilled lives, came back to haunt the living. Among them were the young women who departed bebore marrying and bearing children. They were believed to return to steal bridegrooms and babies.

-* Corpses that did not decompose in their graves returned, as blood sucking vampires, to prey on the living. To rid society of this scourge “it is necessary to plant a stake in the grave so that it passes through the heart of the corpse or else to exhume the corpse and burn it”, in the words of Britannica. -*Baba Yaga, a vicious old woman lived in a house, in the forest, supported on chiken legs which could walk. This creature stole, cooked and ate children. Interestingly this is a myth which has endured to present times since it helps parents to keep a leash on their children. -* Firebird is a multicoloured flaming bird which can tell the the future. In the words of ‘The Collector’ “If you were brave enough to catch this mesmerizing creature, you would have equal chances of being gifted with the greatest luck or dying in the most terrible way imaginable”.

Dead Slavs were either entombed or cremated along with “wives, slaves, food, clothing, weapons, tools, horses, hunting dogs”, as enumerated by Encyclopedia.com. In short what was needed in the afterlife.

Tenth century Abbasid traveller, Ibn Fadlan witnessed the departure of a well to do Slav and chronicled the event. Following his demise his cadaver was ‘seated’ in a boat along with his killed wife-(who, improbably, of her own free will chose to accompany he r husband to wherever he was heading)- and other earthly possessions as aforesaid. Then the boat and its contents was torched.

Having buried or cremated their loved ones, how did they go about honoring them?

They visited their graves and left offerings “on the third, seventh, twentieth, and fortieth days after death”, according to Encyclopedia.com. Thereafter, every few years the bones were disentombed, taken home, cleaned, wrapped anew an reinterred. In the meantime-(i.e the underminate time between when they were removed from and returned to the ground)-,the bones were kept in households at a place considered sacred,

Slavic peoples believed that the souls of the dead became their guardians, caring for them and their possessions. They honoured them by holding prayers and festivals, more than once yearly, at home and by their graves.

A curious custom, somewhat in his context, is reported by Encyclopedia.com:“There is a…belief among the Slavs that well-being cannot establish itself in a newly built house until after the death of the head of the family, who then becomes its guardian”.

Socially, Slavs were tribal people who grouped themselves along ancestry lines. The head of the tribe, who was elected, did not really have any power; all decisions being taken unanimously by assemblies of tribesmen.

But priests who interceded with the gods for the good of tribesmen and who officiated in the temples and at sacrificial events were privileged in Slavik tribal societies. They were looked upon with admiration and respect, were not required to take parts in armed conflicts yet partook in the booty confiscated by the tribal warriors.

While tribalism was thriving in the rest of Europe, Ancient Greece was flourishing politically, culturally and socaially. The time period covered in this part is more than 1200 years long. Its onset was around the 9th century BCE, at the time of poets Homer, author of the ‘Iliad and the Odyssey’ and Hesiod. It ended about the 4th century CE. As it unfolded it witnessed the works of philosophers Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle, of mathematician Pythagoras, of polymath Archimedes an that of Historian Herodotus. Politically that period saw the emergence of the city states like Athens and Sparta. Andthe conquering zeal of Alexander the Great.

Greeks of that period believed in many gods and goddesses each with a specific duty. They were all thought of as anthropomorphic-( assuming human forms and traits)-beings. They could be well meaning or evil. They married either deities like them or humans and had children, sometime illicitly. They quarelled with one another and medled in the affairs of humans.

There were twelve major deities residing on Mount Olympus, the highest mountain in Greece. The most consequential was Zeus the ‘ Capo de tutti capi’-(boss of all bosses) ,as well as, god of thunder. Still, being the ruler of Mount Olympus did not prevent his lecherousness and having children outside wedlock. The others were:

-*Hera: Sister and wife of Zeua. Queen of Mount Olympus and cared for women and chilcbirth.

-*Poseidon: God of the seas and of the forces of Nature.

-*Athena: Daughter of Zeus. Was born fully formed from his head. Patroness of the city of Athens, so named after her. Also the goddess of warfare.

-*Aphrodite: Goddess of love, beauty and pleasure.

-*And the gods and goddesses Demeter, Ares, Apollo, Artemis, Hephaestus, Hermes, and Dionysus .

Temples were built in their honour. Perhaps the best known is the ‘Parthenon’ dedicated to Goddess Athena. It stands on the Acropolis, an ancient fortification overlooking Athens.

In the opinion of poet Homer, they were a ‘super aristocracy’ who expected pampering and loyalty from mortals. And the latter obligrd, as we shall see hereinafter, not because they believed in an afterlife of rewards or punishment; but because they wanted a long, prosperous and successful life on Earth, free of suffering and aggravations. But how could they tell what pleased and displeased those on Mount Olympus, they looked at their own upper-class elites and since they “knew what angered their mortal earthly aristocracy [they] extrapolated from there”.

The the Greeks who, according to Britannica. “believed in their gods, in roughly the modern sense of the term”, communicated with them through various acts of worship including “prayers, hymns, offerings, sacrifices…” in the words of Google’s AI Overview.

At prayers time, worshippers stood with arms raised skywards, gave praise to the god(s), gave thanks for previous services received, humbly reminded of their own devotion and finally stated their present needs.

There followed sacrifices during which domestic animals such as pigs, sheep, goats or cows were immolated. They had to be of the same sex as the deity being honoured, and with no signs of sickness or defects. The actual killing and butchering was carried out by professionals. Then followed the pouring of blood on the altar, and the examination of organs , such as the liver, by oracles to foretell the future. Hides were left to the temple, for sale to tanners. The honoured gods/goddesses were, apparently, satisfied with the bones and entrails that were incinerated. As for the meat it was shared between the priests and wopshippers. To make the slaughter easier to stomach, Greeks deluded themselves that the pigs, cows etc. were delighted to be of service to the gods, since they showed no signs of stress or anxiety at the sight of the knife.

Human sacrifice was a very rare occurrence.It was the exception rather than the rule.

Having gone through these acts of piety, a worshipper awaited, the reaction of the god(s). If, within a reasonable time, he received ‘good news’, he knew that, for the time deing, they were pleased with him. If, on the other hand, he was the recipient of ‘bad news’, he concluded that his recent acts of devotion have not been enough to erase a hurt or discourtesy he must have directly or indirectly committed vis-à-vis that particular Mount Olympus resident.

There were also, especially at times of crises and wars, festivals and celebrations for the gods, organised by cities like Athens and Sparta . At these, group prayers wer held, as well as large scale animal sacrifices. In a nutshell, according to Britannica, such festivals served to “remind [the gods]…of [devotional] services rendered and asked for a quid pro quo”.

Interestingly, the Olympic games, every four years, were held as part of such an event. They took place on Mount Olympus. They combined athletic prowess with religious rites, at the altar of Zeus. All the Greek city states were represented and jointly pledged, to refrain from any act of hostility towards one another for the duration of the event.

Sadly though, despite all these devotional rituals the gods could be unresponsive. A case in point is the fate ot Troy in Homer’s Iliad. Trojans did their utmost in terms of prayers, sacrifices and supplications to the gods for victory. So much so, that none other than Zeus favoured them over the Geeks. And yet, when the dust cleared Troy had been defeated.

In this part I shall not go into the rich mythology of the Greeks, even though, it is a essential part of their civilization and culture. The reason is that a major section of my earlier narrative ‘ Nothing but Fairy Tales’, deals with it. Still, Ishall repeat one tale which seems appropriate in this context.

It is about humam destiny from birth to death being decided by three thread spinning supernatural sisters called the Moirae. Their decisions were final and could in no way be influenced by any human or deity. The first sister spins the thread “at the creation of life itself……upon the birth of a person”. The second’s thread “is the one that allocates the fate of people during life”. As for the last one, she “is the cutter of the thread of life and with her shears she determines how someone will die”.

The time span covered by this part is nearly 1100 years. From the days of the ‘Etruscan’ Kingdom of Rome-(753-509 BC)-, toppled by the Republic-(509-27 BC)-, itself succeeded by the Roman Empire. It ended with the adoption of Christianity as state religiond in 380 CE.

Like all peoples of Antiquity, Romans were polytheistic. But having come in contact, early in their history, with Greek immigrants to the Italian Peninsula, adopted some of their deities, ritual etc., Roman religion is appropriately qualified as Greco-Roman.

Romans were convinced that nothing, good or bad, can happen anywhere on Earth, without the consent and direction of the supernatural beings they called gods. They conceived them as mysterious, omnipotent and immortal beings. They imagined them resembling humans both physically and temperamentally.

The highest ones were Jupiter, Juno, Minerva and Mars. Jupiter was the ruler of the gods, responsible for all the forces of nature. Juno, his sister and wife was the paramount goddess and responsible for the moon and womanhood. The sixth month of the year, June, is named after her. As for Minerva, the goddess of strategy, justice and places of learning; sha was born fully formed from the head of Jupiter.

Mars was the god of war, revered by all military commaders who celebrated him before and after battle. The month of March is named after him. Roman mythology gives two versions of the origin of this god. In one, he was the son of goddess Juno from her husband Jupiter, while according to the other, his father was a magic flower wih which Juno had a relationship.

Another important goddess was the virgin Vesta. She was given a place of honour by Romans. To them she was “the embodiment of the sacred fire of Rome… [and ] symbolized domestic tranquility”,according to Google’s AI Overview.

The first Roman emperor was Augustus. Upon hi demise in 14 CE, he was deified by the senate-(Britannica: “the governing and advisory council” )-, thus establishing ‘emperor worship’ or ‘imperial cult’. Thenceforth all succeeding emperors, except for the the bad ones like Nero, were made the equals of the gods.

There were, of course, other gods and goddesses including the ones in charge of the Underworld-(realm of the dead).

Romans were open minded and tolerant of the religions of others. This attitude served them well as their armies swept across the Mediterranea regions. Ivariably, while they advertised their own beliefs and, in particular, the imperial cult in foreign lands, they respected local gods. At the same time, the conquered people adopted some of the conquerer’s religious practices and merged them with their own.

A vivid illustration of this merger is in the monologue, quoted by Wikipedia, held by a citizen of Bordeaux-(France)- journeying to Italy to consult the gods there. “….I am first and foremost a faithful worshiper of Onuava [his local goddess]….the distance cannot tempt me to make my vows to another goddess. Love of the truth brought me to…[Italy] but Onuava's favourable powers came with me. Thus, divine mother, far from my home-land, exiled in Italy, I address my vows and prayers to you no less”.

The relationship between Romans and the gods was transactional. In exchange for devotional acts and rituals, they wanted a long and prosperous life, free from suffering and victories abroad. As explained by Britannica “Roman religion was based…on mutual trust between god and man…[ the gods had].. to be….made allies”. Or as put by Wikipedia“I give that you might give”. A rewarding afterlife was not on their minds.

This being so , the Roman calendar listed 40 state- organised public celebrations and festivities per year. At these, prayers were recited, sacrifices were carried out and spectacles such as chariot races and gladiator combats took place.They were meticulously planned and followed strict rules and guidelines. It has been reported that during the nearly 500-year long republican period, prominent Roman personalities vied with one another so as to be seen at these events. Romans believed that their success in spreading their hegemony over the Mediterranean region was proof enough of the popularity with, and pleasure of, the gods with these events.

Prayers on these occasions were led by priests. They included elements of “flattery…cajolery” and supplications. More, no mishaps or mistake in the recitation were tolerated. Should they occur and be considered serious enough, the festive occasion could be scrapped and repeated, regadless of the time elapsed and expenses incurred.

Sacrificing domestic animals was considered the highest level of worship. According to Britannica“The product sacrificed would revitalize the divinity….By this nourishment he or it would become able and ready to fulfill requests”. They took part in daylight so as to be witnessed by all present.

As for the victims,they were the best specimens of pigs, sheep and cattle and of the gender of the deity for whom they were to be immolated. And they were to approach their doom docilely without agitation as if they were willing to offer their lives for the benefit of the community.

In the wake of the slaughter, the hearts, livers and kidneys of the animals were examined for omens, the entrails and bones were ‘given’ to the gods and goddesses. The rest of the animals were cosumed, in a banquet set-up, for the attending priests, dignitaries and commoners.

Difficult times demanded special prayers and sacrifices to the gods. One example is the war to defeat Carthage-(in the 200’s BCE). The Romans, we are told by Wikipedia, solemnly pledged to sacrifice to Jupiter “every animal born that spring to be rendered after five more years of protection from Hannibal [Carthagenian commander] and his allies”.

Still, the same source tells us it can happen that Romans refrain from sacrificing to their gods should they suspect that the latter reneged on a promise given. Indeed, they did so when emperor Trajan-( 53-117 CE) died before his time “because the gods had not kept the Emperor safe for the stipulated period”.

Sacifices were not limited to high gods. Those of the Underworld had their share of immolated animals. The difference, however was that the rituals were held at night and the victims were burnt completely since “the living cannot share a meal with the dead”.

Human sacrifice was not as frequent. Still it did take place under certain circumstance. For more of this, refer to my earlier narrative ‘ Cruel Dieties’.

In ancient Rome, only priests, augurs and haruspices could communicate with the gods. Priests officiated at religious festivals. Their ranks consisted only of upper class citizens who also held positions in the government not related to their spiritual duties. Augurs were persons “who observed natural signs, especially the behaviour of birds, interpreting these as an indication of divine approval or disapproval of a proposed action”. As to haruspices, they could forecast omens by examining the entrails of sacrificed animals.

No important action, including going to war, was taken by the Roman state without the ‘go-ahead’ from augurs and haruspices. If told that the planned endeavour is not favoured by the gods, it was postponed or cancelled. Officials took the godly rejection as displeasure with the rituals that had taken place. A new religious event with prayers and sacrifices was re-organised in the hope that this time Jupiter and the others would be more accommodating.

Romans built temples for their gods in all the lands they ruled. Among them was the temple of the goddess Vesta described above. She was attended to by six Vestal virgins, being a virgin herself. The girls were recruited at age six from aristocratic families and remained in the temple till the age of forty. They all, took an oath of chastity, if broken , the culprit was punished by burying live.

Part V: Explorers and Conquerors

They Made the World Smaller 1

THEY MADE THE WORLD SMALLER.

PART-1 MARCO POLO & IBN BATTUTA.

MARCO POLO (1254-1324)

Chapter illustration

Marco Polo was born in Venice ()in 1254 to a family of merchants of some wealth and influence. He had benefitted from a good education and had mastered several was fluent in many languages.

His father and uncle were in the habit of travelling east, notably to Constantinople, the Crimea and further along the Silk Road() in pursuit of their trading business. On one of these occasions in 1265, circumstances led them, unintentionally, further eastward to Bukhara, in today’s Uzbekistan, part of the Mongol empire (). There they were well received and invited to proceed farther to the seat of the Mongol emperor, Kublai Khan, in what is now Beijing. The latter welcomed them, kept them by his side for a time before allowing them to return to Europe as his ambassadors, bearing letters to the Pope, and gifts, and promising to return with “oil from the lamp burning at the Holy Sepulchre in Jerusalem”.

Chapter illustration

And so, once again in 1271, they set off back east, with 17 year old Marco in tow. Travelling along the Silk Road they crossed various countries and part of the great Gobi Desert (). The journey lasted three years; they reached Beijing in 1274 (see map above).

Marco, 20 by then, impressed the great khan by his linguistic skills: he spoke four languages. All three Polos stayed with the khan, 17 years, during which young Marco was appointed to various posts , requiring him to travel far and wide in China and to other parts of the Empire. Interestingly he, along with his two relatives always carried on their journeys the khan’s ‘paiza’ (see image), akin to a passport commanding assistance and unhindered passage throughout the khan’s empire.

Chapter illustration

During his long stay and extensive journeys Marco Polo marveled at what he saw in the capital and in the other great cities all interlinked by canals and other transportation systems with their huge markets and products, particularly the silk items. He took note of the customs and cultures. He was also impressed by the daily routine of the khan, his administration of the lands and by his huge palaces featuring halls large enough to assemble many thousands attendees and stables with as many as 10,000 immaculately white horses whose milk was earmarked for the khan’s extended family. And he tells of the “ceremonial of a Great Khan's funeral - anyone unfortunate enough to encounter the funeral cortege was put to death to serve their lord in the next world, Mangu Khan's corpse scoring over twenty thousand victims”, according to Silk Road Foundation. Subsequently, upon his return to Venice he recorded it all in his book: ‘Il Milione’.

‘Il Milione’, moreover, tells of life on the Steppe() , the region of origin of the Mongols; a tribal society where women did all the work while the men hunted, were engaged in falconry and warred. Polygamy was the norm; for example, an eldest son married his dead father’s widows, but, naturally enough, not his own mother.

Of China itself, Marco was amazed at the usage of paper money and the imperial mail system. As regards the former he marveled that “With these pieces of paper [instead of the silver and gold pieces, he was familiar with] they can buy anything and pay for anything”.

As for the Mongol/Chinese mail service, Polo tells of runners relaying their charges every 4 or 5 kms, hence able to cut a ten day journey to 24 hrs. For important mail, however, riders on horseback, with relays every 40 kms or so, could cover a distance of 400 to 500 kms a day. Further, and most interestingly, is his mention of record keeping at the relay stations and of inspectors patrolling the roads travelled by the mail carriers.

Marco Polo is impressed by China’s technological achievements. For instance, he mentions the tens of thousands of tonnes of iron and coal produced yearly and of man- made transportation canals. Of household goods, the like of salt, porcelain and silk wares. All centuries ahead of Europe.

The Polos, Marco, father and uncle left the service of the aging Khan in 1292 and set course for home. They reached Venice sometime in 1295, having been away for the best part of two and a half decades. A couple of years later, Marco then over forty , took part in a naval battle, against Venice’s rival Genoa. In due course he was imprisoned by the Genoese. In captivity, he met a writer by the name of Rusticiano to whom Polo dictated his travels and encounters. Thus was born ‘Il Milione’, “known in English as the Travels of Marco Polo “…a classic of travel literature”, in the words of Encyclopedia Britannica.

Many of Marco’s contemporaries believed that the book was nothing but fairy tales. Some, even, doubted his travel to and stay in China. But Polo stuck to every word in it. So much so that on his death bed, at the age of 70, he was urged to disavow the contents of ‘Il Milione’ He refused, reportedly affirming instead : “I have not told half of what I saw”. Certainly, there were grounds for doubt. Among others Marco Polo failed to mention the great Wall of China, widespread tea drinking, women’s foot-binding, or the use of chopsticks. Moreover, with the writing done by Marco’s cell mate, it was suspected that he salted and peppered the accounts he was hearing .

And last, but not least, at a time when printing did not yet exist, professional scribes may have allowed their own imagination to run free. “Consequently, there are some 140 different manuscript versions of the text in three manuscript groups, in a dozen different languages and dialects…”. And, finally, the Polos’ stay in China is nowhere indicated in the ‘Annals of the [Chinese] Empire’ in which the names of other visiting foreigners are recorded .

On the other hand, many an item or activity, in the ‘Il Milione’, unknown to Europeans at the time, were found in Chinese writings. Further, subsequent travellers to China and other places described by Marco, confirmed his accounts. Presently, the consensus among scholars is that Marco Polo “reported faithfully what he saw and heard, but that much of what he heard was fabulous or distorted”.

All this notwithstanding, The writings of Marco Polo helped in the cartography of the time, enlightened the like of Christopher Columbus, more than 150 years later, with respect to his voyages of discovery and generally opened up the minds of Europeans to what lay beyond their eastern horizon.

We conclude with Marco’s own words, expressed in his book: “ I believe it was God's will that we should come back, so that men might know the things that are in the world, since, as we have said in the first chapter of this book, no other man, Christian or Saracen, Mongol or pagan, has explored so much of the world as Messer Marco, son of Messer Niccolo Polo, great and noble citizen of the city of Venice.”

References. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Marco Polo. -Silkroad Foundation: Marco Polo and His Travels. -Live Science: Marco Polo: Facts, Biography and Travels. - Historyworld. net: History of Marco Polo.

IBN BATTUTA (1304-1377)

Chapter illustration

Ibn Battuta was a Moroccan born in Tangiers in 1304. He belonged to a family of ‘qadis’ or judges. Following tradition, he studied Islamic jurisprudence. At the age of 21 he decided he wanted to go to Mecca for hajj pilgrimage. Accordingly, on the 14th June, 1325 he set out alone on his donkey and headed east along the North African coast: “I set out alone… swayed by an overmastering impulse within me and a desire long-cherished in my bosom to visit these illustrious sanctuaries…”, he said in his book mentioned below. Eventually, in Constantine, Algeria, he joined a caravan with pilgrims to Mecca; They appointed him as qadi to adjudicate among them in cases of disputes.

That first trip, the places he visited, and the people he met on his way to Mecca, awoke in him a hunger to see more of the world. Henceforth, and for the best part of the following 30 years , Ibn Battuta crisscrossed the Islamic World() and a few non-Muslim lands (map below). Overall, historians have estimated that he travelled 120,000 kms, a distance no one before him or after him covered until the arrival of steam locomotives and ships in the 19th century. Further, whereas contemporaries of his travelled for hajj, business or leaning, Ibn Battuta did it for his own pleasure and ‘the fun of it’ at a time when crossing deserts and navigating seas was fraught with all kinds of danger. This being so, Ibn Battuta’s claim to be the “traveller of Islam” is clearly not an exaggeration. Remarkably, his displacements and associated preoccupations, never distracted him from studying, praying and practicing his trade as ‘qadi’.

With time, he became famous and was warmly welcomed by no less than 60 rulers, kings and sultans, who befriended him and showed it with their generosity to him. Additionally, he reckoned he made the acquaintance of 2,000 people in different lands and walks of life. Ibn Battuta, hence was never short of funds; thenceforth, he travelled with a retinue of wives, concubines, servants and slaves. Regarding the former, Ibn Battuta, on the move, married and divorced several times, leaving behind a trail of offspring in Africa and Asia. Interestingly, in this respect, in the Maldives Islands were he stayed for two years, he had a marvelous time with the local women, marrying an divorcing to his heart content; he said: “It is easy to marry in these islands because of the smallness of the dowries and the pleasures of society which the women offer... When the ships put in, the crew marry; when they intend to leave they divorce their wives…”.

Ultimately, returning home to Morocco, he dictated his recollections to one ‘Ibn Juzayy’ a writer of some fame who, as was the case with Marco Polo, embellished the stories narrated by the traveller. The end result is ‘ The Travels of Ibn Battuta which according to Encyclopedia Britannica: “is an important document shedding light on many aspects of the social, cultural, and political history of a great part of the Muslim world….His accounts of his travels in Asia Minor, East and West Africa, the Maldives, and India form a major source for the histories of those areas…”. On the whole the accounts of Ibn Battuta have proved reliable.

As the map below shows Ibn Battuta ventured wide and far. Travelling on camelback and in rudimentary water crafts, he went over all shapes of terrain, across rivers and seas and through different climes. Crossing the 4,000 m high Khawak Pass on his way from Afghanistan to India, he recounted: “We kept spreading felt clothes in front of the camels for them to tread on, so that they would not sink in the snow”.

Chapter illustration

In Alexandria(), on his way to Mecca, he was urged by some pious ascetics to proceed after the hajj all the way to Muslim ruled India via the Yemen, Iraq and “the country of the Turks”(). About Cairo, he tells of convents housing pious dervishes, built, and run benevolently with the contributions of the well to do in the city. He says of these: “The steward of the house [convent] comes in the morning to the darwishes, each of whom indicates what food he desires, and when they assemble for meals, each person is given his bread and soup in a separate dish, none sharing with another. They eat twice a day. They are each given winter clothes and summer clothes, and a monthly allowance of from twenty to thirty dirhams. Every Thursday night they receive sugar cakes, soap to wash their clothes, the price of a bath, and oil for their lamps. These men are celibate; the married men have separate convents”.

Interestingly, Ibn Battuta tells of the controlled border crossing between Egypt and Syria despite both being part of the Mamluk Empire: “…customs dues are collected from the merchants, and their goods and baggage are thoroughly examined and searched. There are offices here, with officers, clerks, and notaries, and the daily revenue is a thousand gold dinars. No one is allowed to pass into Syria without a passport from Egypt, nor into Egypt without a passport from Syria, for the protection of the property of the subjects and as a measure of precaution against spies from Iraq”.

Then onto Jerusalem and the Church of Holy Sepulcher: “This is the church of which they [The Christians] are falsely persuaded to believe that it contains the grave of Jesus. All who come on pilgrimage to visit it pay a stipulated tax to the Muslims, and suffer very unwillingly various humiliations”.

Ibn Battuta reaches Damascus in early August 1326. He visits the celebrated Ummayad Mosque and narrates its history as: “The site of the mosque was a church, and when the Muslims captured Damascus, one of their commanders entered from one side by the sword and reached as far as the middle of the church, while the other entered peaceably from the eastern side and reached the middle also. So the Muslims made the half of the church which they had entered by force into a mosque and the half which they had entered by peaceful agreement remained as a church. When Walid decided to extend the mosque over the entire church he asked the Greeks to sell him their church for whatsoever equivalent they desired, but they refused, so he seized it. The Christians used to say that whoever destroyed the church would be stricken with madness and they told that to Walid. But he replied "I shall be the first to be stricken by madness in the service of God," and seizing an axe, he set to work to knock it down with his own hands. The Muslims on seeing that followed his example, and God proved false the assertion of the Christians”.

Finally, he arrives in Mecca for the hajj in mid- October 1326, a year and a half after leaving Tangiers. Among other qualities of the Meccans,ti his eyes, is their elegance, cleanliness and the beauty of their women: “The Meccans are very elegant and clean in their dress, and most of them wear white garments, which you always see fresh and snowy. They use a great deal of perfume and kohl and make free use of toothpicks of green arak-wood. The Meccan women are extraordinarily beautiful and very pious and modest. They too make great use of perfumes to such a degree that they will spend the night hungry in order to buy perfumes with the price of their food. They visit the mosque every Thursday night, wearing their finest apparel; and the whole sanctuary is saturated with the smell of their perfume. When one of these women goes away the odour of the perfume clings to the place after she has gone.

Eventually Ibn Battuta is in Baghdad where he finds public baths in abundance which “are excellently constructed… Each establishment has a number of private bathrooms, every one of which has also a wash-basin in the corner, with two taps supplying hot and cold water. Every bather is given three towels, one to wear round his waist when he goes in, another to wear round his waist when he comes out, and the third to dry himself with”.

Lastly, he ends up in China which he finds beautiful but could not tolerate its people, more specifically, their religion(): “China… did not please me… I was greatly troubled thinking about the way paganism dominated this country…That disturbed me so much that I stayed indoors most of the time and only went out when necessary”.

As of November 1349, he is back in Morocco. But soon after, prodded by the Khalif in place, he is on themove again; first, north to Muslim Spain and then south to Muslim Africa across the Sahara Desert. He reaches the Empire of Mali then, in its apogee, in June 1352 in which he stays till June 1353. Among the strange and revealing aspects of the country and its people, is the submissiveness of the Negroes to their king. For instance, someone summoned to appear before the monarch, “takes off his clothes and puts on worn garments, removes his turban and dons a dirty skullcap…He goes forward in an attitude of humility and dejection and knocks the ground hard with his elbows… If anyone addresses the king and receives a reply from him, he uncovers his back and throws dust over his head and back…”

Nevertheless, the Muslim Negroes in Mali are “seldom unjust, and have a greater abhorrence of injustice than any other people… Neither traveller nor inhabitant in it has anything to fear from robbers or men of violence. They do not confiscate the property of any white man who dies in their country…They are careful to observe the hours of prayer…and in bringing up their children to them.

Just the same, he is shocked by their non-Islamic practice of eating “carrion, dogs, and asses” and is scandalized by the nakedness of local Muslim women, whether servants, slaves or otherwise who “go about in front of everyone naked, without a stitch of clothing on them”.

References. -Encyclopedia Britannica. Ibn Battuta, Muslim explorer and writer. -Fordham University. Ibn Battuta: Travels in Asia and Africa, 1325-1354. -Silk Road. Com. Ibn Battuta- the great traveller. -Khan Academy. Ibn Bat

They Made the World Smaller 2

THEY MADE THE WORLD SMALLER.

PART-2 AGE OF DISCOVERY AND CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS.

Chapter illustration

AGE OF DISCOVERY

The Age of Discovery is that period of one hundred years, from the 1450’s to the 1550’s in European history when, taking advantage of improved ship designs and navigation science, mariners left their shores to find others across the Atlantic, Pacific and Indian Ocean.

Pioneering these journeys were the Portuguese and more specifically Prince Henrique of Portugal (1394-1460) third son of King John I, commonly known as Henry the Navigator. Although he never took part in any of the discoveries himself he was nonetheless instrumental in financing and sponsoring the early voyages. In 1420, the Portuguese landed on Madeira and in 1427 on the Azores islands respectively 1,000 and 1,600 kms from Lisbon in the Atlantic Ocean. Both places were richly wooded but uninhabited. It was, hence, a simple enough matter for Henry to send colonists there. Madeira was first settled soon after its discovery and in 1432 colonists headed for the Azores. The newcomers proceed to cut down the trees to make room for growing sugar cane and vineyards. Moreover, in later years the Azores become a convenient stepping stone for those sailing to the New Word.

Chapter illustration

In Subsequent years, the Prince’s navigators proceeded south along the coast of western Africa (see map above). According to historians Henry had several reasons for wanting to descend along the shores of Africa and eventually round it. First, he was curious about the mysterious continent, its peoples, fauna and flora. He was keen to discover gold and other treasures to bring home. As a Christian, the Navigator wanted to evangelize the populations of Africa including the Muslim ‘infidels’ among them. But most of all he sought to find a sea route to India and China, by circumventing Africa and sailing east to the sources of highly valued silk an spices. At that time the two commodities reached Europe first by caravans travelling the famed Silk Road up to the Mediterranean coast from where Venetian ships took them the rest of the way. Henry the Navigator was eager to deal with the suppliers directly, and to bypass the monopolistic and greedy Venetians and also to avoid contact with the Muslim Ottomans in the process of building their empire.

In 1487, twenty seven years after Henry’s death, his compatriots reached the southern tip of Africa. However they did not circumvent it. Vasco da Gama did, ten years later. He named it Cape of Good Hope, sailed east and hit upon the west coast of India in 1497. “Europe had arrived in the East”, in the words of Encyclopedia Britannica.

Meanwhile, Christopher Columbus had other ideas. He was convinced he could, more easily, reach the treasures of India and China by sailing west across the Atlantic Ocean. He set out in August 1492, and mistook the Caribbean for China. He continued to believe so till his death in 1506. By then, to the contrary, many of his contemporaries disagreed and realized that Columbus’s China was in fact a new territory. More about him to follow.

To put an end to the controversy once and for all, Portuguese navigator Ferdinand Magellan (1480-1521) set out with five ships (see 1 in Appendix) in August 1519 on a voyage of discovery around the world (map below). He first sailed west round the tip of South America and entered a new body of water which he named Pacific because of the calm conditions he initially met. From there onwards, however, his progress was slow and arduous and took longer than anticipated(). In the end he hit upon land on March 6th 1521. It turned out to be the island of Guam from where he proceeded to the Philippines. There, Magellan was killed in a fight with locals. Eventually, only one ship made it back home arriving on 9th September 1522. Just the same, that epic journey proved beyond the shadow of a doubt that what Columbus had discovered was, indeed, a new world. By then the latter had been long dead.

Chapter illustration

Before we move on, another fateful discovery, made by the Portuguese upon meeting Africans, was that they could be bought and sold as slave labour. Thenceforth, throughout the 15th century “…large numbers of well-clothed [Portuguese] sea captains… as [they] explored the coast of Africa, …brought civilization to naked savages by carrying them off to the slave markets of Seville and Lisbon…” and to the new colonies of Madeira and the Azores for sale to land owners and a life in servitude. A prelude to the shipping of millions of Africans, over four centuries, for sale, as slave labour, to plantation and mine owners etc. in what is historically known as the Atlantic Slave Trade(). A black chapter in the history of mankind. (For significance of clothing and nakedness, see 2 in Appendix).

CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS (1451-1506)

Chapter illustration

Christopher Columbus was born in Genoa, Italy, well into the Age of Discovery. At the age of twenty he moved to Lisbon, Portugal. At twenty six he started his life as a mariner on board Portuguese ships; and by his early thirties he had become proficient in nautical matters, including navigation, prevailing wind directions over and currents in the Atlantic, all crucial for any successful sea voyage. Furthermore, he had, by then, become familiar with western Africa and Africans and importantly with the early days of the slave trade and the slave markets in Lisbon.

Whereas, Henry the Navigator sought to attain the lands of silk and spices by sailing eastward after rounding the Cape of Good Hope, Columbus, to the contrary, believed he could reach Asia faster and more easily by crossing the Atlantic westwards. He thought so because he had underestimated the distance from the Canary Islands, off the coast of Morocco, to Japan at a mere 3,700 kms. He differed in this with many of his contemporaries who correctly believed it to be more like 19,000 kms(). Whatever, there was however consensus among them all, that there are no land masses between Europe and Asia. In 1484, Columbus started lobbying for backing for his project. Eventually, in 1492 the king and queen of Spain, Ferdinand and Isabella, along with some private investors agreed to sponsor and finance the expedition. Why did the royals agree to stand behind this leap into the unknown after many years of remaining unconvinced by Columbus’ arguments in support of it?

In January of that year, Ferdinand and Isabella had defeated the Muslim dynasty in Spain and entered Granada, its last stronghold. The victory caused “euphoria among Spanish Christians and encouraged designs of ultimate triumph over the Islamic world, albeit chiefly, perhaps, by the back way round the globe…[they also hoped that perhaps] Christendom would recapture  Jerusalem and install a Christian emperor in the Holy Land”. Quite an undertaking. But unable/unwilling to move against the powerful Ottoman Empire, and other Muslim polities, relatively close in the eastern Mediterranean, Spanish Christians intended to defeat Islam through its back door.

In his journal, Columbus recounts the instances of his audience with the Spanish monarchs shortly after the capture of Granada:“…and I saw the Moorish[Muslim] king come out of the gates of the city and kiss the royal hands of Your Highnesses…and Your Highnesses, as Catholic Christians…took thought to send me, Christopher Columbus, to the said parts of India, to see [their] princes and peoples and lands…and the manner which should be used to bring about their conversion to our holy faith, and ordained that I should not go by land to the eastward, by which way it was the custom to go, but by way of the west, by which down to this day we do not know certainly that anyone has passed; therefore, having driven out all the Jews from your realms and lordships in the same month of January, Your Highnesses commanded me that, with a sufficient fleet, I should go to the said parts of India…”

And it goes without saying that both royals and investors were eagerly looking forward to substantial profits from trading in the spices, silk and other valuables yet to be found by Columbus in the East, as he had pledged. More, the interested parties hoped he would also find there the biblical region of Ophir where according to the Old Testament King Solomon’s great wealth in gold was kept. In consequence, all these lucrative interests were spelled out in the contract between them. It included the proviso that the support for the expedition was conditional on Columbus repaying “this investment with profit by bringing back gold, spices, and other tribute from Asia”. Naturally Columbus looked forward to being handsomely rewarded, too, both financially and socially. In continuation of the entry in his journal above quoted, he expected to be “ennobled… so that from that time henceforth I might style myself “Don” and be high admiral of the Ocean Sea and viceroy and perpetual Governor of the islands and continent which I should discover…and that my eldest son should succeed to the same position, and so on from generation to generation forever”. It should therefore be on no surprise that, as we shall see, he went after his business of finding gold etc. with doggedness, intransigence and ruthlessness.

Having, as he desired, been empowered by the king and queen of Spain “ to discover and acquire certain islands and mainland in the ocean sea [and given the titles of] Admiral and Viceroy and Governor therein”, the Admiral ultimately, made four round trips, from Spain and back in the time periods: 1492-1493, 1493-1496, 1498-1500 and 1502-1504 (map below).

Chapter illustration

Departing Spain on the 3rd od August 1492 on board a carrack named Santa Maria, and accompanied by two caravels, the Pinta and Nina ( see 1 in Appendix), he headed first to the Canary Islands where he remained for a few weeks to complete his preparations before setting sail westward. Sighting first the Bahamas he did not linger there and pushed in the direction of Cuba. He landed on October 28th, 1492 mistaking it first for Japan then deciding a few days later it was, instead a part of China. However, he could not locate the town Quanzhou he was after. He sailed again and the wind carried him to the island now home to Haiti and the Dominican Republic. In the process of approaching it, he wrecked the Santa Mria on a coral reef. But there to welcome him and his companions, with open arms, were the local ‘Taino’ Indians. They brought the newcomers presents and willingly helped them salvage whatever remained of the wrecked vessel. They also, good naturedly, assisted with the construction of the first European settlement in the New World. Unfortunately, however, the gentleness and generosity of the Tainos was not similarly reciprocated. Instead it was met with the determination of Columbus to find and take back to his king and queen, and for himself, not only material of value but also human cargo, making it necessary for his sailors to loot and kidnap locals. He named the island Hispaniola.

In due course, Columbus realized he was off the mark: Hispaniola was definitely not Quanzhou. Perhaps it was the Biblical land of King Solomon’s treasures. Just the same, having been able to collect some gold, he decided to head back home with it together with a few parrots, some spices and several indigenous captives. He was praying, thus, to disguise his failure in the eyes of Ferdinand and Isabella and hoped of persuading them to back a second expedition. So, on January 16th 1493, leaving 39 men on Hispaniola, he boarded with the remaining sailors the two caravels and set sail eastward. On the way back, he was delayed by the Portuguese, at that time not on friendly terms with the Spaniards. They roughed him up a little, before letting him continue. He arrived home on March 15th, 1493.

The exotic goodies fulfilled their purpose. So much so, that Columbus, set sail again back to Hispaniola at the head of a 17 ship flotilla. By now, he was at the apogee of his reputation as navigator and explorer. Moreover, the monarchs, clergy and investors had so much confidence in him that the ships carried the first colonists, evangelists, “some 1,300 salaried men” and a small cavalry.

Arriving back on Hispaniola on November 23rd 1493, Columbus and his people were shocked to discover that the 39 men originally left there, had been massacred and their settlement destroyed. Clearly, despite their mild manners the Tainos had rebelled against the brutality of the Europeans. This notwithstanding, Columbus forced them to rebuild the settlement. He, also, put them to work searching for gold. On February 2nd 1494, he sent back home 12 ships loaded with captive Tainos, most of whom perished on the crossing, together with, as before, gold, parrots and spices. According, to Professor Jack Weatherford: “After he failed to contact the emperor of China, the traders of India, or the merchants of Japan, Columbus decided to pay for his voyage in the one important commodity he had found in ample supply -- human lives. He seized 1,200…Indians…, crammed as many onto his ships as would fit, and sent them to Spain, where they were paraded naked through the streets of Seville and sold as slaves in 1495. Columbus tore children from their parents, husbands from wives. On board Columbus' slave ships, hundreds died; the sailors tossed the Indian bodies into the Atlantic”.

For his part, he sailed along the coasts of Cuba and Jamaica and came to the conclusion that Hispaniola was the most promising in terms of spoils to be had, and for settlers to prosper quickly. In June 1494 he made his men swear, despite the reticence of some, that Hispaniola was “indeed the biblical land of” Ophir where king Solomon treasures are hidden, and that Cuba was China. A few months later, in 1495, he set out to conquer the whole of the island. The Indians paid the price in delocalization, devastation and capture for subsequent shipment to Spain as slaves.

He, once again, sailed for home on March 10th 1496, having put his brothers Diego and Bartholomew in charge during his absence. Upon reaching Cadiz on the 11th of June 1496 he promptly proceeded lobbying for a third voyage. Once more he was successful.

So far, the returns from Columbus’s two voyages in term of gold and other valuables were meager compared to the expectations of the royals and other interested parties in Spain. But Ferdinand and Isabella decided to give Columbus a third chance at finding a passage to India in the vicinity of his China or Cuba and to continue searching for the gold mines of King Solomon. Accordingly, he set out first to the islands of Cape Verde off the western shore of Africa from where he began his third Atlantic crossing on July 4th, 1498. Sometime in August he entered the Venezuelan Gulf of Paria “and by August 15 he knew by the great torrents of fresh water flowing into the Gulf of Paria that he had discovered another continent—‘another world.’ But he did not find the strait to India, nor did he find King Solomon’s gold mines…”. So he sailed toward Hispaniola where, in the meantime, more colonists from Spain had settled.

On arrival he was confronted with a difficult and explosive situation. The settlers were in revolt against the arbitrary and whimsical rule of his two brothers whom he had left in charge nearly two and a half years earlier. So much so, that they had sent complaints in this regard back to Spain with the result that a Chief Justice was on his way to the colony to adjudicate. Among the complaints were favouritism in the allocation of mining rights and of cheating the settlers out of the quick riches, they had been told about, before leaving Spain. Even the natives were up in arms, in retaliation against being forced to work the mines and their brutal capture for life in servitude in Europe.

All three brothers were found guilty by the Chief Justice who sent them home in irons. They arrived in October 1500. “During that return journey Columbus composed a long letter to his sovereigns that is one of the most extraordinary he wrote, and one of the most informative [despite or because of] the humiliations the admiral had endured…[and] to the fact that he was now suffering severely from sleeplessness, eyestrain, and a form of rheumatoid arthritis, which may have hastened his death… [In this letter Columbus expresses] faith in his navigational abilities, his seaman’s sense of the weather, his eyes, and his reading. He asserted that he had reached the outer region of the Earthly Paradise()”.

Upon arrival, all three brothers were locked up pending trial. But the Spanish sovereigns, even though by then had lost much of their confidence in the Admiral, were sensitive to his plea. Some historians even said that they possibly felt pity for him on account of his lost prestige and worsening health. Whatever, they ordered his release from detention and, in due course, entrusted him yet again with a fourth Atlantic crossing. Aware of the intense hostility toward him in Hispaniola they commanded him to stay well away of the island. Instead, he was to continue looking for gold and India. It is noteworthy that by then, as his problems were piling up “Columbus took to calling himself ‘Christbearer…He [also] seems to have been certain that his mission was divinely guided”. In this frame of mind, the 51 year old navigator with a deteriorating health, set out from Cadiz with four ships on May 9th, 1502.

He reached the coast of Honduras, Central America, thence sailing down the coast passed Costa Rica and stopped in Panama in October 1502. On this trip he had hopes of finding what he was looking for namely gold and India to redeem himself with the Spanish monarchs and regain his lost prestige. Alas, however, as it turned out this was his worst voyage. Not only was he prevented by natives to prospect for gold but he lost two of his ships to shipworms (). He turned back wanting to reach Hispaniola, against royal instructions on account of his dire situation. But, and surprisingly for a first class navigator he found himself and his crews in June 1503 marooned on the coast of Jamaica with two worm eaten ships. There, the locals refused to assist or feed them given the Spaniards’ bad reputation as gold- greedy and mistreaters of Indians. Desperate for a way out of this predicament, the admiral consulted his almanac() . He was fortunate. A total lunar eclipse would occur shortly. With this knowledge, he confronted the natives with news of the displeasure of the Christian God and that He will shortly demonstrate it by “taking away the moon”. True to his word, the eclipse occurred on the day predicted, awing the locals into collaboration. Eventually, in November 1504, rescuers arrived from Hispaniola: a month after being stranded two of the Admiral’s navigators, set out in a canoe to the colony, 720 kms away, to seek assistance.

Christopher Columbus died in 1506. To his last day he maintained that he had found the edges of China, even though it was becoming more and more evident that what he had discovered were entirely new lands. Incidentally, he narrowly missed sighting Florida on his first voyage, leaving the discovery of North America to others at later dates.

His relations with the Indians

Perhaps, it is best here to quote from the Admiral’s journal such as when he arrived in the Caribbean in 1492 he was welcomed by the locals who he noted “were very friendly to us, and perceived that they could be much more easily converted to our holy faith by gentle means than by force…Afterwards they came swimming to the boats, bringing parrots, balls of cotton thread, javelins, and many other things which they exchanged for articles we gave them… They all go completely naked, even the women… [They were not armed]… They are all of a good size and stature, and handsomely formed…  their eyes were large and very beautiful; they were not black, but the color of the inhabitants of the Canaries……I was very attentive to them, and strove to learn if they had any gold. Seeing some of them with little bits of this metal hanging at their noses… [They gave him directions to where he could find gold in substantial quantities] … It appears to me [they] would be good servants and I am of opinion that they would very readily become Christians, as they appear to have no religion… If it please our Lord, I intend at my return to carry home six of them to your Highnesses, that they may learn our language…”

Because of this or maybe despite it Columbus and his men abused and exploited those gentle people. They forced them to work in mines, captured and traded in them, including little girls sold as sex slaves. One story has it that Columbus traded in slaves to make up the shortfall in gold and spices which he had hoped would make him and his backers rich quickly. In their frenzy to accumulate wealth, the colonists practiced all kinds of ‘punishment’ on the locals for not fulfilling their quotas of gold to and including the cutting off of hands. In the words of Professor Weatherford “His marauding band hunted Indians for sport and profit -- beating, raping, torturing, killing, and then using the Indian bodies as food for their hunting dogs. Within four years of Columbus' arrival on Hispaniola, his men had killed or exported one-third of the original Indian population of 300,000”.

Bartolome de Las Casas (1474-1566) went to Hispaniola as a colonist in 1502. For the first few years he behaved towards the Indians as his compatriots. But, by 1510 he had become so appalled at the treatment meted out by the settlers that he freed his personal slaves, was ordained a priest and wrote about it all. Subsequently he gained the title of ‘Protector of the Indians’. In his writings we find: “[The Spaniards] rode the backs of Indians if they were in a hurry…[they] also had Indians carry large leaves to shade them from the sun… They thought nothing of knifing Indians by tens and twenties and of cutting slices off them to test the sharpness of their blades.”…[the Indians] suffered and died in the mines and other labors in desperate silence, knowing not a soul in the world to whom they could turn for help…Thus husbands and wives were together only once every eight or ten months and when they met they were so exhausted and depressed on both sides . . . they ceased to procreate. As for the newly born, they died early because their mothers, overworked and famished, had no milk to nurse them. . . Some mothers even drowned their babies from sheer desperation. . . .in this way, husbands died in the mines, wives died at work, and children died from lack of milk. . .and in a short time this land which was so great, so powerful and fertile . . . was depopulated…” Obviously, not all died from overwork, torture and suicide; diseases such as small pox, hitherto unknown, were passed on by the Europeans, contributing substantially to their extermination.

It is , therefore, no exaggeration to state that Columbus was the precursor of those Europeans who came to the Americas in following centuries and behaved ignominiously towards its inhabitants. The Spanish conquistadors of Hernan Cortes decimated the Aztecs in today’s Mexico, so did those under Francisco Pizarro with the Incas of the Andes. And later, the English with the Red Indians of North America.

Christopher Columbus, was and continues to be lauded for his uncompromising religious beliefs, courage, determination, leadership, his abilities as navigator and seaman and above all for his discoveries which have opened the way to populating the New World, a momentous chapter in the history of the world . All these qualities are remembered every year, in October on Columbus Day in The United States and elsewhere in the Americas.

To his supporters, the Admiral was no better or worse than his European contemporaries: he was a man of his times (see 2 in Appendix). They, therefore, contend that he certainly cannot be held responsible for infecting all those natives with small pox and the rest; he did not know any better. Even his behaviour vis-à-vis the Indians was in line with his contemporaries’ thinking that all those peoples across the seas are subhuman heathens to be civilized, evangelized and baptized.

His critics, on the other hand, point to the calamitous outcome for all native peoples in the subsequent centuries of the discovery and the despicable legacy of the Atlantic Slave Trade in the Americas and its debilitating consequences on the African continent.

Another point of criticism. Evangelization of the heathens in far-away lands was high on the ‘to do’ list before the Admiral set out in 1492. But once in the Caribbean the Admiral faced a dilemma. As a Catholic he was prohibited from enslaving Christians. He solved the problem, rather hypocritically, by refraining from baptizing the Indians. Was he trying to fool Christ? Or should he have known better?

Let us begin with: “If Christopher Columbus were alive today, he would be put on trial for crimes against humanity. Columbus’ reign of terror, as documented by noted historians, was so bloody, his legacy so unspeakably cruel, that Columbus makes a modern villain like Saddam Hussein look like a pale codfish”, so writes Eric Kasum).

Exactly. ‘IF’ is the key word. We cannot judge the actions and norms of behaviour, of Columbus and his contemporaries, outlined in the text and in the Appendix, according to present day standards, norms, morals etc. Since their era, 5 to 600 years ago, fundamental changes in ideology, morals and principles of governance etc. have taken place. In the 18th century the thinkers and philosophers of the Age of Enlightenment rejected any belief and conviction, religious or otherwise, based on the supernatural and superstitious. Instead, to be valid, they had to pass the test of logic and reason. A few decades later, the French Revolution of 1789 delegitimized the despotism of kings and their preposterous claims of God-given rights. Instead, it proclaimed new concepts of government by the people and equality in rights and duties among all: the seeds of Democracy. Slavery was abolished in mid-19th century (see 3 in Appendix). Women were progressively given equal rights with men starting in the first half of the 20th century(). Finally, the concept of human rights was enshrined in the United Nations’ ‘Universal Declaration of Human Rights’ of 1948, in the wake of the two bloody and devastating world wars. In a nutshell, what was then acceptable in terms of behaviour and morals in relation to others, became abhorrent, at least in principle and on paper.

Yet, alas, today, a great deal remains to be desired in the fields of equality, justice, freedom, acceptance of the other, and responsible governance. Prejudice, superstitions, taboos and social, political and commercial special interests ensure that no more than lip service is paid to the lofty ideals described. In the words of Professor Edmund Morgan: “Before we become too outraged at the behavior of Columbus and his followers… the modern world could not have put up with the [Tainos found on the islands ]any more than the Spanish could…… The story moves us, offends us, but perhaps the more so because we have to recognize ourselves not in the [gentle, naïve and innocent Tainos] but in Columbus and his followers”.

And my final words.

While researching the subject matter and drafting it, I was constantly troubled by the improbability of the voyages described. In 1 in the Appendix which follows,I have outlined the horrendous circumstances of navigating the cruel and unpredictable oceans and surviving on them in the leaky small ships of the times in question. In what frame of mind were Magellan, Columbus, their crews and others like them to embark on these adventures, not to mention that Columbus crossed from east to west and back not once or twice but 8 times. Most probably, in fact almost certainly, they must have had a conception of life, death, danger and risk-taking conditioned by the precariousness of every day living in Medieval times: short life expectancy, constant exposure to a score of debilitating and killing mysterious diseases and ailments not to mention famines etc(). I have a hundred questions to which I am keen know the answers.

APPENDIX

1-Ships in the days of Magellan and Christopher Columbus

They were of two designs: the carrack (image left) and the caravel (image right).

Chapter illustration

A carrack was a cargo ship, 18 m long by 6m wide, and a total depth from top to bottom of 3 m. Its speed was between 7.5 to 15 km/hr depending on wind and sea conditions. For their part, caravels were smaller at 15 to 17 m long, 5 m wide and 2m deep. They were marginally faster than carracks.

What was life like on board? Typically the crew worked in shifts, with one team pumping water 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. For no matter how well designed and constructed the hulls were never water tight. Sea water always seeped in and accumulated at the lowest point. It was joined there by various man-made effluents. It is reported that some of the sailors fainted from the foul smells.

As for sleeping, sailors did so as best as they could on the open deck rain or shine(). Food consisted of salted meat, fish , ship biscuits, dried peas, cheese and wine. They shared it all with all sorts of pests and rodents meaning it was not unusual for biscuits and the rest to be contaminated with rat urine and feces. Because not much room existed on board for provisions, food and water were rationed and could run out altogether on long journeys.

Also on long crossings, mariners suffered from a deadly disease called scurvy. It was caused by deficiency of vegetables and fruits in their diet. Its symptoms include “general weakness, anaemia, gingivitis (gum disease), and skin haemorrhages”.

Chapter illustration

Now, what about the ocean itself ? On the right is the image of a modern fishing boat in rough waters in the Atlantic caused by strong winds. How did the small leaky ships fare? Indeed, how did they keep warm in the freezing winter temperatures, and strong winds? How did they manage to eat and sleep? And a dozen other questions.

Chapter illustration

Given these atrocious conditions, it is not surprising that discipline was difficult to enforce. Thus, ship captains had no choice but to resort to severe punishments for the slightest act of disobedience or rebellion. They variously included whipping with the number of strokes commensurate with the gravity of the offence, suspending “from the ceiling by the wrists which were tied behind the back” ,an early version of today’s water boarding and of course death in case of mutiny etc.

It all seems so improbable, does it not?

2-A man of his times

From the accounts of Marco Polo() Europeans and Columbus knew that some east Asian peoples were non aggressive and went about quasi naked. Accordingly in the mind of civilized, Christian Europeans it was incumbent upon them to take to these ‘barbarians’ the benefits of civilization, and Christianity in order to “rescue [them] from the fate that would otherwise await them…”.

But with the encounter with these barbarians first in Africa and later in the Caeribbean, European were rediscovering the rewards of slave labour and quickly becoming addicted to, even though, as Christians, they knew its amorality in Christian dogma. A rationale emerged whereby against the gifts of civilization, primarily in the form of clothing, to replace un-Christian nakedness, and the benefits of the gospels, it was not too much to ask in return for the barbarians’ lifelong gratitude and submissiveness.

Ironically, though, ‘the Indians’ met by Christopher Columbus, despite going around naked, lived in harmony among themselves and otherwise abided unwittingly and instinctively by Christian morals. More. They lived a much more virtuous life than many European Christians. In the words of Professor Morgan: “Without the help of Christianity or of civilization, they had attained virtues that Europeans liked to think of as the proper outcome of Christianity and civilization”. According to him, this troubled them as they could not conceive of virtuous life outside the Church.

3- Emancipation of slaves.

Slavery was abolished in the British Empire in 1833 and in the colonies of France in 1848; in both cases, mainly, on account of the actions of enlightened activists. But in the United States of America, southern sates’ planters fought tenaciously to perpetuate slave labour, they could not envisage an economic future without it. They idea of liberated slaves was anathema to them. Even Abraham Lincoln, the great, enlightened emancipator of African slaves stated in a debate in 1858 , three years before the onset of the Civil War(): “I am not in favor…of bringing about…the social and political equality of the white and black races…[or] making voters… of negroes …there is a physical difference [between the two races] which…will forever forbid [the eventuality]… of social [including intermarriages] and political quality… [Therefore, I] am in favor of having the superior position assigned to the white race”. Clearly, Lincoln’s enlightenment was not enough to enable him to foresee that sometime in the future equality between races could be contemplated with education and other factors helping. Lincoln’s ideas remained virtually unchanged, among Americans, until Martin Luther King’s Civil Rights Movement, a hundred years later.

References. (1)-Biography; Christopher Columbus. (2)-Encyclopedia Britannica; Age of Discovery. (3)-Ditto; Christopher Columbus. (4)-Fordham University; Christopher Columbus: Extracts from Journal. (5)-Historyworld.net; Age of Discovery. (6)-Huffpost; Columbus day? True Legacy: Cruelty and Slavery by Eric Kasum, an ordained Buddhist monk. Founder of Imagine Institute, a think tank for Peace. Journalist contributing articles to The Los Angeles Times and The New York Times, speech writer for various presidents etc. (7)- Jacobin; The real Christopher Columbus by Howard Zinn, American historian, playwright and social activist. Previously, Professor of political science at Boston University. (8)- Smithsonian Magazine; Columbus’ Confusion about the New World by Edmund Morgan, Emeritus Professor of history at Yale University. (9)-Understanding Prejudice; Examining the Reputation of Columbus by Jack Weatherford, anthropology professor at Macalester College, Minnesota.

They Made the World Smaller 3

THEY MADE THE WORLD SMALLER.

PART-3 WALKING WHERE NO MAN HAS WALKED BEFORE

Chapter illustration

INTRODUCTION

THIS PART OF project: ‘They Made the World Smaller’ is the story of the pioneers who voluntarily took up the challenge of penetrating and exploring the hitherto unknown and mysterious icy deserts of the Arctic and Antarctic regions of Earth. They did it for personal and patriotic glory, but also for the advancement of scientific knowledge and, in the case of the former, as a quest to find shorter and faster trade routes.

Their motives, notwithstanding, all those men showed extraordinary courage, determination and tenacity in the face of unusual even calamitous circumstances. In the end, they variously met with success or failure, suffering, pain and/or tragedy.

LAND OF THE ESKIMO AND POLAR BEAR

THE ARCTIC REGION is that geographic expanse north of the Arctic Circle (see map below) enclosed by parts of Alaska, Canada, Greenland, Norway, Sweden and Russia; a total of 45,000 kms of shoreline delineating the Arctic Ocean, the smallest of all five world oceans. Yet, at 14,000,000 sq kms it is still larger than either Canada, the United States or China and only marginally smaller than Russia(), the largest country in the world. That huge body of water is permanently frozen over().

Chapter illustration

The Arctic is of course the land of the Eskimos (see Appendix). As for its fauna, there are more than 20 species of mammals in the Arctic region including the polar bear, reindeer, Arctic fox, seal and beluga whale, to name a few, according to French doctor, explorer and scientist Jean Louis Etienne (DOB: 1946)

The Northwest Passage.

IN PART-2 WE have seen the Portuguese and Spaniards establish new sea routes, in the 16th century to the lucrative markets of India and China. The first down the west coast of Africa then left after rounding the Cape of Good Hope. The other westward passed the southern tip of South America to eastern India and the rest.

As to be expected, the other European countries, notably England and Holland wanted their own trade routes to Asia. They expected to find it by linking the Atlantic with the Pacific Oceans via the gap between Alaska and Siberia, the so called Northwestern Passage all the way, once again, to East Asia (see map below).

With this in mind, the two nations sent expedition after expedition in the 16th and early 17th century is search of that sea route. However, they all met with failure and, at times disaster with loss of life, being confronted, as they were, by frigid climatic conditions and treacherous ice covered waters infested with icebergs. The Passage is nearly 1500 kms long and a ship could become entrapped and immobilized with its crew on board for months on end in the middle of nowhere. That is assuming, of course, its hull is not crushed by ice closing in sending ship and crew to the bottom, or leaving the men stranded in unfriendly and dreadful environmental conditions.

So much so in fact that the Passage was navigated for the first time as late as 1906 by the Norwegian explorer, Roald Amundsen (1872-1928) Already as a young man, he had, from 1897 to 1899, taken part as a crew member aboard a Belgian vessel in an extended time expedition to Antarctica where he learned to survive in extreme weather.

IN PREPARATION FOR his new quest, Amundsen purchased in 1901 the ‘Gjøa’ a 45- tonne fishing vessel and spent the next two years learning and training about/on it, so that when he eventually set sail , with 6 crew members, late in 1903, he had become proficient enough to lead his ship through the dangerous waters of the Northwest Passage (see black line on map) . On September 1903 he entered a natural harbour which he named  ‘Gjøa Haven’ after his boat, where he intended to spend time doing scientific work. Shortly afterwards an Eskimo tribe settled near the Norwegians. The explorer was so taken by the goodness, generosity and apparent happiness of these perennial survivors of the Arctic that he wrote in his diary: “I don't think that we will ever meet better people in our lifetime”. Unsurprisingly, this being so, a mutually rewarding and friendly relationship ensued, to the benefit of both parties().

Chapter illustration

But it is what Amundsen learnt from the Eskimos which stood him in good stead when the time came to conquer Antarctica and set foot on the South Pole as we shall see. They taught him to handle dogs and sledges, in order to make the combination more performing. They introduced him to fur clothing, superior to anything similar made in Europe. Equally important, they took him along on sledging and camping trips in the frozen wilderness.

Early in 1905, Amundsen decided it was time to leave his new found friends and resume his journey west towards the Pacific Ocean. It was a difficult crossing fraught with great dangers. So much so, it is reported his crew more than once pleaded with him to reverse course. But he kept assuring them that the end was near even though he was in a wretched state from lack of proper meals and sleeplessness for many long days: he did not want to entrust navigation and the handling of the ‘Gjøa’ to anyone but himself. At last, on 26th August 1905, one crewman sighted a whaling ship to the west of them. Amundsen immediately knew they had entered the great Pacific Ocean. In his diary he wrote: “The North West Passage was done. My boyhood dream was accomplished. A strange feeling welled up in my throat; I was somewhat over-strained and worn, but I felt tears in my eyes”.

Chapter illustration

Since then, interest in the Passage has waned. It was 64 years later, in 1969 that the first entire Pacific/Atlantic crossing through that route was undertaken by the American ice-breaker Manhattan. This long voyage did not, however, presage the regular trade traffic intended originally. To this day , in fact, the Northwest Passage never developed into a viable commercial sea route, unlike the Northeaster Passage we come to next.

The Northeast Passage.

Chapter illustration

CONCURRENTLY THERE ALSO was interest in the Northeast Passage. As the map alongside shows, this alternative route takes shipping traffic eastwards along the Russian coast all the way, again, to China and India.

Not surprisingly, the Russians were the main interested party. They sent several expeditions to reconnoiter the Passage during the 17oo’s and 1800’s. But it was the Swedish explorer Nils Nordenskjold who navigated it fully in 1878. Ice breakers began sailing through it in the 1900’s. Finally it was established as the Northern Sea Route shipping lane by the Soviet Union in 1930’s.

THE NORTH POLE is the northern end of Earth axis of rotation. It is located in the middle of the Arctic Ocean where it is 4,000 m deep and its surface permanently frozen to a depth of 2 to 3 m. Temperature there varies from -40 to 0 deg C between winter and summer. The pole is approximately 700 kms from nearest land.

Interest in the North Pole, both for scientific reasons and in search of glory and prestige arose in the 19th century. The first attempt at reaching it was undertaken by British explorer, Admiral Edward Parry in 1827, without success. After him several others tried both on foot and in a Hydrogen filled balloon all meeting with failure too.

The earliest serious attempts and claims of standing at the Pole took place during the first decade of the 20th century. One after the other, with one year in between, two American explorers made declarations in the United States print media of having set foot on the North Pole. They were Frederick Albert Cook and Robert Edwin Peary successively (see map below).

Chapter illustration

COOK (1865-1940), A PHYSICIAN turned explorer set off in February 1908 from his base camp in Annoatok, a settlement in northern Greenland, in the direction of the North Pole some 1,100 kms away. With him went nine Eskimos, eleven sledges and 103 dogs of the Husky breed . Approximately half way to his destination most of his party was ordered to turn back leaving the explorer and two companions to continue toward their target. Subsequently, Cook claimed that on April 21st, 1908, after having “for days… struggled through a violent wind that made every breath painful. … [they had finally arrived] at a spot which was as near [the Pole] as possible”. He further reported that their return journey to base camp was horrendous. Not only did they stray from the right route by 150 kms, but with the winter season upon them they were immobilized for four months in a cave in that frozen nowhere. When their stocks of pemmican() ran out they resorted to hunting. First with guns and later, with no ammunition left, with spears. Eventually, in April,1909 they were back in base camp. They carried with them the navigation notes and photographs to substantiate Cook’s claim to being the first at the North Pole. He made his claim public with a telegram to the New York Herald on September 1st 1909. It simply said: “Reached North Pole April 21, 1908”.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

AS FOR PEARY (1856-1920) he categorically ascertained to having reached the Pole on April 6th 1909, one year after Cook’s alleged date. For his undertaking Peary had the backing of the National Geographic Society and the support and blessing of President Theodore Roosevelt. In consequence he was able to plan, prepare and equip his expedition lavishly. Indeed, in complete ignorance of the expedition of Cook, he left American shores in August 1908 in a specially built steamer loaded with 49 Eskimo men women and children, 246 huskies(see image), appropriate number of sledges in addition to 60 tonnes of whale meat and the meat and blubber of 50 walruses(). He dropped anchor at Ellesmere Island in the Canadian far north. In February 1909 he left the ship and started his trek toward the Pole with some of the Eskimo men, dogs and sledges, reaching what he estimated to be his target on April 6th, 1909. Having thus sledged for a month, he wrote in his journal : “The Pole at last!!! The prize of 3 centuries, my dream and ambition for 23 years. Mine at last”.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Upon his return to Annoatok , where his path met that of Cook he learnt of the latter’s claim. He was furious and tried to discredit his rival by whatever means available to him. On September 6th,1909, he telegraphed the New York Times: “Stars and Stripes nailed to North Pole”. And two days later he sent the same paper a short summary of his exploit adding: “Don’t let Cook story worry you. Have him nailed”

THERE FOLLOWED MANY years of acrimonious debate as to whom, of the two explorers Cook or Peary had been the first to stand in the North Pole, involving the American media, and even Congress. At the end the evidence presented by each party in support of its case was found wanting. So much so, that neither man was recognized as having actually made it to the Pole.

ENTERS ROALD AMUNDSEN. After his expedition through the Northwest Passage, he had envisaged an attempt at the North Pole. But shortly before putting his plan to execution, he heard of the dispute between the two American explorers. He, thus, switched his attention and efforts to the conquest of the South Pole as we shall see later. But with their claims discredited, Amundsen became in 1926, the first human at the North Pole. This time, though, he did not go there with sledges pulled by dogs. Instead he flew over it in a dirigible on his way from the Norwegian Arctic to Alaska, USA.

‘HEROIC AGE’ OF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION

WHEREAS, AS WE have seen, the Arctic Ocean is the smallest of the world oceans. Antarctica (see map below), with the same area of 14,000,000 sq kms, ranks fifth among the seven continents(). Nonetheless, it is 1.4 times larger than Europe and nearly twice the size of Australia.

Chapter illustration

The land of Antarctica is permanently covered with ice sheets which can reach 1,200 m in thickness. It should, therefore be no surprise that it has the highest average altitude, among all continents: 3,000 m. Antarctica contains several massive ice rivers or glaciers which are constantly on the move toward the ocean. Once there, they break off into floating icebergs, some of which can have many thousand sq kms in surface area. For example one which broke off in 2000, according to ‘LIVESCIENCE’ had a surface area of 11,000 sq kms above water and ten times that below the surface.

Further, the frozen surface of Antarctica is far from smooth and even. On the contrary it is rugged and ravaged by constant erosion. And worst of all are deep crevasses a primary deadly risk to explorers. Another grave impediment is the frequent recurrence of blizzards, or snow storms, with wind speeds of up to two to three hundred kms/hr. As for how cold it is, suffices to say that during winters temperatures drop as low as -90 degs centigrade. In summers it does not rise much above freezing. Depressing landscape to say the least. No wonder then that according to ‘LIVESCIENCE’: Antarctoca is “The coldest, windiest and driest continent, Antarctica contains 90 percent of all of the ice on Earth”. This being so, unlike the Arctic, there are no indigenous people to be met here. But on the other hand it is home to penguins, seals and whales and few other land, air and marine animals.

ANTARCTTICA REMAINED “Terra Australis Incognita”() meaning unknown lands of the south till late 19th century. One of the reasons could be that, the continent was too far from the centers of civilization and commerce of the earlier centuries: there were no Passages to be discovered to speed up trade, as was the case with the Arctic. But in the 1770’s Captain James Cook (1728-1779) of the Royal Navy, the discoverer of Australia and New Zealand, circumnavigated Antarctica and established its existence and extent once and for all.

It was not, however, until the first two decades of the 20th century that interest in the exploration of the southernmost continent kicked off. Indeed, no less than 17 exploratory missions from ten countries undertook the adventure, between 1911 and the early 1920s for reasons of personal and national glory and scientific curiosity. That time stretch is known as the ‘Heroic Age’ of Antarctic exploration. It is so because explorers, then, relied exclusively on animal and human muscle power. They had to have incredible resilience, endurance, stamina and tenacity in order to overcome the many unsuspected risks and dangers facing them. Only limited provisions could be carried and, worst of all, when trouble struck, and it often did, no assistance and rescue could be expected from any external quarter. An article in National Geographic on January 1st , 2014 identifies six reasons which made the exploration of Antarctica at that time, particularly perilous. Briefly they consisted of long distance trekking across unchartered geography over rugged, ravaged lands, in extreme weather conditions and carrying heavy loads while, at times, man- pulling sledges. More, risks were ever present of falling irretrievably into deep crevasses, starving and being stricken with scurvy(). No wonder, then “that each expedition became a feat of endurance that tested, and sometimes exceeded its personnel's physical and mental limits”, in the words of the entry in Wikipedia. That heroic period ended with the adoption of mechanization and radio communication following the end of the First World War.

For our purpose here, we recount the stories of four exceptionally enterprising and courageous men who variously attempted to reach the South Pole or trek over vast expanses of the desolate continent. Between them they met with success, failure, heartbreaks, unbearable physical and mental pain and tragedy. All ingredients of that ‘Heroic Age’.

Race to the Pole

WE HAVE ALREADY seen the competing claims, of Frederick Cook and Robert Peary, of being first at the North Pole and the bitter debate which ensued until resolution of the controversy as described.

Chapter illustration

In the case of the South Pole, however, the attempt to reach it was nothing less than a true “ race to walk where no man had walked before” taking place in 1911-1912. There were two teams competing. The first was led by the Norwegian Roald Amundsen, the second was headed by British Navy Captain Robert F Scott. Amundsen beat Scott to the target by 34 days (see map above); he was, no doubt, ecstatic to find no signs of Scott’s party being there first. To the contrary, when the Englishman, in turn, arrived he was welcomed, to his despair, and great disappointment by Amundsen’s tent and Norwegian flag: He had been beaten despite all the hardships he suffered.

BY 1911, AMUNDSEN at 39 was an accomplished explorer. From his earlier stay with the Eskimo tribe, he was a strong believer in the importance of huskies which he knew well and handled masterly, understanding they constituted perhaps the most important element in his undertaking. Above all, however, he was a meticulous planner leaving nothing to chance. Following his success at the Pole he commented: “I may say that this is the greatest factor—the way in which the expedition is equipped—the way in which every difficulty is foreseen, and precautions taken for meeting or avoiding it. Victory awaits him who has everything in order—luck, people call it. Defeat is certain for him who has neglected to take the necessary precautions in time; this is called bad luck”.

Chapter illustration

On January 14th ,1911 Amundsen arrived by boat to Antarctica’s Bay of Whales where he set up his base camp. Amundsen spent the best part of that year making preparations for his oncoming journey to the Pole. Of critical importance in this respect was the setting up of staging posts on the planned route stocked with adequate supplies for the trip there and back. Finally ready, Amundsen and four companions left the base camp on October 19th 1911 with four loaded sledges and 52 huskies . Along the way at a place they called ‘Butcher Shop’ and as envisaged Amundsen’s planning, they slaughtered 24 dogs to feed the other huskies and some of the men even partook in the feast . Of the 28 remaining animals 12 were left behind to await the team’s return journey. Thus the Norwegians with 16 dogs arrived at the Pole on December 14th 1911. Elated to find no trace of the British team, they erected a tent at the place and raised their national flag. In Amundsen’s diary the entry for that day reads: “So we arrived and were able to plant our flag at the geographical South Pole. God be thanked”.

Chapter illustration

Before setting off back to base camp, Amundsen left a note for Robert Scott to deliver to the king of Norway in case he succumbed on his way back. No fear. The team made a successful return with 11 dogs on January 25th ,1912 all in good health, ninety nine days and 3,000 kms after departing. Quite an achievement.

CAPTAIN ROBERT SCOTT (1868-1912) of the Royal Navy, was also a veteran of the Antarctic. From 1901 to 1904 he was in charge of an expedition there funded by the British Government. He successfully trekked up to about 700 kms fro the Pole, the “furthest south” anyone had hitherto attained. He returned home to great acclaim.

Chapter illustration

He sailed back to Antarctica in January 1911 with the aim of becoming the first human to stand at the South Pole. He dropped anchor on the 11th of that month, at Cape Evans, where he established his base camp. Similarly to Amundsen, he spent several months making preparations, including the all-important setting up of staging posts, and stocking them with supplies, along the route to his target. His starting point was some 100 kms farther from the Pole, than that of the Norwegian. But unlike him, he eschewed the use of dogs, having only a few preferring, instead, ponies and motorized tractors.

Eventually, on November 1st, 1911 he left camp with “support parties”, tractors and ponies. Soon the former broke down and were abandoned. As for the animals they could not endure the freezing weather : they were slaughtered for their meat. In contrast, Scott sent back the few huskies relying, henceforth, on human muscles. It turned out, however, that pulling heavy sledges with “man-harnesses” was much more demanding and exhausting work than anticipated. According to BBC History, Scott did so because he believed “it was less cruel than using animals and more noble”. Ultimately, “the man-hauling polar party” consisted of Scott and four companions. They faced great difficulties along the way.

The British explores arrived at the Pole on January 17th, 1912 to the crushing realization that Amundsen has been there first. They were beaten. All their hard work and hardships had come to nothing. In his diary entry, Scott immortalized the occasion with a cry of despair: “The POLE. Yes, but under very different circumstances from those expected. Great God! This is an awful place and terrible enough for us to have laboured to it without the reward of priority”. Despondent, no doubt, the team set off for the long and difficult slog home on January 19th, 1912.

Chapter illustration

Contrary to Amundsen’s smooth and triumphal return to base, Scott’s was dreadful and ended tragically about 600 kms from base camp. A month after leaving the Pole a first team member, stumbled behind the rest, entered into a coma and died. On March 2nd, a second teammate badly frostbitten, deliberately walked out of the tent never to return, in order not to slow down Scott and his remaining two companions. He had said: “I am just going outside and may be some time”. But Scott “knew that [he] was walking to his death... it was the act of a brave man and an English gentleman”. The three still living exploreres were then trapped inside their tent by blizzards . Nevertheless Scott wrote: “We shall stick it out to the end, but we are getting weaker, of course, and the end cannot be far. It seems a pity but I do not think I can write more”. Toward the end, they all wrote letters to loved ones at home. Scott’s last written words: “For God’s sake look after our people”. They were discovered, a few months later, by a search party, frozen dead in their sleeping bags, only 17 kms from the nearest stockpile of food and other supplies. They heaped snow was over their tent to become their tomb.

Chapter illustration

WHEN AMUNDSEN LEARNT of the tragedy , he reportedly commented: “I would gladly forgo any honour or money if thereby I could have saved Scott his terrible death”.

Crevasses, frostbites, dog meat and detached skin.

Chapter illustration

PERHAPS THE MOST heroic feat in the ‘Heroic Age’ of Antarctic exploration is that of Australian Douglas Mawson (1882-1958) in his attempts at staying alive after his team of explorers met with disaster and tragedy, to eventually stagger home to tell it all.

Late in 1911 at the time Amundsen and Scott were battling it out, young geologist Mawson arrived, with a group of explorers, aboard the ship ‘Aurora’, at a location on the coast of Antarctica named Commonwealth Bay. There they set up their base camp in preparation for their exploratory work. That part of the continent has been described as the windiest part of the world. Blizzards there practically never cease with wind speeds of between 80 to 200 km/hr.

Mawson divided his group into teams assigning each a task to be carried out. Himself and two young teammates, Belgrave Ninnis and Xavier Mertz were to explore the area shown on the map below. Thus, organized, Mawson’s team left base camp on November 10th,1912 with two sledges, “loaded with food, survival equipment and scientific instruments” and 12 dogs. By December 14th 1912 they had travelled reasonably trouble free for 500 kms. Then disaster struck and continued to do so with one calamity after another.

Chapter illustration

First, on that day, Ninnis fell into a deep crevasse along with the biggest sledge and 6 huskies never to reappear. Mawson wrote: “Practically all the food had gone— spade, pick, tent… We considered it a possibility to get through to [back to base camp] by eating dogs… May God help us”. So Mawson and Mertz started their journey back. The next day they slaughtered their first dog ate part of it , including the liver for additional nourishment, and gave the rest to the remaining five huskies. They , obviously, had no choice but to continue the practice until the last husky was finished off on December 28th 1912. It was a terrible diet but through experimenting Mawson discovered “it was worth the while spending some time in boiling the dogs’ meat thoroughly. Thus a tasty soup was prepared as well as a supply of edible meat in which the muscular tissue and the gristle() were reduced to the consistency of a jelly. The paws took longest of all to cook, but, treated to lengthy stewing, they became quite digestible.”

But eating canine liver was a very serious mistake. They soon began developing acute stomach pains accompanied by diarrhea. It was most severe on Mertz to the point that his companion wrote that he “fills his trousers again and I clean out for him”. Meaning, at least once, pulling Mertz out of his sleeping bag, cleaning him up and returning him inside it. This at a time when their skin was coming detached from various parts of their bodies. Finally, Mertz became delirious and died on January 8th, 1913.

Mawson was now by himself 160 kms from base camp, weakened, with no companion no adequate food and no huskies. Nevertheless, he found the will and energy to drag Mertz out of the tent and bury him under a pile of ice. He then cut the remaining sledge into two halves and proceeded , dragging part of a sledge, in recurring blizzards, toward base camp. And he needed to be there on time to board the Aurora before it sailed back home. By then, however, his lips and nose had cut open and worse, the skin of his soles became detached from the bottom of his feet, “leaving nothing but a mass of weeping blisters”, in the words of one source. In order to be able to walk he bandaged it back in place . But by then, in Mawson’s words “My whole body is apparently rotting from want of proper nourishment—frost-bitten fingertips, festering, mucous membrane of nose gone, saliva glands of mouth refusing duty, skin coming off the whole body”. And, as if all the excruciating pain and agony were not enough, he fell into a crevasse. It was not wide enough to swallow the half-sledge which, luckily, spanned the opening. Mawson was thus, left hanging from his harness and astonishingly found enough strength to pull himself out. This experience led him to fashion a rope ladder which he attached to his half sledge for easier climbing out in case he fell again. Which he did more than once and used that ladder to his advantage. Finally on February 8th, 1913 he staggered into base camp. He had missed the departure of the Aurora by a few hours. Instead he found six men of the original group awaiting his and his companions’ return . He spent, thus, another year in Antarctica in their care. He returned home to Australia, to a hero’s welcome, at the end of February 1914.

What is most remarkable in this account is the ability and determination of Mawson to keep his head and wits about him, in order to survive and return to civilization; despite malnutrition, excruciating pain, ill health, loneliness ,extreme cold and blizzards. Not only did he do what we have seen above but he also to put up his tent securely every night and dismantle it the next morning, apart from much more. Above all, however, he was able to navigate his way, faultlessly, back to camp in the immense , blizzard swept white wilderness. Truly extraordinary, even superhuman.

What made Mawson endure it all? An article in the Smithsonian.com, headlined: “The Most Terrible Polar Exploration Ever”, published on the centenary of Mawson’s return, answers that question. It reports that the hero himself later disclosed that during his trekking he was “utterly overwhelmed by an urge to give in” . But he was determined to survive for his fiancée Paquita and because he wanted to tell the world about his two dead friends.

Chapter illustration

I SHALL CONCLUDE this part with a brief account of the failed expedition of Irishman, and veteran explorer of Antarctica, Ernest Shackleton (1874-1922). His did not meet with tragedy like that of Mawson, but it was heroic just the same.

With the South Pole conquered by Amundsen a couple of years earlier, Shackleton decided, instead, to attempt the crossing of the whole continent, a distance of 2,900 kms ‘ on foot’ that is with sledges and huskies (see map below). Accordingly he set out to organize the trip. He acquired a ship, the ‘Endurance’ and assembled a team of 28 men, among them “two surgeons, a meteorologist, an explorer, a carpenter, a soldier and a photographer”. On board were also 69 huskies and several sledges.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Shackleton set sail from South Georgia on December 5th ,1914. By January 19th ,1915, Endurance had become hopelessly immobilized by dense ice packs. All remained on board with the expectation that the coming thaw would free the vessel enabling them to proceed with the mission. Instead, however, on October 24,1915, it started to flood: its hull being crushed by ice pressure. Shackleton ordered evacuation. Taking with them, naturally, all provisions and the ship’s lifeboats, the group settled on a floating ice sheet. The ship finally sank on November 21st, 1915.

Chapter illustration

On April 9th 1916, the ice sheet, bearing them began to break up. Accordingly, the group boarded its three life boats setting course for Elephant Island 550 kms away. Following five grueling days, they landed on the inhospitable island, understandably at the end of their strength. On the 16th of that month Shackleton sailed in one of lifeboats, somewhat modified by the carpenter, back to their starting point, South Georgia , in order to organize a rescue operation. It took them 16 days to cross the 1300 kms to destination. Braving hurricane winds, they managed to land at the third try. According to one source, this crossing “… is regarded as one of the greatest small-boat journeys ever recorded, as the men managed to travel… across the stormiest sea on earth in a 22-foot lifeboat”. But then Shackleton needed to slog with two of his companions 50 or so kms to the nearest place where help could be sought. Even so, it was to be four months later, August 30th, 1916, before Shackleton could remove to safety his 22 teammates, sheltering under their overturned lifeboats, on Elephant Island. Unlike the other failed expeditions of Scott and Mawson, that of Shackleton did not end in tragedy. None of the 28 lost his life.

But it was, in its way no less heroic. Think of nothing else but of the men on Elephant Island waiting in anguish and despair for help, being in the dark as to the fate of those who went in search of help. Did they or did they not reach destination? Is rescue forthcoming or is it not? And if it is how soon? Otherwise what is to become of us on this island far from shipping lanes and from the notice of anyone. As we have seen they had to live with the agony of those uncertainties for four long months, every minute of which must have felt like a year.

APPENDIX

IN THE BODY OF the text we have briefly mentioned the Eskimos who befriended Roald Amundsen on his quest for the Northwest Passage, and skimmed over what they taught him in the way of survival techniques which later contributed to his success at the South Pole. In consequence, it seems relevant to spare a few lines here for these exceptional and tough people of the frozen northern expanse of the Globe.

Chapter illustration

‘Eskimo’ ,in the language native Americans( Indians) is thought to mean ‘ eaters of raw meat’. It applies to a multitude of ethnicities who for three or more thousand years have inhabited within the Arctic Circle in Canada, Alaska, Greenland, Norway, Sweden and Siberia. They are variously, referred to as Inuit, Lapp, Sami etc. Over the generations they have adapted to their harsh environment and have lived happily ever after.

Eskimos dress from head to toe in clothing made from land animal furs. They are light and keep the user warm and dry. Amundsen and the members of his team wore them on the trek to the South Pole, allowing them a competitive edge over their Briish rivals clad in much heavier, less warm and moisture trapping woolen garments.

The diet of the Eskimo people consists almost exclusively of meat and blubber from fishes they catch and from marine mammals such as seals, walruses and whales, they harpoon from kayaks or the bigger umyaks. They also hunt caribou and other land animals with bows and arrows. They eat their meat raw which is a good thing since cooking destroys some of the much needed nutrients. Very crucially, they do not suffer from debilitating, even fatal scurvy, the scourge, for centuries, of European sailors and explorers whose diets, for extended periods, were devoid of fruits and vegetables. Eskimos, too, lack the latter in their arid environment, but find the immunizing vitamin C in their meat.

For land transport, Eskimos rely on dog drawn sledges. Curiously, according to Canadian Geographic: “In conditions where the snowy landscape and the grey sky blended together, the dogs refused to move forward as they could not see where they were heading. The [Eskimos] remedied this by having the women of the family run in front of the dogs or even harnessed in with the dogs. This way, the dogs were more than willing to pull in all kind of conditions”. In the case of Amundsen, they taught him and his companions “how to make… their sledge runners slide at very low temperatures…and how to drive dogs”. Once

again a huge advantage over Scott and his team’s less efficient sledges, useless ponies and human muscles.

Chapter illustration

Eskimos lived in three types of dwellings. Quoting Encyclopedia Britannica: “Most Eskimo wintered in either snow-block houses called igloos or semisubterranean houses… In summer many Eskimo lived in… animal-skin tents” (see image above). Quite unexpectedly, at the very low temperatures between -30 and -60 igloos are “much warmer, windproof and dry…[in comparison to the] …very cold and damp” tents of the foreign explorers ,as stated by Canadian Geographic.

The bones and skin of the animals they hunted and caught went onto practically everything the Eskimos built and made. Into the half buried houses, the kayaks , the harpoons, bows and arrows and even the needles to sew the furs.

REFERENCES

BBC MAGAZINE. -Douglas Mawson: An Australian Hero’s Story of Survival.

BBC HISTORY. -The Race to the South Pole.

CANADIAN GEOGRAPHIC

-Lessons from the Northwest Passage: Roald Amundsen’s Experiences in the Canadian Arctic.

BIOGRAPHY.

-Robert Edwin Peary.

ENCYCLOPEDIA.COM.

-Northeast Passage. -Northwest Passage.

ENCYCLOPEDIA BRITANNICA.

-Arctic. -Ernest Shackleton. -Robert Peary. -Eskimo

HISTORY.COM.

Northwest Passage.

ICE STORIES.

-Antarctic Exploration.

LINDBLAD EXPEDITIONS/NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC. -Learn about the Antarctic Explorations and the Heroic Age.

LIVE SCIENCE. -Antarctica: Facts about the Coldest Continent. -The North Pole: location, Weather, Exploration …and Santa.

NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC. -Peary and the North Pole, 100 Years Ago Today. -Opinion: 6 Reasons Antarctic Explorers Were Tougher 100 Years Ago.

NEW WORLD ENCYCLOPEDIA. -Roald Amundsen.

SCIENTIFIC AMERICAN. -Amundsen Becomes First to Reach the South Pole, December 14,1911.

SMITHSONIAN MAGAZINE

-Who Discovered the North Pole.

SMITHSONIAN.COM.

-The Most Terrible Polar Exploration Ever: Douglas Mawson Antarctic Journey.

THE NEW YORK TIMES. -Amazing Race to the Bottom of the World.

TODAY IN HISTORY. -March 7,1912. The Heroic Age of Polar Explorations.

WIKIPEDIA. -Heroic Age of Antarctic Exploration.

Sapien, Alexander, Genghis, Napoleon, and Adolf

SAPIENS, ALEXANDER, GENGHIS, NAPOLEON & ADOLF

Chapter illustration

OR

FIGHTING AMONG HUMANS

BY The Author

HISTORICAL OVERVIEW.

Some 3.8 billion years ago, the first organisms appear on planet Earth*. From then on, Darwin’s natural selection evolution takes over. This, according to ‘Sapiens’, the 2011 book by historian Yuval Noah Harari. Further, about 6 million years ago, the last common grandmother of humans and chimpanzees “had two daughters, one became the ancestor of all chimpanzees, the other is our own grandmother”.

By two and a half million years ago the complete separation of the ape and homo genus is complete. Several homo genera evolve such as Homo rudolfensis, Homo erectus, Homo neaderthalensis etc. and of course our own : Homo sapiens. By 200,000 years ago the latter is a completely separate species which, alone among all other humanoids, undergo between 70,000 and 30,000 years ago a ‘Cognitive Revolution’ which transforms sapiens from instinct driven creatures to thinking, remembering, learning and intercommunicating beings. That period also witnesses the building of boats, making of bows, arrows, needles and oil lamps. In the words of Yuval Harari: “The Cognitive Revolution turned Homo sapiens from an insignificant ape into the master of the world [with] no noticeable change in physiology or even in the size and external shape of the sapiens brain”.

Armed with these cognitive abilities, sapiens had, by 13,000 years ago exterminated all other human species and all mega fauna (large animals such as the mammoth, huge kangaroos etc.) in Europe, Asia, Americas and Australia to which they had immigrated from their place of origin: East Africa*. Henceforth, they reign supreme over the Globe. At this stage, our forebears have, already, acquired their propensity for cruelty and aggression.

The second transformation of sapiens starts around 12,000 years ago. It is the ‘Agricultural Revolution’ and the dawning of civilizations and acculturations. From then on sapiens, though still subject to natural (genetic) evolution like all other organisms, overlap it with their own created myths (see footnote 4) and behaviors foreign to and to the detriment of Mother Nature.

INTRODUCTION.

In his other book, the 2015 ‘Homo Deus’ Yuval Harari writes: “Throughout history, most humans took war for granted, whereas peace was of temporary and precarious state…From the stone age to the age of steam[and beyond] and from the Arctic to the Sahara, every person on earth knew that at any moment the neighbours might invade their territory, defeat their army, slaughter their people and occupy their land”.

For centuries, philosophers have tried to make sense of the “riddle of war” as this phenomenon of recurrent fighting among humans is called by Professor Azar Gat in his 2006 book: ‘War in Human Civilization’.

In his ‘Discourse on the Origins of Inequality’ the prominent French philosopher Jean Jacques Rousseau (1712-1778) idealized hunter gatherers (pre- agricultural sapiens).To him, they lived in complete harmony with nature and, certainly, did not fight among themselves. According to Rousseau, all this changed with agriculture and acquisition of property: “The invention of property and the division of labor represent the beginning of moral inequality. Property allows for the domination and exploitation of the poor by the rich” and by implication property introduced warfare. In other words, fighting among Homo sapiens, according to the philosopher, was a culturally acquired activity absent in the state of nature.

Almost a century earlier, the English philosopher Thomas Hobbes (1588-1679) did not think so. To him, writing in ‘Leviathan’ , the life of Homo sapiens in the state of nature was one of non-ending “warre, murderous feuds for gain, safety and reputation, a warre of every man against every man, which made life poore, nasty and short”. Hobbes remedy: humans should form polities, under the control of an absolute, but caring, ruler who would ensure peace among his flock, and defend it against intruders.

As for German philosopher Immanuel Kant’s (1724-1804) ‘Perpetual Peace’, only the creation of electoral democracies, will bring an end to warfare. This is so for the logical reason, at least in theory, that the people who choose their governments are the ones who, in case of conflict, shoulder the costs, through their contributions in taxes and as soldiers.

In the text which follows we will see that fighting among humans has prevailed from the days of our primate ancestors and that no form of government was immune to fighting for one reason or another.

HOMO SAPIENS IN THE STATE OF NATURE.

Homo sapiens in the state of nature were hunter gatherers. For all these millennia until the Agricultural Revolution, they subsisted on edible wild flora and on the meat from wild game. Professor Gat reveals that hunter gatherers fought every now and then, and when they did, on the scale of one kin group against another, it was ferocious and resulted in “high rates of mortality, as high as 25-30 percent of the adult males”. Combat was caused by competition for scarce resources and for females*. This is hardly surprising given Darwin’s ‘survival of the fittest’ theory, and with survival depending on nutrition and reproduction, hunter gatherers had no choice but to fight and risk injury and death, in their quest for both . It is interesting to note that natural evolution associated brief periods of pleasure with both, no doubt to encourage all organisms to pursue them at all times.

Rousseau’s idyllic pre-agriculture state of affairs prevailed in scientific circles till the 1960s. Until then, according to professor Gat, scholarly wisdom held that our nearest cousins, the chimpanzees were vegetarian, non-violent and non-territorial ( meaning kin groups had no territory of their own to defend against intruders). However, all this became obsolete from the mid-1960s when research and observations, in an African habitat, of a group of chimpanzees, revealed that, to the contrary, our cousins were in fact avid meat eaters, feasting principally on monkeys and small mammals. Further the group was highly territorial. “The males patrol the boundary of the group’s territory and fiercely attack any intruder, including foreign chimpanzees (but not lone females coming to join the group[although they kill their infants]). They also aggressively raid foreign territories”.

The example of the primitive Maori people of New Zealand is edifying. They were horticulturalists (growing garden variety of fruits and vegetables) who settled there, arriving in waves from the Polynesian islands, between 1250 amd 1300 CE. They formed clans and tribes, often fiercely warring among themselves. When The first English settlers arrived in the late 1700s they brought along the potato and fire arms. Both were adopted shortly after by the Maori who henceforth, according to Professor Jared Diamond’s 1997 ‘Guns, Germs and Steel’ “could now grow enough food to supply armies in the field for many weeks. The result was a 15-year period in Maori history, from 1818 until 1833, when Maori tribes that had acquired potatoes and guns from the English sent armies out on raids to attack tribes hundreds of miles away that had not yet acquired potatotoes and guns”.

In 1835 a Maori group arrived in Chatham Islands about 650 kms from home. These island were then inhabited by the Moriori people, themselves of Polynesian, Maori-related descent. The newcomers were received amicably. But soon the Maori confiscated lands and began to conduct themselves aggressively. Being of pacifist temperament the Moriori did not resist. Consequently, the Maori proceeded to sacrifice 300 of them (about a third of the population) to their gods, enslaved others and still more were killed and eaten.

To conclude. Fighting within the same species, in the state of nature is indeed, ‘natural’ . With chimpanzees and sapiens aggression and cruelty are part and parcel of Darwin’s evolution. What is ‘not natural’ is the subsequent superimposition of manmade ‘myths’* turning fighting in the following centuries into an entirely different proposition, as we shall see later.

HOMO SAPIENS FORM COMMUNITIES.

Twelve thousand years ago (10,000 BCE) hunter gatherers in western Asia (today’s Middle East etc.) realized that some of the edible wild plants such as wheat could be grown and harvested. They also realized that some of the wild animals whose flesh they fed on such as sheep could be domesticated for a more reliable supply of meat, milk etc. and others such as donkeys as beasts of burden*. Thus began the Agricultural Revolution. Two thousand years later, by 8,000 BCE virtually all humans on Earth, except a few in very remote areas, were growing their food and raising their animals.

Growing food and raising animals necessarily required a change in lifestyle, involving settling down near fields and animal pens. And so slowly, but surely, humans came together as tribes and clans, in close communities. And whereas hunter gatherers were hampered by infants and toddlers in their search for food, settled life resulted in a dramatic increase in population, especially that, henceforth, enough food could be made for extra mouths.

More importantly, settled life accentuated the natural differences between people. It led to the accumulation of food and acquisition of property by a few at the expense of a majority of poor peasants. Inevitably, the latter became dependent on the rich and the powerful for their welfare and survival. As the millennia then the centuries rolled, clans became villages then towns, nation states and empires. By the time the Sumerian polity in Mesopotamia (the ‘cradle of civilization’) and pharaonic Egypt in 4,000 and 3000 BCE respectively, social stratification was complete. At the top came the kings, followed by the aristocrats and the special interest elites. At the bottom was the poor peasantry and lower still, in a class of their own: slaves.

Henceforth, those in power took to enlisting their peasantry to do their fighting for them. More. As war was becoming an expensive business, through having to pay mercenaries for example, the same peasants, barely subsisting and always at risk of starvation, were made to pay to for it in what was tantamount to “taking bread out of people’s mouths”.

EVOLUTION OF WARFARE.

As Homo sapiens started to settle and form communities, 12,000 years ago, the few with above average imagination began to invent myths in order to regulate and control human society including the conduct of war. This cultural and civilizing process spread and changed as more myths were invented, and in the process overlaid natural evolution. But unlike the latter which continue to proceed at geological pace, accul-turation moves at lightning speed*.

At the beginning, farmer groups fought among themselves. But they were careful to war only during periods of lull in the planting and reaping seasons, since only then they had the time to attend to activities other than caring for their plantations. But while earlier, with hunter-gatherers, there was no property to be lost, with the new status antagonists, mutually destroyed crops, stole or killed livestock and razed villages. This was the first transformation. Many more were to follow.

With the creation of nation states appeared the first standing armies of salaried professional soldiers and/or mercenaries. Their sizes increased from the few hundred warriors of yore to hundreds of thousands and ultimately millions. For instance, Babylon and Egypt could each muster 10 to 20,000 fighters in the period from 2000 to 1500 BCE . The Western Roman Empire shortly before its downfall in the 400s CE could call upon 400,000 legionnaires, while by the 1300s the Mongols’ fighters numbered almost a million men(practically all male Mongols were fighters). A few hundred years later arrived on the scene the huge conquering armies of Napoleon Bonaparte, those of the American Civil War and ultimately the millions upon millions of soldiers of the great butcheries of the first half of the 20th centuries.

Another important transformation was the adaptation and adoption of the horse, first hitched to chariots 4,000 years ago then, 1,000 later, to be ridden into battle. Henceforth, and for the next couple of centuries, winning battles, as epitomized by the Mongols in the 13th century, depended on skilled horsemanship along with ferocity and combativeness of warriors and leaders alike.

A significant transformation started to take place in Europe, in the early 1500s thanks to the introduction of printing, gunpowder, firearms and artillery. More. The voyages of discovery during the century taking Europeans firs around Africa all the way to India and later to the Americas and the commercial transactions (including slave trading) which ensued, led to improvements in shipbuilding and navigation. In time, these bigger and sturdier ships were turned into ‘men-of-war’ or gun carrying sea going platforms, taking conflicts to faraway places and changing the character of maritime warfare.

But it was the Industrial revolution, starting in the late 1700 s which gave the major European nations their military advantage and enabled their world hegemony in the 19th and early 20th century. In this context, let us just consider that by the mid 1800s, Britain, France and Germany as well as the United States of America benefitted from railways to transport troops and provisions, steamships, sophisticated weaponry and tonnes upon tonnes of ammunition and food*. No other nation in the world could come near them in power, wealth and reach. In other words, Genghis Khan and his warriors’ attributes, listed above, no longer mattered, although horses and cavalries remained parts of armies till the early 20th century. As stated by Professor Gat: “ For the first time in history, only the wealthy qualified for the league of the mighty”.

COMBATANTS

Belligerent societies and cultures.

Some of the evolving cultures and societies adopted belligerence as their defining ethos. Let us consider a few:

Sparta, founded some 1,000 years BCE, was one of the city states, along with Athens and others, constituting ancient Greece. In Sparta, slaves, called helots, were employed in agriculture and to fight in wars when necessary. They, however, outnumbered Spartans by ten to one, with the obvious consequence that slaves, taking advantage of their numerical superiority, rebelled whenever an opportunity arose despite the preventive measures put in place by Sparta’s rulers.

It is in the wake of such a rebellion in the 600s BCE, and in order to put an end to them, that a revered and respected legislator, Lycurgus’ took it upon himself to drastically overhaul Spartan society by instituting a “highly militarized communal system” that would transform all male citizens into frugal, disciplined and competent warriors, second to none among the other Greek city states. To this effect, boys from the age of seven were removed from home and put in camps to follow rigorous athletic and military training. The end result: professional well trained soldiers, called ‘hoplite’, feared in the whole of Greece.

Chapter illustration

Lycugrus was able to achieve this by implementing measures to eliminate material inequalities among citizens . He initiated a rigorous land reform in order to equalize wealth among Spartans, forbade the use of gold and silver in commercial transactions and instituted, instead, a currency all made of iron. Finally, he established messes for communal living among male Spartans, including married ones*.

The irony of all this is that historians, to this day, are not sure whether Lycugrus was real or a legendary person. Either way, the Spartan military ethos is a historic reality and not a myth.

In the Europe of the High and Late Middle Ages (roughly from 1000 to the 1500 CE) the kings of the various states (France England etc.) were in no position the assemble armies at times of war, such as when they were faced with invasions from Vikings from the north and Muslims from the south. Instead they ‘contracted’ the fighting to minor noblemen with the means to acquire horses, armours and arms. These were the knights. Not only were they expected to “fight bravely and to display military professionalism and courtesy” for king, country and the Catholic Church, they were also bound to conduct themselves with chivalry; theirs being: “a moral system which combined a warrior ethos, knightly piety, and courtly manner s, all conspiring to establish a notion of honour and nobility” . Knights were also prominent in the crusades ( 1099 to 1291) to the Holy Lands and the Middle East, their status rising with the establishment of crusade states there*.

Chapter illustration

Notwithstanding the ‘knight in shining armour’ ballyhoo, according to historian Richard Kaeuper, knights mostly paid lip service to chivalry. Instead, “ Knighthood meant, first and foremost, violence. Sword-swinging, limb-chopping, blood-soaked carnage…”.

According to Professor Gat, the renowned founder of the Mongol Empire, Genghis Khan (1162-1227) once remarked: “The greatest joy a man can know is to conquer his enemies and drive them before him. To ride their horses and take away their possessions. To see the faces of those who were dear to them bedewed with tears and to clasp their wives and daughters in his arms”.

Genghis Khan’s Mongols were originally Turkic tribes eking out a living in the steppes of Central Asia. Crucially, they were a hardy, disciplined breed and accomplished archers on horseback. Under his leadership the Mongols erupted out in search of richer and more hospitable lands, in the early 1200s CE. Eventually, Genghis Khan and his descendants conquered and ruled over the largest contiguous land empire in history, stretching from the shores of the Pacific Ocean east to the Danube west for almost two centuries.

Chapter illustration

The Mongols’ reputation for cruelty and fierceness preceded their arrival to any locality so that by the time the warriors reached it, its gates were already open for them. In such cases, having looted and plundered, the troops moved on. But should a town resist, its inhabitants were “massacred in a public display. They are herded outside the walls to confront Mongol troopers with battle-axes. Each trooper is given a quota to despatch. A tally of ears is sometimes demanded as proof that the work is done” , as stated in historyworld.net.

The samurai was a member of a revered Japanese warrior caste which flourished between the 12th and late 19th century. They had great military skills and influence in society. As their emblem, they carried two swords. Their traits were loyalty, stoicism, pride, honor, discipline and self-disembowelment (a.k.a hara-kiri) is cases of dishonor and defeat. From a ‘Washington University St Louis’ publication: “From valiant medieval samurai to selfless imperial army soldier, the warrior stands as one of the most striking and universally recognizable images of Japanese identity”. But more ominously and irresponsibly, according to National Geographic: “The adulation of samurai heroes with their take-no-prisoners fighting spirit was used by 20th-century politicians and military officers to stoke the flames of militant nationalism, triggering Japan's involvement in World War II”. And no one needs reminding how disastrous in terms of human lives was this war for Japan.

Chapter illustration

Finally, the Vikings. I doubt anyone needs an introduction to them. Still, for nearly three centuries (8th to 11th CE) they came across from Scandinavian shores, in their nimble longships, on raiding voyages to the north European countries particularly Scotland, England and Ireland. They wreaked havoc looting places were valuable objects existed including monasteries and churches.

Chapter illustration

Encyclopedia Britannica defines mercenary as “hired professional soldier who fights for any state or nation without regard to political interests or issues”. They were frequently used, in Europe, as supple-ment to the king’s regular forces until the mid-17th century when governments began leaning on their own citizens. Understandably, being a ‘soldier of fortune’ , a mercenary had no loyalty to the side he is fighting for, avoided as much as possible risky and dangerous situations and, if offered more money, could switch side in the middle of a battle.

Today, at least in the case of the USA, the fighting business is contracted to the like of the infamous Blackwater. An article in ‘The Atlantic’ magazine, headlined ‘America's Addiction to Mercenaries’ dated August 12, 2016 stated: “The United States has developed a dependency on the private sector to wage war, a strategic vulnerability. Today, America can no longer go to war without the private sector”.

Aliens, but loyal soldiers

The Mamluks were originally slaves brought by the Abbasid Khaliphate in the 9th century, from Central Asia to serve in the military.They did so until 1250 when they overthrew their masters and ruled Egypt, and its dependencies, till 1571. Ac-cording to author Michael Winter: “Historians have been fascinated by the uniqueness of the Mamluk phenomenon. It was inhuman in some respects (for example, Mamluks being denied the opportunity to bequeath their position and privileges to their sons), yet it provided Islam with a superb military force and a sophisticated political system”.

Chapter illustration

The Ottoman sultans began, in the 14th century, the practice of forced recruitment of Christian children from the Balkans and from other non-Muslims parts of the empire, for conversion to Islam and military training. Upon coming of age, they joined the Janissaries, the elite force which fought all the empire’s battles including the history making capture of Constantinople in 1453. When they became rebellious, they were all massacred, in an infamous episode, by sultan Mahmud II in 1826.

Chapter illustration

Created in 1831 by King Louis Philippe of France in support of his conquest of Algeria, the Foreign Legion is presently an elite unit within France’s Armed Forces and composed almost exclusively of non-French volunteers. It is commanded by French officers and has fought in all of the country’s wars since its inception.

Chapter illustration

Last but not least are the Nepalese Gurkhas who volunteer for service in the British army since 1815. Gurkhas are born and raised in the harsh and poor foothills of the Himalayas Mountains. They are courageous, tough and frugal. Their motto is : “Better to die than be a coward” and their trade mark and pride is the knife they call ‘kukri’*. They have been spoken of highly by all those who came in contact with them such as: “They are tough, they are brave, they are durable….Bravest of the brave, most generous of the generous…”

Chapter illustration

Conscription:citizen soldiers.

Conscription, according to Britannica, is the “compulsory enrollment [of civilians] for service in a country’s armed forces” , either as reservists following a period of compulsory military service or in times of conflict.

The first such calling to serve, in the modern sense was introduced in France at the time of the Revolution of 1789, exemplified by the ‘levee en masse’ (mass mobilization of citizens) in 1793, decreed by the revolutionary authorities in response to the strong antagonism of the other monarchies of Europe to republican France. Emperor Napoleon, later institutionalized conscription, no doubt to avail himself of the hundreds of thousands of soldiers for almost two decades of warfare*. French conscription was followed by Prussia’s introduction of the universal military service for all males, to be subsequently followed by the rest of Europe. At the other end of the world , Japan in 1873 “in spite of its elitist samurai tradition… abandoned its hereditary militarism for a conscript system”.

Conscription can be undertaken either with the cooperation of the citizenry or by force. Obviously, it is immeasurably better for a government, whether democratic or totalitarian, to explain and persuade its public of the rightfulness and morality of the conflict on which it is about to embark. And the tool, par excellence, for this indoctrination is propaganda.

The use of propaganda by rulers goes back to ancient Greece. Obviously, the introduction of printing by Gutenberg (1398-1468) gave it a boost since, henceforth, pamphlets could be printed and displayed, the way the reformer Martin Luther published his Theses criticizing the Roman Catholic Church. Later the French Revolution used slogans and pamphlets to promote its new republican creed embodying it in ‘Marianne’ the symbol of France to this day. For his part, Napoleon relied a great deal on propaganda to keep the people’s support and enthusiasm for his regime and more importantly, his military adventures. In his 2014 book ‘The Worth of War’ Professor Benjamin Ginsberg writes that Napoleon is reported to have said: “I would not have lasted more than three months” had he not been able to control and shape information to his advantage. Then during the Great War of 1914-1918 “propaganda was employed on a global scale…This and subsequent modern wars required propaganda to mobilise hatred against the enemy; to convince the population of the justness of the cause…” according to a publication of The British Library*.

Chapter illustration

A demagogue backed by the right propaganda can achieve the desired results. Adolf Hitler’s speeches, and Joseph Goebbels propaganda tools, convinced a great majority of Germans that they have been cheated of a victory in the first Great War and that they were meted out a raw deal in its aftermath by their adversaries. More crucially, they convinced them that Christian Germans belonged to a superior race (Aryans) far above that of any other people on Earth and as such, deserved more living space (Lebensraum) at the expense of their neighbours. All this subsequently resulted in the Armageddon that was the second World War.

Chapter illustration

The reporting of Hitler’s misdeeds prepared the British public for war. So when fighting started it supported its leadership and accepted to make the sacrifices needed by the war effort. These attitudes were kept alive by the doggedness and eloquent rhetoric of Winston Churchill along with anti-German propaganda via pamphlets, radio broadcasts, films and newspapers.

Chapter illustration

Subsequently, the surprise attack on the American fleet late in 1941 was enough of an “infamy” ,as called by then President Roosevelt, to enable him and his government’s mobilization of millions of citizens for the fights in Europe and in the Pacific, no doubt helped by thousands of leaflets, films etc.

Chapter illustration

Propaganda was also used in the Soviet Union to mobilize its citizenry in the wake of the German invasion of 1941, despite the fact that the megalomaniac Stalin was in a position to coerce his people into the fight. Obviously he felt that cajoling yielded better results than force.

Chapter illustration

As for Japan, it stood alone in this respect among all other nations. The entry in Britannica says that its conscripts “were made to feel that the army belonged to the nation and that it was an honour to enter it… By the eve of World War II, most officers came from the middle classes rather than the samurai class and so had an affinity with the enlisted men. All in all, the conscript army during this time was a living symbol of equality to the Japanese, and they served in and supported it with near-fanatical devotion”.

In contrast, the forced conscription of citizens in the Ottoman Empire for the Great War of 1914-1918, is a sorry tale. To start with, Istanbul entered the war, broke and unprepared in every respect. It lacked food*, trans-portation, clothing, footwear and medical facilities to support the large armies it needed to mobilize. In short the Ottoman Empire, exhausted and much weakened by its wars in the Balkans of 1912-1913 (against Bulgaria, Greece, Romania and Serbia), had no business getting itself into the meat grinder that war turned out to be.

In her 2014 book: ‘A Land of Aching Hearts’, professor, of Lebanese and Eastern Mediterranean Studies at Tufts University, Leila Tarazi Fawaz sums up soldiering under such conditions as: “ for so many soldiers, it seems, the call to soldiering amounted to a death sentence”. She tells of young men running away from home to avoid conscriptions and of a great deal of desertion from those already in service. So much so, that desertion reached a level such that “the number of Turkish deserters is higher today than that of the men under arms”, in the words of General Liman Von Sanders, German commander in chief of Ottoman forces. In consequence, the government warned, in a pamphlet, that members of the families of conscripts who deserted were liable to deportation far from their homes within the Empire.

Finally, public support is more willingly given when citizens expect to be rewarded for their participation. In the words of Professor Ginsberg: “individuals and groups asked to bear the costs of war [and participate in it] “feel emboldened to make new political demands”. For example, with men conscripted and away at the battle fronts, women replaced them in the factories producing essential war materiel. Having proved they were the equals of male workers, they were rewarded with enfranchisement (given the right to vote), in the wake of the First War. Similarly after the second War, various social and welfare programs were enacted in Britain and in other belligerent countries.

WAR, FINANCE AND TECHNOLOGY.

The horrors, cruelties and atrocities of war no withstanding, “the largest and most sustained boost to the financial revolution in Europe was given by war” according to historian Paul Kennedy, quoted by Professor Ginsberg.

For example, Britain’s needs to finance its wars and specifically its navy in the 17th and 18th centuries, created a financial revolution resulting in the development of its banking system and to the founding in 1694 of The Bank of England, Britain’s central bank. In turn, to finance his non ending wars, Napoleon borrowed heavily from private banks, thus contributing to their development and prosperity. Like the British 109 years earlier, he created the Bank of France in 1803 for the same militaristic reasons. Similarly the necessities of war in Germany made demands on its new industries and financing parties, in the process leading to their growths and benefits.

The enormous demand in resources needed to conduct the Civil War (1860-1865) set in motion in the United States of America the financial revolution which eventually made the great private fortunes of financiers and industrialists with names still familiar today. Russia, following its defeat in the Crimean War of 1853-1856, embarked on its own financial and industrial development. Similarly Japan, in the wake of the visit, in 1854, of the heavily armed steamships of American Commodore Mat-thew Perry, realized it had better embark on its own military moder-nization.

As to the to and fro of technology between civilian and military domains Professor Ginsberg calls it “a virtuous cycle of ongoing improvement in both military and civilian technologies with each helping to advance the other” .

When experimenting Chinese alchemists created gunpowder in the 8th century CE, they were not looking for the explosive that would revolu-tionize warfare. We have already seen that the merchant ships of the Age of Discovery (1500s to the 1700s) were converted to gun platforms for naval warfare. When the Wright brothers first flew the Kitty Hawk in December 1903, they had no idea that their invention would give rise to instruments of mass killing in less than 50 years. As for the ubiquitous jet engine it was invented in the 1930s and 40s for use on fighter aircraft. The early motorcar and farm tractor turned into the armoured vehicle and the battle tank. And the prominent physicists who looked into the splitting of the atom did not have the atomic bomb on their minds. More recently, both the Internet and the GPS began as military projects. Even the innocuous microwave oven is an adaptation of radar detection systems.

Clearly, none of the above is vital for the survival of our species. None is encoded in our genes by natural selection. More: “what you don’t know you don’t miss”. But until further notice, “in most realms, war and technological progress seem to go hand in hand”, again according to Professor Ginsberg.

MILITARY INDUSTRIAL COMPLEX.

Nowadays, there thrives a warmongering monster referred to as the ‘Military Industrial Complex’. It is found in all major industrial powers but nowhere more blatantly than in the United States of America.

According to Encyclopedia Britannica the Complex is a “network of individuals and institutions involved in the production of weapons and military technologies. The military-industrial complex in a country typically attempts to marshal political support for continued or increased military spending by the national government”. In respect to the USA, the individuals and institutions are Pentagon officials and high ranking military personnel on the one hand and defence contractors and ordnance suppliers on the other. They are supported by elected politicians who either represent constituencies where armament factories are located or who have accepted contributions from war related businesses to their election campaigns. And last but not least, by any measure, are the thousands of lobbyists representing the interested parties, working hard to ensure ever expanding defence budgets.

The threat of that evolving monster was first drawn attention to in January 1961 by President Eisenhower, formerly the commander in chief of allied forces in the 1939-1945 war, in his farewell address. In that speech he spoke at length about the future dangers of the Complex including: “This conjunction of an immense military establishment and a large arms industry is new in the American experience. The total influence economic, political, even spiritual… we must not fail to comprehend its grave implications… we must guard against the acquisition of unwarranted influence… by the military industrial complex… We must never let the weight of this combination endanger our liberties or democratic processes…”.

And now, more than half a century later, the monster is, more than ever, alive and kicking. In the recent words of retired Air Force lieutenant colonel William J Astore: “In the U.S. today, the Complex is almost unchallengeable.  This is not only because of its size and power.  The Complex has worked to convince Americans that war is inevitable and therefore endless (it’s never the fault of the Complex, of course: it’s the terrorists, or the Russians, or the Chinese …), and also that military service (and spending) is virtuous and therefore a boon to democracy”.

In an article published by Al-Jazeera on 11.04.2014 Jonathan Turley, professor of Public Interest Law at George Washington University essentially says the same thing, adding that “while perpetual war constitutes perpetual losses for families…[it] also represents perpetual profits for a new and larger complex of business and government interests”. More. He, for example, accuses the Complex of having “created a massive, self-sustaining terror-based industry”. He blames former President George W Bush and his aides, including Vice-President Dick Cheney, a former CEO of a major defence contractor, of insisting on calling couter- terrorism a ‘war’ because “not only would a war maximise the inherent powers of the president, but it would maximise the budgets for military…agencies”. Surprisingly, Mr Turley forgot to, also, mention the Bush and Cheney’s shameful, disastrous and tragic invasion of Iraq on concocted false claims simply for the benefit of the Complex.

WHAT MORE CAN BE SAID?

We have seen that Rousseau, Hobbes, Kant and no doubt others have tried to understand the “riddle of war”. Rousseau’s thesis that Homo sapiens in the state of nature lived an idyllic life with everybody in harmony with everybody else, is not correct. Scientific research, since, has shown that sapiens fought among themselves to ensure survival consistently with Darwin’s natural selection. Contrary to Rousseau’s thinking then, war existed before the onset of civilization and acculturation. But the latter transformed it.

Hobbes reasoning that wars would cease once humans formed polities under wise absolute rulers was nothing but wishful thinking. Before his day, his country England was locked with France in the ‘Hundred Years War’ (actually 116 years: from 1337 to 1453). The year he was born (1588) was that of the Spanish Armada. In his own lifetime were fought the ‘Thirty years War’ (1618-1648)* and the Seven Years’ War (1756-1763)

among many more. None of them meeting his criterion.

As for Immanuel’s Kant’s belief that democratic republicanism will put an end to conflict, it should be enough to quote Professor Ginsberg as follows: “The world’s premier liberal democracy the United States of America, is among the most bellicose nations on the face of the earth…Ironically, America has justified many of its wars, including the 2002 Iraq War by the claim that its goal was to transfer its adversary into a peaceful liberal democracy” .

Both Rousseau and Kant were luminaries of the Age of Reason or the Enlightenment (1685-1815) which considered war “as something utterly repugnant and futile, indeed, incomprehensible to the point of absurdity” , in the words of Professor Gat.

Yet these edifying sentiments did not stand in the way of the Napoleonic wars (1803-1815) and many others preceding and following up to and including the mass slaughter of the Great War of 1914-1918. All these were fought on the ground of mistrust, rivalries, competition for colonies etc. among the kings and emperors of the day. The last named was so destructive to life and property that it was, optimistically, described as “A war to end war” *. But that was not to be. Its sequel twenty years later, was much worse ending with a grand finale: the atomic bombs on Japan.

For Charles Tilly (1929-2008), the renown American sociologist, political scientist and historian, who wrote on the relationship between politics and society: “war made the state and the state made war”. He wrote this in his 1990 book ‘Coercion, Capital, and European States’. According to one review of the book, Tilly phrase was in the context of: “that the whole history of the pre- and post-nation-state system is one of force and fraud; that the modern state system was established by extreme force, through centuries of extremely bloody warfare”

Raiders from the Steppe

RAIDERS FROM THE STEPPE.

Chapter illustration

NOVEMBER 2017

REFERENCES

Empires in World History-2010 Jane Burbankand Frederick Cooper. Chapter 4. Eurasian connections: The Mongol Empire. Chapter 5. Beyond the Mediterranean: Ottoman and Spanish Empires.

War in Human Civilization-2006 Azar Gat. Chapter 11. The Eurasian Spearhead: East, West, and the Steppe.

Encyclopedia Britannica Attila king of the Huns. Hun People. Ottoman Empire. The Steppe.

Historyworld.net History of Asia. History of the Mongols. History of the Turks.

Ancient History Encyclopedia Attila the Hun.

Wikipedia Attila. Eurasian Nomads. Huns.

LET’S GET STARTED

The Eurasian Steppe is a vast natural grassland stretching 8,000 kms from Hungary to Mongolia. In width, north to south, it varies from 200 to 600 kms (see map). Whereas the geography and environment of the European, western Steppe is relatively friendly to its peoples with adequate rain, rivers, trees and lush grass; the eastern part in Central Asia, to the contrary , is at a higher altitude with little rain and no trees. Further, it suffers “greater seasonal extremes of temperature than are found anywhere else in the world…[it] is in every way a harsher land for human habitation than the Western Steppe”, according to Britannica. But, in both parts, the vast flatness of the land made horse riding a valued means of rapid, long distance transportation and, as we shall see, of warfare.

Chapter illustration

Eurasian Steppe societies consisted of tribes of no more than 50 to 100 persons each, all related either by ancestry, marriage or by sworn brotherhood. The main activity was nomadic herding, meaning tribes were frequently on the move in search for better pastures. Their domesticated charges included sheep, goats, cattle, camels and horses, all raised primarily for their meat and milk products.

No historical account of the Eurasian Steppe is complete without the amazing story of the domestication and breeding of the horse. At the beginning, in the wild , horses were robust and rugged onager like animals (image). They were first domesticated on the Western Steppe, in the Ukraine between 5 to 6,000 ya primarily for food. They could also be ridden donkey fashion, sitting well back near the tail, for short journeys. It is only through protracted selective cross breeding that 3,500 ya, the big horse suitable for fast and sustained gallop emerged. It took half a millennium for it to reach the Asian part and the same again for the nomads there to become proficient riders. By then, virtually the entire tribal manhood had become adept at horseback riding. Henceforth, herdsmen could travel long and far with their flocks in search of fresh pastures.

Even so, however, sitting bareback with feet dangling on the sides with no restraint could not have resulted in effective riding. This remained so until the invention of the saddle and stirrup (image) between 2,100 and 2,300 ya, most likely in the Asian Steppe too. Hitherto, sitting in saddles with feet secured in stirrups, horsemanship became much more rewarding. As stated by professor Gat: the “economic-demographic-military effects of horseback riding were overwhelming”.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Eurasian Steppe tribes were well acquainted with the relatively easier and richer lifestyle of their sedentary, settled agrarian southern and western neighbours with their plentiful crops and other resources. For, over several centuries, they had paid visits to their towns and villages as traders and occasionally as raiders. More specifically, the eastern Steppe nomads who subsisted in “one of the most severe climates of the Earth…were under constant temptation to move” either into the lands of their Chinese neighbours south or westward into the lusher western Steppe and beyond. As we shall see they undertook the most aggressive raids and conquests across borders, one group after another from the 11th to the 15th century. Significantly, as they moved forward they drove the clans in the western Steppe ahead of them, such as the Germanic Barbarians who, in due course, brought down the Western Roman Empire. Others were the Magyars pushed into Hungary, the Bulgars into Bulgaria and many more. Indeed, over its long history the Eurasian Steppe has been the home to more the forty tribal ethnicities who were forced into, migrated to, or raided their better-off neighbours. Or, in the words of Encyclopedia Britannica: “The political history of Eurasia consists very largely of nomad raids and conquests and the countervailing efforts by agricultural societies to defend themselves with an appropriate mix of armed force and diplomacy”.

In this project, we look at three empires created by the same number of nomadic peoples who, in succession, brutally and aggressively conquered adjacent and farther flourishing domains, more often than not, devastating the lands they crossed and massacring their peoples. Chronologically, first, were the Huns and their infamous leader Attila, who tormented the Eastern and Western Roman Empires (capitals: Constantinople and Rome). Then the Seljuk Turks of whom a few words are said in the Appendix. Later, came on the scene the Mongols, led by their phenomenal Genghis Khan, who bulldozed their way to Russia and Mesopotamia. Last arrived were the Seljuq related Ottomans led by Osman I, founder of the longest lasting dynasty, the ‘Osmanlis’ and a great empire. We end with its tenth and greatest ruler Suleiman the Magnificent.

SCOURGE OF GOD

In the early 370s CE, the Huns, nomadic tribesmen and adept horsemen from the Asian Steppe, suddenly appeared in the Ukraine. They, subsequently, continued their rampage wide and far. Riding high atop their horses, they terrorized the peoples and devastated the lands of both the Eastern and Western Roman Empires, in search of loot and extortions. In the words of professor Gat: “ [T]he horse can be said to have [in the long run] brought down the Western Roman Empire” .What he means is that its eventual demise in 476 at the hand of the Visigoths and Ostrogoths Barbarians, was caused, in the first place, by their exodus westward in flight from the dreadful Huns.

Until 432, the Huns had no recognized leader. That year, however, all tribes united under the rule of King Rugila who died two years later and was succeeded by his two sons Attila and Bleda. They jointly ruled for three years till 445 when Attila killed his sibling and reigned supreme by himself till his death in 453. Subsequently, his empire (map below) was fought over by his many sons who, at the same time, had to confront rebellions by subjugated peoples. Attila’s empire started to disintegrate and was gone by 469. Indeed, the empire of the Huns was short lived; in fact, less than one century.

The Huns had no written language. What we know about/of them comes from accounts by chroniclers and historians from that era or shortly after. They all concur that the Huns were rugged, wild and brutish people. For example to Roman historian Ammianus Marcellinus (330-391 CE): “The nation of the Huns surpasses all other barbarians in wildness of life…[They are ugly men]…they make no use of fire…[They feed on] half-raw flesh of any sort of animal… they give it a kind of cooking by placing it between their own thighs and the backs of their horses”. Perhaps the Hun’s ugliness comes from their deliberate skull deforming practice, according to some scholars (see image).As for Goth historian Jordanes, he wrote in 551 that: “They made their foes flee in horror because [of] their swarthy aspect …they had…a sort of shapeless lump, not a head, with pin-holes rather than eyes…. they cut the cheeks of [their own] males with a sword…They are short in stature… broad shouldered, and have firm-set necks which are ever erect in pride.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Add to all this the Huns’ exceptional horsemanship, skill and agility in the handling of the tools of war, making the Huns formidable and intimidating combatants. So much so, that it has even been said that they made their mounts fight too “with teeth and hooves”. According, once more, to historian Ammianus Marcellinus “…they are the most terrible of warriors because they fight at a distance with missile weapons having sharpened bones… When in close combat with swords, they fight without regard to their own safety…”

Starting with the joint rule of Attila and his brother in 434 and continued under the former, the Huns attacked east and west defeating their enemies, and imposing on them heavy tributes, which when defaulted upon, resulted in further attacks accompanied by looting and devastation of towns and communities. For example, a treaty was signed with the Eastern Roman Empire in 434, by virtue of which the latter contributed 300 kg of gold yearly. When Constantinople allegedly failed to deliver it was attacked in 441 and again in 443. Unable to breach the walls of the prestigious capital with their arrows, they turned, instead, on other targets in the empire, capturing towns and devastating others. Eventually a new treaty was agreed, the tribute was upped to 950 kg of gold yearly in addition to settling arrears amounting to 2,700 kg.

As for the Romans of the west, they did not fare any better. “Having bled the East to his heart's content, Attila turned to the West and found an unusual excuse for war” , in the words of American historian Will Durant (1885-1981). In 450 with an army estimated at 200,000 horsemen by some or even 500,000 by others, Attila entered both Gaul and today’s Belgium spreading terror and havoc in the lands. He was nonetheless, thrown out by the joint effort of the Romans and the Visigoths. Then in 452 he turned to Italy itself, the heart of the Western Roman Empire. There, “as in Gaul, he spread a wide swath of destruction and so completely sacked the city of Aquileia that not only would it never rise again, but no one even knew where it had stood”. But he withdrew from there, too, that same year. Historians speculate that he did so either because of the famine long raging in Italy, or because his troops caught the plague.

Let us conclude this part by quoting American historian and former US Army Lt. Col. Michael Lee Lanning (DOB: 1946) : “Warfare proved lucrative for the Huns but wealth apparently was not their only objective. Attila and his army seemed genuinely to enjoy warfare, the rigors and rewards of military life were more appealing to them than farming or attending livestock” .

GREATEST KHAN OF ALL.

Similarly to all others in the Steppe, Mongols were tribal nomadic herders. Culturally, they were far inferior to the peoples they subsequently conquered. They were illiterate without a written language of their own. Their religion was Shamanism or the belief in good and evil spirits controlling all forms of life, natural phenomena and the rest. These supernatural beings were amenable to intercession, on behalf of the commoners, by shamans. Despite of all this or perhaps because of it, the Mongols were, nonetheless, open minded and receptive of other cultures and customs. Late in the 13th century they adopted an existing alphabet and as they came in contact with the peoples they subdued, they adopted whichever and whatever they found useful and adaptable to their way of life. More importantly, they willingly shed their own beliefs for Buddhism, Christianity and Islam depending on where they settled.

Each tribe was headed by a khan. When he died, contenders, such as sons and brothers, fought one another or negotiated among themselves for the vacant top position. But, under certain circumstances, such as better control of pastures, preying on caravans on important trade routes and/or for large plunder and extortion raids, tribes formed a confederacy under one khan. He was chosen by a council of tribal leaders. The selected one, usually had a reputable ancestry, came with proven military credentials and was a clever negotiator.

The greatest of them all, was Genghis Khan (1161-1227). His was an all- inclusive confederacy of many tribes. According to Professor Gat, it enabled Genghis Khan to muster 95,000 then 129,000 “men-warriors”, or practically the entire tribal adult manhood, in 1206 and 1227 respectively. That was only about one quarter the size of the Roman Army at its peak and even though the Khan’s successors, possibly, assembled somewhat larger forces, it nevertheless remains true that at no time did the numbers of Mongol combatants reach anywhere near those of other empires. But, whatever the numbers, starting in the 1200s, Genghis Khan and those who came after him conquered and ruled a very large empire (map below later), in less than a century. In respect of this, Professors Burbank and Cooper have this to say: “The Romans created their Mediterranean empire over four centuries; [Genghis] Khan and his direct descendants made a much larger Eurasian Empire in seven decades”

For, above all, Mongols were impressive warriors on horseback. They trained on the job, so to speak, learning horse riding from an early age, becoming adept through daily practice of herding and raiding. By the time Genghis Khan came on the scene Mongols not only could ride fast, they could shoot their arrows backward on the gallop, accurately and from afar thanks to their “formidable … double arched bow, made of layers of [animal] sinew and bone on a wooden frame”. Furthermore, being one with their horses they used tactics intended to confuse and surprise their foes. Last but not least, was the Mongols’ reputation for cruelty and fierceness. It preceded their arrival to any locality so that by the time the warriors reached it, its gates were already open for them. In such cases, having looted and plundered, the troops moved on. But should a town resist, its inhabitants were “massacred in a public display. They are herded outside the walls to confront Mongol troopers with battle-axes. Each trooper is given a quota to dispatch. A tally of ears is sometimes demanded as proof that the work is done” ,as stated in historyworld.net. Most importantly,they prepared their logistics well, locating before battle their water points and staging supply posts, replenished by their women and children who followed.

Empire building notwithstanding, the primary aims of the Mongols’ raiding of their richer and more prosperous near and not so near neighbours, were plunder, loot, extortion and the imposition of tributes. But as their realms were emerging, they realized they were in no position to govern and administer culturally superior peoples, given their rudimentary background. Professors Burbank and Cooper report the successor of Genghis Khan as saying: “The empire was created on horseback, but it cannot be governed on horseback”. The Mongols, thus, willingly leaned on local administrators, learned from them and, as already mentioned, adopted their customs, faiths and practices. With time, they dissolved themselves into the new environment.

With eyes set on China, Genghis Khan wanted first to defeat those tribes in his immediate neighbourhoods of Siberia and in the buffer territory separating him from China. He subdued them all, had them pay tribute and join his warriors. Only one tribal leader, though he accepted to pay, nevertheless refused to contribute warriors. To Genghis Khan, that was insubordination and in consequence made the recalcitrant culprit pay for it heavily (see below).

Genghis Khan then turned toward northern China, at that time governed by the Jin dynasty. He was enticed there by the region’s plentiful agricultural produce and minerals. It was, hence, a rich land for plunder and tribute. In 1215 he captured the Jin’s capital near today’s Beijing. As expected, Genghis Khan received significant tribute and a Jin wife. At this time part of the Mongols turned westwards while the rest continued their drive through China. Genghis Khan died in 1227.

Nonetheless, continuing with their “terror with diplomacy” tactics, the Mongols completed the occupation of the Jin dynasty’s realm in 1234 and proceeded against the Song dynasty in the southern part of China. Following a long struggle Kublai khan, Genghis Khan’s grandson, subdued his opponents by 1279. But Mongols’ greed was not yet satiated. They subsequently pushed toward Japan but failed on the two occasions they tried.

In the meantime, the westward advancing Mongols were joined, along the way, by other Steppe nomads. They split. One group headed towards Eastern Europe conquering the Rus in Ukraine and Russia and defeating the Poles and the Hungarians. The second, under Hulagu, another of Genghis Khan’s grandsons, took the direction of and captured Persia and Iraq including Baghdad, the seat of the Muslim Abbasid Khalifate, in 1258. The khalife is killed along with a great number of his citizens while the city was sacked. Subsequently, Hulagu, tried to continue east but was stopped and defeated in 1260 by the Mamluks at Ayn Jalut near Nazareth, Palestine.

Hence, by the middle of the 13th century, Genghis Khan’s progeny controlled an empire stretching from China to the Black Sea. But it was no longer whole under one khan. Instead, it was divided into four khanates each ruled by one of his descendants (see map). With the passage of time, they became estranged from one another particularly, as earlier stated, they voluntarily allowed themselves to be absorbed by the culture and religions of their subject peoples.

Chapter illustration

The conqueror of Baghdad, Hulagu, established the Muslim Il- Khan dynasty in Iraq and Persia. It ended in 1335 at the hands, once again, of the Mamluks in cahoots with the Golden Hordes khanate in the northwest. As for the latter, it lasted till 1438 when it broke up into several smaller entities. In China, he Mongols became Sinicized (Chinese) and established the Yuan Dynasty. It was overthrown in 1368.

Finally in the center, the Chagadai Khanate broke up into several parts toward the end of the 1300s. In one of these Tamerlane or Timur (1336-1405) came to power. He was a “Mongol by descent, a Muslim at birth, a Turkic speaker” whose role model was Genghis Khan. So much so, that by emulating the former’s war making practices and tactics, he created, by 1380 his own empire with Samarkand as his capital (see map).Once again it did not last long, It died with him in 1405.

Chapter illustration

OSMANLIS

Unlike the short lived empires of the Huns and Mongols, that of the Ottoman dynasty endured for 600 years. At its greatest extent, in the late 1600s, it covered, in addition to modern Turkey, parts of North Africa, Arabia, the eastern Mediterranean and Europe (see map). The reason it outlasted the earlier two is because the Ottomans adopted different strategies for ruling and succession. Thus, unlike these earlier empires which at the death of their founders were divided into smaller and smaller realms by succeeding inheritors and inevitably disappeared within a short time, the Ottomans, to the contrary, ensured that the empire was never and remained throughout its long life under one, and only one sultan at any time, as we shall see.

Chapter illustration

It all began with the Seljuqs wrestling control of eastern and central Anatolia from the Byzantine Empire in the 1100s and establishing a Turkic foothold there which after centuries became what is today’s Turkey (see Appendix). Osman I (died 1326), a Muslim raiding tribal leader, or ‘Ghazi’, hailing from a province in northwest Anatolia near the sea of Marmara, continued the expansion started by his co-ethnic Seljuqs, at the expense of the Byzantines. So did his son and successor Orhan (1281-1362). So much so that by the time of Orhan’s death the foundations of both the Empire and the ‘Osmanli’ dynasty, so named after its founder, had been securely set on the road to greatness.

Osman I was a ‘Bey’, so was Orhan and his successor Murad I (1326-1389). As such, they were, each, not much more than traditional tribal chief, “one among equals in the councils that decided general internal policies…”, as explained by Encyclopedia Britannica. Bayezid I (1360-1403), the fourth ruler was the first to take the title of Sultan. After him the throne was mounted by some 30 to 35 others, the last one, Mehmed VI, exiled in 1922 upon the abolition of the Ottoman Sultanate and establishment of the Republic of Turkey.

All the earlier conquests of Osman and Orhan were undertaken with Turkic tribal horsemen. But Orhan realized sometime during his reign that these warriors could not be counted on to become the nucleus of a powerful fighting force worthy of the nascent empire. Indeed, they remained the unruly and uncontrollable nomadic raiders, interested only in loot and extortions. Instead, Orhan began the practice of recruiting Christian mercenaries, to do his conquering. This practice was subsequently expanded and finely tuned so that by the reign of Mehmed II, the Conqueror (1432-1481), those recruits had become the formidable Janissary troops, an elite force which took part in all the Empire’s wars henceforth. They remained, the fighting organization par excellence until they became rebellious; hence massacred in 1826, in an infamous episode at the behest of sultan Mahmud II (1785-1839).

To the Conqueror, an empire without Constantinople was not worth the name. Accordingly, Mehmed II made his preparations: erecting two fortresses on the European side of the Bosphorus, notably the Rumeili Fort (image), building an artillery with the help of a Hungarian canon maker and a navy. In 1453 he was ready and hence attacked and conquered the Byzantine imperial capital from land and sea, with

Chapter illustration

Serbian Janissaries and Greek sailors manning his boats.

With Constantinople taken and renamed Istanbul, the prestige of Mehmed II was at its apogee among the kings and emperors of his day. Internally “his primary objective was to restore Istanbul, which he had spared from devastation during the conquest, as the political, economic, and social center of the area that it formerly had dominated” To this end, talented and qualified Muslims and Christians from elsewhere in the empire, were brought in. He also took in Jews from Europe who according to Encyclopedia Britannica “were being subjected to increasing persecution”. Even more: the loyalty of the newcomers was influenced by that of the local Jewish community who had been happy to see the Ottoman occupiers, and had indeed, “assisted the Ottoman conquests after the long-standing persecution to which they had been subjected by the Greek Orthodox Church and its followers”.

However,those were not the only Jews welcomed in the Empire. In 1492 the Spanish Inquisition was in full swing resulting in the forced departure of Jews and Muslims from Spain. Sultan Bayezid II (1447-1512), son and successor of the Conqueror invited thousands of the latter in his eagerness for their contribution in the expanding economy of the Empire.

Suleiman I, the Magnificent (1494-1566) inherited from his father Selim I (1470-1520) an empire which he had doubled in size and in wealth, by incorporating Egypt and Syria, up to then ruled by the Mamluks, as well as Islam’s holy places: Mecca and Medina. Only Iran remained outside. In their book professors Burkland and Coopers write that the Magnificent was “inspired by prophetic visions that [his dynasty] would rule all of the known world”. This being so, he proceeded with further conquests both east and west. What is more , in the 1530s, he started the building of a powerful navy able to match that of his main European opponent Charles V . He deployed it to protect his shores and ships from raids as well and to safeguard the sea lanes travelled by pilgrims from Istanbul to Alexandria on their way to Mecca. Thus for three decades the Ottoman navy reigned unchallenged in the eastern Mediterranean.

The Magnificent reign is widely recognized as marking the peak of Ottoman greatness and has always been regarded as the golden age of Ottoman history. Ironically, despite or maybe because of all this, his period also marks the beginning of Ottoman decline possibly initiated by the failure of his arms at the gate of Vienna in 1529. In the words of Encyclopedia Britannica: “Vienna thus stood as the principal European bulwark against further Muslim advance. Under the existing conditions of supply, transport, and military organization, the Ottomans had reached the limit of their possible expansion in the West.”

Differently from the Mongols who, as already stated, at a khan’s death divided his realm between contenders, the Ottomans, in similar circumstances resorted to violence and fratricide with the winner taking all. No division of the empire between a sultan’s offspring ever happened. It helped, undoubtedly, that the rival princes came from different mothers and did not grow up together since each mother lived with her child in seclusion. For example, Sultan Murad I (1326-1389) third in line and grandson of the founder, set the precedent by killing all his brothers upon sitting on the throne in 1362. And Mehmed II, the Conqueror, followed suit by getting rid of his infant and only brother in 1451. His grandson, Selim I (1470-1520), to ensure no interference with his reign killed all his brothers, their seven sons and four of his own five. The one spared: future Suleiman I, the Magnificent. In the words of Burbank and Cooper: “In the sixteenth century, a dead sultan’s funeral procession-staged only after the new sultan had taken the throne - could be followed by the small coffins of child princes [killed by the newcomer]. Law was produced to justify dynastic fratricide in the name of the good order of the world”.

Who were the mothers of these fiercely antagonistic brothers? Simply, non-Muslim, slave-concubines residing in the sultan’s ‘harem’. Each time one of them gave birth to a prince, she and her newborn were sent away somewhere, virtually, never to see his father again. In other words, all those sultans from Osman’s dynasty, started life as illegitimate children, unless the father chose to legitimize them. With a sultan’s concubines as his princely children mothers, a sultan thus saved himself the hassle of contending with Ottoman in-laws. In other words there were no influential, indigenous maternal grandfather, uncle or cousin to make a claim on the throne.

But concubines were not the only slaves of a sultan. Janissary (see above) officers and soldiers as well as civil servants, were all his property too, by virtue of a uniquely Ottoman system known as ‘Devshirme’ introduced in the 14th century. It consisted of the forced recruitment of Christian boys as young as eight, from the Balkans and of non-Muslims from other parts of the empire. They were, then, circumcised, converted to Islam, taught the Ottoman language and trained either for the civil service or the military. There were also those intended for service in the sultan’s palace.

The advantage of this category of slaves was that its members were outsiders with no allegiance to families. Instead, all their loyalty was to their master, the sultan. He, in return, gave them positions of responsibility and influence, in addition to his trust and complete reliance on them. There was, moreover, another reason why rulers preferred the services of slave elites to that of their indigenous aristocracy and nobility. By keeping the latter away from senior positions, the ruler minimized the risks of interference and competition with his own authority. Thus, from the days of Mehmed II, the Conqueror “all important ministers, military officers, judges, governors, Janissaries, and the like were made members of that class [of slaves] and attached to the will and service of the sultan” , as stated in the Encyclopedia Britannica. Even more, all their lives, families and properties remained at the disposal and service of their master. It is said that 500,000 to 1,000,000 were enslaved thus over the centuries. There is, however, a sad paradox in all this; for despite their elevated positions, the slave elites remained slaves nevertheless. And as such, were looked down on with contempt by the population at large.

To summarize the last four paragraphs, We cannot do better than to quote Professors Burbank and Cooper: “The practice of royal concubinage and the selection of top advisers from ‘collected’ and converted Christian boys meant that the sultan ruled through a household of his own making. Liberated from linkages to noble [Ottoman] families, advised by officials dependent on his will, the sultan exercised an extreme form of patrimonialism over his personal slaves and through them over the empire”.

Like the Mongols before them, the Ottomans were receptive to the religions of their non-Muslim subjects in the far-flung empire. But unlike their predecessors who converted to the creeds of the peoples they conquered, the Ottomans were Muslim from the beginning. Thus, naturally enough, Islam was the empire’s pre-eminent religion. Nevertheless, all Jews, Christians of all denominations and other non-Muslim citizens referred all family all family and religious matters to their spiritual leaders. So much so that “Chief Rabbis, metropolitans of the Greek Orthodox church, and leaders of Armenian Orthodoxy and of other Christian groups held their offices as recipients of sultanic warrants”, in the words of Burbank and Cooper.

As for the Law of the land, Islamic Shari’a was obviously an important component. “But Sharia law was inadequate for many imperial tasks…[Thus the] Ottomans employed a second kind of law ‘kanun’ to fulfill the sultan’s role of protection, as well as to regulate taxation and property matters…[In other words], Ottoman law was a system of legal regimes, secular, Islamic, other religious laws and customary practices”

APPENDIX

ATTILA

Attila the Hun was nicknamed by the Romans the “Scourge of God”. According to historian Jordanes(see earlier) : “He was a man born into the world to shake the nations, the scourge of all lands, who in some way terrified all mankind by the rumors noised abroad concerning him. He was haughty in his walk, rolling his eyes hither and thither, so that the power of his proud spirit appeared in the movement of his body. He was indeed a lover of war, yet restrained in action; mighty in counsel, gracious to suppliants, and lenient to those who were once received under his protection. He was short of stature, with a broad chest and a large head; his eyes were small, his beard was thin and sprinkled with gray. He had a flat nose and a swarthy complexion, revealing his origin”. As for historian Will Durant (see above): "All Gaul was terrified; here was no civilized warrior like Caesar, no Christian... this was the awful and hideous Hun, the flagellum dei [Scourge of God], come to punish Christian and pagan alike for the enormous distance between their professions and their lives”.

Chapter illustration

He died in 453 CE on his wedding night. In a sign of mourning his warriors slashed their cheeks and cut their hair. They held an evening of funerary celebrations. Attila’s body was then enclosed in a three layered coffin: “the innermost covered in gold, a second in silver, and a third in iron”. Reportedly, an unsubstantiated story has it that his men diverted a stream, entombed the coffin in its bed and then restored the original course; all in order to keep Attila’s grave a secret. Further, the story goes that all those taking part in the funeral and burial were subsequently killed to ensure that no soul remains with the knowledge of Attila’s resting place.

GENGHIS KHAN

He was born Timujin in 1167 to a father who was a chief in a minor form in today’s Mongolia. When he was killed Temujin, his mother and brother were ostracized by his father’s tribe. Despite the difficult circumstances, or maybe because of them, Timujin from an early age showed a commanding personality with an aptitude to make friends and dispose of his foes even if meant killing his own brother. In due course he made himself welcome in the confederacy of tribes headed by a powerful chief by the name of Togrul in 1180, at the age of 13. Ten years later, in 1190, Timujin deftly managed to make himself chosen by many tribal leaders as a khan to whom they promised obedience “in war and peace and to give him the booty of their conquests to distribute”. And first and foremost he relished raiding and combat; reportedly he remarked once: “The greatest joy a man can know is to conquer his enemies and drive them before him. To ride their horses and take away their possessions. To see the faces of those who were dear to them bedewed with tears and to clasp their wives and daughters in his arms”.

Chapter illustration

Genghis Khan reached the apex of his achievement when in 1206, age 39, he was given the title Genghis Khan by a council of Steppe leaders. According to Professors Burbank and Cooper , Genghis “were spirits that ruled the earth. [Genghis Khan] was the lord of the world”. Having become a most powerful master of his world , he did not want to depart from it and sought longevity through Daoist priests ( Chinese faith). He could ensure long life, they advised, by curtailing its pleasures: hunting, eating and the company of women.

Must not be forgotten, however, that at all times in his rise, Timujin/Genghis made alliances and broke them. More importantly dispatched, with no scruples whatsoever, all those he suspected stood in way including the powerful Togrul the benefactor who paved the way for his predominance. But along with ruthlessness he had charisma: “After slaughtering rebellious subordinates he took remnant families under his protection”. And he boasted that he ate the same food and wore the same clothes as the herders and lowliest of his people.

In the end Genghis Khan died in 1227, aged 60 while on a campaign of revenge against the chief who refused to contribute warriors to him( earlier). In his honor his troops massacred the entire population of an enemy town. Like in the case of Attila his grave was disguised and the region [in Mongolia] around it became a forbidden, sacred space”.

THE SELJUQS

The Seljuqs originated as Turkic tribes in the eastern Steppe. Their primary historical importance is in spearheading the occupation of Anatolia, today’s Turkey, enabling later Turkic peoples to make it home, most notably the Ottomans.

It all began when they were led out of Central Asia in the general direction of nowadays Kazakhstan, converted to Islam and pushed toward Iran and Iraq. In 1055 they entered Baghdad without bloodshed having been given permission by the Abbaside khalife who looked upon them as Sunni allies against Shi’as. So much so, that he honored the Seljuq leader with the title of Sultan and gave him the “ambitious task to overwhelm the Fatimids, the Shi'ite dynasty controlling the caliph's Egyptian territories” , in the words of historyworld.com.

Subsequently, the Seljuqs kicked out the Fatimids from Syria and reached the gates of Egypt. They also clashed with the Byzantines and in 1071, beat them and occupied part of Anatolia thus “coming closer to the Byzantine capital than had any other Muslim force” according to Britannica. And so, by 1100, they had created an empire which also included all of Iran, Mesopotamia, Palestine and the holy cities of Mecca and Medina.

Chapter illustration

With the demise of the earlier sultans and the continual breaking up of the domain among exponentially increasing number of greedy inheritors, the empire of the Seljuqs no longer existed by 1200, a mere 150 years from entering Baghdad. Very significantly,however, the Seljuqs remained in Asia Minor which “overriding feature” henceforth was its Turkic identity which despite the “arrival of the Mongols in the 13th century” remains to the present time thanks to the Ottomans who followed.

Part VI: Lands and Peoples

Africa Land and Peoples

AFRICA THE LAND AND ITS PEOPLES

Chapter illustration

AFRICA THE LAND AND ITS PEOPLES

References -*Ancient History Encyclopedia (AHE): Bantu Migration; The camel caravans of the ancient Sahara. -*BBC: One of Africa's best kept secrets: its history; Christianity (in Africa). -*Blackhistory 365: Africa before transatlantic enslavement. -*Encyclopedia Britannica (BRIT): Africa; Sahara Desert; Modern scientific explanations of human biological variation; Dromedary. -*History.com (HIST): 7 influential African empires. -*Historyworld.net (HWN): History of Africa. -*Internet Looks: Evolution of racial characteristics. -*Khan Academy (KA): The origin of agriculture in Africa. -*National Geographic (NATGEO): Africa: physical geography; Africa: human geography; Arabian camel. -*New World Encyclopedia NWE): History of Africa; Sahara Desert; Pygmy. -*USCB ScienceLine: Why did people evolve into different races? -*Wikipedia (WIKI): History of West Africa.

If the chief evolutionist Charles Darwin (1809-1882) and the eminent geneticists and biologists who have elaborated and built upon his theories are to be believed, then Africa is the most important continent of them all. Its time in the limelight is measured in billions of years. Its environment was friendly enough to enable life to, first appear in its simplest, most basic form: that of a microscopic organism. This happened 3,800,000,000 years ago. Evolution, thereafter, slowly proceeded yielding millions of different types of plant and animal lives. Some of these, like the dinosaurs, subsequently became extinct but not before having thrived for 185,000,000 years. That is to say 925 times longer than our own duration on this planet, so far. A sobering thought.

In the last 10,000 years approximately- a blink of the eye on the scale of evolutionary time- Asia and Europe began to stir and make history, while Africa, apparently, took the back seat. In truth, however, it, too, was evolving but in isolation from the rest of the world.

That isolation ended with the arrival of outsiders. First came the Arabs about 1400 years ago. Seven centuries later the Europeans showed up. Both aggravated the unfortunate local habit of slave trading. The newcomers took this practice to debilitating levels, as millions of indigenous people were, over the centuries, taken abroad to live and work under duress, in unfamiliar places.

Finally, colonization from late 19th century, sealed the fate of the venerable continent.

This narrative is about these, but before moving on, I want to recommend three of my earlier ones with relevance to the topics treated here. They are:

Masters and Slaves-2. Humans as Chattel. About African slaves in the Americas.

Masters and Slaves-3. Rape of a Continent. About the colonization of Africa.

The Story of the Nile. About ancient Egypt, its civilization and society.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

From left, two views of the Sahara, an oasis and the African savanna.

Africa is the oldest landmass on the Globe. With an area of 30,365,000 sq kms, it is the second largest continent after Asia. It measures 8,000 kms and 7,400 kms from north to south and east to west respectively. According to BRIT, the name may have come from the Roman ‘aprica’ meaning sunny in Latin. Alternatively, it may have originated with the Greek ‘aphrike’ meaning ‘without cold’.

About 80 percent of Africa is located within the tropics i.e. straddling the equator. The distance from the latter dictates the type of climate. Necessarily then, survival there of humans, fauna and flora, requires continual adaptation to the alternating hot/dry and hot/wet tropical climate.

The most eye-catching feature on the map of Africa above is the large zone shown in yellow. It represents the world largest desert: the Sahara, occupying wholly or partially 11 nations. At 8,600,000 sq. kms it is equivalent to the size of the United States of America. It occupies more than a quarter of the continent and stretches 4,800 kms from east to west with an average north/south width of 1,600 kms. It is arid and inhospitable with an estimated present total population of 2.5 million inhabitants, excluding Egyptians obviously, or less than ½ a person per sq km, a tiny density as to be of no consequence. This is hardly surprising since according to BRIT:

The principal topographical features of the Sahara include shallow, seasonally inundated basins and large oasis depressions; extensive gravel-covered plains; rock-strewn plateaus; abrupt mountains; and sand sheets, dunes, and sand seas.

But the Sahara has, throughout the millions of years of its existence, alternated between life supporting and inhospitable expanse. As concerns us here, however, the advent of warmer, wetter climate, some 10 to 12,000 years ago, upon the ending of the last ice-age, the Sahara turned into a huge area of fertile grasslands and forests. It was inhabited by hunter-gatherers, early agriculturalists and a variety of animals. But, this happy state of affairs did not last long. In the words of the ‘Oxford Atlas of World History’, 6,000 years ago:

... the climate of the Sahara started to become drier at an exceedingly fast pace....[resulting in] migrations of farming communities to the more tropical climate of West Africa...

As for HWN, this reversal means that the:

Sahara becomes the almost impenetrable barrier which throughout recorded history has separated the Mediterranean coast and north Africa from the rest of the continent.

With all this said, we know from the accounts of the Greek historian Herodotus that the Sahara Desert has been the formidable and forbidding space, it is today, since at least 2,500 years ago.

The indigo narrow band stretching 5,400 kms from Senegal west all the way to Sudan east is the ‘Steppe’ a “semi-arid” transition between the Sahara and the ‘Savanna’ grasslands, shown in light green. With a total area of 13,000,000 sq. kms the latter constitutes over 40 percent of the continent.

Lastly, near the equator is the rain forest, much shrunk from what it used to be 3,000 years ago from climatic change, human abuse and more. What is striking is that land lost by rain forests are ones gained by savannas.

Chapter illustration

The Africa north of the Sahara Desert, is virtually a different continent, not only because of its Mediterranean climate but because of the Atlas mountain range (brown in image) stretching for 2000 kms from the Atlantic shores of Morocco on the west to Tunis, capital of Tunisia. As explained by BRIT, the Atlas constitutes a:

Chapter illustration

...barrier that hinders, without completely preventing, communication between the two regions.

Before ending lets us just recall that Africa is also home to great navigable rivers which facilitated the colonization of the continent in the late 19th century. The Nile, the longest river in the world, enabled the advent and flourishing of the great Egyptian civilization.

Africa is where humans originated about 200,000 years ago. Some of them emigrated to, ultimately, populate the four corners of the world. In the process they phenotypically ()adapted to suit their adopted environments, most notably as regards skin colour (see 1 in Appendix). Even those who stayed on the continent, moved about inside it and changed too. Indeed, far from showing any uniformity, Africa in the words of BRIT: ...has the most physically varied populations in the world, from the tallest peoples to the shortest; the body form and facial and other morphological [relating to the form or structure of things] also vary widely.

Although Mediterranean North Africa, was home to settlers such as the Phoenicians in the 10th century BCE, or was conquered by the Greeks and Romans a few centuries later; Sub-Saharan Africa (part south of the Sahara Desert), on the other hand, remained free of foreign intrusion for a long time. It was thus able to develop free from any external interference.

This is apparently true with the advent of farming in the depths of the continent. There are scholars and historians who support that agriculture and animal domestication, there, arose without prior knowledge of the much earlier evolution and development of these activities in the Valley of the Nile in the northeast corner of the same continent.

For completeness sake, those who adhere to this view are in disagreement with the scholars who advocate that domestication of plants and animals started independently only in five world centers, of which sub-Saharan Africa is not one. It was initiated in Mesopotamia and Egypt about 10,000 years ago.

Be that as it may, there is no controversy about who began farming activities in Africa. It was the Bantu speaking peoples some 5,000 years ago in the west of the continent in parts of present-day Nigeria and Cameroon. How did it come about? KA explains it thus: West Africans had begun to domesticate wild cattle several thousand years before they started to farm. The advantage of herding cattle to a group that was on the move, foraging from place to place, is obvious. You can take your food source with you. If you can breed your food, you’ve got a renewable supply of meat. If you can grow a bit of food when you’re foraging in an area for a few months, you can sustain your animals on simple grains while you forage for more nutritious food sources.

Gradually, the Bantu gave up their nomadic life and settled down to grow their food and raise/breed their cattle. For 2,000 years they scattered within western Africa perfecting the culture of grain vital for themselves and their animals as well as an African variety of rice; in addition to certain varieties of vegetables and fruits. Three thousand years ago (1000 BCE) the Bantu peoples began to spread out into the rest of sub-Saharan Africa (image). It took 1500 years, (i.e. by 500 CE) for settled farming life to prevail in practically the whole of the continent.

Chapter illustration

The people the Bantu were moving against were stone age hunter gatherers who were easily subdued by the newcomers, possessing iron tools and weapons(). One group who refused to submit were the pygmies of the rainforests of central Africa().

Pygmies aside, there is no doubt the Bantu peoples’ migrations changed sub-Saharan Africa the way sedentariness and settled life did in Mesopotamia and elsewhere millennia earlier. One consequence was the gradual increase in the population of sub-Saharan Africa from an estimated 7 million to 20 million a thousand tears later or by 500 CE.

In the final analysis, UNESCO’s General History of Africa, affirms:

The main expansion of the Bantu was vast and fast, not a series of gradual stages as some have argued. But it was a matter neither of purposeless nomadic wandering, nor of organized military conquest. It was a remarkable process of colonization - in the true sense of the word - the opening up of essentially empty lands.

Back to the African pygmies. They were and continue to be small stature people, the tallest of whom does not exceed 1.5 m in height. Otherwise they do not differ genetically/ biologically from ‘normal’ people. From birth to adolescence pygmies are no different from the rest of humans, but in the words of NWE:

Chapter illustration

...in early adolescence they do not experience the growth spurt normal in most other humans.

According to NATGEO there are two lines of thinking about the origin of the pygmies. The first favours the theory that that they diverged from normal size Homo-sapiens some 60,000 years ago. Thenceforth they moved into the forests for protection. Another theory turns this reasoning on its head by proposing that the pygmies chose first to dwell amid thick vegetation, that their small size is a consequential evolutionary process since:

...small bodies regulate heat better, are more agile when moving through dense vegetation, need less food [etc.]

African pygmies survived and continue to survive in their inaccessible habitat by hunting, fishing and gathering edible wild plants and fruits. They also carry out some trade with non-pygmy villages in the vicinity. Further, from NWE: Their cultural identity is very closely tied to the rainforest, as are their spiritual and religious views. Music, as well as dance, is an important aspect of Pygmy life...

But, sadly: In Africa, the Pygmies are in very real danger of losing their forest home, and consequently their cultural identity, as the forest is systematically cleared by logging companies.

Languages and Religions.

In my ‘Amazing Faculty’ narrative, I have reported that there are, in Africa, more than 1500 tongues belonging to the Niger- Congo family of languages. They are the ones spoken in sub- Saharan Africa. The term Bantu, introduced earlier, refers to the Bantu languages described by BRIT as:

...a group of some 500 languages belonging to the... Benue-Congo branch of the Niger-Congo language family. The Bantu languages are spoken in a very large area, including most of Africa from southern Cameroon eastward to Kenya and southward to the southernmost tip of the continent.

Instead, the Afro-Asiatic family is at the origin of 365 dialects spoken on North Africa, among them Arabic. Sharing all these are “several thousand different societies or ethnic groups” according to BRIT.

The Christian Church of North Africa is among the first of such institutions in the world. According to Coptic accounts it was founded by St Mark in Alexandria in the middle of the first century CE. He was the author of one of the four gospels; these being “narratives covering the life and death of Jesus Christ”. Henceforth, the Coptic Orthodox Church became established in Egypt, Ethiopia, Eritrea and along the Mediterranean and Red Sea shores.

As for sub-Saharan Africa, the Christian faith was carried there by missionaries arriving from the 15th century CE onward on board the vessels of the Portuguese and Dutch traders and settlers. Four centuries hence, they accompanied European colonizers.

The conquest of North Africa by Muslim Arabs began in 642 CE ,10 years after the death of Prophet Muhammad. By 705 ‘Al Maghrib’ had become part of the Islamic Empire. In the process, Christianity, which hitherto had a substantial presence in North Africa was swept away by the advance of Islam. Spared only was the Coptic Church in Egypt (). At the same time, however, the indigenous people of North Africa, the Berbers gradually Arabized and converted to Islam . In the words of BRIT:

The Arab Muslim conquerors had a much more durable impact on the culture of the Maghrib than did the region’s conquerors before and after them.

Beginning in the 8th century CE, Arabs and non-Arab Muslims started to move into the heart of Africa; this time as traders and settlers rather than soldiers. They arrived from two directions. On the one hand they travelled south to West Africa across the Sahara Desert; on the other they crossed the Red Sea from Arabia into East Africa. In both occurrences several local rulers and their subjects adopted Islam leading BRIT to state:

Of all foreign settlements in Africa, that of the Arabs has made the greatest impact.

That said, however, the Islam of sub-Saharan Africans was not that of Arabia or of the Maghrib. Indeed, it was an Africanized version, in other words, coloured by and flavoured with Africa’s own long- established cultures. In this context, for example, when the famed Moroccan traveler and chronicler Ibn Battuta visited Mali (see hereinafter) in 1352 CE he is overjoyed because Malians:

...are careful to observe the hours of prayer…and in bringing up their children to them.

Simultaneously and to the contrary, he is appalled by their non-Islamic relish for the flesh of dead dogs, donkeys and off other carcasses . He is, equally, scandalized by the nakedness of local Muslim women, whether servants, slaves or otherwise who:

...go about in front of everyone naked, without a stitch of clothing on them.

It should be obvious, finally, that not all sub-Saharan Africans embraced either of the two monotheistic religions. Those who did not stayed with their longstanding traditional beliefs. They had god(s) bad as well as good whom they did not comprehend, revered ancestors and believed in myths and legends. They had faith, too, in cosmology () which, according to BRIT:

...tells of tribal origins and early migrations and explains the basic ideological problems of any culture, such as the origin of death, the nature of society, the relationship of men and women and of living and dead, and so on.

Kingdoms and empires.

I dare say, when it comes to the political history of Africa of the last few millennia, our knowledge is, generally, limited to the great pre-Antiquity Egyptian civilization and the colonial period stretching from late 19th century to mid-20th. Between the two, however, there have come and gone other kingdoms and empires which although not as impressive as pharaonic Egypt have, nonetheless, left their mark on the black continent.

In Egypt’s backyard in the northeast corner of Africa there arose two kingdoms between 1069 BCE and the 8th century CE, a matter of 1,700 years. Successively, the kingdoms of Kush and Aksum. Equally, on the western end of North Africa, Carthage was born, flourished and held sway over land and sea for 700 years, from 800 to 146 BCE. And south of the Sahara Desert in the west of the continent emerged successively from the 7th century CE to the 16th the kingdoms/empires of Ghana, Mali and Songhai.

I shall not dwell on ancient Egypt; I have already covered it adequately enough in earlier narratives. Suffices, here, to recall that ancient Egypt’s political and social continuity spanned three millennia (from 3100 to 30 BCE) guided by the helmsmanship of 30 dynasties of pharaohs.

Immediately south, in part of the Egyptian Nubia and today’s Sudan was the Kingdom of Kush which golden period stretched from 1069 to 350 BCE. Its relations with its northern neighbour alternated between belligerent and cooperative. So much so that from 744 to 656 BCE Kushite kings made Egypt part of their empire and ruled it as its 25th dynasty. Ultimately, they were forced out by the Assyrians and thenceforth began a long decline.

Similarly to Egyptians, they mummified their dead and built a great number of pyramids. According to a report by the BBC:

More than 300 of these pyramids are still intact, almost untouched since they were built nearly 3,000 years ago.

As to the kingdom of Aksum, it was founded in the first century CE in the region of the Horn of Africa (map). In the 4th century its kings adopted the Orthodox Christian faith already prevailing in “Byzantine Egypt”. Its language, Ge’ez is, according to the Oxford Dictionary:

Chapter illustration

...an ancient Semitic language of Ethiopia, which survives as the liturgical language of the Ethiopian Orthodox Church. It is the ancestor of the modern Ethiopian languages such as Amharic....It has its own script of more than 200 characters, based on the ancient language Ge'ez, used now only in the Orthodox Church.

Aksum’s apogee occurred between the 3rd and 6th century CE, described by BRIT as a time when:

Aksum became the greatest market of northeastern Africa; its merchants traded as far as Alexandria and beyond the Nile River. Aksum continued to dominate the Red Sea coast until the end of the 9th century.

At that time, too, it controlled an area corresponding to present day Ethiopia, Eritrea, Djibouti and Somalia. More, it also extended its influence to the Arabian side of the Red Sea specifically to the Yemen.

The Kingdom’s decline began with the Islamic conquest of North Africa, from the 7th century, curtailing its trading activities there. Similarly, Muslim traders arriving across the Red Sea, largely deprived the Aksumites of their lucrative practices. All in all, by the 8th century the great kingdom had shrunk considerably.

The city state of Carthage, at the western end of North Africa, was founded in 814 BCE by Phoenician immigrants from Tyre on the eastern shore of the Mediterranean. It reached the peak of its prosperity with the arrival of wealthy Phoenicians from Tyre after it had been conquered by Alexander the Great of Macedonia in 332 BCE. Henceforth it dominated trade in the Mediterranean. Eventually from a small town it expanded along the coast, acquired Sicily and regions in Spain (red on map). According to HIST:

At its peak, its capital city boasted nearly half a million inhabitants and included a protected harbor outfitted with docking bays for 220 ships.

This success and prosperity brought Carthage into conflict, with the young Roman Republic. As usually happened throughout history, the Punic (meaning western Phoenicians) Wars ensued. In the space of more than a century between 264 and 146 BCE, three long wars were fought between the two sides, ending with the sacking and destruction of Carthage and the slaughter of its population.

The first kingdom of sub-Saharan West Africa was that of Ghana. Despite the name it did not, territorially, correspond to the modern-day state of the same name. It arose in the 7th century CE, climbed to prominence in the 9th and began its downhill slide in the 11th. It ceased to exist altogether in 1230 CE.

Chapter illustration

During its two or three centuries of success and prosperity, it could muster 200,000 soldiers with whom it controlled the trans Saharan trade routes. It taxed goods crossing its territory including gold and salt (see hereinafter) and confiscated a proportion of the whole. The kingdom began its downfall, partly when other trade routes came into being and partly as a result of dynastic quarrels.

The realm of the kingdom of Ghana was taken over and greatly expanded. It ultimately included present day Senegal, Guinea, Gambia, Mauretania, Mali, Niger, Nigeria and Chad. A huge domain, indeed, all part of the Empire of Mali (map). So much so that BRIT qualifies it as:

Chapter illustration

...one of the largest in the world at that time,

It grew extremely wealthy and powerful through trade and its access to gold. This wealth is epitomized by the momentous hajj journey to Mecca of Emperor Mansa Musa in 1324. On the way he stopped in Cairo ruled at that time by the Mamluk sultan an-Nasir Muhammad (1285-1340).

For this journey east, the emperor travelled with a caravan of untold number of camels loaded with food and other necessities, as well as horses with riders etc. He was accompanied by a retinue of thousands of courtiers, soldiers, servants, slaves and more. One of his generals used the opportunity of the passage to acquire Gao, capital the Songhai kingdom (see below), hence establishing the eastern limit of the Empire.

Above all, however, was the astounding quantities of gold carried by the Emperor’s party on the trip. All sources agree that Mansa Musa dispensed so much of it to the Mamluk sultan and local dignitaries, and his people gave so much of it in Cairo’s souks and bazars, that the price of the precious metal was depressed significantly for more than a decade (see 2 in Appendix).

Hitherto, no one that far east had heard of the Empire of Mali, let alone its wealth. It is reported that Mansa Musa’s reputation and wealth reached Europe. Indeed, according to NATGEO:

The Catalan Atlas, created in 1375 C.E. by Spanish cartographers, shows West Africa dominated by a depiction of Mansa Musa sitting on a throne, holding a nugget of gold in one hand and a golden staff in the other. After the publication of this atlas, Mansa Musa became cemented in the global imagination as a figure of stupendous wealth

In spite of his profligacy and extravagance, Mansa Musa came back home an enlightened man, accompanied by scholars, doctors and architects. Upon his return he initiated free education and healthcare for all citizens. A university was built in the city of Timbuktu, reported by HIST to have had a library with 700,000 manuscripts. Further, adobe () mosques were built in that city as well as in Djenné, the other important town of the Empire. The image shows the Great Mosque of Djenné restored in the first decade of the last century. It is described by KA publication as:

...one of the wonders of Africa, and one of the most unique religious buildings in the world, the Great Mosque of Djenné, in present-day Mali,

Inevitably, like others which preceded it and many to follow, the empire of Mali began its downward slide in the 1360’s under the combined effects of civil wars and the encroachments of foreign ethnic groups on the fringes of its territory. The most serious of which were the Songhai people whose capital, Gao had been taken by the Malians during the epic hajj journey of Mansu Musa as we have seen. Ultimately Mali gave way to the Songhai Empire in the 1460’s though it lingered on in parts of its former territories till the 1600’s.

Chapter illustration

If anything, the new empire was even larger than the one it replaced. According to NATGEO:

[It] combined the powerful forces of Islam, commercial trade, and scholarship....[Its] economic and social power was anchored by the Islamic faith.

Reportedly, in the account of his visit to Timbuktu during the heyday of the Songhai Empire the renown ‘Maghribian’ diplomat Leo Africanus () wrote:

There you will find many judges, professors and devout men, all handsomely maintained by the king, who holds scholars in much honour. There, too, they sell many handwritten North African books, and more profit is to be made there from the sale of books than from any other branch of trade.

In turn, the realm of Songhai began its own decline thanks to internal rivalries and strife. It crumbled in the late 1500’s, to be replaced not by another hegemon this time, but by a number of small quasi-states.

Elsewhere, Africans were organized in kin tribes and clans headed by a chief and governed by a council of elders.

There is no doubt in the minds of many a historian that Africa’s destiny took an ominous turn with the arrival of Europeans. First, in the 1400’s, the Portuguese, in search of a route to India round Africa, decided to stay when they discovered the lucrative trade in slaves. The Dutch, on the other hand settled in South Africa in 1652.

By the 19th century, Europeans are becoming intrigued by Africa of which they have, hitherto, only discovered its coastal regions. More than half a dozen missionaries and explorers venture deep inside the mysterious continent to discover its secrets. Returning home their accounts arouse the interests of various business and evangelical concerns.

One case in point is David Livingstone (1813-1873) originally a missionary turned explorer. He was first sent there in 1841 to starts mission stations but soon became interested in the more mundane pursuits. Back home in 1857, speaking to a young audience at Cambridge University, he impresses upon them the worthiness of work in Africa in both the business and religious spheres. According to HWN, he further tells them that:

...[h]e is about to return there... in the hope of opening a path into the continent 'for commerce and Christianity'. He needs young enthusiasts to continue this work.

The discoveries of Livingstone et al. lead to a conference in Berlin in 1884 at which, shamelessly and scandalously, the main powers of Europe carve up the African Continent between them, under the lofty pretext of the three C’s: Christianity, commerce and civilization.

Britain and France end up with the lion shares. Adding insult to injury, the conferees agree to make a gift to King Leopold II of Belgium; they grant him the entire 2,000,000 sq.kms of the Congo to run as his private property.

Trade in gold, salt and people

As elsewhere, then and now, trade was and remains central to the success and prosperity of polities large and small and of whatever shape.

In Africa, an active and substantive north south movement of goods and commodities, took place across the formidable Sahara Desert. The most important merchandise sent up to the shores of the Mediterranean was gold. On the return journey traders picked up salt from mines on the way; a commodity no less valuable than gold, given the craving for it by the people of the interior. Other goods included ivory and ostrich feathers for the North Africans and dates and metallic items for their sub- Saharan counterparts.

But this two-way exchange could not begin in earnest until the introduction of the Arabian camel to Africa by Islamic conquerors, settlers and traders from the 7th century onwards (see 3 in Appendix). Up to then horses and donkeys had been relied on but left a great deal to be desired.

Henceforth large caravans of, typically, 500 camels were organized during the cool seasons. Travel time each way took between 40 to 60 days. Aside from the scores of tradesmen accompanying the caravans, there also were the camel drivers, slaves to do the menial work and imams to lead the travelers in prayers. At times, even scribes went along to record deals executed. But the most important person, bar none, was the guide or ‘khabir’. Like a ship captain he was the master on board. Simultaneously, he carried great responsibilities for the safe and timely completion of the undertaking. Historian H. J. Fisher, quoted by AHE remarks about the ‘khabir’ as follows:

He knew the desert routes and watering places, and he was able to find his way by the stars at night, or if need be by the scent and touch of the sand and vegetation. He had to understand the proper rules of desert hygiene, remedies against scorpions and snakes, how to heal sickness and mend fractures. He had to know the various chiefs of towns and tribes with which the caravan had to deal along the way, and in this respect a responsible khabir might consolidate his position by strategic marriages in several localities, or into several tribes.

East-west trading, too, took place, from the Atlantic Ocean to the Red Sea and back. The routes on these occasions were over the savanna, in somewhat friendlier and less harsh conditions.

Historically Africa has known three instances of emigration. The first was the one known as ‘out of Africa’ or the exodus of the first humans as we have already covered. The second was the spreading out of the Bantu peoples from West Africa to the rest of the continent, as we have seen earlier. The displacements in both these occurrences were voluntary, driven by curiosity and the search for a better place.

But the third emigration, involved the deportation of men, women and children for servitude far away from home. In short: it was the slave trade.

The origin of this nefarious business resides in the unfortunate practices of Africans themselves. From the earliest of times, in the depths of the continent, clans raided clans, albeit of different ethnicities, for loot and captives. The latter were then sold locally mostly as domestic servants.

When Arab merchants discovered Africa, they saw in this local practice an opportunity for a lucrative business. No doubt this occasioned significantly higher levels of brutality and violence during raids of abductions than previously. As described by Joseph E. Holloway, Professor of Pan African Studies at California State University:

Chapter illustration

Slave raids and inter- ethnic wars generated and intensified a great deal of bloodshed, destruction and the general misery that ensued. Entire villages were sometimes burned. Millions were lost as a direct result of these activities.

Indeed, over a period of ten centuries between the 9th and 19th century, they bought millions and carried them in caravans or across the Red Sea to slave markets in North Africa, the Middle East, Arabia and Asia.

As we have seen above, crossing the awesome Sahara Desert was no pleasure trip at the best of times. But what was it like with the additional burden of chained slaves reluctantly trudging along for days and nights on end. We have some account from historian Fisher, again quoted in AHE:

He [the slave trader] was exhausted with his slave men and women. This woman had grown thin, this one was hungry, this one was sick, this one had run away, this one was afflicted by the guinea worm. When they encamped they had much to occupy him”.

Later when the Portuguese arrived in the 15th century they, too saw the opportunity for very cheap labour for servitude at home in Europe and in their new possessions of Madeira and Azores archipelagoes. But more crucially, after Columbus discoveries, in the new colonies of the Americas. Followed four hundred years of a transatlantic slave trade. The Portuguese ships were joined by the Spanish in 1510, the British in 1560 and the French in the early 1700’s. The captives were loaded in horrendous conditions at ports in Africa and delivered weeks later at harbours in North and South America and the Caribbean islands. Follows the de description by BRIT:

So that the largest possible cargo might be carried, the captives were wedged belowdecks [image] , chained to low-lying platforms stacked in tiers, with an average individual space allotment that was 183 cm long, 41 cm wide, and perhaps 91 cm high

Chapter illustration

The encyclopedia goes on to describe how the ship crew fed, exercised and handled the excrement and other filth generated by the wretched souls. But that is another story.

As for the African kings and chiefs who organized the capture of the victims and sent them along to where the ships were moored, they received from the Europeans in compensation for their efforts, trinkets such as glass beads, glassware, brandy, ironmongery and inferior quality cloth. They also received firearms with gunpowder which, ironically, they used in further kidnapping raids.

1)How did we get from there to here.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

When members of our species left Africa is search of other places, they, as sure as night follows daylight, exhibited the features of the venerable gentleman above. In a matter of a few tens of millennia, rather short when measured on the evolutionary timescale, they changed, or more accurately, adapted to the demands of their new environments. In reality, they had no choice in the matter. Else they would have perished.

Scholars marvel at the adaptive capacity of humans to their new habitats. The physical variations have affected skin colour and thickness, hair texture, facial features and body structure. But there also occurred mental and cultural innovations. All these giving rise to the notion of race. As explained in a 1963 paper by S.L. Washburn of the University of California, Berkley:

The evolution of races is due, according to modern genetics, to mutation, selection, migration, and genetic drift.... Genetic theory forces the consideration of culture as the major factor in the evolution of man.

Allow me now to introduce the pigment ‘melanin’ responsible for the colour of skin, hair and eyes in humans, as well as, other organisms. A well-established scientific fact is stated in MedicinNet says:

Dark skinned people have more melanin than lighter skinned people have.

In other words, melanin protects the skin from the harm caused by intense ultra violet radiation. It follows that a dark skin is a defence worn by its owner under these circumstances.

The other side of the coin, however, is this statement from WebMD:

Melanin...lowers the skin's ability to make vitamin D.

But healthy bones and teeth need vitamin D, produced in the lower layers of the skin as it reacts chemically with sunlight. In consequence the source continues:

Some studies show that older adults with darker skin are at high risk of vitamin D deficiency”.

That is to say, therefore, that whereas our forebears enjoyed a skin colour suitable for their environment; their descendants, as they migrated northwardly, could no longer tolerate their original melanin baggage, since it hindered the production of vitamin D, under the much less intense and frequent sunshine. And less melanin meant lighter skin.

Indeed, the resulting gradation of human skin colours at latitudes farther and farther from the equator is shown below. It is captioned by BRIT: “Distribution of skin colour variations of indigenous populations before colonization by Europeans”, such as dark Australia before its discovery by the British explorer and navigator James Cook (1728-1779).

Chapter illustration

Not surprisingly, variations were not limited to skin colours. Indeed, according to BRIT:

Long, linear body builds seems to be highly correlated with hot, dry climates.... Short, stocky body builds with stubby fingers and toes are correlated with cold, wet climates, such as are found in Arctic areas.

Even more, Homo sapiens who eventually found their way to high altitude mountains such as the Indians of the Andes in South America, evolved, in order to survive, more voluminous lungs and rib cages to make up for the rarified oxygen at these heights.

But more baffling are the changes, with no obvious evolutionary benefits, such as the slanted eyes of Asiatic peoples. According to USCB ScienceLine, it is attributable to, the rather complicated ‘genetic drift’ concept which is:

...known to happen to traits that...neither benefit their owners nor harm them...eye shape in humans does not affect the ability to survive and so is not subject to natural selection, with the result that it evolves due to genetic drift instead.

We cannot let go without a word about race in the socio-political sense. It has no significance in the biological sciences. It is now more than amply and adequately proven that genetically all humans are the same. They are all members of the one species: Homo sapiens. In his acclaimed 1997 book ‘Guns, Germs and Steel’ author Jared Diamond goes to great lengths to show that:

...geography and biogeography, not race, moulded the contrasting fates of Europeans, Asians, Native Americans, sub-Saharan Africans, and aboriginal Australians.

2) Mansa Musa’s arrival in Cairo.

Just how much gold did the emperor of Mali have upon his arrival in Cairo? Apparently, the emperor was accompanied by 80 to 100 camels each loaded with 135 kgs of gold, in addition to 500 slaves “carrying gold-adorned staff”.

Once there, he sent the Mamluk sultan 50,000 gold dinars, and in accordance with protocol, intended to pay a courtesy visit to the ruler. But, curiously, Mamluk protocol further dictated that he should kiss the ground of the feet of the sultan, on coming into his presence. Understandably the emperor demurred. But in the words of the royal messenger:

I continue to cajole him, and he continued to make excuses, but the sultan’s protocol demanded that I should bring him into the royal presence, so I kept on at him till he agreed.”

3) Arabian camel

Chapter illustration

Known also as the ‘dromedary’ or one hump camel, it is a large animal, 2 m high at the shoulders and weighs on average 500 kgs. It is eminently suited for the harsh environments found in deserts.

To begin with, It is endowed with heavy leathery padded feet enabling the beast to easily navigate the rough desert terrain. It has transparent eyelids, thick brows and a second row of lashes to protect its eyes from windblown sand. More, its nostrils can close to keep the gritty material out. Clearly, then, a dromedary’s progress is not hindered by sandstorms.

The hump of a dromedary stores about 40 kgs of fat which metabolizes into energy and liquid during days of scarce food and water. This enables the animal’s legendary staying power over long distances and for days on end. It helps that camels do not perspire and can function at temperatures as high as 49 deg C.

But when the opportunity arises camels soak up water at the phenomenal rate of over 100 litres in less than 15 minutes. For food, their thick lips enable them to eat “the dry and thorny desert vegetation”.

No wonder then, with all these attributes, camels are endearingly labelled ships of the ‘desert’. We have already seen that they can carry half their weights in cargo and move it happily under very hard conditions. A camel will also carry its rider for 185 desert kms in less than 11 hours, without food and water.

Original Owners of North America

Require some slight editing. Compare with PDF version.

ORIGINAL OWNERS OF NORTH AMERICA PRE-COLUMBIAN TIMES

Contemporaneous watercolor by painter/colonist John White (1539-1593)

The Author OCTOBER, 2020

ORIGINAL OWNERS OF NORTH AMERICA PRE-COLUMBIAN TIMES

References -* Encyclopedia Britannica (BRIT): American Indian, Plains Indian, Native American Religions, Sun Dance. -* ‘Collapse’, 2005 book by Jared Diamond, chapter 4: The Anasazi and their Neighbors. -* Government of Canada (GOV): Warfare in Pre-Columbian North America. -*Historyworld.net (HWN): The American Indians, Iroquois League. -* New World Encyclopedia: Pre-Columbian Civilization. -*Scholarly Document(1) (SDOC-1) : Native American Governments in Today’s Curriculum. -* Scholarly Document (2) (SDOC-2): Native Peoples of America to 1500. -* Wikipedia: Pre-Columbian Era.

Introduction and overview

In an earlier narrative, also, about pre-Columbian Americas, I developed the stories of the indigenous peoples of Central and South America namely those of the Mayas, Aztecs and Incas. In this one I dwell on the stories of their counterparts in North America. But first , a short recapitulation is in order.

Sixteen thousand years ago hunter gatherers in Siberia began an exodus, on foot, to Alaska. It took place during the las ice-age when sea levels were much lower that now and a land bridge existed at the place of today’s Bering Strait.

The Siberians travelled and spread far and wide in the new lands. So much so that by 12,000 years ago some had reached ‘Terra del Fuego’, Argentina’s southernmost point. They were, no doubt, overjoyed at the abundance of wild flora and fauna they encountered on their treks. As described by history professor Yuval Harari in his 2014 book ‘Sapiens’, the Americas then were:

…..a place where animals and plants unknown in Africa and Asia had evolved and thrived.

Among the former was the horse, mammoth , giant ground sloth, large bison and more. That is to say, plentiful reserves of meat, fat, bone, skin and fur to indulge in.

The ice age started to fade approximately 11,500 years ago, the climate gradually became warmer and sea levels began to rise eventually submerging the land bridge. Henceforth those on the American side became isolated from the rest of the world . They remained so for more than 9,000 years, until Christopher Columbus showed up. Not quite. In reality, there was, in the meantime, a very brief incursion by Norse people or the Vikings (see 1 in Appendix).

The demise of ice age and resulting warming caused the extinction of the large animals stated above in the opinion of BRIT and no doubt in that of some scholars. But authors Harari and Diamond disagree. They strongly maintain in their respective books that the new American went after their preys so aggressively as to cause their extinction within a few millennia after their arrival. According to Harari, 34 of North America’s 47 animal species had been exterminated. Among the survivors was the bison, albeit smaller that its ancestor, which played a central role in the lifestyle of some of the Indians as we shall see later.

Whatever, the fact remains that for the next thousands of years, the Amerindians lacked large mammals to breed, raise, ride and to employ as beast of burden. Until that is horses, sheep, donkeys and more were reintroduced by the Europeans.

In 1929, archaeologists digging near Clovis in New Mexico, unearthed artifacts they dated to 11,000-11,500 years ago . Subsequently more such discoveries were made wide and far in North America. Among the artifacts located are bone and stone tools for use as hammers and scrapers. But also, stone hunting projectiles with Clovis points like the ones shown. They used these against mammoths and the like.

With the advent of warmer weather, new flora grew across the landscape of North American enabling Amerindians hunter gatherers to diversify their vegetal diet. And with the disappearance of the mega fauna, they turned to hunting smaller prey and to catching aquatic food in rivers and lakes. This change in lifestyle and the new environments encouraged the coming together of larger number of people into the first inklings of settlements.

By 4,500 years ago the natives of North America had evolved lifestyles and cultures very different from their forebears afore. Sedentary living led to a gradual population increase. By the 1500’s, at the onset of European ingress, they numbered about 20,000,000 according to author Diamond (). Further. By then the indigenous peoples belonged to a variety of cultures , spoke , according to BRIT more than 300 different languages and belonged to about the same number of tribes across the vast North American landmass.

Given that cultural diversity and the vast space occupied at a time when ‘keeping in touch’ was rather arduous, one cannot speak of a “native American religion” or native social customs and ethics. That said, however, there are, nevertheless, enough similarities between a majority of the communities, if not all, to warrant the few lines which follow.

Religion and ethics.

To begin with, Amerindians were animist. In other words, they assigned a soul to all objects in nature and in the Universe: plants, animals, mountains, rivers, clouds sun and moon etc. To them they were all spirit-beings equally worthy of veneration. For example, according to SDOC-2:

...Indian hunters prayed to the spirits of the animals they killed, thanking them for the gift of food.

This being so, these spirit-beings influenced the commoners daily lives. It, consequently, seemed necessary for them to seek guidance and help from them by undertaking ‘vision-quests’. To do so a supplicant went away to a secluded place where he fasted and beseeched those supernatural beings to, say, safeguard him in combat and grant him immunity from disease. If his demands are granted, he would receive guidance to achieve both.

Religious ceremonies, some involving brutal self-punishment as we shall see hereinafter, were crucial events to be attended by all, with wholehearted gusto and enthusiasm manifested by telling jokes, clown around and otherwise entertain others.

Generosity was highly valued as explained by BRIT:

Human beings are taught to give eagerly because in so doing they imitate the generosity of the many other-than-human entities that provide for human sustenance [such as plants animals and rivers].

Devotion to one’s kin group was also valued, as well as proper conduct toward the wider group:

Teaching proper behaviour toward others, which is defined by one’s relationship to them, is an essential part of child rearing.

Consistently with this, a community’s response to a violent act such as murder, was left to the respective families to agree the outcome. One way was for the murderer’s kinfolk to offer a gift or some kind of compensation to that of the victim etc. In case of no agreement it was left to the elders to look into the case.

Raiding other tribe(s) and warring among themselves regular occurrences. Indeed, GOV tells us that archaeological findings point to assaults on, and sieges of villages that had been fortified with “timber palisades”, precisely as a safeguard against such eventuality (image).

Why did Amerindians fight among themselves and raid others’ settlements/villages? There were the trivial reasons as well as the ‘valid ones’. Among the former was the ego of the young ones who by faring well in combat gained prestige and standing among their folks. On the other hand there were the usual politico/economic struggles to “acquire territory, gain access to resources” or “exact tribute...or controlling trade routes”.

Another was revenge. For while reprisals within the group were not socially accepted as explained earlier, inter-tribal revenge, to the contrary, was a cherished custom which inevitably led to almost never ending cycles of blows and counterblows. One version, strikingly, was the “mourning war”. The aim was to capture prisoners for adoption by those in attackers group grieving over the loss of a loved one in combat or through disease. The captive, in other words was meant to take the place of the departed among his kinfolks.

Now, let us ask ourselves what did their tools of war consist of? First in the absence of large animals to ride and carry loads, Indian warriors had only their feet and muscles to depend on. Their weapons consisted of bows and arrows, clubs for bludgeoning adversaries in close combat and hatchets (small axes) for splitting skulls. They also carried knifes for scalping meaning slicing off the skin covering the top of the cranium. They were inevitably made of animal parts and stone.

It is therefore clear that warring and raiding were serious businesses, demanding that every male be ready for (see 3 in Appendix). From an early age, young boys were taught the arts of hunting animals and killing humans. They trained and practiced till they achieved the degree of skill needed to cause bodily harm to the adversary while avoiding it oneself.

In addition to their dexterity with the tools of battle at their disposal, Amerindian warriors were as hard as nail. They were stoic about drink and food and able to take the difficulties and hardships that come with belligerence. Reportedly they could walk unbelievably long distances to their target, or as reported by one witness:

They often stay behind their trees for two or three days without eating, waiting for a favourable opportunity to kill an enemy.

Cutting off scalps, as proof of the number of kills and as trophies was one gruesome aspect of Amerindian warfare. Another was the torture of captives described thus by GOV:

The torture was however highly ritualized and apparently its purpose was to calm the souls of people who had died violently. The prisoner was usually tied to a post and his fingernails were pulled out and various parts of his body were burned...In some cases, the victors ate the heart or part of the body of a prisoner they considered particularly courageous.

Women and young children were however spared. Instead, they were given to families in lieu of deceased loved ones, as already outlined.

Chapter illustration

On the map shown above, each colour represents an Amerindian cultural region. In what follows I describe the particularities of communities in 5 different cultural regions. The communities are those of the Anasazi, Pueblo, Navajo and Apache of the Southwest. I then proceed with the tribes of the Plains. Thereafter I move to the eastern region with the Mississippians and the Iroquois speaking tribes. Finally, I include a few words about the Inuit and Aleut Eskimos in the Arctic zone of Canada and in Alaska. Following all these , I end the narrative with a few lines about the onset of contact with French, English and Spanish arrivals.

The Anasazi culture and the Pueblo Indians of the southwest

The part of the southwestern United States, in this context, is a region shared by the states of Arizona, Colorado, New Mexico and Utah. It is a zone of canyons, buttes and mesas (image), all products of natural erosion over millions of years. It is arid with little rain and recurring droughts.

And yet to these “fragile and difficult environments” arrived 13,000 years ago hunter gatherers descending from the Siberian immigrants. It took time for them to discover agriculture. They saw it practiced by their more advanced neighbors to the south in Mexico. They began with corn (maize) some 4,000 years ago. A thousand years later they grew squashes (image) and beans and a few centuries after that they learnt to grow cotton. The only domesticable animal they found was the turkey. Clearly, what they grew was no enough to keep them nourished. Therefore, until they became fully agricultural, their main sustenance continued to be from gathering wild plants and hunting whatever prey they could find.

Chapter illustration

By the onset of the Common Era (1 CE), they already lived in villages in the northwest of New Mexico. Six hundred years on, the culture of the Anasazi people began to flourish in the corners of the four states (image). About a century later, that is by 700, they had invented unaided, the techniques of stone construction (image). Their first edifices were one story high. But by the 900’s they were building two story dwellings. Later, still, according to author Diamond, their buildings:

Chapter illustration

...rose to five or six stories with 600 rooms whose roof support were logs up to 16 feet long weighing up to 700 pounds.

In its heyday, the Anasazi polity with a population of 5000 more or less, was a “mini -empire”. The types of houses, their construction and contents suggest a three-class society. On top were the aristocrats who ate well and lived comfortably. At the bottom, on the other hand were the peasants eating barely adequately ant toiling to cultivate the food for the higher up on the social ladder.

That civilization prospered till about 1150. Having aggressively exploited the resources of its already fragile ecosystem, the Anasazi culture, by 1200, existed no more. In other words, it had fallen victim of an environment which could no longer sustain it. Strikingly though, it lived almost three times as long as the present age of the United States. Again Diamond:

...Anasazi society flourished... for more than five centuries...It was a complexly organized, geographically extensive , regionally integrated society that... did manage to construct in stone the largest and tallest buildings erected in North America until the Chicago steel girders skyscrapers of the 1880.

Lastly, controversy exists as to whether the Anasazi indulged in cannibalism and, if so, when and under what circumstances. But author Diamond thinks that “warfare cannibalism” did indeed exist on the strength of the findings of archaeologists and anthropologists. Namely, a house with smashed up contents and, the cracked bones of seven people. Also found were cooking pots with traces of a particular human protein and other tell-tale signs. In his written words:

...whoever attacked...killed the inhabitants, cracked open their bones [ for their marrow], boiled their flesh in pots.... [etc.]

Chapter illustration

Descending from the Anasazi are the Pueblo Indians, a fully settled group of people growing their food consisting of the plants identified above. The term ‘pueblo’ is Spanish for people “having fixed locations”. Puebloans lived in stone built multistory dwellings (image).

Spanish colonizers coming up from Mexico encountered the group in 1598. The aim of the northward drive, was to find gold, capture slaves and, more loftily, the conversion of the natives to Catholicism. Inadvertently, no doubt, the Puebloans benefitted by making the acquaintance of “horses, burros [donkeys], and sheep” as well as of new varieties of plants.

Late comers to the southwest were the Navajo and Apache Indians of Hollywood fame. The Navajo came to the empty sites of the former Anasazi, 600 years after the demise of their culture. Both groups led a nomadic lifestyle. They subsisted by raiding their sedentary neighbors i.e. the Puebloans as well as by hunting and gathering. They lived in temporary, easy to relocate accommodations such as the Navajo’s hogan (image). By that time, the 1750s, the Spaniards were well established in that geographic regions. Both, the Navajo and Apache, through attacking the Puebloans and fighting the Spanish:

...took note of the material conditions of these groups... and selectively incorporated such things as horses, sheep, cattle, woven goods, and dry land agricultural techniques.

according to BRIT. For example, author Diamond recounts that the Navajo, following their acquisition of sheep, mastered the art of wool making which they weaved into:

...the beautiful woolen blankets for which the Navajo have become renowned [image].

Amerindians of the Plains

The Great Plains of North America, in yellow on the map hereinbefore, is a vast expanse of grassland irrigated by the Mississippi and Missouri rivers and their tributaries. It has a continental climate with temperature extremes of between minus 18 to 43 deg C.

For a long time, until about 1,000 years ago the indigenous people were bands of hunter gatherers, of no more than a few dozen people each, related by blood or marriage and constantly on the move for food. But beginning around 850 CE some of them began to grow crops. Along the Missouri river and its confluents, bands came together as tribal communities of a few hundred members or, in certain cases, villages of a few thousand inhabitants. By 1250 several of Plains Amerindians had made the transformation. They cultivated corn, beans, squashes, tobacco and more. For tools they used animal bone parts and sticks.

And they hunted. No land animal or river fish they caught was more valuable than the buffalo aka bison, the ancestors of which miraculously survived the extinction of the mega fauna, mentioned hereinbefore. That animal provided a whole array of items needed for the survival of the hunters’ communities as detailed on the image alongside. Below is a description of what went on in the hunt related by SDOC-2:

Chapter illustration

...[whole communities] stampeded [on foot, in the absence of horses] herds of bison into small box canyons, easily killing the trapped animals, or over cliffs. Dozens, or occasionally hundreds, of buffalo would be killed. Since a single buffalo could provide two hundred to four hundred pounds of meat and a band had no means of preserving and storing most of it, the latter practice was especially wasteful.

Within a tribe or village there existed a whole range of rules, regulations, customs and traditions etc. to be respected. They related to relations between the sexes, the division of labor between genders, marriage, the raising, education and training of children. They also dictated the relations of the latter with grandparents, that of husband/wife behavior towards his/her in-laws . And the roles of maternal brothers and paternal aunts in the upbringing of children.

For example. In addition to their universal duties of bearing children and looking after household matters, Plains Amerindian women built the family house, planted and reaped crops and collected medicinal plants. Men on the other hand, grew tobacco, hunted, raided and defended their communities from aggressors.

In some of the tribes, children followed the lineage of their mothers. In such cases their fathers moved in with the mother’s clan which adopted him as one of their own. Monogamy seems to have been the rule but polygamy existed too, as in the case of a man marrying his brother’s widow or, conversely, a woman marrying her sister’s widower. Sisters with the same husband was looked upon favorably, because according to BRIT:

... this built on established bonds and ensured that friendly parties would share in raising the household’s children and caring for its elders.

Training of children for their adult duties began at an early age; and while girls were initiated in agriculture etc., boys, on the other hand, were taught to hunt, raid and steal from neighbors. This latter task is described by BRIT:

...groups of young boys developed stealth by the socially approved practice of attempting to steal food from their neighbours’ lodges. In the event of a group’s success, the lodge residents often held a feast in the boys’ honour; such a celebration of the thieves’ skill exempted the household from further plunder.

Plains Amerindians lived in tent like ‘tepees’ or in ‘earth lodges’ (image) the former according to BRIT had a living area of 7.5 sq m (later extended to 16 sq.m) and, hard-to- believe, housing “two or three generations. Moreover:

Chapter illustration

The cover was made from dressed buffalo skins carefully fitted and sewn together..... A hearth in the centre provided heat and light; a smoke hole at the top could be closed in bad weather and in warm weather the sides could be rolled up for additional ventilation.

The earth lodge was much larger, enclosing an area in excess of 100 sq.m. It was built of a wood structure and covered, as its name indicates with earth and grass. But whereas a tepee could easily be dismantled carried and rebuilt elsewhere, the lodge, obviously, could not.

Surprisingly, perhaps, even in Plains Indians societies there were differences in the wealth of members. Those with means were expected to give to those without and for which they gained status. The children of well to do families had a better start in life than the ones from families of modest means. Regardless, in due course, the former had to prove himself to win the respect of his community.

Whether band, tribe or village, it was headed by a leader selected for his competence and proven courage. He was relied on for sound decisions and judgement on crucial matters regarding, for example, the best time to raid others, that for hunting, planting and that for building new lodges.

Expectedly, Plains Amerindians, had many rituals and ceremonies to express thanks and gratitude to the spirit-beings (hereinbefore) for some successful interventions on their behalf. The most important of these was the so called ‘Sun Dance’. It was an elaborate event which took a couple of months to prepare for and organize by the pledger’s family. It was attended by the whole community.

Those present watched the pledger (s) fast and dance for several days. Worse however, was the self-mortification procedure described by BRIT thus:

A ritual expert pinched a centimetre or two of skin on the pledger’s breast or back, pierced through it with a sharp instrument, and inserted a wooden skewer through the piercing. One end of a rope or thong was tied to the skewer, the other end being attached to the centre pole or a buffalo skull. The dancer leaned back until the line was taut and strained until the line tore through his piercings [image].

In the hundred years between 1650 and 1750, the acquisition of horses changed all aspects of Indians’ lives in the Plains. Henceforth, for the Commanche, Cheyenne and Pawnee tribesmen, the horse became their means of transport and their beast of burden. They developed the skills of handling and riding horses rather quickly. It made them more effective hunters (image). Equally they became better raiders and warriors. In other words, the importance of the horse to the Plains Indians cannot be overstated. In evidence the following from BRIT:

Chapter illustration

Horses became so valuable that horse stealing became a major reason for raiding...Stealing a valuable horse that had been picketed at its owner’s lodge was also considered a feat of renown.

Plains Indians also adopted and adapted European fire arms and promptly became adept at using them.

Mississippian culture and the Iroquois Federation

The geographic zone from the Atlantic coastline to the Mississippi west and

from Canada to the Gulf of Mexico south is a fertile, wooded and richly watered region. Such a friendly environment enabled the natives to develop agriculture and settle in villages earlier than others on the North American continent. They subsisted on maize, beans, squashes and others.

Some of them went further. They developed, from around 1000 CE, a wholly urban culture in the basin of the Mississippi River. Appropriately enough, they are called the Mississippians. They became extinct, as a culture by the 1600’s. They are remembered, nonetheless, because of the great cities they built, the best known of which being Cahokia, reputed to have had a population of 20,000 (BRIT gives a figure of 10,000 to 40,000). Their hallmark, however were the earthen mounds, the largest of which measured 300 m x 200 m and 30 m in height (image). One study describes the purpose of these as the sites of temples for the sun god.

Chapter illustration

But the mounds, also, served a macabre purpose; that of being the sites of human sacrifices. LiveScience relates that in one mound in particular, archaeologists discovered skeletons (image) which could only be interpreted:

...as if people were sacrificed gradually in a series of episodes. In one episode, 52 malnourished women ages 18 to 23, along with a woman in her 30s, were sacrificed at the same time. In another episode, it appears that 39 men and women were clubbed to death.

Also located there were the skeletons of two persons in the vicinity of almost 20,000 shell beads . Evidently, they had been persons of prominence in the community.

These discoveries give credence to the reported custom, among Mississippians that when a chief or an important personality died, they took with them to their graves, wives and servants. In other words, those skeletons in the image above could well have been those of men and women killed to keep company with and serve husbands and masters in the afterlife.

Once upon a time, at a location astride eastern Canada and the United States (map), there lived 6 Indian tribes sharing speeches belonging to the same family of languages, called Iroquois. They lived in villages growing “corn, squashes, beans, sunflowers and tobacco”. As reported by GOV, they were also known as “People of the Longhouse” on account of their dwellings being:

...10-30 metre-long ‘longhouses’ made of wood and covered with bark that each housed three to five families [image].

But in spite all that commonness, they did not see eye to eye with one another and fought among themselves. Until, that is, a wise man of standing from one of the tribes, the Mohawk, persuaded five of the tribal chiefs that joining forces would be to the advantage of all. Thus, was born the Iroquois league or Federation of tribes between 1570 and 1600. The sixth tribe was admitted, on equal terms with the rest, in the 1700’s.

How did the federation organize its affairs? Through a council of 50 then 60 members representing all constituent tribes. Representatives were elected by their respective womenfolk. This may appear surprising until it is realized that, and individual’s lineage followed that of his/her mother’s.

SDOC-1 marvels at the parallels between the governance provisions of the Iroquois Federation and that of the emerging United States; particularly in the matter of federalism that is the working relationship between constituent tribes/states and the council/ federal government. It ascertains that the Founding Fathers of the new republic were aware of the laws and constitution of the Indian federation. In support, it quotes the statement of one of them, Benjamin Franklin in this respect:

It would be a very strange thing if six nations of ignorant savages should be capable of forming a scheme for such a union, and be able to execute it in such a manner, as that it has subsisted for ages, and appears indissolvable; and yet that a like union should be impracticable for ten or a dozen English colonies, to whom it is more necessary and must be more advantageous.

Hardy people of the north

One category of Amerindians, namely the Inuit and Aleut Eskimos in the Canadian Arctic and Alaska, have outlived, unchanged, by far all other indigenous people of the Americas. According to BRIT there are today 85,000 Inuit and Aleut Eskimos in North America(). They did so, no doubt, because they have remained free from intruders, colonizers etc., except, perhaps in Alaska following its purchase by the USA in 1867().

Millennia ago, the Eskimos marvelously adapted to the inhospitable environments of the frozen world. They built their houses from ice, made “aerodynamic dogsleds”, kayaks, harpoons and bows and arrows and more. They sustained themselves on the local fauna and flora, and did not engage in trade with outsiders. Eskimos harpooned seals either from kayaks or through holes in the ice. On land they hunted caribous (image). They practically wasted nothing of their preys. According to GOV:

Chapter illustration

...for example, seals provided food for humans and dogs, oil to heat homes and cook food, and hides which could be made into boots, summer clothing, tents, harpoon lines and dog harnesses....caribou... providing meat, hides and sinew for clothing, and antler for tools.

Chapter illustration

The map shows early occupation of North America by England, France and Spain.

As we have already seen the Spaniards had an early contact with the Pueblo Indians and others in the south west (see hereinbefore).

The first Frenchmen on the continent were traders and trappers, with no intention of settling down. It was, therefore, in their interest and security, to be amicable with the locals. So much so, that some of them married indigenous women, hence being de facto adopted and protected by their tribes.

Not so, as far as the English were concerned. Mixed marriages were not allowed. Unlike the French they had come as settlers /colonizers. In other words as land grabbers. This, did not go well with the locals. As stated by HWN:

The English settlers arrive with the firm intention of owning land...... Land, in the Indian view, is a communal space, impossible to own.... The question of land leads eventually to appalling conflicts, with the Indians the inevitable losers.

But for the time being, according to BRIT:

Many of the Indian tribes are friendly and welcoming by nature, but they also have a passionate desire for the material goods....[they] offer leather goods, coral and a mouth-watering profusion of meat, fish, fruit and vegetables [for which they receive in return] ... metal implements... eventually, horses and guns....

1-Vikings in North America

Five hundred years before Columbus, the Vikings whose roots were in far off Norway, arrived, around 1000 CE, on the eastern shores of Canada. Having departed from their colony in Greenland, they sailed close to the coastlines for safety. This way they travelled some 3200 kms, instead of ‘as the bird flies distance of 1600 kms. They attempted to establish a permanent settlement there but could not get on well with the locals who outnumbered them by a large margin. A decade, hence, they had no choice but to pack up and go.

2-Watercolors of John White.

Chapter illustration

The watercolors above are the work of English colonist/artist John White (1539-1593). They are considered the truest representation of East Coast Amerindians at the time of contact with them. See also the image on the title page.

3-Fighting among Amerindians

There are passages in GOV describing unusual customs which precede actual armed engagement. I have selected two of these.

The first concern preparation for combat:

A great feast involving the entire community, at which time those who wanted to join the expedition danced and sang their ‘war song’.... They then prepared themselves spiritually and physically for the warpath, in some instances painting their faces red... to keep the enemy from detecting any appearance of pallor or fear on their faces. Sometimes, warriors would array themselves with other accoutrements to distinguish themselves from each other. For example, Iroquois chiefs wore elaborate headdresses as a sign of rank and the warriors decorated their shields and weapons with heraldic and spiritual symbols.

The second is a report by a European eyewitness on the understanding between the two sides on the eve of battle:

...when the two groups met on the shores of Lake Champlain, they negotiated the time at which the battle would take place. They decided to wait until day to recognize each other and as soon as the sun rose they would wage battle. The entire night was spent in dancing and singing... with the two camps shouting an infinite number of insults and threats at each other. When the sun rose, the armies, each made up of more than 200 warriors, faced each other in close ranks and approached calmly and slowly, preparing to join combat.

Eight Asian Countries

EIGHT ASIAN COUNTRIES BHUTAN, BRUNEI, LAOS, MALAYSIA, MONGOLIA, NEPAL, SINGAPORE, SRI LANKA

From BBC’s : ‘Brunei, country profile’ “Sultan Hassanal Bolkiah and Queen Saleha wave from the royal chariot during a procession to mark his golden jubilee in 2017” .

The Author OCTOBER, 2025.

EIGHT ASIAN COUNTRIES

INTRODUCTION

JUST a few words to introduce the theme of this narrative. It consists of brief accounts describing eight sovereign nations in central, south and southeast Asia. By name, they are Bhutan, Brunei, Laos, Malaysia, Mongolia, Nepal, Singapore and Sri Lanka.

In order to limit the length of the text for each country, I have limited myself to an introduction, followed by a very brief history and the status of welfare, healthcare and education of the respective citizenry and a few particularities when they seemed appropriate and interesting. I have, therefore, left out mentions of other characteristics such as climate, agriculture and industry and scores of others, again for the sake of brevity.

As one reads through the texts, one notices the recurrence of three acronyms, the GINI, HDI and CPI indices. What do they mean? One definition of each is: -*“The Gini index is a statistical measure of dispersion used to represent income or wealth inequality within a population”. -*“HDI, or Human Development Index, is a… measure …. to assess a country's average achievements in…. a long and healthy life, access to knowledge, and a decent standard of living”. -*“CPI, or The Corruption Perceptions Index is an index that scores and ranks countries by their perceived levels of public sector… CPI generally defines corruption as an abuse of entrusted power for private gain…. Index has been ranked on a scale from 100 (very clean) to 0 (highly corrupt”.

For information on the contents of this narrative, I have relied on three main sources: The BBC, Encyclopaedia Britannica and Wikipedia. I have, also, frequently consulted Google’s AI Overview.

BHUTAN

AS the map shows, Bhutan is a small patch of land compared to its two neighbours, China and India, with no access to the sea. Bhutan’s northern lands are parts of the majestic Himalaya mountains and its southern part consists of thick forests. The name Bhutan means ‘Land of the Thunder Dragon’-(see image of flag above).Its full name is the Kingdom of Bhutan.

Country facts: -Area: 38,394 sq kms. -Population: 784,000. -Capital: Thimphu. -Ethnic groups: Several. -Official language: Dzongkha. -Religions: 74% Buddhism, 25% Hinduism, 1% Christianity. -World Bank income group: Lower middle income. -Gini: Low inequality. -HDI: Medium. -CPI: 72. Close to corruption-free countries.

The Constitution of Bhutan prioritises ‘Gross National Happiness’ over the more usual ‘Gross National Product’. It translates, according to AI Overview into “sustainable development, environmental protection, cultural preservation, and good governance”

In the Kingdom of Bhutan of the 21st century “Women and men …enjoy an essentially equal legal status. Bhutan’s inheritance laws are favourable to women, and most Bhutanese households are managed by women”, according to Britannica.

The law prohibits the sale of tobacco, the use of plastic bags and requires citizens, of both genders, to wear national clothes in public and promotes adherence to local customs.

Bhutan is home to ‘Gangkhar Puensum’, which at 7,570 metres altitude is the highest unclimbed mountain. It is off limit to mountaineers out of “respect for local spiritual beliefs”.

It is, also, heavily forested, and likely to remain so, since the law mandates that no less than 60% of the country’s area must remain so at all times. As a result, Bhutan is probably the only country in the world with a net positive carbon balance. This means that its greenery absorbs, through photosynthesis, more carbon dioxide from the atmosphere than is released by its cars, factories and other greenhouse gas emitters.

BUDDHISM, which originated in India, made its appearance in Bhutan in the 7th century CE and, ultimately, achieved predominance. Several Buddhist fiefs took form, enduring to the the 16th century CE. In 1630’s they were unified, by a Tibetan lama-(Buddhist priest)- ,into the Kingdom of Bhutan.

The lama’s name was Ngawang Namgyal-(1594-1651). He appointed himself ruler of the new kingdom and took the title ‘Zhabdrung’ meaning according to AI Overview, as the one “at whose feet one submits” for being “the spiritual and political unifier of Bhutan”. Those who followed him took the same title. Theirs was a Buddhist theocratic regime.

In 1907, a new ruling dynasty of ‘Dragon Kings’ gained access to the throne of the kingdom. The present monarch is its fifth descendant.

Until the mid-20th century, Bhutan was an isolated autocracy. It was closed to outsiders. All decisions and all laws issued from the monarch and no one else. Bhutanese citizens had no access to education. They suffered a variety of ailments on account of lack of public hygiene and unsanitary living conditions. Consequently, life expectancy among them was low and infant mortality high.

Still, by the 1950’s matters began to change. Progressively, the kings’ grip loosened. Formation of political parties was allowed and elections of people’s representatives were held. The transformation was completed with th enactment of a constitution in 2008.

In conformity with it, Bhutan is, currently a constitutional monarchy with a figurehead king. Executive powers are in the hands of a prime minister and his cabinet. Legislative power is held by assemblies of deputies elected from acknowledged political parties.

MOREOVER, public education is provided in primary and secondary schools. As for healthcare it is available at more than 300 and 200 government funded hospitals and clinics respectively.

BRUNEI

ITS official name is ‘State of Brunei Darussalam’, a small independent sultanate sharing the island of Borneo, in Southeast Asia, with Indonesia and Malaysia. It is heavily forested with very little arable land for agriculture. Still, for the last few decades Brunei has become rich from the sale of oil and gas.

From 1967, Brunei has been ruled by sultan ‘Hassanal Bolkiah Muiz'zaddin Wad'daulah’-(DOB: 1946)-, scion of a 600-year old dynasty. The bounty from the sale of hydrocarbon has made him a wealthy man. Still, he has not neglected to lavishly pamper his 460,000 or so citizens. In the process he has turned them into loyal subjects.

Country facts: -Area: 5,765 sq. kms. -Population:466,000. -Capital: Bandar Seri Begawan. -Official language: Malay. -Religions:82.1% Sunni Islam; 6.7 % Christianity; 6.3%,Buddhism; 4.9% diverse. -World Bank income group: High income country. -HDI: Very high.

NOT much is know about Brunei in prehistoric times. But according to historians, the inhabitants of the island of Borneo were active participants in the ‘Maritime Jade Road’. This trade in the precious stone, between Southeast and East Asia, lasted for a period of 3,000 years-(between 2000 BCE and 1000 CE).

No doubt, carried by traders, Islam disembarked on Borneo in 1400CE and subsequently expanded. When the Portuguese navigator Ferdinand Magellan visited Brunei in 1521, he found, according to Britannica, that “the fifth sultan, the great Bolkiah, controlled practically the whole of Borneo”.

But the hegemony of the sultans could not last. As time went by, large parcels of land were ceded to the British, in repayment for services rendered. Ultimately Brunei shrank to its present size. Finally in 1888 it became a British protectorate.

In 1929 came the discovery of oil and gas, in 1967 Hassanal Bolkiah was placed on the throne. Independence was granted in 1984.

Since then, the sultan has assumed full control on the country. He is head of state, prime minister and minister of defence and finance. Other ministers and important civil servants are members of his family.

In 1991 Hassanal Bolkiah introduced ‘Malay Islamic Monarchy’ as the doctrine of the sultanate. As explained by Wikipedia, it is “a blend of Malay language, culture, and Malay customs, the teaching of Islamic laws and values and the monarchy system which must be esteemed and practiced by all”.

He followed up in 2014 by decreeing that, effective 2019, the laws of the land shall accord with Islamic Shari’a, including stoning for adultery and the rest.

AS alluded to hereinbefore, oil wealth has enabled Brunei to provide its people with a cradle to grave welfare care. It signifies free compulsory primary and secondary schooling; free higher education when applicable, and free health and dental care for all.

LAOS

LAOS, ‘Land of a Million Elephants’ is officially known as ‘the Lao People's Democratic Republic’. As the map shows, Laos is a landlocked country in Southeast Asia, sharing borders with China, Vietnam, Thaiand, Cambodia and Myanmar. It is one of only five remaining Communist countries on the Globe.

The population of Laos belong to no less than 50 ethnicities. Officially, they have been grouped into four ethnic families on the basis of languages spoken, cultural backgrounds and living conditions. But. all this notwithstanding, 80% are cultivators, mostly growing rice.

Country facts: -Area: 236,800 sq km. -Population: 7,950,000. -Capital: Vientiane. -Ethnic groups: As afore mentioned. -Official language: Lao. -Religions: 66.0% Buddhism. 30.7% Tai-(ancestor worship etc.). 1.5% Christianity. -World Bank income group: Lower middle income country. -Gini: Medium inequality. -HDI: Medium. -CPI: 33. Part of corrupt countries.

ARCHAEOLOGISTS have determined that agricultural communities existed in the region between 4000 to 3000 BCE. A first Lao kingdom was established in 1353 CE. In 1707 it split into three utill the French arrived in 1893, as part of their colonisation of Indochina. They reunified the country and ruled it till 1953, when it was granted its independence once again as a monarchy.

But ‘the Pathet Lao’, Laos’s Communist party, had other plans. In 1959 it rose against the monarchy and fought it in a civil war which ended in its victory in 1975, Thenceforth Laos became ‘Lao People's Democratic Republic’-(LPDR).

The ‘Pathet Lao’ has held the reins of power since then. It is the only political party allowed. The president and government ministers are selected for 5-year terms from high ranking party members.

Laos suffered the heaviest air bombardment in history. According to AI Overview “Between 1964 and 1973 [during the war in Vietnam], the US dropped more than two million tons of ordnance on Laos…killed an estimated 200,000 civilians, one-tenth of the country's population at the time”.

The fall of its mentor, the Soviet Union, in the 1990’s made the Pathet Lao rethink its policies. It initiated reforms and opened up to the world. Still, according to an assessment of the Unite Nations, it remains an underdeveloped country

PRIOR to colonisation by France, Buddhist temples were the only premises for male only pupils to learn reading an writing along with religion and related customs. European style education was introduced by the French. Thenceforth, in the words of Britannica “the number of elementary school students reached hundreds of thousands”.

One of the priorities in matters of education, for the government ,was the eradication of illiteracy among Lao citizens. Good results have been achieved since the 1980’s. Still the shortage of adequate facilities in rural areas constitutes an impediment to progress. Another priority was to quickly establish primary schooling throughout the country.

A third priority for the regime was that, in addition to learning the usual scholastic topics, young Lao minds should be filled with Communist ideology, its achievements and its future promises. But, with the demise of the Soviet Union in the late 1990’s, the school curricula were revised.

Higher education in Laos is provided by five state universities.

WHEN the ‘Pathet Lao’ took over the country in 1975, Lao people were falling ill and at times dying from “Communicable diseases (e.g., influenza), cardiovascular diseases, injuries, accidents, violence, cancers, and respiratory diseases…” in the words of Britannica. In the villages the sick were treated with age old practices and herbal medicine. Worst many of the country’s qualified physicians emigrated to escape the new regime.

Currently, however, the government provides healthcare. It is making efforts to built medical centres and train personnel. This notwithstanding, there is still a long way to go in this respect.

MALAYSIA

MODERN Malaysia is a federation of thirteen states. As shown on the map above, it consists ot two parts. The first is at the southern extremity of the Indochinese Peninsula-(West Malaysia), the other-(East Malaysia)- is located on the island of Borneo, bordering Brunei on three sides. The two parts are separated by by the South China Sea.

As indicated below, Malaysia is a multi-ethnic and multi-religion country. Muslim Malays form he largest cultural group.

Country facts: -Area: 330,803 sq km. -Population: 34.6 million -Capital: Kuala Lumpur -Ethnic groups: 57.3% Malay. 22.9% Chinese. 6.6% Indians. 13.2% other indigenous groups. -Official language: Malay. There are also 111 indigenous languages. -Religions: 63.5% Sunni Islam. 18.7% Buddhism. 9.1% Christianity. 6.1% Hinduism. -World Bank income group: Upper middle income country -Gini: Medium. -HDI: Very high. -CPI: 50. At the limit of corrupt-free countries.

PENINSULAR West Malaysia has been inhabited for the last 6,000 years. In the 1st century CE Chinese a Indian traders arrived and settled. A century later a Hindu- Buddhist kingdom arose in the northern part of the peninsula. It lasted till the 15th century-(or about 1,300 years).

Arab and Indian traders brought Sunni Islam to West Malaysia in the 13th century. It subsequently spread through trade and the conversion of rulers. By the 15th century it was solidly established as the religion of the Malay people.

In early 16th century, Europeans showed up. First, the Portuguese occupied Malacca, a thriving trading port in the southwest of the Peninsula, in 1511. The Dutch threw them out in 1641. The British, already in India in the form of the ‘East India Company’ set foot in Malaysia in 1786. Thirty eight years later they established themselves in Malacca by arrangement with the Dutch. Finally in 1842, they swallowed up the entire entity.

As a consequence of World War 2-(1939-1945)-, the Japanese took Malaysia, as part of their occupation of a large part of southeast Asia. In the wake the capitulation of Japan in 1945, the British resumed their presence there. In 1948, they brought the states together in the what was called ‘Federation of Malaya’.

That entity was granted its independence in 1957. In 1963, following the joining of Singapore, hitherto a separate polity, thegeoup;s name was changed to ‘Federation of Malaysia’. However, that union did not last long. In 1965, the Malaysian Parliament voted to expel Singapore, for politico-economic incompatibilities. Singapore, thenceforth, became a sovereign nation as we shall describe hereinafter.

Presently, Malaysia is a constitutional monarchy, headed by a nominal sultan. He is elected, for a 5-year term from and by his peers, the sultans of the other states.Real executive power is in the hands of a prime minister and his cabinet. They are answerable to a parliament of elected representatives.

In addition to the ‘secular’ legal system, applicable to all Malaysians, Muslim among them must, in addition, abide by Islamic jurisprudence in matters relating to “marriage, inheritance, divorce, apostasy, religious conversion, custody, and limited Islamic criminal law”, according to Wikipedia.

ACCORDING to Britannica, government provided healthcare, from the second half of the 20th century, has dramatically improved longevity, lessened infant and child mortality and decreased the incidence of infectious diseases among Malaysian populations.

It is the responsibility of the government of each of the 13 states to cater for the health of its citizens. Not surprisingly, the quality of the service is not equally good among them. Still, generally, medical facilities and personnel are better in urban than in rural environments.

Additionally, welfare programmes, jointly run by the government and private concerns provide assistance “for senior citizens, for the economically disadvantaged, and for people with disabilities” as reported by Britannica.

IN Malaysia, primary schooling is compulsory. But the government finances both primary and secondary education. As for public post-secondary education it is heavily subsidised to enable young Malaysians to pursue courses at any of the many of the public universities and institutions.

MONGOLIA

MONGOLIA is a huge country in central Asia between Russia in the North and China in the south. Its land area is “roughly equivalent to that of the countries of western and central Europe” according to Britannica. To the contrary, its comparatively small population makes it one of the most sparsely inhabited nations on Earth.

With grazing land making up about 75% of its area, it is no wonder M0ngolia , as of the end of 2023, owned a huge herd of livestock amounting to 64.7 million heads consisting of sheep, goats, horses, camels an cattle. Caring for them engages at least 30% of the country’s population. They are the nomadic pastoralists who, of necessity, live in collapsible, transportable homes, called ‘yurts’ meaning circular tents made of felt or skin.

An important part of national cultural life is the millennia old ‘horse culture’, encapsulated in the saying ‘a Mongol without a horse is like a bird without wings’. Historically, the horse transported herders to rich pastures. It supplied milk, meat and leather. And perhaps, above all, as one with its agile rider/warrior, a formidable fighting machine.

Buddhism arrived in Mongolia, from Tibet, in the 16th century. Four centuries later more than 30% of Mongols were Buddhist monks.

Country facts: -* Area:1,564,116 sq.km, -*Population: 3,504,741. -*Capital: Ulaanbaatar. -*Ethnic groups: 95.6% Mongols, 3.8% Kazakhs, 0.6% others. -*Official language: Mongolian. -*Religions: 51.7% Buddhism, 40.6% no religion, 3.2% Islam, 2.5% Shamanism, 1.3% Christianity 0.7% other. -*World Bank income group: Upper middle income -*Gini: Medium inequality. -*HDI: High. -*CPI: 33. In the rank of corrupt countries.

Mongolia has the distinction o f being the home of a “high concentration of UNESCO World Heritage sites”, according to AI Overview.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL searches have located caves with coloured paintings dating back some 20,000 years. They have also shown evidence of horse riding around 5,ooo years ago.

Mongolia has historically been the home of nomadic tribes each headed by a Khan-(chief or leader). From them arose Attila the Hun-(died in 453 CE), who with his mounted warriors played havoc with the Roman Empire.

But the most famous son of Mongolia is, uncontestably, Genghis Khan-(1162-1227). Having united the tribes, he led them on a conquering feat unequalled in history. With their superb riding skills and adeptness at accurately shooting arrows while mounting their horses at full gallop, Mongol warriors had no match. More. Their reputation for cruelty preceded them and opened the gates of many a town without resistance. Ultimately, Genghis Khan and his progeny, after him, carved out an empire which included parts of China, central Asia, the Middle East and Russia.

With the passage of time, Mongol unity unravelled. So much so that the Chinese took over Mongolia, in 1691. In turn, it too weakened, enabling Mongols to declare their independence in 1911.

In 1924, Mongolia embraced the model of its northern neighbour, the Soviet Union and renamed itself ‘The Mongolian People’s Republic’. Still, the upheavals shaking the Soviet Union in the 80’s and 90’s of the 20th century caused many Mongols to rethink their political system.

Presently Mongolia is a multi-party political system with an elected president, head of state, a prime minister appointed by and answerable to the body of elected representatives.

UNTIL adoption of the Soviet m0del, in the early 1920’s, schooling was limited to boys who attended monasteries to learn reading and writing . But under Soviet guidance the Mongol authorities began to take education seriously and pay for it. One priority was the eradication of illiteracy. Another was the creation of schools.

Currently, twelve years of primary and secondary schooling, from the age of 6, is compulsory. There are now hundreds of schools, including boarding ones for the children of rural people in the far-flung corners of Mongolia. Post secondary education is available at dozens of universities, and vocational schools etc.

SIMILALY, before the tutelage of the Soviets, there was no healthcare to speak of. According to Britannica “Public and personal hygiene were extremely poor, diseases such as tuberculosis and syphilis were widespread”. The only medical assistance available was provided by Buddhist lamas who concocted remedies from local plants and offered prayers.

But the Soviets sent trained doctors, helped build hospitals, clinics and maternities where citizens were cared for free of charge. Since then, improvements have been made to all aspects of healthcare.

Mongolia, too, has comprehensive social safety nets. For example, parents are financially helped with child care and old and incapacitated people are paid pensions and subsidies etc.

NEPAL

BY ITS contemporary name, the ‘Federal Democratic Republic of Nepal’ is a relatively small country between two mega states , India and China-(Tibet is part of China). As the map makes clear it has no access to any sea. Geographically, it is part of the Indian subcontinent. More than three quarters of its area, is home to eight of the highest peaks of the Himalaya, including Mount Everest, which at 8,850 metres altitude, is the world tallest.

The people of Nepal hail from no less than 125 ethnicities speaking as many distinct languages and practicing their individual customs. The reason is that they are the descendants of migrants from India, China, Tibet and Burma-(today’s Myanmar). More than three quarters of Nepalis work the land. They are at the mercy of the seasonal monsoon rains. According to Britannica “…Nepal is one of the least developed nations of the world”. As for the BBC, “Nepal is “one of the world's poorer countries”. Country facts: -*Area: 147,516 sq.km. -*Population: 31,122,387. -*Capital: Kathmandu -*Official language: Nepali. -*Ethnic groups: Too many to list. See above. -*Religions: 81.19% Hinduism, 8.21% Buddhism, 5.09% Islam, 1.76% Christianity, 3.75% others. -*World Bank income group: Lower middle income. -*Gini: Medium inequality. -*CPI:34. Ranks with corrupt countries. -*HDI: See above.

Incidentally, Nepal is the country of birth of the Buddha. Nowadays, Buddhism has about 500 million adherents.

HOMO sapiens arrived on the Indian subcontinent some 55,000 ago. By about 8,500 years ago they had began to grow their food, raise domestic animals and settle in communities.

Hindu Aryans migrated to northern India, from today’s Kazakhstan, roundabout 1500 BCE. Subsequently their faith spread throughout the subcontinent. Nepal, at that time, was composed of a number of kingdoms and principalities. In 1768, they were united into one realm by the ruler of one such kingdoms.

For more than a century-( 1846-1950), Nepal was ruled by a family whose members succeeded one another as the country chief ministers. They held sway over and ignored the sitting monarch. This state of affairs ended in 1950, when the king re-establish his authority.

A period of unrest ensued, and in 2008 the monarchy was abolished and the country renamed the ‘Federal Democratic Republic of Nepal ’

Currently, Nepal, in the words of its constitution has “multi-ethnic, multi-lingual, multi-religious, multi-cultural characteristics… being….united by a bond of allegiance to the national independence, territorial integrity, national interest, and prosperity of Nepal”. It is headed by a president whose functions are ceremonial. Real executive power is in the hands of a prime minister and his group of ministers, overseen by an assembly of people’s representatives.

THE Nepali government is making efforts in the field of healthcare. It is modernising and building medical facilities and subsidising treatment costs. It has also stressed the importance of cleanliness and good hygiene. In this context, it has launched the ‘one household-one toilet’ scheme through which it subsidised families to build their own private toilets and forego communal ones. According to Wikipedia “the ambitious programme has seen toilet prevalence rate reach 99% in 2019, from just 6% in 1990”

And, yet, according to Britannica more is needed. It states that Nepalis continue to suffer from “Malaria, tuberculosis, cholera, and typhoid”. It adds that many resort to traditional Hindu ‘ayurvedic medicine’. As explained by AI Overview “It uses a range of treatments like herbal medicine, diet, exercise, meditation, and yoga to promote wellness and can be used to treat a variety of ailments”.

THE last few decades have seen great strides in schooling and education. Sources report that while in the early 1950’s there were only 10,000 pupils attending merely 300 schools. By 2017 these figures had risen to about 7 million and 35,600 respectively.

Nepali children and teen-agers are required to attend pre-primary schooling, followed by primary then secondary schooling, all paid for by the government. Children are provided with school meals to improve their nutrition.

There are 11 accredited universities and a few other institutions. But there are stumbling blocks in the way of quality education. For the time being “Tens of thousands of Nepali students leave the country every year in search of better education”, concludes Wikipedia.

SINGAPORE

THE Republic of Singapore consists of one main island and 63 islets at the southern tip of the Malaysian Peninsula. Only about half of its population are citizens. Expatriate residents, students and foreign workers constitute the other half. Singapore recognizes ten religions and sects. It is considered to be the country with the widest spiritual variation. No religion is predominant.

Country facts: -*Area:736.3 sq km. -*Population: 6,040,000. -*Capital: Singapore. -*Official languages: English-(“used in business, government, law and education”), Malay, Mandarin and Tamil. -*Ethnic groups: 74.3% Chinese, 13.5% Malay, 9.0% Indian, 3.2% other. -*Religions: 31.1% Buddhism, 18.9% Christianity, 15.6% Islam, 8.8% Tao, 5.0% Hindu and 20.6 other. -World Bank income group: High income country. -Gini: Medium inequality. -HDI: Very high. -CPI:84. As good as corruption-free.

SINGAPORE was long settled by fishermen and pirates. For nearly 600 years, between the 7th and 13th centuries it was part of a Sumatran-(Indonesian)-kingdom. According to Spanish/Portuguese missionary -(and co-founder of the order of the Jesuits)-, Francis Xavier-( 1506-1552)- and well known Portuguese historian João de Barros-(1496-1570), Singapore in the the 1500’s was a vibrant and busy sea port.

Then, in 1819, the British, in the shape of the ‘East India Company’, long established in India, persuaded the ruler of the city state to authorize the Company to establish a commercial presence in Singapore. Five years later, in 1824, Singapore became a British colony.

Like the rest of southeast Asia, Singapore was occupied by Japan during the second Word War from 1942 to 1945. In the aftermath of the defeat of the Japanese the British returned. In 1959 they granted the island city its independence.

As stated, hereinbefore, Singapore in 1963, joined the Federation of Malaya, from which it was expelled in 1965. Singapore became a sovereign city state.

Presently, Singapore is a parliamentary republic with an elected president as head of state, prime minister from the largest political party, a council of ministers, and a parliament of people representatives.

SINGAPORE has the lowest infant mortality and its citizens can expect

long lives thanks to the “high standards of hygiene and access to a superb healthcare system” in the words of Britannica.

Public/private compulsory insurance schemes, guarantee that healthcare-(including dentistry)- is provided to the quasi-totality of citizens. The providers are hospitals and clinics manned by qualified medical professionals.

In addition, the government disburses subsidies to the disabled, low income families and the unemployed. It helps its citizens with house buying and financially encourages childbirth.

WHILE only the primary stage of education is compulsory, the government financially supports all levels of learning up to and including that offered by vocational schools, polytechnics and universities. As regards the latter, Singapore is home to six public universities, three of which rank among the top 20 such institutions worldwide.

SRI LANKA

THE ‘Democratic Socialist Republic of Sri Lanka’, previously known as Ceylon is an island nation off the coast of India. Historically, the Arab called it ‘Serendib’. Sri Laka is densely populated, most ot its people are poor, relying on agriculture

Country facts: -*Total area: 67,240 sq km. -*Population: 21,763,000. -* Capital: Colombo. -*Official languages: Sinhala and Tamil. -*Ethnic groups: 75% Sinhalese, 15% Tamils, 9.5% others. -*Religions: 70% Buddhism, 13% Hinduism, 10% Islam, 7% Christianity. -*World Bank income group: Lower middle income. -*GINI: Medium inequality. -*HDI: See hereinafter. -*CPI: 32. In the group of corrupt countries.

ARCHAEOLOGISTS and other professionals tell us that the island was settled as far back as 125,0000 years ago. The ancestors of today’s Sinhalese migrated from nearby India around 2,600 years ago. Buddhism followed three centuries later. As it gained adherence on the island, small Buddhist kingdoms formed and flourished.

As for the ancestors of today’s Hindu Tamils, they began arriving, again from India, around the 13th century and founded their own kingdom in northern Sri Lanka. More Tamils were brought in the 19th century as we shall see later.

Europeans took interest in the island from the early 16th century. First, the Portuguese arrived in 1505. They were ejected by the Dutch in 1707. Finally, the British replaced them in 1796.

In a move that later exacerbated social tensions, the colonisers, from 1815, proceeded to import Hindu Tamils from India, to employ as labourers in their tea, coffee and coconut plantations.

Sri Lanka obtained its independence in 1948, In 1956 the new government made Sinhala the official language in the island and took measures to emphasise the predominance of Sinhalese ethnicity and Buddhist religion in the country. In 1972 the name Ceylon was replaced by Sri Lanka meaning ‘Holy Island’.

The bias of the government antagonised the Tamil community. A war between the two parties ensued in 1983. It ended 26 years later, in 2009, when government forces subdued the Tamil rebels.

Since independence, Sri Lanka has been ruled by an elected president who along with his cabinet of ministers form the government which is overseen by a parliament of elected people representatives.

SOCIAL welfare, healthcare and education were three of the aims of the first post-independence governments. They were parts of the ‘Equity’-(meaning fairness and justice)- policy adopted.

THE first two decades after independence showed good result on the social welfare front. But by the 1970’s governments were persuaded to liberalise the economy and reduce spending on social matters. The new measures led to unemployment and general poverty. Worse, it caused a rise in the number of suicides to unprecedented levels, on account of “poverty, destructive pastimes, and inability to cope with stressful situations” as stated by Wikipedia.

FREE healthcare is available to all Sri Lankans. It is provided at a number of hospitals and other medical establishments. Alongside these are popular indigenous practices and remedies. Some of which are even promoted and supported by the state.

ONE source, Wikipedia, states “With a literacy rate of 92.9 .Sri Lanka has one of the most literate populations amongst developing nations. Its youth literacy rate stands at 98.8%...[and]…primary school enrolment rate at over 99%”

Education in Sri Lanka is compulsory for primary and early secondary grades. Further, it is free, for all three usual levels. Wikipedia continues “It is one of the few countries in the world that provide universal free education from primary to tertiary stage”.

There are 17 free public universities in Sri Lanka. Still, they suffer from drawbacks. They cannot accommodate all applications for higher education. And there is a disconnect between the employment market and the degrees awarded. Finally, establishment authorities choose and pick whom they accept not always on the basis of academic achievements.

Part VII: Dark Side of Humanity

Masters and Slaves 1

MASTERS AND SLAVES. AUGUST, 2015.

PART-1 CONCUBINES, EUNUCHS, SERVANTS AND SOLDIERS. OCTOBER, 2016.

Chapter illustration

Final proof reading: 31.10.2016

Jean Jacques Rousseau (1712-1778), the prominent French philosopher of the European Enlightenment Age wrote in his ‘Discourse on the Origin of Inequality’: “The invention of property and the division of labor represent the beginning of moral inequality. Property allows for the domination and exploitation of the poor by the rich”. Accordingly, the advent of inequality among humans can be traced approximately to 12,000 ago. This was the beginning of the gradual transformation of humankind, from roaming hunter-gatherers, perpetually searching for food, to settled communities planting, reaping and domesticating animals for their meat and as beasts of burden.

The formation of communities as villages then towns and finally as nations, inevitably led to the advent of social classes and hierarchy. Henceforth, within the same society, there were the haves and the have nots, the strong and the weak, the rulers and the ruled. And what made wealth, power and authority possible was, first and foremost, ownership of property and…people. In due course, individuals or states bought, kidnapped or captured in raids the weak and the poor. They forced them into servitude, taking away their dignity and liberty.

As women were the weaker and exploited gender in the early patriarchal societies, they were at the beginning, the ones to be held captive. They were customarily raped and enslaved as concubines. The men on the other hand, considered troublesome and difficult to control were just as customarily killed. Only later, when urban centers and large farms evolved, men were taken for enslavement as servants, soldiers and workers. By then, better techniques of control of the male slaves had been invented. Furthermore, it was almost universally accepted that slaves like animals, could be branded(as in Mesopotamia), bought, sold, mortgaged, paid in lieu of debt, presented as gifts or even included in a dowry (1).

Slavery has coexisted with all religions. Neither the great religions of the East (Buddhism, Confucianism, and Hinduism) nor the three monotheistic ones (Judaism, Christianity and Islam) attempted to eradicate it. Possibly because the practice was so old and so prevalent in all societies that it was felt more prudent, to leave it alone for the time being, in the hope, that it would eventually die when circumstances changed and humankind became humane.

In the text which follows, we look at slavery against appropriate historical backgrounds for each of: -Ancient Egypt. -Ancient Babylon. -Ancient Greece. -The Roman world. -The Islamic world. -India. -China. -Japan. -Europe. -Africa.

The thirty dynasties of Ancient Egypt’s pharaohs spanned three millennia (from 3100 to 30 BCE), a continuity in human history matched only by China.

To start with, Egyptian citizens were not immune to slavery. They could enter it by selling themselves to royalty, aristocracy or temple priests, to escape poverty and the harsh conditions of peasant life. They also did so in settlement of debts that could not be honoured otherwise. And they could be enslaved as punishment for not abiding with royal orders or other offences.

Then, as was the practice in Antiquity, slaves were the captured soldiers and citizens of the vanquished polities. It was, for example, reported that pharaoh Thutmos III (1479-1425 BCE) brought back nearly 90,000 souls from his campaign in Canaan (Phoenicia).Slaves could also be given to the pharaohs in lieu of presents and as tributes or taxes by the defeated. And, finally, were the slaves bought from merchants taking part in the booming trade underway then.

Slaves’ duties varied. The luckiest ones were those who served in the palaces of the royal family, in the mansions of the nobility or in temples under priests. Some who showed special skills and abilities became indispensable to their masters and thus rose in rank. In contrast, the least fortunate were those who worked the gold and copper mines where a great many of them died from exhaustion or dehydration in the desert heat.

A slave could be adopted by his master, particularly if the former became the latter’s only companion after the loss of his immediate (nuclear) family in an era when death rates were very high. In any case, the humane treatment of slaves or, better still, their manumission (freeing) was considered a moral duty by Ancient Egyptians. But it has been pointed out, that the mere need for this precept perhaps indicates that they were usually treated badly. Even so, Historians tend to agree that the lot of slaves in Ancient Egypt was, generally, better than that which came to exist under the Greek and Roman civilizations and much later in the Americas (part-2).

Ancient Babylon.

King Hammurabi (1792-1750 BC), ruler of the empire of Babylonia (in present day Iraq) with its capital Babylon, has gone down in history for the ‘Hammurabi Code’, one of the world’s first legal systems. It consisted of 282 laws regulating the everyday life of the empire’s citizens and slaves. Thirty of the laws concerned the latter. The gist of some is given below.

Slaves in Babylonian society consisted mostly of men and women captured during wars. But citizens could be enslaved as punishment for certain offences or parents could sell their children in times of need. Or persons could sell their entire families, in settlement of debts, for a maximum period of three years, following which they were returned to freedom.

Unsurprisingly, it being the norm rather than the exception, the slaves in Babylon were mostly treated harshly. They could be branded and flogged. But some owners saw it in their interest to treat their slaves well to keep them in good health in order for them to work efficiently.

Here are a few selected rules from the Hammurabi Code (edited slightly for clarity):

*If any one takes a male or female slave of a freed man, outside the city gates, he shall be put death.

*If any one receives into his house a runaway male or female slave and does not return it, he shall be put to death.

*If any one fails to meet a claim for debt, and sell himself, his wife, his son, and daughter for money or give them away to forced labor: they shall work for three years in the house of the man who bought them, or the proprietor, and in the fourth year they shall be set free.

*If a physician makes a large incision with the operating knife, and kills a free man patient, or opens a tumor with the operating knife, and cuts out the eye, his hands shall be cut off. If the patient is a slave and he kills him, he shall replace the slave with another slave.

*If a barber, without the knowledge of his master, brands the sign of a slave on a slave not to be sold, the hands of this barber shall be cut off.

*If any one deceives a barber, and have him brand a slave not for sale with the sign of a slave, he shall be put to death, and buried in his house.

The two Ancient Greece(s) we are interested with are the Classical and Hellenistic Greece spanning a total period in history from 500 BCE to its occupation by Rome in 30 BCE.

Let us first contemplate what some of the great Greek philosophers of that period said about slaves and slavery.

Socrates (470-399 BCE) took pains in justifying it along such argument such as: “… it was a necessity in a proper society, for without slaves how would aristocrats learn what must be learned to maintain culture or have time to cultivate political virtue?”.

To Aristotle, (384-322 BCE):“… from the hour of their birth, some men are marked out for subjugation, others for rule” or: “Nature must therefore have intended to make the bodies of free men and of slaves different: slave bodies strong for the services they have to do, [free] men upright and not much use for that kind of work, but instead useful for community life”. Adding insult to injury he sees compatibility between slaves and domesticated animals, contending that the way the former are used is no different from that of the latter, in that both groups provide assistance to their masters for the necessities of life. To him an ox is “the poor man’s slave”.

And yet, Aristotle recognizes that slaves “on occasion” can have the souls of free men. More troubling was his realization that free men “of the most respected family” could also become slaves through capture and sale. But these considerations could not change his conviction that:“ it is clear that certain people who are free and certain people who are slaves by nature, and it is both to their advantage, and just for them to be slaves”.

Immediately, a question arises: since most of the slaves were captives of wars with adjoining polities whose citizens were, presumably, more or less of similar race and ethnicity; worse, if some of these captives were aristocrats and royalties in their countries; how then, could a man of the stature and wisdom of Aristotle (or of Socrates) not see the absurdities in his argument when subduing his and his people’s equals.

Hallelujah, for Diogenes (404-323 BCE). For, unlike the others, he did see the wrongs in reducing any human being to the level of animals. Diogenes realized that the roles could be reversed, when he was captured by pirates and taken to a slave market where he is reported to have said to his captor: “sell me to this man, he needs a master”. To him, although a slave was externally one, internally, his soul remained free.

Given this background, slave labour for the Greeks of that era was a necessity, almost an addiction. So much so, in fact, that this cheap and plentiful manpower disinclined Greeks from seeking improved, labour- saving techniques in agriculture. They concentrated, instead, on the worthy pursuits, in their view, of the artistic and political scenes of the day.

So how many slaves were there in Ancient Greece. To take only the historically famous cities of Athens and Sparta in the 5th century BCE, the former numbered 80,000 to 100,000 slaves out of an entire population of 270,000 people. As to the latter, the helots (state owned slaves) outnumbered their masters by a ratio of nearly 10 to one.

Generally speaking, Greeks did not enslave other Greeks. Slaves mostly came from eastern Anatolia (today’s Turkey), Syria and southern Russia. They were either prisoners of war or captured by pirates and sold through specialized traders. In the case of Sparta, however, the helots were the subjugated citizens of lands it had conquered.

The majority of Athenian slaves served in a domestic capacity, the rest, in the silver mines in which work conditions were appalling. What’s more, all slaves were subjected to extensive control by the military. Nonetheless, some did enjoy considerable independence, while others were manumitted (freed).Sparta’s helots, on the other hand, worked in agriculture. They were assigned by the state to individual land owners who could neither sell nor free them. During times of war they also served as lightly armed troops or as oarsmen in the fleet. The possibility of rebellion by the helots was permanently on the minds of the outnumbered Spartans. So much so that, every year, the newly elected magistrate, on entering office declared war on helots and sanctioned their murder with no consideration to religious tenets. To this end, the “Krypteia” secret police kept a permanent watch on them and any suspect of potential rebellion was killed on the spot with no further ado.

The Roman World.

If anything, Ancient Rome, from 200 BCE onwards, was even more addicted to slavery than Greece; its economy being strongly influenced by it. There was hardly any function or activity in which slaves were not predominant. Depending on their education and background, they filled positions such as secretaries to the emperor, clerks and accountants in the bureaucracy, librarians and even doctors for those at the top of the scale. At the bottom, were those who worked in farms and mines or in construction and maintenance of public works including the cleaning of sewers.

Private households, too, were addicted to servitude. Their slaves did practically everything from attending the master’s bath (3 were needed), to looking after children and of course cleaning, cooking etc. Every roman household had to have at least three slaves. Not owning them, for those of modest means, was a sign of shameful and degrading poverty (2).

Last, but not least, were the gladiators or, slaves who were trained in fighting at a specialized school and whose purpose was to confront fellow gladiators (image) in deadly combat in arenas for the entertainment of free Romans of all walks of life (3).

Chapter illustration

As has already been said of the Greeks, the Romans, too, neglected developing labour saving means in agriculture on account of the absence of incentive to do so in the presence of abundant and cheap manpower.

Where did they all come from? Well, obviously, with such an extended empire there was no shortage of people to enslave. It is reported that Julius Caesar in one of the towns of Gaul (France) captured 53,000 citizens then sold them on the spot to slave traders accompanying his army.

Another and unusual source of supply were tax collectors in some of the provinces(especially Asia Minor, or Turkey today). Not only they collected taxes but extended their activity to that of collecting slavery candidates whom they then sold at the nearest slave market (4).

Slaves in Ancient Rome were looked down upon with contempt. Kindness toward them was equaled to weakness. Moreover, the laws in force gave slave owners complete freedom with their human property. Thus they were whipped, branded with letters identifying them as thieves, liars etc. and even crucified, thrown to wild beasts in an arena or burnt alive in a cloak soaked in pitch.

On the bright side, however, there were the few who realized that slaves were human beings, that they differed in status not in race from free men, and that, therefore, deliberate cruelty toward them is evil. One of them was Emperor Hadrian (76-138 AD) who decreed limitations on the power of owners over slaves’ life and death. And later, Emperor Constantine the Great (272-373 AD) made the killing of slaves a murder.

A freed slave enjoyed all the rights of other citizens except that of holding public office.

All above notwithstanding, a society which looked upon the gory scenes of gladiator fights or of condemned prisoners being mauled by wild beasts, as entertainment, is not one that can be expected to be humane with its slaves.

The Islamic World.

In the Islamic World, from Arabia, eastward to today’s Pakistan and Indonesia and westward to Africa and Spain, the ownership of slaves was very much the norm, with the Ottoman Empire one of its major contenders in this respect.

Accordingly, the trading in slaves thrived from the 700s AD until perhaps the early 20th century. Muslims’ slaves came from the southern Balkans, Mediterranean Europe, Central Asia as well as from Africa (below).

Islamic societies bought slaves for domestic duties and concubinage (5). Because of this, it is thought that there were many more female than male members within them. Among the latter were the eunuchs or castrated slaves used primarily as harem guardians (6).A few, lastly, were used productively, such as in agriculture, but never on a scale, anywhere, near western practices (part-2).

More importantly, were the state’s own slaves or the slave elites. They were used in the civil service and, crucially, in the military such as the Mamluks of Egypt and the Janissaries (image below) of the Ottomans. The advantage of this category of slaves was that its members were outsiders with no allegiance to local tribes or clans. Instead, all their loyalty was to their master, the ruler. He, in return, gave them positions of responsibility and influence in addition to his trust and complete reliance on them. There was, moreover, another reason why rulers preferred the services of slave elites to that of their indigenous aristocracy and nobility. By keeping the latter away from senior positions, the ruler minimized the risks of interference and competition with his own authority. The flip side of the coin, however, was that, in the long run, it was the slave officers and soldiers who turned against their masters instead (7)(8). Sadly though, there is a paradox in all this. For despite their elevated positions, the slave elites remained slaves nevertheless. And as such they were looked upon with contempt by the population at large and existed at the mercy of their masters.

Chapter illustration

Perhaps because Islam calls all people “abeed of Allah” (slaves of God), Islamic societies considered slaves human beings first and property second. This is also implied in an interview in 2001 with Ronald Segal, the white anti- apartheid South African activist and author, who considers that the master slave relationship in Islamic societies “was much more personalized [than that between the plantation owner and his labourer in the West (part-2)] and rather benevolent”. Nevertheless, he adds “being a slave is being a slave” and that this relationship “shouldn’t be romanticized”. Indeed with a slave, being property, after all, it is conceivable that there must have been instances of harshness, cruelty and abuse toward him or her(9).

The Ottoman Empire did not last long enough (it collapsed in 1918) to abolish ownership of servitude labour. By contrast, it banned the trading in humans, in stages, region after region in the Empire, from 1847 to 1890 date of the conference in Brussels to this effect (10).

As to the abolition of the institution itself by other Arab and Islamic states, it was enacted progressively. Saudi Arabia, for example, formally doing it in 1962 and then by virtue of the Cairo’s 1990 ‘Declaration on Human Rights in Islam’. Clause 11 of that declaration states: “Human beings are born free, and no one has the right to enslave, humiliate, oppress or exploit them, and there can be no subjugation but to God the Most High”(11).

Throughout its history, India has known a succession of small independent kingdoms, fighting among themselves, coming together to form small and large polities, then breaking up again. It was invaded in 1500 BCE by tribes from the Asian steppes, calling themselves Aryans who, significantly, brought with them the Caste system (below). In the 16th CE century, India was taken over by the Muslim Mughals of Mongol/ Turkic ancestry who founded a dynasty which ruled Hindu India from 1556 to 1858 when its last emperor is deposed by the British.

Contemporaneously with the Mughals, the Portuguese, French, Dutch and English also take interest in the Indian sub-continent. In particular, the Portuguese turn up in 1514 and set their trading posts in the coastal regions of the Indian Ocean. Later, in 1612, the English East India Company establishes itself to trade and rule in the name of Britain. India becomes a British possession on 1858 and remains as such until Indian independence in 1947.

Documentary evidence of slavery in ancient India indicates that when the Aryans invaded, they enslaved the local people and reduced them to the status of “dasa” (slave in Hindu texts). Moreover, as with other early civilizations, a person could become a “dasa” in repayment of a debt, as an escape from poverty or for committing certain crimes.

Yet, when the Greek ethnographer and ambassador Megasthenes travelled to India in the 4th century BCE, he reported back to his compatriots that there were no slaves in India. The reason for this oversight is probably due to the generally milder character of slavery in the India of that era compared to what he was accustomed to at home in Greece, or in Rome for that matter. For, in India there were in place rules and regulations about the treatment of slaves. Working mostly as servants in households, they were considered part of the family. Moreover, a master could not quarrel with his slave or with any member of his family; if a slave deserved punishment for a bad deed, the master could beat him only on the back and not on the head; neither could he take his life.

But the most frequently cited set of rules, in the different references consulted, is the Arthasastra, a handbook for running an empire, written in the 4th century BCE by an Indian statesman and philosopher. One of its chapters, which deals with the institution of slavery, is very liberal about the rights of slaves. It forbids the sale, by the owner, of their children unless absolutely necessary. If a female slave is raped by her master, he must be punished and bound to set her free with financial compensation, along with any child that may have ensued. Moreover, it prohibits employing a slave to carry the dead or to sweep excrement, urine or the leavings of food. It also forbids keeping a slave naked or hurting or abusing him. Nonetheless, these rules and regulations notwithstanding, no one can deny the misery of life in servitude and that undoubtedly masters must have disregarded them. And as it turned out, in any case, the attitude towards slaves hardened from the beginning of the 4th century CE. It became more in line with that elsewhere and at least as bad as that towards the Untouchables (below).

With the arrival of Muslim rule, both the acquisition/ownership of and trading in slaves reach new higher levels of inhumanity. On one occasion, for example, one Mughal regional governor, in the process of subduing local rebels, beheaded all males an enslaved more than 200,000 females and children. At other times peasants were forced to sell their women and children, in payment of their taxes. As stated by history professor Andre Wink: “Islamic military [conquests] in north and northwest India led to widespread seizure and slavery of non-Muslims and an increased supply of Indian slaves for export to markets in Central Asia… including both children and women”.

But, undoubtedly, for our purpose, the most interesting legacy of the Mughals, is “ Fatawa-e-Alamgiri”, a set of laws sponsored by the 6th Mughal emperor in the late 17th century and which in the context of slavery decrees as follows:

*“The right of Muslims to purchase and own slaves. *A Muslim man's right to have sex with a captive slave girl he owns or a slave girl owned by another Muslim (with master's consent) without marrying her. *A Muslim master's right to acknowledge or decline recognition children born to slave girls he had sex with - a recognition that affected whether the slave's children would have any inheritance, the inability of infidels (non-Muslims) to inherit. *No inheritance rights for slaves. *The testimony of all slaves was inadmissible in a court of law. *Slaves require permission of the master before they can marry. *An unmarried Muslim may marry a slave girl he owns but a Muslim married to a Muslim woman may not marry a slave girl. *Conditions under which the slaves may be emancipated partially or fully”.

The attitude of Europeans in the Indian subcontinent, vis-à-vis slavery was no more civilized or enlightened than that of the Mughal rulers. Indeed, as the German traveler and writer Albert. D. Mandeslo (1616-1644) noted: “Most of the Portuguese have many slaves of both sexes, whom they employ not only on and about their persons, but also upon the business they are capable of, for what they get comes with the master”.

Further, Dr Andrea Major, Associate Professor in British Colonial History, University of Leeds notes: “In fact, eighteenth century Europeans, including some Britons, were involved in buying, selling and exporting Indian slaves, transferring them around the subcontinent or to European slave colonies across the globe. Moreover, many eighteenth century European households in India included domestic slaves, with the owners' right of property over them being upheld in law”.

Slavery was eventually abolished by Britain by the mid-19th century, to be replaced, in the books, by indentured labour described by scholars as “slavery by contract”. Nevertheless, again in the words of Dr Major: “When Britain abolished slavery in its Empire, through Slavery Abolition Act 1833, it included a clause that allowed slavery inside India and enslavement of Indians for colonial markets operated by the East India Company”. Why, she asks: “at the height of both the British abolitionist movement and missionary campaigns for the reform of social and religious practices in India, the existence of slavery in India was so often either ignored, denied or excused”. It would, indeed, be enlightening to learn how those benefitting of the status quo in the sub-continent “utilised and rationalised the existence of slavery in India and how this was reconciled with the economic, political and moral imperatives of an empire whose focus was increasingly shifting to the East”. All this, we must saliently add, happening in the empire whose Parliament is the mother of democracy and, necessarily, of the rights of the individual.

No discussion of slavery in India is complete without veering a little toward that particularly Hindu Caste system and the notion of untouchability. Briefly, it consists of a hierarchical classification of society into classes from the highest to the lowest on the basis of birth and occupation. Highest are the Brahmins (Priests and teachers), Kshatriyas (warriors and rulers), Vaisyas (farmers, merchants, and artisans), and Sudras (laborers). Lowest of the low, are the Untouchables.

From the Aryan days till the adoption of the Indian constitution shortly after independence in 1947, Untouchables were employed in the activities considered dirty, impure and polluting. They handled and cremated the dead, came into contact with human emissions (feces, urine, sweat and spittle) and disposed of the carcasses of cattle and other animals. Also counted as untouchables, were those whose livelihood depended on taking lives such as fishermen and butchers and those whose diet included beef, pork and chicken.

They were looked upon as impure and polluting. They lived in their own separate camps away from villages and towns inhabited by the other castes. They could not enter temples, attend schools or draw water from wells used by the higher castes. Having physical contact with an untouchable meant an elaborate cleansing ritual afterwards. Worse, in parts of India, looking at an untouchable was considered polluting, hence forcing them into nocturnal life. No wonder, some scholars believe that these restrictions and humiliations led many untouchables to convert to Islam, Christianity and Buddhism.

Following Indian independence in 1947 and the adoption of a new constitution untouchability (and all that entails) was banned and re-designated as “Scheduled Caste” with representation in parliament (12). Education and vocational training were created for the new class (numbering some 250 million in early 21st century) and laws were enacted to enforce the new laws and regulations with penalties imposed on violators.

Rules and regulations, notwithstanding, untouchability is still alive and kicking in modern day India. Here are some excerpts from an article in the London Times of August 25, 2014: “The practice of forcing low-caste people in Indian communities to remove accumulated human waste from latrines is continuing despite legal prohibitions… The job is done by those considered to be of the lowest birth. These untouchables, often face threats of violence, eviction and withheld wages if they attempt to leave the trade… Laws exist to curb this form of subjugation, yet it remains widespread across India… People work as manual scavengers because their caste is expected to fulfill this role, and are typically unable to get any other work…This practice is considered one of the worst surviving symbols of untouchability because it reinforces the social stigma that these castes are untouchable and perpetuates discrimination and social exclusion”.

Chapter illustration

Ancient China, from 2000 BCE, consisted of an amalgam of small kingdoms all competing and warring among themselves. In the 8th century BCE they numbered in the hundreds. By the end of the fifth century BCE, however, they had coalesced into seven large kingdoms. One of them subsequently, in 221 BCE swallowed up the others to create Imperial China. The Empire came to an end in 1912 with the advent of the Republic of China.

Slavery formed a permanent feature of Chinese society throughout its history until formally abolished in 1906. In pre-imperial times, war captives, as usual, were turned into slaves; debtors who could not meet their commitments and poor persons not able to make ends meet sold themselves and/or their women and children into servitude. The end result was that large sections of the many kingdoms’ populations were slaves. Most of them belonged to states rather than individuals and were traded in markets and bazaars along with domestic animals and other commodities.

In imperial times, however, the institution of slavery came and went, was milder or harsher in character, depending on the perceptions of the emperor and of society at the time. So much so, that Emperor Wang Mang reacting to “humans in the same pen with cattle and horses” abolished the slave trade (but not slavery) in the year 9 CE but restored it 3 years later under pressure from slave owning aristocracy.

There was the time when noblemen from enemy kingdoms were enslaved, as well as convicts for certain crimes along with their families and relatives. Even children were not spared; they were abducted or bought, trained as singers and dancers and then resold as entertainers. All this despite imperial rules such as: “Those who sell their children shall be punished for one year. [Those who sell] relatives of the same surname, who are their superiors or elders within the five grades of mourning, shall die. Those who sell their near relatives, or their concubines, or their sons' wives, shall be banished.” And, later by the end of the first millennium CE, women became commodities for sale as slaves or prostitutes by their male kin.

As elsewhere, slaves worked in households as servants, in agriculture, on government construction projects and in the imperial palaces. A large number of them,were women and eunuchs. And those with skills and learning were put in government positions.

Interestingly, no Chinese had set eyes on black men until after the first contact between the Muslim Caliphate and the Chinese government in 651 CE, when Arab merchants introduced them as part of their maritime trade with China. It appears, however, that these newcomers from Africa remained largely an exotic curiosity for most Chinese. They were, usually found in Arab immigrants households and in those of wealthy Chinese, notably employed as doormen (possibly as a status symbol).

During the times of the first pre-imperial China dynasty, or around 2000 BCE, it has been reported, slaves were buried (alive or killed first?) with their masters in order to serve them in the afterlife. In the 7th century CE, however, under the Tang dynasty (618-906 CE) a code, not unlike the earlier mentioned Hammurabi Code, with a wide ranging scope was established, which, among others, set a hierarchical scale of punishments for crimes and offences by slaves, masters and other free men. In short, the severity of the punishment reflected the position of the offender relative to that of the offended. Thus, a slave would be punished more severely than a free man for the same crime; and a master committing the same offence on his slave would be punished even less.

Later, during the governance of the Ming dynasty (1368-1644 CE), new rules were established leveling punishments between these categories for a variety of offences and still later, in the wake of a slave rebellion in the 1630s, Ming emperors passed regulations which imposed limits on the number of slaves in households and levied taxes on slave ownership.

Eventually, slavery was formally abolished in Imperial China in 1906. The law became effective on January 31, 1910, when all adult slaves were converted into hired laborers and serfs (13).

Slavery officially existed in Japan from 300 CE to 1590. With the country, an archipelago, separated from the continental landmass, slavery within it was, necessarily, indigenous. Possibly for this reason, the institution was regulated by means of edicts and codes at different times.

According to a book titled the ‘Life of Ancient Japan’, an edict issued in 691 CE states: “ If a younger brother of the common people is sold by his elder brother, he should be classed as a free man; if a child is sold by his parents, he should be classed with slaves; persons confiscated into slavery by way of payment of interest on debts are to be classed with free men…and their children, though born of a union with a slave are also to be classed with free men…Slaves who have been manumitted in the time of the ancestor of a House, and already struck off the register of slaves, may not be claimed again as laves by members of that house”.

In the 8th century, emulating the Chinese, codes regulating social classes in society were put in place. Thus, according to ‘The Cambridge History of Japan, Volume 1: Ancient Japan’, Japanese society was divided into aristocrats, government ministers, common people and slaves. The latter, at that time numbering less than 10% of the population, were further subdivided into five categories. They ranged from those owned by the state, presumably to fill positions in government offices, who were allowed “families and could use a portion of their labour to themselves” to the “chattel slaves” owned by temples, public officials, rich farmers and the state. They were readily bought and sold cattle fashion (one such slave commanded the price of a strong horse).This was the largest of the five categories. But slaves, regardless of their ranking “could not bridge the social gaps through marriage, and crimes of slaves were punished harsher than those committed by normal citizens”.

The Portuguese, accidentally, landed in Japan in 1543. With this discovery, their countrymen began arriving with merchandise comprising muskets, and other locally unknown European and Chinese items from their trading post in Macau, China. Perversely, however, the merchantmen departed with Japanese citizens for sale abroad, including in Portugal itself(14). Not only men were traded but women too. Many of them were sent to Portugal as sex workers. Some were even sold as concubines to the black African crewmembers of the merchant ships or as slaves to other slaves in their trading outposts in China and India. The shoguns, a warrior class who ruled at that time, tolerated this aberration being, instead, dazzled by the new weapons and other goods brought by the foreigners.

But, in 1587, the shogun Hideyoshi had become disgusted with the massive purchase by the Portuguese of Japanese for resale as slaves. At the same time, the elite in the country were beginning to realize that the practice was an anachronism. Thus, slavery was legally abolished in 1590, when, paradoxically, it was in the early stages of a much, much bigger scale, on the other side of the Pacific Ocean (part-2).

Despite abolition, however, slavery continued under cover, in some instances, or was converted to indentured labour. Nor did it subsequently, stop the Japanese, including Hideyoshi himself, from engaging in the mass trading of tens of thousands of Korean prisoners captured in wars with Korea between 1592 and1598.

The collapse of the Roman Empire in 476 AD did not mean the end of slavery in Europe. To the contrary, it continued throughout the Middle Ages (500 to 1500 AD) but, in part on account of prodding by the Church, it began phasing out towards the latter part of that historical period. So that, by the time of Christopher Columbus’ first voyage in 1492, it practically no longer existed in Europe(15), except in Spain and Portugal (part-2).

Slaves in Europe were the unfortunate end products of wars of conquest. In 500 CE the Anglo-Saxons subjugated the natives of present day Great Britain, in 800 CE Vikings raiding the same island country sold their captives in Muslim Spain and elsewhere, and in the 10th century the Germans, while expanding eastwards, captured and enslaved a great number of Slavs(16). Slaves were also bought to replace dwindling local manpower as happened in the 1380s in the aftermath of the Black Death pandemic which wiped out half of Europe’s population. With the participation of Arab traders, the replacement slaves came from the Middle East and North Africa.

What did the European intelligentsia say about slavery? Early in the Age of Enlightenment (or Age of Reason), one of the great names of that time, John Locke (1632-1704), became the last major philosopher to defend slavery. To him it was a: “state of war continued, between a lawful conqueror and a captive”. He concluded, finally, that slavery was here to stay forever.

But by the 1730’s, thinkers and writers on both sides of the English Channel were beginning to see the absurdity of human servitude. One of the most influential, the great Montesquieu, attempted to convince his contemporaries that slavery was wrong. He encouraged them to imagine a reversal of roles between masters and slaves in a world turned upside down. In short, to these intellectuals: in the Age of Reason, slavery failed the test of reason.

And let us not forget the momentous French Revolution of 1789, with its emblematic ‘Liberte, Egalite, Fraternite’ slogan and its ‘Declaration of the Rights of Man and the Citizen’. Despite these commendable words and good intentions, the abolition of slavery in the French colonies of the Caribbean never became a priority on the minds of the revolutionaries (part-2). Far from it, when it eventually happened it did so not without trepidations.

From the earliest of times, Africans enslave Africans albeit from different polities and ethnicities, of which, there were many. The frequent wars and raids among them inevitably yielded captives who were subsequently traded locally mostly as domestic servants. Paradoxically however, the indications are that, once settled in their new surroundings, African slaves were treated as almost the equal of the free persons in their communities. They were allowed free movement and could marry and raise families with their offspring considered free.

Simultaneously, Africans were, increasingly taken out of the continent, for a life of servitude abroad. Because Africans had for many centuries enslaved other Africans, they had no qualms in providing them to foreign traders, obviously, for the right price in various goods. According to Joseph E. Holloway, Professor of Pan African Studies at California State University: “Slave raids and inter- ethnic wars generated and intensified a great deal of bloodshed, destruction and the general misery that ensued. Entire villages were sometimes burned. Millions were lost as a direct result of these activities… others died inside the west African stockades, or holding places, called "factories"…The wars were demoralizing and there was an atmosphere of insecurity and fear throughout Africa” .

This being the case, Arab Muslim traders, over a period of ten centuries, between the 9th and 19th, bought millions (17) and carried them on caravans or across the Red Sea to slave markets in the Middle East, Arabia and Asia. Later, from the 15th to late in the 19th century came on the scene the notorious transatlantic slave trade which carried, again, millions of men women and children from the shores of Africa to those of the newly discovered Americas (part-2).

Yale University professor, historian and slavery scholar, David Brion Davis quotes from the ‘Justinian Code’ (18) as follows: “slavery was the single institution contrary to the law of nature but sanctioned by law of nations. That is to say, slavery would not be permitted in an ideal world of perfect justice, but it was simply a fact of life that symbolized the compromises that must be made in the sinful world of reality”.

This being the case, we have seen in the preceding, that slavery has existed since the earliest societies and civilizations. Indeed, no human or state missed an opportunity to enslave a fellow human or a whole population and missed it. We have, also, seen that depending on gender and qualifications, in certain societies, slaves served their masters in various ways. They could be high officials, teachers, soldiers, eunuchs, concubines and servants. Some were treated humanely, others not so (19).

Sadly, once a slave always a slave regardless of position or functions performed. Slaves constituted chattel to their masters on equal footing with furniture, clothes and indeed, domestic and farm animals.

Part-2 of this project looks at chattel slavery par excellence, the one associated with the transatlantic slave trade. Not only was it unique in all its aspects, but, unlike the one just covered, it left a poisonous legacy that endures till present.

(1)In some primitive societies (tribes in Brazil) slaves were spared heavy work in order to be eaten after a ceremonial killing. And in ancient Persia, breeding of slaves (like horses) became a source of supply and, of course, income.

(2)remember that owning slaves did not imply heavy costs to their master. Merely, enough food for subsistence and a minimum of clothing. The rich, on the other hand, could probably dress their slaves in the equivalent of today’s lavish uniforms.

(3) The most famous gladiator was Spartacus, who in 73 BCE escaped and was joined by other slave escapees (some say as many as 100,000). He led them in today’s equivalent of guerrilla warfare against Roman forces lasting 2 years until he was killed along most of his followers of whom 6,000 were crucified along a main road for all to see.

(4)Here are some quotes about the slave markets of Ancient Rome:“Under the supervision of the aediles the slave dealers sold their wares publicly, either in the open forum or in shops. Slaves for sale would sometimes be stood on revolving stands. Those just brought from abroad were put on display with one foot whitened with chalk. From the neck of each slave for sale hung a plaque with all the information required by potential buyers, nationality, abilities, good and bad points, etc”.

“The best slaves were to be found in the saepta near the forum, the meeting place of the fashionable world, where the best shops were. Naturally, prices varied with the age and quality of the slave”.

“Intelligence and learning were the attributes which elevated the price of a slave the most. Next came good looks and skills at various types of work. But also mentally retarded, dwarfed or disfigured slaves could fetch high prices by buyers seeking 'jesters' for their own cruel amusement”.

(5)Professor of History, Dr. Leslie P Peirce in her book ‘The Imperial Harem: Women and Sovereignty in the Ottoman Empire’ says: “More than any other Muslim dynasty, the Ottomans raised the practice of slave concubinage to a reproductive principle: after the generations of Osman and Orhan, virtually all offspring of the sultans appear to have been born of concubine mothers”. Clearly, there was a benefit to this. Having heirs from these women of inconsequential backgrounds meant the ruling line remained that of the sultan’s. Otherwise, an indigenous wife’s family may have claims on the throne through its relation to the mother and prince.

(6) Castration was carried out on boys of between 8 to 12 years of age, with no anesthetics, needless to say. It has been reported that as late as 1903 the Ottoman family owned 194 eunuchs.

(7) The Mamluks were originally slaves brought, as early the Abbasid Khaliphate in the 9th century, from Central Asia to serve in the military. They became a feature of all Islamic societies including in Egypt, under the Ayyubid dynasty (from 1171 AD) whom they overthrew in 1250 and ruled Egypt, and its dependencies, until they were defeated by the Ottomans in 1517. According to author Michael Winter: “Historians have been fascinated by the uniqueness of the Mamluk phenomenon. It was inhuman in some respects (for example, Mamluks being denied the opportunity to bequeath their position and privileges to their sons), yet it provided Islam with a superb military force and a sophisticated political system”.

(8) The Ottoman Empire introduced in the 14th century the Devshirme system of which the Janissaries were one component and the bureaucrats the other. It consisted of the forced recruitment of Christian children from the Balkans and of non-Muslims from other parts of the empire. They were,then, converted to Islam and trained either for the civil service or the military. It is said that 500,000 to 1,000,000 were enslaved thus over the centuries. The Devshirme system of recruitment was discontinued at the end of the 17th century. As for the Janissaries, they formed the elite forces of the empire, fought all its battles including the capture of Constantinople in 1453. Unlike the Mamluks, however, they were not able to overthrow the ruling dynasty. When they became rebellious, they were all massacred, in an infamous episode, by sultan Mahmud II in 1826.

(9)Speaking with the Chicago Sun Times in 2002, the same Ronald Segal also said: “There wasn't this separation in[Islamic civilizations]. Whites didn't push blacks off the pavement. They didn't forbid restaurants to serve them. I don't think that there's any disputing that slavery was a more benevolent institution in Islam than it was in the West”.

(10)In the Ottoman Empire the sale of women as slaves continued until 1908.

(11)As already mentioned, Islam (like other religions) by not unequivocally abolishing slavery has sent the wrong signals in the later centuries. Thus, the lateness of its abolition.

(12) For the first time a “Scheduled Caste” president served in this high office from 1997 to 2002.

(13)Serfdom (a form of servitude not much better from slavery) remained until the creation of the People’s Republic of China in 1949.

(14)The Portuguese regarded Asian slaves highly; better than the black African version. They considered them more intelligent and capable and therefore more useful. They, clearly, bought from impoverished parents and other relatives.

(15)Slavery was replaced by serfdom in the evolving feudal system. A status slightly better than slavery, serfdom consisted of bondage work, for life, on the lands of a landowner. Completely dependent on the whims of the latter, a serf had very limited freedom, if any. He could not, for example, move elsewhere or, even, marry without the permission of his lord. In return, the serf received protection and was able to make subsistence living by cultivating a small lot, also belonging to the landlord.

(16)Some historians have said that the term slave is derived from Slav.

(17)According to Elikia M’Bokolo, a Congolese historian specialized in the social, political and intellectual history of Africa: Four million slaves exported via the Red Sea, another four million through the Swahili ports of the Indian Ocean, perhaps as many as nine million along the trans-Saharan caravan route. Arab slave traders had a preferred women for harems and young males for service in the military.

(18)Justinian I (483-565) was a Byzantine emperor who initiated the codification of old Roman laws, hence the “the Code of Justinian”.

(19)At a certain time in the life of the Ottoman Empire, a favourite concubine could bear an heir to the sultan.

Masters and Slaves 2

MASTERS AND SLAVES. AUGUST, 2015.

PART-2 HUMANS AS CHATTEL. NOVEMBER, 2016.

Chapter illustration

American Declaration of Independence, July 4th, 1776.

Final proof reading: 03.11.2016.

In consequence, let us start by understanding its meaning fully. According to one definition, it is “a system under which people are treated as property to be bought and sold, and are forced to work. Slaves can be held [forever] against their will from the time of their capture, purchase or birth, and deprived of the right to leave, to refuse to work, or to demand compensation....and whose children and grandchildren are automatically enslaved”.

Elikia M’Bokolo,the Congolese historian, has this to say in April 1998 in the Le Monde Diplomatique: “more than four centuries of a regular slave trade to build the Americas and the prosperity of the Christian states of Europe [has] indisputably contributed most to the present situation of Africa. It permanently weakened the continent, led to its colonization bythe Europeans in the nineteenth century [part-3], and engendered the racism and contempt from which Africans still suffer”.

It all started with the Portuguese voyages toward and around Africa( in order to reach Asia) in the early 1440s. In the process they colonized the uninhabited islands of Cape Verde some 570 kms west of the western coast of the black continent. At that time Africa had already been a rich source of slaves for many centuries (part-1). So when Portuguese settlers arrived to Cape Verde in 1462 and needed cheap labour, it was easy enough to ship it over. What’s more, using Cape Verde as a stepping stone, the Portuguese transported slaves north to Spain and Portugal. An when, finally, starting in the 16th century European settlers moved into the New World and wanted plenty of cheap manpower to work the plantations being set up, all was in place to produce it: source, stepping stone and ships.

In part -1 we have said that Africans themselves engaged in the capture of men, women and children and their delivery to Arab merchants. In this instance they did the same with European traders. In return, they received firearms, gunpowder, glass beads, glassware, brandy, ironmongery and inferior quality cloth. In this context, let us quote Joseph E. Holloway, Professor of Pan African Studies at California State University: “Slave raids and inter- ethnic wars [by Africans] generated and intensified a great deal of bloodshed, destruction and the general misery that ensued. Entire villages were sometimes burned. Millions were lost as a direct result of these activities… others died inside the west African stockades, or holding places, called "factories"…The wars were demoralizing and there was an atmosphere of insecurity and fear throughout Africa”.

As for the 17th century French priest, Father Jean-Baptiste Laba: “there are four kinds of persons that are sold to the Companies or to other merchants that come there to trade. The first are criminals, and generally all those who deserve death or some other punishment. The second are prisoners of war that they take [in wars] against their neighbors, with whom they are in constant war which has no other goal than these raids or kidnappings of persons, which they do by surprise, without ever arriving at an open war or a major action, or some decision. The third are the personal slaves of the princes, or of those to whom the princes have given [slaves], who sell them according to their whim or need. The fourth, finally, who are most numerous, are those that are taken, by order, by princely consent, by certain thieves called merchants who steal all the men, women, children they can catch and lead them to a vessel or the counter of the merchants to whom they must be delivered, who brand them immediately with a hot iron and put them in irons to be sure [they don't escape]”.

According to Mr M’Bokolo, there were anywhere between 11 and 20 million humans of all genders and ages transferred from the western shores of Africa, across the Atlantic to the New World. As for Neil A. Frankel, the founder of www.slaverysite .com, 13 million Africans boarded ships for the Americas.

Why Africans specifically? As far as the Europeans were concerned, Africans were the sons of Ham. This latter, according to the Book of Genesis (the first chapter of the Old Testament), was the son Noah who placed a curse on Canaan, his grandson (the son of Ham) in these words: “Cursed be Canaan; a slave of slaves shall he be to his brothers” .Ham’s descendants, through Canaan, have historically been regarded as the black people of Africa whose dark skin was believed to be an outward sign of that curse and as: “God’s command that Africans should be the slaves to the Christians”. At the height of the transatlantic slave trade, Enlightenment age Scottish philosopher David Hume (1711-1776) expressed it all as: “I am apt to suspect the Negroes, and in general all other species of men to be naturally inferior to the whites. There never was any civilized nation of any other complexion than white, nor even any individual eminent in action or speculation” and later the great German philosopher Immanuel Kant (1724-1804) in dismissing a worthy report by an African on the grounds that“ this fellow was quite black from head to toe, a clear proof that what he said was stupid”. Perhaps, also, the ready willingness of the indigenous inhabitants to sell their own people gave impetus to these skewed beliefs.

The ‘Transatlantic Slave Trade’, is the historical name of the massive movement of people from Africa to the new World. It started in the late 1500s and was finally banned, by Great Britain, in 1807 (1). By then, however, it was no longer that important since there were now enough procreating slaves to compensate for those who were no longer available. But in Brazil and the Caribbean this was not the case as we shall see later. Of the 13 million transported, 2 million perished during the crossing, according to Mr Frankel. Moreover, he is reported to have “always found it to be inconceivable that something as repugnant and immoral as slavery and the Atlantic slave trade could have been practiced for over 400 years by civilized and God fearing western European nations”.

Chapter illustration

Interesting, also, is his findings about the number of crossings needed to ferry so many people: 54,200 in total distributed among the main European nations as, 30,000 for Portugal, 12,000 for Britain, 4,200 for France, 4,000 for Spain and 1,500 for British North America and the USA.

The transatlantic slave trade is also referred to as the triangular trade because it consisted of a three leg voyage. On the first, ships departed Europe carrying manufactured goods for exchange against kidnapped black men and women on the west coast of Africa. Removed

Finally, on the third leg the vessels crossed the ocean back to Europe loaded with sugar, tobacco, cotton and the rest.

With time, that trade evolved into a very lucrative undertaking for the traders and ship owners of the countries which participated in it: Britain, France, Spain, Portugal, Holland, Denmark and Sweden. And certainly too, for the treasuries of the countries involved .

Would be slaves travelled the Middle Passage in atrocious conditions. They were kept in below-deck holds of ships, often lying on their sides, to save space, with their legs in iron (image). Some of these involuntary passengers spent agonizingly long days in this posture since ships took weeks, even months, hopping around the coast of Africa assembling their human cargo before, at last, setting sail across the vast ocean for the New World, a voyage of 6 to 8 weeks. Questions: How were the wretched creatures fed? How did they manage lying there with no sanitation? And what happened in cases of seasickness in the cramped space, bouncing around in the rough seas, aboard the vessels of the day?

Chapter illustration

And when, finally, the Africans landed in the New World they, unwittingly, brought with them a new dimension to slavery, hitherto unknown to the European settlers. For the first time the enslaved multitudes were entirely alien in features, colour of skin and more importantly in culture. They inevitably became the subjects of anxiety, fear, suspicion and not, least, racial repugnance.

Chapter illustration

Let’s end this section with the words of French historian Jean-Michel Deveau about the transatlantic slave trade and slavery from the 16th to the 19th century: it “….constitute one of the greatest tragedies in the history of humanity in terms of scale and duration”.

Uncle Tom’s Cabin(2).

Slavery in the future United States of America arose because of the need of the European settlers for cheap labour to work in the new settlements and in the large farms and plantations of the South; producing tobacco first, then large quantities of cotton, for export to the newly mechanized textile factories of England’s nascent industrial era.

It has been estimated, that between 1619, when the first Blacks arrived in Jamestown, Virginia, to 1807, the total number of Africans shipped across the Atlantic to the North American shores amounted to 500,000 or 4.5% of the total quoted earlier.

Slave owners and masters, through restrictive codes and by means of harsh and brutal punishments, regulated and controlled the lives of their slaves. These were not permitted to learn reading and writing. They could marry but their union was not legally recognized, and masters could split families if they so chose by selling or removing members.

Chapter illustration

Not unreasonably, therefore, running away was on the minds of many of them, but only a few attempted it. Those who did headed north crossing many northern states in the hope of reaching the ‘promised land’ of Canada. They travelled what was dubbed the Underground Railroad. There was nothing of below ground nature or any train journey implied by the phrase. It merely, for some reason, referred to a network of routes along which were “stations” where the escapees could find assistance. Sadly though, only a minuscule minority managed to reach its destination. Not only were the distances to be covered huge, but equally because of the vigilance of slave catchers always on the lookout for runaways. And when one was caught, he/she was unceremoniously returned to his master, as the federal law of the land stipulated.

At last, the institution of slavery was abolished at the end of the Civil War (1860-1865). Its existence had, thus, spanned the whole period of colonization and the first 90 years of the life of the United States (3).

Some 4 million slaves (out of a total US population of 35 million) were eventually emancipated. But this freedom did not mean the end of their miseries and persecutions (4).Moreover, it ushered in an entire century of racism, violence (5) and segregation. It took the non- violent activism of the civil rights movement of Martin Luther King to force the politicians of the 1960’s to legislate against those injustices.

Let’s close with a question. How could a nation whose Declaration of Independence of 1776 opens with: “We hold these truths to be self- evident, that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable Rights, that among these are Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness”, tolerate slavery in the new nation? One answer is proposed by Professor David Brion Davis of Yale University. In an article titled ‘The Problem of Slavery, he writes: “As the American slave system became increasingly profitable, the moral doubts of the Revolutionary generation gave way in the South to strong religious, economic, and racial arguments that defended slavery as a "positive good".” Although the authors of the Declaration, some of whom were slave owners themselves (6), viewed slavery as an embarrassment and a social evil, they nonetheless valued the rights of private property ( and a slave is such a property) even more. So much so, that the ensuing Constitution of 1789 protected the rights and security of slave holders. Contradiction upon contradiction! Unbelievable.

The Tordesillas Treaty.

The Tordesillas Treaty between Spain and Portugal,demarcated the possessions of each in the newly discovered Central and South America(7). National Goegraphic clarified that it “worked out well for for the Spanish and Portuguese empires but less so for the 50 million people already living in established communities in the Americas” .

Latin America from the 15th to the mid 19th century consisted of: *Spanish possessions: Texas and other parts of the USA, Central and South America minus Brazil and the Caribbean islands of Cuba and Puerto Rico.

*Portuguese possession: Brazil.

The earliest Africans to reach the New World were the “Iberian” slaves, those shipped in the 1440s by the Portuguese to the Iberian Peninsula, (see earlier). They accompanied Christopher Columbus on his voyage of discovery in 1492 on the Santa Maria, Nina and Pinta. More came with Cortez and Pizarro and fought with them against the local Aztec and Inca ‘Indians’. Between 1502 and 1518, hundreds of Spanish-born Africans, called ‘Ladinos’, were sent across from the Spanish mainland to work as laborers, especially in mines. But much more were needed. Fortunately, the African continent stood ready to deliver.

There was hardly any activity in which African labour was not involved. The majority were employed as agricultural workers in plantations (producing sugar, coffee, cotton etc.) or as domestic servants. Others could be found working the gold and silver mines and some became sailors, small shopkeepers and even mining or sugar experts.

Life of servitude in Latin America varied according the place and occupation, perhaps reflecting the varieties of the huge continent. Badly treated were those employed in the sugar plantations of northeast Brazil or in the gold and silver mines of Spanish America, where some were used as human mules in replacement to the animal variety.Perversely, the former being considered more cost effective that the latter which expired two months into the job at the mine. In contrast, the ones who were involved in cattle raising in present day Argentina or in the fishing industries in regions of Brazil tended to enjoy more mobility and to be less segregated against. As for those working in urban surroundings, in activities mentioned earlier, their interaction with ‘free’ colleagues helped to improve their status.

Understandably, slaves revolted and, more importantly, escaped, often one or two days after arrival, to the fringes of plantations. There they established their own small independent communities and fiercely resisted attempts to force them to re-integrate their former status. These runaways, called ‘Maroons’, could escape relatively easily since, unlike North America, vast expanse of wilderness, dense jungles and high mountains, such as the Andes, were within easy reach from their places of captivity. Perhaps it is relevant to quote here the following from Encyclopedia.Com: “For more than four centuries, the communities formed by Maroons dotted the fringes of plantation America from Brazil to Florida, from Peru to Texas…Throughout the Americas Maroon communities stood out as a heroic challenge to white authority, as living proof of the existence of a slave consciousness that refused to be limited by the whites’ conception or manipulation of it....” and, perhaps, more to the point: “For while they[the Maroons] were, from one perspective, the antithesis of all that slavery stood for; they were also a widespread and embarrassingly visible part of this system”.

Fortunately, manumissions were frequent to the point that by the 19th century free black people outnumbered the ones still in servitude by a ratio of ten to one. Furthermore, marriages between slaves did take place and Brazil is reported to have had the greatest number of legal marriages. Some slaves were taught to read and write. And because the majority of slaves were baptized when they landed in Latin America, the Catholic Church, although owning slaves itself, looked upon them benevolently and eschewed the notion of race superiority. Moreover, it encouraged family bonds in slave communities so that when a sale happened, the entire family was sold as one. Both, the former and the latter points contrast clearly with what was prevalent, north, in the United States.

Overall, from the 16th to the 19th centuries, those who came from Africa to the Spanish colonies, numbered some 2.5 million, or 23% of the total number given earlier against 4 million or 36%, the Portuguese imported to their sole colony of Brazil. The reason for this imbalance was that work in the tropics, growing sugar canes and processing them for export, was harsh and the Portuguese exploited their slaves to death within a short time. They, furthermore, refused to invest in the most basic machinery of the day to alleviate their burden. The outcome of all this was that slaves, under these conditions, did not reproduce to replenish themselves, thus the need for a consistently high supply of black labour for centuries.

Abolition of the institution of slavery in Latin America occurred in the different regions, at different times and under different circumstances. But by the late 1880s it no longer existed in Central and South America and the Caribbean.

Unfortunately, old habits die hard. Emancipation was not followed by any significant changes in the social order of the newly independent nations of Latin America’s late 19th century. The former elites and privileged classes continued to be the ones who owned the plantations and the means of production, thus wealth. As for the ex-slaves, they had no economic means of their own. They, therefore, remained at the mercy of their former masters. Further, the latter were, in no way anxious to level the playing fields in their favour.

Nowadays, the main ethnic groups inhabiting Latin America are the Whites, Mestizos (White/Amerindian blood), Mulattos(White/Black blood), Amerindians (original inhabitants), Blacks and Zambos (Black/Amerindian blood). They are, obviously, distributed in varying percentages throughout the constituent nations. But overall the predominant ethnic group of the continent is the joint Whites/ Mestizos classes forming more the 60% of the population with the former slightly more than the latter. This is due in great part to the big waves of white immigrations from Europe, the Middle East and elsewhere in the 19th and 20th centuries.

This being the case, then perhaps unsurprisingly, so far in the 21stcentury discrimination remains pervasive on the continent. It is not only the customary whites against black version, but also the lighter shade of brown against the darker one as in Mexico(8).

Contemporaneously, the French and the British, mainly, were in possession of the Caribbean islands. The former’s: the Martinique, Guadeloupe and St Domingue (present day Haiti). The latter’s: Jamaica, Trinidad and Tobago (9).

After Brazil, the Caribbean became the center of the second sugar revolution. The tendency of the planters, at the beginning, was to use indentured labour from Europe in parallel with African slaves. But they soon discovered that the latter were better suited for the harsh working conditions and more immune to local diseases than the Europeans. Similarly to the sugar plantation workers in Brazil, those in the Caribbean could not replenish themselves thus the need for a continuous transfer of souls from Africa. Against Brazil’s 36% share of the total number of slaves brought over to the New World between the 16th and the 19th centuries, the Caribbean’s was 33% or 3.6 million(2 and 1.6 for the British and French colonies respectively). So much so in fact, that the Blacks persistently outnumbered the white population by a factor of five.

The lives and activities of slaves in the Caribbean, at least the French colonies, are best understood with reference to the ‘Code Noir’ decreed by King Louis XIV in 1685 and consisting of 60 clauses meant to regulate the lives of black slaves and their relation with their masters. What follows are the translation of the ones considered appropriate in this context. *All the slaves who will be in our Islands will be baptized and instructed in the Catholic, Apostolic, and Roman religion etc. *No overseers will be given charge of negres who do not profess the Catholic, Apostolic, and Roman religion, on pain of confiscation of the said negres etc. *We forbid them to work or to make their slaves work on these days[Sundays and holidays] from the hour of midnight until the other midnight etc. *Equally we forbid the holding of negre markets and all other markets the said days etc. *In the same way we forbid slaves belonging to different masters to gather in the day or night…on pain of corporal punishment, which will not be less than the whip and [branding with] the fleur de lys [symbol of the kings of France] . *We forbid priests to officiate at the marriages of slaves unless they can show the consent of their masters. We also forbid masters to use any means to constrain their slaves to marry against their will. *The children who will be born of marriage between slaves will be slaves and will belong to the master of the women slaves. *Masters are held to put into Holy Ground in cemeteries so designated their baptized slaves; and those who die without having received baptism will be buried at night in some field near the place where they died. *We grant to manumitted slaves the same rights, privileges and liberties enjoyed by persons born free etc.

Sadly, though, it appears that manumitted slaves did not always, if at any time, enjoy the same rights and privileges as born-free citizens as stipulated in the last clause above. A petition written by a group of freed slaves, in the year 1765, to the representatives of the king in the colonies, following their conscription in the French army, pleads , among others as follows: “To our Lords: the Counsellors of the Superior Council of Cap…The free mulattoes and negres of this colony, very obedient and very faithful subjects of his majesty the King of France, humbly beseech…We were to be forced to enlist in a newly established Legion, and subjected to a perpetual slavery to which we and our descendants would be reduced, without possessions… we had seen that his benevolent Majesty…had granted us liberty in the full force of time and expressed in Article 59 of the Black Code and Civil Code….Our lords to try to force us to enlist and to have us thrown into irons to constrain us to enlist is to take that liberty from us… today we are brought to a prison cell, fettered like criminals transfered from one prison to another and from our birthplaces to sites unknown to us to kill us in misery, in irons, crushed by blows from soldiers' musket butts, [threatened] with transportation, with being sold back into slavery for the profit of the King…etc.”

The Caribbean colonies, at no time, became white settler societies in the manner of those in North and Latin America. At least in the case of the English, they found the tropical environment intolerable. They were afflicted by various diseases, their life span was short and could not sustain an expanding demography. So much so that being posted to Jamaica, either as a civil servant or soldier for example, was tantamount to severe punishment. And in the case of the latter, desertion and mutiny were far from a rarity. Understandably, with no significant white presence to worry about, the black and mulatto (white/black) majorities were thus in a position to revolt, demand emancipation and if propitious: independence.

With depressed sugar exports along with claims of more efficient means of production combined with humanitarian and political considerations and with indigenous rebellions and unrest, the opposition of colonial slave owners was finally overcome. Thus, first Britain abolished slavery in its colonies in 1833. It was followed by France in 1848.

Slavery was throughout the ages and everywhere a rewarding business; but at no time and nowhere more so than in the context of the chattel slavery practiced in the New World by the Europeans for 4 centuries. There, it was driven by greed which negated religion, compassion and human rights.

Let us consider the case of Britain, the most successful of them all. Coming second after the Portuguese in the triangular transatlantic slave trade, every leg of the journey was extremely profitable to the ship captains, owners and shipping companies. The vessels never sailed empty whether on the trip west with the slaves for sale or on the homebound crossing back to Europe with the sugar, tobacco and the rest and finally back to Africa with weapons and other goods including junk for the chieftains.

Back in Britain, it is reported that between 1750 and 1780, 70% of the government income came from taxes on the import from the slave produced products of the American colonies; the most valuable being the sugar from the Caribbean. Understandably, the ports of Liverpool and Bristol thrived. All those who made money from the slave trade and related activities set up banks(10), including the Bank of England, insurance companies and invested in shipbuilding, wool and cotton manufacture, copper and iron smelting and other industries thus invigorating the Industrial Revolution(11).

What was true for Britain was equally valid for the rest of the continent. Europe prospered from the centuries of trading in slaves and from the labour of the latter in the plantations and mines of the New World. In the words of one, Richard Drayton, in the Guardian newspaper of 20th August 2005: “Profits from slave trading and from sugar, coffee, cotton and tobacco are only a small part of the story. What mattered was how the pull and push from these industries transformed Western Europe's economies”.

As for the United States of America, a paper titled ‘Measuring Slavery in 2011 Dollars’ by Samuel H. Williamson and Louis P. Cain from the Chicago’s universities of Illinois and Loyola respectively offer some interesting and revealing information about the economics of slavery in the southern United States. One, the purchase price of a prime slave in 1860 corresponds to 20,000 Dollars in 2011’s money. Even so, this was a good investment paid back by and making a return on the slave’s labour over the years while simultaneously retaining a resale value at any time. Second, purchase prices, obviously, varied depending on sex, age, health and anticipated production potential. The dearest was the healthy young adult male in the prime of his working life. Next came the woman in her childbearing years, since her offspring would be slaves to the mother’s owner and who at adolescence, or perhaps earlier, would begin to generate pure profits for their master given that it cost practically nothing to acquire them in the first place. Third, the total value of southern slaves in 1860 corresponds to 10,200 billion Dollars in 2011’s money. Astronomical! No wonder then that some economics historians have postulated that “Southerners had so much wealth tied up in slaves that they did not invest sufficiently in other types of investments”.

And profitable, indeed, slavery was. According to the French economist Thomas Piketty in his acclaimed book “Capital in the Twenty-First Century”, the slave population in the southern states of America in 1800 numbered 1million against 1.5 million Whites or 40 percent of their total population. More importantly, slavery constituted an asset to the planters with a market value equivalent to 2.5 to 3 years of the states’ national income(12). Quoting Mr Piketty: “ All told, southern slave owners in the New World controlled more wealth than the landlords of old Europe”. Slavery thus, was a very important component of the wealth of the southern planters and “If one adds the market value of slaves to other components of wealth[such as land etc], the value of southern capital [wealth] exceeds six years of the southern states’ income, or nearly as much as the total value of capital in Britain and France”.

(1)By the British whose navy was able to enforce a ban on the transport of slaves out of Africa in ships of any nation.

(2)Uncle Tom’s Cabin, written by Harriet Beecher Stow and published in 1852, is an anti-slavery novel. It “was the best-selling novel of the 19th century and the second best-selling book of that century… It is credited with helping fuel the abolitionist cause in the 1850s..” (Wikepedia).

(3)The Civil war was not initially fought for the purpose of abolishing slavery. No. The reason for which Abraham Lincoln declared it was in order to force the states in the south to re-integrate the Union they had separated from, and formed their own confederacy. It was only by the middle of the conflict, as a result of enormous and continuing losses of life and property and for social and political reasons (not least the recruitment of black soldiers in the Union army), that persuaded Lincoln to declare that all slaves would be emancipated once victory was at hand.

(4)The Guardian newspaper in its review of a recent book: ‘Sick From Freedom’ dated October, 2014 writes: “The analysis, by historian Jim Downs of Connecticut College, casts a shadow over one of the most celebrated narratives of American history, which sees the freeing of the slaves as a triumphant righting of the wrongs of a southern plantation system that kept millions of black Americans in chains.…. the reality of emancipation during the chaos of war and its bloody aftermath often fell brutally short of that positive image. Instead, freed slaves were often neglected by union soldiers or faced rampant disease, including horrific outbreaks of smallpox and cholera. Many of them simply starved to death. Downs believes that about a quarter of the four million freed slaves either died or suffered from illness between 1862 and 1870. He writes that it can be considered "the largest biological crisis of the 19th century"….Many northerners were little more sympathetic than their southern opponents when it came to the health of the freed slaves and anti-slavery abolitionists feared the disaster would prove their critics right : that slaves were not able to exist on their own.”

(5)Most notably by groups of white supremacists such as the Ku Klux Klan.

(6)Thomas Jefferson owned more than 600 slaves.

(7) The Treaty of Tordesillas of June 1494, sanctioned by Pope Julius II, aimed at settling the dispute between Spain and Portugal over the lands newly discovered or explored by Christopher Columbus and other late 15th century explorers. The treaty established a geographic line (red in image below) from Pole to Pole down the Atlantic some 1900 kms west of Cape Verde islands already owned by Portugal. It, further stated that all new lands west of that line belong to Spain and those east of it are Portugal’s. As it cut across the ‘bulge’ of South America, so Portugal became the owner of the eastern part of that land. The treaty notwithstanding, Portugal proceeded to push westward and ultimately owned the whole of what became Brazil. Conversely, Spain’s share became all of Central and all that remained of South America. Curiously, some historians think that at the time of signing the Treaty neither party knew for sure what lay either side of that line; the Portuguese finding out about their property only in 1500 upon the arrival there of their navigator Alvares Cablar.

Chapter illustration

(8) From a report of CNN dated 20.11.2012: “The enduring taboo subject [in Mexico] is skin color, whether an individual's complexion betrays an allegiance to the Spanish who conquered the Aztec empire in 1521 or the Aztecs who were conquered. It's no exaggeration to say that, in this country and especially in this city [Mexico City] the best, highest-paying, most important jobs often seem to go to those who, in addition to having the best education and the strongest connections, have the lightest skin….On television, in politics and in academia, you see light-skinned people. On construction sites, in police forces and in restaurant kitchens, you're more likely to find those who are dark-skinned. In the priciest neighborhoods, the homeowners have light skin, and the housekeepers are dark. Everyone knows this, and yet no one talks about it, at least not in elite circles”.

(9)In the Caribbean, the indigenous people who met Christopher Columbus in 1492 had already disappeared by the time the French reached Guadeloupe in 1635.

(10)According to a recent article in the New Statesman: “Apart from the Barclays Brothers, who were slave traders, we also know of Barings [plantation owner] and HSBC which can be traced back to Thomas Leyland’s [slave trader] banking house. The Bank of England also had close connections to the trade. Hundreds of Britain’s great houses were built with the wealth of slavery and the Church of England also acknowledges its pecuniary gains from slavery”.

(11)Also from the same article: “The Industrial Revolution would have been impossible without the wealth generated by slave labour”.

(12) “National income is defined as the sum of all income available to the residents of a given country in a given year, regardless of the legal classification of that income. National income is closely related to the idea of GDP [Gross Domestic product]”

Masters and Slaves 3

MASTERS AND SLAVES. AUGUST, 2015.

PART-3 RAPE OF A CONTINENT. NOVEMBER, 2016.

Chapter illustration

Final proof reading 07.11.2016.

There is no doubt in the minds of many a scholar that Africa’s destiny takes a fateful turn with the arrival of Europeans for trade and plunder in the 15th century. First, the Portuguese, in search of a route to the East round Africa, decide to stay when they discover the lucrative trade in slaves. They are followed by the British and Dutch in the 17th century. The latter select in 1652 a harbour at the southern tip of Africa as their settlement.

The 19th century starts with the ban on the slave trade in 1807, as we have seen in part-2(1), in response to the vigorous activism of European abolitionists. It is also the era of intense explorations of the hitherto undiscovered African interior by the like of David Livingstone (2) who journey all over the vast continent and report to their respective governments on its expanses and riches. As a result, the latter are eager to open up new territories to enhance their influence and power vis-à-vis their other European rivals while, simultaneously, creating ‘legitimate’ (in comparison with the slave trade) business opportunities for their merchants and entrepreneurs.

Scramble for Africa

The period from early 1880s to the first few years of the 1900s is known in history as that of the “Scramble for Africa”, meaning the rush by the main European states to acquire new possessions on the continent. But already, however, some colonies have been established. Namely: a-The Dutch settlement in southern Africa, mentioned above, had expanded into two independent entities: the Boer republics and the British colony of the Cape. b-Britain is in Egypt from 1882. It also has a presence in Ghana, Nigeria and Sierra Leone . c-France is in Algeria and Tunisia from 1830 and 1881 respectively. Add to this, its presence in Senegal, Ivory Coast and Gabon. d-Portugal is in possession of Mozambique and Angola.

The scramble for Africa starts with the strong desire of Leopold II of Belgium (image), in 1876, to “open to civilization the only part of our globe to which it has yet to penetrate” and “I do not want to miss a good chance of getting us a slice of this magnificent African cake”. But the French beat him to it and colonize what became the French Congo; the king follows them with his Congo Free State (later the Belgian Congo) in 1882.

Chapter illustration

With the aim of putting some order to this scramble, Bismarck of Germany, who now wants a piece of the pie, having hitherto not shown any interest in Africa, assembles the heads of the other states in a conference in 1884 in Berlin. Addressing them, he emphasizes the philanthropic concept of colonialism or the 3 C’s: Christianity, Civilization and Commerce. In the words of one historian “Africa is about to be consumed in its entirety by Europe”. Moreover, to crown it all, “in 1886 a British colonial administrator, Harry Johnston, submits a roughly sketched map to the Foreign Office suggesting how the continent should be divided….He also reveals, all too vividly, the colonial concept of how the European example is expected to improve the natives”. In the end, a look at a map of 1914 Africa (opening page) reveals two huge chunks of the continent in possession of France and Britain; what is left is divided between Belgium, Germany, Italy, Portugal and Spain with one independent state: Liberia, populated by the descendants of the freed American negroes; it is under the protection of the United States. As stated in one passage of Encyclopedia Britannica: “By the turn of the 20th century, the map of Africa looked like a huge jigsaw puzzle, with most of the boundary lines having been drawn in a sort of game of give-and-take played in the foreign offices of the leading European powers”(3).

In order to develop and exploit the continent’s resources, colonials gave concessions areas to private companies to do so on their behalf. Expectedly, the latter’s first priority was to minimize the costs of their operations so as to maximize their profits. Hence, they were reluctant to invest in the labour saving technologies of the time. Instead, with slavery abolished (4), the next best thing was to coerce indigenous villagers, in great numbers, into forced labour at practically slave labour conditions.

The companies were given a free hand. The were allowed to become the defacto rulers of their concession zones, with no restrictions imposed on their activities and methods. Some of them had their own armed elements to help with recruitment and to enforce discipline, others were assisted in doing so by the colonial powers’ own military. Thus, in their quest to build the roads and railways necessary for their business and to run their exploitative activities, in the harsh environments of Africa, the companies adopted every coercive practice they could think of and that they could get away with. And they got away with plenty. One could almost visualize the ignorant, illiterate, tough, brutish, ex-convict type of foreman or overseer sent by Headquarters in the capitals of Europe to do their bidding in Africa.

Predictably, all this was devastating to African populations. Many rebelled, others, to avoid recruitment, ran away from their localities. At times, entire villages relocated outside the zones of jurisdiction the companies. But none of this had any real effect in curbing the actions of the latter. This being so, by the mid- 1940s millions of Africans suffered from forced labour, and although reforms were legislated in the wake of the second world war (May 1945), by France, Britain and Belgium, it took time for the practice to end. In the Portuguese colonies, however, forced labour remained until the early 1960s when it was terminated under pressure from nascent independence wars.

We now look at three typical, albeit, more extreme cases:

First, the most infamous of them all. That of the ‘Congo Free State’, a huge territory of more than 2,000,000 sq km; the only colony ever to be owned by and under the unrestrained control of one man, namely Leopold II king of Belgium. That small state however, the newest entity in Europe and not a major power by any means, had no desire in colonial acquisitions. Its king, nevertheless, thought differently. Presenting himself as a philanthropist, eager to bring the benefits of the 3 Cs to the black continent he managed to persuade the other powers to award him the vast territory as his personal property.

Leopold ruled his “property” from 1885 to 1908 during which, according to the Kinshasa correspondent of the BBC: “He turned his "Congo Free State" into a massive labour camp, made a fortune for himself from the harvest of its wild rubber (5), and contributed in a large way to the death of perhaps 10 million innocent people”.

As was the practice, he gave concessions to a few commercial companies to exploit ivory (6) and later to extract natural rubber. He licensed them to make profits, in return to paying him taxes and revenues. To help in the matters of recruitment of labour and to keep the latter in check, he created his own army of 19000 black soldiers commanded by white officers. He called it: the Force ‘Publique’.

Soldiers would march into villages, hold womenfolk hostages, leaving no choice for men, desperate to free them, but to head into the rain forests to collect their allocated quota of natural rubber sap (7). But as the trees near villages were exhausted, men had to venture deeper and deeper into the forests, sometimes for days and even weeks, in inhospitable surroundings, in search of the productive trees.

With the women hostages and the men fully engaged, there was practically no one left to plant, fish and otherwise provide for the families. Accordingly, in all villages, starvation and disease were widespread. Moreover, because of gender separation, hardships and traumatization birth rates fell dramatically. Some demographers have estimated that, all in all, between 1880 and 1920 the population of the Congo may have fallen by as much as 50%, from 20 to 10 million people.

Despite all these hardships, anyone failing to meet his assigned quota would receive beatings, have his house or even village burnt. Punishments could go as far as amputating the hand of one or more family members (image)(8). Understandably men ran away from home to escape being forced into the forests. Others rebelled. They were all hunted down. In these circumstances a particularly bestial procedure became prevalent. For each bullet expended against a rebel, a soldier of the Force Publique had to present his commanding officer with a chopped hand as proof or death. Therefore, after each punitive expedition soldiers carried back to base baskets containing severed hands, equal in number to the bullets fired. Expectedly, not every bullet met its intended target. Hence to make up for the deficits, the soldiers chopped the hands of live, innocent people, filled their baskets and headed back to camp.

Chapter illustration

Eventually, there was an international outcry against this “legalized robbery enforced by violence” by various organizations and individuals. It embarrassed the Belgian government to such an extent that in 1908 it confiscated the Congo Free State from its own monarch, took direct charge and renamed it the Belgian Congo. There is no question that king Leopold fully deserved all the criticism and blame for allowing the bestial methods described, but, in fairness, he should have shared them with others since according to the Encyclopedia Britannica: “However much other nations might have condemned Leopold’s rule, rival colonizers were also keen to make their colonies profitable and did so by farming out concessions to private enterprise and turning a blind eye to the large-scale use of forced labour”. But “Because the system’s effects in the Congo could so easily be blamed on one man, who could safely be attacked because he did not represent a great power, an international outcry focused on Leopold…Leopold, however, made the Belgian government pay him for his prized possession” (9). And finally: “His most important legacy, however, remains the human catastrophe that the rubber forced-labour system brought to the Congo—a heritage that continued to echo in that region more than a century after Leopold’s death [in December, 1909]”.But under Belgian state control forced labour continued until the 1920s.

Second, Portugal unable to develop the entire region of Mozambique through its own means allocated the colony to three concessionary companies to exploit land resources and people, in exchange for an obligation to develop agriculture, communications, social services and trade. One of these was the Mozambique Company which, in actual fact, ruled its concession uncontested and as it wished from 1892 to 1942. According to one passage in the Encyclopedia Britannica: “Any economic development and investment in infrastructure was related directly to company interests and usually undertaken at African expense”. Moreover, its recruitment practices are reported to have been “the most efficient and extensive in Africa”. They were pervasive, sustained, acutely exploitative and inhumane and included, among others the coercion of village and tribal chiefs into “enthusiastically” participating in the forced recruitment of their own people, or else lose whatever privileges they possessed.

These practices were known to executives of the company and representatives of the Portuguese government, and although they may have deplored them in private, in public nonetheless, they defended the company by citing: “the benefits of any formal, indigenous work regimen as a key pillar in Lisbon’s broader civilizing mission”.

Third, is what has since been considered by most scholars as the genocide of the ‘Hereros’, a native polity in the German possession of South West Africa (now Namibia).

Germany colonized that part of the continent between 1884 and 1890. In 1903 the 250,000 local Herero inhabitants tried to resist the settlement of some 3,000 German nationals who were affecting their livelihood in this already impoverished semi-arid region. Followed a succession of inconclusive engagements. The Hereros eventually withdrew to a remote area in the hope of safety while awaiting a possible negotiated settlement with the German government. But the latter had a different objective. In 1904 General Lothar von Trotha was dispatched with the expressed strategy to: “annihilate these masses with a simultaneous blow”.

The application of this strategy resulted in the defeat of the Herero nation. Most of its population managed to escape into the Kalahari Desert where many thousands died of thirst. German soldiers patrolled the edges of the desert to prevent anyone from returning. Those who surrendered were executed on the spot. By then the strategy of von Trotha had become an extermination order by virtue of which: “Within the German boundaries, every Herero, whether found armed or unarmed, with or without cattle, will be shot. I shall not accept any more women and children”. Eventually this was replaced by concentration camps located near large towns where labour was needed. For three years, mostly women and children were rented out to private businesses or employed by the colony government on infrastructure projects. By the end of this yet another episode in the dark saga of the rape of Africa, some 75% of the Hereros had been eliminated, thus qualifying for the term genocide (10).

Bokassa, Amin, Mugabe

More than one writer(11) has said that the present state of Sub Saharan Africa, after half a century of independence, meaning: poverty, authoritarianism, kleptocracy and corruption are the legacy of 70 years of colonialism. In particular, they point to the following: a-In drawing the colonies boundaries, the Europeans have ignored entirely the ethnic, religious and language divisions of native Africans. This, at independence, resulted in artificial states with mixed populations who did not really belong together and hence amenable to violence and even genocides as was witnessed, for example, in Rwanda in the 1990s. b-During their entire colonial presence, the Europeans have aimed the whole of their economic and development undertakings, exclusively, at Europe’s needs with all the rewards going to the concessionary companies, banks, white settlers and other interested European parties. At no time did the interests of the Africans matter. c-The colonials, therefore, directed their power at the control of indigenous populations to ensure the undisturbed and continuous exploitation of natural resources, by mean of authoritarian rule bolstered by strong police and military forces. d-They did not attempt to prepare local leaders for post-colonial rule. To the contrary, they lacked any commitment to independence (12) and at times tried to sabotage its process. In Guinea, for example, “the French dismantled the entire bureaucracy before leaving the country. All paper documents were destroyed leaving the New Guinean government with no records whatsoever”.

So although pre-independence leaders were exuberant about self rule and had great hopes in guiding their respective countries toward democracy etc, they soon found out, once they were in, that they had underestimated the hurdles and, in due course, were displaced by the like of Bokassa, Idi Amin and Mugabe (13), who were and are practicing nothing more or less than the methods learnt from their European predecessors.

Put simply finally, the C meaning civilization in the 3Cs slogan of the 1880’ as justification for the colonization of Africa, if at all honestly meant (possibly, to make up for more than three centuries of trading in slaves), was somehow lost along the way, and no one ever after that, gave it a second thought.

(1)The ban was ignored by traders, Arabs or otherwise. Many local chiefs were reluctant to give up the use of slaves. The explorer David Livingstone, during his travels in the remote regions of Africa in the 1840s, witnessed the “continent's slave trade at its source, where the victims are captured by fellow Africans for sale to the Arab traders who dispatch them to markets on the east coast”. (2) By one count there were more than 30 European explorers criss- crossing the African continent during the 19th century.

(3)Apart from the coastal strips from which they had, for centuries, shipped people for servitude in the Americas, the politicians agreeing in Berlin knew practically nothing of the interior of the vast continent. Neither

its geography nor the particularities of its demography. Thus the lines drawn on the map delineated not the realities on the ground but the zones of interests of the parties present. Everything else be damned.

(4) In a report by the BBC we find that the abolition of slavery “…never applied against the practice of forced labour in colonial Africa,… Under all the colonial powers, forced labour of one kind or another remained in place into the 1940s, and the imposition of taxes forced people into low-paid mining, industry or agribusiness jobs when they might otherwise have remained farmers”.

(5)In the 1890s, with the advent of the motor car and other products with rubber components, the latter became a highly desirable and very lucrative commodity. But it took many years for a planted rubber tree to reach maturity, so in the meantime, the alternative became a mad rush into the rain forests to drain the sap of their wild rubber trees.

(6)“Initially he was most interested in ivory, a material that was greatly valued in the days before plastics because it could be carved into a great variety of shapes—statuettes, jewelry, piano keys, false teeth, and more”.

(7)The rubber quotas were, reportedly, in excess of what could reasonably be expected of the men.

(8)From the same BBC correspondent quoted earlier: “John Harris of Baringa, [a missionary] for example, was so shocked by what he had come across that he felt moved to write a letter to Leopold's chief agent in the Congo: “I have just returned from a journey inland to the village of Insongo Mboyo. The abject misery and utter abandon is positively indescribable. I was so moved, Your Excellency, by the people's stories that I took the liberty of promising them that in future you will only kill them for crimes they commit””.

(9)Reportedly, 3.8 million Sterling Pound. A fortune, no doubt, in 1908.

(10)Belatedly, the descendants of General Lothar von Trotha on a visit to Namibia in 2004 apologized to the descendants of the Hereros with the words: “We, the von Trotha family, are deeply ashamed of the terrible events that took place 100 years ago. Human rights were grossly abused that time” and: “We say sorry, since we bear the name of General Lothar von Trotha. We however do not only want to look back, but also look to the future”.

(11) One of them, Richard Drayton, in the Guardian of 20th August 2005 writes:“...the fragility of contemporary Africa is a direct consequence of two centuries of slaving, followed by another of colonial despotism”.

(12)The same Richard Drayton: “Nor was "decolonisation" all it seemed: both Britain and France attempted to corrupt the whole project of political sovereignty….. We talk about the Congo [post- independence] tragedy without mentioning that it was a British statesman, Alec Douglas-Home, who agreed with the US president in 1960 that Patrice Lumumba, its elected leader, needed to "fall into a river of crocodiles"”.

(13): A) Jean- Bedel Bokassa (1921-1996) military dictator of the Central African Republic from 1966. In 1976 has himself crowned emperor (in emulation of his hero Napoleon I) as Bokassa I of the Central African Empire at unbearable costs to his country, one of the poorest in the world. The empire is abolished in 1979.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

B) Idi Amin (1925- 2003) the “Butcher of Uganda, for his brutality”, with 300,000 people killed and many more tortured during his military dictatorship regime from 1971 to 1979. A man of little formal education, he joined the British colonial army as assistant cook in 1946 but rose in ranks to become an officer by the time of his country’s independence in 1962.

C)Robert Mugabe, born 1921 and current president-autocrat of Zimbabwe. Has held this position since 1987. Has been reelected 7 times to date and his elections are always fraught with fraud and irregularities.

Cruel Justice 1

CRUEL JUSTICE JANUARY, 2016.

PART-1: GUIDANCE FROM ABOVE NOVEMBER, 2016

The Author

Chapter illustration

Inquisition council/court.

Final proof reading: 17.11.2016.

ALONG with human sacrifice, capital punishment is the other societally sanctioned killing of fellow men; and whereas the first is practiced mostly to placate the gods, the second is carried out in the name of retribution, deterrence and ultimately justice. Since virtually all civilizations, at one time or another, condoned slavery and practiced human sacrifice, it is no surprise that they also executed their offenders whose crimes were considered serious enough, as to endanger the well-being of society thus deserving death.

In this part-1, we look at the past and present attitudes and teachings of the two largest world religions, Christianity and Islam, in this respect. But, I do not wish, however, to move on without a word or two on the positions of the two great philosophies of the East, Hinduism and Buddhism, on the matter.

Hinduism may be regarded as mankind’s earliest organized religion. It has no known founder and is often spoken of as “ 'a way of life' or 'a family of religions' rather than a single religion”. It is also about the caste system or the hierarchical classification of society into classes from the highest to the lowest on the basis of birth and occupation. It rejects killing and violence, hence, the concept of non-violence championed by the most celebrated Hindu the Mahatma Gandhi to whom “An eye for an eye ends up making the whole world blind”.

Buddha abhorred violence and consequently capital punishment. To him, the inhuman treatment of an offender does not reverse his acts nor cure the ills of the rest of humanity and is injurious to the minds of those doing the punishing; it is impossible for them to carry out severe punishment with compassion. On the contrary, the criminal should be made to make amends and be rehabilitated for ultimately reintegrating his community. The essence of his philosophy can be gathered from: “Everyone fears punishment; everyone fears death, just as you do. Therefore you do not kill or cause to be killed” and “If a person foolishly does me wrong, I will return to him the protection of my boundless love. The more evil that comes from him, the more good will go from me”. The most prominent Buddhist is, of course, the current Tibetan Dalai Lama, 1989 Nobel Peace Prize laureate, a charismatic personality venerated by his co-religionists and much respected in the rest of the world.

Inquisition and Encyclical

HISTORICALLY, Christians have differed on the subject of capital punishment. On the one hand there were those who saw in the religious texts justifications for it; while others saw in the unjust execution of the innocent Christ and his preaching of love and forgiveness, reasons enough to condemn it.

The Church however, had until the twentieth century accepted the application of the death penalty for certain crimes, but leaving the responsibility of condemnation and execution to the temporal authorities. This is evident in this saying of St Augustine (354-430), an early Christian theologian and philosopher : “The same divine law which forbids the killing of a human being allows certain exceptions, as when God authorizes killing by a general law or, as when He gives an explicit commission to an individual for a limited time….it is in no way contrary to the commandment ‘Thou shalt not kill’ to wage war at God's bidding, or for the representatives of the State's authority to put criminals to death, according to law or the rule of rational justice”.

THE Roman Catholic Church, epitomized by the Pope and the Vatican, continued along the same line. Pope Innocent III (1161-1216) proposed that “the secular power can, without mortal sin, exercise judgment of blood, provided that it punishes with justice, not out of hatred, with prudence, not precipitation”. St Thomas Aquinas( 1225-1274) a very influential Catholic philosopher and theologian accepted the death penalty as a deterrent but not as vengeance. And the Roman Catechism, (“a summary of the principles of Christian religion in the form of questions and answers, used for religious instruction”), of 1566 stated “ that the power of life and death had been entrusted by God to the civil authorities. The use of this power did not embody the act of murder, but rather a supreme obedience to God's commandments”.

In the Middle Ages, the Catholic Church authorized the execution of heretics by the secular authorities. (Heresy is “a belief or opinion that does not agree with the official belief or opinion of a particular religion”). Hence the infamous Inquisition. Instituted in 1184 by Pope Lucius III, it “required bishops to make a judicial inquiry, or inquisition, for heresy”.

Thus, to combat heresy, councils were set up by the Church to prosecute and persecute all those accused of thinking differently from the ecclesiastically established doctrine. Later in 1252, Pope Innocent IV authorized inquisitors to torture obstinate heretics who would not recant. The trials were held behind closed door; but the verdicts were read in public and the executions that followed attended by officials and commoners (1).

Inquisitions prevailed in Catholic Europe from the 15th to the 19th century. They became permanent institutions, constantly on the lookout for people who thought differently than the Church. Those heretics who admitted their deviations and recanted in front of judges, were given penances such as wearing yellow crosses on their clothing and imprisonment. Whereas, those heretics who did not recant, were ‘burned at the stake’. But according to the Encyclopedia Britannica: “There were usually not many cases of this kind, because the chief aim of the inquisitors was to reconcile heretics to the church. On rare occasions, however, large public executions did take place, as at Verona in 1278, when some 200 Cathars  [Christian religious group different from Roman Catholicism] were burned”.

Of more notoriety, however, was the Spanish Inquisition. It was established in 1478 by Pope Sixtus IV at the urging of Ferdinand and Isabella, the joint rulers of Aragon and Castile (Spain in those days). Ostensibly aimed at combating heresy, it served more, according to some historians, to consolidate the monarchs’ power. The inquisition was later expanded to the Spanish colonies of the Americas and finally abolished by the Spanish government in 1834.

Among others, the Spanish Inquisition targeted first the ‘Marranos’ (those converts from Judaism) and later the ‘Moriscos’ (Muslims who accepted baptism after the fall of Grenada in 1492). The Christianity of both was suspicious in the eyes of the authorities who believed that in private they reverted to their previous beliefs. And thus many were prosecuted and persecuted; the methods used involving torture, confiscation of property and ultimately burning at the stake.

More recently, Pope Pius XII (1876-1958) had this to say about the execution of a condemned man: “…In this case it is reserved to the public power to deprive the condemned person of the enjoyment of life in expiation of his crime when, by this crime, he has already dispossessed himself of his right to life”.

More remarkably, between 1929 and 1969 attempts on the life of popes were punishable by the death penalty, according to the laws of the Vatican itself .

However, in the later part on the 20th century the attitude of the Catholic Church began to turn towards abolitionism. To begin with, in 1980, a statement, condemning capital punishment, was issued at the end of a conference of Catholic Bishops, with the approval of the majority of those present. Then, in March 1995, was issued the encyclical (2) of Pope John Paul II (1920-2005) which “expresses the position of the Catholic Church regarding the value and inviolability of human life”. Among other positions it included: “….If… non-lethal means are sufficient to defend and protect people’s safety from the aggressor [ the state] will limit itself to such means, as these are more in keeping with…..the common good and more in conformity with the dignity of the human person”. The pontiff concludes with his belief that states today have the means of making an offender incapable of doing harm again with the possibility of enabling him to redeem himself; thus: “…the cases in which the execution of the offender is an absolute necessity are rare, if practically non-existent” (3).

FOR a long time until fairly recently the Orthodox Church neither endorsed nor condemned capital punishment, leaving the matter entirely in the hands of secular authorities. It did not condemn it, because of the Bible’s “Whoever sheds the blood of man by man shall his blood be shed” ; nor did it endorse it, considering that “its abolition can be driven by genuine Christian values, especially stressing the need for mercy”.

But in the last century, virtually all the ecclesiastical bodies of the Orthodox Church have come out unequivocally against capital punishment. Statements such as: “With more information available to us today about the consequences of capital punishment, many Christians are of the opinion that it no longer serves as a deterrent to crime…” from USA’s Orthodoxy to Russia’s: “The abolition of death penalty would give more opportunities ….for the [condemned person] to repent. It is also evident that punishment by death… makes misjudgment irreparable…Keeping in mind that mercy toward a fallen man is always more preferable than revenge, the Church welcomes these steps by state authorities”.

SIMILARLY, the Protestant Churches, evolving from the Reformation movements of Martin Luther(1483-1546) and John Calvin (1509-1546), have historically not taken sides either for or against the death penalty, again leaving the matter in the hands of secular authorities. Nowadays, however, in the USA some Protestant denominations actively support and campaign for that penalty on the grounds that “…God established capital punishment in the Noahic Covenant”. But, others take the opposite view. So much so, that in 1989 the World Alliance of Reformed [Protestant] Churches have reaffirmed that: “Where the death penalty is implemented, God’s redeeming love is violated”.

SIGNIFICANT, however, was the strong declaration of the World Council of Churches in 1990 against the death penalty. Among others, it said that “in taking away a human life, the state usurps the will of God”. More to the point, it urges its member to “develop theological and biblical arguments…. in their efforts to abolish the death penalty and to refute the theological and biblical arguments advanced by supporters of the death penalty”.(The WCC membership includes “most Protestant and Eastern Orthodox bodies but not the Roman Catholic Church”).

CONTRARY to the Christian faith, Islam is unequivocally pro-capital punishment for certain offenses. Islamic jurisprudence holds that capital punishment is first and foremost necessary as a deterrent to others . Ultimately, however, the final judge is Allah on the day of judgment.

In Islam there are two categories of offences punishable by the death penalty. They are: a-‘Hudud’ (singular: ‘hadd’) offences, consisting of apostasy( riddah)(4), adultery (zina) armed robbery (hiraba) and rebellion (baghi). In these cases judges, having established culpability, are left no choice but to condemn the culprits to die by the sword. Put simply they (the judges) cannot exercise any discretion since these offences threaten Muslim society; they are crimes against Allah. Even so, ‘hadd’ punishment is so severe that a crime of this type requires a very high degree of proof. It is the judge’s responsibility to ensure that the evidence before him is fool proof with no possibility of error. In cases of adultery (zina), for example, the judge must hear the testimonies of four persons who have witnessed the sexual act; they must, moreover, agree on every detail. It is to ensure that injustices are avoided, that Prophet Muhammad is quoted as saying: “Wherever possible, do not inflict [hudud] punishments on Muslims; if there is a way out for someone, let him go. It is better for the ruler (al-imam) to err in forgiveness than for him to err in punishment”. b-‘Qisas’ offences such as murder are considered not directed at Allah and hence can be dealt with in accordance to the judges’ perceptions. An impor- tant element here, in cases of murder, is the decision of the family of the victim(s). They can decide to have the perpetrator(s) put to death,have his/their sentence commuted to a lesser punishment against the payment of a ‘diyyah’ (blood money). Or they can, finally forgive the murderer(s), leaving the ultimate judgment to Allah; forgiveness being a high moral stance in Islam.

Although the Qura’an condemns homosexuality (‘liwat’), it contains no specific punishment for it. Accordingly all Sunni and Shia schools also forbid this sexual tendency but leave its punishment to the individual judges who most often than not qualify homosexual relations as hadd offences punishable by death, if confirmed by irrefutable proof. As reportedly stated by one contemporary Saudi cleric: “the only point of theological debate is over how the offender should be killed”.

In contrast to homosexuality, rape or as called by Islamic law ‘coercive zina’ is not referred to in the Qura’an. But as explained by Hina Azam (5):

“Muslim jurists from the earliest period of Islamic law agreed that perpetrators of coercive zina should receive the hadd punishment normally applicable but that the hadd punishment should not be applied to the victims”. Here again convincing proof is required. Further, she explains that jurists have differentiated between coercive zina with a free woman and that involving a female slave, stemming from the legal status of the latter as property. Accordingly, the violation of a female slave did not entail more than the financial compensation of the slave master for damage to and depreciation in the value of the property.

(1)Of those made to appear at an inquisition court was the famous Galileo Galilei (1564-1642) for correctly holding that “the Sun is the center of the universe and that the Earth is a planet”. At that time this was considered a heresy by the Church. Galileo was admonished “not to hold, teach, or defend the theory in any way whatever, either orally or in writing”. In this manner he was silenced and thus allowed to die of natural causes at the ripe old age of 78.

(2) “For the modern Catholic Church, a Papal encyclical is a kind of letter concerning Catholic doctrine sent by the Pope addressed to bishops, patriarchs, primates, and archbishops….”

(3)Let us just recall, here, the attempt on the life this pope on 13th May 1981 when Mehmed Ali Agca shot and wounded the pope. The former was subsequently forgiven by the latter and pardoned in 2000 by the Italian president at his request.

(4)In a long paper, Dr Jamal Badawi, the Egyptian born (1939) Canadian Muslim scholar contests the validity of apostasy as a capital crime in Islam. Following his analysis of the Qura’an, the Hadith and historical precedents he concludes: “The preponderance of evidence from both the Qur’an and Sunnah indicates that there is no firm ground for the claim that apostasy is in itself a mandatory fixed punishment [Hadd], namely capital punishment….As religious opinions [Fatwas] change with the changing time, place, custom and circumstances, this issue should be re-examined within the basic boundaries of Islamic jurisprudence….. In the meantime, Fiqhi rulings and interpretations in the non-fixed area need not be permanent either”. Curiously, he is quoted by one source as being inspired by Hassan Al Banna and his Muslim Brotherhood, not exactly known for liberal notions of the kind quoted here.

(5)“Hina Azam, Assistant Professor, Department of Middle Eastern Studies, University of Texas at Austin. Specialization(s):Islamic Studies (Law, Theology, Exegesis, Hadith, Gender/Sexuality)”.

Man Inhumanity Toward Man

MAN INHUMANITY TOWARD MAN

Sweatshop in Bangladesh

NOVEMBER 2024

REFERENCES

Introduction and Overview. **ResearchGate. Exploitation, Human Nature etc. **Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy Archive. Exploitation.

Slavery. **Encyclopedia Britannica. **Wikipedia. **The Author. Masters and Slaves (part-1). **The Author. Masters and Slaves (part-2).

Serfdom. **Encyclopedia Britannica. **Wikipedia.

Sweatshops **Encyclopedia Britannica. **Smithsonian Magazine. 20th Century Slavery was hiding etc. **Scholarly Community Encyclopedia. Meet the old Sweatshops.

Guinea Pigs **‘The Shock Doctrine’ by Naomi Klein. Chapter 1. **The Guardian. Patients used as drug 'guinea pigs'. **Independent. Without consent: how drugs companies etc. **BBC. Have India’s poor become human guinea pigs?

INTRODUCTION.

In my preceding narrative ‘Unpleasant Truths about our Species’, I have described its nefarious activities vis a-vis others in the Homo genus and the wild fauna it met, as it populated the Globe. With no more extant cousins and practically only domesticated animals left, it has, in the last few millennia, turned upon itself in a frenzy of exploitation of the other.

As stated hereinafter, exploitation takes many shapes. Still, this narrative briefly elaborates on humans: as slaves, as serfs, as sweatshop workers, and as guinea pigs. There are others. Two come to mind: sex trafficking and pedophilia.

OVERVIEW

According to the ‘Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy Archive’: “To exploit someone is to take unfair advantage of them. It is to use another person’s vulnerability for one’s own benefit”. Very often the benefit is financial, but there are a few cases of exploitation when it is not so.

As hunter-gatherers, Homo-sapiens depended on the collection of edible plants and on hunting wild animals for their meat. There was equality between them, no hierarchy and no social stratification. A man differed from another, merely, in physical traits, aptitudes and ability to mate with the most desirable partner of the other gender and secure continuity of his lineage.

The subjugation of man by man began 12,000 years ago with the onset of the agricultural era and the evolution of settled communities in villages etc. This new tendency was accentuated with the first civilizations, 5,500 years ago. And again, with the dawn of the technological age 200 or so years ago. Whichever date of the three is taken, it represents a tiny fraction of the 200 to 300 thousand years that have elapsed, so far, since our species evolved on the Planet.

Henceforth, “Protected by the state [kings and ruling classes], elites owned and controlled practically all… thereby possessing the full means to exploit those without ownership or control, who, to survive, had to work on or with the elites’ property”, as stated by Jon D. Wisman, professor of economics at the American University, Washington D.C. Thus, human societies became stratified into ‘the haves and the have nots’ with the latter constituting a majority meant to work and toil for the betterment and enrichment of the former.

A trend was started with the advent of the first realms in Mesopotamia some 5,500 years ago. Their kings convinced their peoples that they were the representatives of the gods on Earth. As such they must yield to their authority. Else the merciless wraths of the deities will befall them.

Since that time, practically every king and emperor claimed his right to rule from the gods or God, including, for example, the kings of France until the revolution of 1789. In modern times, delegations from the Almighty have been replaced-(except in theocracies)-,by ideological myths-(communism, neoliberalism etc.).Whatever, the state always protected its ‘peoples’ vis-à-vis their poorer subjects/citizens, using violence, if necessary, to make them heed.

One of the earliest forms of exploitation, in history, was usury or the lending at exorbitant interest rates. Both the Greek philosopher Aristotle (384-322 BCE) and later the Catholic Church condemned it

Most notably, of course, was Karl Marx ( 1818-1883 CE) who coined “From each according to his abilities, to each according to his needs”. He wrote against the exploitation of the labour of men, women and children, by those in whose factories they toiled, in early industrial Europe. The latter became rich on the backs of their workers who were paid a pittance and led a miserable life in the slums of emerging industrial towns.

After his death, Marx’s ideology was kept alive, for a century or so, by fanatical and forceful disciples. But, in the long run, it turned out to be but ‘a flash in the pan’. Greed proved to be stronger. Today, it is dead in virtually all societies.

SLAVERY

Before proceeding, I wish to redirect my readers to earlier narratives on the subject: parts one and two of ‘Masters and Slaves’ in which I have gone to some depth into the practices of slavery in Ancient Egypt, Babylon, Ancient Greece, the Roman world, the Islamic world, India, China, Japan, Europe, Africa, the Americas and the Caribbeans. What follows, is mostly new material, with perhaps a limited recapitulation here and there.

Slavery is the human condition according to which one man, woman or child is owned by another, in the same way, he owns his house, furniture and domestic animals etc. As such a slave is devoid of rights like cows, and horses. An owner/master can dispose of him/her like he does with his pigs. A slave cannot marry without the consent of his/her owner. Children issuing from such a union are born into slavery an can be separately sold off to a third party.

As stated by Britannica“… most slaves were at the very bottom of society… throughout history slaves have often been considered to be stupid…lazy, untruthful, untrustworthy, prone to drunkenness, idle, boorish, lascivious, licentious, and cowardly….” .

What is remarkable, is that throughout the millennia, slavery has coexisted with polytheistic beliefs, the great religions and philosophies of the Asia and the three monotheistic religions. They all showed tolerance to its evils. Presumably, because slavery was so prevalent that it was felt prudent not to alienate believers.

Let’s begin by saying that early humans did not practice slavery. Being classless hunting and gathering communities, they had no need for the practice. Exceptions to this were some tribes of ‘Indians’ in the north-western part of North America.

Slavery arose following the arrival of the agricultural era some 12,000 years ago. Thenceforth, the acquisition and possession of land by some and the need for manpower to till it “represent[ed] the beginning of moral inequality. Property allows for the domination and exploitation of the poor by the rich”. So wrote the prominent French philosopher Jean Jacques Rousseau (1712-1778) in his ‘Discourse on the Origin of Inequality’. Indeed, all along human history, virtually, every organized society in any one of the inhabited continents has made use of slaves for a longer or shorter period of its history.

Still, how did the practice begin? How did it occur to someone to subjugate another for his benefit. No one knows. There is, nevertheless, an interesting conjecture mentioned in Britannica. It speculates that, perhaps, sometime in the depth of prehistory-(before writing was invented)-, someone realised that it was more rewarding to put thieves, criminals and war captives to the grindstone than to kill or eat them.

How did people become enslaved? First, in some societies convicted criminals were penalised with enslavement. Fathers sold their children to escape hunger. And, there were those who sold themselves in repayment of debt.

Secondly, were the citizens and warriors of a defeated community carried away by the victorious. This was the practice, for example, with the Ottoman Empire during its successful campaigns in the Balkans. And for a short time, the ‘Slavs’ in central ,eastern and south eastern Europe were similarly enslaved by Europeans from the west. More about this hereinafter.

Thirdly, and much more importantly was, of course, the international trading primarily targeting Africans from the sub-Saharan regions-(south of the Muslim countries of western North Africa). For centuries, ordinary people were abducted, by fellow Africans, in ethnic/tribal raids. They were then, sold to Arab or European traders who in turn offered them to the highest bidder in slave markets abroad.

Still, long before they became the suppliers of slaves to foreigners, Africans enslaved Africans, albeit from different polities and ethnicities. The frequent wars and raids among them inevitably yielded captives who were subsequently traded locally, mostly, as domestic servants. According to Joseph E. Holloway, professor of Pan African Studies at California State University: “Slave raids and inter- ethnic wars generated and intensified a great deal of bloodshed, destruction and the general misery that ensued”.

There were two categories of slavery. The non-productive one such as the privately owned servants, concubines and eunuchs. Depending on their number and variety they could be a status symbol for the owners. Then, came the slaves who served the priests in temples and in other places of worship. Finally, there were those belonging to the state. Those with education became civil servants, teachers and even ministers. The soldiery types were used in the armed forces. And at the bottom were public works labourers.

The second category was that of the productive slaves whose labour yielded financial rewards to their owners. They were the ones who worked in mines and plantations. They spent their entire lives in demeaning and strenuous, back- breaking labour.

Britannica considers that “slavery …seems to have been especially important in the development of two of the world’s major civilizations, Western (including ancient Greece and Rome) and Islamic”. Hereinafter is a brief outline of each.

Greek philosopher Socrates (470-399 BCE) took pains in justifying slavery, for without it “…how would aristocrats learn what must be learned to maintain culture or have time to cultivate political virtue?”. As for the polymath Aristotle (384-322 BCE), he was convinced that humans were destined from birth either for a life of slavery or that of a free person.

To take only the historically famous cities of Athens and Sparta in the 5th century BCE. The former numbered 80,000 to 100,000 slaves out of an entire population of 270,000 people. As to the latter, the helots-(state owned slaves)- outnumbered their masters by a ratio of nearly 10 to one.

If anything, Ancient Rome was even more addicted to slavery than Greece. Their functions ranged from secretaries of the emperor, to civil servants, to household servants and to miners and sewer cleaners. Not to forget the entertainment and amusement slaves such as the gladiators and prostitutes. Enslaved people came from Europe-(the Gauls, for instance)- and the Mediterranean lands-( such as Greeks)-captured by Rome’s conquering legions.

Following the demise of the Roman Empire around 500 CE, slavery in Medieval Europe-(until about 1500 CE)- was extensive. So much so, that the Catholic Church urged against it and especially against sending Christians to non-Christian places.

The Anglo-Saxon tribes started settling in England beginning 449 CE. In the process they turned many of the original inhabitants into slaves. Later, between 800 and1050 CE raiding Scandinavian Vikings capture English men and women for slave service back home and for sale in Islamic Spain and in the Abbasi world further east. And in the 10th century as German tribes expanded eastwards, they captured and enslaved a great number of Slavs.

Then, of course, there was the 400 year-long-(from the 16th to the 19th century)-, enslavement of Africans, to work in the mines and plantations of European settlers in the Americas. This was a unique form of slavery. First, it involved exclusively the people of Africa. Second, it contributed to the wealth accumulation and great enrichment of slave traders and of those whose businesses depended on it. Third, because “…the owners were of…European stock and the slaves of African stock, the degree of social isolation of and contempt for slaves was extraordinary”. And finally, its legacy of racism and discrimination against Blacks lingers on to the present day.

The ordeal of the would-be slaves began with their abduction by fellow Africans, as we have seen. They transited through harbour stockades, while waiting to be sold to European ship captains. There, then, followed the horrendous sea voyage across the Atlantic, during which they were kept below-deck often lying on their sides, to save space, with their legs in iron. Upon reaching destination they were sold to the highest bidder etc.

It has been estimated that as of late 19th century some 7 to 10 million Africans-(excluding those who perished during the crossings and were thrown overboard)- had made that east-west journey.

Muslims, Arab and otherwise, were very active traders in, and avid users of slaves. So much so that the countries in the Arabian Peninsula were the last in the world to abolish slavery. They did so in the 1960’s. Still there was a hold out: Mauritania. It followed suit in 1981.

Where did they get them from? Primarily, from Africa. In this case, African raiders handed them 0ver to slave merchants who took them overseas. I, now pass the word to Congolese historian Elikia M'bokolo (DOB:1944) who wrote:“…Across the Sahara, through the Red Sea, from the Indian Ocean ports …At least ten centuries of slavery for the benefit of the Muslim countries (from the ninth to the nineteenth)....”.

According to estimates given by the BBC; anywhere between 11 and 14 million Africans were taken out of the continent. The BBC adds that no matter how they travelled , across the desert or over sea and ocean “the.. conditions endured…were… horrible”.

But Africa was by no means the only source. Indeed, the Muslim califate in the Iberian Peninsula organized raids on its Christian neighbours and brought back, over the years, thousands of men, women and children for enslavement. No wonder that in 1452, during the ‘Reconquista’-(the enduring conflict between Muslims and Iberians ending in 1492 with the surrender of Granada)-, the incumbent pope issued an edict “granting the kings of Spain and Portugal the right to reduce any Saracens (Muslims), pagans and any other unbelievers to perpetual slavery, legitimizing the slave trade as a result of war….”.

Lastly, were the Muslim pirates of the Barbary coast-(shores of central and west North Africa)- who between the 15th and the 19th centuries enslaved a great many Europeans, abducted during raids on localities along the coasts of Europe. They were sold in Algerian, Moroccan and other slave market. It is reported that in the town of Algiers there were at one time, in the 17th century, more than 35,000 Christian slaves.

The reliance on slaves in the 500-year life of the Ottoman Empire is well known. But what is less so is that the Muslim, African kingdoms, the likes of Ghana, Mali, Kenya, Zanzibar, Madagascar and more enslaved more than 60% of their population.

Forward to our own times. Despite being universally illegal, slave-like conditions were endured by about 40 million people in 2019, according to Wikipedia. Many of them employed in sweatshops as we shall see hereinafter.

SERFDOM

According to ‘World History Encyclopedia’, serfs “were unfree labourers who worked the land of a landowner [the lord]…in return for physical and legal protection and the right to work a separate piece of land for their own basic needs”.

In the waning days of the Roman empire, from about 200 CE, some of the large privately owned estates, in which slaves and their descendants worked, became parceled amongst them. The latter, too weak to face tax collectors and the raiding of barbarians, and too poor to be really independent, sought the protection of large landowners in exchange for their service and loyalty.

Thus was the onset of serfdom. With the demise of the Roman Empire at the end of the 5th century, this arrangement became the practice in the new European polities.

Unlike slaves, serfs could not be traded. Nevertheless, they lived and worked under stringent restrictions. A serf could not choose to relocate from his place of work or residence without permission of his lord. But should the latter decide to sell his property to another lord, the surfs were part of the sale. In reality, therefore, the new owner was buying, along with the land, the serfs working it , their families, their service and loyalty without their consent.

More. A serf could not marry without the permission of his landlord and any children issuing from this marriage were de facto serfs from the day they are born to the day they die. In short, serfs were not technically slaves, but the lives they and their families led were not that much different.

A free peasant struck by the vicissitudes of nature or of his society, may choose to become a serf to a prosperous landlord. At least, by doing so, he was guarantying that his family and himself would not starve and will be protected in every respect. Still, before joining a would-be serf took an oath of loyalty that attached him to his lord. Wikipedia quotes the text of such an oath dating back to 7th century England. Among other pledges, the new serf confirms that he “will…be true and faithful…according to the laws of God and…[will never]…do anything which is unpleasing to him [his lord], on condition that he will hold to me as I shall deserve it…etc.”

Between 1347 and 1351 Europe was struck by the bubonic plague pandemic-(‘Black Death’)-which resulted in a horrendous loss of life among European populations. Despite its ravages, it was a blessing for the surviving serfs. With a shortage of hands to work the land, the demand and competition for the work of peasants rose. The latter took advantage of this turn of events and demanded better working and living conditions. At the same time and into the late 1400’s peasant revolts in western Europe sealed the fate of serfdom in England, France, the Netherlands and elsewhere.

Still, the practice endured till late in the 18th century in the Austro-Hungarian Empire and the first decennia of the 19th in in Prussia-(Germany).

But serfdom, in its worst form, was well entrenched in Russia and China. It was, finally done away with in 1861 and 1949 respectively.

SWEATSHOPS

A sweatshop is a place where people are forced to work for long hours in crowded spaces against abnormally low wages, and complete disregard for fairness, human rights and dignity.

They arose during the first half of the 19th century in the early days of industrial England. The name was coined in 1850 when industries contracted some parts of their production of goods to middlemen called ‘Sweaters’. They, in turn, recruited workers-(men, women and even children)- among the poor, ignorant members of society who, in the absence of other opportunities, accepted despite the harsh conditions.

Sweatshops boomed from the 1850’s with the arrival of poor, unskilled immigrants to the newly industrialized countries of western Europe and the USA. They formed a rich source of cheap work-hungry labour. What is more, their ignorance of local customs and language made them an easy prey for sweaters who did not refrain from taking the utmost advantage of them.

Before proceeding it is important to make clear that unlike with slaves, ‘sweaters’ could not coerce anyone to work in their sweatshops. “They could only hire people who were ready to work for the wages offered to them”, according to economics professor Benjamin Powell (DOB: 1978). In other words, for those in need it was a matter of either accepting what was offered or starve.

In the 20th century, laws and regulations were enacted in Europe and the United States, regulating the employment of workers. Among others they established a minimum wage, working hours, overtime payments, child protection and more. Even so, sweatshops remained in demand and consequently many went underground. Indeed, a study in 1994,reported by ‘ ‘Scholarly Community Encyclopedia’ “found that there were still thousands of sweatshops in the United States…”

Elsewhere, in several countries in Asia and Latin America with no or lenient labour laws and rampant corruption, sweatshops thrived. They made products for multinational companies-(Apple, Adidas, Nike, H&M and more)-, using cheap labour under intolerable conditions. Whenever criticized for abetting such practices, the multinationals undertook to put their foot down and demand better treatment of workers. But their pledges remained empty words for they valued their profits much more than their suppliers’ work methods.

Among those working in sweatshops were children. The ‘International Labour Organization, estimated that, in 2013, “more than 250 million children are in the employment ...In hopes of earning a living, many girls in… countries, such as Bangladesh and India, are willing to work at low wages for long working hours...”

Bangladesh is one country with a large enough poor population for sweatshops to proliferate. In 2013 an 8-story building housing five such premises collapsed causing the death of more than 1,000 people and injuring 2500 more. It was an event caused by greed and lack of oversight on the part of appropriate authorities.

The upper four floors, housing the sweatshops, were added to an existing building, without municipal authorization, without investigation of the original supporting structure and using inferior quality material. Adding insult to injury, the new workshops were equipped with heavy vibrating machinery. No wonder the building collapsed.

Under the heading of ‘20th Century Slavery Was Hiding In Plain Sight’ the ‘Smithsonian Magazine’ wrote in July 2020 of a sweatshop in the area of Los Angeles which turned out garments for sale to “big-name stores all over the country”.

On August 1995 law and government agents broke into the premises surrounded by walls and patrolled 24/7 by armed guards. They found 72 “modern-day slaves” some of whom had lived and toiled there for several years.

They were all poor young women from Thailand. They had all been smuggled into America under false pretenses and rosy promises. They came with hopes of good paying jobs that would enable them to improve the lot of the dependents they left behind. But once at destination, their passports were confiscated and they were taken to the secluded place of their work and residence.

They made garments for 19 hours daily, slept on the floor, eight to a room and where never allowed to go out. “They were stuck, kept in line not only with violent threats and fear for their disadvantaged families back in Thailand”.

Not to mention that, as illegal immigrants, should they venture outside the sweatshop and be caught, they would be repatriated. In other words: they were trapped with no hope of rescue.

HUMAN GUINEA PIGS

This is the story of Canadian psychiatrist Ewen Cameron (1901-1967). It is predominantly taken from chapter 1 of the 2007 book ‘The Shock Doctrine’ by Naomi Klein.

Dr. Cameron was a luminary in his field. Between 1952 and 1966, he presided over prestigious professional organizations. Yet ,he is remembered today for the “25 years of nightmares” as an article in ‘The Washington Post’ was headed. The nightmares being the torture-like experiments he carried out on the minds of his patients/guinea pigs.

The people who sought his help,at the medical center he ran in Montreal’s McGill University, variously suffered from ordinary mental disturbances such as depression, anxiety etc. He made them sign consent forms worded in such a way as to enabled him to use them as guinea pigs “without their knowledge or permission...” in the words of author Klein.

He was certain he could restore mental health to his patients by emptying their minds of all “old pathological patterns”. In other words he wanted to cause “massive loss of all recollections” including loss of all senses of self, place and time so as to start anew as if just born.

It was his conviction that he could achieve the desired results by subjecting his patients’ brains to powerful electric shocks. Additionally, he administered all kinds of medicines and chemicals, including sleep inducing drugs to keep them unconscious for 20 to 22 hours a day, over a period of 15 to 30 days with regular turning by nurses to avoid bed sores. They were awakened only for meals and toilet visits. And to disorient his patients further, the psychiatrist instructed the cooks, at the treatment center, to serve breakfast fare in the evenings, supper at middays and soup in the mornings.

And yet Dr. Cameron was fully aware of the serious side effects of his procedure. But he considered them of temporary nature. In a scientific paper in 1962 he described them as “...loss of a second language or all knowledge of his marital status ....[the patient] may be unable to walk without support, to feed himself, and he may show double incontinence”.

Gail an 18-year-old woman, went to see Cameron in the 1950’s. Upon admission she was assessed by the psychiatrist himself as “...reasonably well balanced individual”. Still, she was suffering from anxiety which he diagnosed stemmed from her domineering father.The young lady then underwent treatment which, according to her medical file, included “...huge doses of insulin...long periods...[of] drug-induced sleep; and eight times as many electro-shocks as was standard at the time”.

In consequence, she underwent a complete personality change. On one occasion when she was home, her sister admonished her for passing water on the floor of the living room, behaving babyishly and wanting to be fed with the bottle of her infant nephew.

Ultimately, Gail regressed dramatically. She could count to six only, was alternately quarrelsome or resigned and did not remember anyone in her family. She left the center in a much worse mental condition than the anxiety she complained about when she came in.

Harvey, an eminent psychiatrist himself “is ashamed of his profession” when he recalls the complete and utter ruin of his father’s family, social and professional life in the wake of Cameron experiments on him. He recalled that his father would enquire about his dead parents. One night, Harvey, then a teenager, woke up to see his father urinating in his bedroom. Clearly, he no longer knew where he was. He says that Cameron experimentation turned his father into “a poor pathetic man with no memory, no life...he lost everything”.

The US ‘Central Intelligence Agency’-(CIA)- was impressed enough by Cameron’s experiments “to control the mind”, that it funded him as part of their programme to establish “unusual techniques of interrogation including.. harassment ...total isolation...use of drugs...” etc. That was in the middle 1950’s, during the Cold War period and the hysteria about the Soviet Union and its allies.

What most impressed the CIA in the work of Cameron is that by depriving subjects of the senses of self, time and space “adults can be converted into dependent children whose minds are a blank slate of suggestibility”.

In 1988, ‘The New York Times’ investigated the alleged participation of the Agency “in torture and assassinations in Honduras”. From Honduran iterrogators , the Times learned of coaching sessions by the CIA. They told Hondurans “ don’t let [the detainee] sleep, keep him naked and isolated, put rats and cockroaches in his cell, give him bad food... [etc.]”. All this in addition to powerful electric shocks.

Under pressure from the press, the CIA reluctantly released its manual for the training of interrogators. It explained that the methods described are backed by the experimentatal work of respectable and competent scientists-(i.e. Cameron)- at McGill University. This being so, the manual ascertained that the exact and proper application of its recommendations should “destroy [the] capacity for resistance” of any detainee no matter his recalcitrance to cooperate. As expressed by author Klein, the manual“represent [ed] a new age of precise,refined torture...”

The stories below about unsuspecting patients being taken advantage of by medical doctors at the service and on the payroll of big pharmaceutical companies were taken from articles which hve appeared in 2003, 2011 and 2012 in respectively ‘The Guardian’, the ‘Independent’ and the BBC.

The large government hospital in the town of Indore, India is a teaching hospital in which medical research is carried out. Over a period of four years a group of physicians teamed up with pharmaceutical companies against payments totalling nearly $800,000 to conduct critical trials on Indians of the lowest Hindu caste. They made them sign consent documents, meaningless to them since they could not read or write. And even if they could, the papers were in English, a language they ignored.

“To us, a doctor is like a god. We believe everything he says” commented the father of a baby boy who suffered side effect after receiving a new vaccine. He claims he was ignorant of the fact that their infant was participating in a test. The consent they signed consisted of “two-page form in English. No one read out the details,"

Between 2005 and 2012, the Indore hospital coducted clinical tests on 3,300 individuals, more than half ot them children. Side effects caused the demise of dozens of subjects. The victims families were never compensted for their loss.

Bhopal, another Indian city suffered a man made catastrophy in 1984 when a large quantity of a toxic gas leaked from the pesticide factory of the American company, Union Carbide. It caused the ouright killing of some 25,000 people. As of 2012 generation after generation continue to suffer related health cosequences of the tragedy, including high incidences of cancer, birth defects and other ailments.

And yet, despite the tragedy, they were not spared the guinea pig status . Indeed like the poor people in Indore , when they came for reatment at the ‘Bhopal Memorial Hospital’ “...little did they know that... some would be used for clinical drug trials”

It may be reasonable to assume that this shady business is limited to the large reservoir of “poor, illiterate people” of India. Far from it. Investigations of similar practices in the United Kindom have revealed instances of the same. So much so as to cause one promineny membr of parliament to comment “It is extremely worrying that patients' trust is being abused by doctors who are more interested in making money from the pharmaceutical industry”.

The alarm was raised by a 72-year old widow, after visiting the surgery of her longtime and trusted physician, just for a routine check up. He gave her a bottle of tablets with directions concerning their ingestion. She was puzzled as to why he did not follow normal precedure of writing out a prescrition for a pharmacist to execute.

She had her answer soon enough: “within hours of swallowing the pill, she could hardly walk because she was so dazed. Her face had swollen up badly and she was in considerable pain”. She, immediately stopped taking the tablets and complained to health authorities. An investigation ensued which “led to one of the largest cases of medical research fraud ever uncovered in Britain”.

It turned out that this particular physician was paid by companies the like of AstraZenica and Bayer to prescribe their new unproven products. He was compensated at the rate of sterling pounds 1,000 a patient. It was estimated that over a period of 5 years between 1999 and 2003, he encashed a total of sterling pounds 100,000. His patients trusted him. They had no suspicion whatsoever they were being “used as human guinea pigs in a medical trial”, according to ‘The Guardian’ “Patients with no symptoms were given drugs and others who needed proper medication were given placebos.

Ultimately, the sweeping investigation, revealed that the big names in pharmaceutical products had some 3,000 British physicians on their payrolls for “using patients as guinea pigs without their consent”.

Unpleasant Truths About Our Species

UNPLEASANT TRUTHS ABOUT OUR SPECIES

“...humans are not capable of coping with the global environmental deterioration... [because of]... the mismatch between the vastly expanded range of human influence and our limited perception of the world...”

Ilkka Hanski (1953-2016)  Deceased Finnish ecologist at the University of Helsinki.

SEPTEMBER 2024

REFERENCES

EARLIER NARRATIVES OF The Author.

***Holocene or Anthropocene. ***The story of the world-1. ***The story of the world-2. ***The Universe and our place in it. ***Coffee capsules & Rio Doce. ***Ecocide. ***Wonder of natural selection. ***Angry planet.

OTHERS ***The Observer. Where did they all go? How Homo-sapiens became the last human species left. By Sarah Wild. *** Scientific American. How Homo-sapiens became the ultimate invasive species. By Curtis W. Marean. ***National Library of Medicine. The world that became ruined. By Ilkka Hanski. ***The Guardian. Humans, just 0.01% of all life but have destroyed 83% of wild mammals-study. By environmental editor.

INTRODUCTION

Life on Earth sparked nearly 4,000 million years ago. Humans evolved 2 to 300, 000 years ago. At that time, they shared the planet with thousands of other life forms, including a diversity of other ‘hominin’ cousins. Still by 40,000 years ago ours was the only hominin species standing.

Since then, humans have reigned supreme eliminating or keeping other life forms at will, and at the same time modifying the natural world to suit their whims. But the onset of the frenzied abuse of our habitat is much more recent. It goes back to the beginning of the technological age some 200 years ago. Thenceforth, as technology progressed and became more potent, so did the rape of our planet become more violent and unsustainable.

At the stage we are at today some scientists believe that humans’ activities have shifted Earth from the Holocene to the Anthropocene epoch. Let me explain. Holocene describes a natural geological period which started 12,000 years ago, in the wake of the last ice age. Anthropocene, on the, other hand, is a new man-made epoch resulting from the impact of humanity on Earth’s atmosphere, oceans and dry lands.

For this narrative, I have reviewed my earlier ones and, with the help of new sources, came up with a brief history of mankind since it parted company with chimpanzees to modern times. Specifically, the impact it has had on the natural world.

IN THE BEGINNING

There is to begin with the immense immensity of the Universe with its trillions upon trillions of stars, planets and others; and our puny habitat. My imagination tells me that if the Universe is represented by the vast Arabian desert, Earth would not be much bigger than a grain of sand.

Our planet began its existence 4.6 billion years ago as a cloud of hydrogen and helium, constantly bombarded with asteroids, meteors and other celestial objects. About a billion years later, it had hardened and cooled enough to evolved an atmosphere composed of methane, ammonia, carbon dioxide and water vapour. But no vital oxygen as yet. Ultimately, however, from about 2 billion years ago this atmosphere became gradually enriched with oxygen thanks to the process of photosynthesis- (conversion of carbon dioxide to oxygen)- associated with the first anaerobic-(not needing oxygen) plants. Further, the cooling process led to the formation of the oceans and other bodies of water.

Orbits the Sun entirely inside the ‘Goldilocks-(Habitable)- Zone’, with mild enough temperatures, allowing water to exist in liquid form. Indeed, Earth ambient temperatures vary, globally, between a minimum and maximum of (-)88 and 58 deg C respectively.

Benefits from the ‘vacuum cleaner’ effect of the powerful gravitational pull of Jupiter which intercepts various bodies shooting in the heavens before they reach it and cause immense damage

Is rich in ninety naturally occurring elements such as aluminium, carbon, copper, gold, iron, lead, mercury, phosphorus, silicon, sulfur, uranium, etc. to name a few familiar ones. And just as important are the immutable laws of physics, biology and the rest.

Is blanketed by a 100 kms thick atmosphere, composed of nitrogen, oxygen, carbon dioxide, methane, ozone and others. In addition to its other benefits, this envelope also protects it from harmful sun rays and from erring celestial bodies-(they burn before reaching the surface).

All these improbable events, occurrences and phenomena, described above, had to come together by chance to enable the onset and evolution of plant, animal and human organisms. That is why our planet is unique in this respect. Scientists are certain that our kind of life exists nowhere else in the vast Universe.

About 3.8 billion years ago, the first single cell organism the bacterium evolved. According to evolution biologist Richard Dawkins, it constituted “the origin of life...better the origin of heredity”. Why heredity? Because that first cell carried the DNA- (genetic information)-within its envelope.

Complex multicellular organisms evolved from that first one. Cells “provide structure for the body, take in nutrients from food, convert those nutrients into energy, and carry out specialized functions. Cells also contain the body’s hereditary material and can make copies of themselves”, so says ‘Medline Plus’. The human body is made of trillions of cells. They are of 200 types depending on whether they are the building blocks of the skin, bones, blood and vessels, internal organs, nervous system, eye etc.

NATURAL EVOLUTION

Natural evolution-(or Evolution for short)- is the very slow progression of changes, over hundreds of millions of years, transforming a simple organisms to a more complex one. I.e. what started as a bacterium, about 3,800,000,000 years ago is the forebear of all plants and animals-(us included) that have ever existed and are extant today. All are the outcome of carbon and other chemicals interacting together.

I must immediately clear one misconception. At no stage in the evolutionary process is an organism anything but the fittest to survive and earn its living. That is to say that at no time was an organism in transition to a more complete one. Let’s consider, for example modern man’s extinct cousin Erectus. He lived, procreated and functioned successfully for over one and a half million years. In other words, at no time was he an incomplete or half-way human being.

Evolution can be approximated to a tree. Each branch represents a ‘genus’. Six million years ago two branches sprouted from its trunk. The first gave rise to the Homo genus, that of modern man. The other became the Pan genus, that of today’s chimpanzees. In all likelihood the common progenitor looked not only very different from us but also from chimpanzees.

Further. The sub-branches which sprout out from each branch are the different species. For example, lions, tigers, leopards and jaguars belong to the Panthera genus, but each is a separate species scientifically known as Panthera-leo, Panthera- tigris, Panthera-pardus and Panthera-onca, respectively.

Similarly, humans belong to the sapiens species of the Homo genus, hence they are Homo-sapiens. So do the extinct species of our cousins, Habilis, Erectus, Neanderthal and others. Their full identification being Homo-habilis, Homo-erectus and Homo-neanderthal.

What causes organisms from one genus to diverge into separate species? It happens when circumstances cause evolution on differing hereditary (DNA) lines, to such an extent the interbreeding is no longer possible. For example, lions and tigers do not produce cubs together. Similarly, Sapiens cannot produce offspring with Erectus, nor can this latter do so with Habilis.

Of all the species that have ever existed, more than 99% of them have died out. Earth has known, so far, five great extinctions. They occurred 440, 365, 250, 210 and 65 million years ago. The last one eradicated the dinosaurs.

Dinosaurs belonged to more than a thousand species which included the largest animals ever and small ones, the size of today’s chicken. Some of them crawled, others walked on two or four legs, and still others which flew. They were ubiquitous and dominant on the planet for 180 million years between 245 and 65 million years ago. None was left by that latter date, having all been exterminated by “an asteroid with a 10-km radius [hitting] our planet and the impact released an enormous amount of energy, comparable with 10 billion Hiroshima-sized nuclear bombs...”, according to University of Helsinki ecologist, Ilkka Hanski (1953-2016).

Today, according to evolution biologist Dawkins “…2 million species have so far been given scientific names, and even these are just a small fraction of the number of species yet to be named”.

Lastly, the perennial question. What is the purpose of life? Why are we on Earth for? Well according to evolutionary scholars, the lifetime of any organism, is spent seeking nourishment to survive as long as possible and to procreate in order to ensure the continuity of the species. I.e. eat and mate. Nothing more dignified, and this is true of the tiniest microbe to Donald Trump and the king of England. No wonder, then, the instinctive urge for both.

US.

Homo-sapiens began to evolve in Africa about 2 to 300,000 years ago. At that time, according to science journalist, Sarah Wild “at least nine [Homo] species wandered the planet”. Anatomically, they resembled modern man. Still for the next 100,000 years they remained instinct motivated similarly to other Homo and animal species.

But then their evolved brain enabled them to become cognizant. That is gaining awareness of themselves and of their surroundings. Thenceforth they could think, remember past events, anticipate and plan for the future. They learnt to communicate. More, they became adept at creating imaginary givens such as religions, democracy, communism, human rights and a thousand others none of which existed in nature like trees, lions, rivers, rock and so on. One can touch a tree but cannot hug capitalism because it does not exist in Nature.

Equally important was the newly acquired proclivity for cooperation among non-kin strangers. Up then, when one Sapiens encountered another he did not recognize, a fight ensued. But with the dawning of cognizance, Homo-sapiens decided it was to their advantage to trust each other and work together. Thenceforth they exchanged ideas, and developed projectile weaponry. According to archaeology professor Curtis Marean, “...H. sapiens would have discovered the effectiveness of poison and used it to increase the killing power of projectiles”, thus obviating the need for close combat with stronger prey and other Homo species.

Professor Mean continues “With the joining of projectile weapons to hyper-pro-social behavior, a spectacular new kind of creature was born...No prey—or human foe—was safe...”. Human beings had arrived.

Thus equipped mentally and physically, our species began to migrate out of Africa, its continent of origin, towards Eurasia, about 70,000 years ago. Then 30,ooo years ago, it showed up in Australia and 14,000 years later it had reached the American continent.

US AND OTHER SPECIES

We ended the previous part with the migration of our species from Africa to the rest of the world. In Europe and Asia they came across other Homo species, and in Australia and the Americas, they encountered a magnificent mega fauna they did not know existed.

In Europe, humans coexisted for a while with Homo-Neanderthals whose forebears emigrated there, from Africa, 400 to 500,000 ya. They were genetically similar enough for a limited amount of interbreeding between the two species. Still, Sapiens looked upon the others as competitors and foes. Moreover, Neanderthals were no match to the cognizant, more capable and better equipped for a fight Sapiens. So mush so that by 30,000 years ago they were an extinct species like so many others.

In Asia Homo-sapiens came into contact with ‘archaic humans’ called Denisovans which evolved there some 370,000 years ago. They descended from Homo-erectus that migrated from Africa 7o0,000 ago. Again, like with the Neanderthals, they were not in a position to confront the newcomers. They, too, were extinct by 30,000 years ago.

Of great significance is the sea crossing, of our species, from south-east Asia to Australia/New Guinea, 30 to 40,000 years ago. They found there two dozen large animals which included, to name a few: 200kg kangaroos, large ostriches, giant pythons, 1000 kg lizards, giant diprotodons-(image)- and 2.5 ton wombats. Within a few millennia, 23 of the original 24 animal species, of more than 50 kg, no longer existed. It was the first man-made mass extinction of mega fauna. Only the ancestors of present day kangaroos survived.

And 16,000 years ago Homo-sapiens walked from Siberia to Alaska over the then frozen stretch of water that separate them. They subsequently spread far and wide meeting, along the way some amazing large fauna. Among them mammoths-(forbears of elephants)-, horses, camels and the giant sloth-(image)- and plenty of birds and reptiles. Once again, within a couple of millennia of Sapiens’ arrival, North America had lost 34 of its original 47 fauna genuses and South America 50 out of its starting 60.

The Guardian reported in May 2018 that a ground-breaking study which quantifies the impact of humans on other forms of life. It starts by stating that total humanity, at 7.6 members, is no more than 0.01%-(one of every 10,000)- of all forms of life on this planet. Yet the consequences of its presence are immeasurable.

It continues that since the beginning of civilization-(roughly 10,000 years ago)- humans have been the cause of disappearance of 83% of wild mammals-(wolves, lions, tigers, giraffes, hippos etc.), 80% of marine mammals-(whales, walruses, seals etc.) 50% of plants and 15% of fish. By contrast, domesticated mammals such as livestock-(cattle, pigs, horses etc.) proliferate. Finally of all birds on Earth 70% are poultry in farms and only 30% are wild.

And ends with the tendency of some scholars to treat the foregoing fauna extinction as “...the sixth mass extinction of life to occur in the Earth’s four billion year history”. Recall, I said earlier that our planet has gone through five extinctions in its lifetime so far.

Let me end with this statement of professor Curtis Marean that “Everywhere H. sapiens went, massive ecological changes followed. The archaic humans they encountered went extinct, as did vast numbers of animal species. It was, without a doubt, the most consequential migration event in the history of our planet”.

US AND THE PLANET

In the acclaimed 2014 ‘Sapiens’, professor Yuval Harari tells us that early hunting and gathering Homo-sapiens were animist. As such, they took into account the interests of the other inhabitants of their region, including animals, plants and even inanimate objects such as rock and rivers. By no means they considered themselves more deserving than the others. There was no hierarchy. In other words they understood the needs of the animals they hunted as well as of those being themselves hunted by. They were careful not to offend a tree, say, lest it avenged itself etc.

Clearly, this is no longer the case with modern humans. The onset of large scale onslaught on, and pollution of our home dates back to about 150 years ago, when industrial technology enabled the flooding of market places with affordable products from food items to home appliances. Concurrently the first department stores were established. They all took care to display their merchandises in such a way as “...to create longings for new and exciting goods”. They were helped by nascent commercial advertising.

Consider the following present-day activities:

***Shrimps are a very-much sought after nutritional item. To meet demand, shrimps are mass produced in artificial ponds. In Thailand for example, large areas of mangrove forests-(image)- are destroyed to make room for the large breeding ponds. According to the US’s ‘National Ocean Service’: “Mangrove forests stabilize the coastline, reducing erosion from storm surges, currents, waves, and tides. The intricate root system of mangroves also makes these forests attractive to fish and other organisms seeking food and shelter from predators”.

***In Indonesia, on the other hand, 260,000 sq km of rain forest have been slash burnt between 1990 and 2010 to accommodate palm oil trees, for the production of “margarine and cooking fat but also cosmetics and fuel”. Torching of trees on such a large scale not only impoverished the ecosystem but, also resulted in population uprooting, respiratory problems, habitat destruction and more.

Indeed, a 2019 article published by the BBC gives the full measure of the ugliness of this practice. It reports that smoke-generated haze was so extensive it spread to neighbouring countries, adversely affecting air quality and visibility.

***The increasing demands for meats, dairy products eggs and what have you, require raising and breeding large herds of livestock and poultry-(see preceding part). To feed all these cows, pigs, chicken and the rest, however, requires planting vast areas of land with soya and other feedstock items.

Argentina is a case in point. A 2018 article in the Guardian headed ‘Soy Destruction in Argentina leads straight to our dinner plates’, explains that growing soya in Argentina for Europeans has already meant the destruction of more than 100,000 sq.km, or a quarter of that country’s portion of the Gran Chaco forest. “The extent of the destruction is painful to see” reported the correspondent of the paper when he surveyed the damaged land from a light aircraft.

Deforestation in Argentina-(as in Indonesia, hereinbefore, as elsewhere)- defeats the purpose for which it was done in the first place. It is a well-known fact that planting on deforested soil is not sustainable for, without the ‘protection’ of tree roots and other vegetations’, it suffers from erosion and loss of fertility. Not to forget, of course the risks of flooding and mudslides.

***Steel is used in the manufacture of thousands of products from household appliances to automobiles to battle tanks, guns and aircraft carriers, just to name a few. Still, its production begins with iron ore.

But extracting the ore is a messy polluting business. Among others, it requires the use of various chemicals. Afterwards the toxic residual liquid called ‘tailings’ is stored in special ponds surrounded by dams, for subsequent disposal, since they cannot be freely discharged in Nature-(image). Still, if and when one of these dams fails, the ‘tailings’ gush out in torrents which destroy whole communities and the sources of their livelihood.

This is exactly what happened in November of 2015 at a mine in Brazil. Huge volumes of poisonous liquid rushed downstream “devastating wildlife and tainting drinking water for hundreds of thousands of people” as stated in a 2019 a BBC publication-(image). Eventually it disgorged into, and contaminated the waters of, the Rio Doce River all the way to its discharge in the Atlantic Ocean 650 kms downstream. It goes without saying that fishing in the waterway and its delta was interrupted, putting thousands of fishermen out of business.

The Rio Doce cataclysm is not a ‘one off’ occurrence. Brazil alone is home to dozens of such iron ore mines, all with holding dams.

***Then, of course there are the plastic items nobody wants anymore. They are all fabricated from man-made chemicals extracted from crude oil. As such, they are not recognized by Nature which, consequently, cannot deal with them when discarded. Hence, whereas the remains of dead plant and animal organisms decompose and return to their origins so to speak, plastics, on the other hand, remain extant for centuries constituting and eye sore and a mortal danger for marine creatures mistaking the detritus for food.

The extent and ugliness of unwanted plastics is perhaps epitomized by ‘The Great Pacific Garbage Patch’-(image). It is a huge stretch in the North Pacific mostly of non-decomposable plastic discards, carried by currents from the shores of North America and Asia. According to National Geographic “...Sea turtles often mistake plastic bags for jellies…Albatrosses mistake plastic resin pellets for fish eggs…[Others become] entangled in abandoned plastic fishing nets...” etc.

Most worrying, however, is the impact modern humans are having on the globe climate. The emissions from the combustion of carbon-rich fuels-(coal, oil, trees and others)-, are destabilizing the planet’s atmosphere which for more than two billion years has regulated terrestrial weather and, thus enabled their survival.

What is happening is stated by the ‘National Aeronautics and Space Administration’-(NASA): “As Earth's climate changes, it is impacting extreme weather across the planet…heat waves… floods… droughts… wildfires … flooding …are all becoming more frequent and more intense.”

An article titled ‘The world that became ruined’ written by Ilkka Hanski (1953-2016), formerly Finnish ecologist at the University of Helsinki, is sobering. It tries to explain the doggedness of mankind in abusing the planet and its envelope. He explains that this attitude is due to “the mismatch between the vastly expanded range of human influence and our limited perception of the world...”. This disconnect between the ability of humans to cause great harm, yet, not be able “to appreciate that planet Earth is a finite sphere in a vast space that is almost devoid of matter...” is the reason why they “fail to understand how enormous our impact on the Earth has been or how quickly things have changed and are changing”. This being so “...humans are not capable of coping with the global environmental deterioration that we are inflicting upon ourselves...”. Are we, imperceptibly, moving toward the outcome that befell the inhabitants of Easter Island-(see next part).

ALARM BELLS OF EASTER ISLAND

‘Collapse’ is the title of a 2005 book by professor of geography and author, Jared Diamond (DOB: 1937). It is about 5 or 6 civilizations who miserably failed and vanished on account of what they did and what they did not do. One of them lived for a while on Easter Island.

It was discovered by accident on Easter day-(hence the name)- 1722 by a Dutch navigator who found an essentially uninhabited barren rocky place. But he was greatly puzzled by a great number of carved-in-rock statues, some of them quite large, of human heads and torsos.

The 170 sq-km island is located in a remote corner of the Pacific Ocean, 2,000 kms from the nearest island-neighbour and 3,700 from the western coast of Chili. It was described as the remotest “...scrap of land in the world”.

Round about 900 CE, a few immigrants arrived by canoes and landed on Easter. In time the island’s population topped 15,000 souls.

Instead of the lifeless place encountered by the Dutchman 800 years later, the newcomers settled in a forested island with 21 species of trees in which nested 26 species of seabirds, and regularly visited by migrating ones. Additionally, the sea around the island was rich in tuna fish and other marine animals which they could harpoon from canoes. Clearly there was no shortage of animal proteins, which they supplemented by growing taro, sweet potatoes, bananas and sugar canes.

And what about those famous statues. They are colossal, supposed to represent ancestors, mounted on equally huge platforms-(image). This being so, no one can doubt that carving the monolithic pieces, moving them to their final destination and erecting them, all with primitive tools and means, needed a great deal of endurance and muscle power on the parts of all able- bodied men of the communities. Still, in order to perform they, naturally, needed high quality, calory-rich nutrition on a sustained basis. continuously for four or five centuries. This requirement led, un-judiciously, in the end, to the depletion of the all the island’s resources and it turn to its people’s perdition

What happened? Simply that during their stay of 4 to five hundred years, the islanders cut all the trees even though they were the source of everything they needed. Consider: ***From the tree trunks they dug out the canoes with which they went after the tuna and the rest the food in the sea. ***The birds on which they fed nested there. With no trees, they migrated elsewhere. ***Some species of trees bore sugary palm as food. ***The trees supplied the firewood for cooking and for the cremation of the dead. ***From certain tree fibers they made the ropes with which the statues were pulled to where they were to be erected.

Tragically, by 1500 the forests were gone. According to professor Diamond “The overall picture for Easter is the most extreme example of forest destruction.... in the world”. Of course, along with the trees went canoes, birds, firewood, and ropes. More, the deforested open spaces on which vegetables were grown lost their fertility as always happens.

The onset of the end of the islanders manifested itself in “food shortages, starvation, wars among too many people fighting for too few resources, and overthrows of governing elites by disillusioned masses” in the words of professor Diamond.

They were all alone in the middle of an immense ocean, unable to leave and too far from the nearest inhabited land to expect any assistance.

Can anyone really ignore the analogy with our planet? Just like Easter, it is a lonely place in the immense unfriendly Universe. Is the fate of the Easter islanders a harbinger of what awaits Homo-sapiens should they continue the rape of the planet?

CONCLUDING THOUGHT

Modern Homo-sapiens are living in two realities. The first consists of man-made fictions such as beliefs, ideologies, socio-political systems, customs and a thousand others. None of these is immutable. They can be changed by men when circumstances arise.

The other reality is made up of four immutable universal truths of Nature. First, humans are the products of their parents genes and DNA. Second, they must strive to feed themselves in order to survive as long as possible. Third, they must make babies to ensure the survival of the species. Finally, when they die, they decay and leave no physical trace of their passage on Earths.

These universal truths have applied since the beginning of life to all organisms that have ever existed so far. From snails and flowers to Plato, Galileo, Newton, Mozart, Einstein and to the thousands of their caliber.

Part VIII: Justice and Injustice

The Wretched Ones

THE WRETCHED ONES.

Chapter illustration

‘Cosette’, from Victor Hugo’s novel ‘Les Miserables’ first published in 1862.

Final proof reading: 25.10.2016.

In his Discourse on the Origins of Inequality (1), the prominent French philosopher Jean Jacques Rousseau (1712-1778) postulated that “The invention of property and the division of labor represent the beginning of moral inequality. Property allows for the domination and exploitation of the poor by the rich”. He also “traced the origins of injustice to the first man who fenced off land and declared it his own”. Subsequent modern research and investigations by anthropologists, archeologists and others have confirmed Rousseau’s postulation.

Chapter illustration

This being the case, then the beginning of inequality and poverty can be traced to the advent of agriculture and to the first hunter –gatherers(2) who settled down to grow their food and domesticate animals . In this manner, the first tribal societies formed, followed by the creation of villages then towns which ultimately coalesced to become nation- states. At the outset, tribes kept the egalitarian traditions of their hunting- gathering past. But slowly these were replaced by the stratification of evolving societies and the inevitable formation of hierarchies within them; meaning: rulers, aristocratic and elite classes, a large majority of peasants and, of course, slaves. By the time of the earliest civilizations of China, Mesopotamia and Egypt, all these were well established.

Poverty and inequality up to the 20th century.

Until the early 19th century for Europe and America and longer for the rest of the inhabited world, a society of humans consisted of a very small rich class of rulers, aristocrats and landowners, and at a certain time, a minority middle class of merchants and professionals and a vast majority of serfs( a class barely above slavery) and illiterate peasants( freed serfs whose livelihood still depended on the whims of the landowners) whose existence was a constant struggle in order to subsist. In tsarist Russia, for example, serfdom lasted until 1861 when it represented 85% of the population. The poor peasantry that followed kept that ratio unchanged until the October Revolution. In China, on the other hand, serfdom remained until the creation of the People’s republic of China, in 1949.

Specifically, from the Middle Ages to the early 19th century, Europe consisted of agrarian societies in which the vast bulk of the population were peasants who lived in small villages and raised food for a living. They were the “bas peuple, dressed in nothing but half rotten, tattered linen” according to the French engineer Vauban in the 1690’s. This peasantry lived at the mercy of the weather and of the money lenders. It was not uncommon for land to change hands from the borrower to the lender when the former failed to honour his debt. Not to mention the additional obvious risk for an entire family, of the illness and death of the breadwinner, or of the death or bankruptcy of the employer. In this pre-industrial European society, wealth was concentrated in the hands of the few nobles, land owning and merchant elite. In Florence in 1427, for example,10% of the population controlled 68% of wealth.

By the end of the 19th century, with the Industrial Revolution well established, Europe saw an enormous shift as peasants left the countryside to move into industrial cities where they led a miserable life in shanty towns with no sanitation or other amenities. Entire families including women and children (from 4 or 5 years of age) were employed. And as these cities expanded, prostitution thrived as did petty crimes by destitute children trained in the art of stealing (pick pockets) and others. Charles Dickens’s “Oliver Twist” (see image) movingly depicts all this in 19th century London.

Chapter illustration

Industrialization in Europe led to the emergence of two distinctive classes of society: a middle class or bourgeoisie and working class. The latter, eventually, organized itself into unions to act collectively for better and safer working conditions and higher wages. This was followed by the enactment of the “cradle to grave” welfare system in the various European countries in order to help the poorer classes (3).

For centuries, poverty in Europe was seen not as a social aberration but as a law of nature, hence a necessity. Indeed, at differing times there were statements by various prominent persons such as: “poverty is a most necessary and indispensable ingredient in society, without which nations and communities could not exist in a state of civilization”, or “the poor appeared to be a particularly vicious class of people who deserved nothing” or that they “should rest contended with that state or condition which it hath pleased God to give them”. Some economists, of those eras, opposed any interference with poverty and even objected to any support of the poor that did not show productive returns, while others, still, saw it as an essential condition for economic development. It is also noteworthy that neither the Age of Enlightenment nor the French Revolution’s emphasis on the rights of the individual resulted in any amelioration in the lot of Europe’s poor. Nonetheless, there also existed compassionate people and organizations such as “Societe Saint-Vincent-de-Paul” who, through work of charity and benevolence tried to alleviate the living conditions of the needy.

Significantly, the 19th century was also that of the subjugation and colonization of vast territories in Asia and Africa whose huge populations are still today among the poorest in the world. In the words of one author: “…But alongside the billionaire tycoons and high-tech industries, contemporary India is characterized by shocking levels of poverty and inequality, with certain parts of the country on a par with the worst places in sub-Saharan Africa”.

When the first English settlers landed in North America in the early 17th century, the few scattered “Red Indian” tribes they encountered existed as an egalitarian and democratic society, rather like that of the hunters-gatherers afore mentioned (4). Therefore, as far as these settlers were concerned, America was a “blank sheet”, a land of opportunity where one person differed from the other by his hard work and talents.

By the 18th century there had evolved in North America within the white population social classes based on: a) education (5), b) occupation (merchants, bankers) in the North and c) planters in the South. At that time, also, in the South, there appeared what was called indentured servitude. It consisted of poor young men and women being sent to the American colony from England to serve as servants for a period of 4 years in return for the sea passage, food and shelter. Against all that they were promised 50 acres of land after the successful completion of this period of service. Only a few became land owners the rest either died of disease or continued to work as wage labourers , along with African slaves, on estates owned by large planters.

Poverty in the industrial cities of North America in the early 19th century was not much different from that existing at the time in Europe: abject living conditions, children begging and scavenging in city garbage and committing petty crimes. The term “tramp” dates from that period (6).This poverty was aggravated by the recurring economic crises and the arrival of poor immigrants. On the East, there were the Irish (fleeing the potato famine at home) and others from Eastern Europe. As to the West, it received Chinese immigrants who were soon subjected to racial discrimination and were poorly paid in return for their labour. Against all this, many efforts were made during that period by public and civic institutions to provide relief to the poor. Notably, late in the century, urban police departments allowed the wandering homeless to sleep in their stations. In the 1880’s an estimated 600,000 tramps did so. Unlike in Europe, however, this coming-together of workers did not result in the emergence of unions; they tended, instead, to divide along ethnic and occupational groups. Nor was there any inclination from the government toward the enactment of European style “cradle to grave” welfare systems. Social insurance was only instituted in 1935 during the Great Depression.

In the aftermath of the Civil War, the freeing of some four million (out of a total population of 35 million) former slaves added to this poverty. They predominantly worked as sharecroppers in plantations( in return for their back-breaking labour, they received a share of the crop).

And finally there were the original inhabitants, the Red Indians whose poverty was considered by the newer Americans as resulting from their backward cultures. And so, toward the end of the century the Indians were forced to either become independent farmers or forfeit reservation land on which they had been living.

The story of the colonization of Latin America by Spain and Portugal is different from that of North America. When the Spanish first arrived in the early 1500’s the continent was populated by at least 50 million indigenous (Indians) peoples. Notably, there were two polities, that of the Aztecs (in present day Mexico) and that of the Incas in the Andean mountains (in parts of present day Colombia, Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia, Chile and Argentina). Their populations numbered 7 and 11million respectively. The rest of the indigenous peoples were scattered throughout the continent. In 1521 the Spaniard Hernando Cortes with a handful of his own better armed men, a few horses ( hitherto unknown in South America) and in alliance with other indigenous warriors captured the Aztecs capital and killed their emperor. As for the Inca Empire it was similarly conquered by Francisco Pizarro starting from 1533 again with a few of his men and local help.

Subsequently, over a period of perhaps one century the indigenous populations were decimated by new diseases brought by the European newcomers (smallpox, measles, typhus etc) and by famine, malnutrition and ill treatment. So much so, that it has been estimated that by the 1650’s their number had dwindled to 4 million (or by about 90 per cent). In order to compensate for this huge decline in manpower, needed in the large plantations and for work in the gold and silver mines, the Spanish settlers turned to Africa as a new source of labour. Similarly, in their new colony of Brazil, the Portuguese acquired slaves from the same source to work in the sugar plantations. It has been estimated that by the end of the colonial period in the 1800’s (300years after the first arrivals) 9 million slaves had been brought from Africa.

Spanish colonial society in Latin America was highly stratified and hierarchical. It depended on where one was born and on his parentage. On top of the ladder were the “Peninsulares”, or those who were born in, and came directly from, Spain. Closely behind were the “Creoles”; they consisted of people of Spanish parentage but born in the colonies. These two classes enjoyed all the privileges, owned lands and formed the elite of society.

Then came the “Mestizos” of mixed Spanish-Indigenous parentage (Spanish father, Indian mother). They were under the same obligations as the upper classes; they could own property but were not eligible to any position in the Spanish administration.

The bottom rung of the social ladder was occupied first by the native Indians, given the status of peasants. They could not own property but nevertheless paid taxes. Then came the “Mulattos”. They were the offspring of the union of a Spanish male with a black African female. They were mostly illegitimate since the fathers were not always willing to formalize that union. As a result, they were not much higher in status than black African slaves, especially if the mother is or had been one. Occasionally, depending on the social position and inclination of the fathers, a few “Mulattos” were admitted to a higher class.

Finally, were the African slaves proper (those who came directly from Africa or their children). They were used in the plantations, in the gold and silver mines, as domestic servants etc. They were treated as slaves have always been throughout history. The institution of slavery, in Latin America lasted until 1886 in Cuba and 1888 in Brazil.

Poverty and inequality in the 20th century and so far in the 21st.

By the end of the last century, a substantial portion of humanity remained poor and marginalized. For despite one hundred years of advances in science (both social and otherwise), technology and medicine, the 20th century will go down in history as one of global impoverishment, often, because of the actions or inactions or decisions of otherwise educated, intelligent and presumably decent human beings. Consider what follows.

The century was 15 years old when the Ottomans began their expulsion of the Armenians from eastern Anatolia .Millions, with nothing more than the clothes on their backs fled to northern Syria and the Bekaa region of Lebanon where they started new lives from scratch under obviously harsh conditions and under the same Ottoman administration which had persecuted them in the first place.

By mid century, Apartheid was in full swing in the Republic of South Africa. In 1978, 19million Blacks owned 13 percent of land against 78 percent for the 4.5 million White population. The average earning of the former was 14 times less than that of the latter. Finally, for each Rand spent on education for Blacks, 15.5 Rand was the share of the Whites. Regrettably, though, from the demise of Apartheid in 1994 to the present day, a substantial part of its black population still lives in poverty.

At the same time period, the people of Palestine were being dispossessed and hundreds of thousands of them made to flee into neighbouring countries where today their descendents are still “non-citizens” living in slum-like camps. And through the present policies of settlements, segregation and the imposition of restrictions and blockades, the Israelis are practicing an apartheid not unlike the one above. All this, it is worth repeating, is from the same people who never tire of reminding the World of the injustices and inhumanity suffered by them, their parents and grandparents.

Financial crises have happened in capitalist and rich industrial nations every now and then throughout the century. They were called recessions or depressions depending on their severity. But the Great Depression of 1930-1939 was something else altogether. Starting in the USA, it spread to Canada, Europe, Latin America and elsewhere with devastating consequences. Banks failed, businesses and factories closed down and employees and workers were laid off on a massive scale. In America alone, 13 to 15 million people lost their jobs. For those who were lucky enough to remain employed, wages fell and purchasing power decreased. At one time almost half the population was in desperate circumstances. The picture that has become emblematic of the period is that of long lines of unemployed men and women outside “soup kitchens” (see image) and labour exchanges. Dramatically, the Great Depression directly contributed to the rise of Adolf Hitler and of Nazism in Germany and to the second world war that ensued.

Chapter illustration

Late in the century, came into effect new rules and regulations for trade liberalization under the various headings of Globalization, Free Trade, Neo-Liberalism and the Washington Consensus. The sponsors were the US treasury, the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the World Bank. The application of these rules and regulations were to be monitored by the World Trade Organization (WTO). In a nutshell, all these dealt with measures to be implemented to ensure the free flow of goods, services, capital and investments, with no restrictions across countries’ borders. In other words, the planet shall henceforth be looked upon as a market place accessible to all.

There is general agreement that these regulations benefitted first and foremost the multinational corporations like the oil and gas, pharmaceutical, aerospace, automotive and other manufacturing and services giants. Most of these are of American origin. Being entities of great wealth (therefore with power and influence) their business decisions affect the policies adopted by governments of rich and poor countries alike. Put differently, a decision by one these giants to move its factory (ies) from one country to another affect the unemployment figures of both as well as their tax revenues.

In the case of Europe, for example, the shifting of entire industries and services to Third World countries with cheap labour, has resulted in an increase in the number of the unemployed, particularly among the young and in significantly reduced earnings to urban workers and farmers. Additionally it has, also, resulted in the erosion of the social services granted by the welfare systems in many European countries since the number of working people financing it (along with their former employers) lessened, while the number of potential beneficiaries(the unemployed and the old age pensioners) rose.

As for developing nations, entire branches of industry and small farms producing for the internal market were eliminated. The informal urban sector (small businesses which historically have played an important role as a source of employment creation) has been undermined as a result of currency devaluations and the liberalization of imports of the cheaper goods produced by the large corporations. All this under the eyes of governments whose hands are tied by virtue of the afore stated regulations. This latter prohibit the former from interfering with free trade. Neither are they permitted to subsidize the prices of essential foodstuff (like bread, tea, or sugar) to make them accessible to the poorer classes. Lastly, it has been said that “The restructuring of the world economy increasingly denies individual developing countries the possibility of building a national economy………. The state apparatus is undermined, industry for the internal market is destroyed, national enterprises are pushed into bankruptcy”.

This narrative is not complete if it forgets the poor who risk their lives in crowded unseaworthy embarkations of all kinds and sizes in the hope of reaching more favourable shores, or those who illegally sneak across borders in search of friendlier lands. Nor must be forgotten the wretchedness of those running from places of savagery and brutality to live precariously under shaky roofs.

And almost equally precarious, are the lives of peasants in the Third World whose subsistence depends on the regularity of the seasons (notably the Monsoon in South Asia, the droughts in parts of Africa) and the whims of Nature which with its earthquakes and tsunamis etc. logically hit the already poor hardest.

In contrast to the above there are the fortunes of the lucky or clever or intelligent or talented or corrupt which nowadays are reaching new heights (7). It has been said that “In the South, the East and the North, a privileged social minority has accumulated vast amounts of wealth at the expense of the large majority of the population….. Moreover, the process of wealth accumulation is increasingly taking place outside the real economy; divorced from bona fide productive and commercial activities….. In turn, billions of dollars accumulated from speculative transactions are funneled toward confidential numbered accounts in the more than [80] offshore banking havens around the world”. In other words the countries where the fortunes were made do not benefit from them as investments and taxes.

So long as humans lived in harmony with Nature, there was no cause for the emergence of rich and poor. But, as soon as people got together in communities, stratification and hierarchy resulted, inevitably leading to the formation of the “have” and “have not” social classes.

In his world acclaimed book “Capital in the Twenty First Century”, the French economist, Thomas Piketty concludes, among others, that “The consequences for the long-term dynamics of the wealth distribution are potentially terrifying,…The problem[of inequality] is enormous, and there is no simple solution… The right solution is a progressive annual tax on capital [ i.e the rich]…This would contain the unlimited growth of global inequality of wealth, which is currently increasing at a rate that cannot be sustained in the long run and that ought to worry even the most fervent champions of the self-regulated market…The difficulty is that this solution, the progressive tax on capital, requires a high level of international cooperation and regional political integration…etc”. What more can one say except perhaps to wonder whether the political instabilities we are currently witnessing on account of the dramatic growth in extremism and acts of terror, the uninterrupted waves of boat people trying to reach more propitious shores and others, are in fact the early signs of that unsustainability.

(1)Discours sur l'origine et les fondements de l'inégalité parmi les hommes.

(2) During the first 1,988,000 years or 99% of their existence, the members of the Homo genus subsisted as hunter- gatherers. As such, they were de facto egalitarian since, practically, they had no other needs than to eat and procreate. This does not mean, however, that they were free of the emotions and traits such as love, hate, greed, honesty, deceit etc. On the contrary; scholars have long established that these “are not learned behaviours but are genetically encoded in his brains and emotions”. Indeed, at times they quarreled over food and women, out of fear or out of vanity just for the pleasure of winning in a fight.

(3)Some say that the enactment was an attempt by conservative and later by fascist governments to distract workers from unions and from socialist and communist ideologies.

(4) Interestingly, they had not yet domesticated the horse, because none existed on the American continents. The first such beasts arrived with the European newcomers.

(5) Harvard, Yale and Princeton universities were founded in 1636, 1701 and 1746 respectively.

(6) “Tramp” described a destitute man walking the highways or illegally riding on trains.

(7) Forbes magazine lists 1,645 billionaires for the year 2014.

Black and White

BLACK AND WHITE RACISM: THE TRAGEDY OF AFRICA

REFERENCES

Alan Goodman-(President of the American Anthropological Association from 2005 to 2007). *Race is real, but it’s not genetic (2020)

American Association of Biological Anthropologists. *Statement on race & racism (2023)

Encyclopedia Britannica. *Racism. *Racial segregation. *Activities in the United States of Louis Agassiz.

Facing History and Ourselves. *Who is human? (2016). *The science of race (2016).

George M. Fredrickson-(Professor emeritus of history at Stanford University). *The historical origins and development of racism (2003).

Harvard Library. *Scientific Racism.

Harvard University. *Louis Agassiz.

Mohammmad.I.The Author. *Masters and slaves. Part-2. Humans as chattel. *Masters and slaves. Part-3. Rape of a continent.

Smithsonian Magazine. *Early Briton had dark Skin and light eyes. *The disturbing resilience of scientific racism (2019).

The Guardian The unwelcome return of race science. Ganin Evans (2018).

Wikipedia. *Racism.

OVERVIEW

This narrative is about the racism practiced by Europeans and European settlers in North America-(the superior race)- vis a vis Africans they enslaved beginning in the 17th century and colonized in the 18th.

Race is the classification of the human species into categories based on biologically inherited observable physical differences such as skin colour, hair texture and facial features.

Racism is when differences in these physical traits, among people, are taken to-(wrongly)-imply variations in mental aptitudes, abilities, behaviour and standards of morality etc. And racist is the qualification attributed to the party which considers itself to enjoy the highest levels in all of them.

Still, it was not enough for the slavers and colonialists to claim their superiority; they needed to prove it. In their attempts to dehumanize Africans, and to show the preeminence of the white race, they first resorted to religion then later relied on wrong and biased science; as I shall expound hereinafter.

With the advent of the European age of reason-(AKA, the Enlightenment)- in the late 1600’s, philosophers and writers began to de-emphasize the role of religion in deciding the fates of men and, instead, privilege that of the mind, and logic. More specifically, in the words of Stanford University historian George Fredrickson (1934-2008), they believed strongly in “the unity of the human race”.

Taking their cue from the principles of the Enlightenment the ‘Founding Fathers’ of the USA, inserted in the ‘Declaration of Independence’ in 1776 very enlightened statements such as “…all men are created equal; that they are endowed by their Creator with certain inalienable rights; that among these are life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness…”

Finally, there came on the scene the 1789 French Revolution’s ‘Declaration of the Rights of Man and of the Citizen’, which ascertained that “Men are born, and always continue, free and equal in respect of their rights.” More. One of the great figures of the Revolution, the Count of Mirabeau (1749-1791) declared to delegates in the French National Assembly that it was wrong to maintain that “white men are born and remain free, black men are born and remain slaves”, according to ‘Facing History and Ourselves’.

Still, all these commonsense declarations did not shake the enduring belief in the superiority of Europeans and their American descendants. Let me just mention here the comment of Thomas Jefferson (1743-1826), the third president of the United States: “I advance it . . . that the blacks…are inferior to the whites in the endowments both of body and mind . . . This unfortunate difference of colour, and perhaps of faculty, is a powerful obstacle to the emancipation of these people”. This, less than a decade after the lofty expressions in the ‘Declaration of Independence’ of which he was one of the main authors. Perhaps, it is useful to remember that Jefferson owned more than 600 slaves whose free labour was lucrative indeed.

And there was of course the Scramble for Africa towards the end of the 19th century, to describe the European frenzy to exploit the resources of Africa-(The British and the Dutch were already prospering in South Africa earlier than that). Making use of false science-(see hereinafter)-, they appropriated the right to plunder the black continent under the guise of bringing to its peoples Christianity and Civilization.

This is epitomized by the famous 1899 poem of Englishman Rudyard Kipling (1899–1902), an ardent nationalist and fervent colonialist. The poem is titled ‘The White Man's Burden’, meaning the Europeans moral obligation to civilize and convert non-white people. In other word the poem implies that the colonizers are there for the benefit of the local people and certainly not for selfish gains.

WHAT ARE THE FACTS

Let us start with Charles Darwin (1809-1882)) the father of Evolution. In his books ‘On the Origin of Species’ published in 1859 and ‘The Descent of Man’ in 1871 he ascertains that all humans descend from a common ancestor. They all belong to the same species, regardless of skin colour and other physical traits. Since then, Darwin’s conclusions have been more that vindicated.

Belonging to the same species means, among others, the possibility of interbreeding and producing viable offspring with genes inherited from both parents. This daughter/son, in turn, are able to procreate and thus enable the species to continue. Hypothetically, it means that any wretch from the most miserable slum in Ethiopia can interbreed with the queen of Denmark and produce a Homo sapiens baby who could be king or queen one day, provided ,of course, he is brought up in the right environment. More crucially he will obviously have inherited physical traits from both parents; but certainly not be of a biologically different race from them.

When members of our species (Homo sapiens) left Africa in search of new places, they most certainly had black skins. In a matter of a few tens of millennia, they adapted to the demands of their new environments. In reality, they had no choice in the matter. Else they would have perished.

Let us now consider the pigment ‘melanin’ responsible for the colour of skin. Specifically, it causes it to be dark as a protection against the intense ultra violet radiation of the African sun. Dark skin is, thus, a blessing for Africans but a curse for those who migrated to northern climes such as Europe. The whimsical and less intense sun, there, dictated a lighter coloured skin for optimal absorption of ultra violet rays to stimulate the production of the vital vitamin D for a healthy and strong bones and teeth.

That was borne out by the remains of ‘Cheddar Man’ discovered in 1903 in ‘Cheddar Gorge’, England. Following lengthy DNA analyses and investigations, the verdict is that he lived about 10,000 years ago, was dark skinned and had blue eyes. Clearly then, the lighter skin colour of nowadays English-(and other Europeans)- emerged relatively recently. According to ‘Smithsonian Magazine’: “… light skin may have only become widespread in Britain around 6,000 years ago, when farmers from the Middle East migrated to the region and began to reproduce with indigenous populations…”

Should you, my readers, have doubts on the matter, I now propose the following excerpts from a the 2023 statement, unanimously agreed by the members of the ‘American Association of Biological Anthropologists’:

Humans are not divided biologically into distinct…racial… [biological]…clusters. [They] share the vast majority (99.9%) of…DNA… Environment interactions, local and regional… changes through time…have produced the…diversity we see in humans today…

The racial groups we recognize in the West have been socially, politically, and legally constructed over the last five centuries…. [Western racism is] … intimately tied to histories of European settler colonialism, empire, and slavery.

Let us for one moment assume that biological differences are, in fact real. Then we would need medical doctors specialized in the ailments of each race separately. That means that our friend the Ethiopian and his mate the Danish queen could not visit the same medical specialist for, say, a kidney problem.

HISTORY OF RACISM

It all started with the Portuguese sailing to West Africa in the early 1440’s. At that time Africa had already been, for many centuries, selling its men, women and children, mostly, to Arab traders. It was, therefore easy enough for the Portuguese to acquire indigenous people and ship them, as free labour, to their colony of Cape Verde, -(an archipelago some 570 kms of the western coast of Africa)-, and to Spain and Portugal. And subsequently to the New World of the Caribbean as well as North, Central and South America, as a source of free labour.

The first Africans arrived in Virginia-(now the state of Virginia)- in 1619. According to Alan Goodman-(see References)- the newly arrived slaves, at first, “became integrated into society”. They were put to work with European bond labourers-(impoverished persons who worked, equally slavishly, for free against the repayment of a debt). Soon enough, however, they joined forces in rebellion against their employers. In response, the latter “reduced opposition by those of European descent to the intolerable conditions of enslavement”. They claimed the physical differences between the two ‘races’ “were natural, unchanging, and God-given”.

But the scriptures say all humans, descended from Adam and are equal before God. Therefore, the settlers needed to find a loophole in the scriptures to substantiate their contention that Africans were sub-humans. They found what they needed in the Bible account of the curse placed by Noah on his grandson Canaan in these words “Cursed be Canaan; a slave of slaves shall he be to his brothers”. Canaan’s descendants have since, been regarded as the heathen-(non-Christians)-people of Africa. Their dark skin taken as the outward sign of “God’s command that Africans should be the slaves to the Christians”.

Half a century later, a law decreed that slaves who converted to Christianity could not hope for a better treatment since their ancestry back in Africa was heathen. In other words, once a slave always a slave. Shortly after, another law was passed prohibiting black/white marriages and promising dire consequences for any offspring from an unauthorized relationship.

The institution of slavery in the USA was abolished at the end of the Civil War in 1865. Some 4 million slaves-(out of a total US population of 35 million)- were emancipated. Still, this freedom did not mean the end of their miseries and suffering.

At the outset, having been plantation workers for generations, they had no skills other than working the land; meaning that they could earn a living only by labouring in the plantations of their old masters. Clearly, not much of an improvement.

The Guardian newspaper in its review of a book: ‘Sick From Freedom’ dated October, 2014 tells a sorry story about the fate of those freed slaves. Their lot fell far short of their expectations of what freedom would entail. In addition, they“…faced rampant disease…Many of them simply starved to death”. Emancipation turned out to be such a disaster that “anti-slavery abolitionists feared the disaster would prove their critics right : that slaves were not able to exist on their own.”

Worse perhaps, Emancipation ushered in an entire century-(until the civil rights movement of the 1960’s)-of institutional segregation-(separate housing, schools, transport and more). It also limited the economic opportunities of the African Americans while “maintaining the economic advantages and superior social status of the politically dominant group”, according to Britannica. And worst of all , they faced the risk of violence-(beating, lynching etc.)- at the hands of white supremacists such as the Ku Klux Klan.

But even with the constitutional ameliorations of the living conditions of African Americans in the 1960’s, old habits die hard. The antagonism and resentment against them endured into the 21st century.

We have seen that the mad rush for Africa was made under the guise of taking there Christianity and Civilization. But, although some missionaries did go there, these lofty aims were far from the minds of the colonisers. For the most part the resources of Africa were plundered by commercial enterprises at the behest of the European powers. Their aim was to make the maximum profits at the least possible cost.

Portugal, for example, allocated its colony of Mozambique to three concessionary companies. They were allowed freedom of action in their respective zones of operation-(one, the Mozambique Company ruled its area uncontested from 1892 to 1942). They undertook their exploitation with cruelty and ruthlessness, with nothing of value in return for the locals. For although they were under contractual obligation to invest in various social services and infrastructures, the only money spent in this regard was on projects of benefit to the concessionaire.

Another was Leopold II (1835-1909) king of the Belgians. Passing himself as a philanthropist he persuaded his fellow Europeans to award him the 2,000,000 sq kms of the Congo as his personal property. He named it the ‘Congo Free State’, ruled and plundered it from 1885 to 1908. Making use of his ‘Force pulique’, a private army of 19000, he instituted a regime of pure terror. His officers and soldiers went about recruiting, employing and punishing the locals with such violence and cruelty that according to the BBC: “He turned his "Congo Free State" into a massive labour camp, made a fortune for himself from the harvest of its wild rubber , and contributed in a large way to the death of perhaps 10 million innocent people”.

Third, is what has since been considered by most scholars as the genocide of the ‘Hereros’, the indigenous people of South West Africa-(now Namibia)-which were colonized by Germany from 1884 to 1890. But as some 250,000 Hereros rebelled against the 3,000 foreign settlers-(who were stealing their livelihood in this already impoverished semi-arid region)-, Berlin sent in the Army in 1904, in order to: “annihilate these masses with a simultaneous blow”. Most of the Herero people were expelled, -(with no possibility of return)-, to the Kalahari Desert, an arid place where many thousands died of thirst. Those who were allowed to remain were placed in concentration camps and used as free labour to the newcomers.

At the peak of colonialism, in the early 20th century, ‘exotic’ people from the colonies were brought to Europe to be displayed ‘in human zoos’. They served to show European citizenry the gap between the civilized world and that of the primitive savages and also to convince anyone who had doubts, of the white man’s duty to bring civilization and Christianity to these backward regions. Human specimens on display, variously, showed groups performing their dances and rituals, or individuals either dressed or naked. Worst of all was when Africans were placed in ape houses to reinforce the impression of similarities.

In the Republic of South Africa, the laws of strict separation between natives and whites of Dutch ancestry-(Afrikaans)-, took effect in 1948 and ended in the early 1990’s. They were rigidly enforced “by an authoritarian political culture…which ensured that South Africa was dominated politically, socially, and economically by the nation's minority white population” in the words of Wikipedia. But despite majority rule, starting with Nelson Mandella in 1994, South Africa continue to suffer the legacy of Apartheid, in particular inequality.

RACE SCIENCE

What is race science? According to the ‘Advanced English Dictionary’, it is “an activity resembling science but based on [incorrect] assumptions”.

As we have seen earlier, white owners of African slaves saw the advantage of relying on science to prove once and for all that theirs was a superior race and that their charges were meant to serve them like the cattle they owned.

The whole purpose of the exercise was to demonstrate that intelligence is biologically correlated to colour of skin and that black people cannot attain the same levels of education, achievements and prosperity etc. as white people because they are less “naturally” intelligent. They cannot even live as long and are more inclined to break the law and consequently be locked up.

I must digress here a little to explain the difference between ‘monogenism’ and ‘polygenism’ before carrying on. We have seen, hereinbefore, that Darwin through his 1871 book ‘The Descent of Man’, maintained that all humans descend from one and only one ancestor. They all belonged to the ‘Homo sapiens’ species, regardless of skin colour and other physical traits. This is ‘monogenism’.

But race scientists did not see it this way. They claimed, instead, that different races descended from different ancestors some more endowed with intellect and abilities than others. Thus, the ancestor at the origin white Europeans, was the ablest, cleverest, hence the most intelligent. Well below him stood the dumb progenitor of the black man. An in between one found those of the other races. This is ‘polygenism’.

So, from the 1700’s onwards scientist after scientist claimed they had the evidence of polygenism. Perhaps we can excuse those of them who lived and worked in the 18th and first half of the 19th century, before Darwin’s momentous work. Still, ironically, as Christians they must have known that Adam was the father of all.

And according Harvard Library’s publication: “…proponents of ‘polygenism’ …..supported…pseudoscientific methods like…the measurement of human skulls, which supposedly proved that white people were biologically superior to Blacks. Further, they “weaponized statistical health data …against Black Americans in the late 1800s, as it was used to claim they were predisposed to disease and destined for extinction”. Let us now look at some of the pseudoscientists.

We begin with Swedish biologist Carl Linnaeus (1707-1778) of whom Alan Goodman wrote that he “…liked to imagine himself as organizing what God created”. He separated Homo sapiens, on the basis of written accounts of travelers, into races with the supremo Europeans “closer to God”, above all others with the ones bottommost “ just above apes and monkeys”.

From the ‘German History Intersections’, we know about philosopher Christoph Meiners (1747–1810) and of his thesis

‘On the Nature of the African Negroes’ in which he attributed “aesthetic, physical, emotional, creative-cognitive, and moral characteristics” to white skinned humans as to make them superior to dark skinned ones who did not deserve to aspire higher than servitude to their white masters.

Since white supremacists firmly believed that race and intelligence were correlated, American anthropologist Samuel George Morton (1799-1851) decided to take the bull by the horns and proceed to make measurements of the brain cavity of the skulls of different races. Having, thus , measured a great number of them he, according to Britannica, “developed an intellectual hierarchy that placed… whites-( who had the largest cranial capacity…and thus were presumed to possess the greatest intelligence)- at the top and placed… blacks-( who possessed the lowest cranial capacity)-….on the bottom”.

One of those impressed with the work of Morton was Swiss born scientist Louis Agassiz (1807-1873), and one of the luminaries of Harvard University. He was, simultaneously, a polygenist and a creationist. He maintained that the Almighty created different human races independently “each descending from different ancestors (polygenism) and originating in separate zoological provinces at the beginning of time”. Additionally, Agassiz observed Blacks in the poor neighbourhoods of Philadelphia in 1846, and came away with the conviction “that they made up a degraded and degenerate race”.

In light of the foregoing, it is not surprising that Agassiz was opposed to mixed marriages. Having convinced himself that African-Americans belonged to an entirely separate and inferior race, he wrote in 1863 “that sexual relations between blacks and whites were immoral and destructive to the social equality”. He naturally supported strict segregation.

After all is said and done, it seems strange that Agassiz, whose professional life was contemporaneous with that of Charles Darwin, did not acknowledge the work of the latter on evolution. In the words of Britannica, it is not clear why he was “cold and unsympathetic” to Darwin’s tome ‘On the Origin of Species’, published in 1859.

As stated above, Agassiz was an important academic figure at Harvard University-(he was involved with other fields of science). But his legacy on racial issues, became an embarrassment for both the university and the city of Cambridge, where it is located. Indeed, Harvard proceeded to discredit this legacy by removing the vestiges commemorating his passage on its campus. Further, it is cooperating with ‘Legacy of Slavery’ so as “to uncover the truth of Harvard’s ties to slavery [in order to start] the process of reckoning and repair”. As for the city of Cambridge, it decided in 2020 to rename a neighbourhood, formerly identified with Louis Agassiz.

By the onset of the 20th century, any anthropologist worth his salt would be fully aware of Darwin’s ‘Theory of Evolution’. Yet we have Carlton Coon (1904-1981), at one time head of the ‘American Association of Physical Anthropologists’ who still held that humans descended from five independent ancestors each with a different intellect.

All this scientific nonsense from Linnaeus to Morton to Agassiz and the rest reinforced the convictions of white supremacists and dug in deep roots for segregation in America and particularly in the southern states.

As the 20th century wore on, race science lost its credence in the face of more archaeological discoveries and anthropological investigations. For example it turns out that Africans had less, biologically, in common between themselves than between them and Europeans. In the words of Alan Goodman: “On average, two individuals in Africa are more genetically [biologically] dissimilar from each other than either one of them is from an individual in Europe or Asia”.

Other archaeological searches in southern sub-Saharan Africa in the year 2000, yielded caves dated to between 70,000 and 100,000 years ago that showed the same preoccupations found with the vaunted first Europeans-( Cro-Magnons humans)- some 56,800 years ago. The sub-Saharans were without a doubt “biologically modern humans…inventive [and] creative…just like us” in the words of South African archaeologist Christopher Henshilwood.

Although phony race science died in the respected establishments such as universities and research institutes; still, racism would not go away. It was kept alive by racist diehards at all levels of society. As we shall see in the next part, they remained convinced-(or pretended to be for socio-politico-economic reasons)- that Whites are hierarchically higher than those of African ancestry.

WHERE ARE WE TODAY?

‘The unwelcome return of race science’ is the title of a long article written in 2018 by science journalist Gavin Evans (DOB: 1960), in which he laments the resurgence of race science in the USA, at the hands of far-right politicians and the media, reviving the racist arguments of the 19th century.

For example, Evans tells us about a “most toxic book” ‘Troublesome inheritance’ which repeats, the now discredited supremacist mantra, that IQ tests show differences in intelligence levels between races. That, therefore, they originated independently, and were biologically equipped with different brains.

Another proponent of this argument is Steve Bannon (DOB: 1953), the, onetime, influential figure in Donald Trump’s White House. He wrote an article in 1916 justifying the shooting of a number of African Americans, by policemen on the ground that “There are, after all, in this world, some people who are naturally aggressive and violent”. He was being consistent with the strongly held conviction of race scientists that Blacks are more innately violent than others.

Indeed, the likes of Bannon point to the factually proportionately higher rates of delinquency, criminality and incarceration among African-Americans as indicators of biologically induced malfeasance and misconduct. But they fail, to see that the reasons for this state of affairs are socio/ political. They are the results of poor healthcare and education, shabby living conditions, and alienation and persecution. And while on the subject it is worth noting that infant mortality among blacks Americans is twice that among those of European heritage.

Another contention of present-day race scientists is that the alleged higher mental abilities of Europeans evolved as a consequence of the more rigorous northern climate and environment, in the wake of the migration of their ancestors from Africa, some 45,000 years ago. I have hereinbefore explained the role of melamine on skin colour, but as for the new environment playing a role on the development of the human brain; our earlier story of the prehistoric sub-Sahara Africans debunks it.

Right wingers accuse their opponents of not wanting to face the inconvenient truth of separate races with different mental abilities. One of them wrote in 2013: “We remain the same species, just as a poodle and a beagle are of the same species. But poodles, in general, are smarter than beagles, and beagles have a much better sense of smell”.

In this context, let me repeat here what I wrote in an earlier narrative. There are today more than 200 breeds of domestic dogs-(varying from the 100 kg English mastiff to the chihuahua of no more than 3kg). But all belong to the ‘Canis lupus familiaris’ species, the way all humans are part of the ‘Homo sapiens’ species. The differences between them are the result of many centuries of human manipulations. To the contrary, there are no different breeds of humans; having all been shaped by natural evolution and their specific geographies and environments.

The Stolen Generations and Other Genocides

THE ‘STOLEN GENERATIONS’ AND NINE OTHER FORGOTTEN GENOCIDES

Aboriginal children taken away from their families as part of the ‘assimilation’ project of Australian governments

FEBRUARY 2024

REFERENCES

*Columbus’s callousness. The Author: They made the world smaller. Part-2.

*Crime of not being Russian. American University: Journal…etc.: The Circassian genocide Britannica: Circassian people. Owlcation: The top 10 worst genocides in history. Smithsonian magazine:150 years ago, Sochi etc. Wikipedia: Russo- Circassian war. Wikipedia: Circassian genocide World Atlas: The 10 worst genocides in history.

*The stolen generations. National Geographic: Why aboriginal Australians are etc. The Australian Museum: Genocide in Australia. The University of Newcastle: …Aboriginal massacres etc.

*Hamidian ugly deeds. Britannica: Armenian people. Britannica: Hamidian massacres. Sara Cohan(PDF): A brief history of the Armenian genocide. Wikipedia: Hamidian massacres.

*Namibia and German colonists. Listverse: Ten awful genocides often forgotten by history. The Author: Africa the land and its peoples.

*Sayfo tragedy. Britannica: Assyrian people. Wikipedia: Assyrian people. Wikipedia: Sayfo. World without genocide: The Ottoman Christian genocide.

*Evil. Middle East eye: Fascist Italy and the forgotten Libyan genocide. Middle East research: Genocide, historical Amnesia…etc. Wikipedia: Libyan genocide.

*Holodomor or Stalin’s evilness. Britannica: Holodomor. The Author: Hunger bread..

*Churchill’s racism. The Author: Hunger bread.

*Guatemala’s mayacide. Britannica: Guatemala. Encyclopedia.com: Mayan genocide in Guatemala. Getty Center: Indigenous threatened heritage in Guatemala. Holocaust Museum: Genocide in Guatemala. Listverse: Ten awful genocides often forgotten by history. The Author: Pre-Columbian Americas and the Maya.. etc. Wikipedia: Guatemalan genocide.

*Appendix. Geraldine Heng: Race and racism in the European Middle Ages. The Author: Minority religions of the Middle East.

OVERVIEW

Two persons belong to an ethnic group if they share customs, traditions, religion and language. They will also believe they have a common ancestor-(more likely a myth than reality)- in the depths of history. Clearly, two ethnic groups within the same political space may enter into conflict with one another on socio-political divergences.

There are many forms of ethnic conflicts. First there are peaceful disagreements such as the one between the English and the Scotts inside the boundaries of the United Kingdom. Similarly for the competition between the Walloon and the Flemish both belonging the Belgian kingdom. Then there are the more serious armed conflicts which, nevertheless, conclude with an agreement after a longer or shorter spell of bloodshed. Examples of these are the troubles that occurred in Northern Ireland between its Protestant unionists -(union with the English and others in the British Isles)- and Catholic separatists-(union with the Irish Republic). Likewise the more recent fights between Serbs and Bosnians.

Worse, much worse, are the savage assaults initiated by dominant ethnicities on smaller and weaker ones sharing the same socio-political space. More often than not the latter are the original inhabitants, while the former have intruded without invitation. Inevitably a dominant group justifies its brutal actions, by dehumanizing the other, claiming its members are sub-humans making them unwanted. And once a genocide commences it is always accompanied by human right violations including rape, torture, mutilation, forced relocation and the rest. Without fail it ends when the attacked group is decimated and those still alive facing a future of utter destitution in a strange land.

In 1951 the United Nations defined as genocide any actions directed at a group of people which results include at least one of the following:

-Killing members of the group. -Causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of the group. -Deliberately inflicting on the group conditions of life calculated to bring about its physical destruction in whole or in part. -Imposing measures intended to prevent births within the group. -Forcibly transferring children of the group to another group.

With these guidelines in mind, this narrative is about 10 ethnic catastrophes: five resulting from the callousness of colonists toward natives, three were committed from political/religious considerations and two were man-made famines.

Unlike the Armenian Genocide of 1915, the Jewish Holocaust during the second World War, or the slaughter of the Tutsis by the Hutus in Rwanda during1994 etc. the ones here are not written/spoken about in the media. Indeed, they are the forgotten tragic occurrences.

COLUMBUS’S CALLOUSNESS

When Cristopher Columbus landed in August 1492 on the island now shared by Haiti and the Dominican Republic, he was welcomed with open arms by its inhabitants, the Tainos. They bore presents and willingly helped him and his companions salvage whatever remained of his wrecked vessel and good naturedly, assisted with the construction of the first European settlement in the New World. He named the island ‘Hispaniola’

Columbus was pleasantly surprised by the reception of the Tainos. In his journal he recorded that “they were very friendly to us, and perceived that they could be much more easily converted to our holy faith by gentle means than by force…”.

Unfortunately, however, the gentleness and generosity of the Tainos was not reciprocated to. Instead, Columbus put them to work searching for gold and other valuables to take back to his sponsors Ferdinand and Isabella, king and queen of Spain. Thus, for his return journey, he loaded his ship with a few exotic parrots, some spices and human cargo consisting of several natives that his sailors had seized by force. Columbus left behind 39 of his men.

Arriving back on Hispaniola in November 1493, Columbus and his people were shocked to discover that the Tainos had massacred the 39 Europeans and destroyed their settlement. Clearly, despite their mild manners they had retaliated against the heartlessness and harsh behaviour towards them.

This notwithstanding, Columbus forced the Tainos to rebuild the settlement and to toil in search of gold and other valuables to take back to Spain. In their frenzy to accumulate wealth, the colonists practiced all kinds of ‘punishment’ on the natives for not fulfilling their assigned quotas in gold and whatever. They even went as far as cutting off of hands. Worse, much worse, they captured Tainos, taking little girls from their parents, husbands from wifes etc., to trade them in the slave markets far, far away from the island. In the process they beat, raped, killed their victims and according to professor Jack Weatherford (DOB: 1946) used “… Indian bodies as food for their hunting dogs”.

In February 1494, 12 ships loaded with 1200 Tainos, squeezed like sardines in the vessels holds, were sent to Spain. Many died on the way and were unceremoniously tossed overboard. Once in Seville the survivors were “paraded naked through the streets…and sold as slaves” in the words of the same source.

Bartolome de Las Casas (1474-1566) went to Hispaniola as a colonist in 1502. For the first few years he behaved towards the natives as his compatriots did. But, by 1510 he had become so appalled at the treatment meted out by the settlers that he freed his personal slaves, was ordained priest and wrote about it all. Subsequently he gained the title of ‘Protector of the Indians’. In his writings we find: “ [The Spaniards]… thought nothing of knifing Indians by tens and twenties and of cutting slices off them to test the sharpness of their blades…” He wrote that Taino men were tortured and died in the mines. Women worked too so that “… husbands and wives were together only once every eight or ten months. . . they ceased to procreate…and in a short time this land. . . was depopulated…” Obviously, not all died from overwork, torture and suicide; diseases such as small pox, hitherto unknown, were passed on by the Europeans, contributing substantially to their extermination.

CRIME OF NOT BEING RUSSIAN

The criminals were the Circassians-(Cherkess)- and their judge and executioner were the Russians.

The Circassians were an ethnicity of 4,000,000 people in the 1830’s. Their home was Circassia in the northwestern Caucasus region adjoining the Black Sea-(other ethnic groups there include Armenians, Georgians, Azerbaijanis and others). Its two great neighbours were thus Russia and the Byzantine Empire. In the 14th century, the latter was replaced by that of the Ottomans.

Circassian early history is not really known. But what is, is that they started as pagans, becoming Orthodox Christians in the fifth century under the influence of the Byzantine Empire, switching once again to Sunni Islam in the 17th century to ingratiate themselves to the Ottoman Empire and, conversely displease the Russians their hitherto coreligionists.

Geopolitics, in the 18th century, made the Russians eager to expand southward into the Caucasus. And whereas, in due course, other ethnicities there yielded, the Circassians to the contrary doggedly resisted for 100 years. The Russians tried hard to subdue them, using brutal means of coercion, from 1763 to 1864. Still by that later date the Circassians were no more. They had lost over 95 percent of their population through death and deportation as we shall see. Only a handful who accepted Russification were allowed to remain.

More than one source confirms that the Muslimism of the Circassians was the main reason for the atrocities against them. Particularly, it was hard for the Russian elite to stomach their rejection of the faith of Christ in favour of that of Muhammad. After all the Russian Empire considered itself the upholder of Eastern Orthodoxy. At the highest level the tsars looked upon Circassians “as savages either to be converted” to fit within the Russian Church or be gotten rid of.

And as the conflict endured and the resistance of the Circassians stiffened the declarations of prominent members of the Russian intelligentsia became extreme beyond the bounds of humanity and logic.

An 1808 government commission concluded that measures were necessary to, once and for all, wipe out Circassians from their territory. From 1837, it became Russian strategy to degrade Circassians to the level of savages in no way “equal to a European man”. As for Count Dmitry Milyutin (1816-1912) a military historian and future minister of war, he explained in 1857 that first and foremost “eliminating the Circassians was to be an end in itself ”. The allocation of their lands to Russian farmers was a consequence.

As if all this was not enough, senior army officers in action against Circassians chimed in with their poisonous utterances such as "We need the Circassian lands, but we don’t have any need of the Circassians themselves". One of the generals strongly advocated the use of terror in order to make the opponents yield. Another did not mince his words when he declared himself in favour of “the removal of a pestilence [deadly infectious disease]” from the Land. As for general Grigory Zass (1797-1883), Circassians were to be gotten rid of as they were nothing but “subhuman filth”, whose women could, impunibly, be raped. This general paid soldiers to bring to him heads of Circassians. He, then, displayed them, mounted on posts, outside his tent. Decency, for once, spoke to the High Command in St Petersburg, Zass was relieved of his command for being too cruel.

With such a demagogy at play, uneducated peasant soldiers could, with impunity, let go of their most bestial instincts vis a vis those they considered to be the devil incarnate.

Circassians who survived knifes, bullets, fire and rape were forcibly marched into the Russian wilderness where they succumbed to weather and hunger. But many more were deported across the Black Sea to the Ottoman Empire-(pleased to add Muslim subjects to its population). They overcrowded in barely sea-worthy vessels. Some of these sank drowning all their passengers. Those who reached destination disembarked to a life of misery and privation; the Ottomans having not made adequate arrangements to receive them. They were left to fend for themselves.

Resistance died in 1864. Russian soldiers rejoiced and, as part of the celebrations, they executed 100 Circassians in public as a token of victory. Their officers put out a statement which read “…not one of the [Circassian] inhabitants remains on their former places of residence, and measures are being taken to cleanse the region in order to prepare it for the new Russian population”.

What was the cost of this calamity? I shall limit myself to the result of the Russian census of 1897, 30 years plus after the event. It accounted for only 150,000 Russified Circassians remaining in what used to Circassia. Put differently, “The devastating events that unfolded resulted in the disappearance, death, or exile of 90-97% of the Circassian population”.

Let me end with this. Sometime during that conflict, Circassian tribal chiefs jointly sent a plea to foreign governments imploring them for military and humanitarian help. But it remained unanswered. Here, for example are excerpts from the communication sent to a British high official: “…many are the lives which have been lost…We therefore invoke the mediation and precious assistance of the British Government and people…to repel the brutal attacks of the Russian Government… We beg, Your Excellency…our condition of helplessness and misery…”

THE ‘STOLEN GENERATIONS’.

For many centuries the continent of Oceania -(comprising Australia, New Zealand and a multitude of islands)- in the Pacific Ocean between Asia and the Americas was hidden from Europeans. Australia and New Zealand were discovered by captain James Cook (1728-1779) of the Royal-(British)-Navy during his voyages of discovery from 1768 to 1779. He claimed both for the British crown.

In 1788 the British authorities shipped their convicts to Australia. Naturally, in time, they were followed by regular colonists. But Australia was not an empty space. It was home to about 1,500,000 aboriginal natives-(also identified as ‘First nation people’)- whose ancestors had migrated there from Asia 50,000 years earlier. And for completeness sake, the forbears of the Asians had crossed from Africa about 70,000 years ago.

For a long time there was no consensus as to the seriousness and severity of the deadly encounters between natives and settlers as they expanded their footprints and forcefully took over aboriginal property.

But as of 2022, Professor Lyndall Ryan, on the University of Newcastle-(Australia)- and her team, following an 8-year long research project, have no doubts that these encounters were nothing less than genocidal massacres of ‘First nation people’. In consequence, of the 1.5 million souls that existed originally only 100,000 remained at the dawn of the 20th century.

With more settlers arriving, better knowledge of the habits and customs of the natives and improved firearms the massacres became deadlier from the mid nineteen century. According to Ms. Ryan “More massacres happened in the period 1860 to 1930 than in the period 1788 to 1860…The massacres after 1860 are being carried out on an immense scale…[with] more Aboriginal people being killed”.

Each killing was an organized and planned action and extended over “several weeks or months”. And let there be no doubt that the authorities in place not only sanctioned the massacres but also dispatched officials to participate in the killings with the settlers.

For example, sometime in the 1890’s Aboriginal men were caught and secured with neck chains. They were then instructed to gather firewood with which the perpetrators lit a fire, threw their captives into it after dousing them with a fuel of some kind.

And in the 1900’s a community of aboriginal people, who had gathered for a ceremony, were surprise-attacked and many were killed. The perpetrators had prepared themselves for the action days earlier.

Finally, what did professor Ryan make of all these genocidal activities? Clearly, the settlers wanted the land free from natives population and far from their water wells and the pastures of their livestock.

But state governments-( Australia consists of six states and two territories)- did try, between 1910 and 1970, to progressively covert the natives to their own customs and culture through a policy of ‘assimilation’. It meant removing children, by force, from the bosom of their natural families, place them in institutions mostly run by nuns to teach them the language of the settlers and turn them into Christians. In exchange the children were forbidden from speaking the language and practicing the customs of their parents; generally forgetting everything of aboriginal origin including their names which too were Australized. Subsequently, these children were adopted and raised by Australian families. The several waves of Aboriginal children who went through this transformation have been dubbed the ‘Stolen Generations’.

What is more serious, however, are the mental and psychological effects of this inhuman policy on the children and on their natural parent. In many opinions this is another kind of genocide. Indeed, sociologist Christopher Powell qualify this ‘assimilation’ policy of “cultural genocide which is the destruction of language, culture, religion and social institutions of a group with the intended aim of annihilating the group”.

‘HAMIDIAN’ UGLY DEEDS.

This part is about the first genocide against Ottoman Armenians between 1894 and 1896. It was carried out during the reign of Abdul Hamid II-( sultan from 1876 to 1909); hence its name of ‘Hamidian’. I must point out from the outset that it preceded by two decades the infamous ‘Armenian Genocide’ of 1915, commemorated every year since, by the Armenians of the diaspora.

The second half of the 19th century and first decade of the 20th were not happy times for the Ottoman Empire. It had lost so much of its former brilliance, influence and power that Western powers, notably France, Britain and Germany as well as Russia had no qualms meddling in its affairs. Among others they claimed the right to protect the sultanate’s Christian subjects to the satisfaction, needless to say, of the latter. Additionally, Russia had territorial claims to places within the boundary of the Empire. Westwardly, the Balkans provinces fought wars of independence with the Empire and won. They became Greece, Serbia, Bulgaria and Romania.

These circumstances disillusioned Abdul Hamid with Christian foreigners and shed a bad light on Ottoman followers of Jesus. He believed they favoured his opponents and hence looked upon them as disloyal subjects. He felt more at ease with pan-Islamism.

When a war broke out with the Russians in 1877, he armed his Muslim Kurd subjects to help with the fighting. But when that conflict ended a short while later, they did not return the weapons like they were supposed to. Abdul Hamid did not insist. Instead, he organized Kurd tribesmen, in 1880, into a cavalry unit. They became a law unto themselves, without fear of retribution no matter what.

So when Armenians began to show signs of political emancipation and sought protection from their European sponsors, he retaliated against them ruthlessly.

Armenians are an old ethnicity dating back to three millennia ago. They originated in what was known as Armenia-(Britannica: “presently northeastern Turkey and the Republic of Armenia”). They adopted Orthodox Christianity in the early part of the fourth century. Subsequently, they were taken over by the Ottoman Empire.

Despite enjoying freedom in the practice of religion and in educational matters, Armenians, in the multi-ethnic Ottoman Empire, were, nevertheless, looked upon as second class subjects. They were required to pay more taxes and subjected to more stringent laws than their Muslim compatriots. Worse they were subjected to abuse by venal functionaries and Kurd tribesmen.

By the mid 19th century, Armenians began to demand reforms in taxes and laws and protection from evil acts. Further, in 1887 and 1890 two political parties Hënchak and Dashnak came into being. And, inspired by rising nationalism in Europe, Armenians began to demand a country of their own, under the protection of Russia. They, even sent representatives to the 1878 Congress of Berlin-(a gathering of European diplomats to discuss the status of nations in the Balkans)- to seek assistance in pleading their case with the Ottomans.

Sultan Abdulhamid II was not pleased with these stirrings. He is reported to have commented, after being told that Armenians had aired their grievances to the Europeans meeting in Berlin: “Such great impudence ... Such great treachery toward religion and state ... May they be cursed upon by God”. He reacted by tightening the tax and regulation screws on them and turned a blind eye to the shenanigans of the Kurds who raided their lands, and looted their crops and livestock.

The first massacres took place in 1894 in the town of Sasun and its region in southeastern Turkey. In retaliation against Armenian townspeople’s refusal to pay the taxes demanded, Ottoman troops and Kurdish tribesmen killed many thousands and torched villages. In 1895 a protest in Istanbul resulted in a butchery. It was followed by more and more massacres of Armenians. Toward the end of the year the cathedral of Urfa was burnt along with a couple of thousand or more people who had taken refuge in the religious establishment.

And in 1896, demonstrators in Istanbul occupied the premises of the Ottoman bank demanding an end to the pogrom. What followed was a slaughter described by Britannica as a “mayhem [resulting in] more than 5,000 Armenians…killed by mobs of Muslim Turks whose actions were apparently coordinated by government troops”.

The Hamidian savagery went on for three years as government troops and Kurdish irregulars spread a bloody havoc in the Armenian communities of the Ottoman Empire.

About 200,000 Armenians, including tens of thousand of children lost their lives in this period. Many thousands emigrated to more clement places leaving behind , according to German sources, 546,000 in abject poverty, 2,496 razed villages and many hundreds of houses of worship transformed to mosques and hundreds more desecrated. Some became Muslim to escape falling prey to the butchers of Abdul Hamid. Men promptly sought circumcision and became regular attendees at mosques. Women married Muslims.

Let me end this with excerpts from a story published by The Times of London . It had received it from an American newsman describing the macabre realities he saw in an Armenian cemetery, in the town of Erzurum shortly after one of the massacres. “....Along the wall, lay 321 dead bodies of the massacred Armenians. Many were fearfully mangled and mutilated. I saw one with his face completely smashed in with a blow of some heavy weapon after he was killed. I saw some with their own necks almost severed by a sword cut. One I saw whose whole chest had been skinned, his fore-arms were cut off, while the upper arm was skinned of flesh…. A dozen bodies were half burned. All the corpses had been rifled of all their clothes except a cotton undergarment or two....”

NAMIBIA AND GERMAN COLONISTS

Most scholars call it genocide rather than expulsion of the ‘Hereros’, the natives of southwest Africa-(now Namibia).

Germany colonized that part of the continent between 1884 and 1890. In 1903 the 250,000 Hereros tried to resist the settlement of some 3,000 German nationals who were infringing on their livelihood in this already impoverished semi-arid region. Followed a succession of inconclusive engagements. To put an end, once and for all, to the resistance of the natives, the German government sent in the troops in 1904 with instructions to “annihilate these masses with a simultaneous blow”.

The execution of this order meant that the outgunned Hereros stood no chance. Most of them managed to escape into the Kalahari Desert where many thousands died of thirst.

With the majority of the Hereros thus outside the boundary of the colony, the German commander’s strategy became “…every Herero, whether found armed or unarmed, with or without cattle, will be shot. I shall not accept any more women and children”. Eventually, concentration camps were built near settlers communities where cheap labour was needed. For some time ,thereafter, men, women and children were rented out by the colonial authority to private businesses or employed by the colony government on infrastructure projects.

Ultimately, some 75 to 80% of the Herero ethnicity disappeared.

‘SAYFO’ TRAGEDY

‘Sayfo’ means sword in Aramean the language of the Assyrians who along with Armenians and other Christians suffered under the ‘ Young Turks’ government of the Ottoman Empire between 1909 and 1918, date at which it was defeated, along with its German ally in the Great War of 1914-1918.

Socio-politically the ‘Young Turks’ orientation favoured Islam and Turkishness-(as opposed to traditional multicultural Ottomanism). During their guardianship, massacres and deportations of Christians were committed. But more specifically so, of Armenians and Assyrians. The cruelty towards the first in not in the scope of this narrative. But the fate of the Assyrians in this period is and is briefly recounted below.

Assyrians originated in Mesopotamia, and in modern times can be found in Iraq, Syria and Turkey. Like Armenians they adopted Orthodox Christianity in the early centuries of our era. Aramaic-(spoken by Jesus)- is their mother tongue. The Ottomans acquired Iraq and Syria in the 17th century. Assyrians in the Empire lived in remote mountainous areas to avoid the attention and notice of the Ottoman authorities. They hoped their remoteness would spare them conscription and having to pay taxes. According to estimates they numbered 500 to 600,0000 souls in the realm.

According to historian David Gaunt (DOB: 1944), in the years before 1914 Kurds and Assyrians “were well-integrated with each other”, this blending did not prevent the former from maliciously behave toward the latter, including “kidnapping and rape of women, hostage taking, cattle stealing…plundering [and] torching of villages” in full knowledge and inaction by the government. Assyrians’ life became so unlivable that their patriarch approached the Russian Empire for relief.

At the same time, their intelligentsia became invigorated enough to put forward demands for reform and autonomy. So much so that when they were asked by the Ottoman government to join in the coming World War on its side, they refused and instead accepted to volunteer on the side of its enemy, the Russian Empire.

So long as Russian troops occupied Azerbaijan, the Assyrians there felt safe. But they withdrew and when Ottoman soldiers entered on 1st January, 1915, their fate was sealed. During their occupation of the country from January to May, Ottoman authorities and their Kurdish allies killed Assyrian men, mistreated and raped their women and looted and burned their villages.

With practically all men killed, they drove women and children westwards toward Anatolia-(eastern Turkey). It was a horrendous march. Those unable to keep up with the others were killed and those who died from exhaustion and hunger were left where they fell. At any rate, practically none of the deportees reached destination.

By the time the Ottoman Empire was defeated and dissolved, between 250 and 300,000 men, women and children had lost their lives. A large chunk of the Assyrian population at that time.

EVILشرّ – ‘الحق على الطليان’

Italy marched into Libya in 1911. But, as usual it needed to cloak its unjustified invasion in some plausible reasons such as freeing Libyans from the yoke of the Ottomans-(Libya, at that time was part of the Ottoman Empire). Or the civilizing of the backwards natives. But the most ludicrous was that Libya had been part of the Roman Empire and Italy was sending its soldiers to reclaim its inheritance. Be that as it may, like Europeans elsewhere, Italians looked upon and treated the local population, Arab and Bedouins, with racist condescendence and discrimination. Italy remained in Libya till pushed out in 1943 by the Anglo-American forces during the second Great War.

The real reason for the conquest was the desire to resettle 500,000 and 1 million Italians, in Cyrenaica-(Libya’s eastern region, 0ne and a half times the size of France). Still to do so the Arabs and Bedouins had to be relocated and prevented from causing trouble. But they didn’t go quietly, they set up a resistance headed by Omar Al Mukhtar (1858-1931).Italians responded with a genocide-(called ‘Shar’-شرّ locally, meaning: evil). It aimed at “the systematic destruction of Libyan culture” according to Wikipedia.

But the worst practices occurred between 1929 and 1934, during the Fascist regime in Italy. In 1930 Governor Pietro Badoglio (1871-1956) maintained that the whole population of Cyrenaica should be exterminated.

And so, with the blessing and urging of Benito Mussolini (1883-1945), the autocratic ruler of Italy, they targeted the Bedouins and others of that region . According to historian Melvin Page (DOB: 1944), they built a total of 15 concentration camps to which half the population of Cyrenaica was deported along with their livestock. Many thousands died during the crossing on foot of the desert and many more in the camps themselves from overcrowding, hunger and lack of medical facilities. More, Libyans were gassed from the air and their drinking water supplies poisoned. Another historian, Ilan Pappé wrote that of the 100,000 dispossessed Bedouins-(for the benefit of Italian settlers)-and marched to the concentration camps, less than 40,000 survived and released in 1934.

Shortly after its establishment in 1945, the United Nations calculated that between 250 to 300,000 native Libyans lost their lives between 1912 and 1942 on account of Italian colonization.

HOLODOMOR OR STALIN’S EVILNESS

In the 1930’s Ukraine was one of the 15 republics constituting the USSR-(Union of Soviet Socialist Republics), and its greatest grain producer. Joseph Stalin (1878-1953) was the Union’s tyrannical ruler.

Holodomor is a Ukrainian term meaning death by hunger. More specifically it describes the dreadful famine of 1932 to 1933. Although, according to Britannica “It was part of a broader Soviet famine” , it was made much deadlier by decisions and directives of Stalin specifically aimed at the Ukraine. He did so because he wanted to show Ukrainian who was boss. With the republic’s intelligentsia manifesting independentist tendencies he was waiting for the opportunity to hit them hard.

For a start he ordered an increase in the tonnage of grain confiscated for export. According to Britannica he also directed that “Farms, villages, and whole towns in Ukraine [be] placed on blacklists and prevented from receiving food. Peasants were forbidden to leave the Ukrainian republic in search of food”. And later “police ransacked the homes of peasants and took everything edible, from crops to personal food supplies to pets”.

In other words, Stalin took the opportunity presented by the shortage of food to mete out punishment to the political, religious and cultural leaders of the Ukraine for their insubordination. As for the Human Rights Council of the United Nations “The Ukrainian….dreadful famine [was] premeditated by… Joseph [Stalin, against] the Ukrainian people”.

As a consequence, during 1932 and 1933, Holodomor caused the death of starvation and disease-(that always accompanies famnes)-of 3 to 7 million of Ukrainians. In his 2010 book ‘Bloodlands’ historian Tymothy Snyder (DOB:1969) writes : “…Those who refused to steal or to prostitute themselves died….Those who refused to eat corpses died…Parents who resisted cannibalism died before their children did”.

CHURCHILL’S RACISM

Nineteen forty three was the third year of the great war of1939-1945. The British Empire led by Winston Churchill ( 1847-1965) was fighting along with its allies against Germany and its allies. In 1943 India was part of that empire and as such had sent 2.5 million of its sons to fight alongside the British. They fared well and contribute to the final victory. Yet Churchill despised Indians. He reportedly, on one occasion, said as much himself : “I hate Indians. They are a beastly people with a beastly religion”.

Nineteen forty three was also the year of the great famine of the Bengal in the east of India which left in its wake some 3 million victims. When the onset of the famine was reported to Churchill, he derided the Indians who “bred like rabbits”, implying, perhaps, that India, with its huge population could afford to lose a few millions of its people.

There was more than one reason for that famine. First, Bengal suffered from a cyclone a year earlier and from a war-caused interruption of rice imports from Asian neighbours. Still, consensus is that these had only a minor effect on the availability of food for Bengalis. On the other hand there is more agreement on the deleterious effects of British policies and actions.

These are dealt with in the acclaimed 2010 book by Indian-American writer and journalist Madhusree Mukherjee (DOB: 1961): ‘Churchill Secret War…etc.’ According to her the great Bengal famine is attributable to Churchill’s racism and lack of compassion towards Britain’s Indian subjects. She tells of the continued exports of food from India during that period, of the Bengalis forced to grow jute for sandbags, in lieu of rice, of the diversion of India bound shiploads of food from Australia, and of the destruction of food stocks to deny them to the Japanese in case they invaded from Burma. And more.

After all is said and done, the famine of 1943 made parents drown their starving children. Others “begged for the starchy water in which rice had been boiled…”. Fathers sold their daughters and young, good looking women prostituted themselves to feed their families.

GUATEMALA’S ‘MAYACIDE’

‘Mayacide’ is the name given by a publication of the Getty Center to describe the atrocities committed by successive Guatemalan military governments in the 1970’s and 80’s against their citizens of Maya ethnicity. Incidentally, they were actively backed by US governments phobic about Communists in Central America.

Maya civilization emerged around 1500 BCE in Mesoamerica- (central Mexico, Belize, Guatemala, El-Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua and Costa Rica). It mysteriously ended around 950 CE. That is not to say, however, that all people of Maya descent vanished. To the contrary, they are conspicuous in Guatemala and other countries in that part of the New World.

Maya culture attained its zenith from about 250 to 900 CE or for some 650 years during which they built great cities, impressive monuments and practiced agriculture. More, they invented a calendar and a writing and numbering system. And made paper from the bark of fig trees. In short, according to archaeologist and anthropologist professor Michael Coe (DOB: 1929), Maya civilization “reached intellectual and artistic heights which no other in the New World, and few in Europe, could match at the time”.

The Spanish conquistadores arrived in the 16th century to colonize central and South America. They encountered Maya culture here and there in the regions they appropriated, and set in motion a 500 year long period of mistreatment. Among others they enslaved them and in the process of converting them to Christianity destroyed important vestiges of Maya culture judged by the missionaries who accompanied the colonizers, as pagan and heathen.

Guatemala is a polity south and east of Mexico. It is 108,889 sq km in area and had a population in the 1970’s and 80’s of about 6 million people-(in 2023 it was nearly 18 million). It achieved independence from Spain in 1821. Until 1985 Guatemala went through a succession of autocratic rules by military juntas.The country’s citizens belong to one of two ethnic groups: the Ladinos and the Maya. According to a 2018 census the former constituted 56% of the population, the latter 42%. The remaining 2% of citizenry belong to a smattering of indigenous ethnic groups.

Ladinos are the descendants of Spanish/Maya unions. As formally defined by the Guatemalan government, they are “a heterogeneous population which expresses itself in the Spanish language as a maternal language…and dresses in a style commonly considered as western”. They constitute the bulk of urban population. Further, Ladinos are part of the whole social spectrum ranging from the moneyed elite and ruling classes to the uneducated lower classes.

The Maya, by contrast, live in the countryside and work the land. They could not aspire to better status being looked upon by non-Maya society as “Indios: backward, dirty, and savage people”, according to the Getty Center.

The dire socio-economic conditions in the country-( made worse by a devastating earthquake in 1976)- were beyond the competence of the corrupt ruling generals to deal with. Thus, as early as the mid 1950’s a strong non-Maya opposition to the government, took the form of guerilla actions /civil war. The conflict was eventually resolved in 1996, through the mediation of the United Nation.

At the outset of the rebellion the Maya were not involved. But from 1970, they joined the guerilla fighters demanding an end to persecution, of inequality with non-Maya citizenry and recognition of their culture and language. In the event, they opened the doors of hell on themselves. Henceforth, and for the following 15 years the Guatemalan armed forces resorted to the cruelest and most inhumane actions with the aim of destroying their livelihood, property and culture. In short, eradicating them from Guatemalan society.

By identifying Maya people as Communist elements the generals were able to disguise their antipathy towards the indigenous population, earn the active support of the United States and carry out, unhindered, a scorched-earth campaign in order to “eliminate, annihilate, and exterminate the ‘internal enemy’ very quickly and “gain the hearts of the [non-Mayan] population.” in the words of Encyclopedia.com. Those who did not die or flee to neighbouring countries were housed in ‘model villages’ managed and permanently guarded by the military.

In due course, the UN set up a fact-finding group called the ‘Commission for Historical Clarification’ which after thorough investigation and enquiry published in 1999 its report titled ‘Guatemala: Memory of Silence’ in which we find “… the beginning of the violence in Guatemala was the result of racist and exclusionary national policies, which made it impossible for the state to achieve a social consensus in Guatemalan society”.

The report found that the genocidal campaign resulted in “626 Mayan communities destroyed by fire, 200,000 people assassinated or ‘disappeared’, 1.5 million people displaced, 150,000 refugees who fled to Mexico, and several hundred people exiled into other countries”.

I shall end by this account of a typical massacre as it appeared in the UN report: “. . . soldiers monitored points of entry into the community, while others went house to house rounding up the population…Approximately 20 girls between 12 and 20 years of age were taken to one house where they were raped and then killed. The rest of the population was forced into another house…soldiers threw two hand grenades into that house, and then sprayed it…with sustained gunfire. Small children were hit or kicked to death… soldiers…subsequently set fire to the house where the majority of the victims had been killed…”

APPENDIX

I judged the historical tendencies and attitudes which follow to have genocidal potentials. I have therefore included them for the edification of my readers

The European Middle Ages-(roughly from 500 to 1500 CE)-was a period of intense abhorrence of Muslims and Jews. A 1215 Council convoked by Pope Innocent III, and attended by a few hundred European bishops and other high ranking Church officials, decreed that Muslim and Jews-(‘the executioners of Christ’)-must make themselves conspicuous by wearing discernible clothing so as not to be mistaken for Christians.

According to Geraldine Heng (DOB 1953) of the University of Texas at Austin, Jews were loathed and feared because of claims of “possessing a fetid stench, a male [menstruation], subhuman and bestial qualities, and a congenital need to ingest the blood of Christian children whom they tortured and crucified to death.”

As for Muslims, Medieval Europe thought of them as “non-humans”. So much so that prominent theologian Bernard de Clairvaux (1090-1153) wrote that taking the life of a Muslim is not a crime since it constituted an “extermination of incarnated evil”. Muslims were further, referred to as ‘Saracen’. This, is because theologians and scholars, of that time, believed that Muslims called themselves ‘Saraceni’ to pretend their descent from Sara Abraham’s legitimate wife rather than from the slave Hagar. They, thus concluded that Muslims are all liars; never to be believed.

In her 2018 book ‘The Invention of Race in the European Middle Ages’ Ms. Heng proposes that Medieval England was the first in Europe to enact both church and civil laws segregating against Jews. They were to be constantly monitored, live in identified places away from Christian neighbourhoods-(“ the beginnings of the ghetto”)-, to wear identifying markers, and be lawfully killed when necessary. In 1290 they were expelled from English soil, “in their first permanent expulsion from a European country”.

Towards the end of the 15th century, in the wake of the defeat of the Muslims in Spain, at the hands of Ferdinand and Isabella, they were given the choice of either converting or leaving. Likewise, the Jewish population were given the same choice. This was followed by the setting up of religious tribunal-(the notorious Inquisition)- to rule on the sincerity of converted individuals.

Still, the prejudices of Medieval Europeans did not end with Jews and Muslims. They also extended to African, of whom they had met during their travels on pilgrimage and trade. To them those dark skinned people were the “torturers of Christ”.

Even the equally European Irish were looked upon as ethnically “subhuman, savage, and bestial”.

In an earlier narrative, about minority religions in the Middle East we have seen that as Muslim civilization spread it met Zoroastrianism, Yezidism, Alawism an Druze. As they were not ‘People of the Book’-(unlike Jews and Christians)- Muslims were under no Quranic obligation to allow them special considerations.

When Muslims conquered Persia in 651, the majority of Persians were Zoroastrian or ‘Majoos’ in Arabic. The latter’s numbers began to decline from that date on through persecution, conversion to Islam and emigration.

Yazidis are an ethnicity in northwest Iraq. From the time Muslims came into contact with them, they have been labelled ‘Satan Worshippers’. As such it has led to enduring persecutions culminating in the atrocities perpetrated against them by the ‘Islamic State in Iraq and Syria’ beginning in 2014.

Alawites were doing fine in the Aleppo ruled by the Hamadani dynasty (905-1004). In the wake of the fall of that dynasty, Alawites faced mounting oppression and persecution under the Abbasid, Mamluk and Ottoman dynasties.

Druze beliefs and doctrine took shape in Fatimid Egypt early in the 10th century and flourished during the rein of al- Hakim bi-Amr Allah (985-1021). But the opposition and antagonism of the Fatimid clergy was such that they rid themselves of that ruler and in agreement with the following one, started an era of Druze persecution and even massacres.

Part IX: The Modern Condition

Corruption of Marxism

CORRUPTION OF MARXISM BY FIVE LEADERS

From left to right: Lenin, Stalin, Mao Zedong, Kim il Sung, Pol Pot.

The Author MARCH, 2024.

REFERENCES

*Introduction. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Marxism. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Proletariat. -Wikipedia: Dictatorship of the proletariat

*Vladimir Lenin. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Vladimir Lenin. -Simon Sebag Montefiore: Titans of history.

*Joseph Stalin. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Joseph Stalin -Simon Sebag Montefiore: Titans of history.

*Mao Zedong. -BBC: Mao Zedong. -History.com: Long March. -Simon Sebag Montefiore: Titans of history. -Wikipedia: Three-anti and Five-anti campaigns

*Kim Il Sung. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Kim Il Sung -Simon Sebag Montefiore: Titans of history. -Wikipedia: Kim Il Sung

*Pol Pot. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Pol Pot. -History .com: Pol Pot. -Simon Sebag Montefiore: Titans of history. -Wikipedia: Killing Fields.

*Appendix -BBC: How two men survived a prison etc. -Wikipedia: Tuol Sleng Genocide Museum.

Note: I have also referred to parts of my previous narratives.

INTRODUCTION

Lenin, Stalin, Mao Zedong, Kim Il Sung and Pol Pot are five autocratic leaders who in the name of Marxism aka Communism, ruled their citizens with such brutality and pitilessness as to make Marx turn in his grave. Why is that?

Karl Marx (1818-1883) lived in the early industrialization period in Europe. Appalled by the poverty, squalor, diseases and early deaths of industrial workers, and disgusted at their exploitation by factory owners, who greatly benefitted from their labour, he thought up the philosophy later identified by Marxism.

In a nutshell he envisaged a classless society in which: “from each [individual] according to his ability, to each according to his needs”. It could only happen when the proletariat rose against the bourgeoisie, expropriating it and making all its assets public property. By bourgeoisie, Marx meant capital owning individuals such as factory owners. And by proletariat, he intended strictly the wage earners employed in industrial production. In contrast he had only contempt for agricultural labour-(peasants). He did not think they were capable of rising to the challenges of change.

Marx speculated that the societal transformation that he preached would begin with an unforced uprising, led by nominated qualified members, against the bourgeoisie. It would be followed by a temporary dictatorship of the proletariat, to be replaced, after democratic elections by a communist government. There definitely was no place for bloodshed and brutality in his doctrine.

There were those, however, who were dubious about Marx’s temporariness of the dictatorship of the proletariat. Consider, for example, the Russian revolutionary anarchist-(advocating no organized government but a self-regulating society)-Mikhail Bakunin (1814-1876). He foresaw that it would turn lead workers into despotic controllers of their former comrades. As quoted by Chris Hedges in his 2015 book ‘Wages of Rebellion’: “Those previous workers having just become rulers or representatives of the people will cease being workers; they will look at the workers from their heights, they will represent not the people but themselves…”

Whatever, Lenin the vanguard of Communism and those who followed did not see matters Marx’s way. Theirs were pre-planned horrendously cruel revolutions by an agrarian proletariat. Worse, as predicted by Bakunin, their dictatorships were not of temporary nature. Rather they were permanent ones in the hands of inhumane tyrants, as we shall see.

One last word. Tyranny is by no means an exclusivity of communist regimes. Many non-communist countries ruled by absolute autocrats revert to the same pitiless methods, described here, against their perceived opponents. Indeed, every day that passes confirms the truth of the saying “Power tends to corrupt and absolute power corrupts absolutely”, of Lord Acton (1834-1902), a prominent English historian.

VLADIMIR LENIN 1870-1924

There is absolutely no doubt, whatsoever, that in the Russia of the early twentieth century a drastic socio-political change was long overdue. For century upon century the tens of millions peasants or serfs, suffered under the yoke of autocratic tsars and a tyrannical aristocracy. Indeed, until the 1950’s this immense country remained primarily agrarian.

Enter Vladimir Lenin, a Russin revolutionary who became the founding father of the socio-politico-economic system, posthumously known as Marxism-Leninism-(or simply Leninism). It prevailed in the Soviet Union from the 1920’s to the 90’s.

Vladimir Ilich Ulyanov was born in Simbirsk in western Russia. He descended from a well-off family with ‘noble roots’ on his mother’s side. As “inspector of schools” his father was a public servant appointed by the government of Tsar Alexander III (1845-1894). Vladimir did well at school and nothing in his childhood and early adolescence prefigured the revolutionary zeal to come later. Still, he and his four siblings were to embrace the rebellious stirrings against the despotism of the Tsar.

Comfortable and easy life came to an end when he was 17. First his father died not long after he had been threatened with early retirement “by a reactionary government that had grown fearful of the spread of public education”, in the words of Britannica. Secondly, and tragically, his elder brother and university student Aleksander, to whom he was attached, was arrested by the Tsarist police and subsequently hanged for seditious actions against the Tsar. These two events turned the young Ulyanov’s life upside down and put him on the road of dogged resistance and revolution.

He left school and enrolled in Kazan University in 1887 to study law. There he joined the ranks of the ‘Russian Socialist Workers Party-(RSDWP)-militating against the incumbent regime. He was arrested and exiled to Siberia and released in 1888. During this period of exile, he read Karl Marx and other similar authors. He embraced Marxism in 1889, at the age of 19.

Eventually, he graduated in 1991 with a first class degree. During 1892-1893 he practiced law defending the lower classes such as poor peasants. In the process “he acquired an intense loathing for the class bias of the legal system…etc.”, according to Britannica.

Once again he was apprehended in 1895 and jailed for a short period before being incarcerated in Siberia. Upon his release in 1900 he found refuge in Munich where along with others produced a newspaper to make his views known not only in his home country but also in Europe. In 1901 he began to be known as Lenin.

Rather than achieving Communism as preached by Marx, he decided, instead, to hasten the arrival of the dictatorship of the proletariat-(see Introduction)-, via a violent and ruthless revolution carried by the millions of illiterate Russian peasants, led by a revolutionary elite including himself. As reported by historian Montefiore-(see References)-, he was of the opinion “A revolution without firing squads is meaningless… We must… put down all resistance with such brutality that they will not forget it for several decades”.

His convictions caused the breakup of the Communist Party into two factions. The Bolsheviks supported his radical methods of complete and violent revolution to change Russian society. The Mensheviks, to the contrary, wanted to achieve the same aim through less brutal means. Lenin raged against them and all those who did not agree with him. In due course, he had them eliminated.

A first uprising erupted in 1905. Lenin travelled from Europe to join it. But it was put down by Tsarist forces, compelling him to return there. In the meantime, Joseph Stalin-(next part)-had joined the ranks of the Bolsheviks. Lenin liked and leaned on him for a variety of missions including but not limited to robbing banks to finance the political agenda of the party.

But in 1917, with Tsar Nicholas II captured, he was back for good. Thenceforth, he was the acknowledged leader of the Revolution, of the civil war against tsarist forces-(White Russians)-, and finally of the state till his death in 1924.

His was a tyrannical, repressive regime, applied harshly regardless of human suffering. For example, his agrarian policies turned the 1921-1923 food shortages into a famine which took the lives of between 2.5 and 5 million men women and children.

Through his secret police, the ‘Cheka’, he was able to spy on, apprehend, and eliminate any citizen suspected of not toeing the government line. Lenin’s opponents were “enemies of the people”. In particular, he went after the kulaks-(well-off land owning peasants)-, suspected of the failed attempt on his life in 1918. His orders were that they “should be pitilessly suppressed …[and in such a way]… that for hundreds of kilometres around the people might see…..etc.”, according to Mr. Montefiore.

Let us end on Lenin’s gruesome order to execute the deposed Tsar along with his wife and 5 children.

JOSEPH STALIN 1878-1953

Josef Vissarionovich Djugashvili was possibly one of the cruelest dictators that ever existed. He ruled the Soviet Union for almost 30 years, after the death of Vladimir Lenin. Human life meant nothing to him, it was disposable if political considerations require it. When he died in 1953, he went to meet his maker with millions of lives on his conscience. According to Britannica, he was “phenomenally ruthless organizer, [and] destroyed the remnants of individual freedom”.

Djugashvili was born in Georgia, one of the republics of the Soviet Union, to a cobbler father who beat him and was drunk more often than not. His mother who worked as a laundry woman wanted him to become a clergyman. So after leaving primary school in which he was a good student and learnt the Russian language -(he only spoke Georgian)-, he moved in 1894 to a theology Seminary in order to graduate as a cleric as wished by his mother. But he was not interested in the matters of religion. Instead, he secretly read Karl Marx and other taboo literature. His clerical superiors were not happy with him and threw him out in 1899. He was 21 years old.

In any case, Djugashvili’s temperament and physique were more relevant to a gangster than to a man of religion. Among others he bore grudges which could linger in him for months even years while he carefully planned his revenge. He was squat, muscular, with one arm shorter that the other and a pockmarked face from a smallpox attack in his infancy.

In 1900 Djugashvili joined the Bolshevik faction of the Communist Party. He was soon noticed by Lenin who liked him and, began to rely on his criminal talents for a variety of tasks. He was arrested, imprisoned and released on seven occasions between 1902 and 1913. The ease with which this cycle was repeated led some to believed he was a police informant, telling on his comrades.

In the wake of the failed 1905 uprising, the Bolsheviks found themselves short of money. In order fill the party’s coffer Djugashvili organized a group of ruffians who went on a spree of stealing, extortion etc. and killing whoever stood in the way. The band’s masterpiece was the theft in 1907 of 300,000 rubles from a bank and killing 50 people in the process. Djugashvili was arrested for the last time in 1913. He was deported to Siberia, being released in time for his active involvement in the 1917 revolution. It was sometime during that first decade of the 20th century that he adopted the pseudonym of ‘Stalin’, meaning ‘man of steel’.

After Lenin’s death in 1924, Stalin became a member of a triumvirate ruling the USSR. The other two were called Kamenev and Zinovyev. Not long after ,Stalin in cahoots with two comrades from the Party, Bukharin  and  Rykov sent home in disgrace both his triumvirate co-members. In due course, nonetheless, all four appeared in show trials-(public trials in which the outcome has already been decided)-, were found guilty of trumped up charges and executed.

By 1929, Stalin was basking in a cult of personality. The city of Tsaritsyn had become Stalingrad. Here and there were the paraphernalia of statues, posters etc. eulogizing the enlightened, omniscient leader.

That year he embarked on a program on industrializing the Soviet Union, in order to catch up with the capitalistic West. But the country was short of the hard currency to pay for the importation of machine tools and others. In order to generate that money, he decided to dramatically increase the export of grain hence its production. He responded to this challenge by calling for the collectivization of agriculture. By this he meant the joining together of individual farms into communes under the control of the government. In other words, individual farmers were to contribute their work, machinery and livestock to the communes.

But the kulaks-(peasants who own their land and are able to employ farmhands)- resisted the new plan. Stalin’s forces crushed them. Many were killed, others were exiled to the ‘gulags’- (concentration/ labour camps)- in Siberia. Only a few stayed alive.

In 1932 that insistence on maximum grain export, irrespective of circumstances, caused a great famine in the Ukraine that resulted in millions of deaths from starvation and hunger caused diseases.

As for nascent industrialization, Stalin was ruthless with factory managers. He did not tolerate delays in production, even if caused by circumstances outside their controls. They were coerced, at show trials, “… into confessing imaginary crimes”, in the words of Britannica. Further “the accused served as self-denounced scapegoats” for Stalin’s half-baked crash industrialization programme.

Using the murder of a prominent Communist, which he may well have instigated, Stalin embarked on the Great Terror of 1934-1938. It consisted of arrests, untrue confessions extracted under torture, show trials, verdicts of guilty and finally executions, or banishments to the gulags. Through this infernal process passed untold number of senior Communist Party members, government officials, ordinary citizens, as well as the four comrades already mentioned. The military was not spared; 40,000 senior army officers, including 3 of the 5 marshals were shot for concocted treason. In short, according to Britannica “Stalin’s political victims were numbered in tens of millions. His main motive was, presumably, to maximize his personal power”. And Stalin himself, apparently justified the carnage with the comment “You can’t make an omelet without cracking eggs”, as stated by Mr. Montefiore.

Stalin died in1953 aged 75. With him ended in excess of three decades, started by Lenin, of “blood soaked Soviet experiment that was based from the very start on random killing and…repression, and which led to the murders of many millions of innocent people”, according to Mr. Montefiore. Thenceforth, the Central Committee of the Communist Party of the USSR, took over the role of Government, with unmemorable men at the top.

MAO ZEDONG 1893-1976

Mao Zedong was to China what Stalin was to the USSR. The same nefarious epithets which applied to one were valid for the other. During his rule of more than a quarter century-(1949-1976)-, he was the cause for the extinction of 70 million Chinese, including old comrades. Some died from starvation others were simply massacred. In both cases victims of hare-brained projects, such as the 'Great Leap Forward' and the 'Cultural Revolution', covered hereinafter.

He was born, the son of a well to do farmer who took Mao out of school in early adolescence to work the land. But the youngster had other ideas, he ran away from home in search of education.

Mao joined the nascent Chinese Communist Party in 1921; he was 28. He had already read the writings of Karl Marx, but like Lenin before him in Russia, he wanted to create a Marxism tailored “to Chinese conditions [and]to the mentality and cultural traditions of the Chinese people”, according to Encyclopedia Britannica. Again, similarly to Russia, his proletariat was formed by hundreds of millions of peasants. Mao’s version of that doctrine was known as Maoism.

By then he already knew what should be done to reform the country. He wrote, according to Mr.Montefiore: “We adore times of war…We love sailing the sea of upheavals…The country must be destroyed then reformed…People like me long for its destruction”.

In 1931, Mao Zedong established the Chinese Soviet-(council)-Republic in Jiangxi province. Stalin fashion, he appointed himself Chairman at the cost of the lives of 700,000 rivals and opponents. But he still had to navigate against the dictatorial ruler of China, Chiang Kai-shek and the Chinese Nationalist Party-(Kuomintang).

Inevitably, civil war broke out between the Communists and the Nationalists. In 1934, the former were hit so hard that Mao decided to move to a less dangerous part of China, 6,000 kms from his present base. History refers to this event as the ‘Great March’.

An estimated 85,000 fighters plus supporting personnel, including women accompanied the leader. They walked in a long column stretching over kilometres, mostly at night, carrying their weapons and supplies on their backs or in animal drawn wagons. Their trek took them across 24 rivers and over 18 mountains. After a year of hardships only about 8,000 marchers and Mao reached destination.

But the civil war endured. Eventually Communist forces, assisted by the USSR, prevailed against the Nationalist in turn supported by the USA. In 1949 Mao founded the People’s Republic of China over which, as the chairman of the Chinese Communist Party, he ruled ruthlessly till 1976. Shortly after, Mao Zedong dreamed up two campaigns the ‘Three Anti’ in 1951 supposedly aimed at combatting “corruption, bureaucratism etc.” And the ‘Five Anti’, a year later, ostensibly targeted “bribery, theft of state property, tax evasion etc.”, according to Wikipedia.

In reality, both unleashed thousands of volunteers, and propagandists against company and real estate owners, civil servants, and even Communist Party members. They were harassed and coerced into confessing embezzlements and other wrongdoings. Measures were taken to encourage employees to tell on their bosses.

A great many of those targeted, supposedly, committed suicide; others were persecuted and executed. As reported by Wikipedia, Mao is supposed to have commented in this respect “We must probably execute 10,000 to several tens of thousands of embezzlers nationwide before we can solve the problem”.

Ultimately Party sources admitted, the alleged misdeeds for which these people were punished and even executed were exaggerated and obtained under duress.

Determined that grain and steel should be the two pillars of modern China, Mao and others in the communist leadership produced a five-year plan for the period 1958-1963 which was named: the ‘Great Leap Forward’. Its most important constituent was the amalgamation of several agrarian communities into communes in which growers with their privately owned lots, animals and farm implements, joined forces. From then on, hitherto strangers were to live and work communally and share all their possessions. This measure was supposed, according to Mao’s thinking, to achieve a more efficient and bontiful agriculture, yielding surplus produce for export against industrial machinery.

The ‘Great Leap Forward’ failed miserably. By 1961, 30 to 45 million people had starved to death. Many reasons for this catastrophe have been propose by those who dwelt on it. Among them the utopian naivety of Moa Zedong, his interference in something neither he nor his party comrades knew anything about, the unwarranted tonnages of produce requisitioned by government agents and last, but not least, the uncooperative state of mind of the peasants themselves coerced, as they were, into a situation not to their liking.

In later years, those who investigated and wrote about this great famine stated that they have located in the Chinese archives evidence that the leadership, were aware of the happenings in rural areas. Indeed, as stated in my narrative Hunger Bread, Mao himself is on record saying in one meeting: “To distribute resources evenly will only ruin the Great Leap Forward”; and again in a later one: “When there is not enough to eat, people starve to death. It is better to let half the people die so that others can eat their fill”.

Wanting to bolster his position in the Communist Party following the disaster of the ‘Great Leap Forward’, Mao launched in 1966 the ‘Great Proletarian Cultural Revolution’. It called upon Chinese youth “to take current party leaders to task for their embrace of bourgeois values and lack of revolutionary spirit [and to] purge the impure elements of society and revive the revolutionary spirit that had led to victory in the civil war two decades earlier and the formation of the People’s Republic of China”, as I wrote in ‘From Tribe to Empire’.

Accordingly, millions of ‘Red Guards’ went on a decade long rampage targeting anyone identified as revisionist or anti-revolutionary. All classes of society were affected. Those ‘found guilty’, variously had their properties seized, were denied medical treatment, harassed, beaten, imprisoned, tortured, raped and/or killed. Some preferred to commit suicide. Among those targeted were school teachers and university professors. In ‘From Tribe to Empire’, I quoted ‘Spiegel Online International’: “the ten-year campaign destroyed entire families, irreplaceable cultural treasures and centuries-old traditions”. By the time this phenomenon ended, 1.5 million Chinese had lost their lives.

KIM IL SUNG 1912-1994

Kim Il Sung was the godlike ruler of North Korea for nearly half a century-(1948- 1994)- According to Mr. Montefiore, “ [His was] arguably the most totalitarian and surreal regime in the world….”. Further he transformed North Korea “into an austere, militaristic, and highly regimented society”, in the words of Britannica. His legacy of autocracy and tyranny endures to this day with the rules of his son, Kim Jong Il-(1994-2011)- and his grandson Kim Jong Un-(2011- present).

He was the son of a practicing Presbyterian family. He was born two years after the Japan had invaded Korea. Like many other Koreans at that time, Japanese occupation caused him to emigrate to Manchuria, China in his pre-teen years with his family. He attended the local school, learned Chinese and dabbled in Communism. When the Japanese occupied Manchuria in 1931, he joined in the armed resistance against them before moving once again, this time to the Soviet Union where he learned further military skills and deepened his knowledge of Communism.

With the defeat of Japan at the end of the World War in 1945, the upper part of the Korean peninsula, what became known as North Korea, was taken over by the USSR.

The following year, the Soviets created a dependent state and placed Kim Il Sung as its head where he began to apply the Stalinist methods of tyranny. These included arrests, show trials, executions and imprisonment in concentration/labour camps, of all opposition whether within or without the Communist Party. And similarly to his role model, he introduced the collectivization of agriculture, forced peasants, under threats of violence, to surrender grain and pay taxes.

Kim Il Sung was so preoccupied with bringing the southern half of the peninsula under his command, that he instigated in 1950 the Korean War which ended in a stalemate in 1953 at the cost of 2 to 3 million lives. Nevertheless, he continued to plan for a more successful second round resulting in exorbitant military spending. With not much left for civilian use, weather triggered food shortages in the 1990’s turned into famines, from lack of government financial ability to mitigate their effects. In the end more than 2 million North Korean starved to death.

Worse was the personality cult he created. He attributed to himself the omnipotence, omnipresence and omniscience appropriate to gods. Thenceforth, to North Koreans he was the ‘Eternal or Supreme Leader’. There are, at present, some 500 statues of him across the country. It became a serious offense, punishable by imprisonment, for say “not printing [his] portrait on sufficient quality paper or using newspapers with his picture to wrap parcels”, according to Wikipedia.

Early in his predominance, Kim introduced a social hierarchy system of three classes: ‘core’, ‘wavering’ or ‘hostile’. As the names indicate belonging to one depended on loyalty and degree of submission to the Supreme Leader. Those in the ‘core’ class were allocated the best housing and education etc. In contrast, for North Koreans of the ‘hostile’ class, there was no end to their miseries and privations. They were the worst hit by the famines of the 1990’s. They populated the concentration camps where they faced hard to bear conditions and inhumane treatment. Many died there.

POL-POT 1925-1998

With the four communist leaders we have covered in the preceding parts, one would have thought that the pinnacle of despotism and tyranny had been reached. But that was before meeting Pol Pot and his ‘Khmer Rouge’. They were the horrific butchers of the citizens of Cambodia during their relatively and mercifully short rule from 1975 to 1979. According to History.com “some historians regard the Pol Pot regime as one of the most barbaric and murderous in recent history”.

Perhaps their most visible legacy are the concentration/ labour camps-(see Appendix)- and mass graves, witnesses to the more than 1,000,000 Cambodians massacred because they were undesirable in the new utopic state, renamed ‘Kampuchea’, that their executioners wanted to create. Investigative work by the ‘Documentation Center of Cambodia’ and Yale University have located 20,000 mass graves containing the remains of at least 1,386,734 persons, killed mostly with sharp tools to save ammunition. The tombs are distributed among 300 ‘Killing Fields’ so named, subsequently, for obvious reasons.

Saloth Sar was born to a well to do land owning father with connections to the Royal family of Cambodia at a time when it was a colony of France. As a young boy, he attended French schools of Catholic denomination. At the age of 24 he travelled to Paris to study electronics.

But he was not academically inclined. Instead, he was interested in politics, the French communist version. He also associated with like-minded Cambodian students. In January 1953 he returned home, the same year, Cambodia won its independence from France.

From 1963 on, he consecrated his time to the Cambodian Communist Party aka the ‘Khmer Rouge’ of which he became leader. He was strongly antagonistic to the rule of Prince Norodom Sihanouk and planned to topple him at the first opportunity.

He was beaten to it by General Lon Nol who deposed Prince Sihanouk in 1970. Still, by 1973 the Khmer Rouge had enough fire power to gradually take over rural Cambodia. And by April 1975 it was in control of Phnom Penh, the capital city of two million inhabitants.

At last Pol Pot was now free to create the communist classless, agrarian paradise of Kampuchea . To achieve this, he counted on the peasants whom, according to his hero Mao Zedong, constituted the reliable proletariat. Conversely, he had no use for urban dwellers whom he considered parasitic, contributing nothing of values. More, he wanted Kampuchea to be self- sufficient. So much so that when a deadly famine struck in 1977, he doggedly refused the outside help offered.

Taking his cue from Mao’s Cultural Revolution, which sent innumerable innocent victims to their graves, Pol pot ordered the relocation of city dwellers at gun point. Those judged beyond re-education and adaptation to the new socio-economic realities such as former royals and business people (capitalist) were taken directly the concentration camps where they were tortured, executed and en-masse buried in a Killing Field.

Those of humbler standing i.e. former civil servants, teachers, doctors, modest self-employed persons, clergymen-(Buddhists and otherwise)- etc., they were destined to till the land peasant-fashion in the countryside. But a great many of them died from the long hours of hard labour, to which they were not used, insufficient and low quality food and lack of medical facilities. They, too, were buried en-masse in a Killing field.

In the end, the Pol Pot regime had between the ones massacred and those killed by hunger and disease, about 2 million deaths on its conscience of a total population in 1975 of around 8 million.

APPENDIX Security Prison S21

Located in Phnom Penh, S 21, a former secondary school was modified by the Khmer Rouge into a place of detention. They transformed class rooms into interrogation centers complete with the instruments and tools of torture and into a number of tiny cells. The whole, of course, was surrounded with barbed wire and the windows barred.

First, they took there the non-educatable members of former Cambodian society. Later they were joined by Khmer Rouge cadres, that Pol Pot was not comfortable with, accompanied by members of their families. And even simple soldiers who had seen too much were locked up there. In due time following horrific torture and questioning, inmates were transported to nearby ‘Choeung Ek’ Killing Field. There executioners and grave diggers were waiting; the latter having been told beforehand the size of the mass grave to be excavated.

During its 4-year life as hell-on-earth, some 12 to 20,000 innocent inmates passed through S21. Only very few managed to exit the place and lived to tell their story, once the Khmer Rouge had decamped.

In the wake of the demise of the Khmer Rouge regime in 1979, S21 was converted to the Tuol Sleng-(meaning ‘Hill of the Poisonous Trees’)- Genocide Museum to keep alive the awful legacy of Pol Pot and his clique. Hence the images above.

The BBC visited the Genocide Museum in 2015. It met one survivor, Chum Mey, then aged 83, who had been spared the Killing Field because as a skilled mechanic he was useful to the commandant running the compound.

Chow Mey was taken to S21 toward the end of 1978. He still he did know why. “I was blindfolded and my hands were tied behind my back - I pleaded with my captors to let my family know where I was” he told his interlocutor. Once arrived at destination, his picture was taken; then was placed in a cell “barely big enough to sit down in”; his clothes were taken and he was chained to the floor. During his sojourn he was always hungry; “he would eat the rats that scurried into his cell”. And all he was provided with to answer the call of nature was a small box. He said “If any waste spilled out we had to lick it from the floor”. No wonder he wept “because I felt so hopeless and confused”.

Over a period of a dozen days, he was taken to be tortured and interrogated 3 times daily. He was repeatedly beaten “with a stick covered in twisted wire”. Then he had his large toe nail removed explaining “how the guard tugged and twisted the nail until it came out”. But worst of all were electric shocks through leads inside his ears. “It felt like my eyes were on fire and my head was a machine”. In the end he confessed to having had contacts with the CIA despite never having heard that name and knowing nothing about it.

Chow Mey showed the BBC the room were confessions were typed. There is there “a bed frame and heavy iron shackles…[and] dried blood on the ceiling. A photograph on the wall shows an emaciated man lying on the bed with his throat cut”.

I think it is fair to say that S21 and what it stands for is not unique to Cambodia. Indeed, it is representative of many like it in other parts of the world where tyranny exists.

Corruption by Proxy

CORRUPTION BY PROXY

INTRODUTION

Let us start by agreeing that abusing a position of trust and responsibility for the illegal and dishonest acquisition of personal gains, is wrong and unconscionable. It may result, in some parts of the world, in the abuser facing criminal charges and punishments.

This narrative is taken from the 2019 book by Peter Schweizer (DOB: 1964) ‘Secret Empires’. It is “...about the flow of money, much of it from overseas...[to] the sons, daughters, siblings and closest friends of America’s most powerful political figures...who have accrued financial benefits because of the political power that their parents, family, or friends wield”. Mr. Schweizer calls them ‘princelings’. A princeling is an “insignificant prince” according to Merriam Webster dictionary. Hence, also the title of this narrative ‘Corruption by proxy’. Another term for proxy is agent or representative.

Which overseas players am I writing about? Overwhelmingly China, for which I allow a paragraph below. The others are Ukraine, Russia and North Korea.

In the last few decades China has become a giant economic power with a huge population. This has made it the target of American and other financial firms eager to do business there. In return, the Chinese government and commercial entities have not been loath to recruit and enrich princelings, with access to influential American politicians and businesses, to promote its own interests in the United States. For completeness’s sake, I must add that in China, financial benefits to relatives and friends of important people are a fact of daily life. It is considered normal, even expected, that say the son of a prominent politician should inherit that same prominence regardless.

Still, it is important to keep in mind that the two powers do not see eye to eye on many issues. To American policymakers, China is a fierce competitor geopolitically. Their approach to it is tainted with mistrust and suspicion. Yet, despite it all, author Schweizer writes “...we have politicians whose wealth is tied up with being in the good graces of foreign governments”. Now wait a minute Mr. Schweizer. Are you implying they are traitors?

This aberration is possible in America, a place where corruption is severely punished and in which ‘no-one-is-above-the-law’ because of a loophole in the regulation that requires every public official to declare his/her worth. The loophole in question is that it does not require the same disclosures from immediate relatives and close friends of public servants. In consequence while crude and straight-forward palm greasing of officials for a given service is a punishable offence, corruption by proxy, on the other hand, cannot be traced to the person in whose name the illegal action is taking place.

Note to my readers. All quotes shown in italics are from ‘Secret Empires’ unless otherwise stated.

BIDEN/KERRY PRINCELINGS.

We begin with accounts of princelings securing “profitable deals [with ] foreign governments on the heels of crucial diplomatic missions carried out by their powerful fathers”. The quid-pro-quo is that “those foreign entities gained favorable policy actions from the United States government”.

Those playing parts are: -*Joe Biden (DOB: 1942): Vice president of the USA from 2009 to 2016. -*John Kerry (DOB: 1943): Secretary of State from 2013 to 2016. Married since 1995 to Teresa Heinz, widow of billionaire Henry John Heinz. She, along with her two sons, inherited “a large chunk of the family’s vast ketchup fortune including a network of investment funds etc.” -*Hunter Biden (DOB: 1970): Son of Joe Biden. -*Chris Heinz (DOB:1973):Son of Teresa and stepson of John Kerry. -*Rosemont: Assets management firm, jointly owned by Hunter Biden and Chris Heinz. -*Rosemont Realty: Firm for selling and buying of real estate, managed by Chris Heinz and Hunter Biden. -*Burisma: “Ukrainian second-largest private natural gas producer”. -*Ihor Kolomoisky: Ukrainian oligarch. Runs Burisma.

Towards the end of 2013, Hunter Biden accompanied his father on a trip to China. While the latter was discussing with the Chinese top brass points of contention between their two countries, Hunter was negotiating deals on behalf of his firm, with the Bank of China. The outcome was an association between the government-owned bank and Rosemont. Remarkably, under normal circumstances a colossus like the ‘Bank of China’ would not take a second look at Rosemont, a midget in its field. It really boiled down to “the Chinese government... literally funding the business co-owned by the sons of two of America’s most powerful decision makers...The advantages [to the princelings] were enormous”.

One report of the business meetings, issued by the American side spoke of the “warm welcome...to Rosemont chairman Hunter Biden”. It further stated that the reason for the meetings was to “explore the possibility of commercial cooperation and opportunity”. In the understanding of the Chinese, on the other hand, Rosemont was going to “spearhead efforts [on their behalf] in the United States”.

In reality, the commercial discussions were taking place coincidentally as China was pushing aggressively its maritime claims, against a strong opposition from the USA. Ely Ratner (DOB: 1977), assistant secretary of defence wrote that “in early 2014, [after conclusion of the Rosemont agreement] China’s efforts to assert authority over the South China Sea went from a trot to a gallop”.

At a time of worsening relations between China and the USA described as a “downward spiral” by the Washington Post, John Kerry travelled to China in July 2014 for high level discussions with senior Chinese government officials. At the same time, commercial negotiations were under way between Rosemont Realty and a Chinese investment entity-(with ties to the  People's Liberation Army)-, for the sale of the former to the latter. Eventually, a “multibillion-dollar deal [was reached. It] would make those connected with the company [Rosemont Realty] a lot of money and raise serious questions about a massive conflict of interest.” In return, that acquisition enabled the Chinese to buy valuable property in the USA.

It is therefore not surprising that John Kerry was criticized at home for being too soft on the Chinese and amenable to accommodate their demands during negotiations. His Chinese interlocutors, to the contrary, lauded him “for his low-key approach to relations with China”.

And for author Schweizer to comment that at this juncture of the tense relations between the two countries “with so much at stake in military, diplomatic, and economic terms, a Chinese government-connected company was looking to become business partners yet again with the families of America’s secretary of state and vice president”.

There were more involvements of the Biden/Heinz princelings, with Chinese entities including those dealing in military matters considered detrimental to the interests of the USA and which attracted the interest of the American security agencies.

In early 2014, Russian forces entered Ukraine’s eastern provinces and its Crimean Peninsula. This encroachment on an independent nation territory, caused an international outcry. In Washington, President Obama charged Vice President Joe Biden to handle the ensuing crisis. The latter subsequently came over five times, from 2014 and 2016, for discussions with the Ukrainians. In the words of ‘Foreign Policy Magazine’ “No one in the US government has wielded more power over Ukraine than Vice President Joe Biden” . So much so that his son Hunter and his associates found in this development a fortuitous opportunity to strike gold.

Ukraine is among the most corrupt countries in the world. According to ‘Transparency International’ it ranked behind Nigeria. That means a lot. Since separating from the Soviet Union, in the early 1990’s, it has become a haven of unscrupulous oligarchs, competing for their country’s assets. The worst of them, possibly, is Ihor Kolomoisky, described by the Guardian newspaper in 2015 as the “most troubling oligarch of all”. But the term ‘troubling’ does not do him justice. Suffices to say that the other oligarchs, who are not angels themselves by any means, have sued him in foreign courts for his mafia-like ways, including the use of hired guns, in business dealings with them. Kolomoisky runs Burisma, in turn “one of the most corrupt firms in a very corrupt country”.

Kolomoisky was so obnoxious that the American government banned his entry to the US. Yet, while Joe Biden was busy with his diplomatic duties, Hunter chose to associate himself with this crooked man and his equally crooked firm. On 13th May 2014, despite knowing nothing about natural gas production, Hunter Biden joined the company’s board of directors. In due course, naturally, the Bidens ensured the lifting of the American travel ban on Kolomoisky.

To justify his new position on the board of Burisma, Hunter claimed that he would be speaking on its behalf at international gatherings of business firms. More loftily he would “contribute to the economy and benefit the people of Ukraine”. More, he would advise the corruption-tainted firm on “transparency, corporate governance”.

How much is this involvement with Ukraine worth to the Bidens? According to author and professor Oliver Boyd- Barret “Potentially the Biden family could become billionaires”.

CHICAGO PRINCELINGS

Chicago, wrote the ‘Chicago Tribune’, a few years ago is “the most corrupt city in America”. What follows is the account if the shenanigans of the Chicagoan Daley family.

Those involved are: -*Richard J. Daley (1902-1976): Mayor of Chicago from 1955 to 976-(21 years). -*Richard M. Daley (DOB:1942): Son of Richard J. and mayor of Chicago from 1989 to 2011-(22 years). -*William Daley (DOB: 1948): Brother of Richard. Banker and later White House Chief of Staff under President Barack Obama from Jan. 2011 to Jan. 2012. -*Patrick Daley (DOB:1975): Son of Richard M. Partner with his father, since 2011, in ‘Tur Partners’ a business management consultancy.

Thus, the Daley family has been in control of Chicago, one of the largest cities in the US, for 43 years. Like all mayors, they constitutionally had a great deal of power and influence, which the Daleys have mostly put at the service of empowering and enriching family members and friends.

First mayor, Richard J. died in 1976. He is remembered “for his administration’s corruption scandals”. While during the tenure of his son Richard M. “Chicagoans became accustomed to financial deals and scandals...involving the Daley family and friends” . Yet neither father nor son were ever charged with “taking money” themselves.

In 2001, 26-year-old Patrick travelled to Moscow. There he met a businessman named Symon Garber who was interested in starting a taxi service in Chicago. But normally, it is not easy to do so. Still, Garber got what he wanted without too much hassle. It, no doubt, helped that Patrick’s father was the mayor whose ‘City Hall’, we are told by the ‘Chicago Sun-Time’“...has complete control over [taxi] companies”, including their number, who own and drive them , how much they charge passengers etc.

At the inauguration of the new service, mayor Daley praised Garber for his venture which would enhance Chicagoan taxi service, which is “something we have prayed for many, many years”. With this backing, Garber’s enterprise grew so that by 2009 it ranked first in size in the city. This did not escape the attention of the ‘Chicago Sun-Times’ which wrote “Russian émigré...Friend of Daley’s Son...now Chicago [taxi] King...”

Unfortunately for Garber, an official investigation established in 2014, found that many of the taxis in his fleets were “salvage vehicles” meaning they were cars that had been in serious accidents-(write offs)- and which the law prohibits from using for the transportation of fee paying passengers. Many felt that the exercise of purchasing the wrecks, repairing and repainting them and putting them on the road could not have been done without the help of Patrick Daley.

As for brother William he was in 2007 a senior officer with J.P. Morgan the famed banking institution. He is credited for playing an important role in easing J.P Morgan’s access to China’s financial markets. According to author Schweizer “...the method he used was familiar to the ways of Chicago”. For example, he made sure that J.P. Morgan hired the son of the China’s minister of commerce as a trainee despite failing all his tests and interviews and being “immature, irresponsible and unreliable”, in the words of one examiner. To some within J.P. Morgan, the recruit was referred to as “Bill [William] Daley hire”.

Chicagoan Barack Obama came to the White House in 2009 with a retinue of friends from that city, among them Richard Daley -(in whose mayoral offices, at one time, worked Michelle Obama, then fiancée of Barack)-,and his brother William.

In 2011 the latter assumed his new role as ‘Chief of Staff for President Obama. That same year Richard declined to present himself for a seventh term as mayor. Instead, jointly with son Patrick they set up a management consultancy business they called ‘Tur Partners’. According to author Schweizer “This was no ordinary business...but rather a global enterprise, with a particular focus on business ties with in Russia and China”. In due course, the Chinese manager of the American branch of Wanxiang-(of which more will be said in the following part), was taken in by ‘Tur Partners’. And to top it off Richard Daley was put on the Chinese company payroll. This development was preceded by a visit of the former mayor to Wanxiang’s headquarters in China, where he received a red carpet welcome and met with Lu Guanqiu, its founder and chairman.

WANXIANG

Some foreign businesses have no trouble recruiting influential American politicians “by putting them and their family members on the payroll”. They do so to further their interests and to stay out of trouble, including avoiding sanctions, when they break the laws and regulations of the land.

Players: -*Wanxiang: Chinese conglomerate owing “auto parts companies, real estate, and energy companies”. -*Lu Guanqiu (1945-2017): Chairman of Wanxiang, one of the wealthiest businessman in China, in close contacts with its rulers and a member of the all-important ‘National People’s Congress’ of China. Visited the Obama White House twice for meetings. -*The friends of Barack Obama during his two terms as president between 2008 and 2016.

Canadian ‘Financial Post’ website has described Wanxiang as “a state-backed enterprise... [aided by] the Chinese government to help it expand abroad”. It first came to the USA in the 1980.It located its headquarters in Chicago. In 1999, it put Prescott Bush on its payroll. He is the uncle of then governor of Texas, George W. Bush, a favourite candidate for the presidency. What were the duties assigned to Prescott Bush? According to Wanxiang statement “...[He] doesn’t have a set of responsibilities...He has many friends.... he can go to his friends for help in resolving our issues” . Nothing changed after George W. Bush was elected to the White House in 2000.

We have already seen that former mayor Richard Daley was one of its men. Then there is Penny Pritzker (DOB: 1959) a lady billionaire, friend and supporter of Obama and a member of his cabinet. Her princelings “struck partnerships with Wanxiang including a $ 1 billion real estate deal”.

In short, as explained by the Chinese government’s ‘ China Daily’ “Wanxiang America’s achievement has been associated with the US government ‘s support and encouragement”.

A123 is the name of an American company specializing in the production of state-of-the-art batteries using material developed in the ‘Massachusetts Institute of Technology’. Additionally on certain aspects of its work it was using technology jointly developed with the space agency NASA. Finally, some of its products had military applications.

But A123 was a commercial failure and when it went bankrupt it was auctioned. Wanxiang won the bid, resulting in an outcry by all those who did not want the high-tech company to become the property of the Chinese government and Communist Party, given Wanxiang and its chairman’s, strong ties with them.

Senators wrote to President Obama that letting Wanxiang own A123 “would be irresponsible” since it involved “...The transfer of assets, technology and intellectual property developed [in America] to a foreign company”. Some warned that the battery technology used by A123 “advances battery science by at least a decade” and should not belong to the Chinese. Finally the transaction infringed the embargo laws which prohibited the export of technology to China.

In reply to this avalanche of opposition, Wanxiang tried to embellish its image. It played down the fact that Chairman Lu Guanqiu was at one with the government of China. More. it gave assurances that neither the new technology nor the manufacturing jobs would be exported to China. Former Chicago mayor Richard Daley-(hereinbefore)- chimed in. He declared to the ‘Boston Globe’ daily that “Wanxiang has shown itself a strong corporate citizen with a commitment to supporting local workers and developing the economy”. Finally the icing on the cake was the donation of about $67,000 to the party of the president by Lu Ganqiu’s daughter and her husband.

In the end, all opposing claims were brushed aside. Wanxiang acquisition of A123 was unconditionally passed by the Obama administration in 2013.

The enduring mutual hostility between the USA and North Korea is common knowledge. It goes back to the aftermath of the Korean conflict in the early 1950’s. All businesses between the two are prohibited. Any commercial party active in North Korea is stigmatized and faces stiff sanctions in America.

Yet, Wanxiang has been, since 2007, carrying out copper mining in North Korea for export to China. Washington has known about it. In 2016, Obama signed ‘executive orders stating that companies that operate in North Korea, in any form, including mining would face severe sanctions. But thanks to the Americans on its payroll, Wanxiang has not been disturbed. Indeed, several Chinese companies faced punishments, by the Obama administration, for their mining activities in North Korea but not Hanxiang despite being the largest of them all.

Once again, “Princelings-style corruption helps to make American politicians and their families wealthy, while foreign...companies... [are able to] bend... laws and regulations...to suit their needs”.

SENATOR MCCONNEL AND HIS IN-LAWS

In this account, the princelings are the in-laws of a prominent senator. With his help, they have prospered, and so did he through extensive dealings with government-controlled Chinese business concerns. No eyebrows were raised and no criticism voiced by American politicians and business competitors, for, “... senator Mitch McConnel and his wife Elaine Chao, operate at the highest levels of government. The are one of the most powerful couples in the United States”.

Players: -*Mitch McConnel (DOB:1942): Senator since 1985. -*Elaine Chao (DOB:1953): Wife of McConnel since 1993. Cabinet minister twice during the presidencies of G.W. Bush and that of Donald Trump. -*James Chao (DOB:1927): Father of Elaine. Immigrated to the US, from China, in 1958.

The wealth of the Chao family comes from the business generated by ‘Foremost’, the shipping company that James founded in 1964. Once Elaine became engaged to McConnel in 1991, her family started to contribute generously to his senatorial election campaigns.

Abnormally, for an American citizen, James Chao sat on the board of directors of the government related ‘China State Shipbuilding Corporation’. The CSSC owns and operates several shipbuilding facilities and is a major producer of military equipment for the ‘People’s Liberation Army’.

A few months after the wedding of Elaine and McConnel, in 1993, James Chao arranged with the CSSC to send a private -(outside official senate business)- invitation to his new son-in-law to come to China and meet various government officials, including Jiang Zemin (1926-2022), the president of the country, a schoolmate of James Chao.

Thenceforth, as McConnel rose through the ranks in the US senate-(to a position of leadership)- and as his rhetoric criticizing the policies of China was lessening , “the Chao family saw its business ties with the Chinese government increase dramatically...[and the CSSC]...would come to play a central role in the [Chao] family’s financial success”. Its shipyards would build the Chaos ships with some of them “financed by the Chinese government”. Mostly Chinese sailors would serve on them. The irony here is the statement by none other than Elaine Chao herself, in her capacity as minister of transportation that American ships should be crewed by US nationals as a matter of “national security”.

How rewarding to the senator and his wife was their promotion and defence of the Chao activities. According to author Schweizer, “In 2004 they had an average net worth of $3.1 million...Ten years later... [that figure had risen to] between $9.2million and $ 36.5 million”. In the meantime, they received a ‘gift’ from James Chao of between $ 5 and $25 million. No doubt that more ‘gifts’ are expected “as family fortunes allow”. For, in the final analysis “Financial success [for the shipping company] means financial success for McConnel and his wife”.

That said, Mitch McConnel had no choice but to be in the good books of the Chinese government on whose generosity the flourishing of the Chao’s shipping company depended. An unfriendly word by McConnel in one of his pronouncements in the US senate would have ruined the business of his in-laws and cut off the source of his considerable extra income. Indeed, the progression of his rhetoric from hostile to friendly toward the Beijing governments is on record for all to see .

TWO MORE CASES OF CORRUPTION BY PROXY

Before closing, I want to mention two other instances of ‘corruption by proxy’.

In the first, the ‘princelings’ are the offspring and siblings of influential members of congressional committees. The latter number more than one hundred, and the congressmen and women who sit on them are the true legislators. They make decisions on projects and on how government monies are to be spent. It, therefore, stand to reason that their princelings are eagerly sought after, by special interest groups, local or foreign, companies or governments. And willing to pay large sums for their help in ensuring that decisions made by committee members are in their favour.

So much so that many congressional members look upon being elected as a money-making undertaking. They look forward to members of their families closing “lucrative deals with foreign and American entities eager to curry favour from the powerful”.

The ‘princelings’ in the second instance are the close friends of Barack Obama. They took advantage of their closeness with the president to learn of decisions, before they were made public and acted for their self-benefit accordingly.

From day one of his eight-year-long presidential terms, Obama went after the fossil fuel industry. With the commercial value of many coal and oil companies falling dramatically, as a result of Obama’s actions, his princelings rushed to buy their shares cheap. May of them made a killing when they resold them once prices picked up.

What Obama’s pals did is not unusual. Many if not all investors try the buy cheap and sell dear. But they do not have the luxury of visiting the White House whenever they chose, sit for face-to-face meetings with the top man himself and With his ‘energy policy staff’.

Human Rights & the Free Market

HUMAN RIGHTS & THE FREE MARKET OR CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (CSR) IN THE AGE OF GLOBALIZATION AND MULTINATIONAL CORPORATIONS AUGUST, 2016

REVISED AND ABRIDGED DECEMBER, 2016

Chapter illustration

Final proof reading: 17.12.2016

INTRODUCTION

DO companies, corporations and other private businesses exist purely to make money for their owners/shareholders? Or should they renounce to part of it as contribution to the welfare and well- being of their employees and communities? In other words should ‘Corporate Social Responsibility’ or CSR be part of their credo?

CSR, as defined by the ‘World Business Council for Sustainable Development’ is: “the continuing commitment by business to behave ethically and contribute to economic development while improving the quality of life of the workforce and their families as well as of the local community and society at large”.

In 1999 at the annual ‘Economic Forum in Davos’ the then UN secretary General, Kofi Annan, proposed what became known as the ‘United Nations Global Compact’ consisting of ten principles to encourage multinationals worldwide “to adopt sustainable and socially responsible policies, and to report on their implementation”. Encouragingly, the provisions of the Compact were unanimously adopted by the leaders of 1000 multinational corporations attending the Forum.

And in January 1973 a report of the ‘Confederation of British Industry’ concluded: “companies must recognize that they have functions, duties and moral obligations that go beyond the immediate pursuit of profit and the requirements of law”. Then there were the 1976 voluntary ‘Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises’ of the ‘Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development’ containing principles for the ethical conduct of business including anti- corruption, labour relations and the protection of the environment.

Unfortunately, both the UN Compact and the declarations above lacked supervisory or monitoring provisions. Consequently, neither the UN nor any other party could apply sanctions or punitive measures on those doing no more than paying lip service to CSR.

MASTERS OF THE WORLD

A little history first.

The most valuable company ever was the public (owned by its shareholders) ‘Dutch East India Company’. Born in 1602, it died almost 200 years later in 1799. In its heyday, it owned the largest merchant fleet between Asia and Europe and was valued at 78 million Dutch Guilders or

7.40 trillion in 2012 dollars (1 trillion= 1,000 billion). This is more than the worth of any of today’s corporations. It goes without saying then, that it made its shareholders and principals very wealthy indeed.

Then, of course, there was the infamous English ‘East India Company’ which left its nefarious marks for decades after its demise in 1873. Chartered in London in 1600, it was conceived by its shareholders as a company for the monopolistic exploitation of trade with South East Asia and with the Indian subcontinent.

At about that time, late 19th century, the first modern capitalist enterprises arose in the United States. Taking advantage of the early stages of industrialization, the ‘Robber Barons’ established monopolies and built great fortunes exploiting abundant local resources and cheap immigrant labour, using methods perceived at the time as unscrupulous and shady, hence their appellation .

With the coming of Globalization (the opening up of borders and the liberalization of trade and services across the Globe) in the 1990s, multinational corporations entered a new era of power, influence and prosperity. Henceforth, they could impose their will on any government rich or poor; their actions effectively deciding who would prosper and who would be impoverished.

To many critics, adoption by corporations of Kofi Annan’s UN Global Compact, described earlier, was no more or less than a free public relations exercise since each could brag in its promotional literature of being a signatory of the Compact. So much so, that Kofi Annan, 5 years on, proposed in 2004 to the representatives of the corporations the creation of an international mechanism of verification of adherence to the Compact, it was squarely rejected.

ARROGANCE AND IMPUNITY

AN industrial incident that shook the world and had long term repercussions occurred in 1984 in the town of Bhopal, India. That year, on the 3rd of December large quantities of a toxic gas leaked from the pesticide factory of the American company, Union Carbide (presently Dow Chemical Company), killing on the spot 8,000 men women and children. Over the following three years some 20,000 more slowly died in addition to the 100,000 or so who went blind or were living with debilitating illnesses, from the residual effects of the leaked poison. A Newsweek magazine article from January 2014 described the effects as: “People died instantly, coughing and choking, while the gases burned into the survivors’ eyes and lungs to cause early death and ill health, with weakened immune systems and respiratory problems”.

Now, more than thirty years later, successive generations are still suffering the consequences of the catastrophe. The same Newsweek article continues: “The people who suffer are successive generations, almost all poor, whose ill health now affects babies and young children of parents who may not have even been born in 1984….Medical experts report a high incidence of lung cancer, adverse outcomes of pregnancy, and respiratory, neurological, psychiatric and ophthalmic problems among those exposed to the gas”.

As to be expected, the corporation attempted to minimize its liability. It, ultimately reached, 5 years later, in 1989, an out-of-court settlement with the victims’ relatives against the payment of USD: 470 million. No further compensations were subsequently imposed on the culprit, despite court actions in both India and its home country, the United States.

THE oil rich Niger River delta, in the southern part of Nigeria, is a densely populated area of 70,000 sq km. It is home to the minority Ogoni people as well as those of other ethnicities. Royal Dutch Shell (henceforth: Shell), one of the giants in the oil and gas industry has been operating there for decades : extracting, refining etc. Until quite recently it has been accused of unethical behavior and criticized for its deleterious business practices towards man and nature. Indeed thanks to the pervasive venality of Nigeria’s ruling and influential classes, Shell has been pretty much free to despoil the Delta region as it pleases.

But for Shell that was not enough. On 08.12.2010 the Guardian newspaper published a report from its Lagos correspondent commenting on the findings of WikiLeaks about the company. Among them was the revelation that Shell implanted its own people in various relevant ministries to keep it up to date on all deliberations and decisions affecting it.

How harmful were the practices of Shell? To start with, is the flaring (burning) of the natural gases which rise with oil to the surface. Instead of re-injection in the ground or storage far subsequent use as a source of energy, Shell proceeds with the cheapest possible way: burning on top of stacks or even at ground level not even bothering with prior filtering as would be expected in civilized company. This operation has been going on 24/24 and 365/365 from day one of Shell’s presence in the Niger Delta. But for generations of Ogoni-Nigerians flaring is bad news. It releases sulfur and carbon dioxides in the atmosphere. The former causes acid rain and the latter is a global warming agent. It also, significantly, raises ambient temperatures in communities nearby, over and above the already extreme tropical temperatures, increasing the risks to health and the rest.

Then there are the unending oil spills on land, in rivers and sea, from Shell exploration activities and transfer pipelines. These have gone on since the 1950s with the company, unlike similar circumstances elsewhere, at no time being obligated to deal with the mess it created. In consequence the livelihoods and health of untold thousands of peasants, fishermen have been ruined .

Last but by no means least, are the accusations of human rights abuses by Shell. As reported by the news agency Reuters on 03 October 2011, ‘Platform’ a London based NGO has, in a report accused Shell of paying government forces “who have attacked, tortured and killed Nigerians living in the creeks and swamplands of the Niger Delta” , and “Shell has played an active role in fuelling conflict and violence in a variety of forms… Shell sided with clashing gangs, picking the more powerful group to help protect its oil infrastructure”.

Let us finish this sad story with the words of the Ogoni-Nigerian poet and environmentalist, Ken Saro-Wiwa at his trial, in 1995, for activism against both the government and Shell. Standing in front of the judge, he addressed the absent Shell directors with words to the effect that: “The wealthier you are, the more you consider yourselves above the Law…Oil exploration has turned my country into a huge wasteland; air has been poisoned with petroleum fumes, methane, carbon dioxide and soot from the chimneys which for the last thirty three years flare gases twenty four hours after twenty four hours near inhabited areas. The Ogoni territory has been devastated by acid rain and by spills or gushers. The networks of high pressure pipelines which criss cross Ogoni cultivated lands are mortal dangers. ‘No matter death, we shall win’ ”. He was found guilty and hanged along with 8 of his collaborators.

ANOTHER giant is the Swiss Nestle. As of 2015 it ranked 33rd on Forbes’ list of the 2,000 richest and most powerful companies. It is described by the magazine as “a nutrition, health and wellness company, which manufactures, supplies and produces prepared dishes and cooking aids, milk-based products, pharmaceuticals and ophthalmic goods, baby foods and cereals”. It was founded by Henri Nestle’ in 1866.

Coffee beans are Ethiopia’s main export as well as its earner of hard currency. Just the same, Ethiopia is one of the poorest countries, constantly at risk of ravaging famines. Nestle’, the main buyer of that coffee is in a privileged position to dictate the buying price it pays the peasant growers. With profits an overriding priority, at a time of falling world coffee prices, Nestle’ thus contributed to the plight of the impoverished growers and their families. According to international NGO ‘Oxfam’ quoted by ‘Corporate Watch’ in June 2005: “coffee farmers are getting an average of 24 cents a pound while consumers in rich countries are paying roughly $3.60 a pound – a mark-up of 1500%”.

In the late 1970s British researchers established that mothers’ milk was infinitely more beneficial to the growth of infants than the powdered milk aka ‘baby formula’ produced by Nestle and others. Oxfam published the findings of the research and concluded that to induce the world’s mothers to give up breastfeeding for the purchase of Nestle’s products was an attack on the wellbeing of infants and detrimental to their physical and mental growth. Other NGOs in Europe and the USA reacted unfavourably toward Nestle’, too, and a boycott of its products ensued. The matter was then taken up by the United Nation whose World Health Organization (WHO) called for an extraordinary meeting in 1981 that set up an international code for the commercialization of baby formula. Among its stipulations was the prohibition of advertising aimed at inducing mothers to substitute powdered milk to breastfeeding. Nestle signed that code in 1984. Again in 2002 another code was promulgated, its 44 articles specifying the responsibilities and obligations of the producers and distributors of all foods pertaining to infants, babies and young children.

All this notwithstanding, as of the third world of Africa, Asia and Latin America, Nestle’ proceeded with aggressively marketing its powdered milk, no doubt made easier by weak and corrupt indigenous governments and politicians. Not only through regular advertising channels was the company calling upon mothers to forsake their own milk for Nestle’’s products but also with the help of some pediatricians and maternities, recruited by company agents . It was also reported that the ‘International Baby Food Action Network’(IBFAN) claimed that Nestle “distributes free formula samples to hospitals and maternity wards; after leaving the hospital, the formula is no longer free, but because the supplementation has interfered with lactation, the family must continue to buy the formula”. Sadly this meant that babies, once started on the substitute, their mothers’ milk dries up and they could no longer revert to breastfeeding. Nestle’ denied those allegations at the time.

Adding insult to injury, in many poor third world countries clean drinking water in not readily available to all. Instead, only contaminated water is accessible; meaning that mothers have no choice other than feeding their babies and infants an unhealthy concoction. Worse. Nestle’’s (and other makes) baby formula is expensive. Hence, poor mothers, in order to make the powder last longer, mix it with more water than recommended ,thus, giving their babies even less nutrition . No wonder, then that as of 2004 UNICEF was reporting the number of infants dying from taking-in that infected concoction at day. To be followed, in 2006 by ‘Source Watch’ own statement to the effect that Nestle’, being the largest baby formula producer, “has been pinpointed as a leading cause of the increasing worldwide infant mortality rates”.

In 2001 the BBC screened a report on child labour in the cocoa plantations in the Ivory Coast and Ghana, supplying beans to Nestle’ and other chocolate makers. It revealed that children in the age bracket of 12 to 14 were bought from poor parents in various African countries, brought to the plantations and worked as slaves 80 to 100 hours a week; they were paid nothing, barely fed and harshly treated.

Chocolate lovers around the world were outraged. Two representatives in the American Congress proposed legislation that would require Nestle’ and all others to label their product as “slave free”. This went contrary to the interests of the companies; they opposed it. Eventually a compromise was reached by virtue of which the industry undertook to eradicate child labour on the cocoa farms by 2005. This deadline came and nothing changed. It was brought forward to 2008, and again to 2010. That year a Danish documentary: ‘the Dark Side of Chocolate’ was screened. It showed that the exploitation and slave trading of children, aired by the BBC ten years earlier, had not abated let alone disappeared.

MONSANTO is a US corporation manufacturing and distributing agricultural products to farmers. It is the largest of six or seven other American and European corporations in this field of endeavour.

Under the headline “Monsanto, un demi siècle de scandales sanitaires” (“Monsanto, half a century of health scandals”), the French daily Le Monde acquaints us on 06.04.2013 with the history of this multinational corporation this way: “PCBs (Polychlorinated biphenyls), agent orange (defoliant),dioxins, GMOs (genetically modified organisms), growth hormones, herbicides….. All products which have made the fortune of Monsanto have been stained by health scandals and litigations, at times leading to their prohibition. But nothing hitherto has slowed the inexorable rise of this ancient chemistry giant reconverted to biogenetics turned master at the lobbying game”.

Anniston, Alabama is a US town of 20,000 residents or so, where Monsanto started manufacturing PCBs in 1935 for the electrical industries and for other uses. Between then and 1977, when production stopped, the company discharged its factory’s effluents in the local creek and in open pit landfills.

Yet, as early as 1937, there were suggestions of links between liver dicease and PCBs. Monsanto’s own scientists are reported to have, from the mid-1950 voiced their own fears to their superiors, and a 2002 article in the Washington Post revealed that in 1966 Monsanto managers “discovered that fish submerged in that creek turned belly-up within 10 seconds, spurting blood and shedding skin as if dunked into boiling water. They told no one. In 1969, they found fish in another creek with 7,500 times the legal PCB levels. They decided ‘there is little object in going to expensive extremes in limiting discharges’ ”.

How did the residents of Anniston themselves fare? Quite badly I’m afraid. According to the periodical ‘The Nation’ of May 29th, 200o: “The neighborhood around the plant is populated by people with cancer, young women with damaged ovaries, children who are learning-impaired and people whose ailments have been diagnosed as acute toxic syndrome”.

Subsequently, in 2001, a court in Alabama, found the corporation guilty of “negligence, wantonness, suppression of truth, nuisance, trespass, and outrage”. According to ‘Source Watch’ (a publication of the ‘Center for Media and Democracy’) the word ‘outrage’ is rarely used in Alabama courts because it implies a conduct “so outrageous in character and extreme in degree as to go beyond all possible bounds of decency so as to be regarded as atrocious and utterly intolerable in civilized society”. The multinational was sentenced to pay USD: 700 million in damages and to clean-up the affected areas of the town. Revealingly, however, the court pointed no finger at any of its officials.

Monsanto is also the leading corporation in the field of production and provision of genetically modified (GM) seeds such as those of wheat, maize, rice, soya beans etc. They are, typically, meant to be immune to adverse climatic conditions, requiring less water and resistant to pests.

Because GM products are covered by patents (“licence conferring a right or title for a set period, especially the sole right to using, or selling an invention”),to Monsanto (and to others in the same business) seeds constitute a rich source of income and profits. The coporation is rewarded in two ways. Either it sells a farmer a variety of GM seeds yielding a crop not carrying grains for replanting in the next season; meaning the grower buying fresh stocks on a season by season basis. Or the first batch purchased yields crops with grains suitable for replanting during the following season. In this case the grower pays a regular licence fee or royalty to the company.

As to be expected, Monsanto and its lobbyists claimed that GM agriculture was going to be the final nail in the coffin of world hunger. At the time, around 2003 a report by the UN’s ‘Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO)’ had concluded that world agriculture in its, then, present state could provide adequate nutrition (or 2,700 calories per adult daily) for 12 billion humans, clearly without the help of genetically modified alternatives. Furthermore, the multinational and its supporters were adamant that its products were absolutely safe and healthy. But to this day, there is no final authoritative answer to the crucial question: What are the mid to long term health implications, if any, for those consuming genetically modified foods. As if to complicate matters more, Monsanto refuses to label its products comprehensively.

United States farmers adopted GM seeds in 1996 when they became available. Curiously though, the United States is “one of the few places in the developed world that doesn’t require food producers to disclose whether or not their ingredients have any modifications ” according to an article in ‘AlterNet’ which describes itself as “a nonprofit organization that empowers people with independent journalism, information, and media tools”on 02 October 2015. And yet, again from the same source: “93 percent of Americans want GM foods to labeled as such, with three-quarters of survey respondents expressing concern about GM organisms in food”. No wonder US consumers are chagrined.

In contrast, practically all countries of the European Union do not allow the import and planting of GM seeds, except for animal feed.

Monsanto also manufactures and markets the widely used herbicide, ‘Roundup’ . According to the already quoted Le Monde daily, Monsanto, at the launching of this product in 1975, made publicity that it was friendly to Nature and biodegradable. In other words, at the end of its useful life, it decomposes back into its constituent chemical elements with no adverse effects on Nature.

All this proved fallacious. First, toward the end of 2010 ‘Chemical Research in Toxicology’ (“a peer-reviewed scientific journal, by the American Chemical Society”) noted that the embryos of amphibians (such as frogs) in contact with even small doses of the herbicide developed malformations. Worse, a report dated March 2015 by the UN’s ‘International Agency for Research on Cancer’ reported that the main component of the weed killer is “probably carcinogenic to humans… In addition, Roundup has been linked to a host of other health issues, environmental problems and the record decline of monarch butterflies”.

On June 08 , 2013, the ‘Motley Fool’, “a multimedia financial-services company” headlined an article: ‘Why Is Monsanto the Most Hated Company in the World?’ Indeed consumers the world over are angry at Monsanto for its lying and lack of transparency in its dealings with its products. So much so that on 21st may, 2016 a march took place in cities around the world in protest against the multinational’s wheeling and dealing. On the eve of that manifestation its organizers issued statements to the effect that “Monsanto represents the rotten core of the globalised and commodified food system, where a handful of multinational corporations dominate the market for seeds and agrochemicals at the expense of small scale farmers and communities around the world”. And “The crisis in the global food system is the result of deliberate political choices that favour corporate interests while condemning hundreds of millions of people to despair”.

Finally, this question by a watchdog of the US chemical industry, the ‘Chemical Industry Archives’ on March 27, 2009, in the context of the Anniston, Alabama ‘outrage’: “If Monsanto hid what it knew about its toxic pollution for decades, what is the company hiding from the public now?...This question seems particularly important to us as this powerful company asks the world to trust it with a worldwide, high-stakes gamble with the environmental and human health consequences of its genetically modified foods”. Later, from the same Motley Fool article: “It seems that GMOs will inevitably become a larger part of our food supply, because the corporate motivator in the United States has proved to be stronger than the citizen motivator in recent years. A few protests won't change that. It will take concerted, long-running national efforts to change diets and attitudes before Monsanto and its peers are forced to loosen their grip on American [and other countries] farmlands”.

LIKE the rest of them, Coca-Cola has had since the early 2000s its share of accusations and criticism by consumer groups, NGOs and other concerned parties. Among its more serious misdeeds are depletion of water resources in India and involvement in murder in Colombia.

In India Coca-Cola operates more than 50 plants. Forinstance, in 2000, it started production in its plant in the village of Kaladera in the north of India. By 2009 ground water reserves had dropped dramatically causing great hardships to peasants who no longer had adequate quantities for irrigation and to their women who henceforth had to walk long distances in their quest for domestic and potable water. The writers from the Faculty of Economics, Nis University, Serbia who reported this case also said that as many as 60 other villages in the general area of the plant similarly suffered from this dearth of water, especially in summers when water is traditionally scarce “even without Coca-Cola” . Ultimately, as reported by the ‘Wall Street Journal’ and ‘The Indian Express’ on 10 and 11 February 2016, the plant was definitely closed ostensibly, according to a company statement, because of “long-term economic viability”. Curiously, however, it made no reference to “the resistance Coca-Cola has faced from activists, who waged a decade long battle against the plant”. Simultaneously, two more plants were also shut down.

But murder is another matter altogether. Who was killed? Labour union leaders . Where? In Colombia. Why? Simply because unionized labour is a thorn in the side of any corporation. Finally, how did Coca-Cola supposedly go about it? Simply by hiring local militias to do its dirty work, according to its detractors, at a period when Colombia was “considered the trade union murder capital of the world”.

‘Alternet’,(“a nonprofit organization that empowers people with independent journalism, information, and media tools”, reports on April 22, 2010 reports on a German documentary film, released earlier that year, 2010. Called ‘The Coca- Cola Case’, its theme is the relentless efforts of US lawyers to take the corporation to court for arranging the murder of 10 union leaders representing workers in the company’s plants in Colombia, between 1990 and 2002. It also depicts how, having gotten rid of the leaders, the isolated union-less workers were given two choices by the plant managers: either resignation or death. Understandably they all left, to be soon replaced by cheaper non-unionized workers at monthly wages almost a quarter of those paid formerly. Alternet concludes: “The documentary is a fascinating portrayal of corporate irresponsibility and greed”.

MALARIA, dengue fever and sleeping sickness are three of a score of diseases still ravaging underdeveloped countries in Africa, Latin America and elsewhere. They have been called the ‘neglected diseases’ by the UN’s World Health Organization (WHO). The reason? Simply because the big pharmaceutical corporations have no financial interest in developing affordable and effective medicines leading to their eradication. Indeed, statistical studies by the WHO showed the between 1975 and 2000 the pharmaceutical giants put on the market 1,393 new medicines, only 16 of which targeted the neglected diseases; and that as of 2012, “six million children under the age of five die every year due to a lack of medical care”. Also in 2008, writing in ‘the Minnesota[University] Journal of Law, Science and Technology’ lawyer Martin L. Hirsh confirms that the drug multinationals stopped all research dealing with the neglected diseases for economic reasons. For, although a huge market existed for them, as evidenced by the millions killed by these maladies, none existed in the sense that those multitudes were overwhelmingly poor and could not afford brand medicines.

In contrast, it is much more rewarding to cater fo the affluent societies of North America, Europe and a few other places such as Japan. Not only have these diseaces been eradicated, but pharmacies are constantly stocked with new medicines, often no different from previous ones except in name, shape and colour of tablets and packaging. More blatantly unjust are the research and development of the lucrative so called ‘lifestyle drugs’ for curing baldness, treating toenail fungus, enhancing sexual potency etc. at a time when a large chunk of humanity is in dire need for life saving medication.

It should, therefore, come as no surprise that the affluent citizenry of the United States is aggressively targeted, by first inducing physicians to lower the diagnostic threshold separating being healthy from needing treatment. Secondly, by practicing ‘direct-to customer’ advertising described as “any promotional effort by a pharmaceutical company to present prescription drug information to the general public in the lay media”. Obviously, the new diagnostic rules add millions on customers to the drug makers. For their part these promotional campaigns persuade, otherwise healthy people, that they suffer from unheard of disorders. It makes the pseudo patients inclined to self-diagnose and to request their doctors to prescribe the product(s) advertised. Either way sales increase and profits balloon. In the words of lawyer Hirsch : “Pharmaceutical companies push unneeded drugs to those who can afford them, and withhold desperately needed drugs from those who cannot afford them. The power to cure and save is outweighed by the obligation to earn.

Recently the German daily ‘Deutsche Welle’ wrote on 26.10.2012: “A billion people across the world do not receive adequate medical attention. In developing countries….diseases, that long ago lost their horror in the West, still often mean certain death….Expensive modern medicine and the pharmaceutical industry's patent policies are among the reasons why....”.

For its part, Forbes magazine reported on 05.12.2013 that the chairman of the German chemistry giant ‘Bayer’ said words to the effect: “that Bayer didn’t develop its cancer drug, Nexavar (sorafenib) for India but for Western patients that can afford it”. The magazine then proceeded to explain that research and development of new drugs is an expensive undertaking making pharmaceutical corporations direct treasure and effort towards the ones which will ensure the highest return on investment, such as a drug for brain cancer which is in demand in affluent Western societies rather than on one for, say, sleeping sickness in demand in Africa because in all likelihood it would “need to be donated to those who need it”.

WE have already seen how wealth and influence enable multinationals get away with murder, human rights abuses and despoliation of Nature. What is more, globalization is enabling them to bully any government and trade union, when it is in their interest to do so.

In his 2005 book ‘L’Empire de la Honte’ (The Empire of Shame), Jean Ziegler “UN special rapporteur on the right to food between 2000-08” tells the story of the face-off between Siemens AG, the German engineering giant, and its employees at home. In 2003 the company decreed the 40 hour-week, instead of the 35 hours one, hitherto in effect, with no increase in pay. Should its unions balk at the change, it was ready to relocate 5,000 jobs to China and Eastern Europe.

Siemens AG reasoning behind the demand went thus: Of its total worldwide manpower of 417,000, 41% or 170,ooo was in Germany proper yet only contributing 23% of the firm’s turnover. To its senior management, this was an intolerable situation; the numbers had to be balanced. In other words, reduce the proportion of its home employment (and cost) to 23%. Understandably, the unions, representing the workers, were outraged. They organized marches in protest and even the German Chancellor at the time, Gerhard Schroeder qualified the intentions of Siemens AG of unpatriotic.

But all this was to no avail. Eventually, in 2004, the unions buckled under. They accepted the 40-hr week with no extra pay. The workers also lost the premiums hitherto paid by the company at Christmas and other occasions, to be replaced by bonuses based on merit.

The example was no lost. That same year Opel and Volkswagen followed suit.

Clearly, these are only three instances of arm-twisting by multinational corporations, to force governments and unions to acquiesce to their wishes, of many, many more before and since.

FINAL THOUGHTS.

THE lofty CSR principles of Kofi Annan’s Global Compact, unanimously agreed in Davos in 1999, have indeed proved to be of cosmetic value. Nothing more.

I have no doubt that many of the men and women at the helm of large multinational corporations are, on the personal and private levels active and generous in their communities, with some, such as Bill Gates and Warren Buffet establishing their own philanthropic funds.

And yet, as we have seen, these same individuals occupy their prominent professional positions because they are or are perceived to be uncompromising in their pursuit of one and only one target: maximization of profits for their shareholders by whichever means they see fit. As Jean

Ziegler explains in his book: in this world of globalized capitalism, the bosses have no choice in the matter. Should they allow human considerations to influence their business decisions, the balance sheets suffer and the fields are left open to the competition. But should they, instead, forge ahead with their conscience on leave, they maximize returns on investment, increase their personal incomes and keep their jobs.

There is, however, a glimmer at the end of the tunnel. It is created by the activism of the thousands of Non-Governmental Organizations around the world which are permanently on the lookout for malpractices and violations of human rights and others. They advertise their findings, causing, at least, bad publicity for the concerned corporation(s) and at most, loss of sales and diminution of profits. But true CSR will flourish if and when business managers find benefits in its application.

Philanthropy Is Not Justice

PHILANTHROPY IS NOT JUSTICE

The Author. APRIL 2024

REFERENCES

1-‘Wages of rebellion’. By Chris Hedges. Published 2015. *Introduction.

2-‘No is not enough’. By Naomi Klein. Published 2017. *Introduction.

3-‘Winners take all’. By Anand Giridharadas. Published 2018. *Prologue. *Chapter 6: Generosity and justice.

Britannica. *Capitalism. *Income inequality. *Occupy Wall Street. *Social justice.

Wikipedia. *Globalization.

INTRODUCTION

Capitalism is the economic credo followed by all western countries. And since the death of the communist system in the Soviet Union and eastern Europe, capitalism has ruled in the majority of nations on the globe. Briefly, in a capitalistic environment, industry and commerce are owned by the private sector-(private individuals or companies)-, and operated by them for profit. In return, the profit makers are expected to pay acceptable wages to those they employ and pay taxes to help governments provide social services for those in need.

But capitalism took a wrong turn in the 1970’s with the emergence of what is called neoliberalism. The latter is a political and economic philosophy calling for, among others, less taxes and “privatization and withdrawal of state from many areas of social provisions”. It maintains that citizens’ wellbeing fares better in a climate of privatization. In other words, it calls for lessening the role of government in public education, healthcare and other vital social services. In actual fact, neoliberalist theory de facto widens the inequality gap.

Neoliberals maneuvered to place in positions of responsibility, decision and power like-minded people, starting with US president Ronald Reagan in office from Jan 1981 to Jan 1989 and Margaret Thatcher prime minister of the UK from 1979 to 1990. Thanks to them laws were promulgated to reduce taxes, primarily for the rich, and cut public spending to the detriment of education, healthcare, welfare, infrastructure and more.

Reagan, Thatcher and their ilk justified the new measures by singing the praise of the ‘trickle down’ economic theory. It means according to Investopedia “...that tax [cuts] and benefits for corporations and the wealthy will trickle down and eventually benefit everyone”, by way of additional investments in new projects and higher wages.

By the late 1980’s globalization meaning “the process by which businesses or other organizations develop international influence or start operating on an international scale”, became the new economic reality. The proponents of globalization sang its praise as a generator of prosperity for all across the wide world.

In reality, however, the trickledown economy never materialized. As for globalization it resulted, among others, in the relocation of manufacturing facilities across international borders-(to take advantage of lower production costs)-, hence worsening unemployment in the home countries. Consequently, it was a boon for industrialists, financiers and businessmen and a disaster for all who depended on regular wages and salaries to survive. The supposed benefits for all turned out to be non-realizable myths concocted to placate the critics of the new tendencies.

Thenceforth, the rich became progressively richer and the poor progressively poorer. Importantly, the promoters of and beneficiaries from the new economic systems became the oligarchy-( a small group of people having control of a country)- influencing the legislative and executive branches of government, most notably in the USA.

Author Chris Hedges-(see References)- writes that from then on politicians prioritized the interests of oligarchs including granting them rights to pillage natural resources at the cost of a healthy planet. More, at times of financial crisis, governments served their interests by rescuing large enterprises in difficulty, while ignoring the causes of “..chronic unemployment, along with stagnant or declining wages…a collapsing infrastructure, and the millions left destitute and often homeless by deceptive mortgages and foreclosures.

As a consequence, the gap in income and wealth has been widening ever since the 1970’s, globally, and on national levels, with the USA the most flagrantly so among the community of nations.

HISTORICAL OVERVIEW

Entrepreneurial America took off in earnest in the 1800’s at the hands of businessmen and industrialists such as Cornelius Vanderbilt (1794-1877), Andrew Carnegie (1835-1919), and John D. Rockefeller (1839-1937). Because the three and others went about their businesses ruthlessly, unethically, and with no regard to anyone or anything except their own interests, they accumulated fabulous, hitherto unheard of, personal fortunes and in the process widened inequality in American society of the day. For all these they became known as the ‘Robber Barons’.

Critics abounded. Detractors complained about the way wealth was acquired, where it came from, and about the unwarranted political influence it bestowed in a democratically run country.

In consequence, the aging Carnegie and his co-moguls decided to give something back to assuage criticism and perhaps as a gesture of redemption before meeting their maker. They, for the first time in American history, created the private philanthropic foundation. Over time, foundations discharged hundreds of millions of dollars in establishing and donating to institutions such as museums, universities, hospitals etc.

Still, this generosity did not exonerate the robber barons; the money being given was considered “ill-gotten”. As for Theodore Roosevelt US president from 1901 to 1909: “No amount of charities in spending such fortunes can compensate in any way for the misconduct in acquiring them”. He, no doubt, meant that had the barons been fairer and more ethical in their business practices there would have been much less need for their philanthropy.

Given these circumstances, Andrew Carnegie sat down to draft an essay titled ‘Gospel of Wealth’ and published in 1889. With it he sought to expound the point of view of the robber barons and lay the criticism to rest once and for all.

To begin with, the essay explained that for progress to occur inequality, though deplorable, is inevitable. The reason, he maintained is because progress cannot be achieved unless the industrialists with their “talent for organization and management…rare among men” are left free to make as much money as possible and in whichever way they see fit no matter the widening inequality gap. Further the essay stated that the way they conduct business is vindicated by “the fact that it invariably secures for its possessor enormous rewards”.

Carnegie believed that his fortune, in due time, should be spent on philanthropy. He wrote that wealth should not make one live extravagantly. That the like of him is only “the mere agent and trustee for his poorer brethren”.

But since he was leaving his fortune for his poor brethren why not then lighten their miserable lives earlier, such as for example paying his workers decent wages, … he responded that “Wealth passing through the hands of the few, can be made a much more potent force…”

In a nutshell: Leave us, robber barons, alone to accumulate the riches whichever way is necessary, since at the end of the day the money gained will benefit all. The more money we make the more will be available to you, our needy compatriots, at a later date. In the meantime, money in our hands is managed more profitably that distributed in small sums to you people at an earlier date.

As expressed by author Anand Giridharadas-(see References)-“the idea that after-the- fact benevolence justifies anything-goes capitalism; that callousness and injustice….are excused by later philanthropy”.

PHILANTHROPY AND JUSTICE

Author Anand Giridharadas begins by asking why is it that the richest nation on the globe and world leader in technology, inventions, medical sciences, education and publication of books, has a substantial portion of its population lagging those of other developed countries in scholastic achievements, healthcare and wellbeing . The answer is that since the 1980’s only a few have been able to afford the benefits of the fields mentioned. Left behind were 117 million (as of 2018) low-income American citizens.

For two months, between mid-September and mid- November 2011, a protest, since then called ‘Occupy Wall Street’ was carried out by US citizens “against economic inequality and the corruption of corporate law” in the words of Britannica. Indeed, the protesters referred to themselves as the 99%, alluding to the inequality gap between the richest 1% and them. The movement was born in the wake of the 2007-2008 crisis resulting in huge sums of money being given to culpable financial institutions, at the origin of the calamity, while leaving many ordinary citizens in the dirt through no fault of theirs.

Then, Ángel Gurría (DOB:1950), the secretary of the OECD-(Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development)- condemned during his tenure the “rising inequalities of income, wealth and opportunities…corruption and capture of politics and institutions by vested interests…lack of transparency …soundness of education…”

Why so? Because the moneyed elites-(entrepreneurs, industrialists, bankers, financiers etc.)-who enjoy influence have supposedly assumed responsibility for solving the political and socio/economic problems of society.

Taking their cue from Andrew Carnegie, they turn to philanthropy in order to give back, to their less fortunate brethren, some of the money they make. But at no cost to themselves. Indeed, there is no question of adversely changing the favourable laws and regulations pertaining to tax exemptions, privileges and, above all, unrestrained money making; never mind that these prerogatives are causing the societal problems they pretend to solve. Succinctly, they want to do good and profit.

Importantly, philanthropy brings praise and gratitude to its authors. No doubt, it does a certain amount of good. Crucially, however, for the philanthropists, it silences those who argue that ethical wealth acquisition with less greed and frenzy and less buying of politicians drastically reduce the need for donations and generosity.

Oscar Wilde (1854-1900) was an Irish poet and playwright who was a contemporary of the early British industrial era with its own robber barons. He wrote more than a hundred years ago that elites cannot remedy the ills of society. Rather, they are “an aggravation of the difficulty…just as the worst slave-owners were those who were kind to their slaves…so…the people who do most harm are the people who try to do most good”.

Author Giridharadas call this group the ‘MarketWorld’ and defines it as “…an ascendent power elite…[with the] drives….to change the world while also profiting from the status quo”.

And yet when well-meaning people in position of command, such as president Obama needed advice on matters of public interest and on “…making democracy more vital” he turned to the multinational firm of McKensey, one of ‘MarketWorld’. This is rather like asking Al Capone for advice on how to fight the mobs.

Darren Walker (DOB 1959) is the president of the Ford Foundation. As the head of this philanthropic organization, he spends his days giving money away. Uncharacteristically, Darren is an African American of less than humble origin. He grew up with his sister with a single mother. Although she worked to support her family, they were always short of money.

During the presidency of Lyndon Johnson (1963-1968) and the civil rights movement headed by Martin Luther King (1929-1968), the government built schools for the like of Darren. He enrolled and showed an aptitude for learning while his cousins were in and out of prison. With encouragement and guidance from one of his teachers he graduated and move on to the University of Texas. Upon leaving with a degree, he took up various occupations until he landed a vice-presidency at the Ford Foundation in 2010 and became its president in 2013.

With a salary of nearly USD 800,000, elegant clothes, a chauffeured luxury car at his disposal and an apartment in an exclusive part of New York, he entered ‘MarketWorld’. Helped by his natural affability and congeniality he befriended and socialized with billionaires.

Still, all the time this was happening, his thoughts were constantly with his down-on-their-luck kinfolks back in Louisiana. He was particularly troubled because all the tax exemptions he and his wealthy friends enjoyed could have been spent on improving their lot. Walker contemplated the unjust society around him and felt more acutely his uneasiness about his privileges.

He decided he would write a ‘Gospel of Wealth’ to supersede Andrew Carnegie’s more than 100 years old. He would do it in the form of an open letter addressed to his wealthy friends in the hope of making them change their ways in order to narrow the gap between the haves and the have-nots. Recall that the 19th century magnate had looked upon deep inequality as “an unavoidable condition” to progress, to be balanced by philanthropy.

Walker called his open letter ‘Toward a New Gospel of Wealth’ in which he tried to discredit the myths by which moneyed elites existed. He hoped he could convince them of the fallacies of their business and life credos which lead to an intolerable inequality, that philanthropy alone can never remedy no matter how bountiful. It is necessary, he argued, to rethink the way fortunes are made and taxes contributed.

He wrote “…what I want means they would have to give up something…in order to reduce inequality…we…have to talk about redistribution …”. Further, he lamented the privatization of “civic…and public activities”. Here he was expressing his doubt that “…the rich [are] the best and rightful administrators of…society”.

Walker was treading on slippery ground. The letter addressees abhor discussing how money is made. They do not want to acknowledge societal inequality and, least of all, being responsible for it. They prefer to talk about missed opportunities and philanthropy.

For example, to the oligarchs who wanted to know why more downtrodden persons could not succeed like Walker did, despite his debilitating background, he responded that people of his background are born loaded with enduring disadvantages. That taking advantage of opportunities depends very much on where one is born, one’s heritage, ethnicity and colour, and the historical prejudices that went with them. In any case, he added the neoliberal credo is making it even harder for them to escape their dismal conditions.

In the final analysis, how did Darren Walker’s ideas fare? His was a case of ‘if-you-can’t beat-them-join-them’. Or in the words of one oligarch “The best tactic is to bring your critics into the fold”. Not long after he released ‘Toward a New Gospel of Wealth’ Walker joined the board of directors of PepsiCo despite its marketing of harmful “sugary drinks”. Along with his presidency of the Ford Foundation, the income of “…this [ex] warrior against inequality” rose to more than USD 1,000,000 a year.

Another person who shared Walker’s views is Laurie Tish (DOB: 1951). But unlike him she was born into and raised by a billionaire family worth in 2018 an estimated $ 21 billion. They owned the Loews Corporation-(grouping many unrelated business and industrial organizations)-, from which their fortune came.

Laurie and her family are a big name in philanthropy, donating generously to hospitals and other institutions. But she is troubled by the inequality she sees around her. She calls it her permanent “headache”, because she is at the same time the critic of ‘MarketWorld’ status-quo and the personification of that status-quo she condemns.

Her personal fortune-(estimated at $1.6 billion)-, makes her feel guilty and causes her to immerse herself in philanthropic projects. Yet, she admits that her generosity will not have a meaningful effects on the status quo. “I am going to leave that to my kids” she says.

Ms. Tisch is equally unhappy about the political influence rich people wield but she is reluctant to do anything about it because “You… don’t want to be the only schmuck [idiot] doing it”.

But nothing gives Ms. Tisch a bigger headache than cigarettes. Her family’s conglomerate took advantage of the bad publicity tobacco companies were getting in the late 1960’s, to buy on the cheap Lorillard, and proceeding to market cigarettes aimed at African Americans, with contents “that made it easier to start smoking and…that helped keep one hooked” according to author Giridharadas.

Ms. Tisch is aware that people die from smoking. She is embarrassed when donating to hospitals which treat those her family poisons. She also thinks about cigarettes when she is sponsoring better nutrition for African-American communities. She wonders whether the lives she saves through her generosity compensate for the ones lost to smoking.

Despite it all, she is defensive of her family. She argues that hers is not the only one selling harmful products. Those others who deal with alcoholic and sugary products are as bad.

By refusing to be the one to rock the boat of the system, Laurie Tish demonstrates “… the hold…the status-quo had on her…Again and again, she voiced an ideal for which…she was unwilling to sacrifice” in the words of author Giridharsdas. She said that ‘MarketWorld’ may “give more money away, but they don’t want to radically change it”. Finally, asked what she thought was needed to achieve a more equitable society. Perhaps a revolution might, she replied.

The net worth of the Sackler family, according to Forbes magazine, stood at $14 billion in 2015.

According to author Giridharadas the Sacklers gave “honorably, thoughtfully, abundantly” thus pre-empting questions about the origin of their fortune and how it was acquired. Indeed, the part in his book on the family includes almost two pages relating to the causes and institutions, they give to “…in America and around the world”.

Sackler brothers Arthur (1913-1987), Mortimer (1916-2010) and Raymond (1920-2017) started the ball of wealth rolling with the creation of the pharmaceutical firm Purdue Pharma in 1952. Thenceforth doing business a-la Sackler meant a relentless drive to market their products, hitherto unknown in the pharmaceutical industry.

Particularly, with the painkiller OxyContin marketed in 1996. As its main ingredient is Oxycodone, a narcotic -(similar to opium), Purdue Pharma ascertained that because of its property of slow absorption by the organs targeted, the risk of drug addiction is unlikely.

Armed with this claim, company representatives pushed hard with their sales drive. They entertained, pampered and satisfied all the whims and weaknesses of physicians in “the most aggressive marketing campaign ever undertaken by a pharmaceutical company for a narcotic pain killer” as stated by the New York Times. In return, Purdue Pharma expected the doctors to prescribe OxyContin to their patients in preference to its competitors’ products.

Thanks to the cooperation of physicians, the sale of OxyContin skyrocketed in a relatively short time. It was helped by the discovery by drug users that if the tablet, rather than being swallowed as intended, is instead chewed or ground then sniffed or injected. it would have the same results as taking heroin. Consequently, the painkiller began to be implicated in drug addiction and premature deaths. And although what became known as the ‘opioid epidemic’ involved medicines other than OxyContin, the New Yorker magazine ascertains that the crisis was caused “by a shift in the culture of prescribing [by doctors] …carefully engineered by Purdue Pharma”.

Alarm bells started to sound in 2001 when medical personnel in the US state of West Virginia began to record an escalating number of deaths from oxycodone. They related this to the abundance of doctors’ prescriptions for OxyContin. In consequence the medical authorities in the state clamored for stricter control to ensure that the painkiller is only given to those who really needed it. In other words: ‘pre-authorization’ required prior to prescribing OxyContin.

Purdue Pharma reacted vigourously. It fought to “stop any pre-authorization efforts for OxyContin”, according to a company memo. It publicly pledged to combat the misuse of the medicine. It also reminded of its and its owners generous philanthropy. Clearly the company was opposed to any attempt to limit the sale of its goose that laid the golden eggs.

But West Virginia lawyers were not fooled by the white wash. They knew that “…Purdue’s employees were actively and secretly trying to prevent…imposing any control on the sale of OxyContin”. Nor were the judiciaries. Against the claims by the company that its painkiller was less amenable to abuse, they replied that, to the contrary, the company was not truthful and it knew it. In fact they stressed that it had “contributed to a serious national problem…[resulting in]…a devastating effect on many communities…”. Eventually the company was found guilty and accepted in 2007 to pay $635 million in compensations. That outlay hardly dented the fortune of the Sacklers.

It later transpired that a senior judiciary tried to interfere in favour of Purdue Pharma by “urging” the prosecutor in charge of the case to “slow down”.

Philanthropy overshadowed whatever evildoing and harm Purdue Pharma and the Sacklers may have done. In the word of author Giridharadas, whichever way you look at it, “Generosity is no substitute for justice….the generosity was in the millions, the injustice had helped to build a $14 billion fortune”.

APPENDIX THE TRUMP PHENOMENON

According to Naomi Klein-(see References)-, the election of the megalomanic and demagogue Donald Trump, in 216 to the highest office in the USA is not an aberration but a logical result of the socio-economic environment described hereinbefore. He is the “logical culmination of the current neoliberal system… [He represents]…a naked corporate takeover [of the presidency]”.

While being one of the moneyed elites, he has nevertheless succeeded in promoting himself as the savior of the middle and lower classes by stirring up racial, xenophobic and unemployment fears. He has effectively directed the anger of his public away from ‘MarketWorld’ towards poor migrants, Muslims and made them believe in his ‘Make America Great Again’ slogan.

In reality, he and his associates are maneuvering in favour and for the benefit of big corporations; at the cost of welfare projects and social services important to the public. For example, Trump takes people minds away from environmental problems to have a free hand to allow exploitation of say coal and oil deposits.

This is also evident from Trump’s cabinet members. All very wealthy people coming from various corporations and financial firms such as Exxon Mobil and Goldman Sachs. He falsely believes that corporation bosses are superhumans and will find solutions to all human problems.

I Shop Therefore I Am

I SHOP

THEREFORE

I AM

Chapter illustration

Final proof reading: 24.10.2016.

What is consumerism?

The term "consumerism" has more than one definition. They do not relate to one another and sometimes, are in conflict. For example, one definition concerns the protection of consumers from shoddy products and exaggerated prices (see for example the crusade of Ralph Nader against the motor industry in America in the 50's, 60's and 70's). But for the purpose of this project, consumerism is one (or all) of the following:

-“The belief that it is good for people to spend a lot of money on goods and services”. (Merriam-Webster dictionary).

-“The concept that an ever expanding consumption of goods is advantageous to the economy”. (Dictionary.com).

-“Doctrine that ever increasing consumption of goods and services forms the basis of a sound economy”. (Business dictionary).

Consumerism up to the 19th century.

Human Civilization can be said to have started around 12000 BC with the Neolithic or Agricultural Revolution, when Man began mastering agriculture and the domestication of animals for food and other purposes, thus progressively leaving behind the life of hunting gathering, which prevailed from the time homosapiens sapiens evolved at least 100,000 years ago. As agriculturalist and animal owner, Man began forming settlements which, with time, turned into villages and later into towns near the lands he now cultivated and presumably near streams and rivers. This transformation led to the stratification of village society (into those who owned more land and animals, hence power, and those who owned less or worked for them), enabled the accumulation of surplus food, the diversification of daily activities and the ontset of demographic expansion. Clearly, in those times, apart from food and clothing in the form of animal furs and such like, there were not many commodities and services to consume.

It can reasonably be said that consumerism dates back to the earliest exchange and trading between people and countries. It is sufficient for our purpose, however, to consider that it started with the establishment of the Silk Road linking China, India and others in eastern Asia to Mediterranean ports. In its heyday, this 6,500km trade route was travelled by caravans belonging to Arabs, Persians and merchants of other nationalities. They carried silk (hence the name) from China and spices from India. Venetian ships then carried them to medieval Europe (1). Silk and spices were the goods that the Europeans of that time craved for and which commanded premium prices. It therefore goes without saying that, this being the case, only a few aristocrats, prosperous merchants and other wealthy citizens were able to afford them. Otherwise, the vast majority of the populations there and elsewhere in the then populated globe, lived in poverty, their main daily preoccupation: finding enough food for them and their families.

Chapter illustration

The extent of consumerism, possibly, remained unchanged until the late seventeenth century when consumption in the modern sense started to take shape and continued into the eighteenth century. The increased wealth of European countries, as a consequence of the exploitation of the resources of their colonies, resulted in an abundance of previously unknown products, to the emergence of a middle class(professionals, merchants, etc) and the further enrichment of the upper classes (landowners, nobility, etc). Predictably, they acquired a taste for consumables (such as sugar, coffee, tea and tobacco) and for luxury items of clothing and other material for the construction and embellishment of their new residences and mansions. They were encouraged, in all this, by eager tradesmen and prodded by a nascent publicity (pamphlets etc). All this said, however, it remains true that eighty five per cent of European society, at that time, consisted of peasantry living in the countryside and cultivating the land for rich owners and, obviously, not sharing in the new prosperity and higher standard of living of the former.

All this began to change toward the end of the 18th century with the advent of the Industrial Revolution, in England, driven, among other reasons, by the discovery of coal as a rich source of energy and the harnessing of steam power. Add to this the abundance of cheap raw material, mainly cotton, from the North American colonies and then, from the United States of America. Raw cotton was also brought from the English possessions in India and from Egypt after its occupation in 1882.The Industrial revolution caused the migration of a great number of peasants from the countryside to work in the new coal mines, steelworks and textile factories. Entire families including women and children (from 4 or 5 years of age) were employed. They lived a miserable life in shantytowns with no sanitation or other amenities.

The Industrial Revolution dramatically increased the availability of consumer goods. Among the first to come on the markets, in large and ever increasing quantities, to the general public at home and in the colonies, were textiles particularly, cotton garments (2).

Other European countries quickly entered the industrialization arena: Belgium, France and Germany in the 1820s, 1850s and 1870s in that order. They were followed by the USA and Japan in the 1860s and 1870's respectively. So that by the mid 19th century an industrial era took shape with unequalled productive capacity. For the first time in history, products were available in outstanding quantities at low enough prices as to be affordable to virtually everyone in the industrialized world. Enter the consumer society.

Consumerism from 1900 to present day

In his 1871 book "Principles of Economics", the Austrian economics founder Carl Menger speaks of consumer sovereignty, whereby the economy is controlled entirely by consumer preferences, valuations, and choices.

In a 1955 speech, John Bugas (then,number two at Ford Motor Company) coined the term "consumerism" as a substitute for "capitalism" to better describe the American Economy. According to him “the term consumerism would pin the tag where it actually belongs: on Mr. Consumer, the real boss and beneficiary of the American system. It would pull the rug right out from under our unfriendly critics who have blasted away so long and loud at capitalism. Somehow, I just can’t picture them shouting: Down with the consumers!”

Also in 1955, economist Victor Lebow stated: “Our enormously productive economy demands that we make consumption our way of life, that we convert the buying and use of goods into rituals, that we seek our spiritual satisfaction and our ego satisfaction in consumption. We need things consumed, burned up, worn out, replaced and discarded at an ever- increasing rate”.

By the turn of the 20th century, and until the 1920's the average worker in

Western Europe or the United States still spent approximately 80-90% of his income on food and other necessities. So for capitalist entrepreneurs and industrialists, what was needed was the production of vast amount of items at an acceptable price etc.

One of the first to do this, and certainly the best known, was Henry Ford. In 1907 announced his intention to “create a motor car for the multitude”. He then proceeded to build the Model T Ford, a simple, sturdy and inexpensive car with no options (3). As Ford wanted to speed up production and achieve an even cheaper price per unit. So he adapted the assembly line method of production and other procedures. In this way between, 1908 when the Model T was first introduced and 1927 when its production stopped, he managed to sell 15,000,000 units all to the same original design. He even raised the daily wages of his own workers to encourage them to buy the car. And they did. It is said that “the Model T Ford changed the way Americans work and travel by making the motor car affordable to a majority of them”.

Chapter illustration

In 1924, when the motor car market in America started to become saturated, General Motors introduced the concept of "Planned Obsolescence" meaning designing motor cars with a limited life to entice consumers to buy new ones, hence the yearly model changes, or subtle improvements, which are still the norms today with all motor manufactures .

By the end of the second half of the 1950's,a majority of households in America and Western Europe owned the main home appliances (refrigerators, gas or electric stoves, washing machines, vacuum cleaners, and air conditioners). All these had become the consumer goods par excellence, and for good reasons.

And then in the early 1990's arrived the high-tech electronics and information technology revolution. This is when consumerism went mad, driven by the most aggressive Planned Obsolescence ever.

Last but not least, 20th century consumerism was, and continues to be, driven by fierce and imaginative dvertising campaigns undertaken, at great expense, by competing commercial businesses. The offers of loans, easy installment payments and credit cards abound, succeeding in convincing the ordinary individual to spend on products he had no real need for a short while before (and some of them overspend and end up in trouble). Also part of the appeal is the elaborate and pleasing packaging of products, which no useful purpose and goes directly to waste.

Consumerism from now on.

Clearly, consumerism is the backbone of the economic system (capitalism) adhered to nowadays by all industrial countries including the newer members: China and India. Without it, there is no economic growth and consequently no enrichment of the industrialists, bankers, and other entrepreneurs. This enrichment is closely related to the concepts of "consumer confidence" and "the consumer price index". The gross national product (GNP) is also a measure of this wealth (4). This being the case, it is, then, very unlikely that consumerism will abate until the brakes are put on, not by the wisdom or willingness of Man, but by external forces, such as:

-*The increasing prosperity of China and India is creating a new middle class seeking to achieve the standard of living of the West. Consequently, they are, increasingly, striving for better diets (in particular more meat) and more and better physical comforts (housing, cars, home appliances etc). As a result a greater population of cattle, sheep, pigs, poultry and fish is demanded, hence switching arable land from growing food for humans to feedstock for animals, at a time when more and more arable land is being sacrificed for the accelerated urbanization needed not only by the evolving class but also by the exploding demography, mainly, in Asia and Africa (5).

-*Ecological constraints (environmental degradation, depletion of natural resources and global warming) will not permit the duplication of western societies standard of living by the rest of the world.

It is difficult to draw the line between justified consumerism, that which improves the standard of living, and the unnecessary one meant only for instant gratification in acquiring an object of no real necessity, just for "keeping up with the Joneses" and for prestige.

Can any reasonable person be against the human quest for knowledge resulting in scientific research by various laboratories and companies which lead to improved products? And how about medical and pharmaceutical research and the improved medicines, surgical procedures and instruments, which ensue? Who can, for example, be against disposable syringes, needles and surgical gloves all ending up in trash heaps and are not biodegradable.

But obviously, it is becoming increasingly evident that some middle line is urgently needed.

Of all the negative consequences of the current human activities nothing is more preoccupying and potentially destructive as global warming .And in as much as consumerism largely contributes to it via the energy needed to produce the goods, it has been calculated that in order to keep the effects of this warming down to acceptable limits by 2050,the total emission of CO2 per person per year must not exceed 2 1/2 tonnes (that of a present day Indian) against currently 6 for China,9 for Europe and Japan and 18 tonnes per person for the United States. Should humanity succeed in achieving this level of emissions (which is amply doubtful), it would probably mean that the other ills have been attended to (or at least are on their way of being cured) : acceptable levels of methane (300 times more damaging than CO2) from the excrements of all these cows and pigs, large scale recycling of material and alternatives to fossil fuels. A sad paradox is that it would help if the forecasted 9 billion souls to populate the globe in 2050, still have a significant number of "below the poverty line" members, meaning non-consumers(6).

And finally, one last thought. If consumerism (capitalism) is unsustainable and if communism has miserably failed, partly because it neglected the consumer instincts of its people ( except for the ruling classes), then where is humanity heading to?

(1)Some historians, have indicated that the desire to obtain the silk and spices directly from their sources, thus avoiding middlemen and the Eastern Mediterranean ports then under the control of the Ottomans, led the Portuguese (Vasco da Gama) to pioneer the sea route from Europe to the Indian Ocean by rounding the Cape of Good Hope (the southern tip

of Africa) reaching India on May 20, 1498. The Portuguese then succeeded in establishing a trading post in 1557. The same reasons motivated Christopher Columbus to cross the Atlantic Ocean and discover America in lieu of India.

(2) Raw cotton brought from India was sold back to Indians as finished products. As a protest against this monopoly and part of his nonviolent activism in favour of Indian independence, Gandhi took up weaving cloth on his own spinning wheel and demanded from all his followers to do the same. And that is also the reason why the spinning wheel is on the Indian flag.

(3) He is famously reported to have replied to a customer who wanted to know the colours available, that he could have any colour he liked as long as it was black.

(4) But it is misleading since it calculates the value of all goods and services produced without deducting the value of the damage done in the process (pollution,CO2 emissions, waste accumulation and depletion of natural resources).

(5) A recent article in the Economist under a heading “China's insatiable appetite for pork is a symbol of the country's rise. It is also a danger to the world”. The article then explains that, the Chinese, avid eaters of pork, consume at present 700million pigs per year or about 1/3 of a pig per person, whereas before 1970, an average person hardly ever managed to consume more than twice or three times a year. But all those beasts need plenty of feedstock, and because China is short on water and suitable land, it has "commissioned" Brazil and Argentina to grow the soya beans for her pigs on thousands of hectares of reclaimed forests. And everyone knows that chopping down forests is detrimental to the ecological health of the planet. In addition these pigs produce a huge amount of methane ( a global warming gas)which finds its way into the atmosphere.

(6)In his book “fin de l'Occident, naissance du monde” (end of the West, birth of the world) the author Herve Kempf predicts that, in rich countries (United States, Europe, Japan, Australia and South Korea), consumerism for a large part of their populations is approaching saturation in that they already own automobiles, television sets, mobile phones, home appliances and other amenities such as education for their children, travel etc. That despite capitalism undoubted ability to create needs of which the consumer had no idea and no desire, a stage is reached when “il devient difficile de faire boir un ane qui n'a pas soif” (it becomes difficult to make a donkey, which is not thirsty , drink). Thus, end of economic growth. All this, of course remains to be seen. Only time and future generations can tell.

Of Caravans and Caravels

OF CARAVANS AND CARAVELS EAST-WEST TRADE IN BYGONE ERAS

Chapter illustration

OF CARAVANS AND CARAVELS EAST-WEST TRADE IN BYGONE ERAS

REFERENCES.

Book. *The Silk Roads, 2015, by Frank Frankopan, chapters: 1,6,7,11,12,13 and 14.

Scholarly articles. *The Silk Roads and Eurasian Geography by historian Daniel C. Waugh. *Transcontinental Trade and Economic Growth in the Early Islamic Empire, by historian Maya Shatzmiller. *The East India Company: The original corporate raiders by historian William Dalrymple ( in the Guardian dated 04.03.2015)

Others. *Ancient History Encyclopedia (AHE): 1) Silk Road. 2)Tyrian purple *Asia Society: Geographical setting of the Silk Roads. *Encyclopedia Britannica (BRIT): East India Company. *Facts and Details: Caravans and transportation along the Silk Road. *Geography: Silk Road. *Historyworld.net (HWN): History of trade. *History.com: Silk Road. *National Geographic: 1) How the East India Company became the world’s most powerful business. 2) Trading silk for horses. *Unesco: Venice. *Wikipedia: Economic history of Venice.

INTRODUCTION.

Bartering or exchanging reciprocally desirable items goes back to the dawn of mankind more than 100,000 years ago. It took place between kin related, hunting gathering clansmen. Say a lump of venison from a hunted deer for a bunch of juicy wild berries gathered in the forest.

The proximity of navigable waterways gave early humans the ingenious idea of using tree trunks to cut out canoes. With these they were able to barter goods with other clans and tribes up and down streams and rivers. Subsequently, the advent of agriculture, about ten to twelve thousand years ago, contributed farm and garden produce to the exchange. So did artifacts made by early skilled artisans. It is, therefore, not accidental, that the earliest civilizations appeared on the banks of great waterways: the Nile, Tigris and Euphrates, Indus and Yellow rivers.

With the evolution of market places, as will appear in the ensuing text, something quite incidental, but inevitable, occurred. Namely, the coming together of traders and middlemen from diverse regions led to exchanges of ideas and concepts of cultural, religious and philosophical nature. These were subsequently disseminated wide and far on backs of traders’ camels and on the decks of merchant ships.

In those days of long, risky and time- consuming journeys, it was vital that the merchandise bartered be durable, of a high weight to volume ratio and apt to command highly lucrative prices in the markets at destination. Dry spices and silk (see hereinafter) fitted the bill perfectly. So did other textiles as well as, precious stones and metals.

This narrative is about international commerce in bygone eras, first during Antiquity, followed by that which travelled along the great Silk Roads spanning Asia from the China Sea to the Mediterranean. I conclude with the European dominated transoceanic trade from the 15th to the 19th century. Throughout, I endeavor to highlight the wealth and prosperity trade brought to winners as well as the injustices and great suffering to losers, not because of their own shortcomings but on account of callousness and deficiencies in the morality of others. I have included at the end a short appendix for more information on certain relevant topics for those of my readers who are interested.

At the outset, however, and before we enter the next part, I wish to elaborate a little about two commodities which recur in the text regardless of the period under discussion. They are the spices of India and Southeast Asia and, the silk of China.

When the term ‘spices’ occurs in the text it implies a gamut of produce including: Black pepper, cinnamon, cloves, frankincense (not edible but equally valuable), ginger, nutmeg, saffron, turmeric and more. They are shown below in the same order from left to right, top to bottom.

Chapter illustration

As for silk, it begins with the labor of silk worms (image) secreting filaments “as building material for cocoons” according to BRIT. Evidence exists that the silkworm was domesticated in China as far back as 5 to 6,000 years ago. And the earliest piece of silk fabric was found in an Egyptian royal tomb in the ‘Valley of the Kings’. Its age was estimated at over 3,000 years ago.

Chinese authorities, realizing the potential value of their new product, kept its production under wraps. Further, they entrusted its making exclusively to women. Divulgence of information about the processes involved was punishable with death. It remained a state secret for many centuries, until furtively acquired by the Byzantines in the 6th century CE as we shall see.

TRADE IN ANTIQUITY.

Phoenicians and the Mediterranean

The best known Phoenician cities: Byblos, Sidon and Tyre, on the eastern shore of the Mediterranean, were fully established by 2750 BCE. As of 1500 BCE, Phoenicians had developed the ships (image) and accumulated the know-how to become “the greatest traders and the best sailors and navigators” of their era. HWN tells us of a 1080 BCE Egyptian chronicler, who wrote about a Phoenician tradesman, residing in the delta of the Nile, owning 50 merchant vessels incessantly sailing between Sidon and Egypt. This happy state of affairs ended when Tyre was subdued in 332 BCE by Alexander the Great of Macedonia.

Meanwhile, in 814 BCE, Phoenicians founded Carthage in today’s Tunisia. Eventually, from there they colonized Sicily and parts of Iberia (Spain). Thenceforth they dominated trade in the Mediterranean. According to history.com, Carthage during its apogee accommodated 500,000 inhabitants and had port facilities sufficient for the berthing of 220 merchantmen.

From their ancestral home in the eastern Mediterranean, Carthaginian traders brought cedar wood, the best kind of timber available at that time, linen and golden artifacts produced by skilled artisans. But perhaps above all ‘Tyrian purple’(image), qualified by AHE as“...literally worth more than its weight in gold”(see 1 in Appendix).

Chapter illustration

More. As savvy middlemen, they transported and sold products of one region to another. In this respect, the Hebrew prophet and priest Ezekiel (died in 569 BCE) lists about two dozen items and commodities traded by Phoenicians in Damascus, Rhodes, Arabia, Persia and elsewhere. The merchandise included slaves, horses, sheep, several metal items, ivory and more.

The end of Carthage came at the hands of the Romans who resented its hegemony in Rome’s backyard. Following a series of three wars between them starting in 264 BCE, Carthage fell in 146 BCE. It was sacked and its people either massacred or enslaved.

Romans and China

In the 60’s BCE , troops of the Roman Republic conquered Syria, Lebanon and Palestine. In other words, the western termini of the Silk Roads (covered hereinafter). There, they became conscious of the luxury goods and other commodities exported from Asia which, they concluded according to Frankopan “ [that it]...was indescribably wealthy...its harvests the stuff of legend, the variety of its produce incredible, and the size of its herds and flocks simply amazing. Its exports were colossal”. Thirty years later, the Romans were in control of Egypt which astounded them by its agricultural wealth which they did not fail to exploit to their heart’s content. Revealingly, although, theretofore, they were familiar with Gaul and the British Isles, they saw that, unlike the East, Europe had nothing of value to offer, at that time.

Thus, the first Roman emperor Augustus (reigned from 27 BCE and 14 CE, after the end of the republic) sent expeditions to investigate overland and sea routes eastwards. Shortly thereafter, 120 Roman merchant ships a year, sailing from the Red sea or the Persian Gulf, were mooring at Indian ports. On their way east Roman vessels and overland caravans (covered thereafter) carried “amphorae [narrow necked jars], lamps, mirrors etc. as well as gold and silver coins” to exchange for spices, dyes, silk and other textiles.

To Romans back home nothing was more desirable and valued than Chinese silk (see 2 in Appendix). So much so that many Roman traditionalists and thinkers, such as philosopher Lucius Seneca (4 BCE-65 CE) argued that wearing it was immodest for women and effeminate for men. It was also expensive and absorbed a substantial part of the state’s wealth. As for author and philosopher Pliny the Elder (23-79 CE), he complained about the exorbitant amounts outlaid for luxury goods from Asia. And yet despite all the criticism, silk remained in fashion, and ever more expensive, obviously among the better off classes, in spite of the Chinese demanding gold, and only gold, in payment for the textile.

With the western Empire’s demise in 476 CE its eastern part, the Byzantine Empire survived for another 1,000 years. While it lasted its population’s crave for silk continued albeit at the outrageous price the Chinese were charging, secure in their certainty they were the only custodians of its production. This changed, however after emperor Justinian (reigned 527-565) succeeded in having silk worms smuggled to Constantinople, whereby Byzantium started its own production.

WHILE EUROPE SLEPT.

As the map shows the Silk Roads () (red and yellow lines on the map) is not a single east-west highway. Rather it is a whole network of trails and passages beginning in the then capital of China, Chang’an and ending on the shores of the Mediterranean Sea, as well as in places like Constantinople, Antioch and Damascus and others. It, thus, crossed the whole width of the Asian continent of some 7,500 kms moving through deserts, steppes () and across mountains. On the whole, an arid and dry landscape with varying climates from the cruel Gobi Desert (image right) to the frigidity of the Pamir mountains (image left).

To add insult to injury, some sections of the Road were infested with marauders and bandits, a great risk to travelers and their merchandises. It required the skills of experienced caravanners to safely lead caravans to their destination. It goes without saying, therefore, that whatever was taken to market, had to be in very high demand to make the hassle of the journey amply rewardable.

On the bright side however, the Road was interspaced with numerous oases and market towns. Of no less importance were the caravanserais (image) built every 30 to 40 kms where men and animals replenished with food and water and rested before moving on. More. As already stated, in the Introduction, strangers meeting there would tell and learn of, their respective backgrounds. This, for example is how Buddhism entered China from India.

Rarely did any one trader travel the whole length of the Roads. Instead at every caravanserai, or market town, goods and commodities changed hands with substantial profits to the sellers. In other words, merchandise starting in China or India, when it arrived in say Damascus would have changed hands several times along the way so that its price at destination bore no relation to its starting one.

What were the wares transported on the backs of camels? Eastwards, toward Asia went slaves, horses, animal furs and pelts, glassware, gold and silver and a dozen more. On the return journey towards the Mediterranean Sea, and eventually to Medieval Europe, travelled silk, spices, tea, dyes, rice, paper, gun powder and more. Of all of these, the place of honor goes to Chinese silk. Not only it was an expensive cloth for the rich, but in the words of author Frankopan “ it was in some ways the most reliable currency”. Indeed, soldiers dispersed around the Chinese empire, were paid with bolts of silk in preference to coins and grain since the first were always in short supply and the second rotted if not consumed timely.

Silk Roads trading originated in 130 BCE by the seventh emperor of the Han dynasty of ancient China, as the way to exchange silk for horses. These animals were acquired in their thousands to equip and reinforce the Chinese army. The providers were the nomadic tribesmen of the Ferghana Valley, adjoining the Pamir mountains (see map above).

This exchange endured for centuries. According to ‘Facts and Details’, “...tens of thousands of bolts [silk] would be sent annually to...the nomads who controlled the supply of horses...”. In all likelihood, the recipients did a thriving, and very profitable business with the precious textile. The horses, on the other hand, were greatly appreciated and valued by the Chinese on account of their elegance, strength, speed and endurance. So much so that one emperor, reportedly, took 80 of his mounts to his grave, expecting them to serve him in the afterlife.

Trade along the Silk Roads remained vibrant for more than 1,500 years. While it lasted it was travelled by caravans of between 100 to 1,000 camels( see 2 in Appendix) carrying goods and commodities for thousands of kilometers.

In the winter of 1971, two French professional photographers went along with an authentic caravan organized by traders from the Republic of Kyrgyzstan in Central Asia. They reported that the return journey, over the mountainous geography described, of nearly 400 kms took one month to complete.

With temperature as low as minus 24 deg C , streams and rivers were, naturally, frozen solid. Experienced caravanners would put their ear to the ice to estimate its thickness, by listening to the sound of the rushing water beneath it, in order to evaluate whether a fully laden camel could cross safely or otherwise. Nevertheless, it did happen that ice would break and animal and cargo would vanish under for ever.

Further, the Frenchmen tell us that at night, the Kyrgyz shared with their camels “stone shelters, often infested with rats and full of smoke”. Worse, the caravanners would not let their animals lie down “for two hours so they wouldn't get cold from snow melted by their hot bodies”.

Or that a camel may slip on the frozen path, despite it having been spread, beforehand with sand, for better grip. When this happened: “Risking their own lives, men unload the animal so that it can stand up, then load it again, and move on”.

Venice in the cul-de-sac end of the Adriatic Sea, world famous for its canals and gondolas, began its life humbly and modestly, when refugees, fleeing a conflict, established themselves there in 568 CE. By the end of the 1200’s it had become, in the words of UNESCO, “the centre of a maritime empire of unequalled power.....[and] one of the most prosperous cities in Europe”.

Chapter illustration

What happened in between? First, Venetians, gradually developed a mercantile attitude and temperament which allowed them to dominate trade in the Adriatic and Mediterranean Seas. Second, they established good working relationships with all around the Mediterranean and beyond, regardless of ethnicity or religion. Third they were master shipbuilders creating well designed and appointed sea going crafts to serve their purpose (see 3 in Appendix)

Thus prepared and equipped they, without competition or opposition, collected the merchandises of Asia at the termini of Silk Roads and sailed back to Venice which “became the [de facto] entrepôt between Europe and the Middle East and Asia”. From there the goods were carried to Medieval Europe where they fetched lucrative prices. Furthermore, on their way eastwards, Venetian ships carried European slaves to the Muslim world and beyond.

At the same time, Venetians, were ruthless when their interests were at stake. A case in point is the sacking of Constantinople in 1204. When the Byzantine emperor failed to pay back a debt he owed them; they persuaded Crusaders, on their way to fight Saladin and who happened to be camping outside the capital, to topple the Orthodox emperor and seat a Latin (Roman Catholic) on the throne. The Crusaders broke into Constantinople and wreaked havoc. As for the Venetians by looting everything of value in the city, and shipping it back home, they ensured the overdue debt was repaid, perhaps, many times over.

Nordic slave traders.

The iconic image of Vikings is that of big brutes sailing their longships from Scandinavia to northwest Europe for plunder. So vivid was this in the minds of those at the receiving end that a prayer in France in the 9th century went like this: “Save us , O Lord from the savage Norsemen who destroy our country...they take away... our young, virgin boys. We beg you to save us from this evil”.

But some of these Norsemen were eager to take part in the vibrant commercial activities they saw around them. Accordingly, they came down from their northern homes and ended their journey in the part of eastern Europe, encompassing today’s Ukraine, Russia, the Dead and the Caspian Seas (image). They, became known as ‘Rus’, the forebears of the Russians of today.

Their new home, between the two closed seas was rich in navigable rivers such as the Danube, Don, Dnieper, Volga and more. By modifying the design of their seagoing longships, they transported in them whatever they were peddling at the time. The patron they wanted to serve was the Muslim world, then at its apogee (from 800 and 1300 CE) and their brethren in Scandinavia. Clearly, they expected to make significant gains, more than enough to compensate for the arduously long journeys they had to take.

Next to dealing in Chinese silk, slave trafficking was equally rewarding. The Norsemen were merciless and without pity in their quest for European men and women for selling in Asia and the Muslim world where pretty young females, were very prized and, in consequence, commanded high prices. Even more. They sold, slaves, too, in their place of origin: Scandinavia.

The Rus were not the only ones to engage in the profitable slave trade.

Venetian traffickers, as stated above, played an active part, to the point of selling fellow ‘Italians’. Muslim traders, too, participated. They bought Europeans in markets set up in Marseilles, for example, for sale south and east. Further, slave markets in central Europe thrived. There, large numbers of captives of both sexes and different ethnicities expected to be trafficked to the near and far East and also to the Muslim Court in Cordoba, Spain, where they favored ethnic Slavs() of which, allegedly, there were 13,000 in 961 CE. Indeed, the Muslim world could not get enough of them. It was insatiable. At one time, for example, according to Frankopan, one Caliph and his wife owned 1,000 slaves each. And another owned 4,000.

Not surprisingly, many in Europe were outraged with the abduction of their coreligionists. None less than Pope Hadrian in 776 CE decried the sale of Christians “...to the unspeakable race of Saracens....We have never sunk to such a disgraceful act of selling fellow Christians....and God forbid that we should”. Never mind the Pope’s condemnation, however, the hard reality was that the income from the sale of their own people enabled Europeans to pay for the spices and luxuries of the east.

Coins of the Islamic world

The Islamic world paid for its imports of slaves and others, with silver dirhams, primarily (image). Archaeologists found such currency as far west as the British Isles. In the words of Frankopan: “That the currency had reached the backwaters that were the British Isles [then, of course] is an indication of just how far markets of the Islamic world had sprawled”.

Indeed, according to history professor Maya Schatzmiller, these coins were discovered in large quantities at locations along trade routes in “Russia, Sweden and the Baltic”. If anything, their presence there proves the intensity of commercial exchanges between the Muslims and medieval Europeans. In addition, coins were found in Central Asia, North Africa and evidently in the Middle East.

Historians and archaeologists have established that these silver coins were minted at different locations in the Islamic realm. Schatzmiller identifies them as “Morocco and Ifriqiya, Basra, Kufa and Baghdad in Iraq, to Rayy, Isfahan, and Sistan in Iran, and to Transoxiana, Balkh, Samarkand and Shash, as well as in Armenia”.

As for the precious metal, silver, it was mined at several location in the lands of the Muslims. Some mines were near minting facilities. Otherwise, for example, silver deposits in the Yemen supplied Iraqi minters. They yielded enough silver for the minting of “20,000 dirhams per week (about one million dirhams per year), during the 8th-10th centuries”.

THE EAST TAKES A BACK SEAT

By the mid 1400‘s western European traders began the take note of what was happening in their backyard. To start with, their populations had become addicted to the spices that made their unpalatable food taste better. Then, for the ones of means and least, they had become obsessed with the silk and other luxuries of China and the rest. Finally, they did not see why the Venetians should be the only ones reaping the huge benefits coming from their monopolistic supply of those desirables to Medieval Europe.

That awareness translated into finding new sea lanes to India, China and beyond. Christian Europe’s hostility to the Muslim Ottomans, who controlled the western termini of the Silk Road, especially after the fall of Constantinople in 1453, prevented emulation of the Venetian’s crisscrossing of the Mediterranean. Besides, traders were eager to deal directly with the suppliers in far off Asia and, therefore, cut off all the greedy middlemen between them and their customers.

Thus, what historians call the Age of Discovery, was ushered in. It defined that period of about 100 years between the mid-15th and the mid-16th centuries when Portugal and Spain undertook transoceanic crossings in search of alternative routes to the sources of the Asian goods and commodities that, fortuitously, led to the discoveries of new lands not hitherto suspected to exist.

Portugal and Spain take the lead.

The credit for initiating these feats goes to Prince Henrique of Portugal (1394-1460), commonly known as Henry the Navigator, although, he never left firm ground. He was nonetheless instrumental in financing and sponsoring the early sea voyages. First, his adventurers ventured west into the unknown. They discovered and colonized Madeira in 1420 and the Azores islands in 1427, respectively 1,000 and 1,600 kms from Lisbon in the Atlantic Ocean.

Next, they sailed south to and along the western shores of Africa, reaching Sierra Leone in 1460. According to historians, the Navigator was curious about the mysterious continent, its peoples, fauna and flora. He hoped to discover gold and other treasures to bring home to Portugal. As a Christian, he wanted to evangelize the populations of Africa including the Muslim ‘infidels’ among them. Also prominent on the Portuguese agenda was to find a sea route, to the sources of highly valued silk, spices and the rest, by sailing eastwardly from the black continent.

But a most ominous discovery the Portuguese made was that humans could be trafficked, taken far for from home and forced to work gratis, exactly like cattle. This finding was to have disastrous sequels for Africa and Africans and, conversely, an unexpected opportunity for enrichment of Europeans and Americans in later centuries.

One of those who learnt his seamanship on board Portuguese vessels while taking part in the voyages instigated by the Navigator, was the Genoese born Cristopher Columbus (1451-1506). He was convinced of finding the lands of silk and spices, by sailing west across the Atlantic Ocean. In Portugal, however, he failed to convince anyone who mattered of his project. He, then, moved next door to Spain. There he vigorously lobbied the ruling royal couple of Ferdinand (1452-1516) and Isabella (1451-1504). He, eventually, succeeded in gaining their sponsorship, and the backing of several investors who hoped for hefty profits upon Columbus return, loaded with the Asian goods and commodities. Thus, on the 3rd of August 1492 he set sail, with three ships from the Spanish port of Palos, westbound into the unknown.

Chapter illustration

By the following October he had discovered the Caribbean Islands. He believed he had reached China, and continued to claim so till he passed away. By then, to the contrary, many of his contemporaries disagreed and realized that Columbus’s China was in fact a new territory. The discovery of the New World of the Americas, which ensued was a fortuitous event with differing outcomes for the native peoples, for Europeans and for millions of Africans.

As already stated, the Portuguese were eager to find a new route to Asia. With Columbus failing to do so, by going west, they decided, rightly as it turned out, that by circumventing the southern tip of Africa, thence heading northeasterly they would hit upon India. In 1487, twenty-seven years after the Navigator’s death, his compatriots reached the southern tip of Africa. They did not, however, venture any further.

This was left to the nobleman, discoverer and seafarer Vasco da Gama (1460-1524). Having been put in charge of a maritime expedition to find the new route, he departed from Lisbon, with four ships on 8th July 1497. Sailing down the west coast of Africa he circumvented its tip, which he christened ‘Cape of Good Hope’, then took the direction mentioned above and reached Calicut (not to confuse with Calcutta), India in May 1498. “Europe had arrived the East”, in the words of BRIT. He returned to Lisbon in July 1499, two years after his departure. According to ‘History, from the day he left Lisbon, he had spent 300 days of that time on board ship at sea, covering an estimated total of nearly 39,000 kms. Of the 170 men who left home with him only 54 came back; most of the others had been lost to diseases. But he came back with “cinnamon, cloves, ginger, nutmeg and pepper” as well as other spices, and precious stones. In effect, da Gama’s trip had created a maritime Silk Road joining Lisbon to India and the Spice Islands, in today’s Indonesia, with trading stations established in Mozambique and Angola on the east and west coasts of Africa respectively.

Henceforth, thousands of tons of spices were reaching Europe. Rewards were substantial for the merchants and competition fierce between them. The Portuguese consolidated their position as providers of spices. They succeeded so much that “a few decades after da Gama expedition to India, a substantial part of the Portuguese state revenues came from the spice trade”. Expectedly, the success of the Portuguese spelled doom for Venice and its seafaring traders.

Simultaneously, as we shall see later, from the 1530’s, large quantities of gold and silver were reaching Europe from South America. They were melted and minted into coins which found their way to India, China and elsewhere in Asia as payments for the spices, silk and other luxuries. The Indians for their part spent a great deal of that silver coinage on the purchase of thousands of horses from breeders in Central Asia at inflated prices and corresponding exorbitant profits for the latter. This did not go unnoticed by the Portuguese, now well established in that part of the world. They entered the horse trading to the point of modifying the design of their ships to be able to transport the animals.

But, Indians did more that purchase mounts. Delhi was transformed into a booming commercial center. They paid for new infrastructure projects and built magnificent monuments, epitomized by the world-famous Taj Mahal mausoleum dating from the 1630’s. It was, in the words of Frankopan: “the most famous monument testifying to the immense wealth that resulted from money flowing in from Europe”.

Portugal and the Portuguese enrichment was not solely from trading in spices, exotic material and horses. Another source of wealth was slave trading. As we have already seen, the Portuguese, ahead of any other European country, first reached the western shores of Africa in the early 15th century. They soon learnt of the prevalent African practice of enslaving those of different tribes and ethnicities. The Portuguese saw an opportunity for a lucrative undertaking and eagerly partook in it. Black captives ended up either as slave workers in the plantations of Madeira and the Azores, or as domestic servants in the homes of the well off in Portugal. According to a Portuguese chronicler, these residences became “full to overflowing of male and female slaves”.

With the peopling of the Americas, in the wake of Christopher Columbus trips (there were, altogether, 4 such journeys between 1492 and 1504), demand for African slaves became insatiable in the New World, overwhelmingly as unpaid agricultural workers in plantations producing cotton, sugar tobacco and more.

In consequence, from early 16th century, trading of Africans went through the roof. Neil A. Frankel, the founder of www.slaverysite.com, has estimated that the total number of transatlantic crossings, till abolition of slave trading early in the 19th century, to have totaled 54,200. The Portuguese dominated them for some decades. Their share of this total coming to 30,000. With time their “hearts and minds had been hardened” to the plight of the Africans brutally captured, kept in stockades, then loaded on waiting ships, crammed like sardines in tin cans. Captains were under orders to squeeze in as many bodies as possible, in the tight confines of ships, to maximize profits.

In 1560 the English joined in with the blessing of queen Elizabeth I (reigned 1558- 1603), eager for her sailors “ to help generate healthy profits shipping men across the Atlantic”. They achieved 12,000 trips. As for the remaining voyages, they were primarily shared between the French and the Spanish. Overall in that period of about 400 years, some 13,000,000 Africans made the journey, excluding of course, those who perished en route from the appalling treatment and travel conditions.

Some Africans were outraged. The king of the Kongo (today’s Angola and the Democratic Republic of the Congo), for one, repeatedly sent complaints to the king of Portugal about the abduction and “branding with hot irons” of his subjects some of whom belonged to nobility. In his reply, finally, the Portuguese monarch insensitively told his African counterpart that his land is vast and the few taken cannot make a difference. Besides he reminded him of the payments (hereinafter) sent to him in from Europe as compensation for those uprooted.

Historically this trafficking of Africans became known as the ‘triangular slave trade’ because it consisted of a three-leg round trip. On the first, vessels departed from Europe in the direction of the western Africa, loaded with “firearms, alcohol, cotton goods, metal trinkets and beads” much in demand by local chiefs and others involved in the provision of men and women. With payments thus received, future slaves would be taken on board ships for the long journey across the Atlantic to their new homes in the Americas. This was the second leg called: the middle passage. Once there ship captains would sell their human cargo to the highest bidders. Thereafter, the third leg consisted of loading-up with cotton, sugar, tobacco and other commodities for the sailing back home to Europe, where the American merchandise was sold in the markets of London, Lisbon and elsewhere on the continent, with handsome profits, naturally.

Thus, every leg of this ‘triangular slave trade’ was profitable to the ship captains, shipping companies and owners. Europeans who made money from it, subsequently set up banks, insurance companies and invested in emerging industries, some of which are still thriving today.

Spain, for its part, did extremely well in the New World not long after Columbus last voyage. Indeed, between 1519 and 1532 its conquistadors, epitomized by Hernan Cortes (1485-1547) and Francesco Pizzaro (1478-1541), decimated the indigenous peoples, claiming their lands for the Spanish Crown, looting the gold and silver assembled over generations of natives, and exploiting mines existing or new. Soon the Spaniards were in need of slaves to work the said mines and in the sugar plantations etc. For this they contracted the Portuguese, well versed, in this business, as we have seen.

The outcome, according to Frankopan, was that “scarcely imaginable quantities of silver, gold, precious stones and others” began to reach Spanish shores, loaded on an unending traffic of eastward bound ships from the Americas. This bounty transformed Spain from a marginal European power to one to be reckoned with. Spaniards, at least those benefitting from this windfall, became euphoric. To some the discovery of the of the new land and its treasures was nothing short of being “the greatest event since the Creation”. Others interpreted the finds to the will of God who guided the Spanish to the long-hidden treasures of Central and South America.

As was the case with the king of the Kongo, several Europeans, too, were worried about the atrocious treatment of Africans and the greed driven frenzy to extract riches. To them, both occurrences were un-Christian. Surely, they wrote and declared, the purpose of colonization was to bring Christ and the Catholic Church into the hearts and minds of the natives. They, obviously, meant in both Africa and the Americas.

The English/British () and the Dutch follow.

The success and prosperity achieved by the Iberians came as a nasty wake up kick to two north European countries: the Dutch Republic (present day Netherlands) and England. They badly needed to emulate them if not exceed their achievements and wealth.

The Dutch started their preparations for the tasks ahead by building well suited merchant ships: the ‘fluyts’ (image). Secondly, they were master makers of maps and charts to guide the merchantmen to their destination. To draw them, as accurately as possible, they collected every available information. Thirdly Dutch merchants took the trouble to learn enough of the languages of those they were planning to do business with.

To optimize the benefits of international trade, the Dutch government decided to form a monopolistic company for exclusively handling all Dutch trade in Asia. To do so effectively, it was given the authority, as worded by HWN “to build forts, establish colonies, mint coins, and maintain a navy and army”, for use when and where necessary in its judgement. It could, also negotiate and enter into whatever alliances, it deemed necessary, in the interest of rewarding commerce. In short it was the embodiment of the Dutch state in the East, unequivocally symbolized by the flag adopted, shown below, and by the requirement that Company officials “take an oath of loyalty to the Dutch government”.

Thus, the ‘Vereenigde Oostindische Compagnie’ (English: ‘East Indies Company’), abbreviated to ‘VOC’ was born in 1602. Its geographic zone of operation was southeast Asia and more specifically in the ‘Spice Islands’, so named for obvious reasons. The Company owners were a large body of Dutch investors and traders. In other words, the Company took upon itself the cumulative tasks of less efficient individual traders and eliminated the possibly ruinous competition among them.

Chapter illustration

The Dutch were not above using military means to colonize the domains they wanted. They not only fought local kings and chiefs but also European rivals if they opposed their progress to lucrative commerce. In order to acquire the ‘Spice Islands’, for instance, they threw out the Portuguese community there, and when the VOC’s English counterpart, the ‘East India Company’ (hereinafter), tried to dominate the same islands in 1623, it defeated it and massacred a number of English traders.

Among the spices the Dutch traded , they paid special attention to cloves to such an extent that they deliberately limited its production on the islands in order to keep its price high on the European markets.

Born in 1602, the VOC died almost 200 years later in 1799. In its heyday, it was the most valuable company ever. It owned, among others, the largest merchant fleet between Asia and Europe. Superfluous to add that it made its shareholders and principals wealthy indeed. The VOC significantly contributed to what is referred to as ‘The Dutch Golden Age’ during which universities were established and the arts and architecture flourished.

The English, for their part, tried hard to find other routes to the goods of Asia, than by circumnavigating the tip of Africa as the Portuguese were doing. They decided to try to reach Asia by the far north. Ships sailing from England would head towards Canada or, more precisely, aim at the gap between Siberia and Alaska known as the Bering Strait. Having crossed it, two alternatives presented themselves. Either the Northeastern route (image right), via the Arctic Ocean paralleling the Russian shore line to its end then down to India, China and the rest. Or, alternately the Northwestern passage (image left) in the Pacific Ocean between the American and Asian continents to the desired destinations. Both alternatives failed miserably, primarily because of the unforgiving weather up there. In one instance a ship became trapped by ice floes, while its entire crew froze to death. Ultimately the English had no choice but to follow the Portuguese way.

Chapter illustration

Responding to the demand of a group of English business people queen Elizabeth I on the last day of 1600 authorized the formation of a monopolistic “Company of Merchants trading into the East Indies”. Its geographic area of operation was to be “all lands east of the Cape of Good Hope”. It was christened the ‘East Indies Company’ or ‘EIC’. Similarly to its Dutch counterpart, it very much represented the English realm, as its flag shown here makes it clear. Further, again like the VOc, its royal charter enabled it to have its own armed forces, mint coins, negotiate agreements, form alliances, and more.

Chapter illustration

But despite its allocated geographic zone of operation, it chose to limit itself to the Indian Subcontinent on account, as we have seen, of the stiff opposition from the Dutch to its implantation in the Spice Islands. In India, on the other hand, it ended the Portuguese presence there in 1612. This action was welcomed by India’s rulers at the time , the Muslim Mughal dynasty (1527-1857) of Turkic-Mongol’ origin.

Accordingly, and thanks to the intervention of the king of England, on its behalf, the Company was granted, by the Mughal emperor, exclusive rights to trade in certain areas of the subcontinent. In return, the English undertook to provide the emperor with “goods and rarities from the European market”. With this agreement concluded, the Company proceeded to “trade in cotton and silk piece goods(), indigo(), and saltpetre (), with spices from South India”. By the early 1700’s, however, not content to limit itself to trading in these items, and confident in its privileged position and in its military muscle, the EIC began to meddle in Indian politics. Fatefully, in 1757, political and military circumstances arose such that the Company found itself in control of the province of Bengal, with a population of 30 million, under the governorship of Robert Clive (1725- 1774) EIC’s military commander.

More crucial and humiliating to Indians was the ceding of the Mughal rulers to the Company the all-important function of tax and revenue collection from peasant/farmers and other Indian citizens. This disgraceful relinquishment of authority was in force not only in Bengal but equally in two other Indian states with an overall area of approximately 377,000 sq.kms or nearly three times the land area of England.

In other words, the tasks which had been undertaken, for a couple of centuries or so, by Mughal appointed officials was hitherto “subcontracted to a powerful multinational corporation – whose revenue-collecting operations were protected by its own private army” as stated by historian/author William Dalrymple (DOB: 1965). Worse, EIC’s collectors were instructed to maximize their assessment of amounts due the Company. As concisely put by the historian “[w]ith no stake in the just governance of the region, or its long-term wellbeing, the company’s rule quickly turned into the straightforward pillage of Bengal, and the rapid transfer westwards of its wealth”.

From there onwards there was no stopping of the Company, which kept on acquiring real estate. Eventually it had taken over a good chunk of the Subcontinent. In 1803, Delhi the capital of the Mughal Empire, fell to the EIC which by then mustered an army of 260,000 locally recruited soldiers, “twice the size of the British army... and marshalled more firepower than any nation state in Asia”.

Two shameful and hard-hearted episodes in the history of the EIC are worth looking at. The first is the devastating famine of 1769-1773 in the Bengal, under its rule, which resulted in the death of a third of the Bengali population of 30 million from starvation or related diseases. Although the calamity was, initially, caused by weather phenomena which had nothing to do with the EIC; the latter did, nonetheless, make it worse by not letting up on its collections of taxes and rents from peasants/farmers and by continuing to force the growing of high value cash crops such as indigo and opium poppies, for export purposes. Otherwise, had farmers been allowed to grow grain instead, it would have alleviated suffering in times of food scarcity like the present one.

According to Frankopan “the situation was entirely avoidable”. He believed that the calamity was largely due to the callousness of Britons concerned only by their own interests, no matter the price paid by others. Indeed, when it was censured by some critics back home for its inhuman and amoral attitude to the crisis, the Company’s shameless response was that its “priorities had been to protect the interests of shareholders [ in Britain] not those of the local population”.

The second despicable occurrence in the life of the EIC was its dealing in narcotics, again for the benefits of filling its coffers. Opium, as already said, was a valuable cash crop grown in India. The EIC used it in exchange of silk, porcelain and tea from China. Frankopan labelled this barter: “addiction to luxury goods in the west” at the price of “rising addiction to drugs in China”. Let’s add here, for completeness sake, that when Chinese authorities’ resistance to this state of affairs stiffened, Britain started the Opium war of 1838-1842, with China. The British won and in consequence secured even more trading concessions from their defeated opponents.

Service with the EIC in India was not for the weak and faint hearted. The heat and disease took their toll, and many were sent back to Europe as unfit for duty. But for those who endured, they could look forward to a bright and rewarding future. As for those who reached the top rungs of the ladder, there were opportunities for enrichment, through dishonest means, beyond their wildest dream. One example in Frankopan’s book is the account of one Elihu Yale, of English descent, born in 1649 in Massachusetts. He returned to England as a child and subsequently joined the EIC as a junior clerk. He rose in rank to end up as the governor of the Company established town of Madras. He was, thereafter, repatriated because of his flagrant venality and avarice. He reportedly sailed back home “with five tons of spices, large quantities of diamonds and innumerable precious objects”. Once safely back, however, he spent some his wealth on worthy causes. Notably, he donated generously to the Collegiate School of Connecticut which gratefully renamed itself: Yale University.

Even so, back in Britain, the likes of Yale, were lampooned as the nouveaux riches who spent their monies on luxuries and on tutors to learn the right attitudes and etiquette in order to mingle with the aristocracy. Worse they paid their way to get elected to Parliament. From this perspective, the statesman and philosopher Edmund Burke (1729-1797) stated that those former officers of the EIC “...were destroying society-by throwing their wealth around, becoming MP’ s and marrying the daughters of the gentry”.

As for Dalrymple, he explains that today’s very-English term: ‘loot’ meaning plunder originated in India and entered the English language in the 18th century during the heyday of the EIC. Epitomizing this, is an old mansion in Wales which rooms contain “more [Indian] artefacts....than the National Museum in Delhi”. All plundered, Dalrymple asserts, by the EIC.

By 1858 the East India Company had become so disreputable that it was replaced in India by the British Crown, beginning an era of colonization and imperialism that was to last 90 years.

APPENDIX

Tyrian purple was extracted by the Phoenicians, as far back as 1600 BCE, from seashells (image) which proliferated in the coastal waters of Tyre and Sidon. More than ten thousand of these mollusks were needed for a very modest quantity of the liquid dye.

Following catching them in nets, the shell fish were spread in the sun for drying before being crushed to extract the valuable liquid from their entrails; a smelly, nauseating process. Indeed, an article in BBC Cultural on the topic is headed “The disgusting origins of the colour purple”.

Yet,despite it all, it was the color of royalty for the simple reason that it did not fade like others made with the dyes of those days. As such it commanded sky-high prices.

2- Silk Roads camels

They were the central Asian variety, namely: the two humped Bactrian camels (image). They were equally at ease crossing deserts, steppes and high mountains. They measure 1.8 m from ground to tip of hump and weigh nearly 500 kgs and could carry 275 kgs. Bactrian camels could go for days without water and weeks without food. All their nutritional needs are stored as fat in their humps. Curiously, when the latter is empty, say, at the end of a long crossing, they droop. Given the opportunity a thirsty camel drinks nearly 100 liters in one go.

More. Not only could they endure the harshest climatic conditions but, also warn caravanners, through their ‘body language’ of incoming sandstorms. The animals themselves are innately equipped for these eventualities with extra transparent eye lids, which they close to protect their eyes, as well as nostrils which narrow to lessen the amount of sand inhaled. And yet, despite it all, trade roads of the past, were often strewn with camel carcasses and skeletons.

3-Shipping prowess of the Venetians

This amazing ability is illustrated by their agreement to provide enough shipping to transport the entire fourth Crusade, in 1201. The contingent consisted of 4500 knights and at least an equal no of horses. There were also 9,000 attendants and 20,000 troops. The Venetians not only provided the transport ships but also 50 galleys (ships for war), (see image) as escort. Quite remarkable.

Part X: Empires and Legacies

All Great Powers Have Fallen

ALL GREAT POWERS HAVE FALLEN IS AMERICA THE EXCEPTION?

Abandoned factory

The Author. JUNE, 2024

REFERENCES

-The part of this narrative headed “Corporate Totalitarianism” is almost exclusively based on the 2018 book ‘America: The Farewell Tour’ by Chris Hedges. All quotes in italic in its text are extracted from the book, unless otherwise indicated.

Others. -Britannica. How did the Han dynasty fall? -Foreign Affairs magazine. Review of 2023 ‘Why Empires Fall…’ -History.com. Eight reasons why Rome fell. -Khan Academy. Demise of empires & Fall of the Han dynasty. -LiveScience. Why did Rome fall? -The Author. From egalitarianism to kleptocracy. -ThoughtCo. The Collapse of the Han dynasty in China. -TimeMaps. The Han dynasty of ancient China. -Wikipedia. Fall of the Western Roman Empire. -World History Encycl. Fall of the Western Roman Empire. -Yale University press. Review of 2023 ‘Why Empires Fall…’

INTRODUCTION

The book mentioned under References by Chris Hedges- (journalist, war correspondent and author)- is a vitriolic attack of the current American socio-economic and political models of civilization which have become poisoned by greed, self- interest, and unaccountability of its moneyed elites and the ruling classes they dominate. He is convinced that, unless serious changes are made to correct these aberrations, presently diseased America, sooner or later will follow, into the abyss of oblivion, the fate other great powers of the past.

He writes that, throughout the millennia of human history, all once successful empires, “through acts of colossal stupidity” unfailingly, start a slow-(lasting a couple of centuries)- or a fast-(of only a few decades)-decline from their apogee to eventual death. During these periods of agony, incompetent, unethical persons rise to the leadership, with a demagogic and xenophobic language and promises to bring back the greatness of days bygone.

Chris Hedges in not the only one. While researching the subject matter, my attention was drawn to a 2023 book titled ‘Why Empires Fall: Rome, America, and the Future of the West’ written jointly by historian Peter Heather and political economist John Rapley. According to the comments by Yale University Press, Foreign Affairs magazine and others the authors draw parallels between the decline and fall of the Roman Empire of the West(27 BCE to 476 CE) and of the Chinese Han dynasty (202BCE-202CE) and the current political, financial and social problems in the Western world.

They maintain, that following three centuries of unchallenged prosperity, power and dominance, the dawn of the new century showed cracks in the facades of America and the countries of Western Europe. As they see it “economic globalization, the growth of new regional powers, immigration, and the rise of China, foreshadow a similar relative decline of the modern West…”

THEY WENT THE WAY OF THE DODO

The Roman empire was one of the greatest in human history and left behind a huge legacy in a variety of fields in the western world and elsewhere. At its apogee in 117 CE, it stretched from Mesopotamia to the Atlantic Ocean, east to west and from the British Isles to North Africa, north to south. In fact the Mediterranean was nicknamed the ‘Roman Lake’.

At that time how did Rome administer and control the immense realm. It was done by relying on the local elites who were pampered and given privileges, by respecting local religions, customs and traditions and with the help of the formidable legions who were able to move quickly thanks to the extensive road networks Rome built.

Nevertheless, it was hard to keep the empire together. So much so that emperor Diocletian who ruled from 284–305 CE decided it was better that two emperors, one in the East and another in the West, share the burden of governing. Thus were laid the foundations for the Roman Empire of the west administered from Rome and the one that would be known as the Byzantine Empire in the east, with Constantinople as its capital. It became a separate empire, independent of Rome, towards the end of the 300’s CE. And while the first would collapse shortly thereafter in 476 CE, Byzantium endured for another 1,000 years.

But the Empire had started its slide to oblivion a century or so earlier. Indeed, historians commonly agree that 180 CE , during the reign of emperor Commodus, was the turning year. According to Britannica “His [Commodus’s] brutal misrule precipitated civil strife that ended 84 years of stability and prosperity within the empire”. The death throes of Rome, thus lasted well over two centuries, as it was finally buried in 476CE.

What was happening in the meantime?

Let us first consider the fate of, hereinbefore. emperor Commodus. He was assassinated by “a bloated military and corrupt oligarchy”, writes author Hedges. He was succeeded by no less than five emperors in 193 alone; all of the choosing of his murderers, who included the Praetorian Guard. The latter was an elite armed unit charged with the protection of the emperor. Revealingly, this military group became so blatant that on one occasion it auctioned the emperorship.

This set the pattern for the violent unseating of rulers and enthroning of successors. So much so that according to history.com “more than 20 men took the throne in the span of only 75 years, usually after the murder of their predecessor”.

As for Roman senators-(appointed with legislative and finance administration duties)-, they lost interest in the affairs of state to concentrate on enriching themselves and their families at the expense of the other classes of society. Roman historian Ammianus Marcellinus (330-395 CE) commented that “[hitherto] Rome was saved by her austerity, by solidarity between rich and poor, by contempt for death; now she is undone by her luxury and greed”.

Roman economy traditionally depended on slaves who came from conquered regions. But with borders shrinking, this manpower dried up. New taxes were raised but the revenues achieved were not sufficient as, among others, the rich made themselves invisible and inaccessible to tax collectors, leaving the lower classes to shoulder the burden.

Therefore, with civil wars raging in the Empire and borders assaulted, shortage of funds made it difficult to muster the quantity and quality of forces needed to defend Empire. This being the case Rome proceeded with the recruitment of unreliable foreign mercenaries as we shall see.

‘Barbarians’ were the Germanic peoples residing for many centuries at various locations in Europe. As the Roman empire grew and expanded, clashes between them ensued. But with the arrival in Europe, from Asia, of Attila the Hun(ruled from 434 to 453 CE), and his hordes, Barbarians on the run from them flooded into areas under the control of the Empire.

Still, with time the immigrants adopted the habits and customs of Roman society but never to the extent of forgetting their origin. They were even recruited and trained within the Roman military, learning its tactics and practices, but their loyalty was elsewhere. In 476 they applied them to invade the capital Rome, depose the sitting emperor, and end the Western Roman Empire.

In the final analysis, writes historian Peter Heather, the Roman Empire fell “…By virtue of its unbounded [without limit] aggression, Roman imperialism was responsible for its own destruction” .

The Han dynasty ruled for nearly four centuries. It was so successful and consequential that the citizens of the People's Republic of China refer to themselves as Han people. At its peak the extent of its lands and size of population made it comparable to the great empires of the past.

In the words of ‘World History Encyclopedia’ the period of the Han Dynasty is “often regarded by scholars ……as the golden era of Chinese culture…”. The Han era saw the inventions of paper and porcelain. The dynasty brought about the genesis of the historically momentous trade routes known as the Silk Road. On a different level, but equally if not more important, was the adoption of meritocracy in the ranks of civil servants. From then on, the bureaucracy was staffed by educated professionals, irrespective of background and financial standing.

A Han emperor was a despot; all depended on his will. He was also the spiritual guide on whose “ethics, and morals” depended the wellbeing of the empire. His proper conduct helped mitigate the severity of “earthquakes, floods, droughts, epidemics, and swarms of locusts”.

But, there were weaknesses in the imperial household which by 160 CE began to get out of hand and led to the demise of the dynasty some 6 decades later.

To begin with, was the status of the empress dowager, the mother of the successor on the throne, and the first-among-equals between the wives of the emperor. Upon becoming a widow the dowager ruled in the name of her son, particularly if he was not yet of age.

More critically, she proceeded to promote members of her family and clan who, with time, became rich and influential in the affairs of the empire. This, understandably, resulted in intrigues and feuds that at times turned bloody, within and without the walls of the palace. More. It is, easy to see that once the son of the current empress dowager married, one of his wives would in due time take her place and, in turn, favour the members of her own family. Thus, it seemed logical to the incumbent beneficiaries to ensure that the child emperor never attained adulthood. Indeed, the last days of the dynasty saw child emperors succeeding one another.

Even palace eunuchs, those castrated men employed in the harems, found the temerity to compete for places in the top echelons of the Empire and the army, competition that more often than not gave rise to massacres between the contesting parties.

This chaos ushered in the twilight of the dynasty. Appointments to the bureaucracy no longer followed competence and knowledge. Former civil servants were replaced by ignorant and venal members of rich and influential families. Further, they exempted themselves from paying taxes leaving the burden on the peasants. But as inequality set in, even the latter refrained from doing so. They ran away from their villages at the first sign of an approaching tax collector.

And whereas in the earlier days the emperor and his government were able to mitigate the effects of natural disasters and keep at bay the numerous hostile tribes around the Empire’s borders, thenceforth as state coffers ran dry, they could no longer act. It did not help that the wealthy classes, selfishly, withdrew behind walls and armed security and provincial governors and generals declared themselves independent from the imperial government. Consequently, as natural disasters, epidemics, peasant revolts and incursions by nomadic tribes recurred, there was no central power to deal with them. By 202 CE, the Han empire was no more.

“CORPORATE TOTALITARIANISM”

Until the 1960’s, with a flourishing industry, whole towns emerged around major industrial facilities. They had schools, hospitals, places of worships and more. Practically all working age populations, from generation to generation, were employed by names like ExxonMobil, General Motors, IBM, PepsiCo General Electric together with their affiliates and suppliers etc. They paid good wages and other benefits and provided several amenities. Being employed by them gave people pride, dignity and a feeling of belonging to close-knit communities.

But from the 1970’s, Corporate America-(captains of industry, bankers and financiers, entrepreneurs, the military and their allies/servants in the White House and government departments)- made its appearance. It promoted privatization on a grand scale with lessening of governments roles in public matters such as education, healthcare and other vital social services.

Then in the 1980’s, it chanted the glories of globalization and of the free-market -(internationalization of business, trade and finance in a borderless world). It promised that they would bring prosperity world over for all regardless of classes, races, religions etc. This ‘global marketplace’ would bring about “a peaceful, prosperous community of nations”.

But as manufacturing was taken from America and the West to places in Asia where production is infinitely cheaper, and profits correspondingly larger, it turned out that the promised benefits from globalization were nothing but a great lie. As deindustrialization proceeded, it left in its wake broken communities suffering the ills of unemployment, while at the same time corporations and their shareholders enjoyed records earnings.

The stresses of no regular income, of the impossibility of advancement and education, of absence of assistance and support for the unemployed and his/her family have taken away their dignity and self-esteem, substituting “loneliness, frustration, anger, and a feeling of worthlessness”. No wonder then the ‘American Dream’ of attaining what one wishes for through work etc. died in those people.

Closing manufacturing facilities has left behind impoverished former factory towns and whole neighbourhoods in larger ones like Detroit and Indianapolis. Author Hedges has visited a few of these. He found that what were once vibrant factories, have turned into shells of concrete and masonry with no doors and windows, broken machinery and littered floors . As for the towns themselves, he found “empty storefronts, shuttered movie theaters, potholed streets…..and vacant lots”. And the population of one in particular “has declined from 140,000 to 77,000 over the past eight decades”.

A case in point is UTC Climate, Controls & Security, a corporation which once had a factory, in Indianapolis. It made air conditioning and ventilation equipment under the name Carrier. It employed more than 1,000 workers at $20 per hour plus benefits-(social security, pensions, paid vacations etc.).

Early in 2016 Carrier announced it was relocating to Mexico where workers were paid $3 an hour with no benefits. The company had calculated that the move would add $65 million a year to the earnings of its shareholders.

In order to save their jobs, the plant workers offered $22 million per year in concessions. But to no avail. Company management responded that in order to keep the plant in Indianapolis workers needed to accept a $5 an hour with no other benefits.

No one who mattered cared. Except Donald Trump in the middle of his presidential campaign. He saw there an opportunity of gaining votes and proceeded with a public statement that “If I were in office right now Carrier would not be leaving [Indianapolis]”. Later, in December 2016,after he was elected, he let it be known that he had negotiated with Carrier the saving of the 1,000 or so jobs.

In the words of a spokesman for the laid off employees, that “was an out-and-out lie…[and] a corporation like UTC [with] record breaking profits…don’t care about their employees, their families, the communities etc…It’s corporate greed”.

Incidentally, Carrier parent company UTC, was later awarded, during the Trump presidency, a military contract valued at $6 billion.

This lamentable situation of the unemployed, has aggravated the curse of drug addiction mostly among young people “…who are attempting to flee from pain, despair and dislocation”. The result is that there are more deaths from addiction than from heart disease, cancer, suicide or traffic accidents. As of 2018, in America, there are four times more deaths from overdoses compared to 1999.

Let us look at the opioid epidemic starting in the late 1990’s. An opioid is a painkiller containing opium. The tablet is meant to be swallowed whole with water. But if the pill is ground then sniffed or injected it becomes a lethal addictive drug. For this reason, the medicine could not be bought without a medical prescription. For this reason, too, there was no shortage of drug users wanting it. Finally, for this reason, unscrupulous, get-rich-quick doctors wrote out prescriptions right left and center charging $ 200 to 250 for each. Needless to say that addiction and deaths from it skyrocketed. Equally needless to say that the pharmaceutical corporations making the opioids saw their earnings soar.

Some members of Congress were alarmed enough to co-write denouncing “the greed and recklessness of one company and its partners [which] helped spark a public health crisis in the United States that will take generations to fully repair”.

Deindustrialization is not unique to North America it was being repeated in other rich countries. So much so that in a 1981 encyclical-(letter addressed to all in the Catholic Church)-, Pope John Paul II, chimed in. He wrote that unlike capitalist dogma a worker is not a commodity to be disposed of at will. To the contrary, work is a necessity involving more than living wages. It is “essential to human dignity and self- fulfillment”. And he wrote forcefully against unemployment, unreasonably low wages and automation. He maintained that all these “destroy self-esteem, personal satisfaction, creativity and responsibility”.

Corporate America does not accepted responsibility for any of this. Instead, they blame it all on immigrants taking away jobs, and malicious foreigners, who envy the West its values and who can only be defeated by force-(understand by this: the wars in Afghanistan, Iraq and against terror). This, in the words of author Hedges is “corporate totalitarianism”, whose modus operandi is to always take more no matter how much it costs in social injustice, infrastructure damage and environmental degradation.

The rhetoric emanating from these actors, has yielded adherents among the white supremacists, whom they also assist financially. It may be useful recall that this fringe of Americans are convinced that the white race is superior to all others and should be in control. They have helped to lift up to positions of power and influence “… the morally degenerate …deceitful… manipulative, and violent” people. Author Hedges call them the ‘idiots’ who “take over in the final days of crumbling civilization’. Idiot-in-Chief, Donald Trump is a master of the “permanent lie” which goes against reality and facts. To him they are ‘fake news.

They have allied themselves with the Christian right or Evangelicals. In their mega-(very large)-churches, and media tools etc., they preach a divisive and extremist message. Like Trump they wallow in the permanent lie and fake news. They believe the conspiracy theory that they are “under attack by satanic forces of secular humanism” and are convinced that “Barack Obama is a Muslim”.

Evangelicals want to transform the USA into a Christian nation guided by the Ten Commandments. They also want to ban the teaching of Darwin’s Theory of Evolution in schools in favour of Creationism. “People they consider social deviants,[include] homosexuals, immigrants…Jews , Muslims, criminals and Christians who do not embrace [their] perverted… interpretation of the Bible… [all of them are to] be silenced, imprisoned or killed”. More. They want to resume the crusades against Muslim countries.

There are approximately 100million White working class Americans whose imposed destitution has pushed into the arms of Evangelicalism. They have swallowed the unholy lie that the world-(not corporate totalitarianism )- has ruined them financially and deprived them of all that gave them dignity and respect. But “God will intervene in their lives to…protect them. [He] has called them to carry out his holy mission in the world and to be rich, powerful and happy”.

H0w could Evangelical leaders stomach an irreligious and amoral person like Trump, a billionaire who admires despots, made his money by devious ways and is an adulterer? In truth, the personal lives and behaviour of the Evangelical big shots, despite their zeal and bigotry, resemble those of Trump to a great degree. Within their congregations they are despotic and tolerate no dissent. They enrich themselves with the contributions of their followers to avail themselves of extravagant lifestyles, that include “mansions, private jets, limousines, retinues of bodyguards, personal assistants and servants, shopping sprees, lavish vacations, and sexual escapades that rival those carried out by Trump”. In other words their apparent religiousness is nothing but a whitewash for the consumption of their gullible followers.

CONCLUSION

Immutable in the US Constitution are liberty-(making choices with no constraints or interference)-, freedom-(thinking and acting without compulsion or coercion)- and equality. Author Hedges is convinced that the “capitalist elites have used propaganda, money and the marginalizing of their critics” to render all three meaningless and without substance except as the freedom and liberty “of corporations and the rich to exploit and pillage without government interference…”.

In the Introduction we have recounted the assassination of inept Roman emperor Commodus and what followed. Author Hedges has transposed the event to present day America. Commodus becomes ‘Idiot’ Trump. As to the cabal that got rid of him it now becomes the corporate types and the military. They may decide to let go of Trump the day his “ ineptitude and imbecility” becomes too much even for them. But nothing will change. They will continue to milk a submissive America and spend on grandiose projects of interest to them, while defunding programs of general usefulness. This is the behaviour of “terminally ill civilizations”.

Colonialism and British Ruled India

COLONIALISM & BRITISH RULED INDIA

The Author. JULY, 2024

OVERVIEW

Colonialism is the subjugation and political control of lands and their peoples for either settling and/or exploitation of resources by the subjugator and for his exclusive benefit. European countries, such as Great Britain, France, the Netherlands, Germany, Spain, Italy and Portugal have, from the late 1400’s, had a go at colonialism. Among them, the most successful, bar none, has been Great Britain on whose colonial empire, as late as the first quarter of the 20th century, ‘the sun never sets’.

Settler colonialism means the expulsion of the indigenous owners from the lands desired. They can also be exterminated by violent means or by European viruses to which they have no immunity. Settler colonialism created the countries of the New World, Australia, New Zealand, South Africa, Israel and others.

Exploitation colonialism is the forceful plundering and pillage pure and simple of the assets and resources of the lands occupied and the transfer of all that loot out for the exclusive use of the invader. Typically, colonialists had no stake in the well-being of the local people. Thus, whatever they undertook were of value, primarily, to the them. Take, for example, the railway networks built in the colonies. They first and foremost served two purposes; the first being the fast and efficient transport of resources to ports for export to home countries. And second, railways enabled the quick transfer of troops to trouble areas for quelling of risings etc.

The coming of the ‘Industrial Revolution’ in the late eighteenth century and the technological progress that followed made colonialism more rewarding, thanks to the arrival of the telegraph, steam driven shipping and the railways. Colonialist, too, became more potent with, improved artillery, better explosives and the machine gun perfected in the 1880.

All this, of course, flew in the face of decency, fairness and justice. But colonialists, with the help of pseudo-science-(see my narrative ‘Black and White’)- propagated the belief that those other peoples were not much better than savages. They needed Europeans to show them the path to civilization and Christianism.

Thus “It became a moral justification to lift the world up to [European] standards by bringing Christianity and [European] culture”. In the words of Jules Ferry (1832-1893), the French colonialist and statesman, “The higher races have a right over the lower races, they have a duty to civilize the inferior”.

To the famous Irish playwright George Bernard Shaw (1856-1950), the British never admit to selfish reasons for establishing a colony. In his words, their desire stems from “a burning conviction that it is [their] moral and religious duty to conquer those who possess the thing [they] want”.

Cecil Rhodes (1853-1902) the British founder of Rhodesia -(now Zimbabwe)- in southern Africa did not beat about the bush. He strongly believed in the importance of establishing colonies and using their resources for the benefit of the unemployed in Britain. He, further, advocated that the duty of politicians was to “acquire lands to settle the surplus population [of Britain] and create markets for the goods of British factories”.

PRE-BRITISH INDIA

India in the 1600’s and early 1700’s was an empire ruled by the Mughals, a Turkic-Mongol Muslim dynasty with ancestral ties stretching back to Genghis Khan. At that time too, within India’s landmass were several hundred princely states ruled by their own ‘rajas’-(princes)- under the suzerainty of the Moghul emperor.

But the Mughal Empire began to disintegrate in 1739 under the attacks of a Persian king, Nadir Shah. The assaults were so violent and brutal and the looting so extensive that upon his return to Persia, the king eliminated taxes for the following three years. Worse. The Mughals never recovered though they remained the nominal rulers till 1857.

The people of India adhered-(and still do)- to three main religions: Hinduism, Islam and Sikhism. But according to author Tharoor Hindus and Muslims cohabited, shared many customs and traditions. They helped each other on project of interest to one exclusively and vice versa. More. They fought side by side for either Muslim or Hindu rulers against a common enemy. They even jointly celebrated religious festivities of either denomination. In other words, they lived in harmony.

In my narrative ‘Religions of Asia’, I have explained that Hinduism recognizes four societal castes. On top are the ‘Brahmins’ or the learned classes. Below them are the warriors followed by traders and farmers castes. Finally, is the caste of labourers and domestic servants. Still, the differences in privileges and duties between them, did not, in pre-British centuries, translate in prejudices and ill-will.

Historically, India has relied and continues to rely on the seasonal Monsoon rains to feed its people. Clearly, then, any disruptions or irregularities in this climatic phenomenon can result in severe food shortages at times, approaching famines. But in pre-British days, -(and after independence in 1947)-, the gravity of these occurrences were mitigated or even eliminated, by rulers contributing financial and other help to regions affected and by “a strong tradition of personal charity etc…”

Economically, according to JT Sunderland (1842-1936), an American Church minister and active anti- imperialist, India was a giant of manufacturing and trading. It was particularly productive in textiles, steel and shipbuilding.

The Textile industry employed millions of artisanal spinners-(making thread)- and weavers-(image)-. In rural areas, while husbands were working the land wives were weaving cloth at home. The income from the sale of the cloth, thus made, helped in bad times when the harvests were poor. Many types of cloth were produced and sold abroad, making the country a prime exporter of textiles.

According to author Tharoor, India made world class steel since the sixth century-(the 500’s CE). Indeed, the swords produced were the envy of others. So much so that in early encounters with British soldiers-(see hereinafter)-, the latter used to swap theirs with those of fallen Indian fighters.

India relied on its own shipbuilding capabilities to equip its large commercial fleets which sailed to deliver Indian products around the shores of the Bay of Bengal, Indian Ocean and Arabian Sea.

Then the British arrived. By the time they departed, they left behind a “caste consciousness [within Hindu classes that] had never been...so explicit [in pre-colonial times]” .Furthermore, they had created a strong Muslims/Hindus antagonism which resulted in horrendous bloodbaths, in times to come, between the two communities.

As for India itself it was bankrupted. Economist and historian Angus Madison (1926-2010), has calculated that “India’s share of the world economy... [in the early 1700’s] was 23 per cent, as large as all of Europe put together…”. But after the British left “...it had dropped to just over 3 per cent”.

What follows, in the next few pages, is the story of India under British rule. But why India, you may ask, of all the countries that were once colonies of one or the other of the European powers. It is so because of the wide-ranging 2016 book ‘Inglorious Empire. What the British did to India’, written by Shashi Tharoor (DOB: 1956) the well-known Indian diplomat, intellectual and member of the Indian Parliament.

But before we move on, let us hear one more witness. He is American historian Will Durant (1885-1981). He arrived in India in 1930-(at the peak of British rule) as part of a journey to collect material for this multi-volume work ‘ The Story of Civilization’. He was so appalled by what he found in India, that he put his project aside and wrote ‘The case for India’ in which we read “ The British [invaded and destroyed] a high civilization...utterly without scruple....greedy of gain...bribing and murdering, annexing and stealing etc.

BRITISH RULED INDIA

The East India Company.

The East India Company -(EIC or Company hereinafter)- was constituted by ‘Royal Charter’ in London in 1600 for the purpose of trading with Indian articles including silk, spices and others. It was owned by prominent English shareholders. The EIC was to set up trading posts at vital locations on the shores of India. Ominously, however, it was authorized to raise a military force to protect its personnel and property. More. For the duration of its existence-(till 1858),the British government, when necessary. helped it militarily and promulgated the laws that kept foreign competition at bay. It set up its first trading post-(called factory)- in 1615.

Taking advantage of the loosening of central control in 1739 and the mutual animosity between local princes and nawabs-(governors)-, the EIC, in 1757, fought a battle to dislodge a nawab and his French allies. It won partly on account of its superior armament and partly because of the defection of the antagonist’s army chief. As a reward the EIC was given the governorship of India’s largest state of Bengal-(presently shared by India And Bangladesh).

A few years later the Company forced a weak Mughal ruler into appointing it as the accredited tax collector and dismiss his local officials. Henceforth, the EIC “proceeded to squeeze the Indian peasant dry..” as stated by author Tharoor.

To be sure, peasants paid taxes to previous rulers. But the latter took into account events on force-majeure such as droughts, deaths etc. In other words, they looked compassionately at the circumstances of each taxpayer and estimated what he owed accordingly. To the contrary, the EIC did not concern itself with alleviating circumstances. Each peasant was required to contribute an amount fixed by ‘someone-behind-a- desk’ and from which the collector did not deviate no matter what. So much so that we are told by historian Durant that “defaulters were confined in cages, and exposed to the burning sun...Unpaid taxes meant being tortured...and the victim’s land being confiscated”.

By 1800 the EIC was the master of India including the princely states. Rajas and nawabs were made to pay the Company large sums in return for staying in control and keeping their fortunes. By, then, the Company had an army of 260,000 men-(larger than most national armies)- and enjoyed the support of the ruling classes and members of Parliament in London, many of whom were shareholders. The revenues collected by the Company were enormous. After withholding the costs and expenses of its operation in India, it transferred all the rest to its accounts in London.

With no profits to be made in caring for the well-being of the people it controlled and taxed, the Company was aggressively and exclusively fixated on making money to send back to its stockholders. All that counted for it was the bottom line regardless of circumstances. One example of this is the Bengal famine of the late 1700’s which caused the death of a third of that state population either from starvation or diseases thereof. The Company did not concern itself with the calamity, except to engage men “to carry the dead and throw them into the river Ganges...”. All the while the EIC did not let up on its tax collection from peasants. It also continued forcing them to grow cash crops such as high market value opium poppies and indigo intended for export rather than food crops that would have helped at times like these.

This ‘modus operandi’ of the Company was appalling enough for a committee set up by the British Parliament, in London, to conclude “the whole revenue resolved itself...into habitual extortion and injustice”. In turn, English writer William Howitt (1792-1879) was so outraged by this state of affairs that he wrote in 1839 “the scene of exaction, rapacity, and plunder which India became in our hands...forms one of the most disgraceful portions of human history...”.

The late 1700’s and early 1800’s were the days of the nascent industrial age in Britain. Among the new factories were the textile mills of Yorkshire and Lancashire which hoped to export their finished products to India with its huge population.Still, they could not compete with the cheaper locally made equivalent. Thus, the EIC proceeded to wreck the local textile industry. And to add insult to injury, it sent to Britain all the cotton India grew. It returned as finished products for Indian consumers.

We have already seen that India built quality ships. As was the case with textiles, British shipyards could not compete with the ones in India. So the EIC closed them. But at some later time, British shipowners realized that by resuscitating Indian shipyards and using much cheaper skilled local labour, they could obtain quality ships at a lesser price than the ones available from British shipyards. They were so successful that by the 1820’s they had caused a crisis in the British shipyards resulting in many workers being laid off. In consequence British legislators outlawed shipbuilding in India once and for all.

And for the same reasons, the British closed down all of India’s steel mills.

Not only the East India Company made phenomenal profits off India during its presence there from 1615 to 1857, but also its employees helped themselves to ill-gotten riches. According to author Tharoor, the corruption of the governors, officers, clerks and others in the service of the Company reached levels unsurpassed even in an India where corruption was a fact of life. Those concerned-(despite excellent remuneration for their work)- entered into private deals rigged in their favour.

‘Nabobs’-(EIC officers who enriched themselves in India)- returned home with fortunes which included diamonds etc. They built great mansions and bought themselves and relatives, seats in the British Parliament. So much so that they shocked the traditional moneyed aristocracy. An article appearing in 1786 in ‘‘Gentleman’s Magazine’-(ran from 1731 to 1922)- lamented that “the Company...brings us home every year a sufficient number of a new sort gentlemen, with new customs, manners and principles... [supplanting]...the old country gentlemen”.

In turn, Lord Thomas Macauley (1800-1859) who spent time in India in the service of the Company and once, called it “the greatest corporation in the world” said “the misgovernment of the English...seemed incompatible with the existence of society...Enormous fortunes...were accumulated...while thirty million of human beings were reduced to the extremity of wretchedness”.

When the greed, avarice, and ruthless governance of the EIC and its officers became too much to bear its sepoys-(Indian soldiers)- rebelled in 1857. A year later, the government of Great Britain took over from the Company, but not without compensating it, for its loss of profits, with a hefty sum.

Direct rule from London.

Following its replacement of the East India Company, the British government claimed that it“ would govern for the welfare of the Indian people”. In reality, however, its aims were no different from those of earlier days viz. the exploitation of India for the benefit of the British.

For the new rulers the importance of India was such that they designate it the ‘Jewel in the Crown’ of Queen Victoria (1819-1901) and of her successors. In 1877, the monarch was proclaimed ‘Empress of India’. By the time she died in 1901, India had become the greatest contributor to the wealth of Britain and the biggest importer of its products.

But to rule a huge country with a population of 200 million souls, the British best bet was to divide them along religious, racial and caste lines and create an aura of competition and suspicion between them. The success of this ‘divide and rule’ stratagem would, they reasoned, “justify British overlordship which alone could be seen as transcending these differences and guiding the Indians to a higher, more civilized, plane of being, under the benign tutelage of the well-meaning Empire”

First, though. they had to show that they themselves were superior to the darker skinned Indians and eminently endowed to rule them better than they could do themselves. For this they carried out the pseudo-science of facial measurements -(see my narrative ‘Black and White’). Armed with these, British authorities were able to ‘prove’ their own superiority over all Indians.

The British also played the Hindu/Muslim card. In the words of author Tharoor, it meant “…every effort…made…to highlight differences between Hindus and Muslims to persuade the latter that their interests were incompatible with the advancement of the former”.

Another way of pulling the two faiths apart was through instituting an electoral system by which electors vote for their co-religionists only. In other words a Hindu could only elect a Hindu candidate and similarly for a Muslim and Sikh. In this way the normal competitions between multi-religious communities for services and resources became, thenceforth, ones between faiths.

The differences between the castes in Hinduism were also played upon, as British pollsters travelled the country and interviewed people from the various castes. Naturally, each enhanced its own qualities and attributes and voiced its grievances toward other castes, in the hope of being allocated certain privileges.

The last famine under British rule occurred in 1943. This was the third year of the second World war (1939-1945) in which the British Empire was a principal belligerent. Britain’s leader Winston Churchill (1874-1965), was not moved by the starvation of millions. He ordered the rerouting of vessels, laden with Australian grains and destined to India, to Europe to replenish war stocks there. And when he was told that people were dying in great numbers, he remarked that Indians “bred like rabbits” and wanted to know, if people were starving to death, “Why hasn’t Gandhi [champion of Indian independence] died yet?” Eventually that famine caused the death of nearly 4 million Indians.

Author Tharoor lists a dozen famines in India during the time the British were in control. He estimates that as many as 35 million people perished as a consequence. In his judgement and in that of many others, this is so because in times of food shortages the British carried on with “merciless exploitation…unbalanced exportation… and such brutal collection of high taxes...etc.”. Needless to say that the price of available foodstuff rose making it impossible for the impoverished peasant to feed himself and his family.

In their own defence the colonialists pointed to the theory of economist Thomas Malthus (1766-1834) according to which population growth exceeds the ability of arable land to feed it. Since India’s birth rates are high, famines are inevitable. The British were also loath to interfere because of their adherence to the free market economic theory and their unwillingness to spend money hat had not been budgeted for.

A good example of this attitude is Viceroy-(representing the British monarch and governor general)- Lord Lytton (1831 1891) who adamantly refused to lower the price of grain during one of the famines. “There is to be no interference of any kind on the part of the Government with the object of reducing the price of food”, he reportedly instructed his subordinates. They were also ordered “to discourage relief work…Mere distress is not sufficient reason for opening a relief work”.

Winston Churchill’s racism is evident in his intense dislike of the Indians subjects of the British Crown and despite their contribution of hundreds of thousands of troops for Britain’s wars. On one occasion he told one of his ministers “I hate Indians. They are a beastly people with a beastly religion”.

We have seen, above that the colonialists did not tolerate any competition from Indian steel mills to the equivalent ones in their home country. Even so, in 1883 Jamsetji Tata began to lobby the British authorities to open “India’s first modern steel mill”. But they opposed his endeavour for almost 3 decades. The mill, eventually started production in 1912. In the meantime, huge quantities of steel for railways works were imported from Britain at exorbitant prices paid out of revenues collected from Indians.

Reportedly when Tata’s application to produce steel locally was approved, a British senior official derided this initiative and pledged to “personally eat every ounce of steel an Indian was capable of producing”. Today’s Tata is a large group of companies in various domains with presence in over 100 countries.

In fact, throughout almost the whole colonial era, India ceased to be the great industrial and trading country, it once had been. Instead, it was forced to grow and produce the raw material needed to keep British factories running. No wonder, author Tharoor writes that “Britain Industrial Revolution was built on the destruction of India’s thriving manufacturing”.

We often ask ourselves, how was it possible for a country the size and population of Great Britain to hold sway over an Asian nation the size and population of India for over two centuries, in the manner we have seen? The answer is suggested by Indian journalist Aakar Patel who wrote that the dominance of the British and many of their wrongdoings were helped by many local elites; not least the princely state rulers who sold their soul and values to the newcomers in exchange for keeping their riches and prominent positions. In the words of author Tharoor “These nominal ‘rulers’ went out of their way to demonstrate their loyalty to the Crown...”. They even helped militarily when called for.

Most remarkably the vast majority of soldiers in the Company forces were locally recruited sepoys-(officers, however were British). They came from an Indian class were martial types were valued. They were enticed to join by good pay and other benefits.

The British and the Inventionof Israel.

The crucial role played by the English/ British ruling and influential classes in the creation of the state of Israel.

Excerpts from Shlomo Sand’s-(Israeli Emeritus Professor of History at Tel Aviv University)- 2012 book: The Invention of the Land of Israel.

Note: Only the italic script is mine. The rest is Mr Shlomo”s.

“It is no coincidence that the first “Zionist” idea emerged not among Jews living at the boundary between Western and Eastern Europe….but rather in the revolutionary/religious atmosphere of the British Isles.”

By this is meant the adoption of Protestantism in the 16th century. The British version of this denomination: “…played a significant role in bringing about the powerful role fulfilled by the Hebrew Bible in the construction of the country’s -(Britain)-modern political identities.

“The Puritans -(English Protestants)-began reading the-(Hebrew)- Bible as an historical text long before the Jewish Zionists-(were mostly secular)-considered doing so. They were believers who craved salvation, which they regarded as closely linked to the revival of the people of Israel in its Land-(Palestine)-. This link was not the result of any special concern for Jewish suffering, but rather stemmed from the belief that the Christian redemption-(forgiveness of sins)- of all humanity had to be preceded by the return of the children of Israel to Zion-(mainly Jerusalem)- . In the course of this long term scenario, the Jews were also supposed to convert to Christianity. Only then would the world see the second coming of Jesus.”

“This eschatological-(relating to life after death)- approach penetrated deeply into the diverse Protestant streams, remaining alive into the twenty-first century. As this book is being written -(around 2012)-, there are still many Evangelical groups within the United States that support the existence of a strong, large Israel, based on their certainty that such support is essential to the hastening of Jesus’universal rule on earth, and that Jews who refrain from conversion must ultimately pay the price, i.e., to disappear and, of course, burn in hell.

“English Evangelical clergyman Edward Bickersteth-(1825-1906)-….believed that only the establishment of the kingdom of Israel would return the son of God to earth and bring about the full Christianization of the world.”

Let us now look at the Earl of Shaftesbury (1801-1885): “This nobleman was regarded as one of the most influential figures in Britain during the Victorian era -(1837-1901). He was a conservative philanthropist who…cultivated the idea of a Jewish Christian restoration in the Holy Land. In light of his contribution to the evolution of Christian Zionism, Shaftesbury can perhaps be thought of as the Anglican Herzl-(founder of Zionism)-. Some scholars believe it was he who first coined the well-known phrase that characterized Palestine as ‘a land without a people for a people without a land’…This aristocratic lord viewed the ‘children of Israel’ not simply as believers in the Jewish religion but as descendants of an ancient race that, once converted to Christianity, would again become a modern nation in natural alliance with Great Britain.… In truth, Jewish suffering as a result of anti-Semitism was not the primary motivation for his work…What mostly captured the heart of this devout aristocrat was that ‘restoration’ in the Middle East could do away with the Jewish faith, which, in turn, would lay the groundwork for the coming of redemption to the world.”

“One of the most dynamic activists in this first attempt at settlement was another British Christian: Laurence Oliphant -(1829-1888)-… Oliphant believed that the Judeo-Christian race was destined to rule the Holy Land….Because it was difficult to purchase land west of the Jordan River, Laurence Oliphant believed it would be easier to settle Jews to its east. In order to do so, the Bedouin inhabitants of the area would have to be expelled. Arab cultivators, however, would be concentrated in reservations, as the Indians of North America had been, and they would be used as laborers in the Jewish colonies.”

“At the beginning of the twentieth century in Britain, there was fierce and mounting political pressure to stem the tide of-(Jewish)- immigrants arriving from Eastern Europe-(as a consequence of the organized persecutions in Russia, Eastern and Central Europe). The immigration was perceived to be a threatening invasion; in many ways, the reactions to it were similar to prevalent early twenty first century attitudes toward Muslim immigration to Europe.” Accordingly, the British Government under the premiership of non-other that Arthur Balfour caused the enactment by Parliament of an immigration law aimed primarily at the control of the influx of Jewish refugees from Eastern Europe. Incidentally, the USA followed suit with the ‘Immigration Act’ of 1924.

Even so, by: “…1917, Lord Lloyd George, Lord Arthur Balfour, Lord Alfred Milner, Lord Robert Cecil, Sir Winston Churchill, and many other British statesmen were convinced that the restoration of the Jews to Palestine would earn the British a safe imperial foothold there until the end of days and-(in line with the beliefs of the British Christian-Zionists covered above)- possibly even later, in the event that the Evangelicals proved to be correct.”

It might be appropriate to recall the declaration, that year, of Balfour, in the form of a letter to Lord Rothschild, a prominent Jewish personality in the British business and social circles: “His Majesty’s Government view with favour the establishment in Palestine of a national home for the Jewish people, and will use their best endeavours to facilitate the achievement of this object, it being clearly understood that nothing shall be done which may prejudice the civil and religious rights of existing non-Jewish communities in Palestine, or the rights and political status enjoyed by Jews in any other country. I should be grateful if you would bring this declaration to the knowledge of the Zionist Federation”.

“Nevertheless, at least between 1917 and 1922, the declaration of British policy regarding a Jewish national home and the encouragement of British authorities still failed to convince Yiddish speakers -(Jews from eastern and central Europe)-not to mention British Jews, to immigrate en masse to their “historic homeland-(Palestine).”

“By the end of the five-year honeymoon between Christian and Jewish Zionism, approximately thirty thousand Zionists had arrived in British-ruled Palestine. As long as the United States permitted relatively open immigration, hundreds of thousands of Eastern European displaced persons continued to descend upon its shores. They steadfastly refused to relocate to the Middle Eastern territory that Palmerston, Shaftesbury, Balfour, and other Christian lords had been assigning them since the mid nineteenth century.”

Jews: “….did not regard Palestine as their land. In contrast to the mythos embedded in the State of Israel’s Declaration of Independence, they did not strive ‘in every successive generation to reestablish themselves in their ancient homeland’. They did not even regard it as an appropriate place to ‘return’ to when that option was presented to them on a Protestant colonial golden platter. At the end of the day, it was the cruel and horrifying blows sustained by the Jews of Europe, and the decision of ‘enlightened’ nations-(Europe and the USA)- to close their borders to the recipients of those blows, that resulted in the establishment of the State of Israel”.

“The Arab inhabitants of Palestine also remained invisible to the Western eye. From the mid-nineteenth century onward, each new proposal for Palestine almost completely disregarded them.-(That is apart from Mr. Oliphant’s proposals for their seclusion and employment as settlers’ servants as stated earlier).The renewed Western penetration of the Holy Land, though still only ‘scientific’ and ‘spiritual’, barely mentioned them”.

In support of this, the book’s author quotes Arthur Balfour’s 1919 words: “For in Palestine we do not propose even to go through the form of consulting the wishes of the present inhabitants of the country . . . Zionism, be it right or wrong, good or bad, is rooted in age-long traditions, in present needs, in future hopes, of far profounder import than the desires and prejudices of the 700,000 Arabs who now inhabit that ancient land”.

Let me end with: “Lacking this British body politic and the unique ideological-(religious)- elements it carried, it is doubtful whether the State of Israel could have ever been established”. Further: “It is fair to say that the Balfourian legislation of 1905 and the law enacted…-(in 1924)- in the United States that further toughened the terms of immigration contributed to the establishment of the State of Israel no less than the Balfour Declaration of 1917, and perhaps even more”.

From Judaism to Zionism

FROM JUDAISM TO ZIONISM

Excerpts from Shlomo Sand’s-(Professor of History at Tel Aviv University)- 2012 book: ‘The Invention of the Land of Israel’. December 2023.

Note: Only the italic script is mine. The rest is the author’s.

1-JUDAISM

Judaism is the earliest of the monotheistic religions, the others being Christianity and Islam.

Judaism’s holy scriptures are the Bible, the Talmud and the Torah. Faithfuls believe Jews were favoured by ‘Yahweh’(God) and promised the Land of Canaan (Palestine and Jordan). They believe that sometime in the 13th century BCE, led by Moses, their ancestors wandered for 40 years across the Sinai Desert (‘Exodus’ in the scriptures), heading east towards Canaan. They were fleeing a life of slavery in pharaonic Egypt.

They also believe that the first act once the Hebrews reached destination was the conquest of Jericho (اريحا) at the cost of the life of every man, woman and child they found there as well as that of every beast (cows, sheep, donkeys… etc.) they owned. And they razed to the ground everything standing. Incredibly, they had been commanded to do so by Moses at the behest of Yahweh.

Religious Jews further believe that they were forcibly exiled from Canaan and, thus, settled in many other polities (Diaspora).

But until the onset of Zionism late in the 19th century… few Jews imagined that the Holy Land…in Palestine… was or could become a national territory for the world’s Jewry.

Like in all religions there are different schools of Judaism such as traditional (Orthodox), Reform Judaism and others.

2-ZIONISM

Zionism, a Jewish nationalist movement founded by secular Austro-Hungarian Theodor Herzl (1860-1904) aimed at establishing a homeland for all the Jews of the Diaspora.

At first, he accepted a British offer of their sparsely populated East African colony of Uganda as the place for Jews to call home. Still, Herzl and his similarly secular Zionist companions realized that Uganda lacked all the religious attractions Jews felt toward the Holy Land.

In consequence, and in order to maximize the number of future settlers, they identified Palestine as the ultimate destination and paid lip service to religion by courting… the traditional (religious) leadership because they were aware of its hegemonic power for Jewry.

In the end, the Zionists… disregarded (Judaic) tradition…and the opinions of the rabbis…In Zionism, the Land replaced the Torah, and the sweeping worship of the future State replaced the strong adherence to God…They sought to turn religious Jews into nationalists as well, and had no intention of preserving religion that was antimodern and therefore antinationalist.

3- THE ATTITUDE OF RELIGIOUS SCHOLARS TO THE ZIONIST PROJECT.

Despite their great rivalry, Reform Judaism and traditional Judaism were in agreement on one fundamental point: the steadfast refusal to regard Palestine as national property, a destination for Jewish immigration, or a national homeland….Jews in Western and Eastern Europe were as nationalized as other citizens…in the sense of being integrated into their respective individual nations.

One prominent example of this dynamic was Rabbi Samson Raphael Hirsch (1808-1888), the major nineteenth century German leader of Orthodox Judaism… With the first reverberations of …Zionism, Hirsch immediately undertook to stop this deviation, which he believed was a falsification of historic Judaism and a likely cause of serious injury to it. He was concerned that those who regarded the Holy Land as a Jewish homeland and were demanding sovereignty over it would…bring about a new Jewish tragedy (refers to earlier uprisings defeated at the hands of Romans and others). He therefore reminded all Jews, lest they forget: ‘Yisrael was given the Torah in the wilderness…without a country and land of its own…etc.

Naftali Hermann Adler (1839-1911)., chief rabbi of the United Kingdom…immediately opposed the political Zionist colonization project and refused public contact with Herzl.

The same was true of Zadoc Kahn (1839-1905), chief rabbi of France…French Jewry’s allegiance to the French homeland was far more important to him than the new Jewish national ‘adventurism’.

As for …Moritz Güdemann, chief rabbi of Vienna…: Even if the Jews had been a people in antiquity….they had been nothing more than an important religious community with the aim of disseminating the message of monotheism throughout the world and turning humanity into one great people. The Jews always adapted well to diverse cultures (Greek, Persian, and Arab, for example) while preserving their faith and their Torah… Rabbi Güdemann and…other… rabbis…in Vienna, agreed in principle that the Jews of Germany were German, the Jews of Britain were British, and the Jews of France were French—and that this was a good thing.

And….Rabbi Isaac Mayer Wise, founder of the Central Conference of American Rabbis, had publicly and unequivocally classified Zionism as false messianism and had proclaimed the United States—not Palestine—to be the Jews’ true place of refuge.

The opposition to the project of the Zionists by religious scholars was such that…when Herzl attempted to invite the Union of German Rabbis to the opening of the First Zionist Congress in 1897, he was met with resounding rejection. The situation was so serious that the Jewish community in Munich, where the congress was to have convened, flatly refused to allow the meeting to take place on German soil.

Given the rejection of Zionism by West European and American rabbis…Herzl pinned his hopes solely on the rabbis of Eastern Europe… at a time when, unlike in the West …the state of Eastern Europe’s Jews was completely different. Millions of Jews still lived in neighborhoods or small towns that were segregated from those of their neighbors….And when we take into consideration the bitter Judeophobia that crystallized in these areas, we understand why it was there, of all places, that Zionism acquired its first foothold and achieved its first successes.

Even so…Soon the rabbis…. discovered that…..the goal of the two movements (spiritual and national) was exactly opposite…. Between the first Zionist Congress in 1897 and the fourth in 1900, the leading rabbis of Eastern Europe spoke out in opposition to the transformative vision of turning the Holy Land into a homeland where all Jews would gather to establish a Judaic state.

In conclusion. As far as the men of religion were concerned…the Jews are a people because God chose to establish them as such; this people, however, was defined only by the Bible, and not by any authority from outside the faith (the likes of Zionism). But for the Zionists, the Bible … was of secondary importance. This was an innovation, as the claim that Judaism was a national political grouping and not a religious one had never before been asserted in the Jewish tradition.

4-ZIONISTS CARRY THE DAY

With the terrifying assistance of history (persecutions of Jews in Eastern Europe), Zionism defeated Judaism, and after the Second World War, large segments of world Jewry that had survived extermination (Holocaust in Nazi Germany) accepted the decisive verdict: the principle of a state designated as Jewish and located in the Holy Land, which would be a Jewish national homeland.

From this point on, the Bible…would serve as a primary component of Jewish moral arguments for the eternal rights of the Jewish people. It was also necessary to cite the ostensibly (not necessarily true) indisputable fact that the Jews were forcibly exiled from the Land (by the Romans) in the year 70 CE (or a bit later) and to believe that most modern Jews were racially or ethnically descended from the ancient Hebrews (that they were all, to the present day, the grand-grand-grandchildren of Prophet Abraham, no less).

But there was an inconvenient historical truth. That of the…kingdoms that had been converted to Judaism, whose populations came to constitute some of the world’s most important Jewish communities, from the Adiabene kingdom of Mesopotamia to the Khazar empire of southern Russia…Clearly, they did not descend from Abraham. They… now became a taboo subject, simply not to be discussed…In other words, as far as the Zionists were concerned, they were erased from human history.

Only the acceptance of these…premises made it possible to establish and maintain belief in the Jews’ historical right. To undermine any one of them would disrupt their integrated functioning as a mythos capable of arousing and mobilizing the Jewish public.

Thus…the Bible came to serve as the first history book to be studied by all schoolchildren within the Zionist community in Palestine as well as, under the auspices of the Israeli education system…(including the account of the massacres and destructions in Jericho covered hereinbefore. Some teachers objected to this event appearing in the history books but the education authorities decided otherwise.)

The story of the exile of the Jewish people …(in 70 CE)…now emerged as a historical axiom (accepted truth), neither to be researched (to establish its historical veracity) nor questioned, but rather to be used in political declarations and official national displays.. It was these ideological conditions that enabled ‘historical right’ to serve as a sturdy ethical platform for Zionist consciousness.

At the end of the day, the Zionist revolution succeeded in nationalizing the main elements of Jewish religious discourse. From then on, the Holy Land became a more or less defined space that should be owned by the eternal people. In short, during the twentieth century, the Holy Land became the ‘Land of Israel’.

5-ZIONISM’S COLONIZATION OF PALESTINE

However, by what right was it permissible to establish a Jewish nation-state

in a territory where the decisive majority was not Jewish? In all the debates …the presence of Arabs in Palestine was almost never raised…because the Zionists convinced themselves, or pretended to be, that Palestine was ‘a land without a people for a people without a land’ as the slogan of the day went.

One exception was…Micah Joseph Berdichevsky (1865- 1921) an early Modern Hebrew author…and… a man of exceptional integrity. Berdichevsky responded to these rationalizations with simple logic: For the most part, our fathers were not natives of the Land but its conquerors, and the right they acquired was also acquired by the conquerors who subsequently conquered it from us . . . They do not acknowledge our rights but rather deny them. The Land of Israel is not virgin land before us; it is populated by a people cultivating its land, with rights to its land.

It did not help Berdichevsky that the later part of the nineteenth and early part of the twentieth century was the golden age of European colonialism…when nonwhite inhabitants of the planet were still not considered the equals of Europeans, and were certainly not entitled to the same civil and national rights. Although most Zionists well knew that Palestine had many local inhabitants…they did not construe their presence as meaning that the Land was not open for free colonization.

This…was consistent with the general climate of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries: As far as the white man was concerned, the non-European world had for all intents and purposes become a space devoid of people, just as America had been desolate two hundred years earlier, prior to the arrival of the white man.

6- ZIONISTS’ PRETENSES AND PALESTINIAN RESPONSE

The first protests articulated by Arabs against the implications of the Balfour Declaration forced Jewish nationalism to make increasing use of variations on its moral superweapon, ‘historical right’. Proponents of that ideology skillfully translated long-term religious ties to the Holy Land into the right of ownership to a national land.

Among those invited to take part in talks about the future of Ottoman territories,…following the Ottoman Empire collapse in 1918, and the establishment of the British mandate in Palestine…,were representatives of the Zionist Organization, who proposed the following resolution: The High Contracting Parties recognize the historic title of the Jewish people to Palestine and the right of the Jews to reconstitute in Palestine their National Home . . . The land is the historic home of the Jews; there they achieved their greatest development . . . By violence they were driven from Palestine, and through the ages they have never ceased to cherish the longing and the hope of a return.

In 1922 the League of Nations adopted the… above resolution…As a result of the increasing pressure on the Jews of Europe, and the absence of countries willing to grant them entry and refuge, more and more Jews and non-Jews alike came to be convinced of the importance of this new consciousness of right, transforming it into an indisputable ‘natural right’.

The fact that for thirteen hundred years the inhabitants of the region had been overwhelmingly Muslim was countered by maintaining that this local population did not possess the unique attributes of a nation and had never claimed self-determination. By contrast, according to Zionist discourse, the Jewish nation had always existed and, in every generation, had aspired to return to its country and realize its right, although to its great misfortune it had always been prevented from doing so by political circumstance.

April 1936 marked the start of the Arab Revolt in Palestine. The leaders of the Zionist community portrayed it not as an authentic (Palestinian) nationalist uprising against external rule and foreign invasion, but rather as the product of anti-Semitic incitement on the part of hostile Arab leaders.

The Zionists responded…with a lengthy memorandum titled ‘The Historical Connection of the Jewish People with Palestine’ (for sympathetic British eyes in London):…The Land had been promised to Abraham by a divine power. Jacob’s (grandson of Abraham)…was the first…of the race to be exiled from the Land (to Egypt]) and Moses was the first Zionist who intended to return to it (from Egypt).

7- WHAT ENLIGHTENED JEWS WROTE ABOUT THE ZIONIST PROJECT

There were of course some Zionists, especially from the political left, who felt uncomfortable with justifications based on the conception of historical right, which negated the rights of the living and gave priority to the rights of the dead from an ancient past…. These individuals well knew that according to the liberal and socialist heritage of the nineteenth century, land always belonged to its cultivator.

For example, as early as 1886, Ilya Rubanovich (1859-1920)…a member of Jewish descent who went on to be a leader of the Russian Socialist Revolutionary Party, posed the following penetrating question: Even if wealthy Jews succeeded in purchasing the ‘historic homeland’ (members of the Jewish Rothschild family did purchase land from some prosperous Palestinian owners)… What is to be done with the Arabs?... The Arabs have exactly the same historical right and it will be unfortunate for you if-taking your stand under the protection of international plunderers (European, in particular British colonialists)…you make the peaceful Arabs defend their right.

Another…was Ahad Ha’am (1856-1927)…the leader of spiritual Zionism… a highly respected author…who, after a visit to Palestine in 1891, wrote passionately about Palestine’s local population with great misgivings: From abroad, we are accustomed to believe that Eretz (Land of) Israel is presently almost totally desolate, an uncultivated desert, and that anyone wishing to buy land there can come and buy all he wants. But in truth it is not so. From abroad we are accustomed to believing that the Arabs are all desert savages, like donkeys, who neither see nor understand what goes on around them. But this is a big mistake. The Arab, like all children of Shem, has a sharp intellect and is very cunning…if the time comes when the life of our people in Eretz Israel develops to the point of encroaching upon the native population, they will not easily yield their place . . . How careful we must be not to arouse the anger of other people against ourselves by reprehensible conduct. How much more, then, should we be careful, in our conduct toward a foreign people among whom we live once again, to walk together in love and respect, and needless to say in justice and righteousness. And what do our brethren in Eretz Israel (early Jewish settlers) do? Quite the opposite! They were slaves in their land of exile, and they suddenly find themselves with unlimited freedom . . . This sudden change has engendered in them an impulse to despotism, as always happens when ‘a slave becomes a king,’ and behold they walk with the Arabs in hostility and cruelty, unjustly encroaching on them.

The above…suggests that (Ahad Ha’am saw during his visit to Palestine that)… the first settlers typically ignored the locals and had not been educated to see them as equals.

One exception may have been Yitzhak Epstein (1862-1943), a linguist who immigrated in 1895 to Palestine, where he worked as a Hebrew teacher. In 1907, Epstein published an article…in which he wrote… : Among the difficult questions linked to the idea of the rebirth of our people on its land, there is one question that outweighs all the others. That… of our attitude toward the Arabs. This question, upon whose correct solution hangs the revival of our national hope, has not been forgotten, but has been completely hidden from the Zionists and in its true form is scarcely mentioned in the literature of our movement’. Epstein was also concerned that the purchase of land from wealthy effendis, which resulted in the systematic dispossession of peasant farmers, was an immoral act that would produce hostility and conflict in the future.

Like Ahad Ha’am’s protest (and that of Rubanovich hereinbefore), Epstein’s article fell on deaf ears. The sense of ownership, of having a right to the Land, was too strong in Zionist consciousness for its adherents to take the time to consider those whom they regarded as uninvited guests in their promised land.

From another angle some including David Ben-Gurion, the first prime minister of the state of Israel…attempted to prove that the Arabs of the country were ancient descendants of the Jews (converted following the Islamic conquest in the 7th century CE). However, the revolt of 1929 put a quick end to the ‘ethno-racial unification of these two components of the people’.

8-AFTER THE NAKBA

The Zionist community was overjoyed by the 1947 (UN) resolution regarding the partition of Palestine and the establishment of a Jewish state. A mere two years had elapsed since the end of the epic massacre of European Jewry (the Holocaust). The Western countries found it convenient to get rid of the Jewish refugees by channeling them to the Middle East.

Despite the brutal (European) anti-Jewish persecution that characterized the period, only half a million immigrants had arrived in Palestine between 1924, when the United States all but closed its gates to immigration, and 1947, when the number of Jews in Mandatory Palestine reached approximately 630,000. At the same time, the country’s Arab population totaled more than one and a quarter million.

Although in retrospect it did not turn out to be in their best interest, the Arabs’ refusal to support the partition of their country and to recognize the Jewish state was logical and understandable. Very few populations around the world would have agreed to be colonized by land-hungry foreigners who

were slowly acquiring pieces of their territory, who were unwilling to live together with them, and who aspired to establish their own nation-state. Moreover, the UN partition plan granted only 45 percent of the land area of British controlled Palestine to its 1.25 million ‘native’ inhabitants, while the settler population was allocated 55 percent of the land.

Israeli leaders have been willing, under pressure, to grant Palestinians a limited and divided autonomy surrounded and splintered by land, air, and sea zones under Israeli control…The political elite in Israel (from all political parties) have found it extremely difficult to acknowledge the Palestinians’ legitimate right to full national self-sovereignty… In their view the whole land of Palestine is the ancestral inheritance that has always belonged to the ‘People of Israel’.

This… fictional Israeli ethnos reflects a mixture of contempt and fear toward its neighbors, spawned by its own fictitiousness and its own lack of confidence in its national-cultural identity….Israelis continue to refuse to live together, and certainly to live together in equality, with the Others who dwell in their midst…Surveys conducted at the time of writing (around 2012) reflect that 70 percent of all Judeo-Israelis naïvely yet sincerely believe they are members of the chosen people.

Perhaps they cannot be blamed given the published accounts of contemporaneous academic historians/politicians who have busied themselves concocting stories of the right of the chosen people to the Land. Let us consider:

Ben-Zion Dinur (1884-1973):….. The Arabs had conquered the land in 634 CE and had remained in it as foreign occupiers ever since. The Jews, in

contrast, had always held on to their homeland and never abandoned it, even if at times they were pushed into a corner within it…. Occupation does not create historical possession. An occupier (Arab) ’s possession of the land he conquers is valid only if the owner (Jewish) of that land is absent and does not object to the theft for a long period of time. But if the owner was present on his land . . . pushed into a corner for hundreds of years (exiled) this does not detract from their rights but rather enhances them.

Yitzhak Baer (1888-1980): God designated an inheritance of land for every people, and the People of Israel’s inheritance is the Land of Israel. It is its natural place, and everything uprooted from its natural place loses its

natural grasp until it returns to its place.

Saul Friedländer (born 1932): During their entire existence in Diaspora for almost two thousand years, the Jews have felt driven out, dispersed, exiled from this ancestral land, which they longed to return to. This is unique in history. I think that such a strong bond, such a fundamental bond, gives this people a right to this land.

Part XI: Science, Medicine, Knowledge

Beginnings in the Material World

BEGINNINGS IN THE MATERIAL WORLD

STONE, POTTERY, BRONZE, WHEAT, BUFFALOES, LINEN, WOOL, BRICKS AND CONCRETE

Chapter illustration

The Author AUGUST, 2019

INTRODUCTION

In ‘The Story of the World’, I have written about the emergence and genetic/biological evolution of Homo sapiens, our forebears. I have then proceeded with the development of man’s social, religious and political systems.

This present narrative dwells on man’s early attempts at making use of the material world to his advantage and benefit. I begin with bone and stone tools, proceed to pottery, move on to the discovery of copper and the making of bronze. Next, I continue, with the raising of animals and the invention of the plough. Follows the weaving of cloth and the building of monuments.

STONES AND BONES

In 2015, in East Africa, archaeologists found what they judged to be the first stone tool used by hominids (part ape part human). It consisted of a crude piece of stone going back, in their estimation 3,300,000 years from present, thus establishing the beginning of the ‘Old Stone Age’. It so happens that at about the same date hominids were becoming omnivorous (meat and vegetal diet). But lacking the claws and fangs of carnivorous animals, that tool enabled them to separate flesh from bone and to break the latter for its marrow. Clearly it did not empower them to hunt themselves but more likely, they fed on the leftovers of predatory animals.

Chapter illustration

A little diversion here to recapitulate that hominids belong to the Homo group of which man is one species. It must also be remembered that the several Homo species did not follow one another linearly. To the contrary, they diverted like the branches from a tree as shown on the diagram below.

Chapter illustration

Last ,but not least, Sapiens is the only species to have developed, in the course of its evolutionary progress, the faculties of thought, imagination and more. In the context of tool-making, it means that all other species made tools instinctively like, in the words of Britannica:

Other species make artifacts: bees build elaborate hives to deposit their honey, birds make nests, and beavers build dams…[And] Animals occasionally use natural tools such as sticks or stones… But these attributes are the result of patterns of instinctive behaviour and cannot be varied to suit rapidly changing circumstances…. [Homo sapiens] doubt- less did the same for hundreds of millennia before the first giant step of fashioning their own tools.

Forward to 2,400,000 years ago and Homo habilis, so named for his skill in making stone tools, still crude, admittedly. His brain size was about 600 cm3, half that of Homo sapiens . Like previous hominids, his fossils were discovered in today’s Tanzania, East Africa. As explained by Britannica:

The tools are made of pebbles [flaking core stone] of quartz, quartzite, or basalt [and flint] and are chipped [ with a hammerstone] in two directions to form simple, rough, all-purpose tools capable of chopping, scraping, or cutting. Flakes remaining from such work were also employed as tools.

Chapter illustration

Some of the tools Habilis ended up with are shown. These, and similar others, made the tasks of cutting meat and breaking bones easier, but Habilis was still not a hunter; he remained a scavenger.

Chapter illustration

Half a millennium later, around 2,000,000 years ago emerged, once again in Africa, Homo erectus or ‘upright man’. He was the first to exhibit human gait and had a brain size of 1,000 cm3. He, initially, relied on scavenged meat, but eventually turned hunter. He is believed to be the first hominid to use fire for cooking, warmth, light and protection against predators. Another first, were his axes (image) qualified by ‘Natural History Museum’ as:

Chapter illustration

…sophisticated stone tools crafted on two sides. They were probably used to butcher meat, among other purposes.

As for his other tools, they were more varied than hitherto and:

…more carefully formed and …often highly symmetrical.

Homo neaderthalensis aka the Neanderthals evolved in Europe and Southwest Asia some 400,000 years ago. At 1,500 cm3, theirs were larger brains than Sapiens’. They coexisted for a time, till the complete extinction of the Neanderthals about 30,000 years ago.

They had been adept at fashioning specialized tools. I let Britannica explain:

Tools included small hand axes made from disk- shaped cores; flake tools, such as well-made side- scrapers and triangular points, probably used as knives; denticulate (toothed) instruments produced by making notches in a flake, perhaps used as saws or shaft straighteners; and round limestone balls, believed to have served as bolas…, consisting of three balls on the end of a thong, which is hurled at an animal, wraps itself around its legs, and trips it.

Chapter illustration

At about that time, around 30,000 years ago, Sapiens hunter gatherers began making a variety of more advanced, specialized tools , in particular ‘microliths’ (image). These are sharp pieces, less than a centimeter in size for use as spear tips and arrowheads. They were made from flint, bone and antlers. The latter being the bony skull extensions of animals of the deer family (image). In parallel, Sapiens began the genetic manipulation of the wolf to turn it into man’s companion: the dog.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

The 3,000,000 year long ‘Old Stone Age’ ceded its place to the ‘New Stone Age” around 12,000 years ago when the last global ice age was receding, ushering in a milder climate which permitted the gradual transformation of Sapiens from nomadic hunter gatherers to sedentary farmers. In the words of Britannica, this new age:

…was characterized by stone tools shaped by pol- ishing or grinding, dependence on domesticated  plants or animals, settlement in permanent vil- lages, and the appearance of such crafts as pottery  and weaving .

Finally, how awing and sobering is the huge span of time occupied by the Stone Age compared to the he few millennia of ‘modernity’. I am, in this context, drawn to the following comment in AHE (Ancient History Encyclopedia):

As a measure against current-day self-importance, it might be interesting to mention that the Stone Age as a whole makes up around 99% of humanity’s tech- nological calling card - so stone tools were very much in vogue for a long time indeed.

POTTERY

Following, millennia of stone shaping as tools and weapons, humans discover another abundant raw material: mud or more specifically clay. It is found wherever there are or used to be water streams and rivers. Crucially, they notice that when wet clay is exposed to solar heat it becomes hard and relatively strong. In due course, they begin moulding artifacts for daily use.

The next step is the potters’ realization that if sun baked clay is further fired it becomes even harder and stronger; in other words: more useful. Here we let Susan Mussi of the Ceramic-Pottery Dictionary, give us a little tutorial:

Chapter illustration

Pits were dug into the ground and layers of flam- mable organic material such as wood and straw were laid on the floor. The sun-dried pots would be stacked on top, then more organic material round the sides and finally broken pieces of [pre- viously] fired pottery over the top [to act as refract- tory material]. When fired, the earth walls and the broken pottery held in the heat so firing became quicker and reached a higher temperature.

The upper images show such a pit in use in Mali, as recently as 2010 during firing and after with the collection of the end products. Mussi continues:

The next stage of progress [was the kiln or oven]… believed that [ it] started in Egypt over 7000 years ago. Man realized that if the earth and the walls of a pit could hold the heat then a kiln could be built up with stones, broken pottery and mud-clay….

Chapter illustration

Another big step in was the invention of the potter’s wheel. As explained in HWN (historyworld.net):

When a pot is built up from the base by hand, it is im- possible that it should be perfectly round. The solution to this problem is the potter's wheel, which has been a crucial factor in the history of [clay items]. [Thus by] a- bout 3000 BC [5,000 years ago] a simple revolving wheel is a part of the potter's equipment in Mesopota- mia…

Chapter illustration

The image against depicts on the top left an early hand spun potter wheel in use in Egypt 4,800 years ago. Next to it is the much more satisfactory foot operated one some 1,500 years later. Finally below is illustrated the version of both used be potters in the Italy of the 16th century CE.

What is remarkable, is that pottery evolved independently, but at different historical periods, in many places along the same lines. Pointedly, when humans adopted a sedentary lifestyle.

Finally, a little tutorial of my own. Clay is a mixture of mineral, vegetal and animal elements. The quality of clay deposits depends on relative proportions of the their constituents. Generally speaking it is classified as earthenware, stoneware and kaolin.

Earthenware clay is the most abundant. It is used in the making of construction bricks , roofing tiles and general pottery fired at the relatively modest temperature of 900 to 1,000 deg C. It predominated in ancient Egypt, Mesopotamia ,the Middle East, Persia, ancient Greece and Rome. As ‘terracotta’ it was the material for the army figurines buried with Chinese Emperors (image).

Chapter illustration

Stoneware clay fired at 1,150 to 1,300 deg C results in ceramics, nowadays used for tiles, sanitary ware and more. Improbably enough, the ceramic figurine called Venus of Dolni Vestonic (image), after the location in today’s Czech Republic is dated at more than 30,000 years ago. Elsewhere, ceramic artifacts existed in the Indus Valley (see my essay of the same name) between 4,600 and 3,900 years ago.

Chapter illustration

Kaolin or China clay is the purest form of the material. It yields porcelain, when fired to between 1200 to 1400 deg C, a vitrified product that is tougher and stronger than the ones from earthenware and stoneware. It is harder to make and as qualified by Wikipedia, it is:

Chapter illustration

…the most prestigious type of pottery for its delicacy, strength, and its white colour.

Not surprisingly, then, it took time to evolve first in China between 2,000 to 1200 years ago.

METALLURGY

Allow me to begin with this from Britannica:

Metallurgy, art and science of extracting metals from their ores [unrefined state in nature] and modifying the metals for use…. The present-day use of metals is the culmination of a long path of development extending over approximately 6,500 years.

Gold is man’s first encounter with metal. Glittering in the bed of streams he could not possibly miss it. Next he came to know equally noticeable silver, copper and meteoric iron. The latter literally falling from heavens as meteorites. Eventually they were joined by tin, iron (earthly version) lead and mercury. These were the only metals known to mankind till at least the end of the Roman Empire in the 5th century CE.

Apart from mercury which is liquid in its natural form, all the rest need smelting (melting) in order to separate the metal proper from the ‘impurities’ it is naturally mixed with as ore. But each metal has a specific temperature. Copper, for example liquefies at 1,000 deg C, while iron does so at 1,500 deg C. Hence, evidence exists in Anatolia (today’s Turkey) of smelting and shaping copper it into tools going back 9 to 8,000 years ago. The smelting was carried out in pits dug in the ground where the copper ore was heated with combustibles such as charcoal.

Eventually, man dug the earth in search of copper. According to HWN mining began around 6,000 years ago. Interestingly, though, those who did the extraction felt uneasy about robbing earth of its treasures. To atone for their misdeed, they replaced the copper dug out with:

Chapter illustration

Fine pots, bearing produce from the daylight world, are placed in the mines as a form of recompense to propitiate the spirits of the dark in-terior of the earth.

Incidentally, copper exists in nature in about a dozen amalgams, three of which are shown in the image.

As already stated, tin is one of the early metals known. About 5,000 years ago the people of southern Mesopotamia realized that alloying (mixing) up to 10% tin with copper resulted in a new metal: Bronze. The new metal melts at a lower temperature than copper and is easier to mould into desired shapes. At the same time, it is harder than copper alone and more resistant to corrosion; making it more suitable for tools, weapons and other artifacts. From Mesopotamia, we are told by Britannica that most probably:

…the bronze culture spread through trade and the mi- gration of peoples from the Middle East to Egypt, Eu- rope, and possibly China.

The image against portrays one variety of iron ore in the depths of Earth’s crust. It is the most abundant mineral on it. One source ‘ Chemicool’ reports that :

Chapter illustration

…one third of Earth’s mass is believed to be iron, most of which lies deep within the planet, in the core.

As, we have seen, iron melts at a temperature of 1,500 deg C , well beyond the heating means of early man.

Also, as we have already seen, iron of meteoric origin was known to early civilizations. Apparently, it could be shaped by heating (not melting) and hammering etc into the desired items. Indeed, ancient Egyptians made daggers from it which they named ‘celestial daggers’ in recognition, no doubt, of the origin of the metal. Shown here is one such dagger made for pharaoh Tutankhamun some 3,300 years ago.

Chapter illustration

The Hittites who predominated in Anatolia, between 3,600 and 3200 years ago are credited as being the first to make objects from smelted iron ore; presumably with heat from burning charcoal in primitive furnaces. By 3,200 years ago iron-made weapons begin to appear on a large scale gradually displacing their counterparts made of bronze.

PLANTS AND ANIMALS

The recession of the ice age and arrival of milder climes gave rise in the region of the Fertile Crescent (Iraq, Syria, Jordan, Lebanon, Palestine/Israel and Egypt), to an explosion in wild wheat, barley and others. Simultaneously , it led to the invention of the tools necessary for harvesting, transportation and storage for later consumption. They included, according to Diamond: (Jared Diamond author of ‘Guns Germs and Steel’):

…sickles of flint blades cemented into wooded or bone handles,…baskets in which to carry the grain home…grinding slabs…[and] the technique of roa- sting grain so that they could be stored without sprouting; and underground storage pits, some of them plastered to make them waterproof.

Further. Plant domestication is:

…growing a plant and thereby, consciously or un- consciously causing it to change genetically from its wild ancestor in ways making it more useful to human consumers.

There are, or at least were, in the world about 200,000 species of wild plants constituting the entire global flora. Only a few only were edible and worth the time and energy of cultivating. Domestication of plants started independently in five regions of the planet at different times as follows: 1) Some 10,000 years ago in the Fertile Crescent.

2) About 9,500 years ago in China. 3) Between 8.5 and 4,000 years ago in Mesoamerica (Mexico and adjacent areas of Central America).

4) Between 10 and 4,500 years ago in South America.

5) About 4,500 ya in the Eastern United States.

The Fertile Crescent kicked off with eight ‘founder’ plants, so called because:

…they founded agriculture in the region and possibly in the world.

They were: 1) Emmer and einkorn wheat and barley, in the grass family. 2) Lentil, pea, chick pea and bitter vetch in the legume family. 3) Flax in the fiber category.

In addition the earliest four fruits: olives, figs, dates and grapes were equally first domesticated in the Fertile Crescent but much later, some 6,000 years ago. This time lag of 3 to 4,000 years is justified by Diamond on the grounds that while grain like wheat and barley:

…were easily grown, merely by sowing…They grew quickly and could be harvested within a few months of sowing.

Fruit trees, by contrast, require time in years before they bear edible crops. Thus they had to await the complete sedentariness of humans in stable and permanent communities, who could then afford the time to maturation of trees and fruits.

In due course the other regions, identified above, plus India and West and Sahel zones of Africa() contributed:

1)Several types of millet, rice, maize, quinoa, sorghum, maygrass, goosefoot, in the grass family. 2)Soya beans, several other types of beans, ground nuts, in the legume family. 3) Hemp, cotton, yucca, agave, in the fiber family. 4) Potato, sweet potato, manioc, yam, artichoke in the tuber family. 5) Melon, water melon, squashes, cucumber in the melons family.

Clearly, while these, with the exception of cotton, were primarily food crops, some natural fibered plants , like flax, hemp and others were also important as raw material for clothing, rope and the rest. Revealingly, by the early centuries CE most of today’s crops were known.

Why did the Fertile Crescent lead in the domain of agriculture? It did so because of its Mediterranean environment. The climate of mild wet winters and long dry hot summers suited very well the wild grasses found there. In the words Diamond:

That climate [favours] plant species able to survive the long dry season and to resume growth rapidly upon the return of rain.

So much so, that out of the 56 most desirable grasses, 32 are:

…overwhelmingly concentrated in the Fertile Crescent or other parts of [Western Asia] Mediterranean zone.

Diamond defines a domesticated animal as one:

Selectively bred in captivity and thereby modified from its wild ancestor, for the use of humans who control the animal’s breeding and food supply.

Perhaps one of the most flagrant example, is the domestication of the dog. There exists today three dozen or so breeds of dogs, all descended from one common ancestor: the wolf. More:

…domestic animals have smaller brains and sense or sense organs than their wild ancestors, because they no longer need the bigger brains and more developed sense organs on which their ancestors depended to es- cape from wild predators.

In contrast to the large number of wild plants to select from, there are only:

…148 species of large wild mammalian terrestrial herbivores or omnivores which could be consid- ered candidates for domestication.

As with plants the Eurasian continent (Asia and Europe) in general and the Fertile Crescent, in particular led the way with animal domesticates. It qualified because it harboured the highest percentage of wild candidates. Those of them finally selected exhibited certain parameters, including:

Diet: The returns in term of animal products or service must more than compensate the value of the fodder consumed by the beasts.

Growth rate: This is rather self-evident; it is not viable to wait long for a calf to become useful etc.

Breeding in Captivity: Obviously, only the ones which can breed under circumstances of captivity are of any use.

Not suitable were those exhibiting, among others:

Nasty disposition: Some animals never lose their natural aggression. They, thus, present a danger for their keeper.

Tendency to panic: These are the nervous type which panic when put in enclosures and in the process hurt themselves trying to escape.

Ultimately, humans had by 4,500 years ago completed the selection and domestication of several large wild, herbivore mammals( of 45 kg and above). According to Diamond:

…by then, all the world’s 148 candidate big species must have been tested innumerable times, with the result that only a few passed the test and no other suitable ones remained

The importance of these domesticates to the social and political evolution of mankind can hardly be overrated. Among them were the ones yielding meat, milk, dairy products. Others were the beasts of burden, pulling ploughs, and providing transportation and haulage. They were also the sources for fur,wool, leather and fertilizer. Consider:

Sheep and goat. Domesticate 10,000 years in the Fertile Crescent. Their respective ancestors are the Asian mouflon and the bezoar goat . Under human supervision and control, sheep became smaller than its wild ancestor and was selected for its wool. Contemporaneously, the pig was also domesticated there and in China, from the wild boar.

Cow. Domesticated 8,000 years ago in the Fertile Crescent and India from the extinct auroch. Became smaller under human handling and was selected for its milk yields.

Horse, from the now extinct wild horses of southern Russia.

At the beginning, in the wild , horses were robust and rugged similar to wild asses. They were first domesticated on the Western Steppe, in the Ukraine between 5 to 6,000 years ago primarily for food. It is only through protracted selective cross breeding that 3,500 years ago, the big horse suitable for fast and sustained gallop emerged. Henceforth, with horse riding says HWN:

…man's ability to move is improved out of all recogni- tion. The next comparable moment in the story of hu- man speed does not arrive for another 5000 years - with steam trains. At about the same the donkey was being domesticated from the wild ass of North Africa.

Camels, from 4,500 years ago, both the single humped dromedary

and the double humped Bactrian. They were domesticated from extinct wild ancestors in Arabia and Central Asia respectively. Both were valued not only for their meat, and milk ; but also as a transporter and animal of burden in arid and dry lands thanks to their ability to store water in their humps. One thousand year earlier their smaller relative, the llama was being domesticated in the Andes mountains of South America from its wild ancestor: the guanaco.

Other early domesticates were the reindeer, the water buffalo, the yak etc.

It is, indeed, remarkable that since then and for the last 4.5 millennia no other mammal has been domesticated despite the huge advances made in the relevant fields of science. Equally noteworthy is that the numbers of domesticated species outnumber those of their wild ancestors by thousands of times. For example, against 200,000 wolves on the planet, there are 400,000,000 dogs.

HWN lists both the Indian and African elephant as having been domesticated 4,000 years ago. But Diamond makes the distinction between domestication and taming. The elephant was not domesticated because it could not be bred in captivity. Instead it was tamed enough to help Hannibal (247-183 BC) cross the Alps and to obediently perform in circuses. In other words it never lost its natural wildness.

Tools and implements.

From observing nature during thousands of years, Sapiens learned the importance of tilling (preparing) the soil before planting, the need for water without which nothing grows and that animal excrements in soils enhances crops.

‘Elsevier’, a Dutch information co, states that tilling:

…has been defined as the mechanical manipulation of the soil and plant residues to prepare a seedbed where crop seeds are planted to produce grain for human and animal consumption.

At first, sticks were used to make holes in the soil to receive seeds. Then the first man who pulled plough was a Mesopotamian sometime between 8 and 6,000 years ago (image). It had sharp fire-hardened timber points’ or flint tips. Obviously, it could only be made to scratch the soft soils of Mesopotamia and ancient Egypt.

Chapter illustration

Upon the domestication of large animals the like of cows, buffaloes and horses those early growers had the sense to attach them to ploughs for better tilling. Henceforth, ploughs had to be made bigger and sturdier; capable of sustaining the powerful pull on the large beasts. The famous image of the ancient Egyptian farmer ploughing his land, goes back to 4 or 5,000 years ago. Further, henceforth it was possible to make deeper furrows in harder soils, thus extending the surfaces to be planted.

Chapter illustration

But, first, the pulling animal had to be harnessed to its implement. According to HWN:

The harnessing of draught animals is a major technological advance in agriculture as well as transport.

Chapter illustration

Around 6,000 years ago the ox became the first draught animal. Being endowed by nature:

…with a fleshy hump above the shoulders (image).

it could be harnessed to ploughs or other loads to be pulled or dragged.

Both Mesopotamia and Egypt, where earliest domestication occurred, are ironically rainless regions. Instead they are favoured by major river systems: the Tigris and Euphrates for the former and the Nile for the latter. In consequence, farmers in both places worked hard over millennia to devise, improve and control irrigation systems so as to enhance food production, and be able to feed growing populations. Efforts in this respect began more or less simultaneously 8,000 years ago.

The first organized human society established anywhere was Sumer around 6,500 years ago in southern Mesopotamia. According to Britannica:

The task of the Sumerian irrigation engineers was that of channeling water from the rivers during the summer months, impounding it, and distributing it to the fields in small installments.

King Hammurabi of Babylon, who ruled some 3,800 years ago included in his famous ‘ Hammurabi Code’ laws to the effect that a farmer’s share of irrigation water must be commensurate with the acreage he farmed. That he had the duty to maintain the canal sections in his property in good working order. Finally all beneficiaries of a canal system were to organize themselves in its administration.

The main characteristic of ancient Egyptian agriculture was its entire dependence on the seasonal flooding of the River Nile and its enriching silt deposts. Water in the flooded plains could reach the 1.5 m mark. The event was of so much life-and-death importance that Egyptians 5,500 years ago created devices called ‘Nilometers’, to measure flood levels. The image below is of one variety, another consisted of staircase descending to the river. According to Wikipedia:

The ability to predict the volume of the coming inun- dation was part of the mystique of the Ancient Egyp- tian priesthood. The same skill also played a polit- ical and administrative role, since the quality of the year's flood was used to determine the levels of tax to be paid. This is where the nilometer came into play, with priests monitoring the day-to-day level of the river and announcing the awaited arrival of the sum- mer flood.

Chapter illustration

In anticipation of this event, ancient Egyptian growers practiced basin irrigation. They enclosed plots with earthen dikes. When water receded at the end of the flooding season, part of it remained trapped within the dikes for a long enough time to allow the settlement of its rich sediments. The peasants then drained the remaining water and proceeded with planting. Harvesting took place in time before the next round of flooding. Additionally, there existed, too, an extensive system of earthen water channels to direct irrigation water where needed.

Chapter illustration

Around 3,700 years ago Egyptians adopted a device for lifting water when the Nile was not in flood. It is the ‘shadoof’ consisting of a tree branch or similar swinging about a pivot, see-saw fashion, with a counterweight at one end and a bucket at the other. One millennia later, Egyptians begin to use the waterwheel or ‘noria’. As shown in the image, it carries containers at interval along its periphery and is impelled by the moving stream. It is the first contraption not requiring human or animal power to operate(). And at a later date Egyptians made use of ‘Archimedes Screw’ after the Greek polymath of the same name. He is reported by ‘Irrigation Museum’ to have invented it during a visit to Egypt around 250 BCE. As implied and shown in the image it consisted of:

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

…a screw inside a hollow tube. The screw was turned and as the bottom end of the screw rotated, it scoop- ed up water. The water traveled up the length of the screw until it poured out the top of the tube.

The present ‘system of aflaj’(singular: ‘falaj’) in the Sultanate of Oman originated as ‘qanat’ between 3,000 and 2,ooo years ago with the Assyrians. By taking advantage of sloping ground, a qanat draws water from an underground source at higher level then channels it down by gravity to planted areas ( image).

Chapter illustration

As early as 7,000 years ago rice began to be, grown in paddy fields in China. They consisted, and continue to, of plots enclosed by levees , submerged in water, throughout the growing season to a depth of 5 to 10 cms. No doubt, partly with the aim of keeping those paddies watered Chinese engineers, 2200 years ago completed what is called the Dujiangyan irrigation project in southwest China. They diverted significant quantities of water from one of the tributaries of the Yangtze River and constructed an extensive system of channels to take irrigation where needed. Britannica, adds:

This system has survived basically in its original form and enables the area to support [presently] what has been claimed to be one of the densest agra- rian populations anywhere in the world.

So much so, it was recognized by UNESCO in 2000 as a World Heritage’ status.

Silk and spices.

I felt it appropriate to end this part with the two history making commodities: silk and spices; the desire and craving for which in Europe resulted in the big trading caravans from east to west and in whose name Christopher Columbus, accidentally discovered the New World.

Silk as defined by Britannica is:

Chapter illustration

…animal fibre produced by certain insects and arach- nids as building material for cocoons and webs…In commercial use, silk is almost entirely limited to fil- aments from the cocoons of domesticated silkworms.

Evidence exists that the silkworm was domesticated in China as far back as 5 to 6,000 years ago. And the earliest piece of silk fabric was found in an Egyptian royal tomb in the valley of the kings, dated at over 3,000 years ago.

Wikipedia defines defines spices as:

…a seed, fruit, root, bark, or other plant substance pri- marily used for flavoring, coloring or preserving food. Spices are distinguished from herbs, which are the leaves, flowers, or stems of plants used for flavoring or as a garnish. Many spices have antimicrobial properties.

Chapter illustration

There are listed nearly 6 dozen such herbs and spices. Among them are black pepper, cinnamon, cassia, cardamom, cloves, ginger, nutmeg and turmeric, all originating in south, east and southeast Asia and for which inhospitable deserts and treacherous oceans were crossed.

It probably all started when hunter gatherers roaming the wildernesses of Asia in search of food accidentally or intentionally added some of the spice plants to their unpalatable and smelly food. In due course other benefits of spices were discovered in addition to flavour enhancement; some were found to have medicinal property while others, as food preservers.

SPINNING AND WEAVING

Furs, sewing and leather.

Our cousins the Neanderthals, whom we have met earlier, covered themselves in the cold climes of Europe and elsewhere, with pelts and hides of animals they hunted such as the mammoth, deer and others. With their improved stone made tools they could skin their victims and scrape the inside from any residues of fat, flesh or what have you. They also cut out strips they used as belts. Sapiens did the same.

A great improvement occurred with the invention of sewing needles with threading eyes, from animal bones. Depending on where in the world, the needle arrived on the scene between 40,000 to 20,000 years ago. For thread animal sinew was privileged.

Those pelts were further improved by processing them into the first version of leather about 7,000 years ago. As explained by Britannica:

Fresh skins were dried in the sun, softened by pounding in animal fats and brains, and pre- served by salting and smoking.

Perhaps the culmination of this is the well preserved, fully dressed ‘Ice man’ or ‘Otzi’ accidentally discovered by tourists in 1991 at his burial place in the cold Tyrolean Alps. Scientists estimated he was about 45 years of age and lived over more than 5,000 years ago. As described in Wikipedia:

Chapter illustration

Ötzi wore…a coat, a belt, a pair of leggings, a loin- cloth and shoes, all made of leather of different skins. He also wore a bearskin cap with a leather chin strap. The shoes were waterproof and wide, seemingly de- signed for walking across the snow; they were con- structed using bearskin for the soles, deer hide for the top panels, and a netting made of tree bark. Soft grass went around the foot and in the shoe and functioned like modern socks….sewn together with sinew.

And for National Geographic to add that Otzi had:

…a fine collection of …tattoos. Numbering over 50 in total, they cover him from head to foot. These weren't produced using a needle, but by making fine cuts in the skin and then rubbing in charcoal.

Spinning is the process of preparing long strands of thread from short vegetal and animal fibers the like of flax, hemp, cotton and wool from sheep, goats and llamas. Hand spinning (image) is nothing more than twisting together the fibers mentioned with the aim of ending up with long, comparatively strong strands of thread wound spool-like fashion ready for further steps (image). According to HWN, hand spinning goes back to 10,000 years ago. The exception is silk which is naturally wound in long stands, around the silkworm cocoon so as to obviate the need for spinning .

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

But natural fibers, whether vegetal or animal need preparation before they are ready for spinning. For example after harvesting flax in ancient Egypt, the 60 to 100 cms long stems were subjected 6 or 7 steps beginning with separation of what is useful from what is not, submerging in water, and drying in the sun for several days. Wool, too , needed preparation. Following shearing, the fleece was sorted according to coarseness . It was then washed to remove natural wool grease and other contaminants, then combed to separate and straighten the fibers. This, at least, was the case in medieval Europe.

In his 1979 ‘ Book of Looms’, author Eric Broudy confesses that no one really knows how the idea of spinning fiber come to prehistoric man in the first place. Perhaps, it came:

…from observing certain vines that twined about each other…or by idle experimentation.

The so prepared strands are next woven. That is interlaced at right angles on a device called loom. The end result is a finished cloth ready to sew into garments or whatever else. Broudy describes a prehistoric hand looms as

Chapter illustration

… any frame or contrivance for holding [the ver- tical] threads parallel to permit the interlacing of the [horizontal threads] at right angle to form a [cloth].

The image illustrates one such simple hand loom, at the top of which the cloth is completed (weaved).

Once more, how did the idea of crisscrossing spun thread germinate in the heads of our prehistoric ancestors? Leaning on ethnologists, Broudy supposes they were perhaps inspired by bird nests in nature such as that of the weaverbird shown here. Whatever, making cloth on hand looms appeared, expectedly enough, among the first settled communities in Mesopotamia and Egypt. The former weaved wool, the latter linen from flax. In the Indus valley they worked with cotton and with silk in China.

Chapter illustration

ZIGGURATS, TEMPLES, ROADS AND ARENAS

As long as they led a nomadic lifestyle as hunter gatherers, our forebears needed no permanent dwelling given they were constantly on the move in search of food. They therefore, made do with tent like shelters made from whatever was available such as branches, large animal bones and hides. The modern representative of such is the igloo of the Eskimos in the far north.

With the advent of domestication of plants and animals and the establishment of settled communities of farmers, more durable construction material became a necessity. And the types of buildings diversified depending on their purpose: from dwellings to animal enclosures, to warehouses and to ceremonial places.

The hot, dry climate of Mesopotamia led to the development of mud bricks() as the material, par excellence, for construction. By mud is meant clay, bountiful on the banks of the Tigris and Euphrates. Mesopotamians, as we have previously seen were already familiar with clay pottery. They, now, moulded bricks of different sizes in wooden contraptions. They were left to bake under the scorching sun. By 5,000 years ago they had adapted the pottery kiln for their further treatment . They used bricks to built their important edifices, some still standing today, albeit with some reconstruction, such as palaces, elites housing and ziggurats attached to temple complexes (image). As Mesopotamian urban centers evolved the same bricks were used for sewers to drain effluent waste water away from populations. Babylonian times, from 4,000 years ago, saw the advent of glazed decorative bricks (image).

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

But those citizens who could not afford the solid and durable construction reverted to reasonably adequate housing made from the equally plentiful reeds on the banks of the great rivers (image). As explained by HWN:

Chapter illustration

Bundles of reeds can be bound together to form pil- lars and beams. Their tops can even be bent inwards and tied to shape an arch or a dome.

Similarly to Mesopotamia, Egypt is also a dry and hot place, benefitting from the mighty Nile River. Unsurprisingly, Egyptians too, developed sun dried clay bricks. They did not, however, adopt kiln baking till arrival of the Romans early in the first century CE. On the other hand, Egypt enjoyed an abundance of accessible granite, limestone and sandstone, with which they built the still standing pyramids and temple complexes.

I have in a previous narrative written about the uniqueness and grandeur of the pyramids; notably, the greatest of them all, that of pharaoh Khufu in Giza built some 4,500 years ago. Its base covered more than 50,000 sq m; it rose to 150 m and made use of 2,300,000 blocks of stone, each weighing over 2 tonnes approximately. According to HWN :

Chapter illustration

[Until the 19th century it was] the largest building ever created by man…. It has been estimated that St Peter's in Rome, St Paul's and Westminster Abbey in London, and the cathedrals of Florence and Milan could all be accommodated within its volume.

I have, in that earlier narrative, also quoted one source marveling at the achievement:

[The] construction of the great pyramids…. has yet to be fully explained and would be a major challenge to this day.

Indeed, what techniques were used to quarry, transport and lift the heavy stones into place with exquisite precision? To begin with, Egyptians had no lifting devices such as pulleys; neither did they operate wheeled transports. The massive blocks, from quarries to their final position on the face of the pyramids were lifted, carried and positioned with human and animal muscle power using levers, ropes, ‘wooden sledges’, Nile crafts, and ramps. As to how stone was separated from its quarry face, we have Britannica’s explanation thus:

For extracting sedimentary rock [limestone] the chief tool was the mason’s pick with a 2.5-kilogram metal [bronze] head and a 45-centimetre haft. With these picks vertical channels as wide as a man were cut around rectangular blocks, exposing five faces. The final separation of the sixth face was ac- complished by drilling rows of holes into the rock with metal bow drills. Wooden wedges were driven into the holes to fill them completely. The wedges were doused with water, which they absorbed and which caused them to expand, breaking the stone free from its bed….. In the extraction of igneous rock such as granite, which is much harder and stronger than limestone, the mason’s pick was supplemented by balls of dolerite weighing up to 5 kilograms, which were used to break the rock by beating and pounding. Granite was also drilled and sawed with the help of abrasives, and expanding wooden wedges were used in splitting.

At the building site the rough stones were precisely finished to their final forms, with particular attention to their exposed faces. This was done with metal chisels and mallets; squares, plumb bobs, and straightedges were used to check the accuracy of the work. These tools remained standard until the 19th century.

Not to mention the passages and the funerary chambers inside.

From 3500 years ago onwards, Egyptians, used stone, too, to great advantage in the buildings of temple complexes such as those in Karnak, Luxor and Abu Simbel. In contrast to the bulky pyramids, their architecture emphasized large, sculpted, free standing columns supporting equally artistically treated stone beams. These in turn bore the temple’s superstructure. Additionally, as in the case of the sanctuary at Abu Simbel, its entrance is flanked by gigantic statues of pharaoh Ramses II, cut in the rock face. As far as HWN is concerned:

Chapter illustration

This is stone architecture at its most monumental.

Between six and seven thousand years ago appeared in Europe two types of stone constructions: passage graves and megaliths, from Greek meaning huge stones.

As the name implies the passage grave was the resting place of important people. As shown in the image, it is a circular construction with a grass mound. At its center, reached via a stone passage is the tomb chamber. The image is of the passage grave at Newgrange in Ireland dating to 4,500 years ago. As described by HWN:

Chapter illustration

Huge slabs of stone, carved in intricate spiral pat- terns, form the walls of the chamber. At sunrise on the winter solstice (the shortest day of the year, when the sun itself seems in danger of dying) the rays penetrate the length of the passage to illumi- nate the innermost recess.

A well known megalith is Stonehenge in England . It is a monument of vertical and horizontal stone elements forming a circle of about 100 m diameter. The upright elements are 4 m high, 2m wide and weigh as much as 22 tonnes. Archaeologists believe that it served as a burial place.

Chapter illustration

I have located more than 60 innovations or inventions credited to the Romans during their preeminence first as a republic from 509 to 27 BCE, then as an empire till its demise in 476 CE. But, for our purpose we limit ourselves to a few emblematic construction achievements, briefly describe below.

To begin with, what did the Romans have at their disposal to undertake these impressive projects? In terms of metal they had a variety among them copper, iron and lead. For masonry, they not only used the fired bricks of earlier civilizations, but they could quarry limestone, marble and granite. Most famously however was the invention, 2,200 years ago, of ‘ Roman concrete’. By adding locally available volcanic ash, from the slopes of Mount Vesuvius, and crushed stone to the already common mixture of lime, sand and water, they produced a relatively strong concrete which could be substituted to brick masonry. Although it was only about a tenth as strong as present day concrete, it somewhat compensated with its longevity and resistance to the vagaries of the weather.

Romans made use of muscle power for construction work, as earlier peoples. It was somewhat alleviated by the use of modest lifting devices such as the pentaspastos and polyspastos , shown left and right in the image. The latter could lift up to maybe 6,000 kgs.

Chapter illustration

Beginning in 312 BCE, Romans built roads, primarily to ease and speed up the movement of troops and to administer and consolidated the lands conquered near and far. According to Britannica, the road network, eventually reached 80,000 kms in length:

Chapter illustration

… extending from Britain to the Tigris-Euphrates river system and from the Danube River to Spain and northern Africa…..

The Roman roads were notable for their straight- ness, solid foundations, cambered surfaces facili- tating drainage, and use of [Roman concrete]

They were topped with ‘dressed stone’().

Other great achievements are bridges and aqueducts supported on arches, exemplified by the ‘Pont du Gard’ in southern France (image). Built around 2,000 years ago it spans the river Gardon for 275 m at a height of nearly 50 m. Topping it, is a aqueduct (image) that carried an estimated 40,000 cu m of water daily for the town of Nimes, 50 kms away.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Such a feat would not have been possible without the arches supporting the whole structure. Inspired by those of Egypt and Greece, they were adapted by the Romans to became the most important supporting structural element in the absence of modern day reinforced concrete. No mortar is used, an arch is held in place by the accurate shaping of the stone elements in the arc. When loaded they are pressed harder against one another: the whole becoming stronger ( image).

Chapter illustration

Then there is the Coliseum amphitheater in the city of Rome itself. Just shy of 2,000 years old, it is elliptical in shape, measuring 190 x 155 m in length and width respectively and could seat 50,000 spectators variously at gladiator fights, man against beast contests, executions, mock battles and the enactment of scenes from Roman mythologies etc. It was built from volcanic stones, travertine limestone and Roman concrete.

Chapter illustration

We cannot discuss Roman heritage without a few lines on the great Roman temples epitomized by the complex in Baalbek consisting of the temples of Jupiter, Bacchus and Venus. According to ‘Culture Trip’, a global startup operating in travel, media and entertainment:

The sheer magnitude of these have created something of a puzzle for archaeologists as they continuously theorize as to how rocks of this grandeur could have been carved and assembled.

The temple of Jupiter was completed some 1,800 years ago. Both Britannica and Wikipedia laud it as a:

…massive building… [and]…colossal Roman temple, the largest of the Roman world.

As the image shows, it was a complex of porticos, courts and colonnades; all in the foreground of the sanctuary proper. The main court measured 104 x 103 m and the colonnade consisted of 84 granite columns brought from Aswan .Not a small feat considering the distances involved and the mountainous terrain to reach destination. The sanctuary itself, was 88 m long by 48 m wide. It was surrounded by 54 columns, each 2.3 m in diameter and 19 m tall. They carried 5 m high entablatures (image) upon which rested the cedar wood roof.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Under the heading ‘The Mystery of the Baalbek Foundation Stones’ a publication of ‘worldhistory.us’ tells us of the existence under the temple complex of 25 limestone blocks, each weighing some 400 tonnes. The stones were quarried in the vicinity:

It may never be known how the Baalbek foundation stones were cut, moved from the quarry uphill, then arranged precisely… Like the pyramids of Egypt…..

we may never know exactly what occurred in the past. We can, however, marvel at the ingenuity of ancient people.

Agony and Torment

AGONY & TORMENT

DEVASTATING MEDICAL HOLOCAUSTS

Chapter illustration

The Author NOVEMBER 2019

WHAT IS IT ALL ABOUT?

This narrative is the tale of micro-organisms; specifically the pathogens variously known as germs, bacteria, and viruses from the time they came into contact with man, a dozen millennia or so.

It is also the stories of three devastating killer diseases, they engendered. Specifically: the bubonic plague pandemic known as Black Death’ 700 years ago, the recurring epidemics of smallpox and the great influenza pandemic of just over 100 years ago. They have been the cause of boundless misery and immeasurable loss of life. Indeed, in different epochs of history , they have practically left no place on Earth untouched.

I have also included a few pages on the scourge of leprosy, the ugliest disease of them all and the one resulting in the worst kind of social alienation.

In preparing this narrative, I have relied on information from the acclaimed 1997 book ‘ Guns, Germs and, Steel’ by professor Jared Diamonds (DOB 1937). I have also gleaned relevant facts from publications located on the internet by: Ancient History Encyclopedia, Encyclopedia Britannica, Historyword.net, HistoryToday, History, Infoplease, Idaho State university, Mayo Clinic, National Geographic, Science Museum, Stanford.edu and Wikipedia as well from parts of the 2005 book ‘Epidemics and Pandemics’ by J . N Hays and, two or three more sources, named in the text.

PATOGENS’ DIRTY TRICKS

Chapter illustration

With the adoption of agriculture and the domestication of animals some 10 to 12,000 years ago, humans started to share living space and to have daily contacts with their cattle, sheep, goats, pigs, dogs and various birds etc. From them they received the gift of pathogens responsible for the killer diseases in human societies: smallpox, flu, tuberculosis, malaria, plague, measles, cholera, and whooping cough. In the words of Diamond:

The transfer [from animal to human] is not at all surprising, considering that many farmers live and sleep close to cows and their feces, urine, breath, and blood. Our intimacy with cattle has been going on for the 9,000 years since we domesticated them...[long enough time for the cow virus] to discover us nearby.

So, all of man’s communicable diseases, which for centuries have wreaked havoc among populations globally , started as animal ailments caused by animal pathogens which migrated to humans. Once there, they mutated to become human specific; meaning “confined to man”. The reasons for this, is because of the differences between the biology and immune systems of the former and latter hosts. The good news is that the majority of animal pathogens failed to make the transfer successfully. The bad news, though, is that the few ones which succeeded:

...have been the biggest killers of people [and as such] they have been decisive shapers of history.

Diamond continues:

Until World War II [1940’s], more victims of war died of war- borne microbes than of battle wounds….the winners of past wars were not always the armies with the best generals and weapons but were often merely those bearing the nastiest germs to transmit to their enemies.

More. For millennia before the invention of farming, our ancestors, the hunter gatherers, moved camp frequently in search of food and, obviously, in the process left behind their:

...own piles of feces with accumulated microbes and worm larvae.

In contrast, settled farmers lived near their own sewage and that of their neighbours, thus inadvertently causing a continuum of inter-infection within the community. It was made worse when some:

by gathering their feces and urine and spreading them as fertilizers on the fields where other people worked [resulting in their contamination with] fecal bacteria and worms.

How does contagion happen? First, the pathogen must be consumed by a host. For example a salmonella bacteria sits patiently in an infected egg or slice of meat until eaten by a person. Alternatively, it can reside in the saliva of mosquitoes, fleas , flies etc. awaiting the opportunity to pass, through the insects bites, to new hosts the germs of malaria, plague and typhus etc.

A most perverse method of transfer is via cannibalism; obviously quite rare nowadays. Diamond has witnessed, in the 1960’s, such practice in the highlands of New Guinea such as a person catching the laughing sickness (kuru) by eating the cadaver of someone who died of the disease. He mentions the babies who:

…made the fatal mistake of licking their fingers after playing with raw brains that their mother had cut out of dead kuru victims awaiting cooking.

Humans have two biologically activated lines of defence against the “dirty tricks” of pathogens. The first causes the increase of body temperature in the hope of ‘baking’ the intruders; the second is the secretion by immunization systems of antibodies to fight and hopefully defeat them. Even so, in the same group of people some succumb to a particular disease while others survive. These are individuals who, for some reason evolve genetically more robust defence systems. Better still, in the instances of smallpox, measles etc. these persons are given a bonus for their success in the form of lifelong immunity. Crucially over the centuries:

…human populations repeatedly exposed to a particular pathogen have come to consist of a higher proportion of individuals with those genes for resistance.

According to Darwin’s theory of evolution, micro-organisms are the first form of life on Earth. They made their entry about 3.8 billion years ago. They are then the forebears of all organisms: humans, plants and animals that have ever existed. And like all forms of life their main, indeed only, preoccupation is ensuring survival and reproduction. Among them are the useful, vital ones such as the micro-organisms responsible for soil fertility and the bacteria that purify our sewage in treatment plants; as well, of course, as the nasty ones under discussion here. In order to feed and multiply, germs need as many hosts as they can get. Hence the introduction of farming provided them with great opportunities in this respect. Diamond estimates that agricultural communities were demographically up to 100 times denser that hunting gathering groups, thus, facilitating the transmission of germs between their members.

It therefore follows that crowded, unsanitary towns and cities which emerged as centers of habitation, business, commerce and worship and as destinations for foreign traders and migrants from rural areas, eventually became fertile ground for communicable diseases and epidemics. The further development of international trade routes and across border military adventures, turned local epidemics into intercontinental pandemics.

All above not withstanding some diseases predate the crowding which started with the agriculture and domestication. Indeed according to Diamonds some germs affecting small groups of human are possibly million of years old. Among them leprosy we shall discuss later.

OF FLEAS AND RATS

Chapter illustration

Plague is a communicable disease caused by the bacteria ‘Yersinia pestis’ primarily infecting rodents such as rats, mice, rabbits etc. that are hosts to fleas feeding off them. When a rodent dies from the infection, its guest parasites need to quickly locate another potential host either animal or human nearby to move to. Not all rodents, though, are susceptible to the bacteria. Indeed, there are species of rats, rabbits and others that carry on happily despite an attack by the pathogen. Just as happily their colonies of flees continue to thrive on and off them; they have no reason to want to leave.

There are three types of plague caused by ‘Yersinia pestis’. The most common is Bubonic plague, whose agents are the black ‘Rattus rattus’ species of rat which cannot survive an attack of the plague bacterium. Moreover, it is the host of the  ‘Xenopsylla cheopis’ flea feeding on its blood. Thus when the rat dies from the infection, the parasite colony loses its source of nutrition. Rather than starve, it immediately seeks another healthy host. It is fortunate, for the fleas, that the late ‘Rattus rattus’ is fond of human companionship, sharing people’s food in homes, granaries flour mills and on board ships. It is, therefore a short jump for the parasitic insect. Once it pierces the skin of its new host, it passes to him/her the plague bacterium with devastating consequences.

An article in History Today by professor Ole J. Benedictow (DOB: 1941) of the University of Oslo, explain the sequence of events as follows:

…[Once] plague has killed off most of a contaminated rat colony, making it difficult for great numbers of fleas gathered [ to survive]... After three days of fasting, hungry rat fleas turn on humans. …[Following the flea bite], the infection takes three–five days to incubate in people before they fall ill, and another three–five days before, in 80 per cent of the cases, the victims die.

Thus, a person is passed the bubonic plague bacteria with the bite of a flea. Contamination also results of the handling of infected animals, specifically if a skin cut comes in contact with its blood. Indeed, as recently as 2012 an American contracted the disease while trying to remove an infected mouse from the mouth of his choking pet cat.

Infected humans exhibit egg-size lumps called ‘buboes’, hence the name of the illness. They are black and appear, primarily, in the regions of the groin and armpits (image). The latter is what gave the disease its other popular name during the great pandemic of the 14th century: Black Death. And there can also appear other symptoms such as vomiting, diarrhea, weakness, bleeding from the mouth. Las but not least is the death of tissue at the extremities such as fingers or toes. The image on the left is of the gangrened fingers of the 2012 American victim of bubonic plague mentioned above.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

Bubonic plague pandemics have occurred more than once, the latest in the 19th century disposing of tens of million overall. Even today, according to the Mayo Clinic it, annually hits possibly as many as 5,000 persons globally. Very few of them die however thanks to modern medicine.

Chapter illustration

But the one that is most remembered in history is the Black Death pandemic between 1346 and 1352 CE. A cataclysmic episode that ravaged the populations of Asia and Europe. It originated in East Asia. By the end of 1346, it had devastated India and a big chunk of today’s Russia.

It was, also, carried westward with trading caravans, reaching the Middle East and causing innumerable deaths in Iraq, Syria Lebanon and Palestine/Israel. It reached Mecca in 1949. Genoese and other merchant ships then carried the Plague to Alexandria ,the rest of North Africa and to the Mediterranean sea ports of Europe (map)

There are also accounts that the disease advanced westward to the Crimean peninsula north of the Black Sea by Mongol conquerors. Unable to break into the town of Kaffa (today Feodosiya) they, instead, catapulted over its walls the cadavers of their own soldiers who had succumbed to the disease. That town at the time was a trading post for Genoese merchants, who fled with their vessels towards the Mediterranean. Accompanying them on board were infected rats with their colonies of fleas.

In those days many of the merchant ships plying the Mediterranean Sea with merchandise and possibly soldiers, consisted of galleys propelled by a large number of rowers (image). Thus, in the words of Hays:

Chapter illustration

Crews were therefore large enough to sustain a chain of plague infections through a voyage and still have enough men to bring the ship to port [and, in turn, start a plague epidemic in the town and its hinterland]

Thanks to the Genoese, between 1347 and 1352, every corner of Europe was losing life at a colossal rate. A contemporary, Giovanni Boccaccio (1313-1375 CE) an Italian writer and poet describes the progress of the disease as follows:

All the citizens did little else except to carry dead bodies to be buried ... At every church they dug deep pits down to the water-table; and thus those who were poor who died during the night were bundled up quickly and thrown into the pit. In the morning when a large number of bodies were found in the pit, they took some earth and shovelled it down on top of them; and later others were placed on top of them and then another layer of earth, just as one makes lasagne with layers of pasta and cheese.

According to the research and calculations carried out by professor Benedictow, fully 50 million Europeans were killed by the pandemic out of a generally accepted population of 80 million at that time. No wonder he comments that:

This is a truly mind-boggling statistic….A historical turning point, as well as a vast human tragedy, the Black Death …is unparalleled in human history…

The medical sciences in early 14th century Europe were nowhere near able to alleviate the sufferings of sick citizens. In the words of Wikipedia:

The most authoritative account at the time came from the medical faculty in Paris in a report to the king of France that blamed the heavens, in the form of a conjunction of three planets in 1345 that caused a "great pestilence in the air".

With no help forthcoming from those in authority, people turned to religion for explanation of what was happening. J. N. Hays tells us that both Islam and Christianity attributed the pandemic to an act of God. But whereas Muslims interpreted it as:

... a “mercy and martyrdom” for the faithful...on a par with death in a [Jihad]

Christian on the other hand, saw it as :

...a punishment sent by God to scourge sinful humanity....[Some interpreted it as a] general punishment for the evils of the times, through God’s particular wrath at the clergy for their failings...[Others suspected that] a love of indecent clothing had sparked divine ire.

Accordingly, sources report that, pity and acts of charity increased in the hope of forgiveness. In the extreme some people took to self- flagellation as a way to atonement for their and others sins. HISTORY recounts that flagellants:

Chapter illustration

…traveled from town to town and engaged in public displays of penance and punishment: They would beat themselves and one another with heavy leather straps studded with sharp pieces of metal while the townspeople looked on.

Others gave free rein to their superstitions and prejudices. Jews were suspected of poisoning wells with infecting substances. In consequence tens of thousands’ of them were burnt in France, Switzerland, Germany and elsewhere.

As for the legacy of that great calamity, author Hays informs us that:

The Black Death [pandemic] was a demographic event of nearly unique significance. The sudden loss [of possibly more than half] of the population of Europe, North Africa, and western Asia created dramatically different economic, social, political, and cultural situations.

In the specific case of Europe he explains that in 1347 it had reached a level of population at the limit of what the economy and the agricultural technology could adequately sustain. In consequence, land became scarce while labour was plentiful. Meaning, of course that owners of land and property paid a pittance to workers while charging them an arm and leg for rent and products. But the pandemic changed all that: it had a silver lining for the poorer classes when it finally ended around 1352. With so many deaths, labour became scarce and thus commanded a premium in wages. Rents went down to attract the few healthy citizens left. All in all an unexpected new prosperity for those at the bottom of the social scale.

NO! VARIOLA IS NOT A PASTA

Chapter illustration

Smallpox, as we have seen, evolved as a specifically human affliction at the time agriculture and animal domestication arose. It is caused by the ‘variola’ virus whose ancestor, according to Diamond, is the cattle pathogen ‘cowpox’. As explained by the Mayo Clinic, smallpox is:

…a contagious, disfiguring and often deadly disease….No cure or treatment…. exists. A vaccine can prevent smallpox…

Its onset is marked by the symptoms common with other diseases : fever, headache and possibly vomiting. A few days later, they are followed by the unmistakable red spots, which eventually cover the whole body which:

…turn into small blisters filled with clear fluid, which then turns into pus. Scabs begin to form eight to nine days later and eventually fall off, leaving deep, pitted scars.

It is transmitted from person to person through “fairly prolonged face to face contact”, or by breathing in droplets exhaled by an infected person. It can also be caught by coming into contact with garments and other items used by sick individuals. Evidently, it thrives in densely populated locations causing more damage in urban than in rural settings.

Crucially, however, the lucky ones who survive a smallpox epidemic gain lifelong immunity from it. In other words they can no longer be affected by the variola virus. Even more importantly, a geographic zone subject to repeated smallpox epidemics ends up, in due time, with a majority of immunized population. It becomes endemic. That is to say, crudely, that the virus is lying in wait for the susceptible candidates such as newborns and visitors from hitherto unaffected places.

The disease dates to more than 3,000 years ago , as evidenced by eruptions on the well preserved mummy of pharaoh Ramses V of Egypt (image). The first written work on the subject, is a Chinese medical volume going back to 340 CE. The Chinese were also the inventors of inoculation otherwise called variolation. The procedure consisted of taking out scab or pus from the blisters of sick people and passing it on to sane ones via the nose or a cut in the skin. Clearly, it was hoped that through stimulation of a minor smallpox infection a healthy subject would develop immunity from the disease(). Variolation helped but the amount of virus introduced was haphazard leading, at times to full contamination and death. Subsequently, the procedure spread to the Middle East and Africa. From Constantinople it was taken to Europe in the 1700’s by the wife of the British ambassador to the Ottomans.

Chapter illustration

Though, to this day smallpox is not curable it can nevertheless be prevented thanks to vaccines. The first vaccine was introduced in 1798 by a English physician Edward Jenner (1749-1823) who observed that farm ladies who milked cows sometimes contracted cowpox, a milder version smallpox; which nevertheless immunized the milkmaids against the latter. He, therefore, as explained in ‘ History of Vaccines’:

...inoculated an eight-year-old boy with cowpox matter from a blister on the [hand of an English milkmaid]. He then repeatedly attempted to “challenge” the cowpox inoculation by exposing the boy to smallpox material—but the boy never fell ill. Jenner had demonstrated smallpox immunization.

Smallpox as a cause of epidemics was declared eradicated in 1980, by the World Health Organization (WHO) in the wake of a successful global campaign of immunization it championed.

Old World: Asia, Europe & Africa

Those telltale marks found on Ramses V’s mummy seem to indicate that the inhabitants of the Nile river valley, numbering some 3,000,000 souls at the time, were no strangers to smallpox epidemics at least from 3,000 years ago From Egypt the virus travelled with traders to India’s Ganges river valley population of about 15,000,000. And later, to the rest of Asia.

As far as India is concerned, smallpox has remained an endemic disease well into the 20th century. Until then epidemics followed one another at the cost of untold millions of lives. So much so that a goddess was assigned to it. It helped that Indian population steadily rose. From 80 million in 1000 CE, to 280 million in 1900 and 600 million in 1980 when it ended as seen above. And, although variolation was known for centuries on the Indian subcontinent , it was never used on a large scale.

In southwestern Asia, the Persian doctor Abubakr Mohammad Zakaria al Razi (854-925 CE), introduced by Wikipedia as an “important figure in the history of medicine”, wrote that smallpox was endemic in his region from the 6th century CE if not earlier. It was apparently made so by the arrival of Muslim armies in the 8th century . Furthermore, as part of the conquests of Islam the virus was disseminated, too, along the length of North Africa and into Spain in 710 CE.

There are many speculations about the arrival of smallpox in Western Europe. Among them, is its spread northeasterly from Spain to the rest of the continent. Another is with the “movement of European Christians to and from southwestern Asia in the course of the Crusades during the 11 th and 12th centuries” according to Idaho State University (ISU) . Whatever, what is certain is that by the 15th century, Western Europe had become, in the words of Wikipedia, an:

endemic reservoir from which smallpox spread to other parts of the world, as an accompaniment of successive waves of European exploration and colonization.

A couple of centuries after the conquest of North Africa by the armies of Islam, Arab traders crossed the Red Sea and landed on its east coast in search of goods and persons for sale into slavery abroad. On the Atlantic Ocean coast, the Portuguese established a trading post in the late 1400’s. Both Arab and European intruders brought the gift of smallpox to a huge continent hitherto free from it. The ensuing massive trade in black bodies for a life of slavery in the Americas exacerbated the viral problem. As expressed by ISU:

The slave trade provided excellent conditions for spreading smallpox, and since raiders penetrated deep into the interior the overland caravans carried the disease far and wide in central Africa…. Those who failed to contract smallpox on the trek to the coast were liable to be infected while awaiting shipment or on board ship…

New World: the Americas

It is a well-documented episode. From the 1500’s onwards European conquistadores and colonists/settlers entered the New World with deadly germs in their baggage. They included, in addition to the variola virus, those at the root of:

...measles, influenza and typhus [followed closely by]…diphtheria, malaria, mumps, pertussis, plague, tuberculosis and yellow fever…

Not having had any domestic animals to speak of, Amerindians “had neither immune nor genetic resistance” to those. So much so that Diamond writes:

For the New World as a whole, the Indian population decline in the century or two following Columbus’s arrival is estimated to have been as large as 95 percent.

It all began with the arrival of Christopher Columbus in the Caribbean in  October 1492. He and his group were welcomed effusively by the indigenous people, the Taino Indians. Sadly however through abuse and mistreatment but mostly through contraction of smallpox, they were practically completely decimated by the 1540’s. The islands were repopulated with colonists from Europe and slaves from Africa.

In April 1500 Pedro Alvares Cabral claimed today’s Brazil as a colony of Portugal. Again in less than 100 years the native population had virtually disappeared thanks to recurring smallpox epidemics. Even those in the thick rainforests were infected through the “enthusiasm of Jesuit missionaries for converts”.

Twenty years later, Spanish conquistador Narvaez, sailing from Cuba arrived on the east coast of today’s Mexico. Among his group was an African down with smallpox. What ensued is vividly described by a friar who came to Mexico in 1525:

…when the smallpox began to attack the Indians… they died in heaps, like bedbugs. Many others died of starvation, because, as they were all taken sick at once, they could not care for each other, nor was there anyone to give them bread or anything else. In many places it happened that everyone in a house died, and, as it was impossible to bury the great number of dead, they pulled down the houses over them in order to check the stench that rose from the dead bodies so that their homes became their tombs.

Overall, there may have been, at that time, three or four dozen million Indians in the territories taken by the Iberians. Among them the Empire of the Aztec in Mexico with 6 million people, and that of the Inca on the waste coast of South America. It was home to no less than 10 million inhabitants.

The British, Dutch and French colonists started arriving on the eastern seaboard of the United States in the early 1600’s; mostly immune to smallpox from childhood in their homes in Europe. Some among them tried deliberately to infect the susceptible local populations. One episode related by ISU is in the form of a question from a British commanding officer and answer by his subordinate during an Indian insurrection in 1763. It goes like this:

[Q]: Could it not be contrived to send smallpox among these disaffected tribes of Indians? We must on this occasion use every strategem in our power to reduce them. [A]: I will try to inoculate the [ bastards or word to this effect] with some blankets that may fall in their hands…

Smallpox did not remain the killer Amerindians exclusively. It also hit upon the earliest generations of Europeans born in the colonies. It arrived on board ships with fresh colonists from Europe as well as black slaves from Africa. Additionally, by a twist of fate, susceptible Europeans caught the virus from Indians infected by the earlier colonists in the first place. So much so that from the 1600’s, as stated by ISU:

...smallpox was endemic in all the larger European cities, with epidemics occurring at intervals of a decade or so…causing substantial numbers of deaths among the settlers, especially those born in the colonies.

The source continues:

…variolation, entered the struggle against smallpox in 1721, which changed the situation among the whites but not the Indians [because they had no access to it].

As for Jenner’s vaccine, it joined the fight against smallpox in the 1800’s. Once more it reduced the number of victims among the European population at the exclusion of the Indians who faced:

Massive and devastating pandemics...in 1801-1802 and in 1836-1840 [which] led to the virtual extinction of many tribes of indigenous North Americans.

According to professor Diamond, evidence exists that the Indian population in North America in the 1500’s , a century before arrival of the settlers had numbered no less than 20 million.

FIRST WORLD WAR MEDICAL HOLOCAUST

Chapter illustration

This heading relates to one of the most devastating pandemic in history. It is the globe spanning influenza affliction of just over one hundred years ago, at the conclusion of World War I in 1918.

The flu micro-organism had its origin with pigs and birds. In time it became man specific. According to the Mayo Clinic, influenza or flu, for short, is a contagious disease with a predilection for the respiratory system. It can be contracted by breathing in the droplet released by an infected person when he/she sneezes, coughs or even speaks. Or by coming in contact with a contaminated object such a phone etc. a short jump for the virus to “eyes, nose or mouth”. The symptoms of the affliction are familiar: fever, headache, cough sore throat etc. So long as they are the outcome of the same virus, season after season, the immune system has adapted and is able to limit the damage.

Alas, however, the flu virus has the capacity to mutate into new strains (versions) unknown to the immune system which, consequently, is overwhelmed on first encounter with the modified parasite. As explained by Diamond:

The constant evolution or recycling of new strains of flu with differing antigens [molecular pieces of the microbe], explain why your having gotten flu two years ago didn’t protect you against the different strain that arrived this year.

Such was the case with the H1N1 virus that struck worldwide in the spring of 1918. According to specialists in virology, it is likely that the mutation took place in China because, some speculate, of the Chinese affinity for pork.

How did the disease progress once a person contracted it. According to a publication by Stanford.edu quoting one physician:

...patients with seemingly ordinary influenza would rapidly develop the most viscous type of pneumonia that has ever been seen and later when cyanosis [bluish skin on account of insufficient oxygen in the blood] appeared in the patients, "it is simply a struggle for air until they suffocate.

Another doctor is reported stating that patients:

...died struggling to clear their airways of a blood-tinged froth that sometimes gushed from their nose and mouth.

It did not help, of course, that the medical sciences of the day were not up to facing the vicious intruder. So much so that the Journal of the American Medical association dated 28.12.1918 wrote:

... 1918...a year momentous as the termination of the most cruel war in the annals of the human race.... unfortunately a year in which developed a most fatal infectious disease causing the death of hundreds of thousands of human beings. Medical science... must [now] turn with its whole might to combating the greatest enemy of all, infectious disease.

The pandemic spread to the four corners of the world, affecting 4 to 500 million of its population of less than 2 billion at the time, and taking the lives of between 20 and 40 million persons of all ages overall. India alone suffered more than a 12 million deaths; in Iran between 1 and two million lost their lives. As for the USA, France, Britain, Japan, and Brazil they contributed 675,000, 400,000, 228,000, 400,000 and 300,000 lost lives respectively.

The flue pandemic reach places via trade route and shipping lanes. But, perhaps the major contributor of H1N1 was the Great War itself. It was one of trenches (image) in which and from which millions of combatants lived and fought in atrocious climatic and sanitary conditions. Add to this the weakening of natural immunity through chronic malnourishment and exposure to chemical warfare() and, in the words of National Geographic:

Chapter illustration

The overcrowded trenches and encampments of the First World War became the perfect hosts for the disease...As troops moved, so the infection traveled with them.

And troops being moved in crowded sea transports around the world helped spread the disease globally. It was enough for one individual to be infected to start a pandemonium.

THE UGLIEST OF THEM ALL

Chapter illustration

Leprosy, from Greek meaning ‘fish scale’ is defined by WHO as :

...a chronic infectious...mainly affects the skin, the peripheral nerves, mucosal surfaces of the upper respiratory tract and the eyes. Leprosy is known to occur at all ages ranging from early infancy to very old age.

Britannica adds:

Destruction of the peripheral nerves...leads to a loss of sensation, which, together with progressive tissue degeneration, may result in the extremities’ becoming deformed and eroded.

Leprosy is also called Hansen disease, after the Norwegian physician Gerhard Henrik Armauer Hansen (1841-1912). His investigations led to his discovery in 1873 of the culprit in the form of a bacterium subsequently named:  ‘Mycobacterium leprae’. It was presumed that it enters a victim’s body through a cut on the skin or through the mucous membranes of the nose. Transmission from an infected individual to a healthy one requires sustained and close contact between the two. Leprosy cannot be caught through occasional or casual contact. This is the reason why the vast majority of people who live with and look after lepers stay healthy . It remains, however, that the most at risk are the undernourished poor with de-facto weak immune systems.

Deceivably, incubation of the bacterium takes years before the illness sets in. So much so, that one may be a child when infected and an adult by the first signs of the disease. From there on, in the words of Britannica:

...the course of the disease is mainly one of increasing disability and disfigurement, slowly progressing through the years even though it does not usually cut life short.

Eventually, to quote Wikipedia, those afflicted end up with:

...skin that may be insensitive to temperature or pain... nerve problems including numbness or tenderness in the hands or feet...tissue loss, causing fingers and toes to become shortened and deformed, as cartilage is absorbed into the body.

We have indicated, earlier, that unlike plague, smallpox and influenza, leprosy predates human sedentariness and animal domestication by a long shot. Indeed, Britannica states that genetic examination of the bacterium puts its origin to at least 100,000 years ago. It evolved either in west Africa or in southwestern Asia, from where it migrated to the four corners of the world.

As with all contagious diseases, Leprosy accompanied travelling merchants, slave traders and armies. A human skeleton dating from 4,000 years ago, recently discovered in India, exhibited defects commensurate with leprosy, at a time when there existed commercial dealings between the Indus Valley civilizations and those of Mesopotamia and ancient Egypt. Further. According to the same wisdom, Alexander the Great (356-323 BCE) soldiers, returning home from their invasion of India, carried with them the disease to the eastern Mediterranean.

Leprosy caused havoc in the Europe of the Middle Ages, specifically between 1000 and 1350 CE. From there it travelled with pilgrims and Crusaders to the Holy Land. And ultimately to the Americas with the colonists/settlers and west African slaves.

Given the ugly and repulsive ravages on the human body, it is no wonder that lepers, as victims were called, were kept at arm’s length from the rest of society. Author J.N. Hays writes in the context of Europe between the 11th and 14th century CE:

Medieval leprosy affords perhaps the Western world’s clearest and most dramatic example of the relationships between disease, social stigmatization, and theological interpretations.

To begin with, religious authorities claimed that leprosy is of divine origin. It was sent down by God to punish lecherous individuals, gluttons and other great sinners. Indeed, the clergy decreed that lepers’ sins were so grave as to be condemned to “a lifetime of progressive disfigurement” beyond redemption no matter how they tried to atone.

From the societal perspective, as soon as an individual was determined to be infected, he/she became practically a dead person to be banished, never to be seen again. Hays writes:

A ritual, formalized in 1179.....symbolically severed the victim from his or her community, in effect pronouncing the victim dead, an impression reinforced by throwing cemetery earth on the sufferer.

Britannica agrees, adding that a funeral service for the ‘living dead’ leper was organized, and his estate divided between his inheritors.

Moreover, at a time when it was thought leprosy was extremely contagious, every measure was taken to keep those affected away from the rest. So much so that according to Hays they were required to wear identifying clothes and to carry bells to broadcast their whereabouts. Further, they were instructed:

...when... on a journey not to return an answer to anyone who questions you, till you have gone off the road [away from wind],so that he may take no harm from you...[and not]...to touch infants or young folk, whosoever they may be, or to give them...any of you possessions.

More drastic was the action of King Philip V of France (1293-1322) who ordered the killing of lepers.

Generally, unless a patient was rich enough to live solitarily in his own premises, those infected were sent out of towns and villages into camps called ‘leprosaria’. According to Britannica, there were about 19,000 such ‘hospitals, across Europe in 1200. By the 1500s leprosy had, for reasons unknown, practically disappeared from western Europe except in Scandinavia. In Norway, the country of Hansen it lingered till the 20 the century.

The stigma attached to , and ostracism suffered by European leprosy victims applied elsewhere in the world, give or take a few details. Some examples. In Japan, those with leprosy were required to live away from healthy people. They were to be found begging in the vicinity of places of worship. As late as 1909 and until 1996, lepers were sent to sanatoria in isolated locations to ensure against contamination of the healthy citizens. Those who refused to go were forcibly removed by the authorities from their homes which were then disinfected in the presence of neighbours. Even the families of sick persons were shunned by their communities. An article in ‘The Guardian’ dated 13th April 2016 adds:

The segregation law, which was not repealed until 1996, forced patients to undergo abortions and sterilisation. They were made to perform backbreaking work for poverty pay, and subjected to imprisonment without trial for assaulting staff or attempting to escape.

Leprosy in China goes back 2500 years. Those affected suffered the cruelty of being removed from their communities. Even those who recovered were avoided. The People’s Republic of China, has since the 1950s created ‘Recovery Villages’ in remote areas of the vast country for the isolation of those former patients. A report by Reuters dated 19th January 2007 explains:

Even though they are cured of the infection [see later], they still live in an isolated colony in China’s southwestern Sichuan province and have done so for decades since being sent there by the government to keep them out of sight.

As we have seen, leprosy existed in India 4,000 years ago. Lepers over the centuries have been institutionally badly treated and guarded against. They suffered a fate comparable to, if not worse than, that of the ‘Dalit’ or Untouchables, the lowest of the low social class, in the Hindu Caste system. In 1898, the colonial (British) government of India promulgated a law to segregate lepers by gender to eliminate any possibility of reproduction.

As of December 2017 there were more than 100 discriminatory laws against leprosy sufferers in India. They include, in addition to victims having to live in segregated colonies, the law of 1990 which prohibits ex-victims from travelling by train despite that, by then, leprosy was ‘curable’ (see later) and known to be non-contagious. To cut a long story short we quote the statement appearing in the ‘Financial Times’ in April 2017:

The World Health Organisation (WHO) declared leprosy officially eliminated as a public health problem in India in 2005, but the disease is still widespread in regions where, doctors say, poverty and stigma have kept patients hidden and untreated.

And the words of a senior indian judge reported in the ‘ Hindu’ in September 2018:

Chapter illustration

At present, majority of the populace afflicted with leprosy live as a marginalised section in society, deprived of even basic human rights. This manifestly results in violation of the fundamental right to equality and right to live with dignity.

The image on the right is for a patient awaiting to receive medication.

According to WHO, there were in 2018, 208,619 new cases of leprosy globally. Worldwide there are between 2 and 3 million cases. The largest number of which occurred among the India’s poor populations. In second and third places are Brazil and Indonesia respectively.

Finally is leprosy curable? Yes if we mean stopping the degeneration of the body. No, if we mean returning to pre-infection condition. In other words, according to the Center for disease control, treatment:

does not reverse nerve damage or physical disfiguration that may have occurred before the diagnosis.

Humours and the Yin and the Yang

HUMOURS AND THE YIN AND THE YANG

DOCTORS OF YESTER ERAS

The Author JANUARY, 2020

Chapter illustration

INTRODUCTION

In the preceding narrative we have seen that humans first met with disease when they began to live close to their domesticated animals some 10 to 12,000 years ago; the latter gifting them with germs hitherto unbeknownst to them.

Since that first day, until quite recently on the historical time scale, people have tried to solve the mysteries of infections, contagion and epidemics, attempting to figure out their causes , how to avoid them and how to recover from . They met with modest results if that. In this narrative we look at such efforts from the earliest civilizations of Mesopotamia and Egypt, to Antiquity with Greece and Rome, to the lands of Islam and medieval Europe up to its Renaissance. We similarly look at what the explanations and cures contemplated by the rich early civilizations of India and China.

Around the Mediterranean, a theory of disease prevailed for a long time, in fact until the 1800’s. It may have originated with the Egyptians or even earlier, but was developed by the Greeks and passed on to the Romans and the Europeans thereafter. It was privileged, too, with Muslim physicians. This being the case , I felt it appropriate to describe it at the outset.

It is called the theory of ‘bodily humours’. There were four of them: blood, yellow bile, black bile, and mucus corresponding to the four elements of the universe: fire, air, earth and water. For good health, it was imperative to keep all four humours in balance; otherwise an excesse quantity of one or the other resulted in an abnormality the type and severity of which depended on the problematic humour. For example an excess of blood (paired with air) “thought to be produced in the liver” made a person sanguine : optimistic and confident. To the contrary an overproduction of yellow bile (paired with fire) “produced in the gall bladder” made one bad tempered and choleric. And depression was caused by too much black bile (paired with earth) “allegedly coming from the spleen”. All this is conveniently summarized in the table below taken from Medical News Today.

Chapter illustration

And how does one go about balancing the humours. Or more to the point , cutting down the excess quantity. Simply with “a vomitive, laxative or diuretic”. But perhaps worst of all was the withdrawal of blood or bloodletting which was practiced up until the 19th century in ignorance of the fact that it could lead to shock and death; as confirmed by ScienceNordic:

...over the years [bloodletting] has killed significantly more patients than the few who benefited from this treatment.

Bloodletting was either performed ‘mechanically’ as shown in the image on the right respectively in medieval times and in the mid-19th century, or through the intermediary of a blood sucking medicinal leech shown on the left (see 1 in Appendix)

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

As usual, I have gleaned information from the Web. The sources I have finally selected are entries, publications and others in Ancient History Encyclopedia (AHE), Encyclopedia Britannica (BRIT),Encyclopedia.com, Historyworld.net (HWN), History Extra (HE), Los Angeles Times, Medical News Today (MNT), National Geographic (NG), New World Encyclopedia (NWE), Resaearchgate (RG), ScienceNordic (SN), WebMD and Wikipedia (WIKI).

THE BEGINNING

As soon as Homo sapiens became cognizant, that is: able to think, reason, remember past events and imagine future ones etc. they identified in the flora they gathered not only herbs fit to eat but also non-edible even poisonous varieties, useful nonetheless as pain relievers and others. Interestingly, the extracts of some of these plants are used in modern medicine. Snakeroot for example, long favoured in India against “snakebites, epilepsy and mental disorders is nowadays part of the combat against hypertension. Similarly, foxglove also of Indian origin , was traditionally the cure for the swelling of legs affected by oedema(). It is currently a component of drugs for heart treatment. Finally, curare long placed by Amazonians on the tips of arrows and darts to immobilize prey, is today an “important muscle relaxant in modern surgery”.

But for any discomfort more serious than a common cold was taken to be caused by supernatural forces. Enters the shaman(). His duty , in the words of BRIT:

...was to extract the evil intruder, be it dart or demon, by counterspells, incantations, potions, suction, or other means.

There is agreement that the earliest surgical procedure was a hole in the skull or trepanning (image). Curiously it emerged independently among cultures in a few locations around the world. The first punctured skull was discovered in 1865 in Peru and dated to about 3,500 years ago. The perforation was done by either scraping bone or drilling down to the “dura mater” membrane covering the brain (image). The removed bone was covered with skin. Indications are that it was carried out on live subjects, who, improbably enough, did recover.

Chapter illustration

Less consensus exists as to purpose of skull trepanning. One version suggests that some shamans volunteered to undergo the procedure to show mere mortals, by recovering, their closeness to the spirits and their power of intercession with them. Another version proposes that the hole created a passage for the spirits inhabiting the body of a sick person to depart it. A third, proposed by HE appearing in BBC History Magazine in April 2016, gives credit to the scientific thinking of those early people by proposing that:

Chapter illustration

With head wounds a familiar consequence of conflict or accident, practitioners might have observed the course of infection and realised that dead bone would eventually disintegrate.... Removing these fragments manually would have been worth a try.

HEALERS AND THE HAMMURABI CODE

As every 6th grader already knows: Mesopotamia, mostly today’s Iraq, is the place where human organized societies began. The first civilized polity was Sumer some 6,500 years ago. Illness, in those days was always attributed to angry gods seeking to punish sinners.In the words of history scholar Jean Bottero (1914-2007) quoted by AHE:

Every breach of whatever norm ...became an offence against the rule of the gods, a `misdeed’ against them, a `sin’. And as sovereigns punish anything that defies their authority, it was now up to the gods to suppress such unruliness with suitable punishments. These punishments were the ills and misfortunes of life.

Even righteous, sin-free people could be made to suffer by malevolent spirits merely out of spite. They entered the body and wreaked havoc. Worse, even the dead could harm the living as explained by historian Robert Biggs (DOB: 1934), quoted by AHE:

The dead – especially dead relatives – might also trouble the living, particularly if family obligations to supply offerings to the dead were neglected. Especially likely to return to trouble the living were ghosts of persons who died unnatural deaths or who were not properly buried - for example, death by drowning or death on a battlefield.

Clearly, then, faced with such overwhelming foes, Mesopotamian society badly needed intermediaries to intercede with the gods and combat the evil spirits, so as to keep their harm at bay. Enter the healers about 5,000 years ago. Much respected, they came from educated classes and were incorporated in the priestly class. They attended special schools attached to temples and graduated in one of three disciplines:

As divination specialists to read omens and diagnose a disease and foresee its course.

As exorcists who could dislodge an evil spirit from a person’s body and appease angry gods.

As physicians who treated patients by a combination of the supernatural and empirical medicine (i.e. based on experience and observation).

Among healers, too , were those who attended to toothaches. A painfultooth was believed to be the work of a ‘tooth worm’ which according to historian Biggs, begged the gods to:

Let me live between the teeth and jaw! I will suck the blood from the teeth! I will chew upon the food in the jaw!

Notwithstanding , healers-dentists proceeded with incantations before either pulling the bad tooth or prescribing herbal concoctions.

Mesopotamian healers were cognizant of the importance of cleanliness to keep patients free from infections. They also knew of scores of “vegetal, animal and mineral” ingredients from which to prepare remedies. Taking, for example, an injury to the cheek, in Babylon, a healer would begin by washing both his hands and the wound with a solution of beer and hot water (see 2 in Appendix). He would then proceed according to author Emily K . Teall reported by AHE, to:

...pound together fir-turpentine, pine-turpentine, tamarisk, daisy, flour of Inninnu; mix in milk and beer in a small copper pan; spread on skin, bind on him.

As for antiseptics he would have resorted to a mixture of “alcohol, honey, and myrrh”. Every stage of the procedure was accompanied by incantations to stave off any evil spirits.

By and large the practice of healing was highly regulated. The famous ‘Code of Hammurabi’ king of Babylon, dating some 3,800 years ago aimed at organizing the lives, occupations etc. of his subjects contained clauses relating to the practices of healing and surgery. According to an RG publication, the Code among other things:

...laid down acceptable medical fees for the first time in history. Retribution for injuries sustained because of medical treatment was outlined; compensation was influenced by social status – least for plebeians and slaves. Some regulations were quite Draconian, e.g. a healer causing death or blindness to a high born person, had his hands cut off. Healers did not work on certain days of the month, considered unlucky, and it was unethical to attend to hopeless cases. Also included were instructions for veterinarians, barbers, dental surgeons and wet-nurses.

Healers were remunerated for their interventions. The fees, however varied with the status of the sick man\woman’s family. Upper class people paid in gold while more modest clients compensated healers with “a bowl of soup or a clay cup”.

And yet, inevitably, Mesopotamian healing remained heavily dependent on magic and superstition. As told by author, K.R Nemet-Nejat, should an exorcist come across a black pig while on his way to a patient , he will deduce that his client would die. On the other hand should he chances to see a white pig he will understand that he would live. Dreams and visions, as well, had their meanings. In this context the author writes:

If, when he was suffering from a long illness, he saw a dog, his illness will return to him; he will die. If...he saw a gazelle, that patient will recover. If ...he saw a wild pig, when you have recited an incantation for him, he will recover.

In the final analysis healers, of necessity, could not be and were not held responsible if patients failed to recover and indeed, died. If in spite of their best efforts and intents, if in spite of assiduously reciting the right incantations , going through the required devotional acts and prescribing the correct medicines, the patient succumbed then it simply meant that at least some of the all- powerful, capricious and thin-skinned gods were still not assuaged. Or, the healers simply underestimated the gravity of the sin(s) at the origin of the illness.

We close with the legacy of Mesopotamian medicine. Teall concludes that ancient Egyptian medicine was inspired by it. In turn Egyptians influenced the Greeks. Or:

More than a thousand years prior to the lifetime and teaching of Hippocrates [see hereinafter]…medicine in pre-1000 BCE Mesopotamia was a well-established profession that included diagnosis, pharmaceutical applications, and the proper treatment of wounds.

LEARNING FROM THE MUMMIES

One of the oldest world civilizations, Ancient Egypt endured uninterruptedly and essentially unchanged for 3,000 years (from 3100 to 34 BCE). Among its achievements are its unsurpassed medical practices enduring well into the Christian era.

We are cognizant of Egyptian medicine thanks to the detailed papyri (plural of papyrus, the writing medium of that time) (image), discovered in the 19th century. From them historians are acquainted with the practitioners, their methods and the remedies they recommended. According to AHE:

Chapter illustration

Medical practice in ancient Egypt was so advanced that many of their observations, policies, and commonplace procedures would not be surpassed in the west for centuries after the fall of Rome and their practices would inform both Greek and Roman medicine... Later famous physicians of Rome and Greece.....studied the Egyptian texts and symbols and so passed down the traditions to the present day.

First, however, to lead an illness free life, Egyptians were directed to being moderate in their consumption of food and drink. The Los Angeles Times, of 22 January 1990 quotes an ancient text advising :

He who eats too much bread will suffer illness. He who drinks too much wine lies down in a stupor. All kinds of ailments are in the limbs because of overeating. He who is moderate in his manner of life, his flesh is not disturbed. Illness does not burn him who is moderate in food.

A healthy life,equally , meant cleanliness and hygiene. Egyptians regularly washed and shaved the entire body. And, obviously what went for commoners did too for those who practiced the medical professions. Thus, physicians bathed as often as possible. From this it can only be implied that Egyptians, though they had no knowledge of germs, nevertheless suspected that some disease-causing nastiness lurked where uncleanliness existed. In short, they knew about infection even if they ignored its origins.

The foregoing notwithstanding, Egyptians did suffer from dozens of ailments and diseases. Naveen Helmy Abou El-Soud of the National Research Center, Egypt, reported by RG, adds that the crowding along the narrow fertile ribbon along the Nile eased the spread of contagious diseases among communities. Not only epidemics of bubonic plague, smallpox, cholera etc. ran their deadly courses among the population but additionally Egyptians contracted bilharzia and a form of leprosy resembling elephantiasis (see 3 and 4 in Appendix). and many more. And, to top it all, ancient Egyptians chronically suffered from bad teeth, if only because they could not rid their food of the ever present desert sand.

And yet, all these afflictions did not prevent renown Greek historian Herodotus (484- 425 BCE) to marvel:

[that Egyptians are] the healthiest of all men...[and that]... the practice of medicine is so specialized among them that each physician is a healer of one disease and no more.

Medicine in ancient Egypt was practiced by literate men and women. Among them were physicians, surgeons, dentists, midwives. There were also wet nurses who cared for newborns in cases of death of the mothers, during childbirth, a common enough occurrence in those days. Apparently, the first Egyptian physician was Imhotep the chief minister of king Djoser who reigned from 2630 to 2611 BCE. He incidentally, was the architect of the Saqqara stepped pyramid, the first such monument.

It helped medical knowledge that mummification was widely practiced. Let us recall my description of the procedure in an earlier narrative: embalmers extracted the brain bit by bit through the nostrils with specially made instruments with hooks; next, an incision was made in the side of the abdomen with a flint knife for the removal of all organs etc. Nevertheless, sources agree that though Egyptian doctors knew about the innards, they never cared to study their functions.

There are indications that dentistry was an active occupation, given the atrocious condition of Egyptian dentition as already mentioned. Rotten teeth were extracted after anaesthetizing with opium. Evidence also exists of fillings cavities.

Surgical interventions were common and:

Chapter illustration

...were frequently successful as evidenced by mummies and other remains found who survived amputations and even brain surgery for years. Prosthetic limbs, made usually of wood, have also been found [image].

according to AHE which ,further lists some of the instruments and tools sugeons used (image).They included:

Chapter illustration

...flint and a metal scalpel, dental pliers, a bone saw, probes, the catheter, clamps for stopping blood flow, specula, forceps, lancets for opening veins, sponges, scissors, phials, bandages of linen.

Ancient Egyptian doctors and chemists invented and concocted a great many medicines made from plants/herbs, minerals and animal origins. They included cumin, pomegranates, castor and linseed oil, opium, cannabis, frankincense, thyme, coriander, henna and many more from the vegetal world. According to Abu El-Soud:

Egyptians thought garlic and onions aided endurance, and consumed large quantities of them.

Those plants not available locally were brought from abroad.

From the animal variety they made use of honey, eggs, liver, hairs, milk, horns, fat, wax and even feces. As for minerals, medicines included salts, copper, magnesium, calcium carbonate and more. In fact overall there were as many as 800 remedies.

With all considered, Egyptologist Margaret Bunson, in AHE, writes that Egyptians had at their disposal laxatives, diuretics, sedatives, antispasmodics and astringents (for closing surface wounds). For example, constipation was treated with “berries from the castor oil tree”; tape worms in an individual’s intestines were dislodged with “pomegranate root in water”. And for those with bad breath, they were given, to chew a gum ball of honey, cinnamon, myrrh, frankincense, and pignon”.

Egyptian also dealt with household pests thus:

...a dried fish or a piece of nitron [?] placed at the entrance of a serpent’s hole, will keep it inside. A piece of cat fat spread around the house will keep rats away.

All cures, remedies were prepared and dispensed in accordance with detailed prescriptions written by physicians. Each one:

...began with a description of the medicine, e.g., " Medicine to discharge blood out of wounds", followed by ingredients and measures used in addition to method of preparation and usage whether in tablet form , ointment or by inhaling.

Despite all that knowledge Egyptian medicine men and women, as well as royalty and commoners at large were strong believers in the roles of gods and demons in the meting out and outcome of illnesses and diseases. That is why, all medical interventions were accompanied by incantations and pleas for recovery. For example, similarly to Mesopotamian, toothache was attributed to a tooth worm to be dislodged by magic ‘spells and incantations’.

More than one source agree that this strong belief in the supernatural may have had a strong placebo effect on patients. As expressed by Abou El- Soud:

...the strong belief of the patient in the divine origins of the cure may well have been a large part in its effectiveness.

PHILOSOPHERS AND HIPPOCRATES

Let’s begin with this statement from BRIT:

...there is little doubt that ancient Greece inherited much from Babylonia and Egypt and even from India and China.

The Greek civilization era we are concerned with is the one stretching from 1200 BCE to the death of Alexander the Great in 323 BCE. At its onset, similarly to other ancient civilizations, illnesses and cures were in the hands of the gods. But by its end, the causes and remedies and had come down to Earth.

Initially, Apollo was the god of healing. He passed his responsibilities to his son, the god Asclepius who in turn delegated his powers to his sons and daughters. Incidentally, one of the latter was Hygieia, in charge of cleanliness; quite clearly the origin of the term hygiene.

The temples in honour of Asclepius, of which there were many throughout Greece, were the destinations of the diseased seeking healing. They were located in pleasant surroundings and had their playhouses and stadia for athletic activities. Sufferers there were treated with spells and ‘medical art’. BRIT notes that the patients:

...lay down to sleep in the dormitory... were visited in their dreams by Asclepius or by one of his priests, who gave advice. In the morning the patient often is said to have departed cured.... Diet, baths, and exercises played their part in the treatment.

The relegation of the supernatural influence on health to the back seat, was driven by the philosophers for whom Greek civilization is reputed. By the 5th century BCE the ‘bodily humours’ concept already described in the Introduction, became the established medical wisdom.

Enters Hippocrates (about 460-375 BCE), the promoter-in-chief of the theory of humours. His writings discredit the involvement of the gods and demons and emphasize the bodily and environmental causes of disease. According the BRIT:

Some of [Hippocrates] works.... were used as textbooks until the 19th century.... [He] noted the effect of food, of occupation, and especially of climate in causing disease... He laid much stress on diet and the use of few drugs...He had an extraordinary ability to foretell the course of a malady.... He had no patience with the idea that disease was a punishment sent by the gods.

And, of course, there is the Hippocrates oath, universally taken by all doctors entering the profession. It is:

... rather, an ethical code or ideal, an appeal for right conduct. In one or other of its many versions, it has guided the practice of medicine throughout the world for more than 2,000 years [BRIT’s version appears under 5 in Appendix].

With warfare a frequent occurrence in ancient Greece, physicians had plenty of opportunity to train and practice on injured soldiers. They became adept at fixing broken limbs and in dealing with wounds. In the case of the former we learn from SN that:

Patients with fractures were stretched to relieve the fracture site and promote setting, and to prevent a shortening of the fractured bone, which caused the patient to limp.... Dislocated shoulders were fixed by pushing the heel into the armpit of the lying patient while pulling and turning his arm – a procedure that has not changed over the past 2,300 years.

Furthermore, surgeons surmised that:

Wounds should only be cleaned with wine since the water was contaminated; clean cuts should be kept dry so that they can heal; all blood should be emptied from the wound, and wounds with broken tissue should be cleansed of pus and ample drainage provided to avoid infection....Bleeding was stopped by cold wrapping, compression, or burning.

Physicians-surgeons also extracted foreign objects such as arrowheads from wounds. There were instances of the use of opium as anesthetic but the injured were much more likely worked on while being forcibly held down. And wound were closed with stitches with “flax or linen thread”.

Apart from the foregoing surface interventions, very little internal surgery was attempted except “ hernia, removal of bladder stones, and cauterization (burning of body tissue) of hemorrhoids”.

Let us close with these words attributed to Hippocrates:

What is not healed with medicine, is healed with the knife; what the knife does not heal, is healed with the cautery, and what the cautery does not heal must be considered incurable.

GALEN AND THE GLADIATORS

The story of the Romans begins with the founding of the city of Rome itself in 753 BCE and ends with the fall in 410 CE of the western empire. In the last two centuries BCE, they became acquainted with all aspects of Greek civilization. So much so, that speaking Greek and being familiar with Greek philosophy and culture became status symbols among Roman high society.

Roman medicine, similarly, was influenced by that of this earlier civilization. As Greece was overtaken by Rome, its doctors flooded into Roman domains in search of new opportunities and lucre. They were generally, well received by the local populations and highly valued. But not by all. According to AHE, they were, for instance, criticized by Roman philosopher and author Pliny the Elder (23-79 CE) for :

... their high fees, immoral conduct with patients and general malpractice.

At that time, traditional Roman cures included, among others, egg yolk to combat dysentery, garlic considered good for the heart and boiled liver for aching eyes. Cabbage, too had a role to play in their curative philosophy. It was prescribed as an antidote to hangovers and to heal wounds. But more curiously, they believed that eating a large quantity caused the kidneys to excrete urine of therapeutic quality. So much so that according to AHE:

... bathing a patient or a baby in the urine of someone who had eaten a lot of cabbage was extremely beneficial to the constitution.

The best known of the Greek immigrants was Galen of Pergamon (129 - 216 CE), a believer in Hippocrates’s doctrine of the four bodily humours already introduced. In 158 CE, he was appointed medical officer in charge of gladiators whose sole purpose was to take part in deadly combat for the entertainment of Roman populace and elites. In this position he learned a great deal about wounds made by swords, lances and what have you and the means to remedy them by , for example, sterilizing them with bandages soaked in wine. Further, he was in favour of bloodletting with leeches (see 1 in Appendix).

But Galen learned much more from his dissections of animals, apes in preference. And despite Roman cultural taboos against cutting up human corpses, he did manage to dissect a few, nonetheless. From these probes according to BRIT:

Galen recognized that the arteries contain blood and not merely air. He showed how the heart sets the blood in motion in an ebb and flow fashion, but he had no idea that the blood circulates.

Galen displayed an excellent knowledge of bone structure. After cutting the spinal cord of a pig and observing it, he also realized that the brain sends signals to control the muscles.

The works and findings of Galen formed the basis of medical sciences in Medieval Europe until challenged by the work of Belgian/Flemish Andreas Vasalius (see hereinafter).

Apart from Galen, others of Greek origin included gynecologist and childbirth specialist Soranus of Ephesus (2nd century CE). An opponent of abortion he recommended various methods of contraception. More, as told by BRIT:

He also described how to assist a difficult delivery by turning the fetus in the uterus (podalic version), a life-saving technique that was subsequently lost sight of until it was revived in the 16th century.

Another was the botanist and physician Pedanius Dioscorides (40-90 CE) who published volumes describing the benefits of some 600 herbal medicines, which remained unchallenged for about 1,500 years.

Roman surgery did not venture beyond skin depth. But in addition to handling wounds, surgeons removed cataracts and trepanned skulls as seen earlier. They had available a gamut of surgical instruments which they sterilized in boiling water. They included arrow extractors, catheters, scalpels, and forceps. Opium acted as anesthetic. According to AHE:

Wounds were stitched following surgery using flax, linen thread or metal pins. Dressings were of linen bandages or sponges and either dry or wet, that is, soaked in wine, oil, vinegar or water and kept moist with a cover of fresh leaves.

What the Romans lacked in medical knowledge , they made up for with cleanliness and hygiene. They knew that cleanliness is conducive to good health and mitigated the incidence of disease. Thus the famous Roman aqueducts bringing clean water from rivers and lakes to cities and towns for drinking and to public baths and more. In the words of MNT:

There were nine public baths in Rome alone. Each one had pools at varying temperatures. Some also had gyms and massage rooms. Government inspectors were vigorous in their enforcement of proper hygiene standards.

Clearly, all the efforts in this respect would have come to nothing had the Roman not built a sewer system to dispose safely and adequately with waste effluents:

The sewage system in Rome was so advanced that nothing matching it was built again until the late 17th century...

ALRAZI, IBN SINA AND, AL- ZAHRAWI.

As Islam moved out of the Arabian Peninsula from the seventh century CE onwards, it gradually acquired domains extending from Persia to Spain east and west respectively. There it came in contact with Greek, Roman and other earlier sciences, such as a center of Greek medicine in Gondeshapur, Persia. In short, as stated by MNT:

While Europe was in the so-called Dark Ages, Islamic scholars and doctors were building on the work of the Greeks and Romans and making discoveries that continue to influence medical practice.

..Islamic thinkers elaborated the theories of the ancient Greeks and made extensive medical discoveries..... and Islamic doctors and scholars wrote extensively, developing complex literature on medication, clinical practice, diseases, cures, treatments, and diagnoses.

To such an extent that:

...Western doctors first learned of Greek medicine, including the works of Hippocrates and Galen, by reading Arabic translations.

One of the early great names in the field of Islamic medicine is that of the Persian polymath: Abū Bakr Muhammad al-Rāzī (854-925 CE). He wrote voluminously on the subject. Most notably he explained the differences between measles and smallpox. Another of his treatises, according to MNT is on the “Diseases of Children” for which he is known as the “father of pediatrics”. He also discoursed on ophthalmology, allergy and medical ethics. Reportedly, he penned:

The doctor's aim is to do good, even to our enemies, so much more to our friends, and my profession forbids us to do harm to our kindred, as it is instituted for the benefit and welfare of the human race, and God imposed on physicians the oath not to compose mortiferous remedies.

The ‘prince of physicians’, according to BRIT, was another Persian by the name of Abū Alī al-Husayn ibn Sīnā, (980-1037 CE), the most famous name in Islamic science. He was a polymath with about 450 books to his name , 40 of which dealt with medical matters, most notably ‘The Canon of Medicine’ in Arabic ‘Al-Qānūn fī at-Tibb’. It consisted of five volumes subsequently translated to several languages. It and another, ‘The Book of Healing’ became standard fare in European universities such as Leuvin in Belgium and Montpelier in France, till the 1650’s. MNT adds that today both the American universities of California, Los Angeles and Yale “teach some principles of ‘The Canon of Medicine’ in their history of medicine courses”.

Chapter illustration

Ibn Sina also gave recommendations about the preparation, testing and efficacy of drugs and medicines, such as:

The drug must be pure and not contain anything that would reduce its quality...[It] must match the severity of the disease...[It must undergo] several trials showing the same results....[Tests must be carried out on] humans, not animals, as it may not work in the same way for both.

These drugs were issued from a variety of herbs and vegetable, the like of cannabis and opium to cabbage, cinnamon and garlic with many more in between. They were prescribed in various combinations, boiled or otherwise as anesthetics and cures against cancer, urinary troubles etc. Indeed, as far as BRIT is concerned, the most important influence of Islamic medical science:

...was in chemistry and in the knowledge and preparation of medicines.... Many drugs are of Arab origin, as are such processes as distillation and sublimation.

Other practices included cauterization of wounds, meaning the application of a hot iron to stem the flow of blood and prevent infections. Another was the removal of excess blood or, bloodletting, to rebalance the four humours identified in Hippocratic times as we have already seen.

Islamic doctors used the knife more often than their Greek and Roman predecessors. The best known surgeon was Arab Abū al-Qāsim al-Zahrāwī (936-1013) aka the ‘father of surgery’ according to Wikipedia and who, in the words of BRIT, was a:

...careful and conservative practitioner, he wrote the first illustrated surgical text, which held wide influence in Europe for centuries.

And according to MNT, that text amounted to a 30-volume reference manual describing:

...surgical instruments [image], operating techniques, pharmacological methods to prepare tablets and drugs to protect the heart, surgical procedures used in midwifery, cauterizing and healing wounds, and the treatment of headaches.

Chapter illustration

Al Zahrawi is credited with the use of “catgut() to sew up wounds”

There were others such as Ala-al-Din abu al-Hasan al-Dimashqi  (1213-1288) from Damascus, updated and corrected the work of Galen of Rome in matters of the heart and blood circulation (see hereinbefore).

The human eye was not ignored in the Islamic scientific quest. Arab physicist Hasan Ibn al-Haytham (965-1040) penned the ‘Book of Optics’ in which he explained the organ’s anatomy and described it, correctly as an optical system. It remained a reference manual till the 17th century. Another, ,Ali ibn Isa al-Kahhal (940-1010), nicknamed according to Wikipedia ‘Jesu[s] Occulist’() in Europe:

...was the best known and most celebrated Arab ophthalmologist of medieval islam.

Under the heading ‘How Early Islamic Science Advanced Medicine’ NG tells us that this Iraqi scientist:

...wrote perhaps what was the most complete book of eye diseases, the ‘Notebook of the Oculist’, detailing 130 conditions. The book was translated into Latin in 1497 followed by several more languages, allowing it to serve as an authoritative work for centuries.

A second ophthalmologist, finally, Abu al-Qasim ibn Ali al-Mawsili (996-1020) operated on cataracts with a syringe of his conception.

NG’s article elaborates on the great medical institutions of medieval Islam. In particular, it mentions the hospitals built in places such as Harran (Turkey), Cairo and Baghdad, in which, as is the current practice, medical students followed their Muslim, Christian and Jewish masters as they dealt with patients of all classes of society. In this respect, these institutions:

...allowed the poorest to benefit from the knowledge of outstanding doctors: Beggars in Baghdad might be operated on by Rhazes [al-Razi].

NG proceded with a description of Cairo’s ‘Al- Mansouri Hospital’ built in 1285 and of the 12th century ‘Al-Nouri’ teaching hospital in Damascus. The Cairene institution:

...[had] four wards, each one specializing in different pathologies, were reputed to house thousands of patients. The buildings surrounded a courtyard cooled by fountains.

As for the Damascene, it was:

...the leading medical schools of its time, complete with an impressive library... scholars learned from mentoring by experienced doctors...[it had spaces] where talks and readings of classic manuscripts would be held.

DAVINCI, VASILIUS AND GUTENBERG

Historians distinguish four eras in the story of Europe. The earliest two, only, are of interest to us here. First is the medieval era or the Middle Ages, spanning the period between the demise of the western Roman Empire in the 400’s CE and the capture of Constantinople by the Ottomans in 1453. Next is the era of the Renaissance and the Age of Discovery, extending up to the 1600’ s.

In the early Middle Ages, the Church in Europe preached that sickness was a punishment sent by God to punish sinners. It also taught that the human body was sacred and could not be cut up even in the cause of science. In consequence while medical knowledge was being actively sought after in the Islamic lands, notably in nearby Andalusia, Europeans, to the contrary, were seeking relief in prayers and invocations to saints, pilgrimages and other devotional acts along with some herbal medicines.

This notwithstanding, Christian monks, practically the only persons who could read or write, undertook, nonetheless, the translation of the medical texts of Greece and of the Islamic World. Furthermore, Crusaders and other pilgrims to the Holy Land returned home with knowledge of medical procedures there. Besides, religious institutions established the first hospitals in which, in the words of BRIT, all:

...doctors and nurses...were members of religious orders and combined spiritual with physical healing.

They housed people who were sick, poor, and blind, as well as pilgrims, travelers, orphans, people with mental illness, and individuals who had nowhere else to go....Christian teaching held that people should provide hospitality for those in desperate need, including food, shelter, and medical care if necessary.

Examples of these are the ‘Hotel-Dieu’ hospitals in Lyon and Paris established in 542 and 652 respectively.

Later medical schools were established. The first and very prestigious one was in Salerno, Italy in the 9th century. It drew on Greek, Roman and Islamic heritage and taught the theory of the bodily humours explained in the Introduction. For this, Salerno was known as the ‘Hippocratic City’. Its reputation was such that it was attended by an international body of students. Salerno school was copied by the others established in “Montpellier and Paris, in France, and at Bologna and Padua, in Italy”.

Crucially the ban on the dissection of the human body was progressively lifted, beginning in the 14th century.

Surgery in medieval times was carried out by barber-surgeons. They were adept enough for dealing with combat wounds and broken and dislocated bones. They could also remove bladder stones, mend hernias and remove cataracts. In cases of neurological problems , they trepanned skulls “to let the demons out”. But nothing much beyond that.

Surgeons made use of anesthetics whose main component was opium. A document dating from 1265 described by HW tells of one concoction consisting, in addition to opium, of three or four other plants. The whole was boiled in the presence of a sponge which thoroughly soaked up the mixture. It was thereafter “applied to the nostrils of the patient”. With the intervention completed , another sponge dipped in vinegar was similarly applied to bring the patient back to consciousness.

Wine, in addition to being a pleasant drink was employed as an antiseptic against infections of wounds etc. Cauterization was another mean of achieving the same. Even so, in those days, medieval practitioners had no idea what caused them. Worse they did not associate them with a lack of hygiene (see 2 in Appendix).

Medieval physicians studied the symptoms of the sick and examined their feces. Following this they could, according to BRIT, prescribe:

... diet, rest, sleep, exercise, or baths, or they could administer emetics and purgatives or bleed the patient.

They may also prescribe medication consisting of herbs and plants. For this purpose, monasteries/hospitals extensively cultivated what they believed was necessary to restore the balance of the four humours.

The Renaissance era as described by BRIT:

...was much more than just a reviving of interest in Greek and Roman culture; it was rather a change of outlook, an eagerness for discovery, a desire to escape from the limitations of tradition and to explore new fields of thought and action.

In the field of medicine, it was an era in the course of which:

...it was perhaps natural that anatomy and physiology, the knowledge of the human body and its workings, should be the first aspects of medical learning to receive attention from those who realized the need for reform.

The Renaissance began in Italy and spread thereafter to the rest of Western Europe. One cannot talk, read or write about it without remembering its icons: the painter and sculptor Michelangelo (1475-1564) and the polymath Leonardo da Vinci (1452-1519). Among his many interests and talents da Vinci was eager to learn about the human body. He was able to study dissected corpses and in due course, collaborated in a 200 page illustrated book about his findings. He paid particular attention to the mechanics of bones and muscles .

There was also Andreas Vasalius (1514-1564), a Flemish (Belgian) Professor of medicine who published “one of the most influential books on human anatomy”. Its dissemination, across Europe, was greatly helped by Gutenberg’s printing press, first used in the early 1500’s.

Another was the Englishman William Harvey (1578-1657) who correctly interpreted the cardiovascular system whereby the heart pumps blood round the body; thus putting to rest the ebbing and flowing theory of the Galen (see hereinbefore)

French surgeon. Ambroise Pare’ (1510-1590) is known for doing away with painful cauterization of wounds in preference for “ligatures and dressing”. He is also known for his work on “forensic pathology”, the study of the cause of death by carrying out autopsies.

Finally, Girolamo Fracastoro (1478-1553), another Italian polymath was interested in infections and contagions. Eventually he published his findings. According to BRIT:

In his great work, De contagione et contagiosis morbis (1546), he theorized that the seeds of certain diseases are imperceptible particles transmitted by air or by contact.

Dishearteningly, healers of the Renaissance, despite all the progress described, were no nearer to successfully deal with contagious diseases and epidemics that their predecessors on the Middle Ages. So much so that MNT relates that a form of tuberculosis was called “The King’s Devil”. In consequence:

At one time, doctors asked [the king] to help by touching sick people in an attempt to cure them of scrofula, a type of tuberculosis (TB).

SUSHRUTA AND CORPSE IN A BASKET

Hindus had their own version of the theory of humors. Theirs numbered three, instead of four: spirit, bile and phlegm (the viscous substance secreted by nasal membranes). As with other cultures good health depended on their proper balance .

To begin with, cleanliness was next to holiness in Hindu culture. According to BRIT:

Bathing and care of the skin were carefully prescribed, as were cleansing of the teeth with twigs from named trees, anointing of the body with oil, and the use of eyewashes.

Dietary discipline was taught as well. No more than two meals daily were required with constituents and ingredients clearly specified including the quantity of water to be had before and after meals, and more.

“The golden age of Indian medicine”, stretches from 800 BCE to 1000 CE or some 1200 years long. It was a time of abundant writing of medical compendia (compilations) which variously:

...brought together not only treatises on anatomy, including embryology, diagnosis, surgery, epidemics, pharmacology, and so forth, but many reflective philosophical passages discussing, for example, the origin of the human being, the rules of medical debate, methods for the interpretation of technical terminology and scientific expression, and so forth.

to borrow the words of Encyclopedia.com.

The best known compendium is the one composed by surgeon/physician Sushruta who lived between 600 and 500 BCE. His writings are wide ranging. He lists 1120 diseases, among them smallpox, and 760 remedies. He wrote, as well, on plastic surgery and on removing cloudiness of the eye lens in a cataract operation. His was the earliest written recommendation on the adaptation of leeches in medicinal bloodletting (see 1 in Appendix). Further, he identified 20 sharp and 101 blunt instruments (image).

Chapter illustration

And, oddly enough, in order to by-pass the Hindu ban on mutilation of the human body, he recommended placing a corpse in a basket, immersing it in a stream for a duration of seven days in the wake of which the body can be disassembled without the need for a knife.

Thanks to Sushruta and his peers, Indian surgeons were particularly adept at removing bladder stones and the restitution of amputated noses, a much sought after plastic intervention in a culture which condemned adulterers to the loss of their noses . BRIT explains how it was done:

...repair was carried out by cutting from the patient’s cheek or forehead a piece of tissue of the required size and shape and applying it to the stump of the nose. The results appear to have been tolerably satisfactory, and the modern operation is certainly derived indirectly from this ancient source.

Indian surgeons were also capable of clearing cataracts, thereby restoring a far from perfect vision but an amelioration nevertheless. HE relates the dictate of Sushrata in this instance:

The patient had to look at the tip of his or her nose while the surgeon, holding the eyelids apart with thumb and index finger, used a needle-like instrument to pierce the eyeball from the side. It was then sprinkled with breast milk and the outside of the eye bathed with a herbal medication. The surgeon used the instrument to scrape out the clouded lens until the eye “assumed the glossiness of a resplendent cloudless sun”. During recovery it was important for the patient to avoiding coughing, sneezing, burping or anything else that might cause pressure in the eye.

We have already seen that Sushruta had identified in his treatises 760 remedies. A colleague of his knew of 500 more. They were, quite naturally of the herbal version. But others were concocted from animal products “such as the milk of various animals, bones, gallstones” and of mineral variety such as “sulfur, arsenic, lead, copper sulfate, gold”. Further, “Alcohol seems to have been used as a narcotic during operations, and bleeding was stopped by hot oils and tar”.

Physicians, however, greatly favoured what was known as the “five procedures: the administration of emetics, purgatives, water enemas, oil enemas, and sneezing powders”. Further “Inhalations were frequently administered, as were leeching, cupping, and bleeding.

QI AND, YIN AND YANG

Traditional Chinese medicine (TCM) is an ancient set of practices, free from any outside influence, based on notions which evolved through centuries of observations, analyses and studies of cosmic, natural and biological phenomena. So much so that by at least 3,000 years ago the established wisdom of TCM revolved around:

‘Qi’, meaning the flow of life energy through invisible channels .

in the human body,

‘Yin’, is the dark, negative influence, female gendered, represented by Earth.

‘Yang’, is the opposite influence, positive ,male, represented by the heavens.

From all this, China’s wise men reasoned that good health, happiness and indeed success in whatever one undertakes depended on the proper balance of the black yin and the white yang (image) in the qi or life energy.

Chapter illustration

Moreover, TCM thinkers decided that humans are made of the same five elements as the natural world: wood, fire, earth metal and water and that their bodies housed:

...five organs (heart, lungs, liver, spleen, and kidneys), which store up but do not eliminate, and five viscera (such as the stomach, intestines, gallbladder, and bladder), which eliminate but do not store up.

In addition, there are 365 bones and an equal number of joints.

A traditional healer called to the bedside of a sick person enquired:

...about the history of the illness and about such things as the patient’s taste, smell, and dreams. Conclusions are drawn from the quality of the voice, and note is made of the colour of the face and of the tongue. The most important part of the investigation, however, is the examination of the pulse.

according to BRIT. Thereafter the physician sets out his healing programme which may include:

...such components as acupuncture, herbs, lifestyle changes, and foods for healing”.

Chapter illustration

Traditional Chinese pharmacology identifies hundreds of remedies made from plant, herbal, mineral, animal and even human elements (image). We know from BRIT that:

In 1578 Li Shizhen published his famous Bencao gangmu (Compendium of Materia Medica), which lists 1,892 drugs and some 11,000 formal prescriptions for specific ailments.

A visit to a traditional Chinese pharmacy is like a visit to a small natural history museum. The hundreds of cabinet drawers, glass cases, and jars in a typical pharmacy hold an enormous variety of desiccated [dried] plant and animal material.

And revealingly:

Nearly 200 modern medicines have been developed either directly or indirectly from the 7,300 species of plants used as medicines in China.

Then there are the external curative practices , the best known of which is acupuncture, or the insertion of needles through the skin to a certain depth at selected spots chosen depending on the ailment to be cured. According to BRIT, the needles are metallic, range from as little 3 cm and as much as 24 cm long. Further:

...they are often inserted with considerable force and after insertion may be agitated or screwed to the left or right.

The whole theory behind acupuncture is the unblocking of a congested invisible energy flow (qi) channel to restore the balance of the yin and the yang. There are 365 spots on the body to choose from depending on the organ afflicted. Moreover, we know from HN that acupuncture is also a form of anesthetics.

Unlike with other civilizations, the adoption of modern medicine did not result in the rejection ‘en masse’ of TCM. To the contrary. One reason for this, advanced by NWE, is its “palliative() efficacy” not matched by present day pain killers. It further advances that TCM is: ...used by some to treat the side effects of chemotherapy, treating the cravings and withdrawal symptoms of drug addicts and treating a variety of chronic conditions, such as pains, that conventional medicine has not been able to treat.

In China itself TCM is “an important part of the public health care system”. Even more. According to NWE:

Graduates from TCM university courses are able to diagnose in Western medical terms, prescribe Western pharmaceuticals, and undertake minor surgical procedures. In effect, they practice TCM as a specialty within the broader organization of Chinese health care

APPENDIX

It was almost universally believed that the sucking action of a medicinal leech placed on the skin would either “initiate blood flow” or empty it in that location of the body. It was a favoured procedure until well into the 19th century in America, Asia and Europe.

In the early part of that century a “leech mania” took hold in Europe and America. We have the word of BRIT that:

Enormous quantities of leeches were used for bleeding—as many as 5 to 6 million being used annually to draw more than 300,000 litres of blood in Parisian hospitals alone. In some cases patients lost as much as 80 percent of their blood in a single leeching.

It was not till well into the 19th century, less than 200 years ago, that a Hungarian physician, Ignaz Semmelweis (1818-1865) recognized the importance of surgeons washing their hands before operations particularly if they had just carried out autopsies. He correctly estimated that should doctors wash their hands before intervening mortality among patients going under the knife would dramatically drop. He published a book on the matter in 1861.

His colleagues did not agree. They believed that mortality occurred because “infections were spread through the air by something called miasmas”. Semmelweis died at age 47 in an asylum for insane persons. His work was posthumously acclaimed in light of the work of the like of French microbiologist Louis Pasteur (1822-1895).

Biharzia is a decease found mostly in South America, Southeast Asia and Africa including Egypt. It affects farmers and peasants in places like the Nile Valley where their livelihood requires contact with river water. This includes wading or swimming in the current or drinking from it.

Infection is caused by a parasitic worm (image) which enters the exposed skin, gets into the bloodstream and thereafter infect various organs. Ironically the presence of these parasites are promoted by human urine and feces discharged in the water by already contaminated persons.

Chapter illustration

Early stages symptoms may include, depending on the internal organ(s) affected: breathing difficulties, muscle pain, headache and fever. As the disease advances, again depending or where the invasion occurred, the sufferer may see blood in the urine or in the feces; he/she may develop diarrhea or constipation, liver fibrosis and run a high risk of bladder cancer. Perhaps worst of all are infected children whose growth may be stunted and learning ability reduced.

According to the ‘Center for Disease Control and Prevention’, there are currently about 200,000,000 Bilharzia victims worldwide. No cure or vaccine exists, but treatment can reduce the impact of the affliction.

Medically it is called ‘lymphatic filariasis’. It causes harm to the lymph system “impairing the immune system”. People affected:

Chapter illustration

tend to get more bacterial infections of the skin, causing it to become dry, thick, and ulcerated with repeated infections.

Some patients, not all, exhibit ugly swelling of the arms, legs, breasts and genitals. The image shows clearly why the disease is also known as ‘elephantiasis’.

Similarly to bilharzia it is caused by parasitic worm. In this instance, however, it enters the body of its victim through the bite of a mosquito, again ironically, taken on by the insect through an earlier bite of an infected human host.

The ‘World Health Organization’ has estimated the number of presently infected worldwide at 120,000,000 distributed between Africa, India South America, Southeast Asia.

Medication does exist but fails to effectively rid a patient of the parasite.

5)Hippocrates Oath

The version below is that of Encyclopedia Britannica:

I swear by Apollo the physician, and Asclepius, and Health, and All-heal, and all the gods and goddesses…to reckon him who taught me this Art equally dear to me as my parents, to share my substance with him, and relieve his necessities if required; to look upon his offspring in the same footing as my own brothers, and to teach them this art, if they shall wish to learn it, without fee or stipulation; and that by precept, lecture, and every other mode of instruction, I will impart a knowledge of the Art to my own sons, and those of my teachers, and to disciples bound by a stipulation and oath according to the law of medicine, but to none others. I will follow that system of regimen which, according to my ability and judgment, I consider for the benefit of my patients, and abstain from whatever is deleterious and mischievous. I will give no deadly medicine to any one if asked, nor suggest any such counsel; and in like manner I will not give to a woman a pessary to produce abortion…Into whatever houses I enter, I will go into them for the benefit of the sick, and will abstain from every voluntary act of mischief and corruption; and, further from the seduction of females or males, of freemen and slaves. Whatever, in connection with my professional practice or not, in connection with it, I see or hear, in the life of men, which ought not to be spoken of abroad, I will not divulge, as reckoning that all such should be kept secret.

Amazing Faculty

AMAZING FACULTY LANGUAGE

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

The Author APRIL 2020

AMAZING FACULTY LANGUAGE

For this narrative I have trusted the sources listed hereunder: *Ancient History Encyclopedia . *Ancientscripts.com (AS). *Applied Linguistic . *BBC. *Encyclopedia Britannica (BRIT). *British Library (BL). *Historic Connections . *Historyworld.net (HWN). *Linguistic Society of America (LSA). *New World Encyclopedia . *Owlcation . *Routledge Handbook Online . *ThoughtCo . *Washington State University (WSU). *Wikipedia (WIKI). *World Atlas (WA). *And a few others mentioned in the text.

First, a brief recapitulation. Some 8,000,000 years ago Ape and H0minine (part ape part man species) lines parted company. The latter eventually branched off into the Homo sapiens species (us) 200,000 years ago or so. In between there were several ramifications of Homo species notably the bipedal Homo erectus about 1,900,000 years ago. Ultimately, with the extinction of the Neanderthal species, 30 to 40,000 years ago, Homo sapiens was left to dominate the Globe.

Between 70 and 30,000 years ago mental changes began to happen in Homo sapiens, at a much faster pace than is usual for natural genetic evolution, transforming them from Ape like instinct driven beings to thinking, communicating humans able to learn, remember and contemplate the future and, most vitally, ready to develop language. All thanks to a more complex brain than the one in Apes and indeed in Hominines.

But what exactly is language? There are many definitions. One, quoted by BRIT states that it is:

...a system of arbitrary vocal symbols by means of which a social group cooperates.”

As for LSA, language:

...can express thoughts on an unlimited number of topics. It can be used not just to convey information, but to solicit information (questions) and to give orders

But also, and not usually stressed :

[u]nlike any other animal communication system, it contains an expression for negation - what is not the case.

How did language come about? Nobody is certain. Indeed, it has been one of the great mysteries of science. But all specialists agree that language is an evolutionary process like walking. Equally, there is agreement that language was, unsurprisingly, preceded by the evolution of speech.

In Homo sapiens, speech arose in the wake of anatomical changes in organs in such a way as to favour speech. According to WIKI those concerned were “the lips, teeth, alveolar ridge, hard palate, velum (soft palate), uvula, glottis and various parts of the tongue”. What is striking, however is that, in the first place, these organs genetically evolved both in Apes and Hominines for completely other functions: tongue and teeth for feeding, others for breathing and so on. In other words, according to linguist Thomas Sawallis of the University of Alabama, quoted by Smithsonian Magazine:

Speech involves the biology of using your vocal tracts and your lips. Messing around with that as a muscular production, and getting a sound out that can get into somebody else’s ear that can identify what was intended as sounds—that’s speech.

That said, the changes described, despite their improbability and complexity, were not enough by themselves. To generate language, they needed a partner in the form of a complex brain which in the words of the same source, referring to other scholars, must be:

capable of controlling the production and the hearing of human speech sounds.

In this respect these scholars point to the bonobo ape which can produce 38 different calls, and yet cannot master the brain power to develop language.

Currently there are, according to Senior Fellow at the Manhattan Institute John McWhorter Ph.D (DOB: 1965), 6,000 languages worldwide. Moreover, he anticipates that as many as 5,500 of these would become extinct by 2100 for all practical purposes, essentially on account of “[g]lobalization and urbanization [which] tend to bring people toward one of a few dozen politically dominant languages”.

This narrative is a short review of the genetic emergence of the spoken language followed by its written counterpart. I begin with the at- variance opinions of linguists and historians as to how this ability started among humans. I, thereafter, proceed with language families around the world and the thousands of tongues that ensued thereof.

I then follow with the invention of writing in response to civilizational needs and, with time, the development of grammar without which no sentence or phrase can be expressed coherently. In between, I felt it appropriate to privilege Sanskrit, the ‘language of the gods’ with its own section. Of all the thousands of world languages past and present, Sanskrit is one of the richest and most versatile.

Subsequently, I dwell succinctly on the parallel and crucial development of the hand tools and media to create, receive and preserve human records.

In the Appendix, finally, I introduce the two remarkable ‘documents’ in the Akkadian script of Mesopotamia: the epic of Gilgamesh and the Hammurabi Code.

Origins of language

Unlike fossils, artifacts, skeletons, mummies and monuments left behind by long gone societies, from which historians, archeologists and other specialists can read the past; spoken language, on the other hand, leaves nothing physical to enable linguists, anthropologists etc. to determine how and when it originated. They are, consequently, left to speculate and make guesses, albeit on the basis of their scholarship and professional competence. This being so, the result is necessarily a number of contradictory theories and hypotheses. Let’s consider.

One is the continuity theory proposed and supported by many linguists among them Danish Professor Ib Ulbaek. To them, language evolved over millions of years similarly to all life forms which started eons ago as simple mono-cellular microorganisms. In other words they endorse Charles Darwin (1809-1888), the protagonist of the theory of evolution, who wrote in the context of language acquisition:

I cannot doubt that language owes its origin to the imitation and modification, aided by signs and gestures, of various natural sounds, the voices of other animals, and man's own instinctive cries.

All this, in spite of the huge chasm between the primitiveness of the sounds and body language of apes and the sophistication of human language.

American linguist Noam Chomsky (DOB: 1928), the “father of modern linguistics”, disagrees diametrically. His is the ‘discontinuity’ theory which holds that language is so intricate that it could not possibly have had any ancestry. To the contrary, it sprang up among Homo sapiens who arrived on the scene about 200,000 years ago. It originated in a “near perfect form” as a “chance mutation” to a single individual some 100,000 years ago, the product of a developed brain. Among those who are in agreement with Chomsky is French anthropologist and ethnologist Claude Levi-Strauss (1908-2009):

...language can only have arisen all at once...a shift occurred from a stage when nothing had a meaning to another stage when everything had meaning.

Another interesting hypothesis is that of ‘motherese’ language proposed by American Professor Dean Falk (DOB: 1944). Curiously, she postulated that whereas other species had enough fur to which infants clung to when mama foraged for food, Homo sapiens, in contrast, had shed most of theirs. In consequence, a foraging human mother had no choice but to sit her offspring somewhere while she worked and simultaneously ‘talked’ to them to keep them reassured of her presence nearby. With time this, according to Falk, evolved into language proper, presumably first among kin members then tribes then etc.

Given these conflicting views, no wonder the publication of WSU states:

... the origin of language will be debated for centuries to come as the views..... are far too contrasting to ever reach a common ground.

There is less controversy, however about the timeline of the new ability. By and large, between 200,000 and 30,000 years ago, Homo sapiens evolved anatomically and mentally enough, as outlined earlier, to invent and develop language.

Language families

Chapter illustration

The largest language family is the Indo-European (diagram above). It spawned 445 languages spoken today by nearly half the world population, or 3.24 billion people. It is the basis for Greek, Latin and archaic German; all three constituents of the modern tongues in western and central Europe. Further east, Indo-European was the starting point for the Slavic languages of Russia, Serbia, Ukraine and more.

Another branch of the family is that of Indo-Iranian languages. As of present, according to BRIT, they are spoken by nearly a billion people. Its Indic sub-branch gave way to Sanskrit (see hereinafter) , in turn the ancestor of a great number of languages spoken by the peoples of South Asia: India, Bangladesh, Pakistan to name a few. On the other hand, modern day Farsi, Pashto and Kurdish etc. of about 150 to 200 million speakers descend from the Iranian sub-branch.

And yet, the Indo-European family began humbly enough about 6,000 years ago as the dialect of a tribe in the west of Asia and eastern Europe, roughly in modern day Ukraine.

Chapter illustration

The second largest is the Sino-Tibetan family (diagram above). It is the ancestor of 453 descendant languages presently spoken by 1.39 billion humans the largest chunk of whom is in China. Evidence exists that Sino- Tibetan originated in northern China at more or less the same time as Indo-European.

Next is the Niger-Congo family of African languages. Its branches, sub-branches and groups sprang up 1526 languages spoken, nowadays, by 520 million souls. Among them is Swahili in Kenya, Tanzania and the Democratic Republic of the Congo. Others include Igbo, Shona and Yoruba variously spoken in Liberia, Mozambique, Nigeria, Sierra Leone, Zambia and Zimbabwe. Its most likely place of birth, some 5,500 years ago, is Central or West Africa.

Fourth and oldest is the Afro-Asiatic family grouping 365 languages spoken by 499 million. According to Russian historian and linguist Igor Diakonov (1915-1999), it originated some 12 to 17,000 years ago in the great Sahara Desert. In those bygone days, it was “green and alive, pocked with lakes, rivers, grasslands and even forests”, diametrically different from the arid sea of sand, the size of the USA, it is today. From there the family, branched off to North Africa, the Arabian Peninsula and the Middle East. It contains half a dozen sub-families the largest of which is the Semitic group of languages (see diagram below).

HWN tells us that the Semitic sub-family likely emerged “from the language of just one tribal group, possibly nomads in southern Arabia”. Incidentally, another language of Afro-Asiatic origin is non-Semitic Egyptian of 5,200 years ago.

Extinct are the historical languages of Mesopotamia, the ‘Cradle of Civilization’, namely Akkadian of 4,000 years ago and its Assyrian and Babylonian offshoots. Preceding them by a millennium was Sumerian, the first language ever to be written (see thereinafter). Oddly enough, however, Sumerian was not a Semitic language. Instead it is classified as a “language isolate” meaning it belonged neither in the Afro-Asiatic nor in any of the families above.

Chapter illustration

Dead, likewise, is the tongue of the Phoenicians of the eastern Mediterranean from where they diffused the first alphabet ever as we shall see later. They belonged to the Canaanite sub group along with Hebrew.

Extant are the languages of the three monotheistic religions, Hebrew, Aramaic and Arabic. Relating to them are Amharic of Ethiopia and Maltese. Presently Arabic is the mother tongue of more than 150 million speakers. Amharic is that of 17 million; Hebrew, 8 million and Maltese, 370,000. And Aramaic is to this day spoken by the citizens of Ma’lula in Syria.

Written languages

No one is under any illusion that without the advent of writing, civilizations would have emerged. Oral communication could not possibly have sustained human societies the way they have evolved. Indeed, while speech is transient, writing is permanent.

In her 1937 book ‘Out of Africa’ author Isak Dinesen (1885-1961) writes of the reaction of a native African farm worker upon being introduced to writing:

I learned that the effect of a piece of news was many times magnified when it was imparted by writing. The messages that would have been received with doubt and scorn if they had been given by word of mouth were now taken as gospel truth.

Unlike speech and language, writing is not evolutionary but an invention. Unquestionably there were four centers where scripts emerged independently: Mesopotamia, Egypt, China and Mexico where Indians of the Maya civilization created their own writing. All other human societies which subsequently developed writing copied or a least were inspired/influenced by the pioneering four.

There is no disagreement that the first human politico-social entity ever was Mesopotamian Sumer established 6,000 years ago, in today’s southern Iraq, between the Tigris and the Euphrates rivers. Equally, there is no controversy that Sumer invented the first written script around 5,000 years ago to enable its merchants to record their dealings, that is to say the type and quantity of goods exchanged. What emerged was a pictographic script qualified by cuneiform (from ‘wedge shaped’ in Latin).

Chapter illustration

Since, at the time, there existed no other written language to be guided by, it obviously took centuries for Sumerian scribes to figure out what ultimately, according to BRIT, ended up being a script:

...of some 1,200 different characters representing numerals, names, and such material objects as cloth and cow.

It therefore goes without saying that it was ‘telegraphic’ in nature and certainly not intended for everyday use by ordinary people. Indeed so, as further explained by British historian Paul Kriwaczek (1937-2011):

All that had been devised thus far was a technique for noting down things, items and objects, not a writing system. A record of `Two Sheep Temple God Inanna’ tells us nothing about whether the sheep are being delivered to, or received from, the temple, whether they are carcasses, beasts on the hoof, or anything else about them.

What I make of this is that since the image of, say, a cow makes sense to anyone who is familiar with the animal, it matters in the least whether or not he/she spoke the language of the scribe who ‘drew’ it in the first place. To me, this is analogous to tourists admiring the portrait of the Mona Lisa without necessarily being familiar with the tongue of Leonardo da Vinci.

Over the following two millennia or so, in parallel with the establishment of the Akkadian (2334-2154 BCE), Babylonian (1894-539 BCE) and Assyrian (c. 2500-610 BCE) polities, the original cuneiform script was added to or subtracted from, to make what is written easier to read and comprehend. One consequence was the coming of an obsession to record every facet of Mesopotamian life, that kept professional scribes fully employed. As told by one scholar:

They left behind them thousands and thousands of documents on clay tablets, the majority of them as yet unstudied” .

Broadly speaking, without going into the nitty-gritty of the changes, the gist of the evolution of cuneiform was the adoption of the “rebus principle”, in the words of history professor Ira Spar. A rebus is a puzzle combining pictures and letters aligned in such a way as to form coherent sentences. An example of this, found in Merriam-Webster dictionary, consists of a drawing lining up a tin-can followed by the letters UC and a water well. Together they are meant to be interpreted as: “Can you see well?”.

This being so, clearly then cuneiform writing was becoming language specific. To a Frenchman, for example, the foregoing rebus puzzle is a mystery since in French a tin-can is boite, the two letters are pronounced differently and well is puits. Thus, as described by Spar, cuneiform writing became:

... the beginning of a true writing system characterized by a complex combination of word-signs and phonograms—signs for vowels and syllables—that allowed the scribe to express ideas....[on a] vast array of economic, religious, political, literary, and scholarly documents.

Whatever, suffices to know that the script had improved enough to enable the ‘writing’, sometime in the second millennium BCE, of the Epic of Gilgamesh, a Mesopotamian odyssey preceding by 1,500 years Greece’s famous Iliad by Homer. It was recorded on about a dozen clay tablets (see hereinafter) in the Akkadian language (image). Equally impressive was the recording, in the same language, of the Hammurabi Code in the 1700’s BCE. (See 1 and 2 in Appendix).

Chapter illustration

Cuneiform writing lost its preponderance by 500 BCE. At that date Mesopotamia was part of ‘The First Persian Empire’ (550-330 BCE) founded by Cyrus the Great (601-530 BCE).

How was cuneiform writing deciphered? Thanks to Cyrus’s vanity, it was decoded by a British army officer and orientalist, Henry Rawlinson (1810-1895). He did it after a lengthy examination and comparison of the three languages carved on a cliff of Mount Behistun in Iran: Akkadian cuneiform, old Persian, and an intermediary script. Cyrus had ordered the execution of this artwork to commemorate his conquests and achievements (image).

Chapter illustration

Almost in parallel with Sumer, Egyptians were developing their own pictographic script known as hieroglyphs. That too, in time, made use of the rebus effect as to make for easier learning of written matter. Much later in about 700 BCE an even simpler hieroglyphic script, named demotic, was developed. Both continued to be used till 400 CE.

Hieroglyphic writing (image) is so ubiquitous. It is found on preserved papyrus ‘paper’, stone slabs, on burial chambers walls and the insides of royal pyramids. All these making diverse aspects of pharaonic Egyptian history an open book for historians and archaeologists . Of particular importance in this respect is the Palermo Stone, after the Sicilian capital where it has been preserved since 1877. It consists of a basalt slab, inscribed in hieroglyphics, recording noteworthy annual events along with the names of pharaohs for the 600-year period between 2925 to 2325 BCE.

Chapter illustration

Before anything else, naturally, hieroglyphs needed to be deciphered. The first to do so was Frenchman Jean Francois Champollion (1790-1832). He succeeded thanks to the Rosetta Stone dating from around 200 BCE. Sculpted during the reign of Ptolemy V of Greek ancestry, it is a black granite stone carrying a decree from the king in three languages : hieroglyphic, demotic and ancient Greek. Similarly to Rawlinson, a process of translation enabled Champollion to decipher Egyptian writing from 5,000 years ago onward. A fragment of the Rosetta Stone which could have originally been 2 m tall, is presently displayed in the British Museum (image).

Chapter illustration

Then there is the Chinese script going back some 3500 years ago. It is identified as logographic, rather than pictorial as is the case with cuneiform and hieroglyphs. Logographic signifies that every character is a “symbol, or sign used to represent an entire word”. And whereas the earlier two vanished centuries ago, Chinese, to the contrary is very much alive and kicking.

Chinese writing has always consisted and continues to consist of a great many characters. According to BBC:

Although some large dictionaries have over 50,000 characters, you 'only' need 2 - 3,000 to read a newspaper. University-educated Chinese will normally know 6 - 8,000.

As we have already seen, Chinese is the predominant language in the Sino-Tibetan family. It has inspired Japanese, Korea and others in east Asia. According to BRIT half the books in the world up to the 18th century were written with Chinese characters. They included:

works of speculative thought, historical writings of a kind, and novels, along with writings on government and law.

Chapter illustration

The script found it final form in the years 200’s BCE. Some modifications to it were carried out in 1949, with the creation of the People’s Republic of China. Strikingly, only minor changes were made . Compare the black columns in the image.

Enters the alphabetical system of writing about 3,700 years ago. Instead of thousands of symbols and images, these became not more than a few dozen easy to learn and remember characters or letters each representing a sound in the spoken language. According to Professor Jared Diamond’s book: Guns, Germs and Steel:

Alphabets apparently arose only once in human history: among speakers of Semitic languages, in the area from modern Syria to the Sinai during the second millennium B.C. All of the hundreds of historical and now existing alphabets were ultimately derived from that ancestral Semitic alphabet.

Chapter illustration

Table above: the middle black band shows the Phoenician alphabet. Above it from bottom to top are the early Greek, early Latin or Roman and present day European alphabets. Down from top to bottom are Aramaic, Nabataean and early Arabic.

Inspired by Egyptian hieroglyphic writing, Phoenicians are credited with the invention of the first alphabet during the second millennium BCE. This is the accepted historical wisdom. But not all subscribe to it. For example, in the opinion of American historian and philosopher William Durant (1885-1981):

The Phoenicians did not create the alphabet, they marketed it; taking it apparently from Egypt and Crete, they imported it piecemeal to Tyre, Sidon, and Byblos, and exported it to every city on the Mediterranean; they were the middlemen, not the producers, of the alphabet

That said, and irrespective of its parentage, that alphabet lacked vowels such as: a, e, i, o, u and y. It is thus not clear, at least to me, how it could be managed with consonants only.

The Greeks took up the new alphabet and improved upon it between 1000-900 BCE. Importantly they created seven vowels namely alpha (a), epsilon (e), iota (i), omicron (o), upsilon (u) and omega (ω).

Eventually early Latin or Roman script emerged from the Greek alphabet about the 5th century BCE to morph into the modern Latin I am using here.

Of Greek parentage ,too, is the Cyrillic alphabet of the Slavic languages of central and eastern Europe. It was initiated by the Greek Orthodox Christian linguists and theologians Cyril (826-869 CE) and his brother Methodius (815-885) while on a mission to Moravia, now part of the Czech Republic. Able to speak Slavonic and finding that Greek script could not be read by Slavic believers, they embarked on creating a new alphabet suitable for the specifics of the local languages. Subsequently their script called Glagolitic was worked on by their followers in the 900’s CE, bringing on the early Cyrillic alphabet (image) eponymously named for the Greek linguist. As explained by BRIT:

Chapter illustration

It is currently [in its modern form, obviously] used exclusively or as one of several alphabets for more than 50 languages, notably Belarusian, Bulgarian, Kazakh, Kyrgyz, Macedonian, Montenegrin (spoken in Montenegro; also called Serbian), Russian, Serbian, Tajik, Turkmen, Ukrainian, and Uzbek.

In the Middle East, as shown in the image above, Phoenician script morphed into the Aramaic alphabet in today’s Syria sometime during the first millennium BCE. It lists 22 letters, is written from right to left and similarly lacks vowels. AS comments that:

Aramaic was a kind of "nexus" in the history of writing in Asia. It gave birth to writing systems used by vastly different nations in drastically different geographical locations.

Nabataeans were early Arabs of the first millennium BCE. They resided in “the borderlands between Syria and Arabia, from the Euphrates River  to the Red Sea”. Their kingdom centered on the mountain fortress of Petra, south of the Dead Sea, in present day Jordan. They were prosperous merchants plying their trade between Arabia and the coast.

It obviously helped Nabataeans’ business to be able to read and record transactions. As Aramaic was the only available script, at that time, they adopted it and proceeded to adapt it to their own language ending up with the Nabataean alphabet of 22 letters ,again all consonants, with writing from right to left. Nabataean, ultimately turned into the Arabic script by the 4th century CE, some 3 centuries before the onset of Islam.

Sanskrit, “language of the gods”

Chapter illustration

Sanskrit was and continues to be one of the richest languages in the world. Its written form makes use of 52 letters 16 of which are vowels (against 5 for English). This is enough for a literature rich in vocabulary, phonology (speech sounds) and syntax (words within sentences) cemented together by a comprehensive grammar (see hereinafter). Sanskrit remains, essentially, unchanged to this day. As such it has inspired Irish writer and historian William Cooke Taylor (1800-1849 to comment that:

[t]o acquire the mastery of this language is almost a labour of a life; its literature seems exhaustless.

Sanskrit started as the language of conversation between the various gods. ‘Putting it down on paper’ dates to the second millennium BCE as the texts of the Vedas (Hindu sacred texts). It is also the liturgical medium of Buddhism, Jainism and Sikhism.

Away from theological considerations, command of Sanskrit was, at one time, a mark of refinement and erudition among members of the Indian upper classes. Today it is one of the 22 recognized tongues in India. More; Sanskrit is at the source of “hundreds of modern languages spoken across Pakistan, Bangladesh, Nepal, and Sri Lanka today”. In this respect it is the equivalent of both Greek and Latin in relation European languages.

Most striking, is that it can be written in anyone of several South Asian alphabets. Above image is the Sanskrit sentence: “May Śiva [one of the Hindu gods] bless those who take delight in the language of the gods” in a variety of scripts.

Despite it all, alphabets could not achieve meaningful writing, that is making comprehensible sentences and phrases, till the development of grammar, described by BRIT as the:

...rules of a language governing the sounds, words, sentences, and other elements, as well as their combination and interpretation.

Not forgetting the crucial importance of punctuation marks.

In other words, grammar is the grouping of nouns, verbs, adjectives, commas, periods etc. in a manner as to make telling about physical and abstract things intelligible and coherent.

The first grammarian was Panini who in the India of 4th century BCE “defined a bewildering 3,996 rules for syntax, semantics, and morphology() in Sanskrit” (see hereinbefore).

Thereafter, about 100 years later, grammar moved westwards to Greece. From there it was taken up by the Romans who adapted it to Latin in the 1st century BCE. In the Europe of the Middle Ages (spanning 10 centuries from the 5th to the 15th) , up to about the 1400’s CE, grammatically correct Latin was the medium of instruction, and the basis for the later development of modern European grammars.

As for Arabo-Islamic grammar it was first developed for religious purposes. According to WIKI:

When the great expansion of the Islamic Empire, with millions of newly-converted non-native speakers wishing to read and recite the Qur’an, made the adoption of a formalised grammar system necessary.

The grammarian whose task this was, is Abu al-Aswad al-Du'ali (c. 603-689 CE). Over a hundred years later, Sibawayh (760-797) published Al-Kitab “a five volume seminal encyclopedic grammar of the Arabic language” still of value today.

Writing impements and media

Throughout the history of ‘putting pen to paper’ diverse media which could endure and preserve recorded matter was utilized. They included rock faces, walls of mausoleums and burial chambers, baked clay, papyrus, parchment, tree bark, silk, bones, wax, slate and , in due course: paper. For ‘pens’ scribes and learned persons used tools to engrave, reed styli, quills from bird feathers, brushes and more.

Cuneiform, the oldest of them all, was not actually written in the normal sense as engraved on soft wet clay tablets with reed styli both plentiful in the swampy ground between the two great rivers of Mesopotamia. When the clay dried in the sun (or in ovens) it became a solid record of whatever it has been entrusted with. Such clay tablets endured till about 500 BCE when both the script and the medium were overtaken respectively by alphabetical systems and lighter more manageable material.

Chapter illustration Chapter illustration

As far back as 3200 BCE, Egyptians wrote on papyrus with reed pens dipped in black ink made from a durable mixture of “vegetable gum, soot and bee's wax”. In due course “they replaced the soot with other materials, such as red ochre, to create various colors of ink”.

Papyrus is a plant with a fibrous stem which grows naturally on the banks of the Nile and other rivers of the world. To produce the writing surface, the stem is opened and cut into thin strips. These are laid next to one another in one direction to be overlaid, perpendicularly, with another similarly joined up strips. Next the layers are moistened, pressed together and left to dry in the sun while the natural fluids in the original plant bond strips and layers together. The end result, if due care was taken throughout, is a white sheet with no blemishes or spots, rolled scroll fashion (image). Papyrus, as a writing medium, made it into the later Greek and Roman civilizations.

Chapter illustration

Chinese script was first etched on suitable bones of animals, mostly during the time of the Shang Dynasty (1600-1046 BCE). The favourite ones were the shoulder blades of oxen and the underside of turtle shells. These were used for divination purposes. The bones were incised with certain signs then heated till cracks developed. Depending on their patterns, diviners claimed to tell the future. BL explains:

Chapter illustration

These 'oracle' bones... record questions that were posed to the royal ancestors about topics as diverse as crop rotation, warfare, childbirth and even toothache.

Chapter illustration

Later, Chinese made use of bamboo strips, which they joined together book fashion(image).

Revolutionarily, in about 105 CE, an official of the imperial Chinese court created the ultimate and eminent writing medium: paper. As described by BRIT, he:

created a sheet of paper using mulberry and other bast fibres along with fishnets, old rags, and hemp waste.

At first the Chinese kept the new technology and product secret. But trading along the Silk Road and wartime Chinese captives with paper making knowledge, inevitably, spread the new techniques far and wide. Thus, the Abbaside Arabs learnt about it in 793 CE during the tenure of Harun Al-Rashid. In turn, they kept paper making a secret from Europeans. A few centuries later it, nonetheless, reached Spain, Italy, France and Germany. By the 14th century there were paper mills here and there across Europe.

From incising tools to scratch animals bones the Chinese, in due course adopted the writing brush. As explained by the publication of BL, brushes “were, and still are, made from a variety of animal hair (horse, goat, weasel), each with different properties”. Black Chinese ink did not, originally, differ much from that of the Egyptian variety, being a mixture of “carbon from pine wood soot mixed with the animal glue”.

Another enduring writing material was parchment paper made from the skin of calves, sheep an goats. It first appeared in the 2nd century BCE in the Greek city of Pergamum (hence the appellation of the product), presently Bergama in Turkey.

Making the material involved many steps and processes. The skin was first scraped for hair and other residue, washed, soaked in lime, then stretched etc. ending up as “a thin translucent off white surface”. As is usually the case with any man-made product, the quality of parchment improved with time as better techniques of cleaning and stretching came about. In due course both faces of a parchment could be written on, bringing about the invention of the bound book or codex (image) displacing the hitherto ubiquitous scroll. In Europe, parchment remained the privileged writing medium till after the arrival of Chinese invented paper as seen before.

Chapter illustration

From the early days of the Middle Ages, quills, made from bird feathers were found to be the best suited writing implements on parchment. The reason for this affinity, according to BL is that both “are made from the same natural substance, collagen”. This latter being a protein found in skin, bone etc. Thad said, not all feathers were suitable. They were judiciously chosen, then worked on to improve strength and sharpen their business ends.

Chapter illustration

1-The Epic of Gilgamesh.

Gilgamesh was the half-god half-man king of the Sumerian city of Uruk. He was young, handsome and strong but also tyrannical, arrogant and unruly. He believed he was immortal and lived a life of debauchery which included raping every woman he fancied. So much so that his subjects complained to the gods who reacted by sending Enkidu a half-beast half-man to keep the young king on the straight and narrow.

Soon, the two are engaged in combat, but contrary to expectations, Gilgamesh wins. In spite of the contest, they become close friends and when Enkidu dies, struck by an illness sent by the gods, Gilgamesh is devastated and realizes that he himself may die sooner or later.

In despair, he starts on a journey to the end of the world in search of immortality. During his quest he becomes aware of certain realities he was ignorant of up to then. Eventually, he realizes and accepts that death is inevitable. Accordingly, Gilgamesh returns to Uruk a changed man and rules wisely and compassionately for 126 years.

What is the moral of this epic? According to one source:

The Epic of Gilgamesh” conveys ….[t]hemes of friendship, the role of the king, enmity, immortality, death, male-female relationships...

2- Hammurabi’s Code.

One of the more successful kings in Mesopotamia was Hammurabi of Babylon. He reigned for 42 years (1792-1750 BCE). Specifically, he is remembered for the eponymous Code, consisting of 282 comprehensive laws regulating the everyday life and practices of those he ruled. The Code covered trading, the practice of medicine and every occupation in between. Similarly it regulated the daily conduct and behaviour of his subjects. Not forgetting to spell out punishments to be meted out for a whole range of offences committed by free citizens and slaves.

Quest for Knowledge

QUEST FOR KNOWLEDGE EDUCATION IN THE EARLY AGES

Chapter illustration

Oxford University Building dating from 1274 CE

The Author JUNE 2020

QUEST FOR KNOWLEDGE EDUCATION IN THE EARLY AGES

1. Excerpts from books. *Daily life in ancient Mesopotamia by Karen Rhea Nemet-Nejat. *Higher education and the growth of knowledge by Michael Segre. *Passport to the past: Mesopotamia by Lorna Oakes. *Pedagogy in Islamic education by Glenn Hardaker and Aishah A. Sabki.

2. Essay. *Education, pharaonic Egypt by Katharina Zinn.

3. Other publications. *Ancient Egypt Online (AEOL): Education in ancient Egypt. *College and University History: Medieval universities and the rise of the college. *Encyclopedia Britannica (BRIT): Education (in China, Egypt, Greece, India, Islam, medieval Europe, Mesopotamia, Rome). *Encyclopedia.com: Education, India. *Encyclopedia.com: Medieval education and the role of the Church. *Encyclopedia.com: The rise of medieval universities. *Give Me History: Education in ancient Egypt. *HBC-SU: European education, the Middle Ages. *Legends and Chronicles: Ancient Egyptian education. *National Geographic (NG): Did sons and daughters get the same education in ancient Greece? *The Finer Times: Education in the Middle Ages.

In the preceding narrative ‘Amazing Faculty’, I have written on the evolution and development of the spoken and written language among humans. I have ended it with descriptions of some of the early writing media and tools.

It, thus, appeared that a logical sequel would be to dwell on the beginning and development of literacy and the acquisition of knowledge. Accordingly, this narrative sails from the early rudimentary learning institutions to the first universities , not forgetting those who made them possible.

In this narrative, I describe the provision of education in the extinct civilizations of Mesopotamia, Egypt, Greece and Rome. I, then follow up with the early centuries of India ,China ,the lands of Islam and Europe of the Middle Ages.

In ‘Amazing Faculty’, I have written that roundabout 3200 BCE Sumer in Mesopotamia invented the cuneiform script. It counted several hundred of numerals, symbols and images. Subsequently, it was adopted and adapted by the Akkadian, Babylonian and Assyrian civilizations between 2300 to 500 BCE. Significantly, throughout Mesopotamian scribes busied themselves recording every aspect of local life on tens of thousands of clay tablets. The product of their labour became a treasure trove for archaeologists and historians millennia later. Among those uncovered were thousands dealing with educational matters.

From them, it appears that a rudimentary teaching system existed as far back as 3000 BCE. But formal schooling materialized 1,000 years later.

Mesopotamian education was first and foremost aimed at future priests in theological schools attached to temples, in which they served and attended to the desires and needs of their deities. BRIT sees in this:

...not only the thoroughness but also the supremacy of priestly education.

But education was equally aimed at the training the all-important scribes. It took long hours, days and years of schooling to become a competent one. Strictly speaking, a scribe was a document copier. But in Mesopotamian societies, qualified ones could aspire to be appointed in one of a dozen well-paid and prestigious positions. According to Nemet-Nejat these included, in addition to copyist:

...jobs in the service of the palace or temple, to the military, as land registrar or as public secretary to a high official, accountant, mathematician and astrologer” [etc].

The sons of those with money and influence enrolled for the long and arduous leaning process. They started at age between 5 and 7 and completed the course of studies in early adulthood. According to Nemet Nejat they were the male progeny of:

...governors, ambassadors, temple administrators, military officers, sea captains, important tax officials, priests [etc.].

They attended school daily from sunrise to sunset except for three days each month.

As for the sons of those who tilled the land or practiced some trade, they started equally early in life not, however, in classrooms but in the fields and shops, helping their elders earn the family’s living.

The sisters of the schoolboys, in contrast, could not aspire to being similarly schooled. Their place was in the familial domicile to be taught by their mothers in:

...housekeeping and cooking, and to look after the younger children.

Nonetheless girls could be home-taught to read and write by brothers or other members of the family.

The schools were called ‘tablet houses’ for obvious reasons. Their staff consisted of a headmaster, teachers who prepared tablets for students to copy, and heard their memorized work. Others kept records of attendance and enforced discipline. One important staff member was the teacher of Sumerian. For despite the founding of other polities alongside and after Sumer, such as the Akkadian empire and the Babylonian kingdom, Sumerian language and script remained de rigueur. There were even dictionary tablets to help with the learning of Sumerian. This is not unlike Latin to Europeans, after the demise of Rome, as we shall see.

It would not be true to assume that the curricula of the tablet schools were limited to merely reading and writing. Indeed, the school purpose was to prepare scribes for the variety of positions stated earlier. Thus, additionally, they were taught mathematics, botany, zoology, mineralogy as well as accounting and administrative skills. And Sumerian.

Oakes enlightens us more. She writes that students were allowed to manipulate numbers, including squaring and square rooting, with the help of multiplication and division tables. Mesopotamia had both a decimal numeral system (image) and another with a base of 60.

Chapter illustration

Discipline was harsh. Nemet-Nejat writes that student were beaten (with a whip) for:

...poor class work, sloppy dress speaking without permission, rising without permission, going to the gate, not speaking Sumerian with his Sumerian instructor, and poor penmanship.

Among the tablets excavated were those such as this one by a former student describing a typical day at school:

I recited my tablet ,ate my lunch, prepared my (new) tablet, wrote it, finished it; then my model tablets were brought to me; and in the afternoon my exercise tablets were brought to me. When school was dismissed, I went home...

According to Oakes, his lunch, typically, consisted of:

...unleavened bread made from barley flour, and some cheese. Cheese was made from skim milk and was quite cheap to produce. His mother would put in some dates to give him energy. Sometimes for a treat he might have an apple or a pear.

What is striking about some of the tablets is their contemporariness. In others words, nothing much has changed in attitudes, actions and reactions of students, parents and teachers since those long gone days. Consider.

One schoolboy asks his father to buy presents for and grease the palm of his difficult teacher. The recipient was more than grateful and lauded the boy :

...because you did not neglect my word....may you complete the scribal art from beginning to end. Because you gave me everything...paid me a salary larger than my efforts deserve...may your pointed stylus write well...exercise contain no fault...may you rank the highest among the school graduates...You have carried out well the school’s activities, you are a man of learning...

Two students are boasting about their respective scholastic merits.

...you illiterate, you Sumerian ignoramus, your hand...cannot even hold the stylus properly; it is unfit for writing and cannot take dictation...

To which the one addressed replies:

...I was raised on Sumerian, I am the son of a scribe...When you try to shape a tablet, you can’t even smooth the clay...[You are incapable to] divide up an estate [or]..survey a field...You are one of the most incompetent tablet writers.

A failed student at the end of so many years of schooling is told off by his tutor:

...what good came of your sitting here?...You are...close to being aged! Like an old ass you are not teachable any more...How long will you play around?....it is not too late! If you study...all the time modestly and without arrogance....you still can become a scribe!....receiving a handsome fee...

A father is reprimanding his son for playing truant from school and for not taking his scribal studies seriously enough:

Don’t stand about in the public square...Go to school, recite your assignment, open your schoolbag, write your tablet, let your ‘big brother’ [teacher] write your new tablet for you...show fear before your monitor...[he] will like you [for it]....night and day I am tortured because of you. [All your hours] you waste in pleasure...[I have never told you to] [f]ollow my caravans...plow my fields...[never] sent you to work as a laborer [asked you to] ...work and support me [ like other parents do]...you’re a man [only] when it comes to perverseness...

As we have seen in ‘Amazing Faculty’, we know today a great deal about ancient Egyptian society thanks to the wealth of records, chronicles etc. in the hieroglyphic scripts they have left behind.

Although ancient Egypt goes back to 3000 BCE, scholars have found no evidence of formal schooling till 1500 years later when the 18th dynasty (out of a total of 30) assumed power, initiating a historical period, identified by historians as the ‘New Kingdom’(). It ushered in a time of great expansion in administrative and bureaucratic functions of the government, for better control and management of the Egyptian realm. In turn, the expansion created the need for educated people to occupy the new posts. Thus schools were established within the confines of “administrative units [and] palaces”.

Traditionally, Egyptians children were inculcated, from an early age, by their parents the principles of MAAT. This being an:

...ancient Egyptian concepts of truth, balance, order, harmony, law, morality, and justice... [extended to include]... right behavior within their environment, religious belief, rites, and performance, as well as ethical principles.

But from the age of 5 boys and girls were separated, with the first becoming the charges of their fathers who henceforth took responsibility for their education and upbringing. Their sisters, on the other hand, remained with their mothers to learn womanly duties and chores.

The sons of royalty, aristocracy and other privileged classes, including respected scribal families, became schoolboys. Their stay-at-home sisters could, if opportune be taught to read and write by family members. But the male offspring of peasants and lower classes, had no schooling at all and remained lifelong illiterates. Instead, their fathers apprenticed them in their respective trades and occupations. A noteworthy and rare exception was made for the sons of commoners who showed scribal aptitudes:

...with the ability to read and write to record transactions, royal events, and new policies.

At school, pupils copied and recopied texts while simultaneously learning and memorizing the hundreds of symbols and pictograms of the hieroglyphic script. They could also be taught mathematics, accounting, medicine, ethics and morality. The learning tool used extensively by all Egyptian schoolboys was the ostracon (image) explained thus by AEOL:

Chapter illustration

...[An] ostracon [was a piece] of broken pottery or stone (most often limestone)...used as notepads... they were a cheaper and more plentiful option than papyrus which was costly and time consuming to make.

Further, Zinn explains that some ostraca (plural of ostracon) exist showing the master’s corrections in red. As for the more expensive papyrus, the Egyptian writing medium par excellence, it was reserved for experienced hands.

At age 16 to 17, boys were expected to have successfully completed the entire school curricula. They were, thus in position to take up the same government work as their fathers and grandfathers before that. Significantly, education did not result in upward mobility. In other words, a schooled civil servant remained in the same function all his working life.

Not so, however for qualified scribes (image) even for those hailing from families of modest means. According to Zinn that profession was:

Chapter illustration

...seen as being superior to all other professions.

It therefore, opened the doors to advancement up the social and financial scales.

I have not, so far, mentioned the all-important priestly class in Egyptian society. The clergy had their own schools within temples. Priests not only attended to the needs and wishes of the gods and goddesses residing there but they, crucially, were also the staunch defenders of the faith in a strictly theocratic realm. Ancient Egypt abhorred and resented diversity in thoughts acts or anything, among the populace, smacking of non-conformity with the established norms. Enforcing conformity was the role of the priests. In other words they represented:

...the political bulwarks by preventing diversity.

In the wake of his conquest of Egypt in 332 BCE, Alexander the Great of Macedonia founded the city of Alexandria. For the next 300 years, Egypt was ruled by the Greek Ptolemaic dynasty the last member of which was Cleopatra VII, the lover of Mark Antony. Among the dynasty’s achievements were two great Alexandrian institutions of learning: the library and the school of medicine.

According to BRIT:

Library of Alexandria, the most famous library of Classical antiquity..... The idea of a universal library, like that of Alexandria, arose only after the Greek mind had begun to envisage and encompass a larger worldview.

For the American Association for the Advancement of Science:

The library was believed to have stored over 700,000 scrolls, its content including all known sciences as well as histories of the civilizations of the era. This vast storehouse of knowledge is also believed to have been a sanctuary for the most famous scholars of antiquity.

Likewise, the Alexandria Medical School, as stated by Wikipedia:

...is one of the oldest empirical educational institutions in the history of medicine...The medical works of Hippocrates and Aristotle were studied and the first "Hippocratic Corpus" was collected. Anatomy and methodical study of human corpses are introduced for the first time.

Philosophers and polymaths.

Recorded Greek history goes back to the Mycenaean civilization consisting of multiple small monarchies, populated by warlike peoples, who, it is said, formed the inspiration for the heroes of Homer’s epic of the Trojan War ‘ the Iliad’; such as Helen, Menelaus, Agamemnon and Achilles. That civilization disappeared in the 1100’s BCE. There is no evidence of successor polities in the subsequent four centuries. Thereafter, however, followed what historian call the ‘Archaic Period’ of about 300 years duration. Once again, it was dominated by soldierly, martial aristocrats who yearned to emulate the “physical and military prowess” recited in the Iliad.

But the part of Greek history we dwell on here, is the one marked by the lives and works of Pythagoras ,Herodotus, Socrates, Hippocrates, Isocrates, Plato, Aristotle and Archimedes in a more or less chronological order. This period, epitomized by the city state of Athens began in the 480’s BCE. It is known as Greece’s ’Classical Period’. It ended in 323 BCE, to be replaced by the ‘Hellenistic Period’ of no less significance.

From its infancy around 508 BCE to its capture by Macedonia in 338 BCE, ‘demokratia’( ) was Athens’ norm of government. By virtue of this, all male citizens above the age of 18 voted, participated in government and in decisions concerning religious, economic and other matters. Excluded from participation were women, foreigners and slaves.

According to historian Herodotus (484-425 BCE), the first formal schooling dates to 496 BCE. A decade or two later education was boosted thanks to the appearance in Athens of the Sophists described by BRIT as:

...certain Greek lecturers, writers, and teachers in the 5th and 4th centuries BCE, most of whom traveled about the Greek-speaking world giving instruction in a wide range of subjects in return for fees.

Alas! only elites and the well-to-do, could afford to give their sons the education available at that time. By contrast, daughters were deprived of serious schooling. Instead, theirs was an erratic and uncoordinated education.

Seven year old boys would be escorted to school by trusted and educated slaves at the service of the children’s families. Not only did they fulfill the role of chaperones but were, moreover, the boys’ “lesson coaches” and teachers of proper behaviour and demeanour, meaning according to NG:

Walking properly along the street with lowered eyes, wearing his cloak correctly, sitting properly, remaining silent, and not being greedy. To enforce such manners, he could employ corporal punishment.

Boys attended school till age 17 or so. They were educated according to the Greek system called ‘Paideia’. It meant, in addition to reading and writing, a curriculum consisting of:

...gymnastics, grammar, rhetoric, music, geography, natural history, and philosophy. [It also included Pythagorean] arithmetic, geometry, astronomy, and harmonics (the theory of the numerical laws regulating intervals and rhythm) [after the philosopher and mathematician Pythagoras (570-495 BC)].

Their learning tools were the reusable wax tablet and its stylus. Simply explained, the former was nothing more than a layer of wax in a wooden frame as shown in the image. At room temperature it is both soft and solid enough to be scratched upon. Moderate heating restores it to a clean slate.

Chapter illustration

Higher education was initiated by the great philosopher Plato (424-348 BCE) who founded his ‘Academy’ in 387 BCE. He devised a 15-year long program of study of “dialectics() and mathematical reasoning”. He averred that only those who persist and succeed in this long and arduous program are, as stated by BRIT:

...really fit for the highest offices of the state and capable of being entrusted with the noblest of all tasks, those of maintaining and dispensing justice. [Because good government] would only come from an educated society in which kings are philosophers and philosophers are kings.

Contemporaneously, rhetorician and educator Isocrates (436–338 BCE) started his own school of higher education. His was of a more practical nature, focusing on commonsense solutions of life’s problems, with recourse to the mathematics of his day for the mental training of his students. Also notable is Isocrates’ conviction that:

So far has Athens left the rest of mankind behind in thought and expression that her pupils have become the teachers of the world.

For his part, philosopher, polymath and graduate of Plato’s Academy, Aristotle (385-323 BCE), is quoted by BRIT as remarking:

...only a few superior students would continue....developing encyclopaedic and intensely intellectual interests in the biological and physical sciences, ethics, and rhetoric, as well as philosophy.

Moreover, he maintained that the city-state should, for its own good, take upon itself the education of its youth:

No one will doubt that the legislator should direct his attention above all to the education of youth.…The citizen should be moulded to suit the form of government under which he lives.

Aristotle put his money where his mouth was, in 334 BCE, by establishing in a gymnasium his own place of learning: the ‘Lyceum’. There, he had a library built and held discussions with the brilliant minds of his time. More, he and others gave lectures, free of charge to the general public.

The ‘Hellenistic Period’ is that during which Greek culture reached far and wide thanks to the conquests of Alexander the Great of Macedonia. Historians have fixed its beginning to the time of his demise in 323 BCE, and its end about three centuries later with the loss of Greek Egypt to the Romans.

From the educational aspect, little changed from the preceding period. Education remained the preserve of the upper classes. Otherwise, an intermediary stage of learning was introduced before that of higher studies, explained by BRIT as:

...a kind of civic and military training that completed the education of the young Greek and prepared him to enter into life; it lasted two years (from 18 to 20)... To this were added lectures on scientific and literary subjects, [ensuring] a polish of general culture....

In the wake of Alexander conquests, Greeks migrated to the “barbarian lands” they henceforth ruled. In their new places of residence, most notably in Egypt, they considered themselves superior to the local inhabitants. They were,thus, eager :

...[to] initiate their sons into Greek life and its characteristic customs... [and] to legitimize the privileged status of the Hellene relative to the “native”

Hence the two great edifices of learning in Alexandria, covered hereinbefore

Law school in Beirut

Ancient Rome was a republic up to 27 BCE, and an empire till sacked by

the Germanic Visigoths in 410 CE. Its downfall occurred in 476 CE.

Before its encounter with Greek culture, Roman style education was a family affair. Typically, from the age of 7 a boy was taken in charge by his father who controlled and supervised his maturation and learning. At age 16, the boy was allowed to wear adult clothing, was released from his paternal tutelage, and spent a year learning public affairs under the guardianship of a trusted friend of the family:

...a man of politics laden with years and honours.

Followed military service. Soldiering could become his lifelong occupation rising from a simple soldier to a high ranking officer, if he proved himself in combat and showed leadership qualities.

TheRoman annexation of Hellenistic Greece, completed in 146 BCE, flagrantly showed to the invaders their backwardness vis-à-vis the Hellenes. Henceforth, they adopted and adapted a great deal of their culture, and learned their language. As explained by BRIT:

The practical Romans grasped the advantages to be drawn from a knowledge of Greek—an international language known to many of their adversaries, soon to be their Oriental subjects...[and]...a Roman was considered truly cultivated only if he had the same education, in Greek, as a native Greek acquired.

In an earlier narrative, ‘Humours and the Yin and the Yang’ we have seen that at these times Greek doctors moved to Rome, enhancing the profession there. Similarly, others in various walks of life joined them there. So much so that Greek servants and nannies were hired to work in the homes well-to-do Romans. In consequence their young children mastered Greek before they could converse in Latin, their mother tongue. Later, they were taught to read and write in both languages by their private tutors or in private schools. Later still, as young adults, some were not content to wrap-up their education at the hands of the highly qualified Greek tutors in Rome. Rather, they did so by travelling to Athens, the source of academia.

But Rome had one specialty that the Greeks knew nothing of: the study of law. Schools were established and staffed by law practicing professors, who, according to BRIT:

...initiated into [their] art the group of young disciples entrusted to [them]; these listened to [their] consultations and heard [them] plead or judge....Roman law was thus promoted to the rank of a scientific discipline.

One of the law schools was established in Beirut in the 3rd century CE.

Those who completed the course were well regarded in society and recruited for prestigious positions in the judicial or administrative branches of government. As the language of the course was Latin, Greek aspirants had no choice but to learn the “barbarous language” in their view, under other circumstances.

Brahmans and the Buddha

Historically, an ancient and sophisticated Indian civilization with its own culture and religion, has long existed; but very little of it is known. What is established, however, is that by about 1500 BCE the northwest of the Indian subcontinent was invaded by horse riding herdsmen from the Central Asian Steppe in search of better pastures, and easier living. They called themselves Aryans or Noble Ones. They brought with them their religion and scriptures. These along with sprinklings of local beliefs, gave birth to Hinduism.

Integral to Hinduism is the caste system consisting of four rigid classes, each with its predetermined role in society with no possibility of an upward move into the next caste. In other words one is born into a caste and dies within it generation after generation. From top to bottom, and order of social eminence are the priests and academics (Brahmans), kings and warriors (Kishatrias), merchants and landowners (Vaishyas) and, at the bottom, commoners, artisans and labourers (Shudras)(). Religion permeated every aspect of Indian life/activity including politics, economics and as sure as day follows night: education.

The sons of Brahmans were taught first a home by their parents. At age eight they left to join the household of a guru (religious teacher), located in wooded surroundings, to learn Hindu scriptures, hymns, morality and philosophy. He stayed there for 12 years at no charge to his parents. Instead, he repaid his tutor by:

...tend [ing] the sacrificial fires, do [ing] the household work...and look [ing] after his cattle. [Moreove], the student had to observe brahmacharya—that is, wearing simple dress, living on plain food, using a hard bed, and leading a celibate life.

This pattern of education was originally available for the sons of the second and third castes i.e. kings, warriors, merchants and landowners. But by the 6th century BCE, in the words of BRIT:

...the [Hindu religion] rituals and sacrifices had gradually developed into a highly elaborate cult that profited the priests but antagonized an increasing section of the people. Education became generally confined to the Brahmans...

At about that time, mostly in reaction to this aberration, Buddhism arose in India. It declared itself opposed to the caste system and accordingly schooled its adherents, irrespective of caste, in monasteries attached to its temples.

Subsequently, some 500 years later or by the first century CE social attitudes had changed enough to enable a general augmentation of educational activities at all levels. So much so that even Buddhist seminaries added secular topics to their religious ones.

One of India’s golden ages happened between the 4th and 6th century CE. In those two hundred or so years, great advances were made in the sciences, mathematics and astronomy. Among the great names which arose during that period, was that of mathematician Aryabhata who, in the 5th century CE brought forward the notions of the zero and decimals. Not neglected either at that time were the applied and medical sciences.

It was also the age of the university. Among them the university in Nalanda with several thousand students and 1,500 lecturers, funded by the rural communities in its vicinity benefitting from its presence. Subjects taught were both of religious and secular nature. The latter included the sciences and the liberal arts. Nalanda’s fame was such that it was attended by students from abroad. Admission was by examination with a handful only passing at each sitting.

By the 10th century CE the state of education in India was such that in the words of BRIT:

Nearly every village had its schoolmaster, who was supported from local contributions.... Girls were usually educated at home, and vocational education was imparted through a system of apprenticeship.

That century also marks the onset of Islamic rule, in Hindu India. It arose first as the ‘Delhi Sultanate’ and ended with the dissolution of the Mughal Empire in the 19th century. During those 900 years, Islamic education, along the lines described hereinafter, made its mark on the Indian subcontinent.

Confucius and good government

Many agree that the onset of formal education in China dates back to the 1600’s BCE. For the ensuing millennium, China consisted of a number of “feudal states” run by lords and aristocrats lording it over commoners and peasants in their respective domains. They all, nonetheless, paid tribute to the overarching Chinese king or the “Son of Heaven”.

Those privileged classes were taught, in formal schools, the “six arts” namely:

...rituals, music, archery, charioteering, writing, and mathematics.

As for the lowly people, they too received education of sorts at the close of the workday in their places of residence. As elsewhere, girls were taught separately in:

...homemaking and the feminine virtues that assured the stability of the family system.

Starting in the 770’s BCE, the feudal states began to disintegrate accompanied by emergence of urban conurbations and increase in commercial activities engendering socio-political and educational changes. Together, they ushered in, according to BRIT:

...the most creative periods in China’s intellectual history, when the Hundred Schools of thought vied with one another to expound their views and proposals for attaining a happy social and political order. [Further] Scholars [of this period] propounded theories of government and of social and individual life that were as influential in China and East Asia as the Greek philosophers of almost contemporary age were in the Western world.

Among The Hundred Schools was that of Confucianism, founded by Confucius (551-479 BCE) and promoted, after him, by his adherents, notably the philosopher Mencius (372-289 BCE). In the opinion of the Chinese Central Academy of Fine Arts:

Confucianism probably is the biggest influence in education of China throughout the entire Chinese history.

Confucianism is a humanistic philosophy with no place in it for religious dogma or of supernatural nature. Instead, it is, at its core, about relationships within the family beginning with filial piety explained by BRIT as an:

attitude of obedience, devotion, and care toward one’s parents and elder family members that is the basis of individual moral conduct and social harmony

and by extension to the relation between people and ruler, the father of all. In other words: good government.

Central to Confucian government, is a dedicated administration staffed by educated and competent civil servants appointed on merit basis. By implication the longstanding practice of selecting government officers from among the privileged classes , with no merit other than elevated social status, was not conducive to good governance.

In consequence, Confucius and his followers advocated a system of meritocratic selection, from all social classes. Schools were to be set up for training candidates for the civil service. Completion of studies were to be followed by rigorous written examinations; the best performers being chosen for government service.

The unification of the whole of China into one mighty empire, was achieved under the Qin dynasty in 221 BCE. One of its consequences was the unification of Chinese written scripts, into one for the whole realm, while at the same time simplifying it as to make it easier to learn. Followed the standardization of books for primary education. During the succeeding Han dynasty (206 BCE–220 CE) public and private schools, in town as well as in villages proliferated, and a first university was established attended at its peak by 30,000 students. They wrote on bamboo strips and later on paper in the wake of its invention in 105 CE, by a Chinese court official.

Four centuries later, under the Tang dynasty (618-907 CE), the examinations advocated by Confucius and his disciples were given their final forms. They remained unchanged into the 20th centuries. In particular different levels were established corresponding to award of an equal number of degrees:

...not unlike the bachelor’s, master’s, and doctor’s degrees of modern times [in the view of BRIT].

Although, application for the civil service exams were open to candidates from all walks of life; the majority, in reality, hailed from wealthier families. It was so, according to an article in ‘The New York Times’, because it took money and time to attend the “ private institutions” set up specifically, to teach the doctrine of Confucius, in preparation for the tests. As for the exams themselves, again according to the same source:

[They] lasted between 24 to 72 hours and consisted of essay questions that tested the individual’s understanding of the Confucius doctrine. To obtain objectivity in evaluation, candidates were identified by number rather than by name; and in order to further ensure anonymity, examination answers were rewritten by a third person before being evaluated.

More. Worthy scholars were organized into and academy, admission to which was a great honour and a recognition of exceptional scholarship. Academy members administered and supervised examinations. They were also called upon for the elucidation of difficult subjects to emperors.

Kuttab, madrasa and majalis.

Some three decades after the death of Prophet Muhammad, the Ummayad khalifate which ruled the Islamic world between 661 and 750 CE from its capital in Damascus, began the process of accumulation, translation and Islamization of the wealth of knowledge and thoughts coming from Greece, pre-Islamic Persia and India. This process was continued and added to by their descendants in Islamic Spain (711- 1492).

The accumulation of knowledge was accentuated under the Abbasid khalifate seated in Baghdad from 750 to 1258. Most intensively so, under Harun ar-Rashid (786-809) and his son al-Ma’mun (813-833). The process was no doubt helped by the recent advent of paper invented centuries earlier in China. In his book ,Michael Segre quotes one scholar as noting, in this respect:

..in terms of intensity, scope...it had had no precedent in the history of the Middle East or of the world. Large libraries on “the philosophical sciences” were created, embassies were sent out in search of Greek manuscripts, and [foreign] scholars were employed to perform the task of translation of all this [etc.]

Not only royalty but also wealthy members of the community contributed to the establishment of houses learning among them ‘Dar al-Hikmah’ and ‘Dar al- Ilm’ in Baghdad and Cairo respectively. More. BRIT tells us that:

The high degree of learning and scholarship in Islam... encouraged the development of bookshops, copyists, and book dealers in large, important Islamic cities such as Damascus, Baghdad, and Córdoba..... Book dealers traveled to famous bookstores in search of rare manuscripts for purchase and resale to collectors and scholars and thus contributed to the spread of learning.

Meanwhile , in Islamic Spain, qualified by BRIT as:

...one of the most advanced civilizations of the period, where much of the learning of the past—Oriental, Greek, and Roman—was preserved and further developed.[In particular], Greek and Latin scholarship was collected in great libraries in the splendid cities of Córdoba, Sevilla (Seville), Granada, and Toledo, which became major centres of advanced scholarship, especially in the practical arts of medicine and architecture.

Islamic education by the early days of the Abbasids consisted of three branches of learning and knowledge. First came “Islamic sciences” concerned with the teaching of the Holy Qura’an, and its interpretation; secondly that of the “Hadith” or the ways of the Prophet. Of a somewhat lower level of righteousness, but sought after just the same, was gaining knowledge in the branches of:

...the philosophical and natural sciences [of ancient Greece and that of] the literary arts.

The ‘kuttab’ (image) was the first gathering for the primary education of children. In fact it predates Islam and taught reading and writing. In the wake of the Revelation, it took upon itself the teaching of the Holy Qura’an and the Hadith. Some kuttabs, even taught “poetry, elementary arithmetic, penmanship, ethics (manners), and elementary grammar”.

Chapter illustration

Enters the ‘madrasa’, described by BRIT as

...the crown and glory of medieval Muslim education”

Glenn Hardaker and Aishah Sabki tells us that a madrasas could be part of mosques or otherwise but always near one. They flourished particularly in Egypt, North Africa, Iran and Indonesia. With time they developed into teaching facilities with several classrooms, dormitories, washrooms, and teachers’ accommodations.

The earliest instances of higher education occurred in mosques. The assembly was called ‘majalis’. The sessions of learning and discussions took place after prayers. Another appellation was ‘halaqa’ meaning ring. Those wishing to attend sat in concentric circles with the more advanced learner nearest the teacher at the center. Some of the latter were of such level of scholarship and reputation that people undertook long and arduous journeys to be part of their ‘halaqas’ . In the book of Hardaker and Sabki we find the quote:

The halaqa was described as the simplest form of early Muslim education and represented... a unique experience to Muslims.

As for Segre, he quotes another scholar:

The ‘majalis’, bringing together people of differing views to attend debates in quasi “academic freedom”, were not only an important institution or contemporary higher learning...they were [among other things], a vehicle for scholars to approach patrons to find board and lodging and, eventually, employment as physicians, royal scholars, ministers, and other positions.

Al-Azhar University together with the mosque of the same name, predates the oldest university in Europe (See later) and is itself predated by two other Muslim universities, Zaytuna in Tunisia and Qarawiyin in Morocco, founded in 737 and 859 respectively.

The university/mosque complex was established between 970 and 972 CE by the Fatimid dynasty of Shi’a Ismaili denomination who ruled Egypt for more than two and a half centuries, from 909 to 1171. Intellectually, the Fatimids believed in the value Greek philosophy, seeking to enrich Islam with some of its ideas and theories. So much so that al- Alazhar:

...developed into a place of learning with librarie and with [for over 1,000 years] hundreds of thousands of students [learning] legislative, Arabic, natural and human sciences... .including sharia...philosophy, logic, mathematics and medicine.

Finally, about the status an role of women in Islam. The general agreement is that during the living of Prophet Muhammad women were, socially and educationally more on equal footing to men than in the days which followed his departure in 632 CE. They could join group prayers in mosques, albeit in rows behind men’s, and left the premises first. Women were also enjoined by the Prophet to seek knowledge, both religious and otherwise, commensurately with men.

Notwithstanding, ,according to ‘Oxford Islamic Studies Online’, under the rule of the second khalife Umar bin al-Khattab (from 634 to 644 CE) women were secluded to special rooms in mosques led in prayers by a female imam. Later in the 700 ‘s they were kept out of mosques altogether because the men of the faith of the day:

...justified their reversal of the Prophet's order by claiming that public spaces were unsafe for women ().

Clearly, public places included schooling institution; similarly, therefore, not safe for women, leading the afore mentioned source to remark:

Throughout Islamic history, some daughters of wealthy families received private education in the home. More often, however, women were excluded from formal education, and illiteracy was common.

Of monasteries and universities

Or, education in medieval ( Middle Ages) Europe. The timescale is about a millennium, from the fall of the western Roman empire in 476 CE to the onset of the European Renaissance in the early 1500’s or so. Within this span, the first 500 years are identified as the ‘Dark Ages’ ; the next as “medieval renaissance” so named by BRIT.

As the hordes of Barbarians moved in and brought the death of the western Roman Empire, its pagan system of education progressively lost its importance. It was replaced by a Christian system devised and managed by the Catholic Church. Education remained the realm of the clergy throughout that historic period. Of the Roman legacy only its language, Latin, remained.

Meanwhile, the Church, like all great institutions and, indeed, states was evolving an administrative structure for which an educated clergy was vital for the efficient running and management the Catholic establishment. In consequence monasteries became the first schools where monks were taught to read and write Latin and other subjects to prepare them for service in and of the Church. Attending these monastic schools were the sons of the upper classes of the European feudal system of the day, to the exclusion of the great majority of the population which remained illiterate. Clearly, however, not all students were interested in a future within the religious community. With time, therefore, according to Encyclopedia .com:

...these monasteries did become great repositories of knowledge, in that many of the books of the day (particularly religious texts) were copied by hand in monastic scriptoria and stored in their libraries, as shown in an illustration of monks using a monastic library from a French manuscript of the fourteenth century....

When the Holy Roman Emperor()Charlemagne (742-814 CE) took the throne in 768, he was appalled at the poor standard of education in the monastic schools. In consequence, he decreed, according to BRIT that:

...the clergy be educated severely, whether by persuasion or under compulsion...[his] promotion of ecclesiastical and educational reform bore fruit in a generation of churchmen whose morals and whose education were of a higher standard than before.

The reformation of Charlemagne was, perhaps naturally, followed, by the opening of opportunities for the more able monastic students whether clerics or laymen to pursue further education in religious and academic fields. The first facility for that purpose was established in the emperor’s palace in Aachen, the Empire’s capital. To staff it and succeeding ones, prominent scholars were recruited from all corners of Europe. Charlemagne’s interest in promoting education is perhaps best illustrated by his habit of convening discussion meetings with his heirs, courtiers, officials and friends on:

...the existence or nonexistence of the underworld and of nothingness; the eclipse of the sun; the relationship of Father, Son, and Holy Spirit; and so on.

Enters the “medieval renaissance”. By the beginning of the 11th century the acquisition of knowledge took a turn to the better. Returning crusaders and merchants brought back, from the Holy Land and other Islamic realms in the east and west new knowledge in the spheres of philosophy, medicine, mathematics, physics, astronomy and more; the works and scholarships, in other words, of the likes of al-Razi, Ibn Sina, Omar Khayyam, Ibn Bajjaj ,Ibn Rushd and many more.

Starting from around 1050 CE, schools began to be set up in cities with cathedrals. Known as ‘cathedral schools’ they were established and supervised by the Catholic clergy. Intended, initially, for educating future clerics, they eventually accepted the sons of the nobility aiming for secular careers. Each such school employed one teaching professional master on whose reputation that of the school itself depended. A renown scholarly master attracted students not merely from the vicinity of the cathedral, but equally from farther regions. Hence, understandably, when a master left, he was followed by most of his students to his new academic destination; bringing a sort of disgrace to the one vacated.

In an attempt to keep their student populations near-intact, when a master left, some cathedral schools began to recruit several such masters. Eventually, both teachers and students formed guilds, separated themselves from the cathedrals and established new quarters elsewhere in the city. The Latin for guild is ‘universitas’ or an association of professionals. In time it came to mean “society of academics” exclusively. Thus were born the great universities of Europe.

The first such center of learning was created in the port city of Salerno, Italy, a meeting place of traders and navigators. It began as a school of medicine early in the 9th century and remains so today. It was followed by another Italian university, that of Bologna founded in 1088. It taught law. Sometime between 1150 and 1170 the university of Paris was born. It taught theology and the liberal arts (humanities, social sciences, physical sciences, and mathematics). According to Encyclopedia. Com:

...[s]ome of the finest churchmen and independent clerical scholars came to Paris to teach().

Both, Bologna and Paris catered for wealthy students from all over the continent, and became models for later universities in Europe.

There is evidence that some teaching took place at Oxford in England as early as the 1100’s. But, it achieved its status of a university when English students at the University of Paris returned home and established it. There are records, too, that in later years Oxford University set up residences for students and created a fund for the assistance of students of modest backgrounds and means. In 1209, former scholars from the university of Oxford, in dispute with the townspeople, moved to Cambridge and founded the university there.

All European universities taught in Latin, the language of academia at the time. Courses could be long; for example it took at least 8 years to complete theological studies. Several students eschewed that course in favour of the shorter, and more lucrative studies of law and medicine. Exams were set every term. Upon completion of the courses a successful student was awarded one of three degrees depending on the level of studies achieved : baccalaureate enabling him to take up teaching under the supervision of a master, a license to teach without supervision and finally a doctorate for ‘master’ level graduates.

The number of universities continued to grow in Europe during the twelfth century so that by 1300 there were 23 universities: 11 in Italy, 5 in France, 2 in England, and 5 on the Iberian Peninsula.

European medieval society did not differ from all others we have looked at hereinbefore, as regards education of girls. Once again, they were expected to remain at home and learn religious piety and good “household management”. However, the daughters of better to do families could benefit from home schooling.

A few thoughts to end with.

While going through the text of this narrative, my readers may have been struck, like me by the positive role played by religion, in different cultures, in initiating the process of learning. It, hence, seems to me that without the interest of the persons of religion in the matter, education would not have arisen as early as it did. I include here the case of China where the teachings of Confucius are so revered as to be nothing short of a faith akin to religion.

I have also puzzled at the richness and fecundity of ancient Greece in men of knowledge and wisdom. As we have seen they have been at the source of Islamic and European, if not others, learning and scholarship. But where, I wonder, did the Greek get their inspiration and wisdom from, in the first place?

Finally, I have noted the universality of the attitude toward the education of girls. Their inferior status in this respect is a constant in all civilizations irrespective of culture and creed.

Women Remembered

WOMEN REMEMBERED

The Author AUGUST, 2022

REFERENCES

Cleopatra. -Simon Sebag Montefiore: ‘Titans of History’, book. -Historyworld.net: History of Cleopatra.

Florence Nightingale. -Simon Sebag Montefiore: ‘Titans of History’, book. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Florence Nightingale, British nurse etc.

Harriet Tubman. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Harriet Tubman, American abolitionist. -History.com: Harriet Tubman. -Wikipedia: Harriet Tubman. Isabella. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Isabella I, queen of Spain. -History Today: Death of Isabella I of Castile. Mata Hari. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Mata Hari, Dutch dancer and spy. -Biography: Mata Hari. -ThoughtCo: Biography of Mata Hari, infamous World War I spy.

Mother Teresa. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Mother Teresa, Roman Catholic nun. -Biography online: Biography Mother Teresa. -New World Encyclopedia: Mother Teresa. -ThoughtCo: Biography of Mother Teresa, 'The Saint of the Gutters'. -The Guardian: Mother Teresa: For the love of God? review etc. -The Washington Post: Why Mother Teresa is still no saint etc.

Theodora. -Simon Sebag Montefiore: ‘Titans of History’, book. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Theodora, Byzantine empress.

Umm Kulthum. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Umm Kulthūm, Egyptian musician. -The Guardian: 'She exists out of time': Umm Kulthum etc. -Wikipedia: Umm Kulthum.

Zhao Wu. -Simon Sebag Montefiore: ‘Titans of History’, book. -Encyclopedia Britannica: Wuhou, empress of Tang dynasty

INTRODUCTION

This narrative is about important women in human history. I, therefore, cannot begin without first acknowledging the prominence of Eve, the mother of humanity and the exalted status of Mary, the mother of Jesus/’Issa.

Then we have powerful women in various mythologies. To name a few: Artemis (Greece), Hel (Scandinavia), Hidimba (India), Morrigan (Celtic Europe), Tefnut (Egypt), and many more. I leave it to my readers to find out who they were and what they did to deserve being among the remembered.

These women apart, what follows are brief biographies of remarkable, earthly, women who figure in history books. They do so not necessarily because of their good deeds. Indeed, some who managed to achieve power and influence in their socio-political environments were ruthless and cruel in their attempts to safeguard their positions and privileges. The rest were much more benign. Lastly, while Cleopatra thrived in pre-Christian times all others have done so within the last 2,000 years, i.e. in the Common Era (CE).

Why these and not others among the hundreds of women who have left their mark throughout human history? Well, first, five of them I have chosen from the tome by historian Simon Sebag Montefiore: ‘Titans of History’. As for the remaining I have scrutinized mor than 100 names on the web and decided on these as suitable for the purpose and scope of this narrative. Throughout, I have opted against the ones still around; all those selected have departed this world.

Finally, my only regret is that I could not fit in the famous physicist Marie Curie (1867-1934), because I was not able to explain in simple enough language the complicated science she excelled in and for which she earned the Nobel Prize on two occasions.

CLEOPATRA

Cleopatra VII (69-30 BCE) is remembered for “using….her…political acumen and her sexual charisma” in the words of historian Montefiore, to influence the policies of the Roman Republic in favour of her Egyptian realm.

She belonged to the Ptolemaic dynasty established by Ptolemy one of the Generals of Alexander the Great who had invaded Egypt0 in 332 BCE. Among other things, the new dynasty had adopted the prevailing local practice of sibling marriages among royalty. Hence, her father Ptolemy XII had decreed that after his death Cleopatra would rule jointly with her younger brother and husband Ptolemy XIII. But she had other plans. She wanted to be the one and only queen of Egypt. So much so that her partner exiled her in 51 BCE. She was 18 at the time.

Three years later, she sought the help and protection of the Roman ruler (dictator) Julius Caesar (100-44 BCE) who happened to be in Egypt on a military expedition. According to Montefiore, she “smuggled herself into Caesar’s presence rolled in a laundry bag”. At the age 52 he fell for her head over heels. He obliged her by forcing Ptolemy XIII to flee and drown in the Nile. He was replaced on the throne by his brother and again husband of Cleopatra, Ptolemy XIV. She allegedly killed him shortly thereafter.

Caesar returned to Rome leaving behind a pregnant Cleopatra. A boy was born. He was named Caesarion (‘little Caesar’). She later, along with the newborn, joined Caesar in Rome as his consort. When the latter was assassinated, in 44 BCE she returned home with their son.

In the wake of Caesar’s demise, control of Rome was assumed by a triumvirate (trio) that included one Mark Antony. By then the Roman Republic was in control of practically the whole Mediterranean basin. But in Egypt, Cleopatra was not quite under the Romans’ thumb. From his military quarters in Anatolia, Mark Antony sent for the Egyptian monarch, in 41 BCE, to reprimand her for her insubordination. In the words of Historyworld.net: “The queen arrives in a Golden barge, dressed as Aphrodite-(Greek goddess of sexual love and beauty)- She is irresistible, and the goddess of love is soon in the great general's bed”.

Henceforth, Mark Anthony spent time in Egypt in her company. Further he granted her control of part of the Eastern Mediterranean, practically making Egypt even more independent of Rome than before. By the time he returned to Rome, Cleopatra had given him twins, one of each gender.

In 37 BCE she joined Mark Antony in Syria to marry him. His wedding present to her was the control of a region of the Eastern Mediterranean to rule as part of her Egyptian realm. Caesarion and his half-siblings, all minors, were given pieces of the geographic pie to co-rule with their mother. And to crown it all, the couple, ludicrously, elevated themselves to the rank of deities.

Geopolitically, henceforth, Mark Antony was allied with Cleopatra against the interests of his mother nation. This did not amuse the bigwigs in Rome. Their displeasure was such that they sent an army the bring the pseudo-divine husband and wife alliance to heel. And though Mark Antony and Cleopatra put up a stiff resistance, they were defeated in 31 BCE. The former stabbed himself to death with his own sword. As for the Egyptian queen, she decided to die in style. She had a snake brought in a basket and bite her while she reclined on her golden bed. She was the last of the pharaohs.

FLORENCE NIGHTINGALE

Florence Nightingale (1820-1910), in the words of historian Montefiore, “overcame obstacles and obduracy to…establish nursing as a trained and respectable profession for women…”. For this, in particular, and for contributing to the betterment of healthcare in general, she is remembered.

She originated in a well to do English family and was educated at home by her father to a level higher than was usual for English girls in those days. At the age of 16 she claimed to have received a message from God. It conveyed to her that she had a mission to fulfill in life.

That mission directed her towards nursing, then a disreputable occupation in Victorian England. Eventually at nearly 30 years of age she managed, against familial objections, to travel to Germany to attend one of the few nursing schools available. There, she undertook two periods of training. Upon her return in 1851, she was entrusted with running an organization “for Sick Gentlewomen (governesses) in Distressed Circumstances, in London”, in which capacity she showed her abilities “as an administrator by improving nursing care, working conditions, and efficiency of the hospital” , as described by Britannica.

With the Crimean War ()raging, she, along with the rest of the public, read newspaper accounts of its violence and high casualty rates. These reports put the government in such an awkward position that it requested thirty-three year old Nightingale to lead a nursing mission to the Scutari (near Istanbul) military hospital.

When she arrived, she discovered dismal levels of caring by medical personnel along with a sorry state of affairs as regard hygiene and the supply of necessary items. She immediately set about reorganizing all that needed to, including transforming the standards of in-hospital care. Her success was such that it resulted in a dramatic drop of death rate among soldiers from a high as 50 % when she showed up to a low of 2% by the time she left.

But more. She succeeded in raising morale among the afflicted. She routinely walked among the beds at night with a lamp, enquiring and comforting. For this she was given the moniker of ‘the Lady with the Lamp’. Indeed, she had such a welcome presence on the bedridden soldiers that an unidentified one described the effect of those nightly rounds in these words: “What a comfort to see her pass. She would speak to one, and nod and smile to as many more… we lay there by the hundreds, but we could kiss her shadow as it fell and lay our heads on the pillow again content”

She achieved all this despite, the stiff objections Nightingale originally faced from male medical staff reluctant to accept a woman’s authority and objecting to female nurses entering the wards where the ailing, wounded and dying servicemen rested.

Back in England she busied herself with improving healthcare for soldiers in general. Among others, she helped with the setting up of a medical school for the military. She also contributed to the proper schooling and training of midwives and nurses.

She passed away at 90.

HARRIET TUBMAN

Harriet Tubman (1820-1913) was a diminutive, 150cm tall, African slave in the USA. She is remembered for deeds she accomplished as a ‘conductor’ leading dozens of others co-slaves, on multiple occasions, at great risk to herself and her charges, along the ‘Underground Railroad’-(see below)- to places where slavery was not countenanced.

But first some relevant background information.

Slave owners, through restrictive codes, and by means of harsh and brutal punishments, regulated and controlled the lives of their bondsmen and women. Not unreasonably, therefore, running away was on the minds of many of them, but only a few attempted it. Those who did, headed north in the hope of reaching the ‘promised land’ of Canada. They travelled what was dubbed the Underground Railroad. There was nothing of below ground nature or any train journey implied by the phrase. It merely referred to a network of routes along which were located ‘stations’ where the escapees could find assistance. Sadly though, only a minority managed to reach its destination. Not only were the distances to be covered huge, but equally, they were constantly on the look-out for slave catchers, often with dogs. In 1850 Congress had passed the ‘Fugitive Slave Act’ empowering the latter to apprehend any runaway slave anywhere on the territory of the United States-(including in non-slave states)-, and reinstating him/her to her/his owner. For this reason, the Canadian province of Ontario, where slavery had been abolished, became a destination of choice.

Harriet was born to slave parents along with eight siblings. Her mother tried hard to keep the family together but, alas, without much success. Yet on one occasion she forcefully managed to thwart the sale of her youngest son, by reportedly telling her owner and a slave buyer: “You are after my son; but the first man that comes into my house, I will split his head open”.

At the age of five, Harriet was hired out as nursemaid to a family with a baby. She was supposed to rock the little one to sleep. But if/when she failed and the baby cried the mother would whip her. She told of one instance when she was flogged multiple times before breakfast. Later when she was seven she, again, was rented out to a farmer to set traps for muskrats-(“semi aquatic rodents”) in swamps, even when suffering from measles. She also laboured as cook, wood chopper and others. In time, she learnt to resist and on one occasion ran away dressed in many layers of clothing to dampen the pain of beating if caught.

An incident happened when Harriet was twelve. She deliberately stepped in the way of a heavy metal projectile aimed by an overseer -(supervisor)- at a fellow slave. Her head intercepted the heavy object with dire costs to her. Henceforth, and for the rest of her life, she suffered from fits of epilepsy. More fatefully, however, she began to have hallucinations which she interpreted as messages from God. It helped that Harriet was a deeply religious Christian but, incidentally, never accepted the teachings of white clergymen “who urged enslaved people to be passive and obedient victims to those who trafficked and enslaved them”

On suspicion that she was about to be sold, hence, separated for good from her family, Harriet Tubman fled in December 1849, making her way northwards, via the ‘Underground Railroad’ to Philadelphia nearly 150 kms away. Upon crossing the border between Maryland and Pennsylvania, she was so overwhelmed that, as she recalled “I looked at my hands to see if I was the same person. There was such a glory over everything; the sun came like gold through the trees, and over the fields, and I felt like I was in Heaven”.

A year later she returned to Baltimore, Maryland, to escort her sister and children northwards. There followed a decade of back-and-forth trips conducting runaway slaves to safety, along the ‘Underground Railroad’.

Given the risks involved-(notably the 1850 ‘Fugitive Slave Act’ explained above)-, Harriet by then known as ‘Moses of her people’(), showed a great deal of acumen and ingenuity to evade discovery and capture. She, for example chose to start her run on Saturday nights since ‘wanted’ notices would not appear in newspapers till the following Mondays. She reportedly “drugged babies and young children” to stop them crying and attracting attention. And she carried a gun not only for her own protection but also to dissuade anyone from having cold feet and wanting to turn back, thus putting the whole operation at risk of discovery. Reportedly, her words to him/her were “You’ll be free or die”. Ultimately, she conducted more than 70 slaves on 13 consecutive ‘journeys’ enabling her to later boast that, for the best part of a decade, she had been a “conductor of the Underground Railroad” and that she “never ran [her] train off the track and… never lost a passenger”.

The Civil War began in 1861 and ended in 1965. In between Harriet made use of her knowledge of the land and of other strategic matters to become a prized informer for the abolitionist side. She also helped slaves trapped on the wrong side of the line to escape to the other. Sadly, her valuable work was not formally acknowledged till three decades later when the government agreed to compensate her efforts. She passed away in 1913.

In passing, in 2016 the American Treasury decided to print Tubman’ image on a new $20 note. But the Trump administration decided to postpone the project for a decade or so.

ISABELLA

Isabella ‘the Catholic’, of Castille (1451- 1504), was the ruling queen of Spain in partnership with her husband Ferdinand of Aragon (1452-1516). She is remembered for founding modern Spain, for which she defeated the Arab/ Muslim realm in Granada, for encouraging the establishment of the ‘Inquisition’ a system of religious courts which purpose was to ferret out, and mete severe punishment to those whose Catholicism was in doubt. And for sponsoring the journeys of Christopher Columbus that eventually led to the discovery of the Americas.

She was the offspring of John II, king of Castile whom she replaced on the throne in in 1474. She married Ferdinand the king of Aragon in 1469. Their union was that of ‘the Catholic Sovereigns” (Los Reyos Catolicos). She was a very fervent and pious Catholic. Simultaneously, she had a striking demeanour with her “blue eyes, her fair or chestnut hair, and her jewels and magnificent dresses”, in the words of Britannica.

Isabella’s overwhelming intention and aim was to achieve a wholly Catholic Spanish kingdom free of Moorish (Islamic) influence within it. In consequence she took an active part in the defeat of Granada and in the remorseless imposition of that Christian faith.

Granada fell in 1492. Isabella closely followed the battles from a camp near where the action was. More, she is credited with devising better ways of supplying her soldiers and of organizing a field hospital to care for the wounded. Reportedly, the defeated were promised freedom of worship in the new Spain. But, in due course she reneged on that undertaking.

In the end, Muslims were given the choice of either converting or leaving. Some adopted Cotholicism but others left for North Africa. Similarly, Jews ‘the executioners of Christ’ were given the same choice. Many who did not want to change their faith emigrated to Istanbul the capital of the Ottoman empire. But, more often than not, the conversions of members in both communities were shallow and not genuine, thus suspicious to the Spanish authorities.

Enters Isabella’s infamous and notorious Inquisition. It consisted of religious tribunals all over Spain, headed by fanatic clergymen and meant to combat heresy, considered to be on equal footing as treason. Through it passed converted Muslims and Jews suspected of insincerity as well as Christians who had spoken or acted against the established dogma. Those found guilty, had no recourse to reconsideration and were condemned to be burnt at the stake. Worse, the Inquisition became a way of settling accounts between private citizens since it was enough for one to be accused, wrongly, of heresy for his fate to be sealed. And Isabella saw nothing wrong in all this.

On a different level Isabella approved of and sponsored the voyages of Christopher Columbus which led to the discoveries and settlement of the Americas. But unlike her indifference to the fate of the Muslims and Jews in Spain, she felt for the indigenous Indians discovered at the other end of the world. Indeed, according to ‘History Today’ she was amenable “to recognize the rights of the Indians than was Columbus; she ordered some of those he had brought back as slaves to be released”.

Isabella’s testament tells us what she thought during her living and what she hoped would be achieved after her departure. Among others she desired the unification of Spain and Portugal, the conquest of Islamic North Africa and the just and fair treatment of the Indians of the Americas. She also wanted the ‘Inquisition’ to continue its “fight against ‘the depraved heretics”, according to History Today . Yet, curiously, she “ feared the vengeance of the Devil for….Muslims, Jews, heretics… to whom she had given no quarter all her life.

MATA HARI

According to Biography.com Mata Hari (1876-1917), early in her life “decided that sexuality was her ticket in life”. She is remembered for her notorious life as a dancer, courtesan-(mistress of men in high places)- and finally as a suspected spy; an occupation she paid for with her life.

She was born Margaretha Geertruida Zelle to a well-to-do Dutch family. Her father’s business failed and he and her mother divorced when she was in her teens. After her mother’s death in 1891 she went to live with relatives. At age 18 she practically proposed herself in marriage to an officer of the Dutch colonial army twenty-one years her senior. According to Biography.com, Margaretha “sent a striking photo of herself, raven-haired and olive-skinned, to entice him”. They were married in 1895, and two years later accompanied him to his posting in Indonesia-(then a colony of Holland)- They lived there till 1902. In the meantime, she gave birth to a son and a daughter. The former died in mysterious circumstances. Yet theirs was an unhappy union and upon return home they took separate ways, eventually divorcing in 1906. Her ex-husband kept their daughter.

Thus, at 30 years of age, she found herself on the streets of Paris. At the suggestion of one of her lovers she took up dancing as a profession. With rudimentary knowledge of the South Asian version of it, from her stay there, she renamed herself Mata Hari-(‘eye of the day’ in Indonesian)- and hit the fleshpots of Paris and, subsequently those of other European capitals. Described by Britannica as “[t]all, extremely attractive…..and willing to appear virtually nude in public, Mata Hari was an instant success”. No wonder, then, that her suggestive, striptease-like pseudo-Hindu dancing brought her many admirers from the upper echelons of European societies. They included French and German senior army officers at a time of rising tensions and antagonism between their respective nations, culminating in the horrendous Great War od 1914-1918-(pitting France, Britain and Russia against Germany and Austria).

Still, by 1916, with a physique not quite what it used to be, and in competition with younger performers, forty-year old Mata Hari’s luster began to fade. She was no longer the number one attraction of European nightlife. More. She had fallen in love and married a Russian officer, almost 20 years her junior. He was injured and incapacitated at the front. Thus, as a result of her fading stardom and the need to care for her husband, she found herself in financial difficulties. Hence, when the French military proposed she uses her intensive amorous connections with senior German officers to milk them of information useful to the French war effort, she readily accepted.

That was a very dangerous game she was letting herself play. It soon backfired. The French suspected that she was, instead, passing information to the Germans which caused the death of nearly 50,000 combatants; a claim that was never substantiated. No matter, they arrested her early in 1917, threw her “in a rat-infested cell” in Paris, tried her, found her guilty and had her shot by a firing squad on 15 October 1917. She was 41 years old.

Doubt exists till present that Mata Hari deserved that dreadful fate. Indeed, documents released in Paris in 2017 suggest that she may have been a scapegoat to justify French reversals in the face of German attacks in the war at the time.

MOTHER TERESA

Mother Teresa (1910-1997) also known, as ‘Angel of Mercy’ is remembered for her endeavours, through her Catholic institution: the ‘Missionaries of Charity’ in favour of the poor, sick and dying. In recognition of her tireless, lifelong benevolent work of love she has received numerous accolades among them the Nobel Prize for Peace in 1979. Much more notable was her canonization, posthumously of course, as ‘Saint Teresa of Calcutta’ by Pope Francis in 2016. Yet, despite all this, there were those who, as we shall see, criticized her practices and questioned her sincerity.

She was born as Agnes Gonxha Bojaxhiu in Macedonia then part of the Ottoman Empire. As a teenager she decided to became a nun and specifically to serve in India, having read of the indigence of many of its people. With this in mind, she joined ‘Loreto’ the Catholic order of nuns in Ireland. From there, as sister Teresa, she was, in due time, sent to the order’s convent in Calcutta (today’s Kolkata), India in 1928. She never saw her Macedonian family again.

For 17 years she taught in the convent’s school. Some years later, in 1937, having taken her final vows, she became Mother Teresa. She was 27. Still, all the while, she was keenly observing the desperate conditions of the millions in the slums of Calcutta and the unfairness of the Indian caste system(). More. She witnessed the ravages of the great Bengal famine of 1943 and the communal massacres occasioned by the partition, in 1946-1947, of the subcontinent into the two states of India and Pakistan.

In 1946, Teresa experienced an impulse to be more active in her charitable work for the needy. She described it as a ‘call within a call’ -(presumably the first call was that directed her towards nunnery)- She acted on it. But it took Teresa two years to persuade her superiors in the order to let her live and work outside the convent. They relented. In 1948, at the age of 38, she moved into the slums of Calcutta. Others joined her and soon donations began to arrive enabling her, in time, to rent humble locales where she could teach. Out of respect for her new social environment, she sought Indian citizenship and chose the don the sari.

Still, that was not enough for her. She petitioned the Vatican for authorization to start a new religious order, dedicated, in her words, for the care of “the hungry, the naked, the homeless, the crippled, the blind, the lepers, all those people who feel unwanted, unloved, uncared for throughout society, people that have become a burden to the society and are shunned by everyone”. The Holy See granted her wish. The order of the ‘Missionaries of Charity’ took form in 1950.

In the ensuing years and in line with her declared aims, Tereasa established hospices and homes for the sick, including AIDS victims. Those terminally ill were given a place to die in dignity and when the time came were given the rites appropriate to their faiths, according to her sources. Further, the first orphanage was opened in 1955. There, parentless children would be cared for and given out for adoption when possible. If not, they would be educated and otherwise prepared to face the world when old enough.

She did more. Within the slums of Calcutta and in the rest of India dwelt lepers, shunned and ostracized by their communities. They were the victims of leprosy an ugly debilitating disease which leads to repelling disfigurement. Yet Teresa embraced them, first by opening facilities offering medical treatment and later, in 1960, she had established colonies in which lepers would live and work in dignity. At the same time, she endeavoured to enlighten the healthy at large about the malady in order to lessen the stigma towards it.

Starting humbly enough in Calcutta in the early 1950’s, Teresa’s organization progressively spread. By the time she died, in 1997, the ‘Missionaries for Charity’ had a presence in 100 locations around the world, served by some 4,000 dedicated nuns. According to New World Encyclopedia they were available for help to “refugees, the blind, disabled, aged, alcoholics, the poor, homeless, victims of floods, epidemics and famine…”.

And yet, there were those who cast doubts on her activities and her motives. There were reports of medical practices lacking professionalism such as the repeated use of the needles even when blunted from such practice. There were also accusations of christening those terminally ill -(in India they were mostly Hindu and Muslim). In support of this, critics refer to a statement in 1992 by Teresa herself, according to which, the dying were given the option of “a blessing [meaning baptism] by which your sins will be forgiven and you receive God?”.

As for British-America author and renown atheist Christopher Hitchens (1949-2011), Teresa was “less interested in helping the poor than in using [their]… [w]retchedness….to fuel the expansion of her fundamentalist Roman Catholic beliefs.” He also condemned her friendly relations with the likes of the tyrant Jean-Claude Duvalier of Haiti. Further, professional publications, too, have questioned the not so transparent ways she handled the “enormous sums of money she received”

Still, the foregoing does not seem to have slowed to process of canonization which started with her death. Indeed, in 2015 current Pope Francis said of Teresa that throughout her life she “was a generous dispenser of divine mercy, making herself available for everyone ……She bowed down before those who were spent, left to die on the side of the road….She made her voice heard before the powers of this world, so that they might recognize their guilt for the crime of poverty they created.”

THEODORA

Theodora (497-548), the wife of Byzantine Emperor, Justinian I (482-565) is remembered for having risen from a most disreputable and humble origin to become, in the words of Britannica, “probably the most powerful woman in Byzantine history”.

About her early life much of what is known comes from the writings of court historian Procopius. From him we learn that Theodora was the daughter of a bear trainer in the Hippodrome of Constantinople-(the only place where citizens could assemble for entertainment). Encouraged by her mother she began her life as a prostitute of such depravity and promiscuity that “[no] role was too scandalous for her to accept without a blush”. And more. “She would go to dinner parties and take on all the guests”. While at it, she bore a son.

In her favour, however, were her beauty and intelligence. So much so, that when she met the future emperor, a devout Christian and 15 years her senior, he fell in love with her. She became his paramour. But, given her less than honourable background, regulations had to be passed to enable their legal union. Justinian did the necessary in this regard and married Theodora in 525. When he mounted the throne in 527, he made her his ‘augusta’-(Latin for majestic, venerable etc.). In the meantime, Theodora, not surprisingly, forsook her earlier mores and became a very pious Christian even more so than her husband.

As queen, she was the emperor’s “most trusted adviser”. Among others, Theodora controlled the agenda of Justinian approving whom he met and otherwise, even interfering in the matrimonial matters of imperial courtiers.

And she was very protective of her new role and position and would not tolerate any opposition or threat to her status. She would react to any suspicion of animosity or unfriendliness with ruthlessness and cruelty According to Procopius, she “inspired such fear, since not a word could be spoken against her without her hearing of it”. And “[w]hen…. enraged, no church offered sanctuary, no law gave protection, no intercession of the people brought mercy to her victim; nor could anything else in the world stop her”. Her enemies and rivals would be killed, tortured and imprisoned. Her own son, from her scandalous earlier life, was jailed to protect her from his careless gossiping.

When riots erupted against the emperor in 532, they were of such violence as to make Justinian want to flee Constantinople. She emboldened and stiffened him, made him stay, bribed, plotted and connived to defeat the rebels. Which she succeeded in doing at the cost, reportedly, of 30,000 lives lost.

She died allegedly of cancer, leaving behind an old disconsolate Justinian who survived her by 17 years.

Let me close by clarifying that afore-quoted Procopius may not have liked the imperial couple much. Nevertheless, even if his revelations are taken with a pinch of salt, Theodora seems to have led a pretty debauched early life and a tempestuous imperial one.

UMM KULTHUM

Variously known as ‘Kawkab al Sharq’-(Star of the East)- and as ‘Egypt Fourth Pyramid’, Umm Kulthum (1904-1975), is remembered, because, for the best part of half a century her voice and lyrics “mesmerized Arab audiences from the Persian Gulf to Morocco” in the words of Britannica. Indeed, during her regular monthly recitals, all shops shuttered and all streets emptied from Morocco to Iraq as people sat by their radio sets spellbound by her performances. In short, she was and remains the most renown songstress of the Arab world.

Umm Kulthum was born in one of the villages in the Nile Delta region in northern Egypt. Her father was the ‘muezzin’ of the village mosque who supplemented his income by singing religious songs on special occasions. From a young age, Umm Kulthum showed vocal aptitudes, such that her father made her accompany him for his special events. But he dressed her in boys clothes to circumvent the taboos, then prevalent in rural Egypt, against female voices. By her teens she had become a performer in demand in her corner of the country.

By the mid 1920’s she, and her family had moved to the great city of Cairo. Still, embarrassed by her rural appearance and manner and disdained by the upper classes of society, she began to take music lessons and imitate the well to do ladies. Within a short time, she succeeded in promoting herself as the premier, and best paid, vocalist in the salons of wealthy Egyptians and in the entertainment venues of the capital. Ultimately her repertoire consisted of some 300 songs including religious and patriotic ones.

In 1937, Umm Kulthum initiated her famous recitals held regularly the first Thursday of every month in Cairo and, in due course, broadcast live to every corner of the Arab world. By then the lyrics and music of her songs were written and composed by the best Egyptian poets and musicians of the day. Even so, however, it was her rendition that made all the difference. According to Britannica: “Her strong and nuanced voice and her ability to fashion multiple iterations of single lines of text drew audiences into the emotion and meaning of the poetic lyrics and extended for hours what often had been written as relatively short compositions”. Indeed, a recital of hers could last for more than four hours. Its duration depended on the number of encores demanded by the audience. In the words of an article in the Guardian Umm Kulthum’s aim “..was to induce in her listeners ‘tarab’, a state of rapturous enchantment, where time and self dissolve in the music”.

‘Kawkab al Sharq’ sang only once outside her mother country. That took place in 1967 when she was 63. The venue was the ‘Olympia’ in Paris. For her performance she was paid four time as much as the famous opera singer Maria Callas who had appeared at the same theater a few years earlier. Incidentally, the latter, at one time, had referred to the Egyptian star as “the incomparable voice”.

Not only Callas but other renown western vocalists have acknowledged her. Among them Bob Dylan, Shakira, Beyoncé and others. As affirmed by the Guardian the West had not brought forth any “artist as respected and beloved as [Umm Kulthum] is in the Arab world”.

Societally, ever since her father dressed her as a boy, in her childhood, Umm Kulthum has transcended the gender norms-(acceptable and not acceptable behaviourial standards of male and female members of a given society at a given time)- Biographer Virginia Danielson (D.O.B 1949) marvels at the exceptionalism of the phenomenon that is Umm Kulthum. Even her rumoured lesbianism did not raise eyebrows in the strict Muslim Egyptian society of her day. That is because, according to the renown Palestinian scholar Edward Said (1935-2003) “the sheer force of her performances…overrode such rumours”. According to the Guardian article, Umm Kulthum married twice. The first did not endure more than a few days. She entered into the second at the age of 50. Her partner was her junior and already a father by a previous union.

She died in 1975. Her funeral was attended and escorted by an estimated 4,000,000 people, larger than those present at that of Gamal Abdel Nasser 4 years earlier, that most revered of Arab leaders.

ZHAO WU

Zhao Wu (625-705) is remembered for cleverly manoeuvring, from a role of an imperial concubine, to become the only woman to rule the Chinese Empire. She did it with ruthlessness and cruelty. In the words of historian Montefiore “Wu was both a depraved and intelligent puppeteer”.

She began life as a good-looking concubine of the emperor of China in 638 at age 13. Following his death in 649, she became the favourite mistress of his successor, Gaozong. She bore him four sons and a daughter. Upon the premature death of the latter, she contrived to persuade him, with no evidence, that the infant’s death was arranged by his wedded wife and empress. So convinced was he that he banished her.

Emperor Gaozong’s ill health enabled Wu to take charge; ridding herself of whoever she suspected of enmity, antagonism etc. toward her. She began a reign of terror. Her unfortunate victims were variously imprisoned, poisoned, butchered etc. Clearly, she did not grant anyone the benefit of the doubt or a second chance. She did not even spare close members of her own and of the sick emperor’s family.

As the emperor’s demise drew near, Wu got busy. The contender to the throne, favoured by him was “placed under house arrest and starved to death”. When Gaozong, finally, passed away in 684, Wu arranged for the throne to pass to her son Zhongzong . Still, as the latter’s wife looked like wanting to play Wu’s role, she had him dethroned and exiled, barely a month after assuming his emperorship. She replaced him with her other son Ruizong. Even so, he was nothing more than a puppet in her hands. She was the one in charge, controlling who he met and ruthlessly purging all she did not feel comfortable with.

Eventually in 690, at the age of 65, she contrived to have a petition signed requesting her to take the throne herself. She acquiesced, demoting her son/ emperor to the rank of crown prince. She ruled for a further fifteen years by means of the same pitiless and cruel methods she had followed all her life. She died peacefully in her bed in 705, unlike many of her victims. She had attained the the good old age of 80.

Let me conclude with this rageful wish of one who suffered at Wu’s hands. He hoped to be “reincarnated as a cat and she [Wu]…reincarnated as a mouse, so that I can, for ever and ever, grab her throat”.

Wise Men Scientists and Artists

WISE MEN, SCIENTISTS AND ARTISTS OF PRE-MODERN TIMES

The Author OCTOBER, 2022

REFERENCES

THE EARLY ONES.

The Buddha. -The Author. Religions of Asia. -Simon Sebag Montefiore. Titans of History.

Confucius. -The Author. Religions of Asia. -Simon Sebag Montefiore. Titans of History.

Socrates. -Encyclopedia Britannica. Socrates summary. -History. Socrates. -The Author. Quest for Knowledge. -Wikipedia. Socrates.

Archimedes. -BBC. Archimedes. -Encyclopedia Britannica. Archimedes, Greek mathematician. -LiveScience. Eureka! The Archimedes Principle. -ResearchGate. Archimedes in the 21st Century.

-ThoughtCo. What Did Archimedes Invent?

-World History Encyclopedia. Archimedes.

ISLAMIC GOLDEN AGE.

-Khan Academy. The golden age of Islam -The Author. Quest for Knowledge. -Wikipedia. Islamic Golden Age

Al-Khwarizmi. -Encyclopedia Britannica. Al-Khwārizmī, Muslim mathematician

-NewScientist. Muhammad ibn Musa al-Khwarizmi.

Al-Razi. -Encyclopedia Britannica. Al-Rāzī, Persian physician. -The Author. Humours and the Yin and the Yang. -National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI). Abu Bakr etc. -Wikipedia. Abu Bakr al-Razi.

Ibn-Sina. -Encyclopedia Britannica. Avicenna, Persian philosopher and scientist. -The Author. Humours and the Yin and the Yang. -National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI). Ibn Sina etc. Ibn-Rushd. -Encyclopedia Britannica. Averroës, Muslim philosopher. -Wikipedia. Averroes.

EUROPEAN RENAISSANCE -Encyclopedia Britannica. Black Death, pandemic, medieval Europe. -Encyclopedia Britannica. Indulgence, Roman Catholicism. -Encyclopedia Britannica. Renaissance, European history. -German Museum of Books and Writing (DNB). Letters of Indulgence. -GK Scientist. Causes for the Rise of Renaissance. -LiveScience. The Renaissance: The 'Rebirth' of science & culture. -The Author. From Egalitarianism to Kleptocracy. -The Author. Humours and the Yin and the Yang. -The Author. Agony and Torment. -ThoughtCo. Key Dates in Renaissance Philosophy, Politics etc. -Wikipedia. Indulgence Martin Luther -Encyclopedia Britannica. Martin Luther, German religious leader.

Galileo. -Simon Sebag Montefiore. Titans of History.

INTRODUCTION

This write-up is about ten men who made an enduring mark on world history, in diverse fields of endeavour. They include two prominent Asians, two famous Greeks, four luminaries from the heydays of Islamic culture and two celebrated Europeans. They appear in the text which follows under the headings of ‘The Early Ones’, ‘Islamic Golden Age’ and ‘Renaissance Europe’.

There are, obviously, many more personalities who deserve to be acknowledged here. Still, my selection was dictated by the relevance and easy explicability of their accomplishments and space limitations.

Among those missed out are, chronologically, Plato (428-348), Aristotle (384-322 BCE), Al-Ghazali ( 1058-1111 CE), Ibn-Khaldun  (1332 -1406), Leonardo Da Vinci (1452-1519) -(whose famous Mona Lisa painting illustrates the opening page on this work)-,Nicolaus Copernicus (1473- 1543) and Johannes Kepler (1571-1630) . They constitute a minority of dozens of others.

A note finally. The quotes in “italics” in the text which follows are all taken from the sources listed under ‘References’ hereinbefore unless stated otherwise.

THE EARLY ONES

I mean those who thrived in pre-Common Era civilizations notably in Asia and ancient Greece. Of the four personalities I deal with below, the first sought to understand the meaning of life in order to ease its burdens on his contemporaries and on generations to come. The second taught how to put order and introduce humanity in the chaotic society of his days. The third is considered the father of modern philosophy. As to the fourth he is one of the great mathematicians and inventors of Antiquity.

Siddhartha Gautama lived during the 6th or 5th century BCE. He was a sensitive and compassionate man who endured nearly a lifetime of hardships and privations in pursuit of ‘nirvana’ explained as “…a state of profound spiritual joy, without negative emotions and fears…”. Eventually, he believed he had attained it through enlightenment. Thenceforth, his teachings became known as Buddhism, “as much a code of ethics as a religion”. Today with more than 500,000,000 adherents it is the creed of nearly 7% of world population.

He was born in today’s Nepal. According to Buddhists, he was the son of royalty who, until the age of 29, lived a sheltered and pampered life in his father’s palace. He married at the age of 16 and fathered a child.

The first time he ventured outside the palace, the young prince came face to face with life’s harsh realities. Consecutively, he encountered a sick man lying in the street, then an old one walking bent over with the help of sticks. Finally, he met a funerary procession followed by the weeping wife and children of the deceased. From these instances “…he learned that sickness, age, and death were the inevitable fate of human beings - a fate no-one could avoid”.

But Siddhartha had a fourth encounter. This time with a man in tatters begging for food in the marketplace. Yet, he was smiling and evidently happy with his lot. Clearly, to the young royal, that apparent contentment resulted from the man’s choice to forsake all worldly attachments and instead, lead an austere existence.

Greatly disturbed by all these encounters, Gautama took it upon himself to search for the truth and meaning of the human condition. Accordingly, he left home and family to begin his quest for learning and understanding. This episode is known as the ‘Great Renunciation’.

For six years he wandered and meditated. First, he sought the advice of wise men, then moved on and spent time with ascetic monks heeding their counsel of severe austerity and privations. All to no avail: he still could not attain the blissful state he was after-(nirvana)- despite the physical hardships that nearly killed him.

So he went off on his own and sat beneath a Bodhi -(relating to figs)- tree meditating and vowing not to budge until he achieved enlightenment. This he did on the seventh day. He had reached such an exalted state in which “ignorance was destroyed, knowledge had arisen; darkness was destroyed, lightness had arisen”. At this stage he became the Buddha or the ‘Enlightened One’. The Bodhi tree under which he meditated is known to Buddhists as the ‘Tree of Awakening’.

He came out of this experience with the ‘Noble Truths’ of the human condition. The first concerns the inescapable unpleasantnesses beginning at one’s birth and continuing with sickness, aging and dying. The second relates to man-made suffering as a consequence of greed, ignorance, delusions, hatreds, destructive urges, as well as from unfulfilled desires which even if they are, are of a transient nature leaving a crave for more.

A third ‘Noble Truth’ offers a path to ‘nirvana’ by leading a virtuous life spent with the: “right belief, right resolve, right speech, right behaviour, right occupation, right effort, right contemplation, right concentration”, as explained by Richard Holloway, former bishop of Edinburgh, Scotland.

But the Buddha was a pragmatic man. He advocated a ‘Middle Way’ leaving the degree of virtuousness in one’s life to the individual. “Undogmatic to the end, the Buddha held that his teachings should be treated as a set of rational principles that each person should apply for themselves”. The most exemplary version of Buddhist life is that epitomized by Tibetan monks.

‘Master Philosopher’, Confucius (551-479 BCE), was a Chinese reformer whose influence endures in China and in many parts of South East Asia. He was a perspicacious and compassionate person who witnessed the wrongs, injustices and chaos of the socio-political scene in the autonomous Chinese states of his time-(before their merging into a large Chinese Empire in the 200’s BCE)-. All this made Confucius take it upon himself to attempt the remedial of the ills plaguing socio-political China.

He was born as Kong Qiu in an aristocracy family down on its luck. Yet, his parents were able to pay for his private tuition -(the only available formal education then)-. By his teens Confucius had successfully completed the required “…six disciplines of calligraphy, arithmetic, archery, charioteering, ritual and music”. But the youngster was a curious and inquisitive pupil. He supplemented his knowledge of the six disciplines with reading history and poetry.

He was one of the earliest to give meaning to the ‘Golden Rule’ or ‘Ren’. As explained by Confucius himself, ‘Ren’ means that any human “…wishing to be established himself, seeks also to establish others; wishing to be enlarged himself, he seeks also to enlarge others”. In other words, ‘Ren’ boils down to treating/doing to others as you would like them to treat/ do to you-(and, of course, its converse, of not doing to others what you would not like done to you)-.When it comes to settling disputes which inevitably arise between members of a society, Confucius preaches courtesy, patience and putting oneself in the shoes of the other. Key to ‘Ren’ is compassion; without it, social cohesion falls apart.

It all begins with family solidarity which to Confucius is sacrosanct. From the day one is born he/she belongs to a grouping from which one expects rearing and towards which he/she has obligations to further its interests even at the cost of scarifying one’s own wishes and needs. Accordingly, Confucius preached obedience, love, respect and care by junior to senior members. Ancestors are revered and a death in the family is the occasion of great sadness and long periods of mourning.

To kings, he preached the values of justice and enlightened governance. They should be exemplary in conduct so as to be looked upon as

role models. Crucially, they must be perceived by their subjects as caring, ethical and fair. A ruler’s first duty is to care for the welfare, wellbeing and protection of his subjects, ahead of his own interests. From them, in return, he could expect respect and obedience and their willingness to fight and die under his banner.

As regards the upper classes of society, Confucius could not accept the prevailing wisdom of his times that those born to nobility were morally superior to others. He proclaimed, to the contrary, that all humans are born equal and that only upbringing and character decided one’s place in, and usefulness to, his society.

The culmination of all foregoing was the emphasis placed by Confucius on the importance of appointing moral and educated government officials to represent the ruler in serving the people; subject, beforehand, to successfully passing civil service examinations. Anyone, no matter his social position, should be entitled to take the tests. In other words, the civil service should not continue to be the de facto right of the sons of aristocrats, devoid of education and right temperament. Clearly, he was proclaiming the principle of meritocracy in the service of the people.

Following Confucius demise in 479 BCE, his contemporary disciples and those who came after them assembled the Master’s thoughts in what is known as the ‘Analects’, the sacred scripture of Confucianism. It teaches how to lead a virtuous, ethical life.

By 100 BCE, imperial China adopted Confucianism as state credo. Thousands of educational institutions were opened throughout the empire with the Analects as their curriculum. State supervised examinations were set up for the selection of civil servants from all classes of society. Ordinary Chinese families worked hard to make their sons eligible since the position brought with it prestige, recognition and a good income. With the advent of the ‘People’s Republic of China’ with Communism as its doctrine Confucianism, considered a rival, was discouraged.

This, notwithstanding, Confucian way of life remain very much alive in the homes of China’s multitudes. More, in the whole of East Asia those of other cultural affiliations “seldom…cease to be Confucian” in spirit.

I want to close with a remarkable statement by Voltaire (1694-1778), one of the great luminaries of the era of ‘Enlightenment’ of 18th century Europe: “Confucius has no interest in falsehood; he did not pretend to be prophet; he claimed no inspiration; he taught no new religion; he used no delusions; flattered not the emperor under whom he lived”.

Socrates (470-399 BCE) was the first of the philosophical triad of ancient Greece. Besides him, there was his student Plato (428-348 BCE), in turn, followed by his disciple Aristotle (384-322 BCE). The thoughts of all three left their marks on Islamic and Western thinkers in later periods.

He was born, lived and died in the democratically governed city-state of Athens. ‘Demokratia’ was interrupted from 404 to 403 BCE, by the rule of the ‘Thirty Tyrants’ in the aftermath of a long war with Sparta, the other famous Greek city-state.

His father was a mason, his mother a midwife; both respectable pursuits in the Athens of those days. His family was affluent enough to pay for their son’s private tuition in the academic disciplines of the day. In due time, having inherited part of his father’s property he was able to lead a life free of financial worries. Even so, his was a frugal, austere existence with no interest in material comforts.

Socrates had a large following among those, like young Plato who recognized “his integrity, his self-mastery, his profound philosophical insight, and his great argumentative skill….”. Reportedly, too, he was physically attracted to young men, as was customarily between older and younger males in the Athens of those days. But unlike many of his contemporaries, he was not intimate with them. Instead, as explained by Plato, “he was more interested in educating their souls”.

Yet, according to two sources, Socrates was ugly, with “a flat turned-up nose, bulging eyes and a large belly”. Worse, he was indifferent to his appearance, attire and personal hygiene. He “…bathed rarely…” walked the streets long haired, barefoot and in the same garment day after day. All in an Athens’ “…society with incredibly refined standards of beauty”. In my opinion, this description of the philosopher is exaggerated. Otherwise, it would have, one way or another, affected his reputation and standing among his adherents.

Socrates did not leave anything in writing. What is known about his thoughts and beliefs came to us from the recordings of his students the like of Plato and others. From them we have it that the great thinker used what is known as the ‘Socratic method’ to engage others in conversations and debates in search of the truth. He felt it was his “religious duty” to educate his fellow citizens, in particular the younger ones, on the realities of life.

Typically, Socrates would organize a public debate on a topic held as an established wisdom and truth by Athenians. On the opposite side would be an ‘authority’ on the subject matter. As the debate progressed and arguments and counterarguments followed one another, it became evident that the so-called expert had gaps in his reasoning and knowledge. So much so that by inference the morals and values held dear by Athenian society were groundless, leading Socrates to conclude “human wisdom begins with the recognition of one’s own ignorance”.

Another of Socrates’s convictions concerned virtue and ethics. He maintained, for example, that people knowingly behaved unethically when they perceived the gains from such actions to outweigh the benefits of being virtuous. Accordingly, the message to his students was that “the development of personal ethics is a matter of…correcting the distortions that skew one’s analyses of benefit and cost”. And from the same perspective Socrates affirmed that “a good person can never be harmed, because whatever misfortune he may suffer, his virtue will remain intact”.

On the matter of religious beliefs, Socrates’s views, which influenced debates on the subject in future centuries, collided at the time with the daily habits and customs of Athenian citizens.

Notwithstanding his popularity with his disciples and followers, Socrates was disliked by the general public of the city-state and by their governing classes. Unsurprisingly they resented his constant reminding of the baselessness of their beliefs, of their ignorance and hypocrisy. Neither did they appreciate his criticism of Athens’ democracy. And last but not least, he was accused of friendly relations with some of the ‘Thirty Tyrants’ met hereinbefore.

Eager to get rid of him, those in power charged Socrates with corruption of youth, and disrespect of the established Athenian gods. He was sentenced to die by poisoning. Although some offered him the option of escape, he refused. And so, on the appointed day and time, surrounded by friends and disciples he took the cup of hemlock-(herbal poison)- from his executioner, drank it and as reported by Plato, “appeared both happy in manner and words as he died nobly and without fear”.

I doubt if anyone reading this has not come across the number π-(pi)- sometime in her/his life. Similarly, I do not think that many are not familiar with ‘Archimedes Principle’. Both are the brainchildren of the great Greek mathematician and physicist Archimedes (287-212 BCE). But perhaps, only a few realize that Archimedes was also a prolific inventor.

Two thousand two hundred years on this polymath, is still relevant in these days of advanced technology. This was, at least, the opinion of the scientists, mathematicians and engineers assembled at the 2013 international conference titled ‘Archimedes in the 21st Century’. Their conclusion was that “Archimedes planted the seeds for a myriad of seminal [ containing seeds of later] ideas that would grow over the ages”.

Archimedes originated and lived most of his life in the Greek city-state of Syracuse, Sicily. He died there, too, at the hand of a soldier from the invading army of Rome. In between, he studied in Alexandria, the great enter of learning established by Alexander the Great.

Let us begin with Archimedes the mathematician. He is the one who established the importance of π-(pi) in determining the perimeter and surface of a circle of radius ‘r’: (2πr and πr2 ). Similarly for the surface area and volume of a sphere of radius ‘r’: (4πr2 and 4/3πr3) respectively.

As for the world of physics, it owes to Archimedes his eponymous principle without which neither ships nor submarines could have been designed. Why is this so? In a nutshell, because the polymath-(one who is knowledgeable in several disciplines)-ascertained that the upward force exerted by the water to keep a ship afloat-(clearly equal to the latter’s weight)-, is the same as that of the weight of water displaced by the immersed portion of the hull. This, of course, is also true of a submerged submarine with the obvious difference that the volume and weight of water it displaces are exactly equal to its own. What is true of submersibles is also valid for lighter-than-air balloons, except that in this case the medium displaced is air rather than water.

Archimedes Principle also enables the determination of the volumes of ‘awkwardly’ shaped objects which cannot be mathematically calculated. Finally, it “is also used in a large variety of scientific research subjects including medical, engineering, entomology-(the study of insects)-engineering, and geology”.

Archimedes is, also, credited with several inventions. Among them the screw pump (image) for raising water from a river to ground level in order to irrigate fields and other likewise instances. Versions of it are still in use today.

Another invention of his, is the lever and pulley for lifting heavy loads. In this context he is reported to have remarked "Give me a place to stand on and I will move the Earth" (image).

Along with these he is, reputed to have held up the Romans, for two years from taking Syracuse with his various war machines consisting of catapults and claws to incapacitate attacking ships.

ISLAMIC GOLDEN AGE

What is historically known as the ‘Golden Age’ of Islamic scholarship began in earnest under the reigns of the Abbasid caliph Haroun Al- Rashid (ruled:786-809 CE) and his son and successor Al- Ma’mun (ruled:813-833) from their splendid capital on the Tigris: Baghdad.

According to more than one source, this state of affairs is partly due to the Quranic encouragement to Muslims to seek knowledge wherever it is found. Whatever, there is no doubts that the Abbasid caliphs, as well as wealthy members of the community were an enlightened lot. They encouraged and contributed to the translation of, and addition to, works in many disciplines -(with emphasis on medical knowledge)-from Greek, Latin, Persian, Sanskrit and more.

Great institutions of learning were founded, among them ‘Dar al-Hikmah’-(‘House of Wisdom’)- in the 8th century. Baghdad also housed large libraries, bookshops etc. No wonder then, it became the destination of choice of all those seeking knowledge from all corners of the Islamic world.

Sadly, all this ended with the sack of the Abbasid capital by the Mongols in 1285.

Meanwhile , Islamic Iberia-(a domain established by the Umayyad dynasty which ruled from Damascus from 661 to 750)- was “...one of the most advanced civilizations of the period, where much of the learning of the past….was preserved and further developed…[and kept]…in great libraries in the splendid cities of Córdoba, Sevilla (Seville), Granada, and Toledo”. The Islamic realm, there, ended in 1492 with at the hands of Catholic Spain.

Finally, it cannot be denied that all foregoing was helped, indeed made possible, by Islamic acquisition in 793 of paper and paper making knowledge from the Chinese. In turn, a few centuries later it reached Europe from there.

Follow brief descriptions of the achievements of a few of the influential Islamic luminaries.

Muḥammad ibn Mūsā al-Khwārizmī (780-850), mathematician, astronomer and geographer was “one of the most influential thinkers of all time”. As a teacher and head of the ‘Dar al Hikmah’, he undertook the translation of earlier works, in all three disciplines, from foreign sources. Crucially, however, he added his own contributions which became “the keystone for centuries of advances across the world”.

As a mathematician, Al-Khwarizmi, sometime known as ‘the father of algebra’, developed this branch of mathematics. He also worked on algorithms, the basis of modern digital computers().Furthermore, his translation of Hindu texts brought him in contact with the decimal system-(the numerals 1 to 9 and the zero)- He Arabized them. Ultimately, they found their way to Europe where they are known as the ‘Hindu-Arabic’ numerals. In the 12th century, Al-Khwarizmi’s mathematical scholarship found its way westwards through translation into Latin.

During his tenure at ‘Dar al Hikmah’ Al-Khwarizmi did work in the fields of geography and astronomy. As part of his achievements in the former he updated the work of Alexandrian geographer Ptolemy, about six centuries earlier. He established the exact coordinates-(longitudes and latitudes)- of more than 2,000 localities and geographical features in the then known world. He, also helped in the production of a world map and in finding the circumference of Earth. In astronomy, starting from Greek and Hindu sources, he prepared tables to predict the occurrences of eclipses and the positions of the sun, planets etc.

Let us end with this assessment of Al-Khwarizmi as “having done works that would end up shaping the future of the world ….. but through his crafting of algebra, he has essentially influenced every mathematician since”.

One of the early great names in the field of Islamic medicine is that of the Persian Abū Bakr Muhammad Al-Rāzī (854-930). He was born in Ray-(today part of Tehran)- traversed by the ‘Silk Road’ that great east-west network along which moved ideas, and cultures along with goods.

He started practicing medicine there. But as his reputation grew, he was called to the Abbasid capital by the incumbent caliph and appointed head of the main hospital in Baghdad. Al-Razi subsequently returned to Ray to head the local hospital and to teach medicine.

Al-Razi looked upon himself as the Islamic incarnation of the great Greek physician Hippocrates (460-375 BCE). Perhaps he had the latter’s famous oath in mind when he penned “The doctor's aim is to do good, even to our enemies, so much more to our friends, and my profession forbids us to do harm to our kindred, as it is instituted for the benefit and welfare of the human race, and God imposed on physicians the oath not to compose mortiferous remedies”.

He wrote profusely, his work being translated into Latin and other languages of Medieval Europe. One book he penned ‘Kitab Al-Hawi’ was translated in Italy in the 15th century. It consisted of a review of the history of Greek, Roman, Indian and Arabian medicine as well as his own observations and case studies. It firmed up Al-Razi’s reputation as one of the great physicians in history hitherto.

He was the first to recognize the differences between smallpox and measles which he studied and wrote about in a treatise titled ‘Kitab al-Judari wa al-Hasbah’. Although its translated version was known in medieval Europe “…physicians [there] continued to confuse these two illnesses until recently”.

Another was a thesis dealing with the ailments of children for which he is known as the ‘father of pediatrics’. The scope of this works covers a wide variety of problems beginning in infancy. The document “has 24 chapters dealing with various illnesses in newborns, infants and children”.

Al-Razi concerned himself, too, with the study of neurology and matters of the brain and spine. Reportedly, while in charge of the main hospital in Baghdad he set aside a section for the care and treatment of the mentally impaired. There, “patients [were treated] with respect, care, and empathy. [Upon release] each patient was given a sum of money to help with immediate needs”.

This physician of the Abbasid era has also written to advise people on how to self-treat such discomforts as “headache, toothache, earache, colic” etc. when for one reason or another access to medical carers is not possible.

We can go on about the achievements of Al Razi, but will rest our case on the strength of the evaluation that “ [t]he more we learn about his contributions and life dedicated to medicine, the more we value….Islamic….scientific heritage”.

Some half a century after Al-Razi’s departure, another famous Islamic physician manifested himself. He was Abū Alī al-Husayn Ibn- Sīnā (980-1037). To Europeans he was the ‘Prince of Physicians’ with “mind of Goethe and the genius of Leonardo da Vinci”. Ibn-Sina concerned himself , too, with “mathematics, geometry, astronomy, physics, metaphysics” and more.

He was born near Bukhara in today’s Uzbekistan to a local governor. His father noticing his offspring’s precociousness and intellect provided him from early age with quality tuition. At the age of 16, he concentrated on the medical sciences of the day. According to himself, he found studying medicine easier than that of the other sciences and quickly advanced in it . So much so, that “I became an excellent physician and began [at 18 years of age] to treat patients using approved remedies”. Indeed, he soon excelled and became famous wide and far.

Ibn-Sina authored no less than 450 publications covering a variety of topics. Among them is ‘Al-Qānūn fī at-Tibb’-(‘The Canon of Medicine’)-. This “one million word medical encyclopedia” was one of the most influential writing on the subject in history. It was translated more than once and became standard fares in European medical schools from the 12th to the 17th century.

At that time, around the Mediterranean, a theory of disease had prevailed from the days of ancient Egypt, with the Greeks and Romans. Ibn Sina was familiar with it and ‘Al-Qānūn fī at-Tibb’ makes use of it. Incidentally, this theory endured till the 1800’s.

It was called the theory of ‘bodily humours’. According to it, there were four such humours: blood, yellow bile, black bile, and mucus corresponding to the four elements of the universe: fire, air, earth and water. For good health, it was imperative to keep all four in balance; otherwise an excess quantity of one or the other resulted in an abnormality the type and severity of which depended on the problematic humour.

‘Al-Qānūn fī at-Tibb’ consists of five books. Briefly, they cover hygiene, diabetes, tuberculosis, the anatomy and diseases of the eye, neurology, natal problems and care for infants and more. Some practices described include cauterization of wounds-(the application of a hot iron to stem the flow of blood)- to prevent infections. Another is the removal of excess blood or, bloodletting, to rebalance the four humours

In the books, too, are recommendations for the preparation, testing and efficacy of 760 drugs and medicines, issued from a variety of herbs and plants, the like of cannabis, cabbage, cinnamon and garlic with many more in between. Among other precautions, drugs must not “contain anything that would reduce…quality...”. They are to be prescribed in various combinations, as anesthetics and cures in quantities to match the severity of the ailments. Before adoption, however, drugs must undergo “several trials showing the same results...”. Tests to be carried out on “humans, not animals, as it may not work in the same way for both”.

Abū al-Walīd Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad ibn Muḥammad ibn Rushd (1126-1198) was an “influential Islamic religious philosopher who integrated Islamic traditions with ancient Greek thought”. He was born in Córdoba-(Spain) and died in Marrakesh-(Morocco).

Ibn-Rushd absorbed, summarized and commented on the philosophies of ancient Greece. He argued that there were no incompatibilities between Islamic dogma and philosophy. Indeed, he urged its study by Islam’s educated elites. He even went as far as to declare that a religious text or injunction “should be interpreted allegorically [symbolically, not literally].. if it appeared to contradict conclusions reached by reason and philosophy”. All this, unsurprisingly, in the face of strong opposition by Muslim theologians.

The translated work of Ibn Rushd “exerted considerable influence on Jews and Christians in the following centuries”. In the West where he was known as Averroës, his thoughts gave rise to a movement called Averroism. Indeed, his ideas were so potent that his writings were “condemned by the Catholic Church in 1270 and 1277”.

EUROPEAN RENAISSANCE

With the end of the Western Roman Empire a few decades before 500 CE political Europe consisted of feudal polities with a pyramidical social structure defined by obligations and services with kings and nobles at the top and labouring peasants at the bottom.

As Roman Catholicism consolidated, there arose in parts of the Italian peninsula, in 754, the ‘Papal States’ “officially the State of the Church…under the direct sovereign rule of the pope”. But popes and, by extension the Catholic Church, held sway well beyond the geographic limits of the ‘Papal States’. Indeed, they greatly influenced the lives and beliefs right across the continent.

In the rest of the Italian boot, independent city states such as Amalfi, Florence, Genoa, Milan, Pisa, Salerno, Venice and more, began to emerge from around 1000.Their raison d'être was unhindered trading and commercial activities in Italy, Europe and further afield. Unlike the absolute monarchies in the rest of Europe, the Italian city-states were ruled and controlled by well-off entrepreneurs and business people.

Enters the ‘Renaissance’-(French for rebirth)- It is a period in European history spanning roughly 200 years from 1400 to 1600. Its main manifestation was the concept of ‘humanism’ explained as “a philosophy that emphasized the ability for humans to act, rather than simply rely on the will of God”. It resulted, among others, in changes in the understanding and practices of religion and of the sciences. It was marked, too, by new directions in the arts. It first revealed itself in the city-state of Florence. From there it spread to the rest of Italy and then Europe. But what brought it about?

Clearly, the Renaissance did not happen overnight. To the contrary it was long in the making. Let us look, briefly at some of the events and circumstances that gave it impetus.

I begin with the Crusades, the military expeditions initiated by popes between 1095 and 1291. There were eight Crusades altogether aimed at the liberation and control of the Holy Land-(Jerusalem, in particular)-from Muslim dominance. All this aside, in the process, Europeans became acquainted with, and took back home, Islamic scholarship including that of Greek, Persian and Indian origins. Inevitably this contributed to widen the horizons of the educated few in the population.

Next was the advent of the ‘Black Death’-(Bubonic Plague)-pandemic. It raged between 1346 and 1352 leaving in its path a horrendous trail of death. It has been estimated that Europe, in that period, lost a third of its population from all social classes. The pandemic left a depopulated continent short of farm workers-(food producers)-, artisans and others in all walks of life. Reasonably, perhaps, one of its consequences was a reshuffle and reorganization of social order and cultural values. It helped blunt the hold the Church had on people’s minds and lives. Among others it discredited the tenet that sickness is a godly punishment to sinners. The pandemic also contributed to the decline and eventual disappearance of the feudal system.

The fall of Constantinople to the Ottomans in 1453 led to the flight of Byzantine scholars along with valuable Greco Roman documents and manuscripts. Their destination of choice was the Italian independent states.

Likewise, according to historian Susan Abernethy “[c]onflict in Spain between the Moors and Christians [known as ‘Reconquista’, lasting roughly from 1000 to 1500] also caused many academics to escape to other areas, particularly the Italian city-states…”.

In 1450 Johannes Gutenberg invented the printing press. By then, paper had reached Europe from the Islamic world as seen earlier. Their coming together, ushered in a revolution in literacy and learning in Europe. Printing “allowed literacy and the availability of Classical texts to grow explosively”. Still the first printed text was the Bible, enabling people to read and interpret the holy scriptures by and for themselves, without recourse to third-(Church)- parties. And as we shall see later printing enabled mass production of another consequential document: the ‘Letter of Indulgence’.

The horizons of Europeans were further widened by the voyages of discovery in search of new trading opportunities. Vasco da Gama sailed around the Cape of good Hope and reach India in 1497. Christopher Columbus discovered and opened the way to the colonization of the New World in 1492. And Ferdinand Magellan undertook in 1519 a sea voyage around the world.

Spiritual Renaissance: Martin Luther

Must begin with the concept ‘Indulgence’. It was a feature of early European Roman Catholicism, enabling popes and, at times, archbishops “…to reduce the amount of punishment one has to undergo for sins”. No doubt indulgences were meant to ease the feeling of guilt among the faithfuls and to restore hope in salvation and in afterlife in Heaven. Indulgences gained in importance in the 11th century at the time the concept of the ‘purgatory’() became widely accepted.

Still, to apply for and be granted an indulgence a sinner had to perform good deeds such as praying, doing charitable work or even going on pilgrimages. Indeed, popes felt justified enough in granting “full remissions of sins” to any Christian participating in the Crusades and in the ‘Reconquista’.

Each indulgence was the subject of a written note or ‘Letter of Indulgence’. By the mid 1400’s Gutenberg’s invention made possible the mass printing of these documents. Indeed, they became the first pre-printed forms in history. Interestingly, blank spaces were left for names and date to be filled in, by hand, when the indulgence was granted.

As usually happens with matters initiated in good faith and with good intention, the granting of indulgences was, from around the 12th century, exploited and abused. Thenceforth, instead of earning one’s salvation through good deeds, she/he purchased it with money. Worse, in 1476 Pope Sixtus IV decreed that indulgences could be bought on behalf of deceased persons thought to be in the purgatory.

As for the proceeds thus accumulated, they were not always spent benevolently and charitably. For example, Pope Nicholas V (1397-1455) used them to finance his war effort against the Ottomans. Later, popes spent monies thus collected in the construction of St Peter’s Basilica in the Vatican, commenced in 1506. This last instance caused Martin Luther-(hereinafter) to ask: “Why does not the pope, whose wealth today is greater than….build the basilica…with his own money rather than with the money of poor believers?”

Martin Luther (1483-1546) was a German theologian who opposed the excesses and abuse of power of popes and was particularly dead-set-against the granting, let alone selling ‘indulgences’. The outcome of his actions and thoughts gave rise to Protestantism.

He was born in Saxony, Germany. In 1505, at the age of 22 he joined a monastery run by an order of mendicant monks-(who depended for survival on charity). Life there was spartan with no creature comforts, divided between study, work and devotional activities. In 1507, Luther qualified as a priest. Still, he wanted more and continued with his studies till achieving doctoral level in 1512, qualifying him to lecture university students in biblical studies.

Luther’s break with the potent Church was not sudden. He reached his stance after a long and difficult struggle within himself. But at the end, he saw the path he needed to follow. In his own words: “It was as if the very gates of heaven had opened before me”.

But the proverbial straw that figuratively broke Luther’s back was the 1517 declaration of Johann Tetzel a prominent monk, and active seller of indulgences that: “When a penny in the coffer rings/ A soul from Purgatory springs [moves nearer to Heaven]”. In response, he published his 95 theses expounding his views.

In 1518, the Church, not surprisingly, declared that the rebel theologian theses go against established dogma. In fact, much of his writings, were judged to be “heretical, scandalous, offensive to pious ears”.

In consequence, the following two to three years were taken up by debates, hearings and inquisitions, both in Germany and in Rome the seat of Catholicism. At each of these Luther explained his thoughts and tried to convince those present of his position. But to no avail. He was grilled and interrogated by senior officials of the Church, with the sole aim of forcing him to recant. He refused to do so because “his conscience was bound by the Word of God”.

In the end Martin Luther was, in 1521, declared a heretic and excommunicated. Not only were Luther’s opinions at odds with the Church’s pronouncements but, the Church was particularly galled that “a single individual, presumed to challenge 1,500 years of Christian theological consensus”.

Normally, those convicted of heresy would be burned at the stake. But Luther was spared such a fate, no doubt, because of the developing public support for his position. Nevertheless, he was apprehended and held captive for a while. During that time, he started work on the translation of the bible from Latin to German, a monumental undertaking which influenced the evolution of the German language.

Perhaps, in a final defiant act, Luther married in 1525, declaring that the celibacy preached by the Church is “the work of the Devil” while the union between man and woman was “an honourable order of creation”.

Ultimately, the Catholic Church discontinued the sale of Indulgences in 1567 some twenty years following Luther’s death.

Scientific Renaissance: Galileo Galilei

As with spiritual matters, science in pre-Renaissance days was the domain of the Church. In other words, all natural events, particularly in astronomy, were to be taken for granted with no questions asked. So much so that scientists who attempted to understand the physics and mathematics behind observed natural phenomena “found their work was suppressed or they were demonized as charlatans and accused of dabbling in witchcraft, and sometimes being imprisoned”, according to historian Susan Abernethy. The Renaissance changed all this by introducing empiricism-(establishing facts through experiments and observation)- It therefore created a divide between science and religion.

Enters Galileo Galilei (1564-1642), Italian mathematician, physicist and astronomer. Galileo voiced his rationale for the work of the mind-(science)-as opposed to theology as follows: “I do not feel obliged to believe that that same God who has endowed us with senses, reason and intelligence has intended to forgo their use and by some other means to give us knowledge which we can attain by them”. In other words, he believed that the truth about all around us can be attained through experimentation, observation and mathematics.

He studied in and eventually headed the University of Pisa. He built himself telescope to observe and study celestial bodies-(he had beforehand learnt of an instrument invented in the Netherland which could make distant objects appear nearer)-.

He was, thus, able to observe Jupiter and its four moons. Still, crucially, he taught that unlike what the Church instructed, Earth was not at the centre of the Universe, with all heavenly bodies, including the sun revolving around it. Rather, it was the sun that kept all other planets, including our own, and stars under its gravitational control.

This stand displeased the Church. It imposed house arrest upon him and prevented him from communicating his scientific convictions to anyone.

Artistic Renaissance: Michelangelo.

As we have seen, the Renaissance began in Florence one of the Italian city states. There members of the prominent and influential Medici family prided themselves in supporting all forms of artistic creativity. One of their proteges was Michelangelo (1475-1564) “the greatest artist in the world” .

Part XII: Planet in Peril

Ecocide

‘ECOCIDE’

Statues on Easter island

The Author APRIL, 2021

ECOCIDE

REFERENCES

Unlike my earlier narratives, this one is based, solely, on the 2005 book titled ‘Collapse’ by professor of geography and acclaimed author, Jared Diamond (DOB: 1937).This being the case, all quotes in italic letters in the text are from this source unless otherwise indicated .

INTRODUCTION

This is the tale of two societies which, through their actions and practices vis-à-vis the environment on which they depended, brought about their own demise. Hence the title Ecocide meaning environmental suicide.

The first such society, I dwell on, is that of Polynesian Easter Island, located in a remote corner of the Pacific Ocean. In the course of five or six centuries it demolished the sources of its livelihood and survival, so thoroughly, it brought about its self-destruction.

As for the Vikings who settled Greenland they, too, overexploited the vegetal world on which their sustenance depended and, in consequence, literally died out in the span of 450 years. In this instance, however, there were a couple of other contributing factors; they are covered in the text which follows.

There were other societies who suffered the same outcome. For instance, the Maya in Mesoamerica() and the Anasazi of the southwestern USA(), disappeared in their times, essentially, for damaging their respective environment, too. Both, I have already covered in ‘Pre-Columbian Americas’ and ‘Original Owners of North America’, respectively.

Inevitably, in those circumstances, the beginning of the end manifested itself in “food shortages, starvation, wars among too many people fighting for too few resources, and overthrows of governing elites by disillusioned masses.

EASTER ISLAND

Easter is the eastern-most island of the Polynesian group which also includes Hawaii, Tahiti, Fiji, Samoa, Tonga and a few others (see map). From about 1200 BCE, humans started emigrating from the Indonesian shores. They hopped from on island to the next, so as by 1200 CE they had landed on them all as well as in Australia and New Zealand. In short, the “Polynesian expansion was the most dramatic burst of overwater exploration in human [early] history”.

Despite having no compass, written language and more, Polynesians “were masters of navigational arts and of sailing canoe technology”. Contrary to what had been previously assumed, it is now clear that the arrival at each island was diligently prepared.

Easter, itself (image) is a 170 sq.km spec of land 2,000 kms from its nearest Polynesian neighbour and 3,700 kms from Chili in South America. It is the remotest “habitable scrap of land in the world”. Its volcanic nature, strong winds, modest rainfall and scarce fresh water resources make it less than ideal for agriculture and human settling. On the other hand, the same volcanic nature makes it a rich source of stone for sculpting the statues described hereinafter and the tools for the job.

The island was discovered by accident on Easter day 1722, hence its name ,by Dutch explorer Jacob Roggeveen. He was met by islanders, obviously down-on-their-luck in makeshift leaky rafts. The landscape he gazed upon was barren with no tree or bush taller than 3m. But he also marveled at the huge statues around the island (positions marked on the map above), and which have become famous since (see image on title page). Roggeveen could not but wonder how these hapless people could have carved, pushed, shoved and lifted these in the absence of ropes, tools, timber, draft animals, beasts of burden etc. Indeed, their only domestic animals were chicken. Mystery.

The author of the book under References, above, visited the island in 2002. He inspected the quarries at the origin of the statues. He located 397 of them in different stages of completion. They, invariably, represent human torsos with grotesque faces and ears. Mostly, they were 4 to 6 m tall with the largest reaching 21 m from end to end. Their weights were estimated to vary from 10 to a massive 240 tonnes. Along the path from the quarries to the installation sites, he located 97 discarded carvings.

And strewn in the quarries were the tools of trade consisting of “picks, drills and hammers” and adzes (sharp edges for cutting), all made of hard volcanic material, found on the island. The sight gave the impression of a factory in which workers, for some reason, stopped work, tossed their tools around them and walked out never to return.

More crucially, it was clear to him that carving of the statues, transporting and erecting them , would have necessitated a well-fed, active, relatively large and versatile society not only capable to perform the tasks just described but also to grow food, hunt and fish to provide the calories vital for the strenuous muscle power needed.

The first immigrants to Easter was a chief and his extended family, from the neibouring Polynesian island of Mangareva. Sometime, in the course of 900 CE, They came over in one or two large seaworthy canoes reaching their destination in two or three weeks. There may have been a few others joining the first group but thenceforth, Easter islanders existed in complete isolation, with no contact with any outsider. At its peak, the island may have been home to 15,000 people.

As a result of exhaustive examination of the soil, to reveal its vegetational past and from accounts of contemporary islanders, archaeobotanists, have established that, unlike what the Dutch explorer saw, those early Polynesians inhabited a richly forested island with no less than 21 species of trees. Further, painstaking inspecting ‘household’ trash heaps called middens from centuries earlier, revealed that the islanders cultivated taro (image right), sweet potatoes, bananas, sugar canes and yams (image left). Given the strong winds mentioned earlier, the islanders went to great lengths to build walls around the smallest of plots to ensure unhindered growth. In the words of one seasoned archaeologist “I have never been to a Polynesian island where people were so desperate, as they were on Easter, that they piled small stones together in a circle to plant a few lousy small taro and protect them against the wind”. And, as Easter grew demographically the islanders, unwisely in hindsight, gradually cleared forest areas to make room for more and more land to cultivate.

From bones in the middens, ornithologists (bird specialists) and zooarchaeologists have determined that Easter, 1,100 years ago, was home to 6 species of land birds and as many as 25 species of seabirds which nested in the forests, safely away from any predator. Other animal bones discovered were those of porpoises (image) and tuna fish hunted off-shore with canoes and harpoons.

And they identified rat bones. The rodent, not native of the island had, initially, come along uninvited in the boats of the immigrants . Finally, there were the remains of the only domesticated animal: chicken. The islanders took great care of their precious poultry, housing them in elaborate hen houses which, today, rank second to the statues as touristic attractions.

Socio-politically , Easter was divided pie fashion into 11 parts all beginning on the seashore and ending inland. Each slice belonged to a clan, whose people shared the same lineage, and controlled by a chief. He, his entourage and those close to him formed an upper social class. Commoners belonged to a lower one. Evidence of tis hierarchy can be seen from the remains of residences.

The eleven clan chiefs competed, peacefully, with one another in the matter of statue construction and other daily necessities. In reality, they had no choice in the matter given that the best quarries, forests and beaches for launching fishing expeditions, were variously found in the domains of certain clans and not in others. Thus, carvers, woodcutters and fishermen had to cross and work in lands other than their respective clans’.

We now come to those famous statues. They consist of three elements. First are the platforms or ‘ahus’. They are not solid stone slabs but rubble enclosed by 4 walls. They are colossal measuring 4 m in height. The biggest was estimated to weigh in excess of, a mindboggling, 8,000 tonnes The back of each ahu opened on a crematorium in which a great deal of trees from the forest were burnt to send their dead on their way.

Mounted on each ahu are several statues or ‘moais’ representing ancestors (image in title page). Altogether there are 425 of them of sizes and weights already stated hereinabove. Three hundred or so are still proudly standing, the rest toppled and broken up, apparently, willfully so. The third element is the ‘pukao’ or the red cylinder balanced on the head of some moais (image). They are thought to represent feather headgear weighing 11 tonnes each.

Once again, how did a society that had no proper tools, no draft animals and/or beast of burden, or lifting equipment, manage to carve, transport for as many as 14 kms, thence lift and accurately place a moai on its platform and finally the pukao on its head. There are no definitive answers. But from what scholars heard from the few remaining islanders, trials they carried out on the spot,and what they have observed in the quarries, they have concluded that, in addition to the stone tools mentioned the artisans made strong pulling ropes from the bark of some trees and built from the timber of others the ‘ladder’ like skids on which the heavy statues slid as they were pulled to their final destination.

No doubting at all, it was hard work with a lot of muscle power involved, in which the majority of a clan’s able-bodied manhood participated. In order to perform the men, obviously, needed high quality, calory-rich nutrition on a sustained basis, continuously for four or five centuries. Here, too, the trees in the forests were vital. Some species bore sugary palm as food, others were used as firewood for cooking. And from the trunks of others, the islanders carved out the sturdy canoes to go after the porpoises and the tuna fish, themselves essential sources of nutrition.

The statues were not unique to Easter. Other Polynesian islands have similar structures. But nowhere else was there such a frenzy to build more and bigger ones. What was the reason behind the hysteria? One possible explanation is that with no foreign wars to fight and win, no commerce to engage in , the statues were the chiefs’ only means to exhibit their megalomania. Statue building started in the 1000’s CE and lasted as long as the forests did.

Ultimately, the trees were gone. “The overall picture for Easter is the most extreme example of forest destruction.... in the world”. Along with the trees, gone were the canoes, the ropes and the means to move the statues. Gone too were the fires to cook and cremate the dead. Further, with the trees, disappeared, too, all land birds. Of the marine varieties, the few species that endured made their nests elsewhere. Finally, the land claimed from the forest for additional cultivation served its purpose for a short time before losing its fertile topsoil to rain and wind erosion with necessarily less and less yields.

Indeed, the domestic trash heaps dating from the 1500’s are noticeably devoid of the assorted bones of earlier happier times. No more traces of porpoises, tuna, birds and chicken on the menus. Only rat bones remained.

From the socio- political perspective, the islanders rose against chiefs and elite who, all along had claimed descent from the gods and had, throughout promised, lasting prosperity. Rebellious islanders toppled and broke moais and damaged and desecrated ahus. With a penury in everything essential to life, cannibalism set in and population crashed. Captain James Cook (1728-1779), the discoverer of Australia, described the Easter islanders he encountered in 1774 as “small, lean, timid and miserable”.

Thenceforth, Europeans who visited brought along smallpox and other contagious diseases killing many of the survivors . Most notoriously the crews of Peruvian ships kidnapped 1,500 of the islanders for a life of servitude in mines of Peru. By 1872 there were only 111 islanders left.

GREENLAND

Greenland is a misnomer. From the air, there is hardly anything green to be seen. At over 2 million sq km in area it is the largest island in the world. As of 2019, it is home to 56,000 inhabitants. Ethnically, about 90% are Inuit (Eskimo) or mixed of Inuit-Danish and 9% of Danish ancestry. It is snow covered to such an extent that 99% percent of it is uninhabitable; the remaining 1% percent consists of pastures, meadows and open woodland() with birch, willow and juniper trees (image). Let’s make clear from the outset, these trees are useful as firewood and not for heavy timber with which to build houses and boats.

Chapter illustration

It is to this landscape that a Medieval European culture immigrated in 984 CE and called it home. They were Scandinavian Norse or Vikings from Norway, 2,400 kms away. For almost 500 years they survived there, inadvertently, all that time degrading their environment, so that by the end not a single soul remained. This fate befell them primarily because of actions they took or did not take as shall become clear hereinafter. Noteworthy, however is that Greenland unfriendly climate was made worse by the ‘Little Ice Age’() prevailing, globally, from the 1300’s to the 1800’s.

But, on the other hand and unlike Easter, which was uninhabited when the Polynesians arrived, part of Greenland, at the time the Scandinavians showed up, had already been home for centuries to several groups of well adapted Eskimos, at ease with their harsh surroundings. Had they chosen to, the Norse could have learnt and adapted some of the others practices which would have served them well in the end. Unfortunately, their condescending European attitudes stopped them from doing so to their detriment.

Again, contrary to the Easter islanders who lived in complete isolation as we have seen, the Greenlanders, on the other hand did not. Not only they had neighbours on the island itself, but they stayed in contact, albeit erratically with Norway via maritime traffic to and from.

Scholars know a great deal about Norse Greenland because of the written documentation left behind, the remains of the edifices they built, and of their knowledge of the cultures, habits and practices of Medieval Europeans.

Legend has it that a certain Erik the Red, a trouble maker in his home country Norway and in Iceland (equally settled by Norse about a century earlier), led a fleet of 25 ships, in 980 CE, from Iceland to the new territory which he christened Greenland. News of his landing there as well as rumours of riches to be had, brought three successive fleets from Iceland. Ultimately “by 1000 CE virtually all the land suitable for farms....had been occupied, yielding an eventual total Norse population estimated at around 5,000”.

Norse immigrants, thus, took up residence in that one percent in the southwest of the island. They set up two settlements (see image). The Western settlement, the smaller of the two with 20 percent of the Norse Greenlanders, and the larger, more prosperous Eastern Settlement with the balance of the population. There, they busied themselves with the chores of raising livestock and hunting wild land and marine animals. Given their surroundings, they could not grow farm or garden produce. Quite unusual for early societies whose main occupation was agriculture. It is truly difficult to conceive “that most Greenland Norse never saw wheat, a piece of bread, or beer (brewed from barley) during their entire lives” as recorded in contemporaneous Norwegian documents.

Raising livestock was not a simple undertaking, quite the contrary. Let’s begin with the Norse’s choice of animals. Their favourites were cows, pigs, ducks and geese. But apart from the first the others were discarded, early on as not sustainable in the Greenlander environment. Even cows did not do well but were kept, despite all, for prestige. Given the short summers on the island, cows had to be locked up and protected in barns for nine months a year and fed hay prepared and stored at great effort and expence by farmers (image), during the warm periods. Much more suitable for Greenland were the low status sheep and the despised goats. For, unlike cows, sheep and goats, and more so the latter, could graze outdoors for nine of the 12 months of the year and, consequently, needed indoor feeding for only three months or less. From this livestock Norse Greenlanders obtained their dairy products. Additionally, their sheep and goats gave them thick waterproof wool and hair for ropes respectively. Meat, was gotten only when it became available in the wake of slaughtering the excess animals that could not be adequately fed during the ‘indoor seasons’. Other domestic animals were horses as beasts of burden and hunting dogs.

They made up for the shortage by hunting caribou (image right) and seals (image left). The latter migrated east to Greenland from Newfoundland, Canada during the spring season.

Between June and August, every year, a few Greenlanders were sent up North, to a place they called Nordrseta, well away from their settlements. The aquatic world, there yielded walruses for their ivory tusks and hides(image right) and narwhale whales for their single tusk (image left). On land they sought polar bears for their pelts, and live gyrfalcons the world’s largest in the falcon species. Occasionally, a live bear was carried back home. None of that haul was intended for local use. Instead, it was sent to Norway in exchange of merchandise received as explained hereinafter.

That annual expedition was a harrowing experience for the men taking part. At the outset, was the journey itself to Nordrseta along the western coast of Greenland taking up a week or so, in fragile boats. Once at destination they spent over a month facing off against fierce, angry , wild beasts, killing them, removing skulls complete with tusks, skinning carcasses etc. followed by the long journey back home with all that goo on board plus a few falcons and a barely restrainable bear.

From the foregoing, it should be obvious that the lives and routines of Greenland Norse varied with the cadence of the seasons. Here is briefly how:

Late May to early June. Seal hunting.

June to August. Livestock let out of barns to graze in meadows. Time to produce and stock dairy items. Also season for hunting expedition to Nordrseta.

August to early September: Hectic time cutting grass and other herbaceous plants to dry and turn into hay fodder for indoor winter feeding of livestock.

September and October: Caribou hunting.

November to April. The winter months during which islanders busy themselves tending for the livestock in barns. Time, too, for cleaning up and preparing for export, the hides, pelts and tusks brought back from the expedition to Nordrseta, and for doing repairs, weaving and other odd jobs.

Additionally, there were three important activities, all clearly, during the mild season: cutting local trees for firewood, trips to Labrador, in today’s Canada for heavy timber and gathering driftwood() (image), both for construction usage.

It, logically then follows, that survival of the Viking Greenlanders, vitally dependent on the regularity of the seasons. They could survive one bad year provided it was followed by better ones with succeeding seasons propitious to the tasks summarized above. But bad was a decade of ‘unusual’ climatic conditions such as longer than expected winters causing depletion of reserves of food and heating fuel for humans and beasts alike; followed by short mild ‘warm’ periods of inadequate hay production, fewer caribous hunted. Must add that harsh winters hinder the migration of seals from Newfoundland, thus less seal meat to be caught in May.

Greenland Norse remained in contact with Norway through arrivals and departures of ships. But this traffic was rather erratic. In good times there would be one or two vessels a year from Europe. At worst, it could be several years before one arrived.

When one of these rickety, low tonnage, sailing ships of the day berthed, it carried iron, timber, wood preservers, luxury articles and church items. The latter ones included “pottery and glass beads...wine, linen, silk, silver...church bells, stained glass windows, bronze candlesticks, and churchmen robes and jewelry”. These fineries took up much space in the small vessels which could have carried more valuable day to day items that were lacking on the island. For the return trip to Norway they carried in their holds the skins, wool and hair of livestock and the hides, pelts, tusks, live gyrfalcons, and one whole bear if any.

Norse Greenlanders were Norwegian Christians. Bishops, in charge of the local Church, were dispatched from Norway. The islanders invested heavily in the Church and spent lavishly on the resident bishop. Cathedrals and churches (image), were built on the best farm land on which were kept the largest herd of cows, the most valued domestic animal. Construction of religious edifices took up a great deal of scarce timber and other imported products. And Greenlanders were required to pay the annual taxes imposed by Rome such as the tithe().

Along with the clergy, the chiefs of rich farms lorded it over the rest of Greenland’s communities. Together, they owned the best farms and the few boats. They prioritized the import from Norway of luxury goods for their own use, for which they ordered the risky hunting expeditions to Nordrseta.

Throughout the Norse’s existence in Greenland, chiefs and clergy strictly adhered and imposed on the commoners the conservatism inherited from the Norway of the Middle Ages even when the survival of the community was at stake. Part of this stubborn conservatism was the Church-oriented contempt for pagans. All this is unfortunate because it prevented the Norse from cooperating with their Arctic neighbours and from adapting their immeasurably more appropriate ways of doing things. In other words, Viking Greenland was “...a tightly controlled society [by] the few chiefs of the richest farms [and the Church]...[They] could prevent anyone else from doing something that seemed to threaten their interests...”.

Societally, Greenland’s Norse belonged to farms varying in degrees of prosperity, depending on their relative locations on the island. In total there were some 250 such farms of 20 people each grouped under 14 churches. Rich farms had herds of highly valued and expensive-to-keep cows with well-appointed barns for their upkeep during the cold seasons. Poorer farms had to make do with the lower status sheep and goats, the lowest most despised animal.

In each church community, there were those who ate better than others; in other words, rich and poor members. Through examination of animal bones in Norse middens and with the help of ‘carbon isotope analyses’ of the skeletons of humans, scientists have established that the diets of the rich contained a high proportion of beef and dairy products such as cheese, with smaller proportions of caribou venison. Those immediately down the scale ate less beef, more caribou and some seal meat. As to those at the bottom of the social scale they limited themselves almost exclusively to the flesh of the marine mammal. Clearly, caribou venison held a higher status that seal meat.

As was the case in Easter, the unfriendly environmental settings in Greenland imposed cooperation among all societal constituents in matters of survival. Team work was crucial for preparing and stocking hay, hunting caribou and for the difficult maritime journey to Nordrseta. Equally, during hard times the richer farms loaned cattle and hay to poorer ones; to be ‘reimbursed’ when circumstances permit.

All foregoing notwithstanding, however, the Norse remained true to their Viking heritage. They quarreled viciously and violently among themselves as evidenced by graves here and there with disarticulated skeletons and signs of lethal blows on skulls and other parts of the body.

When the Vikings first arrived in Greenland, they found there a branch of the Eskimo people with whom the new settlers had some dealings. They were not, however, as consequential to the Norse as the Inuit who came to the island around 1200 CE, or nearly two hundred years later. They brought with them “...thousands of years of cultural developments by Arctic peoples learning to master Arctic conditions”.

Moving from eastern Canada the Inuit initially, took up residence in Northwest Greenland. Gradually, thereafter, the moved down to the vicinity of the Vikings’ settlements and into Nordrseta, their seasonal hunting ground. In contrast to the Norse “the Inuit were the most flexible and sophisticated hunters [on land and sea] in Arctic history”. They used fast, nimble kayaks (image, top) “to harpoon seals and to run down seabirds on the ocean”. Their other craft, the umiaq (image, bottom) they used “to kill whales in open water”, and for transportation. Both consisted of sewn seal skin stretched over driftwood or whalebone frames. Ingeniously, each kayak was “tailored” to its user and “worn by its owner...guaranteeing...that ice-cold water...could not wet of him”. Their hunting tools included harpoons, bows and arrows made of animal parts and driftwood if available.

They built their houses with ice blocks, heated and lit them with blubber, explained by National Geographic as being the “thick layer of fat...directly under the skin of all marine mammals such as seals, whales, and walruses”. Even more, the large bowhead whales() (image ) and other marine mammals secured enough quantities of food which could support large settlements.

Sadly, though, the Norse had nothing but disdain and contempt for the Inuit. Yet, they could have adopted some of their more suitable equipment: kayaks and umiaqs in place of their heavy unmanageable Viking boats. They could have applied themselves to master the use of the harpoon and learnt to hunt whales. Or/and they could have traded with them and obtained walrus tusks etc. at much reduced effort and cost; all to their benefit. But their stubborn conservatism of “We are Europeans, we are Christians, God forbid that anyone could confuse us with the Inuit”, rather than connecting positively with them, greatly reduced their chances of survival .

The end of Viking Greenland came gradually and spread over a long time. The poorer and less populous Western Settlement vanished first, sometime in the 1350’s . As for the Eastern Settlement, it endured for another 100 years or so before the last Scandinavian died out. Findings by archaeologists indicate that in their last days, people froze and starved to death. Not only did they consume their precious cows down to their hooves but also their hunting dogs something they had always been averse to do and more. And they rebelled against chiefs and clergy.

This extinction had more than one reason. First, like on Easter, Norse settlers overexploited their green environment. Next they failed, unlike the Inuit, to weather the ‘Little Ice Age’ mentioned earlier, and lastly, their negative attitude towards the Inuit.

Overexploitation of the environment meant, first, deforestation. In other words, chopping the birch, willow, and juniper trees. Second, was turf cutting or the removal of hectare after hectare of grass along with the roots and attached topsoil (image). And, third, was overgrazing by cows, sheep and goats.

Why did they do this. Cut down trees were used as firewood for heating spaces, cooking and for making tools and weapons from the raw iron they were receiving from Norway. Another purpose for forest clearance was the opening up of additional pasture land. As for turf cutting, it was useful as heat insulating construction material for walls and roofs of building (image). To achieve adequate thermal isolation, layers of cut turf were stacked on top of one another for up to 1.8 m in thickness. It has been assessed that “a large Greenland residential house is estimated to have consumed [40,000 sq m] of turf”. That is not all however, turf walls and roofs deteriorate with time, needing renewal.

Removing trees caused soil erosion. That is to say, the e fertile top layer of soil, thus exposed, is susceptible to be carried away by wind and rain. What remains, in its place, is a barren ex-forest floor unable to support any vegetation. So does the cutting of turf , and the aggressive grazing of herbivorous livestock which, in fact, is a significant contributor of desertification worldwide.

The advent of the Little Ice Age, in the 1300’s sealed the fate of Greenlanders; it pushed them further toward the abyss. The colder weather, thenceforth, shortened the warm seasons, made for longer and colder winters. There were, accordingly less opportunities to stock human food and animal fodder, in quantities large enough to last the cold seasons. Further, advent of the colder climate shortened the caribou hunting seasons, and curtailed the seasonal migration of seals. Finally the freezing over of sea lanes cut short the trips to Labrador for timber and was one of the reasons contact and trade with Norway was lost.

If, only, they had managed a working relationship with the Inuit, After all the Inuit accommodated themselves to the same cold spell successfully. In the final analysis, “[r]efusing or unable to learn from the Inuit... the Norse rather than the Inuit became the ones who eventually disappeared”.

Thus deprived of heat, iron, food and fodder and no help likely, Norse Greenlanders could not have expected to survive much longer. Indeed, sometime during the first half of the 1400’ s, not a soul remained standing.

The Danes arrived in 1721 to take possession of Greenland. The found only the vestiges of the long dead Scandinavian presence.

IF I KNEW THEN, WHAT I KNOW NOW

It is easy, in retrospect to think of the Easter Polynesians and Greenland Norse as foolish for having destroyed their environment. By the time they realized their own shortcomings, it was impossible to start again and too late to undo the self- inflicted harm. In fairness, however they did not know any better. Clearly, it was a case of ‘If I knew then what I know now’.

Are we, in this modern world, really in a position to censure those of bygone peoples? Hardly. When we realize that the centuries that separate us have not really made us wiser, more tolerant of others etc. The religious bigotry and ethnic prejudice of the Scandinavians towards others is rampant nowadays across the globe. The greed, and outsize egos of the dominant classes, of both Easter and Greenland are still the scourge of our socio-political systems. Deforestation and soil erosion are ongoing on a large scale in the rainforests of Brazil, Indonesia and elsewhere. Add to this the harmful products of modern technology, such as carbon dioxide and noxious chemicals released in nature to mankind’s eventual detriment. So how different from those who have preceded us are we?

Unlike them, however, we cannot claim ignorance of the consequent harm our productive and consumer societies are wreaking upon the world. Science and scientists have , for the last few decades, been sounding alarm bells, warning humanity of its gross abuse Earth’s ecosystem. Essentially, like Easter Island, isolated in a corner of the immense Pacific Ocean, Earth is our only home, alone in the gigantic universe, with finite resources and no one to help in times of need.

It is unlikely, to some, that human society will disintegrate the way of these earlier civilizations. Instead, the beginning of the end, from a western world perspective, will show itself in “...a future of significantly lower living standards, chronically high risks, and the undermining of what we now consider some of our key values. Such a collapse could assume various forms, such as the worldwide spread of diseases or else of wars, triggered ultimately by scarcity of environmental resources”. Superfluous to add, it will be much worse in the poorer regions of Africa, Asia and Latin America.

Coffee Capsules and Rio Doce

COFFEE CAPSULES & RIO DOCE

The 2015 Rio Doce mining disaster in Brazil.

“Ordinary citizens will have to change their lifestyles to avert disaster, but disaster appears abstract and faraway-until it actually happens”. Michael Mann (DOB: 1942), Emeritus Professor of Sociology. In 2013 on the consumption frenzy of affluent societies.

“Do not come to Europe. Do not risk your lives and your money. It is all for nothing”. Donald Tusk, president of the European Council from 2014 to 2019, sending message to refugees in 2016.

The Author FEBRUARY, 2021

COFFEE CAPSULES AND RIO DOCE

REFERENCES.

Own narrative. *I shop therefor I am.

Book. *Living Well at Others’ Expense, 2016, by Stephan Lessenich.

Others. *BBC: 1) Life between 1914 and 1945. 2) Human zoos: When real people were exhibits. *Encyclopedia.com: Consumerism. *OER (Open Educational Resources): The World Fairs. *The Atlantic: How Humans Became ‘Consumers’. *The Guardian: The man who was caged in a zoo. *The New York Times: The Foundations of US Consumerism was Laid in the 18th Century.

INTRODUCTION

The first part of this narrative deals with the consumption-oriented lifestyles of the citizens of the rich industrial countries, and of the better-off classes in the developing world. As such, this part is a revised and expanded version of my earlier narrative: ‘I shop, therefore I am’.

But, consumption on a large scale by the few, is unconscionable vis-à-vis a majority of humanity and unsustainable vis-a vis the Planet, hence the second part of this narrative. It is overwhelmingly based on a 2016 book by Stephan Lessenich (DOB: 1965), Professor at the Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität in Munich, and former President of the German Sociological Association. It is titled : ‘Living Well at Others’ Expense’.

The book addresses itself to the affluent citizens of the ‘Global North’ or ‘North’ for short, by which is meant North America, western and northern Europe and Japan. Not specifically mentioned, but certainly belonging in that club are the Scandinavian countries as well as Australia and New Zealand and one or two others; but not yet China. It condemns their extravagant way of unmitigated consumption which is unjust and damaging to the people and regions of the ‘Global South’ or ‘South’. By the latter are meant Latin America, Southeast Asia and others. In what way is that injustice committed and that damage done? Very succinctly, “We [Europeans] are well-off because we live off others - off what they achieve and suffer [etc.].... What we don’t produce ourselves... we simply have grown elsewhere... and devastates elsewhere”.

This narrative begins with a historical survey of the beginnings of consumption leading to recent times. I then looks at what several influential individuals said on the matter. Follows the section on the less well-off people of the ‘South’ doing the bidding of the richer ones in the ‘North’. It ends with a short conclusion and an Appendix, I hope my readers find interesting.

HISTORICAL SURVEY

In my preceding narrative, ‘Of Caravans and Caravels’, we have come to know about early east-west exchanges by Phoenicians, Venetians and Silk Roads merchants. The traded goods such as silk, spices and many more, no doubt constituted early consumer goods. We have also come to know how and why, from the 16th century onward, Europe dealt directly, rather than through foreign middlemen, with the sources of the goods from the East. Further the discovery of the Americas brought Europeans additional wealth and more commodities in the form of sugar, coffee and tobacco.

Clearly, only the rich and powerful within these societies could afford the exotic edibles and luxury items. The rest, not less than 85 percent of the populations, consisted of the peasantry living in rural areas, far from the centers of wealth, cultivating the lands of the privileged owners and barely subsisting.

In the words of Professor Emeritus Gary Cross (DOB: 1946), writing for Encycloedia.com, “... the advent of consumerism required sustained and eventually widespread economic growth”. It began to happen in late 18th century Britain in the shape of a large and sustained industrial enterprise which, among others, ushered in the ‘modern times’. It must be said, however that the British were fortunate to have significant deposits of coal, an eminent source of heat energy, and iron ore, the raw material of anything ferrous. Thus, they harnessed the first to create the machine tools for building the locomotives, iron ships and agricultural appliances; all steam powered.

Steam was also adapted in the early 1800s to power the cotton mills (factories) several of which already existed decades before its advent. They were built near fast running waterways that spun large waterwheels which, in turn, drove the cotton weaving machinery. In this context, raw cotton was brought from the North American colonies and, later from the new republic of the USA. It was also imported from the British possession of India().

Within a century, Britain was emulated by Belgium (1820s), France (1850s), the USA (1860s), Germany (1870s) and Japan (1870s). All the future rich industrial nations of the 20th and so far of the 21st centuries.

This dramatic shift from an agricultural to an industrial society caused the migration of a great number of peasants from the countryside to work in the new coal mines, steelworks and textile factories. But more importantly, in the realm of this account, is that by the mid-19th century an industrial era took shape in Europe and the USA with unequalled productive capacity. For the first time in history, products were available in outstanding quantities at low enough prices as to be affordable to virtually everyone in the industrialized world. In the words of Mr. Cross, these new circumstances “introduced a broader population to the attractions of spending”.

The transformation from growing produce to making things did not go unnoticed in the North America of early 19th century. With the arrival of manufactured products from Britain and elsewhere in Europe, conservative elements took pains to remind their countrymen and women of the long established American credo of thrift and prudence with money; succinctly conveyed by the phrase “A penny saved is a penny earned”, attributed to Benjamin Franklin ( 1706-1790), polymath and one of the founders of the USA. All to no avail as will become clear hereinunder.

Enters the consumer society. Before I go further, I want to explain what modern consumerism is. There are, in fact, several definitions, but the one by Mr. Cross is, to my mind, the more relevant to our purpose. He states that it is “the unlimited and general desire for purchased goods and services that define self and social position in advanced [capitalist] market societies”. For completeness sake, the market in these societies is the driver, by various means, of that desire without which it cannot sustain itself.

Someone put two and two together and the big department stores materialized: Harrods in 1849, Bon Marché in 1852, in London and Paris respectively. Similarly in the USA, came on the scene New York’s Macy in 1858, and Chicago’s Sears saw the light in 1886. They all took care to display their merchandises in such a way as “...to create longings for new and exciting goods”.

Along with these came the trade fairs, the first of which was London’s ‘Great Exhibition of the Works of Industry of All Nations’ of 1851 held in the purposely and temporarily built Crystal Palace (image). It was followed by dozens of such expositions, in the 50 years remaining of the 19th century. Among them, New York’s ‘Exhibition of the Industry of All Nations’ in 1853 and the 1855 ‘Exposition Universelle’ in Paris. Outside the western world, there was the ‘Ottoman General Exposition’ held in Istanbul in 1863() and the one in Kyoto, Japan called the ‘Exhibition of Arts and Manufactures’ in 1872.

Those exhibitions, or fairs, made visitors come face to face with new products ranging from personal items to furniture to kitchen appliances to bicycles and even the to first automobiles. But, more importantly the attendees were made to understand the implied message that to spend on the objects on display is the way to a better future. Along with the fairs were often held ‘ethnological expositions’ described under 1 in the Appendix.

Along with the emporia and the expositions, arenas were introduced in which crowds were entertained with musical performances, ballroom dancing and sport activities. Interestingly the first soccer match took place in London on 19th December 1863; and the first basketball game was held in New York on 20th January 1892. All these events and occasions, in the words of Mr. Cross “drew millions in a kind of consumerist pilgrimage”.

Even so, by the turn of the 20th century the average worker in Western Europe or the United States still spent approximately 80-90% of his income on food and other necessities. So much so, that industrialist Henry Ford announced, in 1907, his intention to “create a motor car for the multitude”. He then proceeded to build the Model T Ford a simple, sturdy and inexpensive car with no options (image). To do so, he adapted the assembly line method (image left). This way, between 1908 when the car was first introduced and 1927 when its production stopped, he managed to sell 15,000,000, black only, units all to the same original design. He even raised the daily wages of his own workers to encourage them to buy the car. And they did. It is said that “the Model T Ford changed the way Americans work and travel”.

In 1924, meanwhile, at a time when car sales in the US were on a downward trend, Ford’s rival General Motors introduced the concept of ‘Planned Obsolescence’ meaning designing motor cars with a limited life to entice consumers to buy new ones, hence the yearly model change.

But the first half of the twentieth century was plagued by events and occurrences which inevitably curtailed consumer spending to the bare necessities. At the outset of that painful period, came the Great War of 1914-1918 with its killing fields. One of its legacies was the influenza pandemic leaving in its wake death and suffering in the millions. In less than a decade followed the Great Depression of 1929-1933, symbolized by long ‘soup kitchen’ queues of multitudes of unemployed (image). Then after a short breathing space of a few years, arrived the armageddon of the Great War of 1939-1945, with its 70 to 80 million casualties. As stated, consumption by individuals and families was brought down to a minimum. For instance, during the two armed conflicts not only food was rationed; citizen were also invited to contribute fences, pots and pans etc. to the war effort.

In the early 1950’s, at least in America, full employment was achieved thanks to the “pressing demand for reconstruction” in the aftermath of the bad years. To go hand in hand with it, the government wanted people to shed the frugality they had acquired during the hard times and return to consumption so as to relieve long “pent-up material needs” and, in the process, keep the wheels of industry turning.

The government standard bearer was economist Victor Lebow (1902-1980) who in 1955 preached that the immense industrial capacity of industrial America dictated that its citizens indulged in consumption, that they “seek...spiritual satisfaction and...ego satisfaction in consumption... things [ had to be] consumed, burned up, worn out, replaced and discarded at an ever- increasing rate”.

Accordingly, by the end of the 1950’s a majority of households owned the main home appliances (refrigerators, gas or electric stoves, washing machines, vacuum cleaners, air conditioners and television sets). This way of life subsequently spread to Europe and to the middle classes in the rest of the world. Later in the century came on the market portable transistor radios, electronic calculators and the like. And by the 1990’s arrived in the marketplace all the high-tech gadgetry of the information age. All, on a planned obsolescence cycle, with yearly changes resulting in unmanageably higher and higher waste heaps. Truly, economist Lebow must be happy in his grave.

Cannot leave without a word or two about the role of aggressive and imaginative advertising and publicity driving demand for consumer products. Also, not negligeable is the role of financial institutions encouraging ‘buy now, pay later, routines.

Clearly consumption on this large scale is not sustainable as we shall see in the following part. It is tough on the planet’s resources and its ecosystem. It will be immeasurably tougher if a majority of Indians and Chinese attain middle class and aspire to the affluent western standard of living.

Or, on the other hand, author Hervé Kempf (DOB: 1957), environmental editor of Le Monde predicts, in his 2013 book, ‘Fin de l'Occident, Naissance du Monde’ (End of the West, Birth of the World), that in rich industrial countries consumption for a large part of their populations is approaching saturation in that they already own automobiles, television sets, mobile phones, home appliances and other amenities such as education for their children, travel etc. That despite capitalism undoubted ability to create needs of which the consumer had no idea and no desire, a saturation point is reached.

And yet, according to University of London history professor Frank Trentmann (DOB: 1965), writing in the Atlantic, Stockholm residents purchased in 2011 three times the volume of goods than they did in 1990. And , in 2014, Frenchmen and women used up “a lot of rubber, tarmac, and gas” covering more than 50 billion kms for their purchases.

Indeed, prof. Cross does not see any substitute, for the time being, to the current “value of limitless material innovation and social and self-definition in and through goods”. And while many in Europe and elsewhere appreciate the unsustainability of present-day consumption and its nefarious effects on the world’s ecosystem and on less fortunate societies no one has so far : “found ways of effectively articulating a form of post materialism”.

FOR AND AGAINST

We have already come to know of one objector and one supporter of excessive consumption in the persons of Benjamin Franklin and Victor Le Bow respectively. There were, predictably, others before and after them.

First the objectors. The earliest, I came across was Greek philosopher Plato (427-347 BCE), who condemned Athenians for pursuing the acquisition of frivolities. As for the Romans, we have already seen in the preceding narrative ‘Of Caravans and Caravels’ the admonition of some influential persons to their fellow citizens against the wearing of silk imported from China at exorbitant prices paid in gold.

In the early days of the Christian era, philosopher, theologian and bishop St Augustine (354-430 CE) admonished against the practice of accumulation of things for being “wicked and dangerous because it corrupted the human soul......, and overthrew the social order”. So did, more than a thousand years later, Christian thinkers of the Italian Renaissance to whom the “splendor of luxury smacked of .... lechery”.

But, most unexpectedly, is what Mr Trentmann tells us about the ‘sumptuary laws’() in some European countries between the 14th and 18th centuries. These laws consisted of lists of items that individuals and households were authorized to own. For example, in Venice from 1512, “no more than six forks and six spoons could be given as wedding gifts; gilded chests and mirrors were completely forbidden”. More, women in the Germany of the 18th century, could be imprisoned if discovered with cotton neckerchiefs.

In addition to the foregoing religious, moral and ethical reasons for rising against consumerism, there were also economic ones. At a time when money was scarce, it was more useful in the coffers of the state and in the hands of local suppliers than spent on expensive imports from the east. In other words “Consumers... were...a drain on wealth”.

The belief in thrift in America originated with the Puritans . They were strict English Protestants who crossed the Atlantic to escape the prosecutions of the equally Protestant Church of England. To them, the latter denomination, was lax and too ceremonial; in other words not adhering to the writings in the Bible. In consequence, a group of them with wives and children boarded the Mayflower (image) which after a horrendous crossing of 66 days, docked in the winter of 1620, in what is now the state of Massachusetts. Consistently with their creed, Puritans believed that one way to salvation was through hard work. They were not against amassing riches “as long as men resisted the temptations that the riches created”.

Finally, many Europeans were suspicious of the American model of consumption epitomized by Ford’s assembly line and “cheap mass produced goods and pleasures” for they threatened the value of hard work and eroded European way of life.

Naturally, there were other prominent persons who argued the opposite, equally with the help of religion on the one hand and socio-economic grounds on the other.

In the 17th century, the Dutch polymath and theologian Caspar Barlaeus (1584-1648) saw in Christianity enough evidence to support consumerism. He used it along with more mundane arguments to persuade people of the virtue of buying new products whether homemade or imported.

Followed the eminent English philosopher and chemist Robert Boyle who reasoned that the treasures and bounties on Earth were created, by the Almighty, solely for exploitation and enjoyment of Man. That God endowed the latter with “multiple desires” the fulfilment of which was God’s will and not otherwise as claimed by detractors.

During the following century the debate was joined by Anglo-Dutch philosopher and economist Bernard de Mandeville (1670-1733) in the opinion of whom the acquisition of things provided work for craftsmen and traders and thus created wealth. English philosopher David Hume (1711-1776) on the other hand, maintained that far from impoverishing an degrading society the ownership of luxuries in moderation, to the contrary, enriched, and strengthened nations.

But, perhaps, most significant, are the writings of the ‘father of capitalism’, the Scottish economist Adam Smith (1723-1790). He penned that “Consumption is the sole end and purpose of all production”. According to professor Trentmann, Smith commented that people filled their coat pockets with “little conveniences” then proceeded to buy new coats with more pockets to fill. Further, the eminent economist maintained that the things in the pockets of these people had no value in themselves. Nevertheless, in the minds of their owners, they made the pursuit of wealth “grand and beautiful and noble.”

In the end, the verdict of the ordinary citizens tilted toward Adam Smith and those likeminded. To date, none of the objectors’ arguments and warnings of yore and of our time have been able to marshal a following of significance.

PAYING FOR THE NORTH’S AFFLUENCE

Let me begin with the exploitation of the ‘South’ by the global market economy controlled by the big, profit-at-any-price-to-others, transnational corporations of the North. Complicit with them are the consumers of the rich industrial countries, and, no doubt, the middle classes of other regions, who buy their products eagerly. Also guilty, to be sure, are the incompetent, venal and corrupt ruling classes in the ‘South’.

What are the shapes of this exploitation? Four ways: a) depletion, for all times, of resources, b) irretrievable damage to the ecosystem, c) dumping industrial and consumer wastes, and e) using the labour of locals on the cheap with no meaningful benefits and at the cost of their well-being. Let’s consider.

Germans love shrimps. Most come from mass production artificial ponds in Thailand. In order to make room for these, large areas of mangrove forests (image), are destroyed with the usual ecological consequences. According to the US’s National Ocean Service: “Mangrove forests stabilize the coastline, reducing erosion from storm surges, currents, waves, and tides. The intricate root system of mangroves also makes these forests attractive to fish and other organisms seeking food and shelter from predators”.

More; children are brought from poorer neighbouring countries, the likes of Cambodia and Myanmar to work there. Among other tasks, they are forced to shell shrimps in icy water by hand for up to 16 hours a day. In the words of prof. Lessenich “Thai shrimp industry is a living example of forced labour and wage slavery in the globalized modern world”.

Indonesia, another nation in Asia, is bending over backwards to supply the North. This time, however, it is with oil palm (image). This plant is used for “margarine and cooking fat but also cosmetics and fuel”. To make room for the palm trees, 260,000 sq kms of rain forest have been slash-burnt between 1990 and 2010 releasing, in the process, nearly 12 billion tonnes of CO2 in the atmosphere. Other consequences include population uprooting, respiratory problems, habitat destruction and more.

Indeed, a 2019 article published by the BBC gives the full measure of the ugliness of this practice. It reports that smoke-generated haze was so extensive it spread to neighbouring countries, adversely affecting air quality and visibility there (image). And who is to blame? According to an Indonesian government source, ten corporations were, at the time, being investigated along with 100 small local farmers. Unbelievably, this is happening despite the laws making the practice of slash and burn illegal. As for the NGO Greenpeace, the multinationals continue to flout the rules with no adverse consequences; a strong indication of widespread corruption, and deliberately lax enforcement of the regulations.

Finally, deforestation defeats the purpose for which it was done in the first place. It is a well-known fact that planting on deforested soil is not sustainable for, without the ‘protection’ of tree roots and other vegetations’, it suffers from erosion and loss of fertility. Not to forget, of course the risks of flooding and to people in the affected areas. Last, but not least, is the increase of global warming emissions.

Europe is fond of meats, dairy products, eggs and what have you. Accordingly they raise and breed extensive livestock in mechanized, computerized factory-farms (image). Only problem, though, it has no acreage to grow the large quantity of feedstock to nourish the cows, pigs chicken and the rest. The solution is to exploit hundred of thousands of hectares overseas. An added advantage is that European are, simultaneously, exporting the adverse repercussions of the “economic, ecological and social consequences of modern agriculture”.

Thus, by 2014 Germany alone was growing the produce it needed on over 50,000 sq. kms of foreign land, equivalent to several of its constituent states in a Federal Republic with a total area of 357,000 sq.kms. As for the whole of the European Union, the area exploited abroad amounted to 250,000 sq. kms, slightly larger than the entire land area of the U.K (242,500 sq.kms.

Contemplate the case of the soya beans grown, mostly for animal feed, on behalf of the Europeans in Argentina, the 8th largest country in the world and third largest soya beans producer after the USA and Brazil. Although soya is grown elsewhere in South America for the benefit of Europe; Argentina is the worst case scenario. In this country, it is a huge business, run by large transnational corporations in cahoots with corrupt judicial and state officials. They control 200,000 sq.kms of that monoculture (single crop).

A 2018 article in the Guardian headed ‘Soy Destruction in Argentina Leads straight to our Dinner Plates’, explains that growing soya in Argentina for Europeans has already meant the destruction of more than 100,000 sq.kms, or a quarter of that country’s portion of the Gran Chaco forest(). “The extent of the destruction is painful to see” reported the correspondent of the paper when he surveyed the land from a light aircraft.

Deforesting in Argentina, again, defeats the purpose for which it was done, similarly to the slash and burn of trees in Indonesia. Add to this the spraying of “herbicides, pesticides and fungicides”, supplied by transnational companies such as Monsanto(see my narrative: Human Rights & the Free Market). They are all polluters and have been proved to cause miscarriages and malformations in newborns.

As far as prof. Lessenich is concerned, the “soya belt” of South America has caused ecological harm, resulted in the elimination of traditional rural way of life and caused a huge exodus to urban areas. Last but not least, it has led to grave health problems as already described. Worse, it has been the reason for the emergence in the South of a “violent agro-capitalism...rampant corruption...Bribery and threats, blackmail and coercion...murder and manslaughter...are the inevitable concomitants of a socioeconomic [system]... serving the production interests and consumer needs of the [North]”. No wonder critics call the produce “killer beans”.

The North also outsources its raw material such as iron ore for processing into steel used in the making of products from cutlery to aircraft carriers. In Brazil alone there are dozens of iron ore mines operated by large multinational corporations.

A little diversion first. Mining and processing iron ore is a dirty business. It involves the use of toxic chemicals which are subsequently discarded. They are called ‘tailings’; they, obviously, cannot be gotten rid of by discharging in nature. Instead, they are stored behind purposely built dams as shown in the image. Clearly,when one such structure fails, it results in a great catastrophe to communities and environments.

This is exactly what happened in November of 2015 in the Brazilian state of Minas Gerais when such a dam failed. A huge volume of poisonous liquids rushed downstream “devastating wildlife and tainting drinking water for hundreds of thousands of people” as stated in a 2019 a BBC publication. Eventually it disgorged into and contaminated the waters of the Rio Doce (Candy River)(image) all the way to its discharge in the Atlantic ocean 650 kms away. It goes without saying that fishing in the waterway and its delta was interrupted, putting thousands of fishermen out of business.

Eager to return to business-as-usual the earliest possible, the operating concerns tried to whitewash the whole event, claiming it was a natural disaster. But to prof. Lessenich this was anything but. To the contrary it was a man-perpetrated crime against Nature and against the local communities. Already, two years before the catastrophe, Brazilian state officials had voiced concerns about the viability of the tailings dam and the safety of the villagers residing below it. In consequence, they ordered an assessment of the situation. But, perversely, instead of entrusting the task to an independent professional party, it was left to the company itself to do the evaluation. Unsurprisingly, nothing of substance emerged from it. And yet according to the Guardian in 2018, evidence existed of documentation indicating awareness of company officers of the stressed state of the dam, but judged its failure a remote possibility leading Brazilian judiciaries to declare that the company “prioritized profits and left safety in second place”.

The Rio Doce cataclysm is not a ‘one off’ occurrence. It is everywhere in resource-rich Brazil and elsewhere. To prof. Lessenich, it epitomizes “...the local, regional and global business-as-usual approach...of the industrialist-capitalist social model”. Not only is the avarice of the corporations at fault but also the rapacity of the North’s consumers. He, too, rails at the corrupt governance and lack of control of the resource-rich countries. See the story of the coffee capsule under 3 in Appendix.

And what does the global north return to the South : the waste products of its industrial societies. “Above all.....Africa’s metropolitan regions are favourite dumping grounds for transatlantic waste”.

Prof. Lessenich insists that the consumers of the affluent societies, thanks to media coverage, are aware of what is happening in the lands of others. They cannot claim ignorance of tragic events described here, nor can they pretend not to know the reasons for the ecological devastation ,misery and hardships suffered by others in Argentina, Brazil and other places. To be sure, they are troubled by what they see and read about; but cannot help but turn a blind eye and a deaf ear to it all. Their way of life is too precious to let go of, no matter the cost. They are thus, guilty of condoning the “massive global depletion of natural resources and the environmental problems as well as the working and living conditions in the countries where these resources are extracted”.

This state of affairs is not sustainable. More specifically the globalized capitalist system causing the present imbalance will come at the hands of those from the South. In the words of prof. Lessenich “...the empire is beginning to strike back” alluding at refugees rattling the gates of Europe and North America. They will not stop no matter what; they have endured the caprices of the rich industrial world for far too long.

REGIONAL INEQUALITY

We are all familiar with the income gap within a given country. We know, for example, that it is quite wide in the USA but much less so in western Europe. But what is not often in the news is the huge wealth gap between the rich ‘North’ and poor ‘South’ qualified by prof. Lessenich as “monstruous”; it has been this way for the last 20 to 25 years.

This is not to say, of course, that there are no poor people in the ‘North’ and no rich ones in the ‘South’; but the lower social classes German or French citizenry, for example, are better off than many middle income persons in the countries of the South. Indeed, research carried out, in 2007, by two American sociologists arrived at the conclusion “that all income groups in European countries are among the wealthiest 20 percent of the world population....By contrast... 80 percent of the almost 100 million people living in Ethiopia...are among the poorest 10 percent in the world”.

Out of curiosity, the two researchers looked at the expenses incurred by Americans for the upkeep of their pet dogs. The verdict: “it’s better to be a [pet] dog in the USA” , than a citizen in one of the poorer countries since the “Dogland” nation ranks with middle income countries above the like of Egypt and Paraguay and is better off than “40 percent of the world’s population”.

There is more, however. It concerns prospects and opportunities, dictated by the “lottery of life”. The lower middle class parents of a newborn in Europe can confidently look forward to a rosier future for him/her than his/her opposite number in Brazil or Zimbabwe.

MY TAKE

When did inequality begin? As far as philosopher Jean-Jacques Rousseau (1712-1778) is concerned, it arose with the first man who fenced off a plot of land and declared it his; i.e. with the invention of property. That is sometime after the onset of farming 10,000 years ago. Until that time Homo sapiens lived in egalitarian, kin related groups, moving about in search of wild plants, fruits and prey and sharing all between themselves, i.e. in harmony with Nature.

Becoming growers introduced early humans to disease and hunger. The first was acquired from living in close proximity to their domestic animals and of theirs and own’s excrement heaps. They, in other words were becoming prey to germs hitherto unknown. As to the Second, while their ancestors could always find wild grain, fruit or vegetable eat, they, by contrast, cultivated one crop on their little plots. If for any of many reasons the produce was blighted, the farmer and his family starved to death. All in all it may not have been such a good idea to ‘civilize’. This is the opinion of more than one contemporary authors, among them Jared Diamond (DOB: 1937) and Yuval Noah Harari (DOB: 1976).

On the sociopolitical level, from that first fenced plot of Rousseau, emerged gradually over the centuries cities, states, kingdoms and empires in which emperors, kings, nobility and their sycophants lived well at the expense of the multitudes of poor peasants and craftsmen. In order to keep the latter in check, myths were invented by those in power such as, for example, the God given right to rule and be obeyed.

The onset of the industrial age and the modern era, 300 years ago brought a demographic increase which has continued to this day. But the majority additional beings swelled slums and exacerbate general poverty.

A few decades ago came to fruition the neo-liberal creed of globalization and the supreme rule of the marketplace, associated with a drastic diminishment of government services on which the less well-to-do members of any society depend on. To promote globalization, its proponents used the metaphor of a rising tide (prosperity for all) lifting all boats imultaneously (benefitting both rich and poor). But no such thing ever happened. A small number made fortunes, a few more improved their living standard, but the vast majority of people was left behind in the dust. Which is where the World is at today.

So as far as I can see. When it first ‘civilized’ 10,000 years ago, Humanity embarked on slippery slope. As of present it is moving fast, unguided and uncontrolled, heading where? It needs to slow down significantly to take stock of where it is going and under what conditions. Else, sooner or later, it will be forcefully and unpleasantly halted, with a heavy price to pay.

APPENDIX

1-Ethnological expositions

At the peak of colonialism, in the late 19th early 20th centuries, exotic people from the colonies were brought over and displayed ‘in human zoos’ or ‘ethnological expositions’ as part of the great trade fairs, in Paris London, Brussels, Berlin etc. They served to show European citizenry the gap between the civilized world and that of the primitive savages and also to convince anyone who had doubts, of the white man’s duty to bring civilization and Christianity to these backward regions. And, finally, they constituted “pseudo-science” for those scholars supporting the “theory of races”, one of whom was Swiss born Harvard professor Louis Agassiz (1807-1873) who contended that blacks are “degraded and degenerate race”.

Human specimens on display, variously, showed groups performing their dances and rituals, or individuals either dressed or naked. All were always separated from visitors by fences ”to reinforce the notion of separateness”. Worst of all was when Africans were placed in ape houses to reinforce the impression of similarities. The displays had a great appeal. So much so that altogether they were seen by no less than an estimated 1.4 billion visitors.

Curiously, the first to outlaw ethnological zoo was Adolf Hitler, the racist-in-chief, who ruled Germany between 1933 and 1945. In the aftermath of the second World War in 1945, displays of exotic people diminished in the rest of Europe ; the last one being held as recently as 1958 in Brussels.

Across the Atlantic the picture was not better , if not worse. In 1904 the USA had taken control of the Philippines from Spain. At the St Louis’ World Fair, that same year, were put on display a group of Filipino Igorot mountain people. According to the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation’s ‘Nature of Things’ the exhibits were made to enact their religious and other rituals (image). More; they were fed dog meat daily for the 7-month duration of the fair to the delight of the attendance. The publication makes clear however, that in their natural habitat, the Igorots eat dog meat only on occasions, certainly not everyday.

As for the Bronx zoo, it exhibited African pygmies in its ‘primate section’. One of these was the Congolese Ota Benga put on display, with apes, in 1906 (image), barely 40 years after the legal end of slavery in the country. He was 23 at the time weighed 47 kgs and measure 150 cms from head to toe.

African Americans were, understandably, outraged. Their spokesman, Reverend James H. Gordon declared:“...we do not like this exhibition of one of our own race with the monkeys.... We think we are worthy of being considered human beings, with souls.”

But their protests fell on deaf ears. Even the venerable New York Times could not comprehend what the fuss was all about. Its editors wrote: “We do not quite understand all the emotion which others are expressing in the matter....Ota Benga, according to our information, is a normal specimen of his race or tribe...Whether they are ... really closer to the ....apes ...or whether they are viewed as the degenerate descendants of ordinary negroes, they are of equal interest to the student of ethnology, and can be studied with profit.”

Eventually, after being gawked at for 20 days he has released to an orphanage for black Americans. In March 1916, unable to return home because of the War, he shot himself in the heart.

2-China’s soya beans

The most populous country in the world has been pushing its state capitalism progressively and inexorably toward achieving the standard of living of the prosperous societies of the North; through mounting industrial capacity and an expanding middle class keen to consume like their brethren in the west. They are not there yet, but China is already outsourcing its needs in resources with the related nefarious consequences in the growing countries.

Consider for example, China’s shortage of feedstock for its huge population of pigs. Six years ago, an article in the Guardian headed ‘China's Insatiable Appetite for Pork is a Symbol of the Country's Rise. It is also a Danger to the World’. The article explains that the Chinese, avid eaters of pork, consume at present 700 million pigs per year or about 1/3 of a pig per person. In contrast, before 1970, an average Chinese hardly ever managed more than a few pounds yearly. But all those animals need plenty of feedstock, and because China is short on water and suitable land, it has "commissioned" Brazil and Argentina to grow the soya beans for its pigs, in similar circumstances, and outcomes as described in the text.

3-Saga of the coffee capsule.

As an example of unconscionable consumption, prof. Lessenich tells the story of the coffee capsule introduced in the early years of this century. Nespresso, a subsidiary of Nestle, is a major producer of these items promoted on the small screen by a handsome and charismatic George Clooney.

Capsules are made of aluminium, a metal which requires huge amounts of energy with related release of large quantities of CO2. Aluminium is extracted from bauxite mined in locations where soil is rich with it, notably Brazil, the third largest producer after Australia and China. Nespresso alone produced in 1012, 27 billion capsules resulting, in trash heaps estimated altogether at 30 million kilograms. The number of capsules produced more than doubled in 2018.

I must add, for the benefit of my readers, though, that aluminium is eminently recyclable. Capsules as well as other household single use items such as foils and trays can be restored to their former use. Nespresso itself has invested in recycling programs aimed at reusing its capsules. Despite this, however, sources have revealed that as of recently much more used capsules find their way to landfills than to the recycling plants. Nespresso itself has admitted to the Australian Broadcasting Corporation in November 2019 that as much as 71 percent of its used capsules find their way to the waste dumps.

Regardless, the point prof. Lessenich is trying to make that it is almost immoral to mine bauxite and spend energy on things as frivolous as coffee capsules when the liquid can be equally brewed and enjoyed the traditional ways.

Angry Planet

ANGRY PLANET

The Author. MAY, 2024

INTRODUCTION

This narrative is almost exclusively based on the 2020 book ‘The Uninhabitable Earth’ by David Wallace-Wells. All quotes in italic in the text which follows are extracted from it unless otherwise indicated.

The title of the book obviates the need to explain what its theme is. But unlike it, this narrative leaves out the doomsday predictions to concentrate on the science and advanced evidence.

OUR HOME

Cosmologists-(those who study the Universe)-, are convinced of the “…utter improbability of anything as advanced as human intelligence evolving anywhere is a universe as inhospitable to life as this one”. In other words, of all the millions of planets in the universe, only Earth evolved attributes which by coming together made our kind of life possible. That is to say that plants, animals and humans were not predetermined to be, but began to evolve the day when, by chance, the first bacterium came about.

What are those attributes which made possible the appearance, evolution and sustainability of Life. Our planet:

1)-Orbits the Sun entirely inside the ‘Goldilocks Zone’; a thin band with mild enough temperatures, allowing water to exist in liquid form.

2)-Is blanketed by a 100 km thick atmosphere, composed of 78% inert nitrogen, 21% oxygen with the remaining 1% consisting of a mixture of other gases including carbon dioxide. This latter is the product of the combustion-(burning)- of organic matter-(containing carbon).It is ,also, released during breathing. Chemically, it is known by its formula: CO2.

3)-Is rich in ninety naturally-occurring elements such as Aluminum, Carbon, Copper, Gold, Iron, Lead, Mercury, Phosphorus, Silicon, Sulfur, Uranium, etc. to name a few familiar ones. The chemical reactions, i.e. the combination and recombination of these elements, cause the initiation of all that constitutes Life.

4) Is the beneficiary of the immutable laws of physics-(i.e gravity etc.)-, biology-(i.e. DNA etc.)-and the rest.

Finally, Earth is the custodian of very large deposits of fossil fuels. They are the decayed remains-(fossils)- of prehistoric plants and animals buried, for tens of millions of years, under high pressure and temperature. We call them coal, crude oil and the gases associated with the latter such as methane, discussed hereinafter.

Since times immemorial, our globe has benefitted from a favourable, predictable and regular climate. It receives rays of light and heat from the Sun. The former is the white light-(resulting from the mixing of the colours of the rainbow). The latter are the invisible infrared waves.

Having come through the atmosphere, these infrared heat rays, are either absorbed or reflected depending on the surfaces they fall on. Those impinging on the large bodies of water, forests and other ‘dark’ surfaces, are overwhelmingly absorbed-(like sponges imbibing water)-,and result in increase in ambient temperatures, not unlike hot water room radiators.

To the contrary, those which reach the surfaces covered with snow and ice, are reflected -(mirror-like)- back skywards and as such do not affect ambient temperatures. Still on their return journey, some of the rays are captured by the minute amount of CO2 in the atmosphere and prevented from re-entering space. That too, adds temperature to the ambience of the planet. CO2, for the purpose of the subject at hand, is also identified as a greenhouse gas for reasons I explain in the Appendix.

Add to this the seasons determined by the position of the Globe vis-à-vis the Sun, during its yearly orbital journey.

Clearly, then, Earth is a unique and balanced ecosystem “…where plants, animals, and other organisms, as well as weather and landscape, work together to form a bubble of life”, as explained by National Geographic.

Nevertheless and in spite of Nature’s congeniality, it does occasionally inflict unusually devastating and deadly events such as powerful storms, droughts, forest fires and others. They are so rare that climatologists rank them as one in 1,000 or 500 year occurrence.

Author Wallace-Wells considered the meaning of ‘ a one in 500 years’ natural catastrophe. He assumed it happened shortly after Columbus discovered the New World. Thenceforth, the following took place before a repeat of that natural catastrophe: European settlers in the Americas, importation of slaves, French Revolution, American Civil War, colonization of Africa, first World War, emergence of the Soviet Union, second World War, independence of African states, demise of the Soviet colossus, arrival of the twenty first century.

Archeologists inform us that coal was first used in China roundabout 5,000 years ago. But its use, in earnest, as a source of heat started with the first steam powered machinery at the dawn of the industrial age in Britain. The shrewd Chinese were also the first to recognize the value of petroleum two and a half millennia ago. But the first commercial well was drilled in 1859-(160 years ago).

Since then, and particularly during the last5 or 6 decades, man has been burning these fuels like nobody’s business. Hence, by releasing huge quantities of CO2, has increased its concentration in the atmosphere so much that it risks to destabilizing global climate/weather beyond recognition. If so, this is bad news. I hope the experts are mistaken.

In the meantime, let us see in the next few pages the why and how of the changes in natural events as seen by the pundits.

FROM ABOUT TWO CENTURIES AGO

Scientists believe that climate and weather are the most affected by the changes humans are forcing on Earth’s ecosystem. Yet, these two are critical to the survival of terrestrial beings. What is happening is stated by the ‘National Aeronautics and Space Administration’-(NASA): “As Earth's climate changes, it is impacting extreme weather across the planet…heat waves… floods… droughts… wildfires … flooding …are all becoming more frequent and more intense.”

Once upon a time, floods, heat spells, storms and the rest used to be, rightly, attributed to Nature, being largely predictable and seasonal. But, since Nature’s hand has been forced by human meddling, they have become erratic, unseasonal and deadly. According to author Wallace-Wells they can no longer be qualified of ‘natural’.

Worse, scientists suspect that a climatic vicious circle is at play. This latter is defined by the Cambridge Dictionary as “…a continuing [and no-going-back] unpleasant situation, created when  one problem causes another problem that then makes the first problem worse”. The experts call this the ‘positive feedback’ effect by which they mean the non-stop and irreversible worsening of climatic conditions. This will became clearer as we proceed.

Let us, now, contemplate why and how the following elements of the planet ecosystem are affected.

The Arctic is the huge permanently frozen body of water surrounded by parts of Alaska, Canada, Greenland, Norway, Sweden and Russia: 45,000 kms of shore lines. With a surface area of at 14,000,000 sq kms, it is larger than either Canada, or the United States or China.

Although Antarctica, at the other end of the Globe, is of the same size, it differs by being land permanently covered with ice sheets of up to 1,200 m in thickness. Antarctica contains several massive glaciers, or rivers of ice, constantly on the move toward the ocean. Once there, they break off into floating icebergs, some of which are many thousand sq kms in surface area.

Additionally, 80% of Greenland is permanently covered with ice sheets so are parts of Canada and Siberia.

As explained, hereinbefore, both the Arctic and Antarctica as well as Greenland act like mirrors reflecting back the Sun’s heat radiations. By doing so they add nothing to the ambient temperature of their environment.

Equally awesome, if not more, are the nearly 23 million sq. kms of what is known as permafrost in the cold regions of the Globe. According to National Geographic, permafrost is “a permanently frozen layer on or under Earth's surface”. Its thickness varies from as little as 1m to as much as a mind boggling 1000 m. Critically, permafrost is humanity’s-(and all living organisms’)- insurance policy against the uninhabitability of Earth. The layers of permafrost trap and keep in check 1.6 billion of tonnes of methane gas a 34 times more potent as a greenhouse gas than CO2.

As the Planet heats up the ice masses and sheets melt, leaving behind ‘dark’ surfaces to absorb infrared radiations instead of reflecting them. Additionally, they melts the permafrost at the risk of letting the methane gas escape and join the CO2 in the atmosphere.

From all this it is easy to see how a vicious circle-(positive feedback)- has been started. The added heat absorbed by the dark areas resulting from ice melting and the methane thrown up by the thawing permafrost intensify the heating of the Planet’s envelope, hence leading, in turn, to more melting and more release of methane and so on. More. The further warming threatens the health of oceans and forests as we shall see hereinunder.

According to author Wallace-Wells, Antarctica has lost the equivalent of 33,800 sq kms-( more than the area of Belgium)- of ice sheet since the 1950’s. In 2018, researchers found that the rate of melting in the Antarctic was much faster than is ‘normal’ and anticipated. Indeed, between 2012 and 2017, they calculated that the melting added 197 billion cum of water to the Atlantic Ocean, raising its level. At the other extremity of the Globe scientists found that the Arctic Ocean, has so many clear patches, where year round ice used to be, that they hesitate to qualify it of arctic meaning frigid.

Seventy one percent of Earth surface is water. Oceans and seas

constitute more than 99.5% of it. The balance is fresh water essential to all living organisms.

Oceans and seas are heat absorbers and play a large role in affecting temperatures and climates around the Globe through their currents such as the Gulf Stream in the Atlantic Ocean transporting warmth to western Europe from the Gulf of Mexico. They, also, swallow a certain quantity of excess CO2. Their waters contain oxygen through the photosynthesis activity of marine plants. It allows undersea life to prosper and provide sustenance to a large portion of humanity.

Oceans, too, constitute the environment in which coral reefs thrive. They are calcium carbonate-(limestone or chalk)- structures. Far from being lifeless, coral reefs are very much living organisms. They “support as much as a quarter of all marine life and supply food and income for half a billion people”. Healthy reefs, also constitute a barrier against storm surges-(unusually high waves over and above anticipated tides). The most extensive and famous of them all is the ‘Great Barrier Reef’ in Australia.

In the last few decades oceans and seas have been absorbing more and more of the excess heat generated by humans. Concurrently, they have taken in so much CO2 over and above what is natural and normal that their waters have acidified. This is bad news because marine animal and vegetal lives cannot survive in acidic water. Indeed, a recent study has found that marine life in a whopping 87 percent of the world oceans has been adversely affected.

With the loss of photosynthesizing plants, dissolved oxygen has dropped to such an extent that in the past five decades “the amount of ocean water with no oxygen at all has quadrupled globally”. It goes without saying that without oxygen no life can endure.

Hotter oceans are the reason for the beaching-(turning white and dying)-of coral reefs, including the uniquely impressive Great Barrier Reef.

We turn now, once again to that vicious circle effect. This time, it is initiated by dying oceans. Warmer water loses its ability to soak up heat and CO2. The result is additional warming, further affecting oceans which react even more vigourously in the bad direction, and so on. But the excess heat rejected by the ocean will, also, increase the melting of ice and destruction more parts of the permafrost. Additionally, it will make forest fires more plausible.

Forests and trees

The usual saying in ecological discussions is that forests are the lungs of the Planet. Indeed, they are an important component of what has made Earth uniquely friendly to Life. Through photosynthesis, trees soak up great amounts of CO2 and produce life-giving Oxygen. This is even truer of the tropical rainforests of the world, so named because “…of [their] tall…trees and a high amount of rainfall”, according to ‘National Geographic’. As for earth.com “…Rainforests lock up vast amounts of carbon, moderate local temperature, and influence rainfall and weather patterns at regional and planetary scales….”.

In 2017, following severe droughts, the Amazon rainforest suffered about 100,000 wildfires which, naturally, caused the release of large quantities of CO2 to the atmosphere. Additionally this rainforest is the victim of deforestation meaning the clearing of trees to make room for agriculture or animal grazing. In both instances, its capacity to synthesize captured CO2 into oxygen, proportionate to the number of trees burnt or cut, is lessened.

From the Amazon we move north to California. The autumn of 2017 which is normally the beginning of the rainy season, was replaced by wildfires that scorched over 1,000 sq.km and caused loss of property and the evacuation of more than 100,000 residents . In 2018, the area eaten by flames came to nearly 2,600 sq. km with smoke reaching far and wide. Since the 1970’s, the American wild fire season “has already grown by two and a half months…”

Forest fires did not spare the frigid and icy far north of the Globe. In Greenland, in 2017, they “appeared to burn ten times more area than in 2014”, and in Sweden in 2018, “forests in the Arctic Circle went up in flames”. The added problem in these instances is the soot and ash that settle on the icy ground, darkening its surface and turning it from an inoffensive heat reflector to a Globe-warming absorber.

As of 2020 an estimated half a million people globally have lost their lives to forest fires. More. The smoke from these travel long distances and result in the need of hospital care in far off places.

For the third and last time I explain how forest fires fit in with the vicious circle. A hotter planet reduce humidity and make trees more amenable to burn. As they do so CO2 is released and with the trees dead, a commensurate volume photosynthesis is lost. The net result is more greenhouse gas in the atmosphere, causing bigger and more frequent wildfires and so on and on until, presumably, there are no more forests to burn. Again additional warming that forests contribute do does not return to bite them harder ,alone, but harms both the frozen areas and the oceans in the ways we have covered hereinabove.

Tropical cyclones and tornadoes.

Tropical cyclones, called hurricanes in the Atlantic region and typhoons in Asia are caused by more than one factors among them warm sea waters-(27 deg C and above). According to the UK’s ‘Met Office’ they “are important on Earth for transferring heat and energy between the equator and the poles”. And yet they “are one of the most dangerous natural hazards to people”.

As for tornadoes “…nature’s most violent storms….” in the words of the ‘National Weather Service’, with wind speeds up to 480 km/hr they arise from thunderstorms, themselves the products of hot humid air. Although tornadoes happen here and there, the USA with its ‘Tornado Alley’ is particularly susceptible to them.

This savagery and fierceness are no more than natural events, as pointed out earlier. If, therefore, human meddling is a cause for more often and powerful occurrence of these, as many scientists think, then humanity is in great danger.

The ‘European Academies Science Advisory’ has calculated that “…[tropical] storms have doubled since 1980”.Globally, there has already been an increase of 25 to 30 percent the number of tropical cyclones with torrential flood-causing rains and wind speeds in excess of 210 km/hr.

Consider, for instance the hurricane that struck the city of Houston in the summer of 2017.The amount and intensity of rainfall it unleashed was ranked by climatologists to have been a storm of 500,000 years frequency. And yet it was the third to hit the city in as many years.

Tornadoes’ severity and frequency are on the rise, too. During the last three decades their deadly impact reached regions hitherto immune to them, extending ‘Tornado Alley’ by 800 km.

We have already said that 71% of Earth surface is water. Of that total ‘National Geographic’ has calculated that only 7/100,000th of it is freshwater, the vast majority of which is used for irrigation and in industry. A significant amount of that available water comes from the great rivers and streams which in turn depend on the seasonal and methodical thawing of the snow and ice at high altitudes.

There should be no need for me to elaborate that heating of the planet dries up water sources. These, in turn can lead to dire consequences including armed conflict for accessibility to the diminishing availability of the precious liquid. ‘Pacific Institute’ scientist Peter Gleik (DOB: 1956) has prepared lists of conflicts caused by water scarcity from 1900 on. His conclusion was that “If climate change is a shark, the water resources are the teeth”

The frequency of heavy flooding of urban areas, and countryside has, in the four decades between 1980 and 2020 “quadrupled…and doubled since just 2004” according to ‘European Academies Science Advisory Council’. During that time span repeated torrential rains have caused rivers and streams to overtop their banks to an extent never known before.

Flooding in Bangladesh in 2017 submerged more than 65% of the country, and disrupted the lives, according to estimates of the UN’s secretary general, of 41,000,000 people. It also impacted the living conditions of the 700,000 wretched Rohingya refugees escaping Myanmar and living in insalubrious camps.

When fields are not flooded they are subjected to severe droughts. Among others there is the example of Syria which went through a five year long drought resulting in crop failures and may have contributed to the ignition of the more than a decade long civil war with its calamitous results.

Another is the ‘millennium drought’ visited upon Australia between 1997 and 2009, causing the loss of 99 and 84% rice and cotton crops respectively. Understandably rivers and lakes “shriveled up and wetlands turned acidic”.

One temptation at times like these is the ill-advised digging of wells into non-renewable aquifers which have taken millions of years to form. Inevitably, farmers go deeper and deeper util the wells dry up.

According to author Wallace-Wells the planet has experienced since 1980 “a fiftyfold increase in the number of heatwaves…”. For example, in 2010, Moscow witnessed unusual hot days during which as many as 700 of its citizens died daily from heat exhaustion. In 2018 a heat wave resulted in a temperature of nearly 50 deg Celsius, in Muscat. But it was not alone. Never seen ambient temperatures swept from Canada, across Europe to parts of Russia.

Another source of temperature rises is the release at night of heat absorbed during the day by concrete, asphalt etc. in cities and urban agglomerations. This can be substantial and may cause heat stresses and deaths. Clearly with more frequent and severe heat waves, this retransmission will only aggravate the situation. Even more so with the expansion of built up areas as more and more people elect to urbanize.

APPENDIX

GREEN HOUSE ANALOGY

Greenhouses are constructions for the growing of plant which require warmth in cold environments. Their roofs are made of glass or other transparent material-(image below).

As the heat from the Sun enters the building through the roof, it is absorbed by its contents and increase the ambient temperature. But some rays are reflected, but cannot exit the glass roof because- of changed physical characteristics-(beyond the scope of this narrative to explain)- caused by the passage through the greenhouse. They are thus trapped and raise the temperature of the surroundings further.

Carbon dioxide and methane gas in the atmosphere are analogous to the glass roof of the garden version. Hence their qualification of greenhouse gases.

Hunger Bread

HUNGER BREAD APRIL 2016

REVISED AND ABRIDGED DECEMBER, 2016

Chapter illustration

“Taken in Karamoja district, Uganda in April 1980, the contrasting hands of a starving boy and a missionary spoke louder than any world leader and any news story about the famine in Uganda”.

Final proof reading 07.12.2016.

“THE history of humanity is the history of hunger” wrote Mark Joseph Stern in April 2014. Irish economics professor Cormac O’ Grada agrees and follows up with the interesting revelation that “throughout history the poor and the landless have protested and resisted at the approach of famines, which they considered to be caused by humans. The conviction that a more caring elite had the power and a less rapacious trading class had the resources to mitigate—if not eradicate—disaster was usually present”.

Nowadays hunger and famines continue to occur notably in Africa and among all those suffering wars, revolutions and instabilities. A recent report by the WFP (UN’s World Food Program) explains why. First, are the historical natural causes such as drought, flooding, cold weather, plant disease and attacks by locusts. Second are the equally historical human-initiated causes as ravages of wars, revolutions and other instabilities. Third are the rather more recent economic causes resulting from insufficient investment in agriculture by the governments of developing countries to unstable markets and the poverty trap.(By unstable markets and poverty trap, the report means situations resulting in the poor no longer able to buy nutritious food subsisting, instead, on cheap marginal produce, consequently, affecting their health and making them, with time even less capable of earning good incomes). And expectedly the report also notes the detrimental effects of man-made climate change, the related salinization and desertification of hitherto fertile lands and the erosion of forest soils due to deforestation.

All these, notwithstanding, the report further declares: “The world produces enough to feed the entire global population of 7 billion people. And yet, one person in eight on the planet goes to bed hungry each night”. Further, it reveals that one third of total quantity of food produced annually, or 1.3 billion tons are wasted. (The production of that wasted food has “guzzle[d] up a volume of water equivalent to the annual flow of Russia's Volga River [and has added] 3.3 billion tonnes of greenhouse gases to the atmosphere…”).

What happens to people when they starve? In the absence of nutrition, body metabolism, the chemical process that sustains life, feeds on the fats and other body building blocks leading to weakness followed by immobility and ultimately death. All accompanied by immense pain. It is also obvious that with no sustaining food, the body’s immunity is reduced or lost, causing people to die from any number of otherwise ‘safe’ maladies. Expectedly, this being the case, a breakdown in social order ensues. In their desperate search for food, men, women and children of all ages no longer abide by any accepted norms or customs of communal behavior. Begging and scavenging by skeletal people prevail; cats, dogs and rats are consumed. And in their final and utter despair those still holding on, feed on the ones who have given up; to the absolute extreme of the killing and eating by the strong of the weak even within nuclear families.

‘The year without a summer’.

Eighteen sixteen was ‘the year without a summer’ for Europe and eastern North America, thanks to Mount Tambora in Indonesia. Over a four month period, starting in April 1815 it erupted and spewed as much as 150 cubic kms of material. Many volcanologists regard this eruption as the most destructive volcanic activity in recorded history. The lighter material ascended high into the atmosphere and once there blocked sunlight and caused an average global temperature reduction of 3 deg C. Ultimately, when Europe and the eastern parts of North America became affected, they witnessed snow and frost, above normal precipitations and unending days of gloomy skies in the months of June, July and August: never ever reported phenomena. Naturally, crops failed, prices of scarce foodstuffs shot up beyond the means of millions with “some poorer Americans reduced to eating hedgehogs and scrounging for wild turnips”. There were no doubt others, there and in Europe, who starved to death or, with body immunity down from malnutrition, succumbed to typhus (3) and other diseases.

The ‘Great Hunger’.

Ireland, like the rest of Europe and, indeed, the rest of the world has known recurring famines. But historically the focus has been on the ‘Great Potato Famine’ of 1846-1852, which although triggered by a natural occurrence, was exacerbated by the inaction of those who, had they wanted to, could have greatly mitigated its severity.

By the 1700s, the potato had become the staple food in Ireland. (It was not known in Europe. Discovered in the New World, it was first brought over by in the second half of the 16th century).The potato was an easy plant to grow and well suited to the soils of Ireland. So much so, that a majority of the population, in particular the rural one, depended for its sustenance exclusively on that vegetable. Thus, when in the second half of the 1840s the potato crop began to fail and continued to do so over successive years, because of a disease that destroys “both the leaves and the edible roots” , catastrophe was inevitable. It lasted nearly five years.

At that time, Ireland was ruled by the British government in London. From the sources consulted, notably retired history professor, James S. Donnelly , who in a ‘BBC History’ summary of his 2002 book ‘The Great Irish Potato Famine’ maintains that the tragic consequences of the famine could have been lessened had those with influence and power in Britain not hampered relief efforts in the name of laissez-faire economics accentuated by prejudices and outright callousness. (Laissez-faire economics is “a system or point of view that opposes regulation or interference by the government in economic affairs beyond the minimum necessary to allow the free enterprise system to operate according to its own laws”).

To begin with, the famine raging in Catholic Ireland was thought of by the Protestant upper and middle classes in Britain as an act of the Providence. In effect this meant that the government, in London, was prohibited from interfering with free market and free trade. Thus, it allowed the export of Irish grain to continue even though little food was available in the country. The selling of produce abroad was also, clearly, an added reason for the rise in prices to levels well beyond the means of most people.

Then there were British prejudices towards the Irish, standing in the way of meaningful hunger relief. The former saw in the latter “serious defects in the Irish 'national character'-disorder or violence, filth, laziness, and worst of all, a lack of self-reliance” and the Irish “had to be taught to stand on their own feet and to unlearn their dependence on government”. These oft-repeated bad blood emanating from eminent persons led to the notions that the Catholic Irish were “less than fully human”, hence, not deserving any help.

It is generally accepted that ultimately one million Irish men, women and children died as a direct result of starvation and accompanying diseases. Another two million emigrated mainly to the United States of America. A salient point is that the population of Ireland continued to decline. So much so that at independence in 1921 it was barely half of what it had been before the catastrophe in early 1840s.

In 1847, ‘The Illustrated London News’, commissioned an artist living in Ireland to tour the country and report on what he saw. Here are some excerpts from the reports he sent back to London: “…I saw the dying, the living, and the dead, lying indiscriminately upon the same floor…not a single house out of 500 could boast of being free from death and fever… In the street... three to five hundred women, with money in their hands, were seeking to buy food…This food, it appeared, was being doled out in miserable quantities, at ‘famine prices’... I certainly saw[in one location] from 150 to 180 funerals of victims to the want of food…so hardened are the men regularly employed in the removal of the dead from the workhouse, that I saw one of them, with four coffins in a car, driving to the churchyard, sitting upon one of the said coffins, and smoking with much apparent enjoyment”

‘A land of aching hearts’.

‘A Land of Aching Hearts’ is the title of a 2014 book by Leila Tarazi Fawaz (professor of Lebanese and Eastern Mediterranean Studies at Tufts University), about the anxieties, suffering and starvation of the populations of Greater Syria ( today’s Syria, Lebanon, Jordan, Palestine) as well as those of Turkey, Iraq and Egypt during the First World War of 1914-1918.

That famine had many causes. To begin with, was the sea blockade of the Ottoman Empire by the navies of its adversaries so that grain imports were no longer possible. With the feeding of soldiers as a priority, Ottoman authorities stockpiled foodstuffs to the detriment of civilian populations. Moreover, fearful of an enemy landing, the military governor Jamal Pasha ordered the burning of grain in storages at risk. Lastly: :“Monopoly and greed made things even more precarious -- as the rare available supplies became concentrated in the hands of few greedy merchants-- and contributed heavily to the rising toll of famine” according to contemporaneous documents in the archives of the Syrian Protestant College (presently, the American University of Beirut)

As if all this was not enough, 1915 was the ‘Year of the locust’. Swarms of grasshoppers of “biblical proportions” mercilessly devoured what was left of crops from Egypt and Sudan where “they razed the land like an impenetrable sandstorm to which all resistance seemed futile” to Palestine, Syria, Lebanon and Turkey. When they reached over Beirut and the rest of Lebanon, “the density of the locust was so extreme in April 1916 that it even eclipsed the sun…When locusts attacked their next target- the fertile Biqa’ valley- they were described as covering the ground to the depth of an arm’s length”. According to a diary, kept at the time, the Ottoman authorities instructed each household to capture or kill two to four ‘oqqa’(over 5 kgs) of locust daily.

Inevitably, with so much scarcity and manipulation, foodstuff prices increased astronomically (by 1,350% or 13.5 times) so that only the very rich or those with access to powerful and influential people could eat. And some women took up prostitution to feed themselves and their families, at a time when the norms of behavior in civilized society were ignored as always happen at times of severe general hardship.

All the great cities of the Empire: Istanbul, Cairo, Aleppo, Damascus and Beirut witnessed people in their streets, dead or dying of hunger . Those still alive scavenged in garbage and otherwise ate anything they could lay their hands on including their pets (healthy or sick regardless); they sucked the marrow in the bones of dead animals and even searched for undigested grain in the excrement of horses and donkeys near flour mills .

In the towns and villages of Mount Lebanon, the miseries, indignities and humiliations of hunger were just as severe. The German garrison in the town of Ryaq reported that, once, they had discarded a diseased horse that even “foxes and wolves would not come near”; yet it was feasted upon by a horde of people who naturally died of poisoning shortly afterward. In the Beqaa valley “dogs and humans competed over the flesh and bones of camel corpses whether or not the camels had succumbed to disease”.

In the end, the already quoted AUB archives report that 20 to 30 percent of the population of Mount Lebanon perished from starvation and the always-accompanying diseases such as typhus, malaria and smallpox.

Russia and its successor the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics till 1991, has been throughout the tormented history of its people, susceptible to periods of drought and other detrimental natural phenomena leading to failed crops and the cruel consequences on man and beast. Particularly, there were the three abominable starvations of 1891-1892, during the reign of tsar Alexander III; of 1921-1923, on the watch of Vladimir Ilyich Ulyanov (Lenin) and of 1932-1933 during the time of Joseph (Vissarionovich) Stalin.

The famine of 1891-1892 was caused by natural circumstances. It hit only a part of Russia, affecting a population of between fourteen to twenty million. There was, thus, enough grain elsewhere in the Tsar’s realm to mitigate the crisis. But, incompetence and callousness on the part of the Tsar’s bureaucrats, meant that the catastrophe was virtually ignored in the capital of Saint Petersburg . In consequence, the export of grain proceeded unabated as well as the collection of taxes from impoverished peasants who, with no longer any money from the sale of produce, had their animals confiscated by the tax collectors, instead. In the circumstances the famished peasants were reduced to eating ‘hunger bread’ made “from weeds, chopped straw, cockle, tree bark, and sometimes, sand”.

When, eventually, the tsarist government organized a relief effort, it was a case of too little, too late. Contemporaneously, the celebrated novelist Count Leo Tolstoy (1828-1910) commented that “the people were starving because the rich ate too much… that large quantities of grain were either stolen or allowed to spoil, thus wasting precious food and money”. And a 1994 paper by David Lilly on the subject affirms that the 1891-1892 famine highlighted the remoteness, detachment and unconcern of the privileged ruling classes and elites in St Petersburg from/toward the deprived and backward people elsewhere in Russia, who were subsisting under archaic medieval political and social systems.

Upon taking power in 1918, Lenin, the first leader of the USSR came up with what was called ‘War Communism’ economic policy which, among others, proclaimed the requisitioning from the peasants of all surplus agricultural produce at nominal fixed prices.

So when crops failed in 1921 in the Volga region, following an unprecedented drought, the ensuing food shortage was much exacerbated by the rapaciousness of government’s agents. They went about their business of requisitioning grain with zeal and in competition with one another, aiming at exceeding their assigned quota in order to qualify for the ‘special thanks’ of the Central Committee of the Communist Party in Moscow. According to one source, they did not stop at anything: “It was a real orgy. The whole area at the time of the requisition looked like a conquered country delivered as booty to the victorious soldiers” What they left behind was barely enough for the locals to subsist “on starvation rations”.

Concurrently, the Soviet Republic of the Ukraine was also facing food shortages as severe as those in the Volga region. But the leaders of the USSR, always looked upon that republic as the granary of the nation. So much so, that a telegram from Lenin in 1918 called for “grain, grain, grain! and ordered that it be sent every day to the Soviet[Republic of ] Russia”. Consequently, in compliance with this order, some 1,127 trainloads of foodstuff were taken out of the Ukraine to the Volga region and other locations, from late 1921 to August 1922.

Dr Roman Serbyn, in 1988 professor of Russian and East European history at the University of Quebec in Montreal, accused the Soviet authorities of malevolence towards the Ukraine. According to him they aimed at achieving three objectives: first, feeding Russia despite the starving millions of Ukrainians; second, selling grain abroad for precious hard currency and lastly and most significantly, weakening the Ukrainian nationalistic opposition and forcing it to acquiesce to Russian authority, concluding with: “Bullets can miss their target; famines: never”.

Ultimately the famine of 1921-1923 caused the death of between 2.5 to 5 million men women and children. According to a captain Quisling, on an American relief mission in early 1922: “….straw of roofs was being eaten, all dogs, cats and crows had already been eaten, and even the leather of harnesses and wood from furniture being consumed” .He also reported incidents of persons eating already dead animals and occurrences of cannibalism.

For Ukrainians, the 1920s famine pales in comparison with the 1932-1933 one they have since called ‘Holodomor’ or literally: death by hunger. From almost all accounts, this one was man-made and the man making it was Stalin. Even more, some consider it as genocide pure and simple.

Holodomor resulted from Stalin’s policy of collectivization meaning forcing peasants to give up their individual lots by joining large collective farms. Soviet leadership saw in this policy a great improvement in agricultural techniques and more efficient utilization of farm machinery, all leading to more and better crops for export against the hard currency needed for Stalin’s top priority: turning the USSR into a global industrial power.

But for collectivization to work, the cooperation of those tilling the land is clearly essential. This, however, was not forthcoming and peasants balked at being coerced into participation in the scheme. So much so, that many farmers, before joining their respective communal farms, destroyed their equipment and slaughtered their livestock. Unsurprisingly, then, without human cooperation, functioning machinery and healthy animals, food production dropped, and with the government proceeding, regardless, with its export of foodstuff, famine conditions prevailed from 1932.

As the most productive and thus the most exploited of the Soviet republics, the Ukraine was again faced with starvation for the second time in one decade. In consequence, during 1932 and 1933, it lost 3 to 7 million of its people to starvation and disease out of a population of around 30 million. Moreover, to some writers, Holodomor was an added bonus to Stalin who, according to them, saw in it an occasion to make the troublesome, nationalistic Ukrainians kneel. This is certainly the opinion of the UN’s United Human Rights Council: “The Ukrainian Famine was dreadful famine premeditated by the Soviet Union, headed by Joseph [Stalin, against] the Ukrainian people”.

Let’s end this story with this passage from historian Timothy Snyder’s book ‘The Bloodlands’: “Survival was a moral as well as a physical struggle. A woman doctor wrote to a friend in June 1933 that she had not yet become a cannibal, but was ‘not sure that I shall not be one by the time my letter reaches you’ The good people died first. Those who refused to steal or to prostitute themselves died. Those who gave food to others died. Those who refused to eat corpses died. Those who refused to kill their fellow man died. Parents who resisted cannibalism died before their children did”.

‘Why hasn’t Gandhi died yet?’

India the world’s second most populated country depends entirely on the seasonal Monsoon rains to feed its people. A recent article in the Economist under the heading ‘If India’s Monsoon Fails’ had this to say: “Nothing in India is as terrifying as the thought that the monsoon might not come….. A seriously late monsoon, or a patchy one which releases water only in some places, an unpredictable or scanty one, all can be devastating. An uneven monsoon, which unloads its waters in a few, overwhelming torrents, followed by long patches of dryness, can destroy the fortunes of farmers and others in days…”. Given the capriciousness of climate, no wonder India has known devastating famines throughout its long history.

A great many of them occurred during the British colonial period, first from 1759 under the ‘reign’ the East India Company (EIC) whose only raison d’etre was to make handsome profits for its shareholders in Britain by whatever means regardless of morality. According to author William Dalrymple quoted in march 2015 in the Guardian: “With no stake in the just governance of the region, or its long-term wellbeing, the company’s rule quickly turned into the straight forward pillage of Bengal, and the rapid transfer westwards of its wealth”. Second, India became a British ‘Crown’ possession from 1858 till its independence in 1947. Once more, during this 90-year period, the interests of the colonizers came first, those of the Indians far in second place. More to the point, however, again quoting author Dalrymple: “During famines colonial rulers continued to export grain from starving India…”

Let us look first at the 1763-1773 Great Famine in the province of the Bengal, in the eastern part of India. When it ended in 1773, a third of the Bengali population of 30 million, had died either from starvation or diseases resulting from it. Horrendous accounts of humiliation, suffering and death were told such as this one by an anonymous employee of the EIC at its headquarters in Calcutta “….A hundred men were employed by the Company to carry the dead and throw them into the river Ganges……One could not pass along the streets without seeing multitudes in their last agonies … the child feeding on its dead parent, the mother on her child” . Some people sold their children, still others tried to escape starvation by selling themselves into servitude in the households of Europeans and better off Indians; and, no doubt, into prostitution.

Despite the setting in of hard times in the Bengal, the EIC did not let up on its tax collection from peasants. It also continued forcing them to grow cash crops such as high market value opium poppies and indigo intended for export rather than food crops that would have helped at times of scarcity.

With the vile East India Company gone, Indians must have presaged better years under the British Crown. Sadly, as far as dying from starvation was concerned, it was to continue unabated during the subsequent 90 years of British rule.

To start with, the failed crops occurred in one region or another but never over the whole of the vast Indian Subcontinent. It was, hence, always possible to alleviate the food crisis in one region by the transfer of surplus food from another had the colonial bureaucracy put its mind seriously to it. But with the economic policies tailored to the exigencies of the merchants, industrialists and entrepreneurs back in Britain, nothing was allowed to interfere with or hinder free trade practices. Thus, the export of large quantities of rice continued regardless, along with opium for sale to China and tonnes of jute, indigo and cotton as raw material for the factories in England.

Overall, some 60 million perished from starvation during the 90 colonial years. Those who survived the famines succumbed, in their weakened conditions, to cholera, malaria, typhus etc. To Florence Nightingale, the celebrated British nurse, the famines in India in the colonial period were not grain famines because they “were not caused by the lack of food in a particular geographical area”. Instead they were of the “Money famine [type, which] is an artificial food scarcity which was formulated by the drainage of money from the peasant to the British government”. She was not the only one to be outraged. From America came the remark of Henry Carey (1793-1879), the chief economic advisor to Abraham Lincoln (1820-1865) : “Queen Victoria, Empress of India, ruled over a people broken by poverty, inhumane treatment, famines, and despair”.

The last famine under British rule occurred in 1943. This was the third year of World war II (1939-1945) in which the British Empire along with its ally the United States of America were at war against Germany, Italy and Japan. During the span of that conflict India contributed 2.5 million combatants to the imperial forces as it had done some 25 years earlier during World War I (1914-1918), with 1.3 million combatants. Yet, despite these soldiers’ sacrifices and their determining contribution to victory in both instances, Britain leader Winston Churchill (1874-1965) disliked Indians. On one occasion in 1942, reacting to the ‘Quit India’ movement inspired by the Mahatma Gandhi , he commented to his Foreign Secretary: “I hate Indians. They are a beastly people with a beastly religion”. And when the onset of the famine was reported to him, he derided the Indians who “bred like rabbits” and wanted to know, if people were starving, “Why hasn’t Gandhi died yet?”

There were three causes for that famine. First was the occupation of Burma (Myanmar today) by the Japanese in 1942, thus putting an end to rice exports to India, second, a destructive cyclone hit the Bengal in the wrong place at the wrong time causing great damage to crops, in particular rice. The third cause is the subject of an acclaimed 2010 book by Madhusree Mukherjee: ‘Churchill Secret War: The British Empire and the Ravaging of India during World war II’.

Ms Mukherjee qualifies the famine as man-made or more to the point, as Churchill-made. She blames his racism for the absence of compassion towards the Indian subjects of his beloved empire. She tells of the continued exports of food from India during that period, of the Bengalis forced to grow jute for sandbags, in lieu of rice, of the diversion of India bound shiploads of food from Australia, and of the destruction of food stocks to deny them to the Japanese in case they invaded from Burma. And more.

After all was said and done, the 1943 Bengal famine left some 3 million victims. “Parents dumped their starving children into rivers and wells. Many took their lives by throwing themselves in front of trains. Starving people begged for the starchy water in which rice had been boiled…Dogs and jackals feasted on piles of dead bodies in Bengal's villages. The ones who got away were….women who turned to prostitution to feed their families. Mothers had turned into murderers, village belles into whores, fathers into traffickers of daughters”.

The Great Sparrow Campaign.

Determined that grain and steel shall be the two pillars of modern China, Mao Zedong (1893-1976) and others in the communist leadership produced, a five-year plan for the period 1958-1963 which was named: the ‘Great Leap Forward’. According to Mao, the implementation of the Plan should propel China within 15 years into the ranks of advanced industrial nations, while simultaneously producing enough food for its people and a surplus for sale abroad against the purchase of industrial machinery etc.

To achieve the targets set by the Great Leap Forward, it was envisaged to establish, throughout China, small and large communes “in which people live together and share possessions and responsibilities...[and in which individuals] gave up their ownership of tools, animals etc so that everything was owned by the commune. People now worked for the commune and not for themselves”. Eventually, by the end of 1958, 700 million Chinese lived and worked in 26,578 communes.

As is usually the case anywhere in similar circumstances, people did not cooperate voluntarily with the imposition of the Plan; they had to be ‘persuaded’. Clearly, that was foreseen by the authorities since “The archives show that coercion, terror and violence were the foundation of the Great Leap Forward”. As for those who were suspected of dragging their feet, they had their food rations withheld in punishment. Then there were those too weak or too sick to work; they were simply deprived of food altogether: “It hasten [ed] their death”.

The Great Leap Forward turned into an agrarian fiasco of catastrophic proportions. The writings of those who delved into this historical event agree on the following causes: 1-“The utopian naivety of [Mao Zedong]. 2-Mao’s imposed planting strategies turned into “an unmitigated disaster”. 3-The diversion of agricultural labourers to rudimentary industrial works led to shortages in farm labour to work the land. 4-Local commissars greatly exaggerated harvests, deliberately some write, in order to be in the good favours of their bosses in the central government. The unfortunate outcome was that the government collected much larger quantities of produce to feed the cities and for sale abroad, leaving rural citizens with little or no food. 5-In 1959 the Yellow River flooded in East China, killing an estimated 2 million people either by drowning or from starvation. But one author, who had access to records on that period, argues that the flooding was not due to unusual weather but “to massive, poorly planned and poorly executed irrigation works which were part of the Great Leap Forward”. 6-Northern China was hit by a drought which affected 60 percent of its arable land. 7-The Great Sparrow Campaign. Mao had been advised that sparrows eat grain seeds. In line with his dedication to the success of the Plan he logically ordered the eradication of sparrows from the land. Unfortunately, he did not know nor did his advisers, that sparrows eat much more insects, notably locusts, than they do seeds. And so, with no more sparrows to worry about, waves of locusts feasted on the harvests leaving humans even less crop to gather. The Sparrow eradication was part of a broader campaign also targeting rats, flies and mosquitoes.

The combination of these causes resulted in the greatest of the Great Famines of the twentieth century. By 1961, the third year of the Plan 30, some say 45, million people had starved to death.

Inevitably, when hunger and starvation strike, social order breaks down to be replaced by amorality, chaos, and criminality. Soldiers hearing of their parents’ hardships became uncontrollable. Militia men seized grain, beat villagers and raped their women. Families stopped burying their dead in order to continue receiving their rations: they kept the corpses covered in bed until eaten by rats. And worst of all, people became cannibals fighting over corpses that were subsequently consumed; A teenage orphan fed on the body of her little brother whom she had killed beforehand.

Lastly, those who investigated and wrote about this great famine state that they have located in the archives evidence that the leadership, were aware of the happenings in rural areas. Indeed, Mao himself is on record saying in one meeting: “To distribute resources evenly will only ruin the Great Leap Forward”; and again in a later one: “When there is not enough to eat, people starve to death. It is better to let half the people die so that others can eat their fill”.

‘Arduous March’.

‘Arduous March’ was a metaphor coined by the communist regime of Kim Jong Il (1941-2011) of North Korea to refer to the famine of 1994-2000.

In an article dated 17th April 1997, the Economist quotes visitors as saying that what they saw in the country was ‘famine in slow motion’ on account of: “Everybody seems to be getting something to eat, but rations have been reduced to starvation levels over a long period of time and the [humanitarian] agencies have given warning that millions are now at risk of malnutrition and death”. By then, 1996-1997, North Koreans were subsisting on a single bowl of rice or corn a day, “supplemented by grass, dried leaves or roots” .

Why was there starvation in North Korea in 1996-1997? To begin with, the wrath of nature: heavy flooding in 1995 and again in 1996. Then, bad agricultural policies by the government. Soviet style collectivization of farms and inefficient distribution; shortage of fuel and farm machineries and last but not least the interruption in the early 1990s of the Russian and Chinese fuel and food aid. And to top it all: uninterrupted costly militarization going ahead unabated despite of all.

According to Rhoda E. Howard-Hassmann, Canada Research Chair in International Human Rights at Wilfrid Laurier University: “..often parents and grandparents denied themselves food so that children could eat; sometimes entire families killed themselves. Married women prostituted themselves in order to obtain money to buy food for their children… and the WFP [the UN’s World Food Programme] requested the right to inspect farmers’ markets where it was reported that ‘special meat’ on offer was actually human flesh”.

She considers that this is a case of state-induced famine or ‘famino genesis’. She has estimated the total number of North Koreans who starved to death from 1994 to 2000 at 700,000 to 1.1 million in a population of nearly 22 million. Even more significant is her reporting of the 1998 findings of the FAO (Food and Agriculture Organization),WFP and the European Union: 60 percent of North Korean children were stunted while 50 percent were malnourished.

And she continues: “By 2008, the country was “once again on the brink of starvation, with families eating grass, tree bark, and poisonous mushrooms that could cause death by diarrhea in young children. Matters were made worse by periodic campaigns to boost industrial production, which removed farmers from their fields; ‘We are being led to our deaths’ said one such farmer’ ”.

There were reports that children desperate for food ate dead dogs and rotten food; even the normally pampered military suffered from malnutrition and an entire prison population of 200,000 went systematically without food.

A godforsaken continent

South of the North African Sahara Desert is the savanna strip (“a flat grassland sometimes with scattered trees”), called ‘Sahel’. The people of that region, until 50 to 60 years ago, could count on four predetermined months of rainfall in a year, grew crops in certain areas and benefitted from enough pasture lands to raise cattle, sheep, oxen and camels. But roundabout the 1960s desertification started to set in as Sahelians, in their quest to feed and accommodate their increasing number, cut trees and shrubs to make room for additional planting and firewood. This led to soil erosion as rains washed away the thin topsoil thus allowing the gradual encroachment of the Sahara Desert. The consequences of all this are succinctly stated in one entry in the Encyclopedia Britannica as: “The fragile nature of agriculture and pastoralism in the Sahel was strikingly demonstrated in the early 1970s, when a long period of drought, beginning in 1968, led to the virtual extinction of the crops there and the loss of 50 to 70 percent of the cattle. In 1972 there was practically no rain at all, and by 1973 sections of the Sahara had advanced southward up to (). The loss of human life by starvation and disease was estimated in 1973 at 100,000. Severe drought and famine again afflicted the Sahel in 1983–85, and desertification progressed despite some government reforestation programs. The Sahel continued to expand southward into neighbouring savannas, with the Sahara following in its wake”.

‘Famine, a Short History’, a 2009 book by Irish economics professor Cormac O’ Grada, contends that the arrival of the European colonists in late 1800s and their ‘pacification’ of Africa “was almost certainly to increase famine mortality”. As,for example, during the First World War (1914-1918) when the situation was aggravated by exactions made necessary by the conflict. Or, the famine, the locals call ‘Mtunya’, which occurred between 1917 and 1920, in one region of Tanzania and wiped out 30,000 out of a total of 150,000 natives. It was caused in the wake of the confiscation of men, cattle and food by first the German then the British military. Similar actions caused famines in Uganda and French Africa.

And author O’ Grada continues: “Tragically, across much of Africa the departure of European colonizers in the mid-twentieth century saw not an end to famine”. Indeed, from independence days, in the 1950s and 1960s to the present, incidences of hunger and death, of man and beast, are reported, with ghastly images, regularly by the media from the Sudan, Somalia, Ethiopia and others. Why so? Perhaps , it is best to quote the 2014 report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC): “Africa’s food production systems are among the world’s most vulnerable because of extensive reliance on rainfed crop production, high intra- and inter-seasonal climate variability, recurrent droughts and floods that affect both crops and livestock, and persistent poverty that limits the capacity to adapt”.

At the World Food Conference in 1974, the term ‘food security’ was coined. In 1996 the Food and Agriculture Organization defined it as: “Food security exists when all people, at all times, have physical, [social] and economic access to sufficient, safe and nutritious food which meets their dietary needs and food preferences for an active and healthy life”.

A more succinct definition was stated in 2009 by the World Food Program): food security is “a condition that exists when all people, at all times, are free from hunger”. Clearly, we are not there yet. Will we be in the foreseeable future despite global warming? Again let’s refer to that IPCC report: “…there is medium confidence that climate trends have negatively affected wheat and maize production for many regions…[but]… effects on rice and soybean yields have been small in major production regions and globally… [and]..there is also high confidence that warming has benefitted crop production in some high-latitude regions, such as northeast China or the UK…”.